PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

AMERICAN ACADEMY

OF

ARTS AND SCIENCES.

VOL. VII.

FROM MAY, 1865, TO MAY, 1868.

SELECTED FROM THE RECORDS.

BOSTON AND CAMBRIDGE:
WELCH, BIGELOW, AND COMPANY.

18 68.

7

15 H (o

t

PROCEEDINGS

OP THE

AMERICAN ACADEMY

OP

AKTS AND SCIENCES

SELECTED FROM THE RECORDS.

VOL. VII.

Five hundred and fifty-fourth Meetln§^,

August 9, 1865. — Statute Meeting.
The Recording Secretary in the chair.
The following memoirs were presented by title : —

I. Examination of a Hff^dnocarbon- Naphtha, obtained from
the Products of the Destructive Distillation of Lime
Soap. By C. M. Warren and F. H. Storer.

II. Examination of Naphtha from Rangoon Petroleum. By
C. M. Warren and F. H. Storer.

Five hundred and fifty-fifth Meeting.

September 12, 1865. — Adjourned Statute Meeting.
The President in the chair.

The President called the attention of the -Academy to the
recent decease of three of its members : Mr. George Liver-
more, the Treasurer of the Academy ; Bishop Alonzo Potter
of Pennsylvania, of the Associate Fellows ; and Sir William
Jackson Hooker, of the Foreign Honorary Members.

VOL. VII. 1

2 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Mr. Ferrel made the following communication on certain
FormuliB of Interpolation.

The necessity of frequent interpolations in almost all kinds of com-
putations renders it important that the most convenient formulae pos-
sible should be devised for that purpose. The following formula? are
especially designed to facilitate interpolations where a number of them
are to be made at equal intervals between values of a function given or
computed for equal intervals of the variable : —

Let Fy. be any function of x, given or computed, for the equal inter-
vals of a: = — o), a; = 0, a? = £D, a; = 2 a, «fec., and let A'^, A^, A^, «fec.
express the different orders of finite differences. By writing A/ for
^ (ALi + AjO = Aji - ^ Ao^ A/ for J (Ai, + a/) = A,« - ^ L,\
&c., we have,

x^

(1.) F^ = F^^ Arx -^A,x'-^ As

in which

^, = ^(A/-iA,« + ^VA/-Tl^A/ )

-^2 = IT. 2 (^0 tV ^0 ~r -gV A) bFTT ^0 )

(2-) ^4 = 2^^^ (^0* - i Ao'' + jW )

^« ^ 2 • 3 • 4 • 5 • 6 . 0,° ^^' — i V )

^^ = O.^.A .P^.R. 7. „7 (A/ )

The preceding formula may be used for interpolating F^ for any
value of X positive or negative within a certain range, but the greater
the value of x the greater the effect of the neglected orders of differ-
ences upon the interpolated numbers, and if i orders of differences are
used, it may become quite inaccurate if x is taken greater than ^ i a.
If the value of x is confined within the limits of =F s- <", instead of the
preceding formula, we may use the following of only four variable terms
without sensible error : —

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 6

(3.) F, = Fo -^ B,x + B,c,^ -\- B.,x' -^ B,x\

in which

A = - (A/ - i A/ + GV — Ji^ of ^V) A/ — Till A/ ),

CO

j5,= -i-,(A2-TVA^ + ^VA'' ),

'•* -B, = 27^ A,» - (i - tV Of i) A," + tV a/ ),

and in which the maximum possible error E of any interpolated num-
ber arising from neglected terms is only

(5.) F=± (^riTTcj a/ — Fji(TTy A — TTrffVuir A, ).

The constants Bi, B2, &c. are so determined as to make the two pre-
ceding expressions of F^ correspond for the four values of aj = =F | w,
and X = =F ^ ffl ; so that, corresponding at equal intervals of ^w,
they cannot differ much for any intermediate value of x, as is shown
by (5). The advantage of this last formula over the preceding is, that
with only four terms containing the variable you have nearly all the
accuracy of seven or eight terms of the former. But it can only be
used within the limit of ^ o before and after Fq ; so that in interpolat-
ing it requires the constants B^, B2, &c. to be computed for every
interval or given value of F^.

As the unit of x is arbitrary, when the interpolations are made at
equal intervals it can be taken equal to one of the equal parts of x
corresponding to the interpolated values o( F^, and then <o will repre-
sent the number of interpolated intervals contained in one of the origi-
nal intervals ; that is, w — 1 will represent the number of interpola-
tions in each original interval. In this case the value of x used in
interpolating is always one of the numbers ^ 1, ^ 2, q= 3, &c. ; and
if the number of interpolations to each original interval is not too
great, the different terms in the expression of F^ are readily obtained
after the constants B^, B^, &c. have been computed.

For all cases in which the value of x does not exceed 6, that is, in
which w does not exceed 12, the preceding formula may be put into a
form still more convenient for interpolating. The preceding expression
of F.J, for all values of x from — 6 to -|- 6 gives

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

F^a — C ]

+12

F^:& — 5

+ 5

F^:3 — 3

.^B,-\-4.B,:fl6B,-\-UB, ^

F^2-2

— 4

Fmi — 1.

— 3

+16]

0-

+ 5

5

0
1

0
► :f 3 ^3 + 36 ^4 _^3

►3i

0

0

-- 1 .

5 .

^2^6^3 + 28^

This again may be transformed into the following form :

Fq:6-| +6-1 +121

F^& +5 +5

F^:2 +2 — 4

Fq:i J +1 J — 3 J

+16 1 Ol

+ 5 —5

(i3+C)_J[T(iC+i))_^^[,i^A

0 0

+1J -5J

in which

2) =

-M^*

}

^=i^ + 5ir-^*-

O)

}

and in which the minus sign must be used for interpolated values of
F^ preceding Fq, and the plus sign for those following Fq. In the
latter transformations no small terms have been omitted ; so that this
last form is of the same degree of accuracy as the preceding one, and

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 6

it is so arranged that there are only four multii^lications of the con-
stants to be performed by numbers which are small and convenient for
that purpose, in order to obtain any one of the interpolated values of
F,^ whereas in the preceding form there are for the most part ten, the
number being equal to the sum of the exponents of x in (3). This
formula is accurate for all cases in which it is necessary to use eight
orders of differences, and in all ordinary cases in which it is necessary
to use only four or five orders of differences it is quite simple. In
general, it is only necessary to compute the three constants A., B, and
(7, using ^ B for B', for even then the maximum possible error is only
of the order y^jxy A^. This formula is applicable in all cases in which
the number of interpolations does not exceed twelve. If we wish to
interpolate to twelfths, « in the expression of the preceding constants
A, B, C, &c. must be put equal to 12 ; if to tenths, equal to 10 ; and
so for any other number. If we interpolate to twelfths, we must use
(6) from F_Q to -^+6 5 if to tenths, from F_5 to i^+g ; and so on. In
this way we get the middle interpolated number from two sets of con-
stants ; first, by going forward from Fq, and secondly, by going back
from F^, which is the F^ in the formula belonging to the next set of
constants. This furnishes a very good check for the accuracy of the
interpolations in addition to that of the regularity of the differences.
In cases in which a is less than twelve, the formula from F_ ^tx) F^^
would give several of the middle interpolations in duplicate, but it is
unnecessary to take it so as to have mox'e than one.

In interpolating to sixths, it is evident that, instead of putting «
equal to six, and using the formula from F_s to F^^, we can put it
equal to twelve, and use only the functions of F with even subscript
numbers from F_q to F^q. By so doing, we have the advantage of
using the functions i^qi 4 and F:f 2 » which are very simple, since three
of numerical coefficients are ciphers in Fzf^, and two of them in Fz^2-
By putting co = 10, and using these same functions of x, we have a
very convenient formula for interpolating to fifths ; but it does not give
any one of the interpolations in duplicate as a check, which, perhaps,
is always unnecessary where the number of interpolations is so small,
the regularity of the differences being a sufficient check. Also, in
interpolating to fourths, instead of putting &> = 4 and using F^: 2 and
i^'qii, we can put w = 12, and use i^'qio and i^'ips; but it is much
better to put w :=: 8, and use -^q:4 and Fz^^j which, for reasons al-
ready stated, are much more simple. In interpolating to thirds we can

6 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

put o) = 12 and use F^:^, which comprises only the two constants A
and B, and hence is very simple.

As an example of the application of the preceding formula, let it be
required to interpolate the moon's Right Ascension to twelfths, that is,
to every second hour, having the Right Ascension and the differences
given for each day at noon, as follows : —

1867. R.A. A^ A" a3 a* a^ a«

d. h. m. B. ra. e. b. s. s. s. e.

Ap. 1 21 59 38.64 +50 46.58 +23.84 +18.97 +6.09 —2.22 —1.62

2 22 50 25.22 51 29.39 42.81 22.84 3.87 3.75 1.53

3 23 41 54.61 52 35.04 65.65 22.96 0.12 5.68 1.93

With these differences we get from (7), putting © = 12,
-A+B A+B B-C B'+C -^C+B +^C+B

m. s. m. s.

—4 12.3637 +4 13.0129 +.0719 +.0907 —.0043 +.0051
—4 14.8104 4 15.9910 .1354 .1604 .0059 .0065

With these values (6) gives the following, in which the first column
contains the multiples of a few of the last places of — A -\~ B and
A -\- B, or of their complements, when the multiples are negative, the
second, the multiples of ^' — G and B -\- G, or of their complements
when the multiples are negative ; and so on.

R.A. A* A-

.818

.863

.931

i^-6

h.

21

m.

34

25.25

m. 6.

4 11.91

s.

.181

.359

.978

F-,

21

38

37.16

4 12.03

.12

.545

F-,

21

42

49.19

4 12.15

.12

.904

.784

.004

F^

21

47

01.34

4 12.29

.14

.273

.712

F-,

21

51

13.63

4 12.43

.14

.6363

.784

.996

F.,

21

55

26.06

4 12.58

.15

.0129

.728

.005

Fo

21

59

38.64

4 12.75

.17

.026

.637

Fr

22

3

51.39

4 12.91

.16

.039

.728

.995

F,

22

8

4.30

4 13.10

.19

.052

Fs

22

12

17.40

4 13.29

.19

.065

.453

.025

F,

22

16

30.69

4 13.49

.20

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865.

R.A.

Ai

A^

.077

.088

.032)
.904)

F,

h.

22

m.

20

44.18

m. s.

4 13.71

8.

.22

.138

.625

F,

22

24 57.89

.93

.22

.948

.677

.970

F-,

.82

.16

.23

.758

F^

.98

.41

.25

.569

.594

.006

F_s

.39

.67

.26

.379

.458

F-,

.06

.94

.27

.1896

.594

.994

F-,

.00

.22

.28

.9910

.519

.006

Fo

22

50

25.22

.52

.30

.982

.358

F,

.74

.82

.30

.973

.519

.994

F,

.56

.14

.32

.964

Fs

.70

.48

.34

.955

.802

.032

F,

.18

.83

.35

.946

.925

• • •

.104

• • *

F,
F,

.01
.19

.18

• •

.35

• •

In this example the part of the formula (6) depending upon ^^ D
is insensible. By combining the decimal part .640 of #0 i"^ the first
group with the first three columns, we get the decimal part of F^ from
F_e to Fq. Thus .640 4- .818 + .863 + .931 = .252, only the
first two decimals of which need be written down ; also .640 -|- -181
_j_ ,359 _|_ .978 = .158, for which .16 is written ; and so on. From
Fq to Fq the resulting sum of the numbers is written in the line be-
neath the one in which the numbers are written. The two lines in
brackets, the first combined with the decimal part of F^ in the first
group, the second with that of F^ in the second group, both give Fq,
which is also F_ 0 of the second group. A check for the accuracy of
the interpolation, as has been stated, is that these should give the same
result. The last two figures of the interpolated numbers being thus
obtained, and also their differences, as represented in the second group,
after the initial differences of the first group only are once obtained,
the remaining part of the interpolated numbers is readily filled in, as
represented in the first group of the preceding example.

As a second example, let it be required to interpolate the preceding
Right Ascensions to fourths. Putting w ^ 8 in (7), we get from the
given differences

8 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

-A+B A+B B'-C B+C

m. B. m. s. s. e.

—6 18.3465 6 19.8119 0.1522 0.2156

—6 21.8330 6 24.4922 0.2910 0.3748

"With these values (6) gives

R.A.

{

h. m. B. m. 8. B.

.614 .000 #_4 21 34 25.25 12 36.09
.307 .391 F_. 21 47 1.34 12 37.30 1.21
.623 .138 Fo 21 59 38.64 12 38.76 1.46
.248 .000) F2 22 12 17.40 12 40.49 1.73
.668 .000 1 F, 22 24 57.89 12 42.50 2.01
.334 .836 F_2 22 37 40.39 12 44.83 2.33
.984 .501 Fo 22 50 25.22 12 47.48 2.65
.969 .000 F2 23 3 12.70 12 50.49 3.01
Ft 23 16 3.19

The following very convenient method of interpolation was published
several years ago in an imperfect form in the Mathematical Monthly.
The expressions for the constants have been here obtained in a quite
different manner, and are given in a different function of the differ-
ences, which are more exact, and the whole matter is given in an
improved form.

If we put in (1)

(8.) F^ = Fo-\-B,x-j-B,x'-\- Bs x\

and determine Bi, B2, and Bg, so as to make the expression coincide
with (1) when x = ^, a: = |, and a; == 1, we obtain very nearly, re-
instating A^ — ^ A^ for A/, A^ — ^ A^ for A/, &c.,

^3=6^3^A^-AA^ \

The greatest possible error, E, in using (8) with these constants
instead of (1), is only

(9.) E=± (t^W A^ + ttVtt ^' + ttVcf A« )

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865.

9

^a; -^x -^(as-l)?

If we put
(10.)
we obtain from (8)

(11.) 8^ = B^-{-{1x — \)Bo^-\-{Zx' — Zx-\-\)Bs,

which may be put into the following form : —

(12.) <5. = ^ + (a, + 1 — 2 a;) ^ + (^ 0,2 -I- 3 „ 4- 1 4- 3 a;='
— 3 0) a; — 3 x) 0,

in which

^ = - A^

O)

(13.)^=-i, |_A2_iA^+(^4--V . |)A^ + JtA^-^VA« \

G =

\^'

h^'

By this formula we obtain the first differences, di, 82, ds, &c., of the
interpolated numbers, and from them the numbers themselves. The
formula can be used for all values of a ; but when it is taken greater
than 12, the numerical coefficients of ^ and C obtained from (12) for
all values of x are not all small enough to be convenient in computa-
tion. For all values of a not greater than 12, by making some slight
modifications, we can obtain numerical coefficients convenient in com-
putation. The following are some of the forms most frequently used.

For interpolating to thirds, putting « = 3, (12) gives,

.1

(14.)

z=A

+ 11
0\2B

-ij

For interpolating to fourths, putting to = 4, we get

(15.)

82

= A

+ 3

+ 1

— 1

— 3

rB

For interpolating to fifths, putting w = 5, we get

(16.)

82

83 >

85.

VOL. VII

= A

+ 2

+ 1

0

— 1

— 2

2B

+ 11

— 2

> a

-- 1

1—1

1
— 1

^3

+ 1.

+ 2]

— 1

— 2

>3

— 1

+ 2.

10

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

For iuleTpolatiiig to sixtli.s, pulling to = G, we get
5i

(17.)

8,

= A

"5

For interpolating to eighths, putting © = 8, we get

+ 51
+ 3

+ 1

— 1

— 3

— 5J

YB

(18.)

"1

§6

= A

> B

"8 J

For interpolating

^3

(19.)

04

83

For interpolating

Si

82
S3
S4

(20.)

Sio

+ 7
+ 5
+ 3

+ 1

— 1

— 3

— 5

— 7
to tenths, putting w = 10, we get

+ 9
+ 7

+ 5
+ 3

+ 1

— 1

— 3

— 5
. — 7-

— 9
to twelfths, putting co = 12, we get

+ 11
+ 9
+ 7
+
+
+

= A

YB

> =A-\-C

5
3
1
1

3

5

7

9

11 J

+ 5

— 1

— 4

— 4

— 1
+ 5J

+ 7

+ 1

— 3

— 5

— 5

— 3

+ 1

+ 7

+ 6
+ 2

— 1

— 3

— 4

— 4

— 3

— 1
+ 2
+ 6J

+ 9

+ 4

0

— 3

— 5

— 6

— 6

— 5

— 3
0

+ 4
+ 9

>2G.

ysa

y&a

>6 0.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 11

In this last form it was necessary to add the small constant 0 to ^
in order to obtain small and convenient numerical coefficients of the
constant 6 G.

The following is an application of the last form to the example of
the moon's Right Ascension already given. From (13) we obtain,
putting 6) = 12,

A-^G B 6 C

m. 8. s. s.

+4 13.8836 —0.1124 +0.0112

+4 17.4516 —0.1869 +0.0136

With these values of the constants (20) gives the following re-
sults : —

8^ 82 R.A.

.764

.101

K

m,

4

12.749

h.

21

m. B.

59 38.640

.988

.045

82

4

12.916

+.167

22

3 51.389

.213

(.0112)

83

4

13.097

.181

22

8 4.305

.438

.966

S4

4

13.287

.190

22

12 17.402

.663

^944

§5

4

13.491

.204

22

16 30.689

.8876

.933

K

4

13.704

.213

22

20 44.180

.1124

.933

87

4

13.929

.225

22

24 57.884

.337

.944

88

4

14.164

.235

22

29 11.813

.561

.966

89

4

14.411

.247

22

33 25.977

.787

(.9888)

810

4

14.670

.259

22

37 40.388

.012

.045

8u

4

14.941

.271

22

41 55.058

.236

.101

812

4

15.221

.280

22

46 9.999

.944

.122

81

.517

.296

22

50 25.220

.318

.054

82

.824

.307

.737

.692

(.0136)

83

.144

.320

'f

.561

.065

.959

84

.475

.332

.705

.439

.932

85

.823

.347

.181

.8131

.918

\

.182

.359

.004

.1869

.918

87

.557

.375

.186

.561

.932

83

.945

.388

.743

.934

.959

89

.345

.400

.688

.308

(.9864)

8io

.759

.414

.033

.682

.054

811

.189

.429

.792

.056

.122

812

.630

.442

.980

• • «

• • •

• •

• • •

• • •

.610

12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

In the first column the complements .8876, .8131, &c. of the deci-
mal part of B, since it is negative, axe first written down in every
twelfth place, and then immediately under, the decimal part itself, after
which the multiples are readily filled in. In the second column G is
written in one of the blank places of the formula, and its complement
in the other, for the convenience of taking the multiples, and placed in
parentheses to denote that they are not to be used in the summation of
the terms. These two columns then being combined with the decimal
part of the constant A -\- G, gives the decimal part of the seconds in
5S from which 5^ or at least the last places of 5^, are obtained ; and
by means of it the interior places of 8^ are readily filled in, when the
initial number of 8^ is known for the first group only. The first dif-
ferences being thus obtained, the interpolated numbers are readily
found. The last group of the preceding example shows the manner
in which the computation is carried out at first ; after which the re-
maining part is filled in, as shown in the first group. The computation
might be readily carried out by first computing only the last two places
of the differences. These have to be computed for one place more than
the number of places required in the interpolated" resul^, since small
errors in the former might be accumulative in the latter.

In this method of interpolation the regularity of the differences is
not a complete check, since a very small error in the value of B might
not produce a sensible derangement of the differences. There must,
therefore, be a separate check for B, and then the differences furnish a
complete check against errors arising from any other source.

Professor Gray made a communication on a new Water
Lily, Nijmphcea tuberosa, of J. A. Paine, from the western part
of the State of New York, remarkable for its tuberiferous
rootstocks.

Mr. J. I. Bowditch was elected Treasurer, to fill the vacancy
made by the decease of Mr. Livermore.

Mr. T. T. Bouvd was elected a member of the Finance Com:
mittee, to fill the vacancy left at the annual election.

Mr. Charles J. Sprague was appointed, on the nomination of
the President, a member of the Auditing Committee.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 13

DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY,

FROM MAT 28, 1864, TO MAY 30, 1865.

State of Massachusetts.

Nineteenth Report to the Legislature of Massachusetts relating to
the Registry and Return of Births, Marriages, and Deaths in the
Commonwealth for the Year ending December 31, 1860. By Oliver
"Warner, Secretary. 8vo vol. Boston. 1862.

Twentieth Report for 1861 8vo vol. Boston. 1863.

Abstract of the Census of Massachusetts, 1860, from the Eighth
United States Census, with Remarks on the Same. 8vo vol. Bos-
ton. 1863.

Returns of the Railroad Corporations in Massachusetts, together
with Abstracts of the Same, 1860-1863. 4 vols. 8vo. Boston.
1861 - 64.

General Statutes of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts : re-
vised by Commissioners 8vo vol. Boston. 1860.

Reports of Controverted Elections in the House of Representa-
tives of the Commonwealth of Massachusetts from 1780 to 1852.
8vo vol. Boston. 1853.

Acts and Resolves passed by the General Court of Massachusetts
in the Years 1860 - 1864. 5 vols. 8vo. Boston. 1860-64.

Journal and Documents of the Valuation Committee of the Year
1860 ; together with Acts of 1861 to secure a uniform Description
and Appraisal of Estates in the Commonwealth. Published by Oli-
ver Warner, Secretary. 8vo vol. Boston. 1861.

Report to the Governor and Council concerning the Indians of
. the Commonwealth, under the Act of April 6, 1859. By John
Milton Earle, Commissioner. 8vo vol. 1861.

Report of the Joint Committee of 1860 upon the proposed Canal
to unite Barnstable and Buzzard's Bays. 8vo vol. Boston. 1864.

Statistics of the Condition and Products of Certain Branches of
Industry in Massachusetts for the Year ending April 1, 1845. By
John G. Palfrey. 8vo vol. Boston. 1846.

Statistical Information relating to Certain Branches of Industry
.... for the Year ending June 1, 1855. By Francis De Witt. 8vo
vol. Boston. 1856.

Annual Report of the Adjutant-General of the Commonwealth of

14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Massachusetts, with Reports froih the Quartermaster-General, etc.,
for 1861 - 1863. 3 vols. 8vo. Boston. 1862 - 64.
Massachusetts Historical Society.

Collections. Vol. VII. Fourth Series. 8vo. Boston. 1865.
Observatory of Harvard College.

On the Right Ascension of the Pole Star, as determined from Ob-
servation. By Truman Henry Safford, Assistant at the Observatory
of Harvard College. [From the Proceedings of the American
Academy of Arts and Sciences. Vol. VI.] 8vo pamph. Cam-
bridge. 1864.
Museum of Comparative Zoology.

Annual Report of the Trustees of the Museum of Comparative
Zoology at Harvard College, in Cambridge, together with the Re-
port of the Director, 1864. 8vo pamph. Boston. 1865.
Boston Athenaeum.

List of Books added to the Library of the Boston Athenaeum from
December 1, 1863, to December 1, 1864. 8vo pamph. Boston.
Essex Institute.

Proceedings. Vol. III., IV. No. 2-4. 8vo. Salem. 1864.
American Antiquarian Society.

Proceedings of the American Antiquarian Society, at the Annual
Meeting held in Woi-cester, October 21, 1864. 8vo pamph. Bos-
ton. 1864.
Portland Society of Natural History. .

Proceedings. Vol. I. pp. 97 - 128. 8vo. Portland. 1864.
Dartmouth College.

Catalogue of the Officers and Students .... for the Academical
Year 1864-65. 8vo. Hanover, N. H. 1864.

Catalogus Senatus Academici et eorum qui Munera et Officia

Academica gesserunt 8vo. Hanoverae, Neo Hant. 1864.

Editors of American Journal of Science and Arts.

Journal. N. S. Vol. XXX VIII., XXXIX. 8vo. New Haven.
1864-65.
Lyceum of Natural History of New York.

Annals. Vol. VIL No. 13-16. Vol. VIIL No. 1. 8vo.
New York. 1862-63.
Albany Institute.

Transactions. Vol. IV. 8vo. Albany. 1858 - 64.
Society for the Promotion of Useful Arts in the State of New York.
Transactions. Vol. TV. Part 2. 8vo. Albany. 1819.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 15

Columbia College.

Catalogue of the Officers and Students, for the Year 1864 - 65.
8vo. New York. 1864.
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.

Proceedings. 1864. No. 2, 5. 1865. No. 1. 8vo. Phila-
delphia. 1864 - &o.
American Philosophical Society.

Transactions. N. S. Vol. XIII. Part 1. 4to. Philadelphia.
1865.

Proceedings. Vol. IX. No. 71, 72. 8vo. Philadelphia. 1865.
List of the Members of the American Philosophical Society, held
at Philadelphia, for promoting Useful Ivnowledge, formed on the 2d
of January, 1769. .... 8vo pamph. Philadelphia. 1865.

List of the Surviving Members of the American Philosophical
Society, January, 1865, in the Order of their Election to Member-
ship. 8vo pamph. Philadelphia. 1865.
Philadelphia College of Pharmacy.

American Journal of Pharmacy. Ser. 3. Vol. XII., XIII. No.
1,2. 8vo. Philadelphia. 1864-65.
Smithsonian Institution.

Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge. Vol. XIII. 4to. City
of Washington. 1864.

Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections. Vol. V. 8vo. Wash-
ington. 1864.

Annual Report of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian In-
stitution, for the Year 1862. 8vo vol. Washington. 1863.
Department of State.

Papers relating to Foreign Affairs, accompanying the Annual
Message of the President to the First Session of the Thirty-Eighth
Congress. Part I., II. 2 vols. 8vo. Washington. 1864.
Navy Department.

Report of the Secretary of the Navy in relation to Armored Ves-
sels. 8vo vol. Washington. 1864.
Mercantile Library Association of the City and County of San Francisco.
Eleventh and Twelfth Annual Report of the Treasurer and Li-
brarian. 2 pamph. 8vo. San Francisco. 1864-65.
Magnetic Observatory, Toronto, C. W.

Abstracts of Magnetical Observations made at the Magnetical Ob-
servatory, Toronto, Canada West, during the Years 1856 to 1862

16 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

inclusive, and during Parts of tlie Years 1853, 1854, and 1855.
4to vol. Toronto. 1863.

Abstracts of Meteorological Observations .... during the Years
1854 to 1859 inclusive. 4to vol. Toronto. 1864.

Results of Meteorological Observations .... during the Years
1860, 1861, and 1862. 4to vol. Toronto. 1864.
Royal Society of London.

Philosophical Transactions, for the Year 1863. Vol. CLIII.
Part II. For the Year 1864. Vol. CLIV. Part I., II. 4to.
London. 1864.

Proceedings. Vol. XIII. No. 60 - 69. 8vo. London. 1864.

List of Fellows, etc. 1863. 4to pamph. London. 1864.

Report of the Astronomer Royal to the Board of Visitors of
the Royal Observatory, Greenwich. Read at the Annual Visita-
tion of the Royal Observatory, 1864, June 4. 4to pamph. London.
1864.

Astronomical Observations made at the Royal Observatory, Green-
wich, in the Year 1862. 4to vol. London. 1864.

Abstracts of Meteorological Observations made at the Magnetical
Observatory, Toronto, Canada "West, during the Years 1854 to 1859
inclusive. 4to vol. Toronto. 1864.

Results of Meteorological Observations made at the Ma:gnetical
Observatory, Toronto, Canada West, during the Years 1860, 1861,
and 1862. 4to vol. Toronto. 1864.
Royal Institution of Great Britain.

Proceedings. Vol. IV. Part III., IV. 8vo. London. 1864.
Royal Astronomical Society.

Memoirs. Vol. XXXII. 4to. London. 1864.
Royal Horticultural Society.

Proceedings. Voh IV., V. No. 1, 2. 8vo.- London. 1864-65.
British Association for the Advancement of Science.

Report of the Thirty-Third Meeting, held at Newcastle-upon-
Tyne, August and September, 1863. 8vo vol. London. 1864.
Geological Society of London.

Quarterly Journal. Vol. XX., XXI. Part 1. 8vo. London.
1864-65.

List of the Society, November 1st, 1862. 8vo pamph.
Linnean Society of London.

Transactions. Vol. XXIV. Part II. 4to. London. 1863.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 17

Journal of the Proceedings. Zoology, Vol. VII., VIII. No. 29 :
Botany, Vol. VII., VIII. No. 29, 30. 8vo. London. 1863 - 64.

List- of the Linnean Society, 1863. 8vo pamph. London.

Address of George Bentham, Esq., F. R. S., etc. The President
.... Monday, May 25, 1863 : Address . ... on Tuesday, May
24, 1864. 2 pamph. 8vo. London. 1863 - 64.
Zoological Society of London.

Transactions. Vol. V. Part III. 4to. London. 1864.

Proceedings for the Year 1863. Part I., IL, III. 8vo. Lon-
don. 1863.
Chemical Society of London.

Journal. Ser. 2. -Vol. IL, IIL No. 25, 26, 27. 8vo. London.
1864-65.
Society of Arts, Manufactures, and Commerce.

Journal of the Society of Arts and of the Institutions in Union.
Vol. XII. 8vo. London. 1864.
Royal Society of Edinburgh.

Transactions. Vol. XX. - XXni. 4to. Edinburgh. 1853 - 64.

Proceedings. Vol. IV., V. ' No. 59-64. 8vo. Edinburgh. 1863-
64.
Royal Irish Academy.

Transactions. Vol. XXIV. Antiquities, Part I., II : Science,
Part III.: Polite Literature, Part I. 4to. Dublin. 1864.

Proceedings. Vol^VIIL 8vo. DuWin. 1864.

On the Tides of the AiTtic Seas. By the Rev. Samuel Haughton,
M. A., F. R. S., etc. Part I. On the Diurnal Tides of Port Leo-
pold, North Somerset. 4to pamph. Dublin.

On the Reflection of Polarized Light from Polished Surfaces,

Transparent and Metallic. By the Rev. Samuel Haughton

4to pamph. Dublin.

Experimental Researches on the Granites of Ireland. Part III.

On the Granites of Donegal. By the Rev. Samuel Haughton

8vo pamph. London.

Experimental Researches on the Granites of Ireland. Part IV.
On the Granites and Syenites of Donegal : with some Remarks on

those of Scotland and Sweden. By the Rev. Samuel Haughton

8vo pamph. Dublin. 1864.
Royal Dublin Society.

Journal. Vol. IV. No. 31 - 33. 8vo. Dublin. 1864 - 65.
VOL. VII. 3

18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Government of India.

Memoirs of the Geological Survey of Indhi. Vol. III. Part 2 :
Vol. IV. Part 2. ' 8vo. Calcutta. 18G4.

Palaiontologia Indica. Part 3, 2 - 5. 4to. Calcutta. 1864.
Annual Report of the Geological Survey of India and of the
Museum of Geology, Calcutta — Eighth Year, 1863 - 64. 8vo
pamph. Calcutta. 1864.
Academie des Sciences de PInstitut Imperiale de France.
Memoires. Vol. XXXII. 4to. Paris. 1864.
Memoires. Morales et Politiques. Vol. XI. 4to. Paris. 1862.
Comptes Rendus. VoL LVIII., LIX., and LX. No. 1-18.
4to. Paris. 1864-65.
Societe de Geographic. .

Bulletin. Ser. 5. Vol. VI., VII. 8vo. Paris. 1863-64.
Societe Imperiale Zolilogique d'Acclimataiion.

Bulletin. Ser. 2. Vol. I., II. No. 2, 3. 8vo. Paris. 1864-
65.
Societe Academique de Maine et Loire.

Memoires. Vol. XL, XII. 8vo. Angers. 1862.
Academie Imperiale des Sciences, etc., Caen.

Memoires. 8vo vol. Caen. 1864.
Societe Linneeiie de Normandie.

Memoires. Vol. XIV., XV. Annees 1862 - fo'd. 1863 - 64.
4to. Caen. 1864-65. ^

Bulletin. Vol. VIII. Annee 1862- 63. 8vo. Caen. 1864.
Societe Imperiale des Sciences Naturelles de Cherbourg.

Memoires. Vol. IX., X. 8vo. Paris and Cherbourg. 1863-64.
Societe de Physique et d'Histoire JVaturelle de Geneve.

Memoires. Vol. XVII. Part I. 4to. Geneva. 1863.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Bern.

Mittheilungen aus dem Jahre 1863. 8vo. Bern. 1863.
Societe des Sciences Naturelles de Neuchatel.

Bulletin. Vol. VI. Cahier 3. 8vo. Neuchatel. 1864.
St. Gallische Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft.

Bericht uber die Thiitigkeit, 1862 - 63. 8vo vol. St. Gullen.
1863.
Schweizerische Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Verhandlungen. 47 Versammlung zu Samaden, den 24, 25, und
26 Aug., 1863. 8vo vol. Chur.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 19

Konigl. Preussische Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin.

Abhandlungen. 1863. 4to. Berlin. 1864.

Monatsberichte. 1863. Svo. Berlin. 1864.
Universitas Frid. Gail. Rhenana, Bounce.

Academical Dissertations and Indexes. Bonn. 1863.
NaturJiistorischer Verein der Preuss. Rheinlande und Wesfphalens.

Verhandlungen. Vol. XX. 8vo. Bonn. 1863.
Naturforschender Verein in Briinn.

Verhandlungen. Vol. I. 1862. 8vo. Brunn. 1863.
Kaiserl. Leopoldinisch- Garolinisch Deutsche Akademie der Naturforscher.

(Academia Ctesarea Leopoldino-Carolina Germanica Naturas
Curiosorum.)

• Nova Acta. Vol. XXX., XXXI. 4to. Dresden. 1864.
Naturwissenschafdiche Gesellschaft Isis zu Dresden.

Sitzungs-Berichte. 1863. 8vo. Dresden. 1864.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Emden.

Neunundvierzigster Jahresbericht. 1863. 8vo. Emden. 1864.

Kleine Schriften. XI. 4to. Emden. 1864.
Zoologische Gesellschaft.^ Frankfurt a. M.

Der Zoologische Garten. Vol. V. Svo. Frankfort-on-the-Main.
1864.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft zu Freiburg im Briesgau.

Berichte liber die Verhandlungen. Vol. III. Part 2. 8vo. Frei-
burg i. Br.
Oherlausitzische Gesellschaft zu Gorlitz.

Neues Lausitzisches Magazin. Vol. XLI. 8vo. Gorlitz. 1864.
Konigl. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Gottingeh.

Abhandlungen. Vol. XI. 4to. Gottingen. 1864.

Nachrichten von der Georg-Augusts-Universitat und der Konio-].
Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften vom Jahre 1863, 1864. 2 vols.
16mo. Gottingen. 1864-65.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft zu Halle.

Abhandlungen. Voh VII., VIII. 4to. Halle. 1863-64.
Konigl. Physikcdisch- Okonomische Gesellschaft zu Konigsherg.

Schriften. Vol. IV. 4to. Konigsberg. 1863.
Konigl. Sachsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Leipzig.

Abhandlungen. Math.-Phys. Classe. Vol. VI., VII. pp. 1-399.
Svo. Leipsic. 1864.

Berichte iiber die Verhandlungen. Philol.-Histor. Classe. Vol.

20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

XV., XVI. No. 1. Math.-Phys. Classe. Vol. XV. No. 1, 2.
8vo. Leipsic. 1863-64.
Mannheimer Vereinfilr Naturkunde, Mannheim.

Neunundzwanzigster Jahresbericht. 16movol. Mannheim. 1863.
Konigl. Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften, Mitnchen.

Abhandlungen. Philos.-Philol. Classe. Vol. X. Part 1. 4to.
Munich. 1864.

Sitzungsberichte. 1863. Vol.11. Part 2 - 4. 1864. Vol.1.
8vo. Munich. 1863 - 64.

Annalen der Konigl. Sternwarte. Vol. XIII. Supplementband,
IV. 8vo. Munich. 1863-64.

Die Stellung Venedigs in der "Weltgeschichte. Rede gehalten
von Dr. Geo. Martin Thomas. 4to pamph. Munich. 1864.

Ueber die Stellung und Bedeutung der pathologischen Anatomie.
Festrede vorgetragen von Dr. T. Biihl. 4to pamph. Munich. 1863.
Ueber den BegrifF der burgerlichen Gesellschaft. Vortrag ge-
halten von Dr. W. H. Richl. 4to pamph. Munich. 1864.

Konig Maximilian II. und die Wissenschaft. Rede gehalten in
der Festsitzung der k. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Miinchen
am 30 Marz 1864, von I. v. Dollinger. 8vo pamph. Munich. 1864.
Naturhistonsche Gesellschaft zu Nurnherg.

Abhandlungen. Vol. III. Part 1. 8vo. Nurnherg. 1864.
Offenbacher Vereinfilr Naturkunde, Offenhach.

Funfter Bericht. 8vo vol. Offenbach am Main. 1864.
K. K. Sternwarte zu Prag.

Magnetische und Meteorologische Beobachtungen. Vol. XXIV.
4to. Prague. 1864.
Zoologisch-Mineralogischer Verein in Regenshurg.

Correspondenz-Blatt. Vol. XVII. 16mo. Regenshurg. 1863.
Abhandlungen. Vol. IX. 8vo. Regenshurg. 1864.
Entomologischer Verein zu Stettin.

Entomologische Zeitung. Vol. XXV. 8vo. Stettin. 1864.
Amtlicher Bericht iiber die acht und dreissigste Versammlung
Deutscher Naturforscher und Arzte in Stettin im Sept. 1863.
Herausgegeben von den Geschaftsfiihrern derselben Dr. C. A. Dohrn
und Dr. Behm. 4to vol. Stettin. 1864.
Kaiserliche Akademie der Wissenschaften, Wien.

Denkschriften. Matli.-Naturw. Classe. Vol. XXII. 4to. Vienna.
1864.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 21

Sitzungsberichte. Math.-Naturw. Classe. Vol. XLVII., XLVIII.,
XLIX. No. 1. Philos.-Histor. Classe. Vol. XLII., XLIIL,
XLIV., XLV. No. 1. 8vo. Vienna. 1863 - 64.

Anzeiger. Math.-Naturw. Classe. Vol. I., II. No. 1 - 20.
8vo. Vienna. 1864-65.
K. K. Geographische Gesellschaft, Wien.

Mittheilungen. Vol. VI. Roy. 8vo. Vienna. 1862.
K. K. Geologische Seichsanstalt, Wien.

Jahrbuch. Vol. XIII., XIV. No. 3, 4. 8vo. Vienna. 1863.

Die Fossilen Mollusken des Tertiasr-Beckens von Wien, von
Dr. Moritz Homes. Vol. II. No. 5, 6. Bivalven. 4to. Vienna.
1865.
K. K. Zoologisch-Botanische Gesellschaft, Wien.

Verhandlungen. Vol. XIII. 8vo. Vienna. 1863.

Monographic der Oestriden von Friedrich Brauer. 8vo vol. Vi-
enna. 1863.
Academie Royale des Sciences, ^c, de Belgique, de Bruxelles.

Memoires. Vol. XXVIII., XXXIV. 4to. Brussels. 1854 - 64.

Memoires Couronnes, &c. Vol. XXII., XXVI., XXXI. 4to.
Brussels. 1848, 1855, 1863.

Memoires Couronnes. Col. in 8vo. Vol. XV., XVI. 8vo.
Brussels. 1863 - 64.

Bulletin. Ser. 2. Vol. XV -XVII. 8vo. Brussels. 1863-64.

Annuaire. Vol. XXX. 18mo. Brussels. 1863 - 64.
Observatoire Royale de Bruxelles.

Annales. Vol. XVI. 4to. Brussels. 1864.

Annuaire. Vol. XXXI. 18rao. Brussels. 1863.
Academie Royale des Sciences a Amsterdam.

Verhandelingen, Afdeeling Letterkunde. Vol. II. 4to. Am-
sterdam. 1863.

Verslagen en Mededeelingen. Afd. Letterkunde. Vol. VII. Afd.
Natuurkunde. Vol. XV., XVI. 8vo. Amsterdam. 1863 - 64.

Jaarboek voor 1862. 8vo. Amsterdam.

De Lebetis Materie et Forma ejusque Tutela in Machinis Vaporis
Vi agentibus. Carmen Didascalicum, cujus Auctori Josepho Giaco-

letti Pedemontano, Certaminis Poetici Praemium adjudicatum est

IX Martii, 1863. 8vo. Amsterdam. 1863.
Netherlands Government.

Flora Batava, of Afbeeldingen Beschrijving van Nederlandsche
Gewassen. Aflevering 184, 187 - 189. 4to. Amsterdam.

22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Carte Geologlque des Pays-Bas. No. 3, 4, 8, 11, 12, 15 - 20. 11
Charts. Haarlem.
Hollandsche Maatschappij der Wettenschappen te Haarlem.

Natuurkundige Verhandelingen. Serie 2. Vol. XVIIL, XIX.,
XXL Part X. 4to. Haarlem. 1863-64.
Koninklijh Nederlandsch Meteorologisch Instituut.

Meteoroloofische Waarnemingen in Nederland en Zigne Bezittin-

D

gen Long 4to vol. Utrecht. 1864.

Observatoire d' Utrecht.

Recherches Astronomiques de I'Observatoire d'Utrecht, publides
par M. Hoek, Dir. de I'Obs. Livr. IL 4to. Tlie Hague. 1864.
Recherches sur la Quantitc d'Ether contenue dans les Liquides,

par M. Hoek et A. C. Oudemans Addition a la Premiere

Livraison des Recherches Astron. de I'Obs. d'Utrecht. 4to. The
Hague. 1864.
Academic Imperiale des Sciences de St. Petershoiirg.

Memoires. Ser. 7. Vol. V. No. 2-9. Vol. VI. 4to. St.
Petersburg. 1862-63.

Bulletin. Vol. V. No. 3-8: Vol. VL No. 1-5 : Vol. VH. No.
1-2. 4to. St. Petersburg. 1863. ■ '

Administration of Mines of Russia.

Annales de I'Observatoire Physique Central de Russie. 1860,
No. 1, 2 : 1861, No. 1, 2. 4to. St. Petersburg. 1863 - 64.
Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscou.

Bulletin. 186S. No. 3, 4: 1864. No. 1. 8vo. Moscow.
1863-64.
Naturforschender Verein zu Riga.

Correspondenzblatt. Vol. XIV. 8vo. Riga. 1864.
Kongel. Danske Videnshabernes Selskab, Kjobenhavn.

Oversigt. Forhandlinger. 1862-1863. 8vo. Copenhagen.
1862-63.
Royal Society of Northern Antiquaries, Copenhagen.

Notices of the Life and Writings of Carl Christian Rafn, Perma-
nent Secretary of the Royal Society of Northern Antiquaries. By
Laurent Etienne Borring. 8vo paraph. Copenhagen. 1864.
Kongel. Norske Frederiks Universitet, Ghristiama.

Aarsberetning for 1862. 16mo pamph. Christiania. 1863.
Forhandlinger i Videnskabs-Selskabet i Christiania. 1858-63.
8vo. Christiania. 1859-64.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 23

Index Scholai'um. 1863. 2 pamph. 4to. Christiania. 1864.

Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne. Udgives af den physio-
graphiske Forening i Christiania ved M. Sars og Th. Kjerulf. Vol.
XIII. Part 1-3. 8vo. Christiauia. 1863 - 64.

Om Snebrseen Folgefon af S. A. Sexe. Udgivet som Universi-
tetsprogranifor an det Halvaar 1864. 4to pamph. Christiania. 1864.

Aegyptische Chronologic. Ein kritischer Versuch von J. Lieblein.

.... Herausseseben von der Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu

... •

Ciiristiania. 8vo vol. Christiania. 1863.

Ovei'sigt af Norges Echinodermer ved Dr. Michael Sars. Udgiven
af Videnskabsselskabet i Christiania. 8vo vol. Chi-istiania. 1861.

Resultate Magnetischer, Astronomischer and Meteorologischer
Beobachtungen auf einer Reise nach dem Ostlichen Sibirien in den
Jahren 1828-1830 von Christoph Hansteen und Lieutenant Due.
4to pamph. Christiania. 1863.

Om de Geologiske Forhold paa Ky^tstraskningen af Nordre Ber-

genhaus Amt. af M. Irgens og Th. Hiortdal. Efter det academiske

CoUegiums Foranstaltning udgivet som Universitetsprogram for andet

Halvaar 1864 ved Dr. Th. Kjerulf. 4to pamph. Christiania. 1864.

Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps Akademien.

Ofversigt af Kongl. Vetenskaps Akademien Forhandlinger. Vol.
XX. 8vo. Stockholm. 1863.

Meteorologiska lakttagelser i Sverige utgivne af Kong. Svenska
Vetenskaps-Akademien af Er. Edlund. Vol. IV. 1862. 8vo.
Stockholm. 1864.
Regia Societas Scientiarum, Upsaliensis.

Nova Acta. Ser. 3. Vok V. Part 1. 4to. Upsal. 1864.

Upsala Universitets Arsskrift. 1863. 8vo. Upsal. 1863.
Royal Observatory of Upsal.

Refractors-Beobachtungen der K. Universitats Sternwarte in Up-
sala vom Februar 1862 bis Januar 1864. 8vo vol. Upsal. 1864.
Real Academia de Ciencias Exactas, etc., Madrid.

Memorias, Vol. II. Ser. 1. Ciencias Exactas, Vol. I. Part 2 :
' Vol. III. Ser. 2. Ciencias Fisicas, Vol. I. Part 3 : Vol. VI. Ser. 2,
Ciencias Fisicas, Vol. 11. Part 1. 4to. Madrid. 1863.

Resumen de las Actas .... en el Ano Academico de 1861 -
1862. 12mo. Madrid. 1863.

Libros del Saber de Astronomia del Rey D. Alfonso X de Cas-
tilla, copilados, antados y comentados, por Don Manuel Rico y Sino-
bas. 2 vols, folio. Madi-id. 1863.

24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Ohscri'atorio (h Marina dr. S-ni Fcrnnndn, Cadiz.

Alraanaque Nautico para ei Aio IboG. bvo. Cadiz. 1864.
Accademia della Scienze delV Istituto de Bologna.

Memorie. Vol. X., XI., XII. Serie 2. Vol. I., II. 4to. Bo-
logna. 1859, 1861, 1862.

Rendiconto delle Session! dell' Accademia — Anno Accademico
1860 - 61, 1861 - 62, 1862 - 63. 8vo. Bologna. 1861 - 63.
Societa Reale di Napoli.

Atti deir Accademia delle Scienze, Fisiche e Matematiche. Vol. I.
4to. Naples. 1863.

Rendiconto. Vol. II. Part 8-12: Vol. III. Part 1, 2. 4to.
Naples. 1863 - 64.
Reale Istituto d' Incorriaggiamento di Agricoltura, Arti e Manvfatture
in Sicilia.
Ser. 3. Vol. I. No. 1-6. 8vo. Palermo. 1863.
Prof. George P. Bond.

List of the New Nebulae and Star-Clusters seen at the Observa-
tory of Harvard College, 1847 - 1863. 8vo pamph. Cambridge.
1863.
» On the New Form of the Achromatic Object-Glass introduced by
Steinheil. 8vo pamph. Cambridge. 1863.

Report of the Committee of the Overseers of Harvard College
appointed to visit the Observatory in the Year 1863 : together with
the Report of the Director, submitted January 28, 1864. 8vo
pamph. Boston. 1864.
Nathaniel B. Shurtleff, M. D.

Calendar for the Hebrew Years 5622 - 5660 : being also for the
Years of Our Lord 1861 - 1900. — Printed for the Use of Ineffable
Freemasons. — 8vo pamph. Boston. 1863.

Report of the Committee of the Overseers of Harvard College
appointed to visit the Library for the Year 1863 : together with the
accompanying Documents. Submitted January 28, 1864. 8vo
pamph. Boston. 1864.
Reuben D. Mussey, M. D., etc.

Health: Its Friends and Its Foes. 12mo vol. Boston. 1863.
J. Mason Warren, M. D.

Recent Progress in Surgery. — The Annual Address delivered
before the Massachusetts Medical Society, May 25, 1864. 8vo vol.
Boston. 1864.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 25

Henry Bryant., M. D.

Traite El^nientaire de Physique. Par E. Peclet. A!" Edition.
2 vols. 8vo. Plates 1 vol. Paris. 1847.

LeQons de Physique de I'Ecole Polytechnique. Par J. B. Pu-
joulx. 8vo vol. Paris. 1805.

Elements de Chimie Generale avec Figures sur Bois intercalees
dans le Texte. Par E. Verguin. 8vo vol. Lyons. 1845.

Precis Elementaire de Physique. Par E. Soubeirati. 2^ Edition.
8vo vol. Paris. 1844.

Nouvelles Manipulations Chimiques Simplifiees ou Laboratoire
Economique de I'Etudiant. Par H. Violette. 2* Edition. 8vo vol.
Paris. 1847.

Le9ons de Chimie Elementaire appliquees aux Arts Industriels,
et faites le Dimanche a I'Ecole Municipale de Rouen. Par M. J.
Girardin. S*' Edition. 2 vols. 8vo. Paris. 1846.

Chimie Medicale. Traite de Chimie consideree dans ses Applica-
tions a la Medecine tant Theoriques que Pratiques. Par R. De
Grosourdy. 2 vols. 8vo. Paris. 1838-39.
Samuel Kneeland, M. D.

The Merchant's and Banker's Assistant. By B. F. Foster. 8vo
vol. Boston. 1856.

A Treatise on Commercial Calculations on entirely New Princi-
ples. By Henry Ernst. 8vo vol. New Orleans. 1857.

Interest Tables at Five per Cent. By William Birkiu. 16mo
vol. Derby (Eng.) 1833.
J. D. Whitney.

Geological Survey of California. Palaeontology, Vol. I. 4to vol.
Philadelphia. 1864.
A. R. Spofford.

Catalogue of Additions made to the Library of Congress from
December 1, 1863, to December 1, 1864. 8vo. Washington. 1864.
Col. J. D. Graham.

Annual Report of Col. J. D. Graham of the Corps of Engineers,
for the Year 1863 — Survey of the Northern and Northwestern
Lakes. 8vo vol. Washington.

Annual Report of Brev. Lieut.-Col. J. D. Graham, Major of U. S.
Top. Eng., for the Year 1858, on the Improvement of the Harbors
of Lake Michigan, St. Clair, Erie, Ontario, and Champlain. 8vo
vol. Washington. 1859.
VOL. VII. 4

26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Prof. Joseph Winlock, U. JS. N.

Tables of Mercury, for the Use of the American Ephemeris and
Nautical Almanac. By Joseph Winlock, Pi-of. Math. U. S. Navy.
4to pamph. Washington. 1864.

Tables of Melpomene, by Schubert. Computed for the American
Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac under the Superintendence of

Comm. Charles Henry Davis, U. S. N 4to vol. Washington.

1860.

Almanac Catalogue of Zodiacal Stars. Printed for the Use of
the American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac. 4to pamph
Washington. 1864.

American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac for the Year 1866.
Royal 8vo vol. Washington. 1864.

Supplement to the American Ephemeris for 1866 — Asteroids for '
the Year 1865. Royal 8vo pamph.
Hon. Charles Sumner.

Population of the United States in 1860 : Compiled from the
Original Returns of the Eighth Census, under the Direction of the
Secretary of the Interior. By Joseph C. G. Kennedy, Suj)!. of
Census. 4to vol. Washington. 1864.

Report of the Commissioner of Patents for the Year 1861 — Arts
and Manufactures. Vol. I., II. 8vo. Washington. 1863.

Report of the Superintendent of the Coast Survey, showing the
Progress of the Survey during the Year 1862. 4to vol. Wash-
ington. 1864.

Statistics of the Foreign and Domestic Commerce of the United

States Communicated by the Secretary of the Treasury, in

Answer to a Resolution of the Senate of the United States, March
12,' 1863. 8vo vol. Washington. 1864.
Alexander Agassiz.

Embryology of the Starfish. [From Vol. V. of L. Agassiz's Con-
tributions to the Natural History of the United States.] 4to pamph.
Cambridge. 1864.
William S. Sullivant, LL. D., etc.

Icones Muscorum, or Figures and Descriptions of most of those
Mosses peculiar to Eastern North America which have not been
heretofore figured With one Hundred and Twenty-nine Copper-
plates. Royal 8vo vol. Cambridge. 1864.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 27

F. W. Putnam and A. S. Packard, Jr.

Notes on the Habits of some Species of Humble Bees, and on
the Leaf-Cutting Bee. By F. W, Putnam.

The Humble Bees of New England and their Parasites : with
Notices of a New Species of Anthophorabia and a New Genus of
ProctotrupidiB : by A. S. Packard, Jr. [From the Proc. of the Essex
Inst. Vol. IV.] 8vo pamph. Salem.
Hev. George F. HasMns.

Report Historical, Statistical, and Financial of the House of the
Angel Guardian. From the Beginning in 1851 to October, 1864.
8vo pamph. Boston. 1864.
E. B. Elliott.

On the Military Statistics of the United States of America. [In-
ternational Statistical Congress at Berlin, V. Session, from the 6th
to the 12th September, 1863.] 4to pamph. Berlin. 1863.
Hon. Alexander H. Rice.

Report of the Commissioner of Agriculture for the Year 1863.
8vo vol. Washington. 1863.

Report of the Commissioner of Internal Revenue on the Opera-
tions of the Internal Revenue System for the Year ending June 30,
1864. 8vo vol. Washington. 1865.

Report of the Secretary of the Treasury on the Commerce and
Navigation of the United States, for the Fiscal Year ending June 30,
1862. 8vo vol. Washington. 1864.

Report of the Secretary of the Treasury on the Statistics of the
Foreign and Domestic Commerce of the United States. 8vo vol.
Washington. 1864.

Letter of the Secretary of State transmitting a Report on the
Commercial Relations of the United States with Foreign Countries,
for the Year ended September 30, 1863. 8vo vol. Washington.
1865.

Acts and Resolutions of the First Session of the Thirty-Eighth
Congress, begun on Monday, December 7, 1863, and ended on Mon-
day, July 4, 1864. 8vo vol. Washington. 1864.
William J. Rhees.

Manual of Public Libraries, Institutions, and Societies in the
United States, and British Provinces of North America. 8vo vol.
Boston. 1859.
George C. Rand and A. Avery.

Specimen Book. 8vo vol. Boston. 1865.

28 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

J. H. Shedd and William Edson.

Suggestions on Ventilation. 8vo vol. Boston. 1865.
Prof. J. J. Haldemann.

Proceedings of the Entomological Society of Philadelphia, Vol.
I. -III. No. 2. 8vo. Philadelphia. 1861-1864.
George H. Thurston.

Directory of Pittsburg and Allegheny Cities, etc., for 1864, 1865.
Svo vol. Pittsburg, Pa. 1864.
Sir W. E. Logan.

Geological Survey of Canada — Figures and Descriptions of Ca-
nadian Organic Remains. Decade II. Graptolites of the Quebec
Group. By James Hall. 8vo vol. Montreal.
T. Sterry Hunt.

On the History of Eozoon Canadense. 8vo pamph. Montreal.
1865.
Admiral W. H. Smyth, K. S. F., etc., and Dr. Lee.

Sidereal Chromatics : being a Reprint, with Additions, from the
"Bedford Cycle of Celestial Objects," and its " Hartwell Continua-
tion," on the Colors of Multiple Stars. By Admiral W. H. Smyth,
K. S. F., etc. 8vo vol. London. 1864.
Sir J. F. W. Herschel, Bart., K. H., F. R. S., etc.

General Catalogue of Nebulte and Clusters of Stars, arranged in
order of Right Ascension and reduced to the common Epoch,
1860.0 (with Precessions computed from the Epoch 1860.0).
[From the Philos. Trans. Part I. 1864.] 4to pamph. London.
1864.
Prof. A. C. Ramsay, F. R. S., ^c.

Address delivered at the Anniversary Meeting of the Geological
Society of London, on the 19th of February, 1864. By Prof.
A. C. Ramsay .... the President. Svo pamph. London.
1864.
Rev. Samuel Haughton, M. A., F. R. S., S^c.

On the Reflexion of Polarized Light from Polished Surfaces,
Transparent and Metallic. [From Philos. Trans. 1863, p. 81.]
4to pamph. London.

On the Tides of the Arctic Seas. — Part I. On the Diurnal Tides
of Port Leopold, North Somerset. [From Philos. Trans. 1863,
p. 243.] 4to pamph. London.

Dublin Quarterly Journal of Science Edited by Rev. Sam-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 12, 1865. 29

0

uel Haughton. Vol. IV., No. 16 ; Vol. V., No. 17. 8vo. London.
1864, 1865.
The Editors.

The Reader — A Review of Literature, Science, and Art. Vol.
IIL, IV., V. No. 1-12. 4to. London. 1864-1865.
Elie de Beaumont.

Tableau des Donnees Numeriques qui fixent 159 Cercles de Re-
seau Pentagonal. [Extr. des C. R. de I'Acad. des Sc. Tome 57.
20 Juil. 1863.] 4to. Paris.

Tableau .... qui fixent les 362 Points principaux du Reseau

Pentagonal. [Extr. des C. R Tome 58. Fevr. 1864.]

4to. Paris.
Dr. E. Regel.

Enumeratio Plantarum in Regionibus Cis-et Transiliensibus a CI.
Semenovio Anno 1857 Collectarum (cum Tabula) Auctoribus E.
Regel. et F. ab Herder. 8vo pamph. Moscow. 1864.

Reisen in der Siiden von Ostsibirien im Auftrage der Kais. Russ.
Geogr. Gesell. ausgefuhrt in den Jahren, 1855 - 1859, durch G.
Radde. Botanische Abtheilung, Monopetalae bearbeitet von F. v.
Herder. Vol. III. Part I. 8vo. Moscow. 1864.
Ad. Quetelet.

Observations des Phenomenes Periodiques. 1861, 1862. 4to
pamph. Brussels.
Em. Quetelet.

Sur le Mouvement Proupre de Quelques Etoiles ; [Extr. des
Mem. Acad. Roy. de Belgique, T. 34.] 4to pamph. Brussels.
1864.
Dr. Rudolf Wolf, Prof, der Astronomie.

Die Sonne und ihre Flecken. Ein Vortrag vor gemischtem Pub-
likum gehalten am 10 Januar 1861. 16mo pamph. Zurich. 1861.
Anders Johan 3Ialmgren.

Kritisk Ofversight af Finlands Fisk-Fauna. Akademish Af hand-
ling. 8vo pamph. Helsingfors. 1863.
Elias Fries.

Monograpliia Hymenomycetum Sueciae. Vol. II. 8vo. Upsal.
1863.
J. Japetus Sm. Steenstrup.

Ora SkjoBvheden hos Flynderne og navnlig om Vandringen af det
ovre Oie fra Blinsiden til Oiesiden tvers igjennem Hovedet, m. m.

30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Bidrag til rigtigere Opfattelse af Flyndernes Bygning. 8vo vol.
Copenhagen. 1864.
A. T. Kupffer, Directeur.

Compte-Rendu Annuel adresse a S. Exc. M. de Reutern, Min.
des Finances par le Directeur de I'Observatoire Physique Cen-
tral .... pour I'annee 1861-1863. 3 pamph. 4to. St. Peters-
burg. 1862-1864.
Ferdinand Miiller.

Considerations sur la prevision des tempetes et sp^eialement sur
celles du 1 au 4 Decembre 1863. Par Ferdinand Miiller, Assist, a
rObs. Phys. Centr. (Suppl. aux Ann. pour 1861.) 4 pamph. St.
Petersburg. 1864.
Georg Bitter von Frauenfeld.

Bericht liber eine Reise durch Schweden und Norwegen im Som-
mer 1863. 8vo pamph. Vienna.

Vorlaufige Aufzahlung der Arten der Gattungen Hydrobia Htm.
und Aranicola Gld Hldm in der kaiserlichen und in Cuming's Samm-
lung 8vo pamph. Vienna. 1863.

Ueber eine merkwiirdige Verfarbung eines Gimpels 8vo

pamph. Vienna. 1863.

Beitrag zur Metamorphosengescliichte aus dem Jahre 1862. 4
Feb. 1862, und 11 Nov. 1863. 2 pamph. 8vo. Vienna. 1863. .

Ueber gallenbildende Insekten in Australien. Briefliche Mitthei-

lung von H. L. Schrader in Sidney 8vo pamph. Vienna.

1863.

Bemerkungen tiber Strigops habroptilus, eingcsendet aus Canter-
bury auf Neuseeland, von Dr. Julius Haast — Uebersetzt aus dem
Englischen, von Georg Ritter von Frauenfeld. 8vo pamph. Vi-
enna. 1863.
Dr. F. P. Liharz ik.

The Law of Increase and the Structure of Man — Prospectus,
with the fac-simile of Alexander de Humboldt's Letter to the Author,
and Three Tables. 4to pamph. Vienna. 1862.
M. Hoeh et A. C. Oudemans.

Sur les Contractions dans les Melanges de Liquides. 4to pamph.
The Hague. 1864.
H. de Saussnre.

Recherches sur les Fonctions du Systeme Nerveux dans les Ani-
maux Articulcs. Par M. Yersiu, Prof. 8vo pamph. Lausanne.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : OCTOBER 10, 1865. 31

Memoire sur Quelques Faits relatifs h la Stridulation des Orthop-
teres et h leur distribution Geographique en Europe. Par M. Yer-
sin, Prof. 8vo pamph. Lausanne.
Giamhattista Dattino.

Arringhe Officiose dell' Avocato Giarabattista Dattino gia Asses-
sore Demaniale della Provincia di Chieti Socio di diversi Accade-
mie. 8vo vol. Naples. 1863.
Prof. Giovanni Capellini.

Studi Stratigrafici e Paleontologici sull' Infralias nelle Montagne
dell Golfo della Spezia, con due Tavole. 4to pamph. Bologna.
1862.

Carta Geologica dei dintorni dell Golfo della Spezia e Val di
Masra Inferiore. Bologna. 1863.

Five Hundred and fifty-sixth Meeting.

October 10, 1865. — Adjourned Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Dr. Francis Wayland of Providence, of the
Associate Fellows ; also among the Foreign Honorary Mem-
bers, of Sir John William Lubbock, Sir William Rowan Ham-
ilton, the astronomer Encke, Admiral William H. Smyth, and
Admiral Lois Isidore Duperrey.

Mr. John C. Lee was elected Treasurer of the Academy to
fill the vacancy left by the declination of Mr. Bowditch, who
was elected at the previous meeting.

Mr. Ferrel presented the following paper : —

On an Annual Variation in the Daily Mean Level of the

Ocean, and its Cause.

In discussing a large number of tidal observations, made at Brest,.
one of the results obtained is an annual variation of the mean level
of the ocean which cannot be explained by the hitherto recognized
changes of mean level. The mean height obtained for each month of
the year is given in the following table, in which each monthly mean

32

PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

is the result of about 800 nbs'^rvr^t'oif; of IvVli v;"it"T nnrl .i-? many of
low Welter. The oiily eiiii.-e.-> wliieii have bceii .--uppujeJ lu aiiect tlie
mean level are a small astronomical term depending upon the sun's
dechnation, the variation of atmospheric pressure, and the winds. The
effect of the astronomical term is equal to a cos 2 Z, in which a is a func-
tion of the latitude of the port, and I is the sun's longitude. The effect
of the variation of atmospheric pressure is equal to 13™.568 (P — ^),
in which p is the observed barometric pressure of the atmosphere in
meters, and P the annual mean pressure. The coefficient 13^.568 is
assumed upon the hypothesis that the variation of the mean level of
the ocean at any place is to the variation of the barometric column as
the specific gravity of mercury is to that of water. M. Dausy ob-
tained lo'^.S for this coefficient from 150 observations of the tides and
of atmospheric pressure, made at Lorient, but Mr. Lubbock from ob-
servations at Liverpool obtained only ILl for that port. The theoreti-
cal value is perhaps more nearly correct than either of the other two.
Li the second numerical column of the following table is given the
atmospheric pressure at Paris in millimetres for each month of the
year, taken from Kaemtz's Meteorology, which is assumed to vary but
little from the pressure at Brest, so that it may be used in computing
the effect of the variation of pressure upon the mean level of the sea
at that port. The following variations of mean level corrected for the
astronomical term and variation of atmospheric pressure must be the
effect of the winds, and other causes. The value of a in the astronomi-
cal term for the latitude of Brest is — .007. The corrections and the
corrected monthly mean heigths of the ocean are also given in the fol-
lowing table.

Month.

Monthly Mean

Atmospheric

Astronomical

Atmospheric

Corrected

Heights.

Pressure.

Correction.

Correction.

Mean Heights.

m.

mm.

4.437

756.46

4.437

January

+ 0.020

+ 2.40

— 0.005

-t- 0.032

-1- 0.047

February

— 0.016

+ 2.63

-t- 0.003

-h 0.035

+ 0.022

March

— 0.054

— 0.13

->r 0.007

— 0.002

— 0.049

April

— 0.033

— 1.28

+ 0.005

— 0.017

— 0.045

May

— 0.019

— 0.85

— 0.003

— 0.011

— 0.033

June

— 0.061

+ 0.82

— 0.007

-t- 0.011

— 0.057

July

— 0.043

-t- 0.06

— 0.005

-t- 0.001

— 0.047

Aufjust

— 0.030

+ 0.28

-f- 0.003

■\- 0.004

— 0.023

September

— 0.005

-1- 0.15

+ 0.007

+ 0.002

+ 0.004

October

-f- 0.076

— 2.04

+ 0.005

— 0.027

+ 0.0.54

November

+ 0.071

— 0.70

— 0.003

— 0.010

-f- 0.058

December

-H 0.073

— 1.37

— 0.007

— 0.018

-H 0.068

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : OCTOBER 10, 1865.

83

In connection with these results are given in the following table those
obtained by Dr. Bache from the discussion of the tides at Key West,
Florida, and published in the Coast Survey Reports, and also in Silli-
man's Journal (Second Series, Vol. XVIII. p. 305). They have been
reduced from English feet to meters for convenience of comparison with
the preceding results. The second numerical column contains the vari-
ations of atmospheric pressure at Havana, which is used for computing
the corrections at Key West due to that cause. The coefficient of the
astronomical term for Key West is -|- .005. The corrections and the
corrected results are also given in the following table : —

Mo n til

Monthly Mean

Atmospheric

Astronomical

Atmospheric

Corrected

UX W XX %J1X •

Heights.

Pressure.

Correction.

Correction.

Mean Heights.

m.

mm.

mm.

1.677

760.27

1.677

January

— 0.118

+ 4.97

+ 0.003

+ 0.066

— 0.049

February

— 0.100

— 0.12

— 0.002

— 0.002

— 0.104

March

— 0.073

+ 0.71

— 0.005

+ 0.009

— 0.069

April

— 0.073

— 0.69

— 0.003

— 0.009

— 0.085

May

— 0.055

— 2.08

+ 0.002

— 0.028

— 0.081

June

+ 0.031

+ 0.40

+ 0.005

+ 0.005

4- 0.041

July

+ 0.085

4- 0.40

+ 0.003

+ 0.005

+ 0.093

August

+ 0.040

— 2.94

— 0.002

— 0.039

— 0.001

September

+ 0.130

— 2.81

— 0.005

— 0.037

+ 0.088

October

+ 0.121

— 2.08

— 0.003

— 0.028

+ 0.090

November

+ 0.070

+ 0.98

+ 0.002

+ 0.013

+ 0.085

December

— 0.058

■+■ 3.35

+ 0.003

+ 0.045

— 0.008

For the convenience of comparison the following graphic representa-
tion of the results for the two ports is given, the first and third curves
representing the annual variation of mean level at Brest and Key West
respectively, uncorrected for the effects of the astronomical term and
the variation of atmospheric pressure, and the second and fourth the
corrected results. The curves are somewhat irregular, because the
number of both tidal and barometric observations is not great enough
to eliminate all the accidental and other irregularities ; but the dotted
curves, cutting off small irregularities, although somewhat arbitrary,
must very nearly represent the true results.

With regard to the effect of the winds in changing the mean level of
the sea, either at Brest or Key West, little is known, but it is evident
from various researches at other ports, that they can have but little
effect, except for very short periods during heavy gales, and therefore
cannot cause much change in the monthly means, or the means of the
different seasons. M. Dausy concluded from his researches that the
mean level of the sea was not sensibly altered at Lorient by breezes

VOL. VII. 5

34

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

or fresh winds, but that it fell 0".080 by violent winds from the north
to northeast, and rose the same quantity by those from the south-
west, the south, or the southeast. ( Comptes Rendus de VAcademie des
Sciences, Tom. III. p. 136.) We have, therefore, reason to suppose that
the variations in the prevailing winds in the different seasons of the year,
since their averages or resultants cannot amount to more than a very
gentle wind, can have but a small effect upon the mean level at Brest.
Moreover, the winds from the south and southwest, which tend to cause
a rise in the mean level, prevail the most, and with the greatest force,
during the winter and spring, and hence cannot cause the preceding
corrected variation of mean level, which is at its minimum during that
time. There must, therefore, be yet some other cause affecting the
mean level of the sea at Brest.

a

<

1

3

July,

Aug.

-i-S

Cl,

O

>
o

p

a

•-5

•

<D

Pm

tz

03

<

f
^

a

s

t-5

•-5

do

<

in

o

o

>
o

o

With regard to the effect of the winds on the mean level of the sea
at Key West, Dr. Bache remarks, that " winds tending to elevate the
water in the harbor prevail for six months, from March to August

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : OCTOBER 10, 1865. 35

inclusive, and those tending to depress it, for the other six months,
from September to February inclusive." By referring to the preced-
ing curve representing the variation of mean level at Key West, it is
seen that these winds cannot cause the corrected variation of mean
level, since the argument of variation of the former does not at all cor-
respond with that of the latter, and hence there must be still some
other cause affecting the mean level of the sea at Key West also.

From what has been stated, it is evident that the effect of the winds
at Brest must be to decrease the amount of variation, and to cause the
maximum and minimum to happen a little later in the season of the
year. On the other hand, their effect at Key West must increase the
variation and cause the maximum and minimum to happen earlier in the
season of the year. If, therefore, the variations of mean level at Brest
and Key West were corrected for the effect of the winds, the argu-
ments of the variations at both ports would probably be the same,
raakinff the maxima and minima of the variations about October and
April. This indicates that the cause or causes of the variation of mean
level which we have yet to seek are not local, but more general, affect-
ing both ports simultaneously. There have been no researches to show
that the argument of the corrected variation of mean level would be
about the same at other ports of the Atlantic ocean also.

There is still another cause affecting the mean level of the ocean at
different seasons, which is much more effective than either of those
which have been stated, and which, I think, satisfactorily accounts for
the remaining and greater part of the observed variation, which has
not been explained. This is a tangential force arising from the mo-
tions of the ocean combined with the motion of the earth's rotation. It
was first brought out in its most general form in my paper on the
"Motions of Fluids and Solids relative to the Earth's Surface," pub-
lished in the Mathematical Monthly, and also in an abridged form in
Silliman's Journal (Second Series, Vol. XXXI.), and expressed in the
following language : In whatever direction a body moves on the surface of
the earth, there is a force arising from the earth's rotation ivhich deflects
it to the right in the northern hemisphere, but to the left in the southern
hemisphere. From this force thei'e must arise a change in the level of
the sea wherever its waters have a motion of any kind, and as these
motions depend, for the most part, upon the difference of temperature
of the ocean between the equator and the poles, and consequently upon
the change of seasons, there must be a change in the mean level of the

36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY.

sea at most ports corresponding with the change of seasons. The prin-
cipal motion of the water of the Atlantic Ocean affecting its level is
the motion by which it is supposed to complete a gyration in about
three years. In -the paper already referred to it was shown that the
force arising from this gyration would cause the middle of the gyrating
mass of the water to stand about five feet higher than the exterior part
on the coast of Europe and America. Now as the greatest difference
of temperature in the ocean between the equator and the poles must
be in the latter part of winter, a little later than the time of the greatest
difference in the atmosphere between the equator and the poles, the
greatest gyratory motion of the water of the Atlantic Ocean, on account
of the inertia of the water, must happen still a little later, say in April,
and then the surface of the water must stand highest in the centre of the
gyrating part, and lowest at the exterior part, and consequently at the
ports of Brest and Key West. On the contrary, in October, when the
gyratory motion is the least, the surface must fall a little in the middle
and rise a little at its exterior part, and consequently stand at its maxi-
mum height at the ports of Brest and Key West. The position of the
gyrating mass also changes with the seasons, being farthest north in the
fall, and nearest the equator in the spring, as must necessarily be the
case, and as the vibrating motion of the northern part of the Gulf
Stream indicates. The surface of the gyrating water being a little
convex, this circumstance must also affect the mean level slightly at
som6 ports.

The difference between the maximum and minimum mean height
of the sea at Brest is about six inches, which, when corrected for the
effect of the winds and other causes, would probably be a little more.
The difference at Key West, corrected in like manner, would probably
be about the same. A decrease, therefore, of less than one half in the
gyratory velocity of the ocean from April to October would be suffi-
cient to cause a variation of that amount in the mean level of the sea
at Brest and Key West ; and as the argument of the variation of the
gyratory motion of the Atlantic Ocean, as we have seen, must very
nearly or quite correspond with the argument of the variation of mean
level unaccounted for by other causes, we have reason to think that the
variation of the gyratory motion of the Atlantic Ocean is the cause of
this part of the change of mean level.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 8, 1865. 37

Five liaudred and fifty-se-renth Meeting.

November 8, 1865. — Statute Meeting. '

The President in the chair.

Mr. Safford presented the following paper : —

On the Right-Ascensions observed at Harvard College Ob-
servatory in the Years 1862 - 1865. By T. H. Safford.

It is part of every astronomer's duty to assure himself in some way
of the accuracy of the elements upon which the reduction of his obser-
vations depend. If he is a meridian observer, he must make sure that
the right-ascensions of the clock- and polar-stars which he employs are
correct ; and the most thorough means of so doing is to determine
them by his own observations.

It is true that this process requires much time and patience ; that
we, in America, are tempted to think that it has all been so excellently
done abroad, that anything we can do will not add to the accuracy of
the determinations we derive from foreign sources. I think this notion
is somewhat ill-founded. The quantities in question are, as above
stated, the right-ascensions of standard stars ; they must be predicted,
and are so predicted for many years in advance ; and the simple for-
mula by which this prediction has to be made,

^ t — f ^ / I r 2

= a — a" + A » -^ i_A_ 1,

shows that not only do the errors of the modern observations come in
with more than their full amount, but are somewhat increased by a
part of those of the ancient ones.

It ought also to be considered that the observations made with any
meridian instrument are liable to errors of obscure origin, which make
it somewhat better to use its own results to reduce other observations
obtained with it ; and that, on the other hand, each good instrument
well used, and each well-trained observer, contributes something; to the
general foundations of the science which no other observer or instru-
ment can do.

The eminent German, EngHsh, Russian, and French astronomers
have followed this plan within the present century.

38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Admirable fundamental catalogues have appeared from the observa-

O

tories of -Konigsberg, Abo, Dorpat, Cambridge (Eng.), Greenwich,
Edinburgh, and Paris ; and two from Pulkova and one from Leiden
are to appear within a few years.

I wish to call the attention of American observers to this subject,
and will give a short sketch of the process, and enumerate the syste-
matic errors which must be guarded against, and their sources.

First, it is assumed that an approximate catalogue of time-stars is at
hand ; the first object is to obtain a correct right-ascension of Polaris,
peculiar it may be in some degree to observer and instrument, and this
is done by ojiposite culminations, at all seasons ; or at two opposite
seasons, as spring and autumn. If the values for spring and for
autumn differ by any sensible amount, the instrument is ill-mounted,
but a constant difference of three seconds of time here did not prevent
Bessel from obtaining a value accurate to 0^3. In our Cambrido-e
observations of Polai'is, this difference has been much less ; in fact
hardly sensible.

The next step is to derive the right-ascensions of other polar stars
from that of Polaris ; and it is here necessary to observe at two
opposite seasons of the year, or, which is the same thing, at two oppo-
site culminations.

Now comes the comparison of time stars among themselves, and the
best method, and the method which must in all cases form the ultimate
test, is to begin by comparing at two opposite seasons the stars Castor,
Procyon, and Pollux with the stars y, a, jS Aquilaj ; and, finally, to
compare the remaining fundamental stars (Maskelyne's 36, for ex-
ample) with both these groups, though oftener with the nearest one.
But this is a method which requires a very perfect clock, ' especially
with perfect compensation, or else not exposed to changes of tempera-
ture. In case it is not practicable, we may content ourselves for a
time with tlie more ordinary process of assuming the freedom from
constant error of large groups of stars, and thus getting the individual
errors of the assumed fundamental catalogue ; and the only objection
which I know to it is, that being almost universally employed, and
Bessel's Fundamenta being the old Catalogue always used for proper
motion, we may in this way accumulate dangerous errors, sensibly
identical, in nearly all modern observations. It is, therefore, desirable
that this point, too, should be tested oftener than it is.

At the Observatory of Harvard College, a fundamental catalogue

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 8, 1865. 39

of about three hundred and twenty stars is now in process of reduction,
which depends on nearly ten thousand observations made since 1862.
The instrument has shown a stabiHty of mounting sufficient for an inde-
pendent and accurate determination of thirty-five polar stars, while it
has also proved itself capable of being used for exact right-ascensions
of time-stars by the excellence of its pivots, and its general stiffiiess.

The catalogue will be, if I am not mistaken, the first American
Fundamental Catalogue of Right- Ascensions ; I can venture to call it
so, although the still unfinished normal clock, and the lack of a good
circle for solar observations, compel some reliance upon the general
accuracy of other determinations. But with the requisite apparatus,
about one thousand more observations would free us from even this
necessity.

Mr. Oliver presented the following paper : —

On some Focal Properties of Quadrics. By J. E. Oliver.

I. Any two quadrics have one, and usually but one, common auto-
polar tetrahedron, T. Referred to this their equations become

Y = alV^ -j- /3x2 -f y/ + S^' = 0,

whether in tangential or in point-coordinates. Using tangential coordi-
nates, all the quadrics

?7-f \Y= (a-f Xa) 0)2 + = 0 (1)

have a common enveloping developable ; and the entire system is
determined by any two of its quadrics [or by any eight of its
developable's planes which are not specially related].
The four quadrics that correspond to

X=: — -, X=z — _, X = — -, and X = — - ,
a 13 y 8

are plane conies in the respective planes of reference.

Deforming T and (1) together till T has one plane at infinity and
the other three mutually orthogonal, and then lengthening in suitable
proportions the three sets of principal axes, the rectangular point-
equation of the system becomes

""' + ^-,.. + TW^. = 1' (2)

^2_j_p - 5? + 1-2 ' (72 -fF

40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

which i"! a homofocal system. Three of the plane curves in (1) have
become the ibcal couics in (2). And the fourth curve iu (1) becomes
in (2) the spherical circle at infinity, i. e. the intersection of any finite
and finitely-distant sphere, with the plane at infinity, P.
For since the cone,

x'-\-f^z' = ^, (3)

which envelops that circle, is sensibly asymptotic to the surfaces (2)
when k is indefinitely large, the common tangent-planes to those sur-
faces then differ not sensibly from the cone's tangent-planes, and hence
envelop the circle.

Hence, as Salmon shows, a quadric's three focal curves, with the
spherical curve at infinity, are the intersections of non-consecutive rays
of that developable which envelops both it and the spherical curve.
And they are the only intersections ; for, being of the fourth degree,
the developable cannot cross one of its own rays more than four times.

Any deformation that destroys a sphere, destroys with it the circle
at infinity and the homofocalism of system (2), unless it replace that
circle by one of (2)'s focal conies ; hence the system has but four pro-
jective forms. And since, as its tangential equation shows, any four of
its quadrics divide each ray of the developable in the anhai-monic ratio
of their Ps, this ratio must remain after deformation ; hence in the re-
spective forms, ¥■ is, at the respective plane curves,

= — A\ — B\ — C\ oo2,

— ^, — A^, cx>\ — C%

_ C% cp% — A% — &,

oo2, — C% —B", —A^;

hence the four plane conies exactly replace one another ; and so do
their four included groups of quadrics, since projection breaks no
cyclic order.

II. The system (2) touches every point of space three times, every
line twice, every plane once ; except that it meets each ray of the
developable throughout. A line's two planes of contact with the system
are known to be mutually perpendicular, so that the boundaries of two
homofocals are seen from any point to intersect at right angles if at
all. For if the line touch

A'-\-l;'' ' ' A^-\-k,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 8, 1865. 41

at (xi i/i Zi) and (xa i/o z.,) respectively, either point is on the other's
polar as to each quadric ; or,

3^q- /i-i^ "^ • "■ ' A^ 4- k,' "^ ~ '

V2

whose difference.

»3?j CCq I I z^ Z^

is the condition that the two tangent-planes are perpendicular.

Or thus. The pairs of tangent-planes drawn from the line (a?i yi z^),
(x2 y-i 22)5 to the different surfaces, are known to form an involution,
whose double planes, namely the tangents at {x^ y^ z^ and {x.^ y^ z<^,
must form a harmonic pencil with the tangent-planes to any one sur-
face, e. g. to the spherical circle at infinity, and hence are orthotomic.

Particular cases of this orthotomism are that of the three quadrics
through one point, and the circularity of the cone mentioned in § IV.

Now this orthotomism would preclude the existence of a common
developable ; but it fails for the envelope's rays ; for since every
tangent-plane from a finitely-near point to the circle at infinity has
some infinite direction-cosines, while

Dfi U-i ' Dfj Uo ' cos a, • cos a., = ? — ? , &c.,

""' ' ^^ ' ' ' {A'-\-k;^){A'^k^) '

are finite, \_Ui, U.^, Ny, N.2, a^, . . . . yo, being the quadrics, their
normals, and the direction-angles of these,] — it must be that

hence (4), which is the same as

D^^ Ui • D^^ U2 ' (cos aj COS a.2 -\- cos /3i cos ^2 -j- COS yi cos y.2) = 0,

becomes merely identical. And the other demonstration fails, because
the two tangent-planes to the circle at infinity coincide.

III. According to Salmon, each ray to a spherical point at infinity
i? "perpendicular to itself" (whatever that may mean) ; which would
extend the above orthotomism to the developable ; a result opposite to
ours in statement, but probably the same in its actual consequences.
Such lines must oft(in thus simulate self-perpendicularity, from their
infinite direction-cosines having zero co-factors ; and this may make

VOL. VII. 6

42

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Salmon's interpretation often convenient and suggestive, though I
think it is arbitrary.

If a finitely-near plane [or line] should make an angle 6 with itself,
it would doubtless touch [or meet] a sphere's circle at infinity ; for we
should have

cos^ a -\- cos^ /3 -\- cos^ y = cos ^,

while cos^ a -)- cos^ jS -|- cos^ y = 1,

. • . 0 • cos^ a -|- 0 • cos^ jS -|- 0 • cos^ 7=1 — cos ^,

. • . some of (cos a, cos /3, cos •)/) = <»,

which is the condition of such contact ; [nor need 6 nor oo be real.]
But the converse fails ; for

cos a ^ CO
does not imply

COS^ a -\- COS^/3 -j- COS^ y =jz 1.

Nor, if 6 can be > 0, need it be always 90°. Various considera-
tions often suggest 90°, as in Salmon's beautiful instance of a circle's
tangent-radius. But should not the common tangent of circles

( X cos a -\- V sin a = 1,
^^ ^ ' S- found thus, -< x cos a 4- w sin a = 2,

^2 _l_ ^2 __ 4 ) ' ) ' -^ '

^^ ^ ' V . • . cos a = GO ,

make in like manner such angles with itself as the circles make with
each other's ordinary tangents, namely,

60°, and (log2 + v/3) 'v/— 1 ?

Of course in either instance, to throw the self-contradiction, instead, upon
the circle's angle t with its radius vector, we need only regard it as
the limiting case of another curve or of an eccentric circle, so that t
may be a function of the independent polar angle ^.

rV. If quadrics U, V, W, expressed in tangential coordinates, have
a common developable envelope, so have f7-\-XY, F-j-/xY, W;
fi being a linear function of X ; for the equation

lU-{-m F+ W=0,
implies

l{U-^XY)-\-m (v—^--y)-\- W=0.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 8, 1865. 43

If now Y be the spherical circle at infinity, and W two separate
or coincident points, we see that whe^i U has double contact with V,
or envelopes it, so does every homqfocal to U some homofocal to V;
and all the planes of contact intersect in one line or point.

C/'may have 2, 3, or 4 double contacts with the surfaces V-\- y^Y,
since the condition

I' U-\- m ' V-\- m iJL'Y = product

is equivalent to three quadric conditions among (I, m, m ^i), which are
satisfied in from 0 to 4 ways, just as three conies have from 0 to 4
common intersections. 1 of these double contacts may be replaced by
1 envelopment ; or all 4 by 2 envelopments if (U, V) be cones. If
U have p double contacts and q envelope-contacts with surfaces V -j- /n Y,
so has V with surfaces U -|- X Y.

Of the fact that homofocals envelop homofocals, a familiar case is
that each focal line of a cone U touches either co-planar focal of any
enveloped quadric V ; whence the circularity of that enveloping cone
whose vertex is on a focal ; and the consequent linear relation among
the four distances of two points on one focal from two on the other, &c.
Other known cases are, that Z7's focal lines, when not thus co-planar,
are generators of some homofocal to V ; and that when Z7is a quadric
of revolution, its foci lie upon F's focals. For in neither of these
three cases could the focal curve of U otherwise envelop any homo-
focal of V.

P. S. Feb. 10, 1866. — The above was ia the printer's hands, before I was
aware how much of it had been given by Salmon ; but I retain it with some
changes, as certain points in it may still be new. — J. E. O.

The following gentlemen were elected members of the
Academy, viz. : —

J. Victor Poncelet, of Paris, was elected a Foreign Honor-
ary Member, in Class I., Section 4, in place of the late M.
Struve.

Mr. Lewis M. Kutlierfurd, of New York, was elected Asso-
ciate Fellow, in Class I., Section 3.

Mr. Samuel Eliot, of Boston, was elected a Resident Fellow,
in Class III., Section 3, and Mr. G. W. Hill, of Cambridge, a
Resident Fellow, in Class I., Section 2.

44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

f

Five hundred and fifty-eightli Meeting.

November 14, 1865. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of the eminent lexicographer Dr. Joseph E.
Worcester, of the Resident Fellows.

Professor Levering, from the Rumford Committee, delivered
to the President the Rumford Medal, which had been prepared
in accordance with a vote of the Academy to be presented to
Professor Treadwell.

The President prefaced the presentation of this medal with
the following remarks : —

At the Anniversary Meeting last May, upon the unanimous recom-
mendation of our Rumford Committee, the medal founded by Count
Rumfoi'd was by the Academy awarded to Professor Daniel Tread-
well for certain improvements in the management of heat. This medal
is now before us. It is the first which the Academy has ever bestowed
upon one of its immediate members.

As your organ upon this occasion, before we place this testimonial
in the hands of our distinguished associate, it is proper that I should
briefly specify the grounds upon which your Committee proposed, and
you made, this award. It is well understood, and the terms of the vote
distinctly show, that this medal was awarded for an invention or an
improvement in the management of heat. It is also well known that
this particular improvement is a part — the initial part, indeed —
of a series of inventions, — applicable to other uses, no doubt, — but
through which the character of ordnance has been changed, and its
power immensely increased. This was the end and aim of the im-
provement for which the medal is given.

We may, therefore, and we must upon this occasion, speak of this
particular improvement in the management of heat in connection with
the mechanical inventions which accompanied and followed it, and to
which indeed the former is incidental. For the whole important series
of mechanical' inventions which I am to recapitulate, the Academy
must regret that it has no honors which it can bestow. But their his-
tory is upon our records, embodied in the communications addressed to

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: NOVEMBER 14, 1865. 45

US by their author from time to time ; and we can only hope that the
country and the world, when at length sensible of their obligations,
may render the tardy meed of justice, if not of gratitude.

In his earhest communication, — a pamphlet published in the year
1845, — Mr. Treadwell seems to think that the appropriateness of the
term " useful," as applied to an improvement in implements of destruc-
tion, may be questioned. We need have no misgiving in this respect.
So long as life and property, which the ravages of war destroy, are
not the most valuable of human possessions, they may be justly yielded
and taken, if need require, for .the preservation of those that are. And
so nations must always count among their greatest benefactors those
whose inventions increase their strength and defence in war. And
certainly those men who, by their inventive genius, revolutionize the
art of war, exert a most powerful and enduring influence upon the fate
of empires, the course of history, and the progress of civilization.

"We in our day, within the last fifteen years, have witnessed a change
in the means of attack and defence greater than any made in the two
hundred years previous, — a change involving a complete revolution
in tactics, both on land and on sea. To take a single illustration from
heavy ordnance, — in which the importance of the change impresses
us when we are told that our strongest forts, armed with the best guns
we had ten years ago, could oppose no eifectual resistance to the
entrance of such ships as are now built into any of our harbors ; and
that a ship could now be built and armed, which, singly, would over-
match our whole navy as it was in 1855.

Fortunately, the balance is redressed by equal improvements in
defence.

The improvement in fii-e-arms, both great and small, is in their in-
creased range and precision. When the effective range of a musket-
bullet was extended from two hundred yards to fourteen hundred or
more, it became imperatively necessary that ordnance should be im-
proved .in the same ratio, or it would be useless, as gunners and horses
would be picked off by small arms long before they could effectively
reach the enemy. This improvement in guns of great calibre has been
made, with consequences the importance of which, present and pro-
spective, cannot be over-estimated. •

But the point which we have to consider is, that this increased range
and precision are entirely dependent on the augmented strength of the
gun. The weakness qf the gun is the only thing that imposes a limit

46 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

to the range short of the absolute strength of the explosive material
used. It is the strength of the gun which not only gives the range,
but makes rifling possible, with precision and all the advantages of the
elongated shot. All inventions relating to the different modes of rifling,
the form of the projectile, and the devices for breech-loading, are
necessarily subordinate to the question of strength ; with this sufficient,
those become simple problems, to be rapidly determined by the ingenu-
ity of many inventors.

Now the limit of strength of cast-iron and of bronze cannon had long
ago been reached. Excepting Captain Rodman's improvement, and
certain modern advantages in working and casting metals, no material
advantages had been gained over guns cast in the reign of Queen
Ehzabeth.

But the most effective guns of the present day embody new prin-
ciples of strength. They are all huilt-up guns. With them are associ-
ated the names of Armstrong, Blakely, Whitworth, Parrott, and others.
"Whatever may be the relative merits of these several varieties, our
interest is confined to the question of their strength, that is, to the prin-
ciples of construction which have made them stronger than common
guns, and rendered their respective subordinate improvements possible.
These principles are two, and their introduction at different times
into the manufacture of cannon constitutes two successive steps, and
the only steps, which give distinctive character to the guns under con-
sideration. Both originated with Mr. Treadwell.

These two inventions are often confounded, although more than ten
years elapsed between them. The confusion is doubtless owing in
some degree to the fact that the two are found combined in nearly all
the modern built-up guns. The first initiated a system of construction
which may be designated as the coil system ; the second, what may be
named the hoop system.

The first was successfully applied to the making of cannon by Mr.
Treadwell in the year 1842, and a full account of it was published in
1845 ; the gist of the invention being in so constructing the gun that
the fibres of the material shall be directed around the axis of the
calibre.

This method of construction is described in Pi'ofessor Treadwell's
own language as follows: "Between the years 1841 and 1845 I made
upwards of twenty cannon of this material [wrought iron]. They
were all made up of rings, or short hollow cylinders, welded together

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 14, 1865. 47

endwise ; each ring was made of bars wound upon an arbor spirally,
like winding a ribbon upon a block, ^nd, being welded and shaped in
dies, were joined endwise when in the furnace at a welding heat, and
afterwards pressed together in a mould by a hydrostatic press of one
thousand tons' force.

" Finding in the early stage of the manufacture that the softness of
the wrought iron was a serious defect, I formed those made afterwards
with a lining of steel, the wrought-iron bars being wound upon a pre-
viously formed steel ring. Eight of these guns were six-pounders of
the common United States bronze pattern, and eleven were thirty-two-
pounders, of about eighty inches' length of bore and nineteen hundred
pounds' weight."

The soundness and value of this principle of construction were fully
confirmed in England by the experiments of Sir William Armstrong
in 1855, and attested by his evidence before a committee of the House
of Commons in 1863. He there describes his own gun as one "with
a steel tube surrounded with coiled cylinders," — as " peculiar in being
mainly composed of tubes, or pipes, or cylinders, formed by coiling
spirally long bars of iron into tubes and welding them on the edges, as
is done in gun-barrels." His indirect testimony to the originality of
Mr. Treadwell's process is equally clear, being that, within his knowl-
edge, no cannon had ever been made upon this principle until he made
his own in 1855, — he being, as we must suppose, ignorant of what
Mr. Tread well had done thirteen years before. The statement of Mr.
Anderson (witness before the Commons' Select Committee), made be-
fore the Institute of Civil Engineers in 1860, is equally explicit as to
the nature and value of this method of constructing cannon. And,
finally, the high estimate of its importance abroad is shown not only
by the honors and emoluments conferred by the British government on
the re-inventor, but still more by the actual adoption of this gun as the
most efficient arm yet produced. For it must be borne in mind that
the faults or failures, complete or partial, of the Armstrong and similar
guns are not of the cannon itself, as originally constructed, but of
breech-loading contrivances, of the lead coating of the projectile, or of
other subsidiary matters.

That our colleague's original invention, the value of which is now so
clearly established, should have been so generally unacknowledged by
inventors abroad is his misfortune, not his fault. For, not only were
his guns made and tested here, and their strength as clearly demon-

48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

stratcd before 1845 as they have been since, not only was a fall ac-
count of the process and of the results published here in that year, but
a French translation of his pamphlet was published in Paris, in 1848,
by a professor in the school of artillery at Vincennes ; and Mr. Ti-ead-
well's patent, with full specifications, was published in England before
Sir William Armstrong began his experiments.

The difficulties to be overcome in making such a gun, — great at all
times, as Sir William Armstrong and Mr. Anderson testify, — were
far greater in 1842 than in 1863. These difficulties were mainly, if
not wholly, in welding large masses of wrought iron in the shape of
tubes or cylinders. It is for overcoming these difficulties that this
medal is bestowed, and especially for the means and appliances by
which this difficult mechanical achievement was effected in the furnace
" by the agency of fire."

An incidental but noteworthy part of the improvement was the
welding by hydrostatic pressure, — an operation which is just now
coming into use in England, but has not yet attracted attention in this
country.

' We come now to the second improvement in the construction of
artillery, — the invention of the hooped gun.

This is not always clearly distinguished, even by those occupied with
th^ subject, from the gun formed of coiled rings. But a simple state-
ment will bring into view distinctly the new principle of strength here
introduced.

If an elastic hollow cylinder be subjected to internal fluid pressure,
the successive cylindrical layers of the material composing it, counting
from within outwards, will be unequally distended, and the resisting
"efficiency of the outer layer will be less than that of any layer nearer
the axis. And if the walls of the cylinder are thick, and the internal
pressure surpasses the tensile strength of the material, its inner layer
will break before the outer one has been notably strained. Hence the
tensile strength of a square inch bar of the material is the measure of
the maximum pressure the cylinder can bear, when constructed as
guns were before the introduction of the improvement now under con-
sideration. The improvement does away with this limit, and enables
us to go indefinitely beyond it.

This is accomplished by so constructing the gun that the inner layers
are compressed by the outer ; whereby the internal pressure is first
resisted by the outer layers, which must be distended enough to allow

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 14, 1865. 49

the internal compressed portion to attain its normal condition before
this internal portion (which is the first to break in the common gun)
is subject to any strain at all. It will be perceived that if this prin-
ciple could be rigorously applied, a cannon could be made so perfect
that, when subjected to a bursting pressure, every fibre, from the inter-
nal to the external surface would be at that instant equally extended,
each contributing its full share of resistance to fracture. The whole
resistance would be proportional to the area of fracture.

This was supposed to be the case in common cylinders, before the
error was pointed out by Barlow, and also by Lamie and Clapeyron.
And it was this erroneous supposition that led Count Rumford to his
exaggerated estimate of the force of gunpowder, as tested by its power
of bursting gun-barrels. If he had used the theory which gave origin
to the hooped gun, his results would nearly have agreed with modern
observations.

The demonstration of the superiority of the hooped gun, with detailed
directions for its construction, is contained in a paper read before this
Academy in February, 1856, and published at the beginning of the
sixth volume of our Memoirs. This was the first published account of
the invention, which had been patented nearly a year before. Captain
Blakely's pamphlet, published in England in 1858, sets forth the ad-
vantages of this construction by similar arguments ; as also does an
elaborate paper read by Mr. Longridge befoi-e the Institution of Civil
Engineers in February, 1860. Both these gentlemen, however, were
engaged in researches upon this subject at an earlier date, but not so
early, it would appear, as was Mr. Treadwell.

The validity of the principle, and the soundness of Mr. Treadwell's
views upon the whole subject, as set forth in his memoir, have been
amply confirmed by special experiments made in England with the
Blakely and Whitworth guns, and by experience in this country dur-
ing the last four years with the Parrott and the Blakely guns.

It must not be supposed that the earlier invention is superseded by
the later one. That is used in forming the hoops of the Parrott gun,
and in most of the British guns. And the best gun which could now
be made, as experience has shown, would be composed of a barrel of
cast-iron or steel, enclosed and compressed by a cylinder of coil.

We need not discuss the question of priority of invention between
Mr. Treadwell and others, competitors for a share in the honor of pro-
ducing the modern cannon. His independence of each and all of them

VOL. VII. 7

50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

has never been called in question. Nor will it ever seriously be
thought that the previous futile attempts at constructing wrought-iron
and banded guns, — foredoomed failures both in theory and practice,
and destitute of all pretension to a knowledge of the guiding principles
now clearly seen to be essential to success, — should detract in the
slightest degree from the great honor which our associate has, by a
clear insight into the conditions of the problem and the resources of
physical science, so fairly and completely won.

Upon these two inventions has been set the seal of experience.
But there is still another memoir, read by Professor Treadwell before
this Academy in April, 1864, and printed soon afterwards, which
promises to add a third important improvement in the construction of
artillery.

Perceiving that the body of a hooped gun, if made of unmalleable
cast-iron, compressed by a soft wrought-iron hoop, must give way, by
the fracture of the cast-iron, before the hoop can approach the ultimate
limit of its strength, and that this was, in fact, a principal cause of the
failure of so great a part of the large guns of Blakely and Parrott, Pro-
fessor Treadw^ell, as the principal result of this third investigation, pro-
ceeds to show, that, to attain with effect the end sought for by hooping
a cast-iron gun, it is necessary to harden the wrought-iron hooj) by
cold hammering and severe stretching before placing it upon the gun-
body. He computes, that, by this simple means, a hooped gun may be
made more than twice as strong as those which have been constructed
by Blakely and Parrott, the materials being in both cases the same.

In this important discovery, as also in other matters discussed in Iiis
latest memoir, we are gratified to see, that, although now carrying the
weight of more than threescore and ten years, our veteran colleague
still keeps the lead, which he gained at the start, of his competitors in
this race of improvement.

So completely do these three improvements cover the ground, that
if the works of all other inventors who claim a share in the great gun
of the nineteenth century were lost, the gun could be restored (rifling
excepted) from Mr. Treadwell's papers alone.

And now, Mr. Treadwell, in delivering into your hands this beauti-
ful gold medal and its silver duplicate, I have much plea'^ure in con-
veying with them the congratulations and best wishes of your associates
here assembled ; also the expression of their hope that you may yet
longer lead the race ; and especially that you may long enjoy the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: NOVEMBER 14, 18G5. 61

scientific honors which you have worthily won ; and with them, if it
may be so, the full recognition of the rights, and possession of the
advantages, which pertain to your inventions.

On receiving the medal, Mr. Treadwell expressed his ac-
knowledgments as follows : —

Mr. President and Gentlemen of the Academy : —

I receive with great satisfaction the Rumford Medal which, in ac-
cordance with a vote passed at the Annual Meeting, you have now pre-
sented to me. I prize this premium the more as coming from this body,
with which I have been intimately associated for more than forty years
as an active member, and for a very large part of the time as an office-
bearer. I may be permitted to say, however, that, although I am sen-
sible that I am indebted for this award in a large degree to your kind
partiality for an old associate, which turned your attention to his labors,
yet it was made not only without any application on my part, but your
motion towards it was wholly unknown, and not even thought of by
me, until the vote of the Rumford Committee was communicated
to me.

The award was, as stated in your vote, (which uses the language
of Count Rumford,) for " improvements in the management of heat."
But as this management of heat was incidental to, and intimately con-
nected with, improvements in the construction of cannon, to which I
had given yeai'S of labor, you have extended your examination into
the character of those improvements generally. For the very thorough
research which it is evident you have made into the whole subject, I
feel under great obligations to you ; and the very favorable conclusions
which you have reached, and which have been so fully and kindly ex-
pressed by you, Sir, as to the originality and value of my researches
and labors, form an additional source of satisfaction to me. This,
taken alone, would constitute one of the most welcome recognitions and
rewards that could be given to me. Permit me, in conclusion, to
express my special obligations to the members of the Rumford Com-
mittee for directing their attention to my labors, and for the very favor-
able view which they have taken of their merits.

The President then introduced Dr. Burt G. Wilder, who
presented the following communication ; —

52 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

On the Nephila Plumijyes, or Silk Spider. By Burt G. Wil-
der, S. B., late Surgeon 55th Mass. Vols.

At the north end of Folly Island, which lies just south from the har-
bor of Charleston, S. C, on the 20th of August, 1863, I found in a tree
a large and very handsome geometrical spider, whose web was about
three feet in diameter. While examining the insect at my tent, it oc-
curred to me to see how much of the silken thread could be drawn from
the spinners. As it was not disturbed by pulling out a few yards, I
wound the thread around a quill, and then, by turning this in my fin-
gers, reeled off silk from the body of the spider for one hour and a quar-
ter, at the rate of six feet per minute, making one hundred and fifty
yards of most beautifully shining golden silk. This specimen is stiU in
my possession, and, having been removed from the quill, weighs one
third of a grain. I had never before seen this spider, nor had I ever
heard of this method of obtaining a silken material ; but when, during
the following summer, another officer of our regiment * described to me
a large spider as very common upon Long Island, which lies just west
from Folly Island, I knew it was the same, and told him what I had
done, adding that I was sure something would come of it in time.
By substituting a cylinder worked by a handle for mine turned in the
fingers, this officer obtained more of the silk, winding it upon rings of
hard rubber, and afterward, by using a " gear-drill stock," another offi-
cer! accomplished similar results still more rapidly.

With this "gear-drill stock" I wound from a number of spiders three
thousand four hundred and eighty yards of silk upon the periphery and
over the sides of a hard rubber ring ; the length being accurately meas-
ured by multiplying the dimensions of the ring where wound upon by
the number of revolutions per minute, and this product by the number
of minutes of actual winding. This was in the fall of 1864, and in
February, 1865, I showed specimens of the spider and of the silk to
Professors Wyman, Agassiz, and Cooke of Harvard University, neither
of whom had ever heard of this way of obtaining silk, nor, with the
exception of Professor Wyman, — who found a single individual among
some specimens collected at the South, — had they ever seen the in-
sect. At this time, too, a friend % to whom the whole history of the

* Major Sigourney Wales, 55th Massachusetts Volunteer Infantry.
t Licut.-Col. Charles B. Fox, 55th Massachusetts Vohmtecr Infantry.
\ Dr. William Nichols of Boston.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: NOVEMBER 14, 1865. 53

matter was known, expressed his confident belief that this new silken
product could be made of some practical utility, especially in view of
the anticipated scarcity of ordinary silk ; and it is in great measure due
to his advice and assistance that the experiments and investigations
recounted below have been made.

The only mention of this spider is in the German work of C. L.
Koch, "Die Arachniden," where in Vol. VI. is described, under the
name of Nephila plumipes, a mutilated female specimen, the only one
ever collected, and which is preserved in the museum of J. Sturm at
Nuremberg. This description and its accompanying figure are very
imperfect, but until a careful comparison can be made between the
original specimen and some of my own, I will consider the latter as
representatives o^ N. plumipes ; though an -accurate description 'and fig-
ure shall be made as soon as possible.

The following general description applies only to the females, the
males being very small and of a different color.

Nephila (plumipes ?) Koch. A large and very elegant species of
Nephila, resembling most of its congeners In the general form of the
body, and, like N. clavipes and N. fasciculata^ possessing peculiar col-
lections of stiff hairs upon the legs, but differing from these two species
in that these hairs are more closely set so as to justify the German
term "Haarblirste" (Hair-brushes).

In general the cepalo-thorax is black above, but covered, except in
spots, by silver-colored hairs. The abdomen is olive-brown, variously
marked with yellow and white spots and stripes. On the first, second,
and fourth pair of legs are one or two brushes of stiff" black hairs point-
ing outward away from the body. The length of the body is one and
one tenth inches, and the spread of the legs from two and three fourths
in a lateral, to three and three fourths inches in a longitudinal direc-
tion. The length of the body of the male is about one third of an
inch, and his general color is brown. His palpi are clubbed near the
extremities, and end in a sharp point turning outward.

With the exception of the first and only specimen discovered upon
Folly Island, and a cocoon found on James Island, I have met with
this spider only upon Long Island and one or two similar bits of
land in the vicinity. They are all low, sandy, and marshy, covered
with palmetto and pine trees, uninhabited, and apparently never befo^e
visited by naturalists.

These spiders are specially abundant upon Long Islasnd, and are

64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

found in large geometrical webs, two, three, or four feet in diameter,
stretched between shrubs or trees, and often high up among the pines,
so as to be out of reach. The webs are strong and of a yellow color ;
and, as with most species of geometrical spiders, the concentric circles
are elastic and studded with numerous viscid globules, while the radii
and other parts of the framework are composed of dry and inelastic
silk ; but with this species the distinction between these two portions of
the web consists not only in the viscidity of the former, but also in the
color ; for while most of the concentric circles are of a bright yellow or
golden hue, the radii and stay-lines, and also every eighth or tenth circle
(the number varies in different individuals), are white or silver-colored.
The circles are very near together in proportion to the size of the in-
sect, being only one third or one fourth of an inch apart.

As might be inferred from these facts, but which, so far as I know,
has never before been observed, this spider not only has the power of
regulating the size of its thread, — according as one or two, or three or
four of its spinnerets are pressed upon the surface from which the line
is to extend, or as a greater or less number of the spinnerules in any
one spinneret are employed, — but can also use in the construction of its
web either the white or the yellow silk at will ; for of its two principal
pairs of spinnerets, one, the anterior, yields the yellow, while the other
or posterior pair yields the white silk. Of this I satisfied myself by
carrying the thread from the anterior pair of spinners upon one part
of a spindle, and that from the posterior pair upon another part, guid-
ing them Avith pins while the spindle was in motion ; the result being
the formation of two circles of silk, one of a golden, the other of
a silver color, as in one of the specimens exhibited ; moreover, if
while both threads are being drawn out, they are slackened, the lower
silver thread will wrinkle and fly up, being inelastic; while the other
will contract and, within certain limits, preserve its direction.

There is a corresponding difference in the color of the glands which
secrete the gum of which the silk is formed ; one set, the more numer-
ous, being yellow, and the other white.

The manner in which the spider deposits the globules of gum on
the circles which she wishes to be viscid is not yet explained ; at any
rate this same yellow silk, when either reeled from the body of the
spider, or when employed in the formation of its cocoon, is dry and
much less elastic than that of which the concentric circles are composed.

The evolution of the silk from the spider is almost wholly a mechan-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: NOVEMBER 14, 1865. 65

ical process, and, beyond a certain expansion of the parts, by separat-
ing the spinners from each other, the only control exercised by the
insect is by means of its hinder legs, the tips of which serve to guide
the thread, and by grasping it to control the evolution. I have never
been able to reel out over three hundred yards at once from a single
spider ; but on opening the abdomen, the glands are found still to con-
tain more or less gum. Upon three successive days I obtained equal
quantities of silk ; so that if, as now seems probable, the emission of
the silk is purely mechanical, then a certain degree of preparation is
necessary, after it is secreted, before it is ready for use.

The diameter of the silk as spun by the insect, or as reeled from it,
varies from one six-thousandth to one thousandth of an inch ; * it is
exceedingly strong, more so in proportion to its bulk than that of the
silk-worm ; as is natural, since the spider's thread is made up of hun-
dreds and even thousands of minute fibrils, while the common silk
is single. The largest threads are those composing the outer layer
of the cocoons, but these are evidently compound, and each of the two,
three, or four strands is apparently such as proceeds from the single
spinners ; the minute fibrils of which have united at once on leaving the
spinnerules, so as to form the ordinary silken fibre which generally
appears simple under the microscope.

The habits of this spider ai-e very interesting. It seems to obey
three principal instincts : first, to ascend ; second, to seek the light,
whether natural or artificial ; and, third, to maintain a position with the
head downward. It has eight eye-spots, but, so far as 1 have observed,
it can only distinguish light from darkness, and is not able to see
objects. There is not here space to give in detail an account of all that
I observed in case of several which made their webs in my room in
South Carolina; but all seems to indicate that these spiders do not
see, as the term is generally understood ; the touch is, however, very
acute, and is exercised by the palpi and by the tips of the legs, spe-
cially the anterior pair. Unlike some other geometrical spiders, it seizes
its prey at once in its jaws, and never envelopes it in a silken net till
it has expired. The sense of hearing is evidently very acute.

It is very quiet in its disposition, and never leaves its web unless
molested. The female builds the web, and even carries the male on
her back or belly when moving about ; she never attempts to bite

* The micrometer measurements were made by Mr. R. C. Greenleaf.

56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

unleoa piuvukcd, and mny be suwl-rcd to ruii over oue'o per6cu witli
impunity.

Perhaps the most remarkable fact in connection with this spider is,
that it can be fed and watered hy hand ; a Uve fly held to its jaws is
seized as soon as a buzz makes its presence known ; so also a bit of
chicken-liver, if touched to the jaws ; and if a drop of water be pre-
sented on a camel's-hair pencil, it will be readily taken and gradually
swallowed. It is evident that the spiders drink the drops of water
which are left in the web from the rain or dew ; and they thrive best in
a moist atmosphere.

The female' lays four or five hundred eggs, half as large as a pin's
head, and sliglitly agglutinated together in a rounded mass, which is
secured on the lower side of a leaf by a strong silken cocoon of loose
texture, and varying in color. Many of the eggs which were laid by
my spiders in September were hatched in about thirty days. The
young differ much from the adult in form and color ; and the changes
which they pass through in growth will prove a most interesting branch
of the subject. The young do not leave the cocoon for some time ; and
even after they have, are more or less gregarious, — always keeping in
companies, and preserving good order while moving. They need
water, and, if not supplied with food, are prone to eat one another.
If properly attended to, they grow quite rapidly ; * and although at
first they make only an irregular web in common, yet after they have
attained a length of half an inch, they will, if separated, construct
regular geometrical webs.

In a state of nature, not many over one per cent of the spiders
which are hatched live to maturity ; so that the question of a practical
value of this silk depends upon the success of the attempts to prevent
this destruction, which is apparently due to their own voracity, to the
elements, and to other insects.

Much more might be related concerning the habits of the insect,
of the manner of keeping and feeding the young, of the means of
securing the spider while its silk is obtained, and of the various appa-
ratus employed ; but I am so impressed with the peculiarities thus far
observed in themselves, and with the beauty and strength of the silk,
that if time and means permit I shall continue the inquiry as far as
possible. And having now, as I hope, established my claim to the

* Feb. 23d, 1866. Some of these young are now more than an inch in length.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 9, 1866. 57

discovery of this new method of obtaining a silken material, (namely,
by a reeling or circular motion applied to the insect itself,) I will defer
to a future occasion a more complete account of the spider, of its hab-
its, anatomy, and embryology, and of the various qualities of its silk,
with whatever conclusion can be reached concerning the practicability
of rearing the young ; and also how far it is possible to apply the
same process to the silk-worm, and other silk-producing larvae.

Five hundred and fifty-nlntli Meeting.

December 12, 1865. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

A letter was read from Mr. Samuel Eliot in acknowl-
edgment of his election into the Academy ; also letters rela-
tive to exchanges.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Dr. John Lindley of London, of the Foreign
Honorary 'Members.

Five bnndred and sixtieth Meeting.

January 9, 1866. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Colonel James Duncan Graham of the Resi-
dent Fellows, formerly an Associate Fellow.

A memoir by Professor Child was presented by title, namely,
" Remarks on the Language of Gower's Confessio Amantis :
a Sequel to Observations on the Language of Chaucer, printed
in Vol. VIII. of the Memoirs of the Academy."

Professor Cooke made the following communication : —

On the Aqueous Lines of the Solar Spectrum: By Josiah

P. Cooke, Jr.

A CAREFUL examination of the solar spectrum, continued durino- sev-
eral months with the spectroscope described in a recent article of the
VOL. Vll. 8

58 PROCEEDINGS OF THE 4JVIERICAN ACADEMY

American Journal of Science,* has led me to the conclusion that a very
large number of the more faint lines of the solar spectrum, hitherto
known simply as air lines, are due solely to the aqueous vapor of our
air, and hence that the absorption of the luminous solar rays by the
atmosphere is at least chiefly owing to the aqueous vapor which it
contains.

The appearance of the Fraunhofer's line D, seen under precisely
the same conditions, but with increasing quantities of aqueous vapor in
the atmosphere, is shown in Figures 1, 2, 3, and 4. The D line is
selected, because, being a favorite test object for the spectroscope, its
general appearance is well known to all observers. But even more
marked changes than those here illustrated have been noticed in other,
although chiefly in contiguous, portions of the solar spectrum.

These changes attracted my attention from my earliest observations
with the spectroscope ; but with my first instrument, and the bisulphide
of carbon prisms then employed, it was almost impossible to eliminate
the effects which might be caused by the variations in the condition of
the instrument itself; and as these were known to be very great, it
was possible that they might account for all the variations observed.
With the improved instrument, however, just referred to, absolute
constancy of action is obtained, and all merely instrumental varia-
tions avoided.

A peculiar condition of the atmosphere gave the first clew as to the
cause of the changes under consideration. The weather on the 17th
of November, 1865, at Cambridge, Massachusetts, was very unusual
even for that peculiar season known in New England as the Indian
Summer. At noon the temperature on the east side of my laboratory
was 70° F., while the wet-bulb thermometer indicated 66°, showing an
amount of moisture in the atmosphere equal to 6.57 grains per cubic
foot. At the same time the atmosphere was beautifully clear, and the
sun shone with its full splendor. I have never seen the aqueous lines
of the spectrum more strongly defined than they were on this day ; and
the total number of lines visible in the yellow portion of the spectrum
was at least ten times as great as are ordinai'ily seen. The appear-
ance of the D line on that day is shown in Fig. 4. Between the two
familiar broad lines Di and Dg there were eight sharply defined lines of
unequal intensity, which is only very imperfectly represented by the
woodcut. In addition to these, on the more refrangible side of the space

* American Journal of Science and Arts, Vol. XI., November, 1865.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 9, 1866. 59

between the two D lines, there was a faint but broad nebulous band,
barely resolvable into lines of still smaller magnitude.* It is impos-
sible to represent this band accurately with a woodcut ; and the shaded
broad band marked k on the right-hand side of Fig. 4 only serves
to indicate its position and approximate breadth.

The 26th of December was also a warm day for the season, with a
brilliapt sun. At one o'clock, P. M., the dry-bulb thermometer marked
55°, the wet-bulb 50°, and hence the amount of moisture in the atmos-
phere was 3.76 grains per cubic foot. The appearance of the D line
at this time is shown in Fig. 3. Two of the Hnes, rj and 6, and the
nebulous band k, seen on the 17th of November, were invisible, and
moreover the group of three lines 8 e f on the left-hand side of the
figure were only just within the limits of visibility.

On the 25th of December only two lines were visible within the D
line, marked a and /3, in Fig. 2, and the last of these was quite faint.
The temperature at the time of observation was 46° ; the wet-bulb
thermometer indicated 40°, and the amount of moisture in the air was
2.42 grains per cubic foot. The sky was clear and the sun brilliant.
Lastly, on January 5th, 1866, one of the clear cold days which are
so common in our climate during the winter, only the single line a
was visible within the D line, as is shown in Fig. 1. At the time of
observation, near noon, the dry-bulb thermometer marked 10°, the wet-
bulb 9°, and hence the amount of moisture in the atmosphere was only
0.81 of a grain per cubic foot. The sun, liowever, was as brilliant as
in either of the previous cases. The D line also appeared as in Fig. 1
on the 8th of January, 1866, when the thermometer at noon stood at
10° below zero Farenheit, and when the barometer attained the un-
exampled height of 31 inches.

The above figures have been drawn so as to show, as nearly as pos-
sible, the relative intensity of the different lines under different atmos-
pheric conditions. As no accurate means of making the comparison
are yet known, I was obliged to depend upon my eye alone, and small
differences at different times of observation may easily have escaped
my notice. Indeed, I should have been liable to great error, were it
not for the fact that one of the lines within the D line, marked a in all
the figures, does not vary in intensity, and served as a constant stand-
ard in making the observations. This is the only line which is given

* We use this word in the same sense in which it is used by astronomers with
reference to the fixed stars.

60

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

January 5th, 1866.

Temperature 10° F.
Dew-Point lo.5 F.

Fig. 1.

Di

D,

Weight of vapor \
in 1 cubic foot > 0.81 grs.
of air, J

Deceviber 25th, 1865.

Temperature 46° F.
Dew-Point 33°.4 F.

Fig. 2.

Di

a /3 Dj

Weight of vapor \

in 1 cubic foot > 2.42 grs.
of air, ^

December 26th, 1865.

Temperature 55° F.
Dew-Point 46°.5 F.

November \7th, 1865.

Temperature 70° F.
Dew-Point 64°.0 F.

Fig. 3.

Di S e i ay fi Dj

Weight of vapor \

in 1 cubic foot > 3.76 grs.
of air, '

Fig. 4.

DlTjSe i ay pe kD^

Weight of vapor \

in 1 cubic foot > 6.57 grs.
of air, '

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 9, 1866. 61

by Kirchoff in his chart of the solar spectrum between the two D Hnes,
and it is referred by him to the Nickel vapor, — as the D lines them-
selves are to the Sodium vapor, in the sun's atmosphere. It is an un-
doubted solar line, and has been drawn with the same strength in all
the figures in order to show that it is invariable.

With a very dry atmosphere the line a is the only one which ap-
pears within the D lines, as shown in Fig. 1. With a slightly greater
amount of vapor the line j3 makes its appearance. As the amount of
vapor continues to increase, this line becomes more and more prominent,
until at last, as shown in Fig. 4, it is even more intense than the line a.
A careful comparison of these two lines might indeed serve as an approx-
imate measure of the amount of vapor in the atmosphere ; and a series
of comparisons made under the same conditions at different heights
would give data for determining the law according to which the amount
of vapor decreases with the elevation above the sea level.

All the aqueous lines change in intensity like the line /3. They are
first seen very faintly when the amount of vapor in the air reaches a defi-
nite point, varying for the different lines, and gradually gain in inten-
sity as the amount of vapor increases. Thus the group of three lines
S e f do not appear in Fig. 2, are barely visible in Fig. 3, but become
very marked in Fig. 4.* The lines t) and 6 and the nebulous band k do
not appear until the air is very moist ; and even when it contains 6.57
grains of vapor per cubic foot, they are still very faint. Under yet
more unusual atmospheric conditions they will undoubtedly become
more intense, and we shall then probably be able to completely resolve
the nebulous band and count the lines of which it consists.

It is hardly necessary to repeat, that the examples here given are
selected from a large number of observations. During the cold dry
weather of winter the appearance of the D line is uniformly as shown
in Fig. 1, the line /3 only occasionally appearing when the atmosphere
becomes more moist. During the warm weather of summer, when the
absolute amount of moisture in the air is in almost all cases greater
than in winter, the appearance of the D line is as uniformly that
shown in Fig. 3. It is only very rarely in the dry climate of New
England, even during the summer, that all the lines shown in Fig. 4

* With an increasing quantity of vapor in the atmosphere the line y of Fig. 3
is seen before the group of lines S e ^, and an intermediate figure between 2 and
3 might be given showing only the lines Di a y ^ D".

62 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

are visible ; and, as already stated, I never before saw them so sharply
defined as on the 17th of November last.

Several conditions must evidently concur in order that the aqueous
lines should be developed in their greatest intensity. In the first place,
the air must be charged with vapor not only near the surface of the
earth, but also through a great height of the atmosphere. Local causes
might greatly increase the amount of moisture in the lower strata of
the atmosphere, and aflfect powerfully the hygrometer, which would
not, to the same extent at least, influence the indications of the spectro-
scope. In the second place, other things being equal, the intensity of
the aqueous lines must be strengthened by increasing the length of the
path of the sun's rays thi'ough the atmosphere, and this is the longer
the lower the altitude of the sun. But then, again, the intensity of the
light has such an important influence on the definition of the lines,
and the slightest haze in the atmosphere so greatly impairs their dis-
tinctness, that I have generally found that the aqueous lines are seen
best when the sun is near the meridian. Hence, with an equal amount
of moisture in the atmosphere, the late autumn may be a more favor-
able season for seeing the aqueous lines than the summer ; for then
not only must the solar rays, when most brilliant at noon, traverse a
greater extent of air, but, moreover, the atmosphere at this time is
usually clearer, and the reflected beam of light which enters the spec-
troscope is at times more brilliant than when the sun attains a higher
elevation and the light is reflected under less favorable conditions.

In the examples cited above, the comparisons were made under as
nearly as possible the same conditions, so as to eliminate all causes of
variation except the one under consideration. Days were selected
when the atmosphere was perfectly clear, and the sun's light, so far
as I could judge, equally brilliant. Moreover, the position of the spec-
troscope and mirror remained unchanged during the whole time. This
mirror, which is used for reflecting the sun's light upon the slit of the
spectroscope, is so arranged that it can be turned into any position by
the observer while his eye is at the eye-piece of the spectroscope, and
it was always carefully adjusted at each observation to the position
of best definition. The manipulation of the mirror is fully as impor-
tant in the use of the spectroscope as it is in microscopy.

It will be of course understood that the power of developing these
faint aqueous lines depends very greatly on the optical capabilities of
the spectroscope, and that the figures here given are relative to the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 9, 1866. 63

instrument used in the observations. This instrument has been fully
described in the article already cited. It is sufficient for the present
purpose to state that it is provided with nine flint-glass prisms * of 45°
refracting angle, which bend the rays of light corresponding to the D
line through an angle of 267° 37' 50", and that corresponding to the
Hi line through an angle of 280° 42' 20", when each passes through
the prisms at the angle of minimum deviation. The dispersive power
of the instrument for these two rays is therefore equal to 13° 4' 30",
and the rays corresponding to the two D lines are separated 1' 10".
The object-glasses of the two telescopes of this spectroscope are 2^
inches in diameter, and have a focal length of 15^ inches, and lastly
the size of the prisms, and of the various parts of the instrument, is
adapted to these dimensions. With a more powerful instrument a
larger number of aqueous lines would be seen under the same atmos-
pheric conditions. The Cambridge instrument has a set of sulphide of
carbon prisms which disperse the light nearly twice as much as the
flint prisms. The sulphide of carbon prisms are very variable in their,
action ; but, under the best conditions, they might show the D line as
in Fig. 3, when with the flint prisms it would appear as in Fig. 2.

The facts stated in this paper fully account for the discrepancies in
the representations which different observers have given of the D line.
Some time since, Mr. Gassiot, of London, gave in the Chemical News
a representation of the D line as seen with his instrument, showing
several lines in addition to those seen by myself and other observers.
On visiting the Kew observatory, in the summer of 1864, I was sur-
prised to find that this instrument was less powerful than the one I was
then using; and I also learned that these lines were only seen on a
single occasion. The moist climate of England is the evident expla-
nation of the additional lines.

As I stated at the first of this paper, the D line has been selected
simply to illustrate a general truth. The development of aqueous
lines in contiguous portions of the spectrum is even more marked than
in the exceedingly limited portion here represented. Indeed, as has
been already intimated, the number of these lines seen in the yellow
region of the spectrum, on the 17th of November, was at least ten

* Thcsse prisms were furnished by the American Academy from the income of the
Rumford Fund, appropriated for investigations on light and heat. See Proceedings
of the American Academy, Annual Meeting, May 24th, 1864.

64 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

times as great as that of the true solar lines. That part of the yellow
of the spectrum which lies on the more refrangible side of the D line,
and in which during dry weather only a comparatively few lines can
be distinguished, was then as thickly crowded with lines as the blue or
the violet, but the lines were of course far less intense.

Professor Tyndal, of London, has shown by a remarkable series of
experiments with the thermo-multiplier, not only that aqueous vapor
powerfully absorbs the obscure thermal rays, but also that the elemen-
tary gases of the atmosphere exert little or no action upon them. I have
endeavored to establish in this paper, from direct observations with the
spectroscope, a similar truth in regard to the luminous rays. It has
been estimated by Pouillet and others that about one third of the solar
rays intercepted by the earth are absorbed in passing through the at-
mosphere ; and it now appears that aqueous vapor is a most important, if
not the chief, agent in producing this result. It is impossible, however,
from any data we yet possess, to determine how great a power of absorp-
, tion is exerted by the oxygen and nitrogen gases which constitute the
great mass of our atmosphere. I have shown that a very great many,
and I have no doubt that almost all, the lines hitherto distinguished as
air lines are simply aqueous lines ; but it is very difficult to distinguish
atmospheric lines from the true solar lines, and our knowledge of the
first is as yet very incomplete. It still remains to make careful
comparisons throughout the whole extent of the spectrum, before we
can absolutely determine the relative absorbing power of the different
constituents of our atmosphere.

One other inference from the facts here developed is worthy of notice
before closing this paper. It has been for some time suspected that the
blue color of the sky was in some way connected with the vapor in the
atmosphere ; and it is a fact of common observation, that this color is
more intense during the moist weather of sumnaer than during the
more dry weather of winter. The distribution of the aqueous lines
through the solar spectrum not only confirms the opinion previously
entertained, but also points to the cause of the color. So far as my ob-
servations have extended, the aqueous lines are almost wholly, if not
completely, confined to the less refrangible portion of the spectrum.
Here they are found in vast numbers, and I am not positive that they
exist anywhere else. If, then, the aqueous vapor absorbs most power-
fully the yellow and red rays of the spectrum, the blue color of the sky
is the necessary result. The color is therefore due to simple absorption,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JANUARY 9, 1866. 65

and not to repeated reflections from the surface of drops of water, as
some physicists have supposed.

As can readily be seen, the aqueous lines of the solar spectrum
present a very wide field for investigation, but one which can only be
cultivated under peculiar atmospheric conditions. This paper is only
intended to open the subject. I hope to be able to continue the study
on every favorable opportunity, and shall take pleasure in communicat-
ing any future results to this Academy.

Professor Charles W. Eliot exhibited to the Academy a dy-
namometer invented by Mr. S. P. Ruggles, the Curator of the
Museum of the Institute of Technology.

" This new and admirable invention accomplishes two objects ; —
first, it measures the exact amount of power which is being consumed
in driving a single machine, or any number of machines, at any instant
of time, indicating every change in the force required, as the work done
by the machines varies from instant to instant ; secondly, the apparatus
adds up and registers the total amount of power which has been used
by any machine, or set of machines, during a day, a week, a month
or any desired time. The apparatus may be thus described. The
pulley, from which the power is taken, is attached to the shaft by the
intervention of a spiral spring. One end of this spring is secured to
the shaft, and the other end to the hub of the pulley. The lateral mo-
tion of the pulley upon the shaft is prevented by a collar on either side
of the pulley. On the inside of the hub is cut a screw of about three-
inch pitch, that is, a screw which makes a complete turn within a dis-
tance of about three inches measured on the axis of the hub. A rec-
tangular slot is cut out of that part of the shaft which lies within the
hub of the pulley, and in this slot slips backwards or forwards a piece of
metal which precisely fits the slot. From each side of this small piece
of metal there projects beyond the surface of the shaft a small portion
of the male screw which exactly fits into the screw cut in the interior
of the hub of the pulley. If there be no resistance at all to the mo-
tion of the pulley, the shaft, spring, and pulley will all start together, and
revolve together. But if a resistance be offered to the motion of the
pulley, the shaft, and with it the piece of metal which slips in the slot,
will start first, and the pulley will move only when the strain caused by
the twisting of the spring is sufficient to overcome the resistance ap-
plied to the circumference of the pulley. But if the piece of metal in

VOL. VII. 9

66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

the slot begin to turn while the hub of the pulley is stationary, the piece
must move laterally within the slot, being forced by the screw. If
the pulley start a quarter of a turn later than the shaft, the piece will
move laterally three quarters of an inch ; if the pulley start a half a
turn later than the shaft, the piece will move laterally an inch and a
half. The lateral motion of the piece in the slot is proportional to the
retardation of the pulley, and this retardation is proportional to the
strain upon the belt which passes over the pulley, and conveys the
power to be used. To the movable piece in the slot is connected
a small round rod, which runs out through the centre of the main
shaft and projects some little distance beyond, it. On the end of this
rod is a circular rack of teeth, in which plays a pinion, on whose shaft
is a hand moving over a dial-plate. By applying strains, measured by
standard scales, to the belt which passes over the pulley, — as a strain
of ten pounds, fifty pounds, one hundred pounds, — it is easy to gradu-
ate the dial-plate into pounds, so that the number of pounds of strain
upon the belt may be read off at any instant by a mere inspection of
the dial. The mode of operation of this part of the apparatus is then
as follows : — when no power is being conveyed from the pulley, shaft
and pulley start simultaneously ; there is no lateral motion of the piece
within the slot and its connected rod, and the hand on the dial points
to zero. But the moment that power begins to be expended in driving
the machinery, the strain upon the belt will be first felt by the spring
which connects the pulley to the main shaft, and the spring will yield
in proportion to the strain ; the effect is to let the shaft make a small
part of a revolution in the hub of the pulley, before the pulley begins
to turn and keep pace with the shaft ; the rod within the end of the
shaft is thus drawn in a little, the hand moves over the dial-plate, and
points to the exact number of pounds of power which the belt is con-
veying from the pulley at the instant of observation.

The registering of the total amount of power delivered from the
pulley is effected by means of two small belts running over the round
rod, which projects beyond the end of the main shaft and carries the
index hand above described. These two small belts communicate
the motion of the shaft to two parallel and equal wheels, one of
which bears a dial-plate, and the other an index hand which moves
over the dial-plate. When there is no strain upon the main belt
going over the pulley, the two wheels revolve at the same rate, —
neither gaining upon the other, and the hand remains constantly

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JANUARY 9, 1866. 67

over the same figure on the dial-plate ; but when a strain is put
upon the belt and the round rod moves laterally, as above described,
the lateral motion brings a conical enlargement of the rod under the
little belt which moves the wheel bearing the dial. The dial-wheel
now goes faster than the wheel carrying the hand, and begins to
count up the power used. The greater the lateral motion of the
rod, or, in other words, the greater the power transmitted to the
working machines, the larger the diameter of the cone which comes
under the belt of the dial-wheel, and the greater the gain of the dial
upon the hand. The wheels of both dial and hand are constantly re-
volving in the direction opposite to that of the motion of the hands
of a watch. The 'belt of the hand-wheel runs always upon the rod,
where its diameter is constant, and as the rod moves laterally under
the little belts, guides are necessary to keep the belts themselves from
moving laterally also. The proportions of the cones on the rod, and of
the two wheels which carry the dial and the hand, can be so adjusted
as to make a difference of one complete revolution between the motions
of the hands and of the dial indicate a delivery of ten thousand foot-
pounds, or of ten million, or of any other convenient number, and, by
a system of gearing analogous to that used in gas-metres, any desired
amount of power could be consecutively registered. It is obvious
that the registering apparatus takes account of both the strain and
the speed, while the simple index first described measures only the
strain.

This instrument is at once elegant in design, simple and therefore
cheap in its construction, easily verified and proved at any moment
when in operation, and of very easy application to any machine, or set
of machines, driven by hired power, whether the power used be con-
stant or variable in amount. The instrument admits of a great variety
of forms : the one described above is meant for the end of a shaft ;
another form is so arranged as to be attached at any part of a running
shaft, while in the proportions and dimensions of the several parts there
would be the same variety as in common scales, which are large or
small, coarse or fine, according as they are meant to weigh coal or pills,
hay or coin. The instrument meets a pressing want. Tea and sugar
are sold by the pound, gas by the thousand feet, cloth by the yard, but
steam-power and steam and air engines are sold by guesswork, or by
rough and uncertain rules, on whose application buyer and sel!er can
seldom agree.

68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Hereafter steam-power can be sold by the thousand or million foot-
pounds.

Mr. Ruggles does not patent his valuable invention.

Dr. Jeffries Wyman presented the following paper : —

Notes on the Cells of the Bee.

It is more than a century and a half since Maraldi studied the form
of the cells of the hive bee, and described them as hexagonal prisms
with trihedral bases, each face of the base being a rhomb, the greater
angles of which were 109° 28', and the lesser 70° 32'.* Twenty-five
years later, Reaumer, the most admirable of the observers of insect
life, with the view of ascertaining how far such a form was an econom-
ical one, proposed to Koenig the following problem, — " Of all hexago-
nal cells, having a pyramidal base composed of three equal and similar
rhombs, to determine that which can be constructed with the least
amount of material." f It is a part of the history of this subject, that
Koenig's results differed from those of Maraldi by two minutes in each
of the angles, the former having made them 109° 26' and 70° 34'.
It has recently been stated that the table of logarithms used by
Koenig had an error which would exactly account for the difference.

Admitting an error of two minutes in each of the angles, still the
close correspondence between the results of Koenig and the measure-
ments of Maraldi was well fitted to excite the wonder and admiration
of all, and from that time to this the belief has prevailed, that the in-
stinct of the bee enables it to construct such a cell as that sought in
Reaumer's problem, if not in all cases, at least in the larger portion
of them, without sensible error. It were unjust to keep out of sight
the fact, that, however correct the measurements of Maraldi may have
been, he has left no record of his method of making them, and further-
more, the possibility of measuring the angles of such a structure as the
cell of the bee, without liability to an error of one or two degrees in
each angle, is denied by competent authorities, since the angles of the cell
are nowhere sharply defined and the surfaces are not strictly planes. %

* Mem. Acad, des Sciences, 1712.

t Memoires pour servir aVHistoire des Insectes, Tom. V. p. 389. Paris, 1740.

J The first person who appears to have called Maraldi's measurements in ques-
tion was Father Boscovich, "who had supposed that the admeasurement of the
angles was too nice to be accurately performed, and that the coincidence of M.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 9, 1866. 69

The mineralogist, treating the cell as a crystalline form, would not ex-
pect a closer approximation to exact measurement than that just stated.

Lord Brougham, who, of later writers, has written the most elaborate-
ly on the subject, in his essay entitled Observations, Demonstrations,
and Experiments upon the Structure of the Cells of Bees, after having
himself solved Reaumer's problem, after having obtained solutions
of it through others, and after having himself measured the cells,
asserts positively that they are constructed in accordance with the form
deduced from calculation, and are therefore exact. Having compared
the sides of the cell by measurement with a micrometer, he says, " I
certainly can find no inequality." * Again, " She [the bee] works so
that the rhomboidal plate may have one particular diameter and no
other, always the same length, and that its four angles may be always
the same " ; f and he still further adds, " The construction of the cell,
then, is demonstrated to be such that no other which could be con-
ceived would take so little material and labor to aiford the same
room. " X

"We have looked carefully through Lord Brougham's essay, for a
recognition of the existence of irregularities in the cells, but have
found none, except of such as are of microscopic size. " The lines, "
he says, " may not be exactly even which the bee forms ; the surfaces
may have inequalities to the bee's eye, though to our sight they
seem plane ; and the angles, instead of being pointed, may be blunt or
roundish, but the proportions are the same : the equality of the sides
is maintained, and the angles are of the same size, that is, the inclina-
tion of the planes is just Now, then, the bee places a plane in

such a position, whatever be the roughness of the surface, that its in-
clination to another plane is the true one required. " §

Lord Brougham's answer to L'Houillier's criticisms may be cited
to the same effect. When the latter speaks of thq conditions re-

Maraldi's measurements with theory could only arise from his assuming that the
angle of inclination of the rhomboidal plane was the same with that of the hexagon,
viz. 120°, from which, no doubt, it would follow that the angles of the rhombuses
should be 109° 28' and 70° 32' respectively." — Lord Brougham, Nat. Theol.,
p. 351.

* Natural Theology, London, 1856, p. 224.

t Ibid., p. 197.

\ Ibid., p. 324.

§ Ibid., p. 191.

70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

« •

quired being such as theory and observation " nearly agree " in
giving to the cells, Lord Brougham replies: "The 'nearly' is quite
incorrect : there is an absolute and perfect agreement between theory
and observation." *

Mathematicians appear to be of one accord in this ; viz. if economy
of space and wax is sought, that the form of the cell should be the one
alleged to have been ascertained by Maraldi, and which was really cal-
culated by Koenig, and by hundreds of others since his time. Careful
observations, however, tend to prove that such a cell is rarely, perhaps
never, realized. For, while the deviations from the true form do not
exceed a certain limit, a piece of comb, ten cells square, can hardly be
found in which one or more irregularities do not occur, of such magni-
tude, that, however they may look to the bee's eye, can be readily de-
tected by man's. The best observers, such as Reaumer, Hunter, the
Hubers, and others, have noticed some of these, but as their investiga-
tions had for their chief object the clearing up of other points relating
to the habits of the bee, the irregularities of the cells were passed by,
for the most part, with merely a mention.

Worker Cells. — These will be treated of first, because they are the
most numerous. The drones of a hive only amount at the most to a
few hundreds, while the workers are estimated at many thousands, and
the number of cells is proportional to the number of young reared.
All the varieties found in the worker are repeated in the drone and
honey cells, though in the last-mentioned kind the variations are the
most marked, and some are introduced which are not found in either of
the others.

The average diameter of a worker cell, measured on a line perpen-
dicular to its sides, as deduced from the following table, is 0.201, or
one fifth of an inch, but it may be increased or diminished in different
parts of the same comb.f Reaumer expresses his belief that this was
the case, but he gives no measurements. The table given below is the
result of the examination of four pieces of comb, which were in all re-

* Op. cit., p. 350.

t Reaumer found that twenty worker cells measured four inches less half of a
line ; " neglecting the half of a line, the diameter of a single cell would ^e 2.4 lines "
(French) ; and Huber gives the same dimensions, as also Kirby and Spence, who
quote their description of everything relating to the bee from Reaumer and Huber.
Latrei lie found that 76 millimeters comprised 14 cells, when measured in one di-
rection, and 14.5 in another.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JANUARY 9, 1866.

71

spects good average specimens. First, a line of ten cells,* arranged in
the direction of the diameter, perpendicular to one of the sides, and
then two other sets of the same number, similarly arranged in the di-
rection of the other two diameters, and crossing the first, were care-
fully measured. Three series of such measurements were made from
different parts of each comb. The columns marked I., II., III. give
the measurements in the direction of the three diameters.

Combs.

I.

II.

in.

Greatest
Difference.

Inch.

Inch.

Inch.

Inch.

A Series,

1

2.04

1.95

1.98

0.09

2

2.04

1.93

1.95

0.11

3

2.10

2.02

1.92

0.18

B Series,

1

2.00

2.03

2.05

0.05

2

1.98

2.02

2.05

0.07

3

2.04

2.05

2.05

0.01

C Series,

1

2.05

2.05

1.98

0.07

2

2.08 •

2.08

1.98

0.10

3

2.09

2.08

1.98

0.11

D Series,

1

1.93

1.97

1.95

0.04

2

1.97

2.06

1.85

0.21

3

2.00

1.99

2.10

0.11

The greatest aggregate diameter of any one series of ten cells was
2.10 inches, and the least 1.85 inches, making a difference of 0.25
inch, or the diameter of a cell and a quarter. The average difference
is, however, a little less than O.J^O inch. These irregularities do not
accumulate beyond a certain amount, and those of one portion are of-
ten counteracted in another portion of the same row. In a large
piece of comb, sixty cells occupied the space of one foot, which would
make the diameter of a cell equal to 0.20 inch ; nevertheless, ten cells
taken from either end, and ten taken from the middle of this same
comb, when compared, gave marked differences. This correction is
not, however, a constant condition, for we have, perhaps in most in-
stances, found Hunter's statement correct, viz. that the cells gradually
increase in size, the last formed being the largest.f

* Ten cells were measured, in order to avoid the accumulating error resulting
from the measurement of a series of single cells. The error in the measurement of
ten cells is no greater than that of measuring one, and divided among the ten
becomes inappreciable.

t Works of John Hunter, Palmer's edition, Vol. IV. p. 436.

T2

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAX ACADEMY

It may be asked, if the comb was not built with all its diameters
equal, but afterwards accidentally disturbed. The comb is suspended
mostly from the uppermost portion, the lowermost hanging free until
considerable progress is made, when it is more or less attached by the
sides ; taking into consideration the material of it, and the weight,
when filled with honey, or covered with crowds of bees, it seems quite
probable that in a hot day the softened wax would be stretched by its
own weight, thus making the transverse diameter of the cells shorter,
and the others proportionally longer. To test this, cells from six dif-
ferent pieces of comb were measured in the direction of their three
diameters ; the result was, that the aggregate transverse diameters of
570 cells was 38.94 inches, and that of the other two was 38.84 and
38.90 inches respectively. The transverse diameter, the one liable to
be shortened, was absolutely a little the longest.

A variation in the diameters does not necessarily bring with it an
inequality in the breadth of the sides, or a difference in the angles. If,
however, one of the sides is wider or narrower than the others, which
it often is, the angle which it makes with the adjoining ones must be
greater or less than 120°, the normal angle. In order to be able to
measure the sides as accurately as possible, cross sections were made
midway between the mouth and base of the cell, where they are thin-
nest and the angles sharpest. These sections were obtained by filling
the cells with plaster of Paris, and after this had hardened, cutting them
down to the required point. In this way, all distortion was prevented.
The following table gives the result of the measurement of the different
sides of a series of twelve cells.

CELLS.

Sides.

I.

II.

lU.

IV.

V.

VI.

VII.

vin.

IX.

X.

XI.

XII.

In.

In.

In.

In.

In.

In.

In.

In.

In.

In.

In.

In.

1

0.14

0.14

0.14

0.13

0.11

0.10

0.12

0.07

0.14

0.00

0.13

0.10

2

0.12

0.12

0.14

0.11

0.13

0.14

0.14

0.15

0.13

0.14

0.15

0.14

3

0.15

o.;2

0.11

0.14

0.13

0.14

0.13

0.15

0.09

0.14

0.13 1 0.14

4

0.11

0.13

0.14

0.10

0.11

0.11

0.12

0.11

0.14

0.10

0.13 ; 0.12

5

0.13

0.12

0.14

0.12

0.13

0.12

0.14

0.11

0.10

0.14

0.09 i 0.13

6

0.14

0.13

0.12

0.14

0.13

0.11

0.14

0.14

0.09

0.14

0.10 : 0.15

Smallest side in 72 cells, 0.070 inch.
Average " " " " 0.125 "
Longest " " " " 0.150 "

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 9. 1866. 73

Of all the parts of the cell there is none where the variation is more
striking than in the rhombic faces of the base. This fact is the more
noteworthy, since it is upon these, and the angles they make with each
other and the sides, that rests the nicest part of the problem relating to
the adaptation of the cell to the contained bee. The relative size of the
faces may be so changed that two of them make nearly the whole of
the base, while the third almost vanishes, or one of the faces may have
any size between this extreme and the normal one.

The fourth face, which has been so often noticed, has generally been
spoken of as belonging more especially to those cells which are inter-
mediate between the cells of drones and workers. Although it occurs
in these, we have found it quite common in the middle of pieces of
comb consisting solely of either worker, drone, or honey cells.* In
one piece of worker comb containing about five hundred cells, nearly
all had a fourth face.

The causes which lead to the introduction of the fourth face are
chiefly two, irregularity in the size of the cells and incorrect align-
ment of them on the two sides of the comb. Each cell on one side of
the comb being normally in contact, by its rhombic faces, with three
cells on the other, and these fitting exactly, if a cell is increased, it will
project beyond them, and thus come in contact with a fourth, and a new
face will be formed. We have seen this happen in a single cell, but
very commonly a row of cells increases for four or five cells, and grad-
ually diminishes again to the ordinary size. With this increase and
decrease of the cell, the fourth face comes and goes.

Incori'ect alignment is the more common cause.f If a given row of

* These were studied either after cutting away the body of the cells, leaving only
the basal plate which separates those of opposite sides, or by means of casts ob-
tained by filling the cells with plaster of Paris. After this last has dried, if the
mass is heated, the wax is absorbed by the plaster, when the casts of the two sets
of cells separate. In old brood-combs, where many successive cocoons have been
spun, these form a thick and resisting cast of the base of the cell and may be ex-
tracted, giving its precise form. In some instances, fourteen distinct layers of co-
coons were counted, showing the number of broods which had ocoupied the cells.

t This introduction of the fourth face to the basal pyramid, through incorrect
alignment, was thoroughly investigated several years since by Mr. Chauncey Wright,
of the Nautical Almanac Office, and who, at the same time, constructed models il-
lustrating his views. These models are deposited in the Museum of Comparative
Anatomy and Physiology at Cambridge For a discussion of various points con-
nected with the geometry of the cell, see his article, entitled The Economy and
Symmetry of the Honey-Bee's Cell, in the Mathematical Monthly for June, 1860.
VOL. VII. 10

74

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Fig. 1.
B

Fig. 2.
B

cells on one side of the comb ceases to be parallel with those on the
other, with which it was connected when the comb was begun, and
diverges from them, it is gradually transferred to a new series ; as the
cells come in contact with those of the new series, the fourth side ap-
peal's, and, at the same time, one of the original sides, viz. that directly
opposite to it, is gradually diminished, and may vanish. This di-
vergence is, however, sometimes insufficient to make the separation
of the rows complete, and may gradually diminish again, as they are
extended by the construction of new cells, so as to bring them back
to the original position, when the irregularity is corrected.

If, however, the separation of the two rows at length becomes com-
plete, so that one of the faces is lost and a new one formed, all the basal
portion of the cell becomes reversed, as will be seen by reference to

Figs. 1 and 2 ; the first rep-
resenting the cells when the
base is viewed, and the
second when looked at per-
pendicularly to one of the
sides. In both fiafures A
indicates the ordinary form
of the cell. The whole se-
ries of Fig. 1 shows the
gradual introduction of the
new face, which is seen on
the lower border, and the
elimination of one of the original faces, which is seen on the upper
border. At B, which is intermediate between the two extremes, the
four faces consist of two equal rhombs, — one of which is the outgoing
and the other the incoming one, — and two equal hexagons. B, Fig. 2,
represents the sides of the same cell, which, instead of forming three
trapeziums, as at A, a, b, c, now form two pentagons, a' and c', and a
parallelogram, b'. At C, Figs. 1 and 2, the forms are in all respects
the reverse of those of ^. A and C are symmetrical with each other,
and B is symmetrical in itself. No precise number of cells is neces-
sary for the pui-pose of making this transition, for it may take place in
two or three, or extend through a long series, as in Fig. 1.

There is another variation which we have noticed twice, — once in
drone, and once in worker comb, involving a large number of cells. If
a piece of normal comb be held in the position in which it was built.

T «

T^

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 9, 1866.

75

Fig. 3.

B a

O

two of the opposite angles of the hexagon,
Fig. 3, A, a, will be in the same vertical
line, and two of the sides will be parallel to
this. The same is true of the opposite side
of the comb ; and thus all the corresponding
parts of the cells on the two sides will be par-
allel. In the deviation we are now noticing,
the change is like that represented in A,
where the cell a is in its true position, while
the cell b, which is from the opposite side,
and is in contact with a, varies from it by
about 30°. If we look at these two cells in the direction of their sides
as at J3, the prism a will have one of its angles towards the eye, and b
one of its sides. If rows of cells are constructed on each of the sides
a and b, Fig. 3, B, it will be seen that the rows thus formed on the two
faces of the comb will cross each other continually. A modification of
this variety is seen at C, where the axes of the two adjoining prisms,
instead of being separated as usual by the semidiameter of a cell,
coincide ; consequently, as the apices of the angles of a project be-
yond the sides of b, a will not only be in contact with b, but by its
angles with the six cells by which b is surrounded. In either of
these cases the pyramidal base becomes impracticable, and the flat
bottom of the cell is substituted for it almost as a matter of necessity.
The bottoms of the cells being flat, it is obvious that the change of
position by rotation of the cell on its axis may be carried to any ex-
tent, without leading to an interference with the cells of the opposite
side ; in fact several degrees of it have been observed.

Since the mouths of such cells are in the same plane with those nor-
mally constructed in the same comb, and since the pyramidal base is
cut off", they are shortened by an amount equal to the height of that of
the base, and therefore are of a proportionately less capacity than the
normal cell. Nevertheless, such truncated cells are used for rearing
the young, and, like the others, were found to contain cocoons.

In curved or bent combs the cells on the concave side tend to become
narrower, while those on the other tend to become broader towards
their mouths. The bees meet this emergency in one of the following
ways : —

On the convex side, —

1st. By allowing the cavity of this cell to become broader, without
any correction beiii": made.

76

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Fig. 4.

2d. Bv thickening the walls of the cell in proportion to its tendency
to become broader, and thus keeping the diameter of its cavity uniform.
3d. When the divergence reaches a certain amount, by making a
false-cell, with a pointed bottom, between the diverging cells.
On the concave side, -7—

1st. By narrowing the cell towards its mouth.

2d. "When two adjoining cells converge so much as to render the
mouth too small, the walls between them are suppressed at a certain
point, and thus the two mouths are merged, and the compound cell
thus formed has a double base, and but one entrance, the two cells
being combined, as are certain kinds of twin crystals, or of double
monsters. The form of the mouth under these circumstances is, how-
ever, liable to a considerable range of variation, as in the central line

of cells in Fig. 4,* in which are a
variety of hexagons. That on the
line a, b has three sides at one
end, united by two long sides with
one at the other, and thus two of
■/ the opposite sides are not parallel ;
at c, d, two sides at either end are
united by two long sides, these last
being parallel ; and at e, f, the
mouth of the compound cell has
seven sides. Each has a partition
at its base, separating the two orig-
inally distinct cells, and each was
lined with a cocoon, showing that
it had been used for rearing young.
In combining the mouths of two
adjoining cells, it will be seen that
this does not consist merely in
g suppressing the partition between

them; for if this were so, each of the long sides would contain more or less
of an angle, as at the lower side of g, according to the degree of conver-
gence, until three of the sides of each of the combining cells had disap-
peared. Instead of this, the portions of two sides forming the angle just
referred to are replaced by one straight side, as on the upper side of g,
and in both of the long sides of the undulating line of cells above it.

* Figs. 4, 5, and 6 are made from impressions obtained directly from the comb
and transferred to wood. Tiiey represent the forms of the cells exactly.

... d

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 9, 1866.

77

Drone Cells. — These are liable to substantially the same variations
as the worker cells. Reaumer observed that they were larger by one
ninth in one diameter than in another.* Four pieces of drone comb
gave the following measurements.

Combs.

I.

n.

m.

Greatest
Difference.

Inch.

Inch,

Inch.

Inch.

A Series,

1

2.63 •

2.72

2.67

0.09

2

2.70

2.60

2.72

0.12

3

2.80

2.58

2.60

0.20

B Series,

1

2.47

2.70

2.54

0.23

2

2.54

2.50

2.55

0.05

3

2.56

2.58

2.37

0.21

C Series,

1

2.54

2.55

2.47

0.08

2

2.59

2.50

2.55

0.09

3

2.64

2.61

2.68

0.07

D Series,

1

2.40

2.47

2.46

0.07

2

2.45

2.43

2.36

0.09

3

2.67

2.52

2.49

0.18

L, IL, III., in the above table, indicate the diameters drawn per-
pendicularly to the three pairs of sides of the hexagons, and series 1,
2, 3 indicate measurements of cells made from three portions of each
comb. Ten cells were measured in each case.

In comparing all of the above measurements, it is found that the
smallest aggregate diameter of any ten cells is 2.36 inches, and the
largest, 2.80 inches, making an extreme difference of 0.44 inch, or the
diameter of a drone and almost that of a worker cell in addition. The
greatest variation in any one series was 0.21, or a little more than four
■fifths of the diameter of a drone cell, which is somewhat less than the
quantity given by Reaumer.

The following measurements from twelve consecutive rows of cells,
of ten each, from the middle of a piece of drone comb, show the pro-
gressive variation from one row to another.

1st row

2.47 inches.

7th row

2.64 inches.

2d "

2.50

8th "

2.67 «

3d "

2.51

9th "

2.67 "

4th "

2.54

10th "

2.66 «

5th "

. 2.58

nth "

2.63 «

6th "

2.62

12th "

2.65 «

* Op. cit., Tom. V. p. 398.

78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY .

Transition Cells. — As drone are one fifth larger than worker cells,
aud as both are combined in one and the same piece of comb, a transi-
tion cannot be made from one to the other without some disturbance
in the regularity of the structure. It would be a nice problem to de-
termine the way in which this could be effected with the greatest econ-
omy of space and material. The bees do not appear to have any
systematic method of making such a change. More commonly, they
effect it by a gradual alteration of the diameters, thus enlarging a
worker into a drone, or narrowing a drone into a worker cell. This
alteration is usually made in from four to six rows. The following
table gives an illustration of the rate of alteration in such a case, be-
ginning with four drone cells of the usual size, and ending with four
worker cells.

Four drone cells measured in the

1st

row

2d

3d

4th

5th

6th

1.02

inch,

0.97

0.95

0.86

0.83

0.80

This last measurement exactly equals that of four worker cells.
The rate of the reduction of the size of the cell is not uniform, the dif-
ferences between successive rows being .05, .02, .01, .03, ,03 inch. We
have, however, seen the transition made with two rows of transitional
Fig. 5. cells, and as in Fig. 5, with only one. In

this last case, the regularity of two adjoin-
ing rows is sacrificed.

In consequence of the gradual narrow-
ing or widening of the transition cells, the
comb tends to become more or less triangu-
lar and the cells to become disturbed. The
bees counteract this tendency by the occasional intercalation of an addi-
tional row, of which two instances are given in Fig. 6, at a and Z>, where
three rows of worker cells are continuous with two of drone cells, c d
and ef; or, reversing the statement, and supposing the transition, as in
the building of the comb, is from worker to drone cells, a row of the
latter is from time to time omitted as the rows a and b; in this way,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 9, 1866.

79

Fig. a.

the regularity of the comb is preserved.* This, however, is not done
at definite intervals ; for in one piece of comb two intercalated series
were nine cells apart, in another, six, and in another, four.

Mr. Langstroth has given a good figure, illustrating the form of the
mouths of some of the cells where the worker and drone cells come

together.!

The presence of a fourth face in the base of the transitional cells is
by no means constant, as asserted by several observers, for we have
seen the change from worker to drone cells without the fourth face
appearing in any of them.

In all the transitional cells of brood-comb cocoons are invariably
found, showing that they have been occupied. It is obvious that some
of these would be either too large for a worker or too small for a

* This figure was made from a piece of old brood-comb, in which the lip of the
drone cells was very much thickened, and the mouths were almost circular. Tiiere
is nothing abnormal in this, except at those points where the row of intercalated
cells, as a and h, connect with the drone cells.

t Treatise on the Bee, p. 74 and PI. XV. jj

80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

diouc. It would, therefore, be of considerable interest to know wheth-
er such cells are occupied by one or the other of these kinds of bees.
The determination of this point is important on another account. Sie-
bold has ascertained that drones do not require impregnation, while
the workers as well as the queens do ; and as the act of impregnation
is voluntary with the queen, she is supposed to have some guide to in-
form her whether a given egg is to become one or the other kind, for
she never makes a mistake and impregnates an egg in a drone cell, or
omits to impregnate one in a worker cell. Siebold, therefore, supposes
that the queen is guided by the size of the mouth of the cell, and if
the abdomen touches one kind, impregnation takes place, and if the
other, not. The transitional cells being intermediate, would not by
their size give her the usual indication.

Honey Cells. — When the stock of honey becomes greater than the
ordinary brood cells wiU contain, the bees either enlarge these, or add
to them other cells often of larger capacity, or construct a new comb,
devoted entirely to the storing of honey. "While the cells of this last
are built unequivocally in accordance with the hexagonal type, they
exhibit a range of variation from it which almost defies description.
Of all who have written on the subject, Mr. Langstroth is the only one
we have met with who seems to have particularly mentioned their ir-
regularity, which he does in the following words : " Those [cells] in
which the honey is stored vary greatly in depth, while in diameter
they are of all sizes, from that of a worker to that of drone cells." *
We have found them even 2.10 inches in depth, or four times that of a
worker cell ; sometimes they are square or pentagonal ; their align-
ment is rarely if ever exact, so that the presence of a fourth face is
more common than with the other kinds. The basal pyramid changes
constantly ; the cast of a piece of comb, containing over four hundred
cells, showed but few in which there was not some irregularity obvious
to the eye ; either the faces were unequal, or there was a fourth, and
even a fifth face, or the pyramid was too high or too low, or sup{)ressed,
or the body of the cell was not equilateral, or its angles too large or
too small. The normal angle which one side makes with its adjoining
ones is 120° ; the following measurements, taken from casts of average
specimens, exhibit a degree of variation by no means unusual.

* On the Honey-Bee, p. 74. New York, 1859.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 9, 1866.

81

Angles.

CELLS.

I.

n.

III.

IV.

o

o

c

o

1

117

117

112

113

2

122

124

127

130

3

121

116

120

122

4

110

119

114

110

5

135

125

125

126

6

115

118

121

117

Largest angle, 135°.0

Average of the 24 angles, 119°.5
Smallest, 110°.0

The above measurements were made with an accurate goniometer;
those of cells I. and II. by Professor Cooke, and of III. and IV. by the
author, and each is the average of three ; but, in nearly every case, there
is an error of from one to three degrees, which is inseparable from the
measurement of surfaces and angles which are not exact.

When honey cells are built on a curved dividing wall, the bees seem
to make no attempt to correct the effect of the converging and diverg-
ing hnes. In the brood-combs they usually make an attempt, at least,
to keep the cavity of the cells of the usual shape ; but in the honey-
comb we have seen the mouths of the cell in one diameter expanded
to double their usual size. The most of the irregularities seem to
have no obvious cause, but all looks as if the bees, aware that close
conformity to the type-form was unnecessary for. the mere storing of
honey, became careless in executing their work.

The distribution of the wax in the sides and angles of the cells, as
seen in the sections, appears to the naked eye quite regular ; but, with
the aid of a low power, is often quite the reverse. One can easily detect
an inequality in the thickness of the walls, — two different walls of the
same cell, or two parts of one and the same wall being not unfrequent-
ly the one double the thickness of the other. The excavation of the
angles, though sometimes wonderfully exact, is frequently done in such
a way that the apices of opposite angles do not correspond. This ig
equally true of all of the three kinds of cells. In the cells, and still
better in the casts of them, one can easily observe the fact that, the
edges of the sides are never exactly planes, and that consequently the
line of union of two adjoining sides is somewhat undulating.

The statements made in the foregoing pages tend to show that the

VOL. VII. 11

.82 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

cell of the bee has not the strict conformity to geometrical accuracy so
often claimed for it, but, as the best observers have maintained, is liable
to marked variations, chief among which the following may be men-
tioned.

1st. The diameters of worker cells may so vary, that ten of them
may have an aggregate deviation from the normal quantity, equal to
the diameter of a cell. The average variation is a little less than one
half that amount, viz. nearly 0.10 inch, in the same number of cells.

2d. The width of the sides varies, and this generally involves a va-
riation of the angles which adjoining sides make with each other, since
the sides vary not only in length, but in direction.

3d. The variation in the diameters does not depend upon accidental
distortion, but upon the manner in which the cell was built.

4th. The relative size of the rhombic faces of the pyramidal base is
liJible to frequent variation, and this where the cells are not transitional
from one kind to another.

5th. When a fourth side exists in the basal pyramid, it may be in
consequence of irregularity in the size of the cells, or of incorrect
alignment of them on the two sides of the comb.

6th. Ordinarily, the error of alignment does not amount to more
than one or two diameters of a cell. But occasionally the rows of
cells on one side of the comb may deviate from their true direction
with regard to those on the other, to the extent of 30°. In conse-
quence of this deviation and the continual crossing of the rows on op-
posite sides, the pyramidal base is not made, and the cell is thereby
shortened.

7th. When a piece of comb is strongly curved, or two portions
form an angle with each other, there is no constant way in which the
tendency to the distortion of the cells is met ; consequently the cells
found at the curves or angles have a variety of patterns.

8th. Deformed worker and drone cells are used for rearing; the

-"o

young.

All of these variations are found in the three different kinds of cells,
but are much more frequent and marked in the honey than in either
worker or drone cells. In view of the frequency of such, however
neai; the bee may come to a typical cell in the construction of its comb,
it may be reasonably doubted whether a type cell is ever made. Here,
as is so often the case elsewhere in nature, the type-form is an ideal
one, and, with this, real forms seldom or never coincide. Even in crys-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 31, 1866. 83

tallography, where the forms are essentially geometrical, we are told
that " natural crystals are always more or less distorted or imperfect,"
and that " the science of crystallography could never have been devel-
oped from observation alone " ; * i. e. without recourse to ideal concep-
tions. An assertion, like that of Lord Brougham, that there is in the
cell of the bee " perfect agreement " between theory and observation,
in view of the analogies of nature, is far more likely to be wrong than
right ; and his assertion in the case before us is certainly wrong.
Much error would have been avoided, if those who have discussed the
structure of the bee's cell had adopted the plan followed by Mr. Darwin,
and studied the habits of the cell-making insects comparatively, begin-
ning with the cells of the humble-bee, following with those of the wasps
and hornets, then with those of the Mexican bees (Melipona), and, final-
ly, with those of the common hive-bee. In this way, while they would
have found that there is a constant approach to the perfect form, they
would at the same time have been prepared for the fact, that even in
the cell of the hive-bee perfection is not reached. The isolated study
of anything in natural history is a fruitful source of error.

Since bees give so much variety to the forms of their cells, and can
adapt them to peculiar circumstances, some of which do not occur in
nature, as, for example, in Hubei-'s experiment with the glass surface,
which last they so persistently avoided, and in view of the fact, too,
that in meeting a given emergency they do not always adopt the same
method, one is driven to the conclusion that the instinct of one and the
same species either is not uniform in its action and is quite adaptive in
its quality, or to admit, with Reaumer, that bees work with a certain
degree of intelligence.

Five hnndred and sixty-first Meetiii^^.

January 31, 1866. — Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read letters from Prof. Tayler
Lewis, Mr. L. M. Rutherfurd, Dr. J. W. Draper, Mr. G. W.
Hill, and M. Chasles, in acknowledgment of their election
into the Academy.

The President read a letter from Mr. Richard Greenough,
presenting to the Academy a bust of Sir Charles Lyell.

* Professor Cooke, Religion and Chemistry, p. 287.

84 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

In acknowledgment of this gift, it was voted, That the
thanks of the Academy be presented to Mr. Greenough for
his very valuable and acceptable present.

The report of the Rumford Committee, referred to this
meeting, was taken up, and, in accordance with its recommen-
dation, it was voted, That the Rumford Committee may re-
ceive from Mr. 0. N. Rood the results of his investigations on
" Photometry," instead of those on " the Physical Relations
of the Iodized Plate to Light," for which an appropriation
from the Rumford fund was made at the meeting of Septem-
ber, 1863.

The following gentlemen were elected members of the
Academy : —

Hon. Erastus B. Bigelow, of Boston, to be Resident Fellow
in Class III., Section 3.

Mr. Henry Mitchell, of Lynn, to be Resident Fellow, in
Class L, Section 2.

Rev. Barnas Sears, President of Brown University, to be
Associate Fellow, in Class III., Section 2.

Prof. Asahel C. Kendrick, of Rochester, N. Y., to be Asso-
ciate Fellow, in Class III., Section 2.

Mr. Arthur Cayley, of London, to be Foreign Honorary
Member, in Class I., Section 1, in place of the late Sir Wil-
liam Rowan Hamilton.

M. Delauney, of Paris, to be Foreign Honorary Member, in
Class I., Section 1, in place of the late Sir J. W. Lubbock.

Dr. Joseph Dalton Hooker to be Foreign Honorary Member,
in Class II., Section 2, in place of the late Sir William Jack-
son Hooker.

Mr. C. M. Warren presented the following communica-
tion : —

On a Neio Process of Organic Elementary Analysis for Sub-
stances containing- Chlorine. By C. M. Warren.

Organic bodies containing chlorine — and probably those also, that
contain bromine and iodine — may be analyzed by a process analogous

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 31, 1866. 85

to that which I have already described for substances containing sul-
phur.*

As in that process, so also in this, the substance is burnt in a stream
of oxygen gas, in the manner described in my first paper, on Organic
Elementary Analysis.!

Similarly, also, as in the analysis of sulphur compounds, the chlo-
rine is absorbed and retained during the combustion, by a suitable sub-
stance placed in the anterior end of the combustion tube ; this substance
being subsequently removed, and the chlorine determined therefrom in
the usual manner. The carbon and hydrogen, in either process, are
determined from the same portion of the substance as the sulphur or
chlorine, in a manner similar in other respects to that described for
simple hydrocarbons. +

In pursuing this research some difficulty was experienced, as was
anticipated, in finding a substance which would absorb and retain the
whole of the chlorine, under conditions that would at the same time
insure that every trace of the carbonic acid and water should pass
through unabsorbed.

The search for this substance was confined to the oxides of the heavy
metals, as these alone, from their strong affinity for chlorine, and weak
affinity for carbonic acid, seemed to give encouragement of success.

The difficulty, however, in finding such a substance was chiefly due
to the circumstance that most of the chlorides of these metals are either
too volatile, or begin to suffer decomposition at too low a temperature ;
it being requisite that the absorbing substance, and the newly formed
chloride of the same, should bear to be heated sufficiently to prevent
both condensation of water and absorption of carbonic acid, and at the
same time avoid a temperature high enough to occasion any apprecia-
ble decomposition of the chlorid.

This question of temperature became, therefore, a prominent one in
the investigation, as evidently the success of the process must depend,
in a great degree, on the proper management of the temperature of
the absorbing substance, within such limits as might be found to give
satisfactory results. Hence, my first step was to devise means to se-

* Proceedings of the American Academy, March, 1865; American Journal of
Science and Arts, 1866, XLI. 40.

t Proceedings of the American Academy, 1864, p. 251 ; American Journal of
Science and Arts, 1864, XXXVIII. 387.

t Lo<\ cit.

86

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

cure the necessary control of the temperature of that part of tb.e
corahustion tube which should contain this substance.

For this purpose was constructed a sheet-iron air-bath or chamber,
A, Fig. 1, provided with two holes — one in each side — to receive

Fig. 1.

the combustion tube, and a tubulure in the top for a thermometer. One
end of the air-bath is made to rest on the combustion furnace, and the
other, which projects a few inches from the front of the furnace to
make room for a lamp, is supported by a leg resting upon the table.
The bulb of the thermometer is placed in a central position, in the in-
terior of the bath, close by the side of the combustion tube.

The temperature of the air-bath, and consequently of the substance
contained in the combustion tube within, is easily regulated by means
of a Bunsen's burner placed under the front end of the bath, as shown
in Fig. 1. With the exception of the air-bath, the apparatus employed
is the same as that used in the analysis of substances containing sul-
phur, a full description of which is given in the papers above referred
to.

The substance that I have found best adapted to absorb the chlorine,
for substances easily combustible, is brown oxide of copper, prepared
by precipitation with potassa and ignition over a gas flame.

Difficultly combustible substances, like chloroform, are not complete-
ly burnt in oxygen in contact with asbestos alone, but require the pres-
ence of a body having affinity for chlorine ; otherwise there is formed
a liquid body, difficultly volatile, — probably a chloride of carbon,
— which condenses in the vacant part of the tube, from b to c, Fig. 2,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 31, 1866.

87

a

and which cannot be entirely burnt off and save the analysis. In
such cases the absorbing substance is dixed with the asbestos occupy-
ing the back part of the tube, where the combustion takes place. It is
evident that oxide of copper would not answer for this purpose, as at so
high a temperature dichloride of copper would be formed, which, being
insoluble in dilute acids, would interfere with the determination of the
chlorine. Oxide of zinc has been found to give good results with such
substances.

The preparation of the combustion tube, and the arrangement of the
mixture of asbestos and the absorbing substance, is the same — except
in the case last mentioned — as in the analysis of substances containing
sulphur, as shown in Fig. 2, viz. the space between a and 5, about
10 inches in length, is Fig. 2.

packed with pure asbes-
tos ; between h and c, — a
space of about two inches,
— being left vacant, a plug
of asbestos is placed at c ;
the space between c and J, 4 to 5 inches in length, is filled with an
intimate mixture of asbestos and brown oxide of copper ; and, finally, a
plug of asbestos is placed at d.

After the combustion, the chloride, together
with the excess of oxide, is extracted from the
asbestos by means of dilute nitric acid.

To facilitate the removal of what may ad-
here to the sides of the tube, the apparatus
shown in Fig. 3 will be found serviceable, as
in the analysis of sulphur compounds.

I. Experiments with Oxide of Lead and with
Oxide of Copper, placed in the anterior
end of the combustion tube, as absorbents
of Chlorine in the analysis of substances
difficidtly combustible.

The substance selected for analysis, as a test
of the process for that class of bodies which
are difiicultly combustible, containing but a small
percentage of hydrogen, was commercial chloro-
form. The preparation employed was first subjected to redistillation.

Fig. 3.

88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Its boiling-point was found to agree essentially with that assigned to
pure chloroform in Gerhardt's 2'raite de Ohiinie. When the usual tests
were applied, no impurity could be detected.

Experiment 1. — A mixture of oxide of lead and asbestos was placed
in the anterior end of the combustion tube, between c and d, Fig. 2,
as previously described. As chloride of lead was supposed to bear a
pretty high temperature, without volatilization or decomposition, the
use of the air-bath was omitted in this experiment, and the oxide gen-
tly heated with a small flame from the combustion furnace. The com-
bustion had not proceeded far, when it became apparent, from deposi-
tion of minute drops of liquid on the sides of the vacant part of the
tube, — from h to c, Fig. 2, — that the combustion of the chloroform
was incomplete, although no doubt could exist as to the presence
of an excess of oxygen. This deposit of liquid, which, as already
stated, was supposed to be a chloride of carbon, was found to be dif-
ficultly volatile, suffering partial decomposition, and leaving on the
tube a brown deposit, which was not entirely removed by ignition in a
stream of oxygen. The high temperature employed to burn off this
deposit occasioned excessive heating of the posterior end of the mix-
ture of lead oxide and asbestos ; and this may have been the cause, to
some extent, of the excess in the determinations of carbon and hydro-
gen, although subsequent analyses indicate that the sample of chloro-
form under examination contained a larger percentage of these ele-
ments— particularly of the latter — than belongs to pure chloroform.
This experiment gave 11.47 per cent of carbon, and 1.87 per cent of
hydrogen. Theory gives 10.07 per cent of carbon, and 0.85 per cent
of hydrogen. The mixture of asbestos and oxide and chloride of lead
was removed from the tube, and treated in the usual manner with a
solution of bicarbonate of soda to obtain a soluble chloride. This op-
eration was found extremely tedious. Even after treatment for more
than two weeks, with occasional fresh portions of the bicarbonate and
frequent agitation, the decomposition of the lead chloride was still found
to be incomplete, and the operation was abandoned. As this is given
in the text-books as a good process for the separation of chlorine from
chloride of lead,* I am led to presume that in this case the excess of
heat employed gave rise to the formation of an oxychloride, which is,
doubtless, more slowly acted upon by the bicarbonate. Tlris single

-

=* H. Rose, Chimie Aualytique, new French edition, p. 801.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 31, 1866. 89

experiment does not, therefore, prove that oxide of lead may not be
employed in this process with good results, when used for easily com-
bustible substances, and excessive heat is avoided. But it will, un-
questionably, be found preferable to use a substance which will give
directly a soluble chloride.

Experiment 2. — This experiment was conducted as the last, with
only this difference, viz. that oxide of copper was substituted for
the oxide of lead. No better results, however, were obtained. The
reappearance of the difficultly volatile liquid in the vacant part of the
tube, while there was assurance of there being no deficiency in the
supply of oxygen, served to confirm the impression gained by the pre-
ceding experiment, — that chloroform could not be completely burnt in
oxygen alone, but that a substance having affinity for chlorine would
have to be mixed with the asbestos, at the point where the combustion
takes place.

II. Experiments with Oxide of Zinc, mixed with the asbestos in the
posterior part of the combustion tube, as absorbent of Chlorine in
the analysis of substances difficultly combustible.

As already indicated, the chief object of this set of experiments
was to determine whether the presence, at the point where combustion
takes place, of an oxide capable of combining with the chlorine would
have the effect to prevent the formation of the difficultly volatile liquid
above mentioned, and thus remedy that defect in the process.

Experiment 1. — In this experiment, three grammes of oxide of zinc
were intimately mixed in a mortar with the quantity of asbestos neces-
sary to fill the space between a and b. Fig. 2, and that part of the tube
then packed with this mixture in the usual manner. A similar mix-
ture composed of asbestos and only one gramme of oxide of zinc was
placed between c and d. The space between b and c was still left va-
cant, in order to be able to observe the effect. On account of the vol-
atility of the chloride of zinc, it was deemed advisable to retain the
use of the air-bath to control the temperature of the anterior portion
of the combustion tube, which, in this experiment, was not allowed to
exceed 160° C. The result was, as anticipated, that no such conden-
sation of' liquid between b and c occurred. In order to gain from this
experiment some idea of the degree of volatility of chloride of zinc
under such circumstances, the two columns of asbestos were treated for

VOL. VII. 12

90 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

chlorine, separately. The solution obtained from the anterior column
was found to contain but a trace of chlorine, giving only a milkiness
with nitrate of silver ; showing that the chloride of zinc does not travel
far through a column of asbestos from the point where the flame plays
directly on the tube.

Results of the Analysis. — 0.2067 gramme of chloroform gave 0.0798
of carbonic acid, 0.0276 of water, and 0.7372 of chloride of silver.

Calculated. Found.

10.5273
1.4514

88.0455

Carbon

Q

Hydrogen

H

Chlorine

CI3

12

10.0671

1

0.8473

106.2

89.0856

100. 100.0242

Experiment 2. — In this experiment, the whole length of the com-
bustion tube from a to d was packed with a mixture of asbestos and
four grammes of oxide of zinc. The temperature of the anterior end
of the combustion tube was regulated, as in the previous experiment,
by means of the air-bath.

Results of the Analysis. — 0.1339 gramme of chloroform gave
0.0506 of carbonic acid, 0.0156 of water, and 0.4768 of chloride of
silver.

Calculated. Found.

10.3062

1.2733

87.9014

100. 99.4809

These two analyses, agreeing as they do so closely, indicate that the
chloroform analyzed contained larger percentages of carbon and hy-
drogen, — especially of the latter, — and a correspondingly smaller
percentage of chlorine than the theoretical quantities ; occasioned,
probably, by the presence of some impurity. This view is supported by
calculations made on the assumption that the excess might have arisen
from volatilization of chloride of zinc, or from incomplete absorption
of the chlorine ; which would make the chloroform contain from two to
six per cent more than the theoretical quantity of chlorine. These re-
sults are regarded, therefore, as satisfactorily establishing the utility of
this process in the analysis of chloroform. But the analysis of this

Carbon

C2

12

10.0671

Hydrogen

H

1

0.8473

Chlorine

Cls

106.2

89.0856

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 31, 1866. 91

body, containing as it does eighty-nine per cent of chlorine, and only
eighty-five* hundredths of one per cent of hydrogen, must be considered
as an extreme case, and does not prove the process a good one for
other classes of substances.

The next step, therefore, was to determine whether the process would
be equally efficient in the analysis of substances rich in hydrogen, the
combustion of which would give rise to the formation of a large quan-
tity of hydrochloric acid. The substance selected for analysis, to settle
this question, was chloride of amyl.

III. Experiments with Oxide of Zinc, as an absorbent of Chlorine in
the analysis of substances rich in Hydrogen.

In these experiments, the oxide of zinc was employed in the same
manner as above described for the analysis of chloroform. The chloride
of amyl, which was the subject of aftalysis, was prepared in the usual
manner. Its boiling-point was 102°, 8 corrected.

The following results of two analyses with oxide of zinc indicate
that this oxide combined with and retained some of the carbonic acid.
This result was not anticipated, as in the analysis of chloroform the
determination of carbon was uniformly slightly in excess.*

The Results of these two analyses are as follows : — ,

1. — 0.1922 gramme of chloride of amyl gave 0.3513 of carbonic
acid, 0.1854 of water, and 0.2528 of chloride of silver.

*= Since the above was written, I have observed, on reviewing my notes, — not
only of experiments with oxide of zinc, but also with oxide of copper, — that in ev-
ery analysis in which I made note of carbonization, or blackening of the asbestos in
the combustion tube, — which may sometimes occur from too rapid distillation of
the substance, or, what amounts to the same thing, a deficiency in the supply of
oxygen, — there was a loss in the determination of the carbon, and generally, also,
in that of the chlorine ; while the hydrogen would agree pretty nearly with the theo-
retical quantity. I am, therefore, at the present writing, inclined to suspect that
the carbonization may have had some connection with the deficiency in the carbon
determinations in these instances, although the blackening would readily and com-
pletely disappear so soon as a sufiiciency of oxygen was supplied. This momenta-
ry blackening of the asbestos occurred in both of the analyses of chloride of amyl
with oxide of zinc, but, as already intimated, was not regarded at the time of serious
consequence, as similar phenomena in the analysis of hydrocarbons by my process
were generally attended with good results. It may, therefore, remain an open
question, whether the oxide of zinc may not serve a good purpose in the analysis of
substances of the class now under consideration.

92 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Calculated. Found.

Carbon Qo 60 56.3910 " 49.85

Hydrogen Hu 11 10.3383 10.72

Chlorine CI 35.4 33.2707 32.47

100. 93.04

2. — 0.1657 gramme of chloride of amyl gave 0.3314 of carbonic
acid and 0.1608 of water.

Cio

Calculated.

Found.

Carbon

60 56.3910-

54.56

Hydrogen

H„

11 10.3383

10.74

Chlorine

CI

35.4 33.2707

IV. Experiments with Oxide of Copper, as absorbent of Chlorine in
the analysis of substances rich in Hydrogen.

•

In these experiments, for the reason previously stated, the oxide of

copper could only be placed in the anterior end of the combustion tube,
where it might be maintained at a tolerably low temperature. After
two or three experiments, — which were but partially successful, — it
became apparent that the range of temperature Vithin which oxide of
copper could be made serviceable to absorb the chlorine was probably
rather limited.

It was observed, for example, that at 150° to 160° even brown oxide
of copper, which had been but gently ignited, would fail to absorb
nearly all of the chlorine, and consequently the determination of the
carbon, -and sometimes that of the hydrogen, would be in excess. In
one experiment, in which the oxide of copper was kept at about 153° C,
its appearance had suffered no change, and it was found to contain only
8.29 per cent of chlorine, or only about one quarter of the theoretical
quantity. When a sufficiently high temperature is employed, on the
contrary, the posterior end of the column of oxide of copper and asbes-
tos has the appearance of being entirely changed into yellow chloride
of copper, the rest of the column remainingj for the most part, of its
original dark color.

In another experiment, with the oxide of copper kept at a tempera-
ture of about 160°, only about fourteen per cent of chlorine was obtained.

In both of these experiments the carbon determination was consid-
erably in excess, and in one of them the hydrogen also. The oxide of
copper employed had been strongly ignited.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 31, 1866. 93

Before proceeding further with these somewhat random experiments,
it was deemed advisable to determine the temperature at which chloride
of copper begins to give off chlorine, in order to know how far it
would be safe to raise the temperature of the air-bath in conducting
an analysis. By making use of the air-bath to regulate the tempera-
ture of the chloride of copper, this determination was easily made.
During the heating of the chloride, a current of air from the air-gasom-
eter was admitted through the tube in which it was contained.

* Observations. — At 243°, not a perceptible trace of chlorine was
given off. After the lapse of fifteen minutes, at 250°, the nitrate of
silver, into which the gas was conducted, was observed to be slightly
milky ; this may, therefore, be taken as about the temperature at which
chloride of copper begins to suffer decomposition. At 267°, a solution
of nitrate of silver was instantly precipitated.

Thinking that perhaps the small quantity of chlorine evolved under
these circumstances might be taken up again and retained if oxide of
copper were present, and possibly, also, that in that case a higher tem-
perature might be safely employed, — to make the conditions of the
experiment conform in this particular to those which exist in an analy-
sis, all but one inch of the chloride of copper was removed from the
tube, and in its place was put a mixture of asbestos and oxide of cop-
per, occupying a space of four inches in length, forward of the chloride.
The experiment was then repeated. Prolonged heating in a current of
air, and afterwards in oxygen, during which the thermometer rose to
350°, produced no reaction with nitrate of silver. From this it ap-
pears that the chlorine, which is given off below this temperature from
chloride of copper, when this is mixed with oxide of copper, is absorbed
and retained by the latter ; hence, that so high a temperature as 350°
may be safely employed for the air-bath in conducting an analysis by
this process.

Analysis 1. — In this analysis the oxide of copper employed was
prepared in the ordinary way and strongly ignited. The space in the
tube occupied by the mixture of asbestos and oxide of copper was five
inches in length, and contained just five grammes of the oxide. Dur-
ing the experiment, the temperature of the air-bath was maintained at
about 350°. At tlie close of the combustion there was no appearance
of chloride of copper, except in the first half-inch at the back end of the
column of the mixture of oxide of copper and asbestos ; showing that
the temperature employed was favorable for rapid and complete absorp-
tion of the chlorine.

94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY .

Results of the Analysis. — 0.1 G82 gramme of chloride of amyl gave
0.3486 of carbonic acid, 0.1633 of water, and 0.2233 of chloride of
silver.

Calculated. Found.

Carbon C^ . ^60 56.3910 56.522

Hydrogen Hn 11 10.3383 10.761.

Chlorine CI 35.4 33.2707 32.773

100. 100.056

Analysis 2. — The oxide of copper employed was of the same prep-
aration as that used in Analysis 1. The space occupied by the mixture
of asbestos and oxide of copper was only 3^ inches in length, but con-
tained the same quantity, viz. 5 grammes of the oxide of copper, as
used in the previous analysis. The temperatui-e of the air-bath ranged
from ^50° to 253°. At the close of the combustion, it was found that
all but f inch at the forward end of the column of mixed asbestos and
oxide of copper had the appearance of containing chloride of copper.
By comparison with the corresponding observation in Analysis 1, it will
be seen that the appearance of the chloride extends over more than five
times the space in this analysis as in the former, showing that with
strongly ignited oxide of copper a temperature higher than 250°, even
as high as 350°, is more favorable for the absorption of the chlorine.
The following results of the analysis, however, are equally accurate
with those of the preceding analysis.

0.1669 gramme of chloride of amyl gave 0.3457 of carbonic acid,
0.1612 of water, 0.2213 of chloride of silver.

Calculated. Found.

Carbon C^ 60 56.3910 56.489

Hydrogen Hu 11 10.3383 10.785

Chlorine CI 35.4 33.2707 32.732

. 100. 100.006

Analysis 3. — Under the impression that an oxide of copper which
had been less strongly ignited might be effectual to absorb the chlorine
at a lower temperature, I employed in this and the two following
analyses a preparation of brown oxide of copper, obtained by precipi-
tation with potash and ignition over an ordinary gas flame. In this
analysis the temperature of the air-bath ranged from 150° to 158°.
The space occupied by the asbestos mixture was four inches in length,

OF AETS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 31, 1866. 95

and contained three grammes of the oxide. Although the results of
the analysis indicate that the temperature of the air-bath was too low,
they also show, by comparison with the results obtained in operating
with strongly ignited oxide at about the same temperature of the air-
bath (see p. 92), that the brown oxide is decidedly preferable in re-
spect to the temperature required. This was also shown by the ap-
pearance of the oxide after combustion, — the newly formed chloride
being confined, in the case of the brown oxide, to a much shorter space.
Results of the Analysis. — 0.1640 gramme of chloride of amyl gave
0.3504 of carbonic dcid, 0.1562 of water, and 0.1884 of chloride of
silver.

Calculated. Found.

Carbon Cio 60 56.3910 58.268

Hydrogen Hu 11 10.3383 10.582

Chlorine CI 35.4 33.2707 28.360 .

100. 97.210

Analysis 4. — Used the same prejDaration of oxide of copper as in
Analysis 3, viz. the brown oxide. Temperature of the air-bath reached
170°. Shght carbonization occurred just at the close of the combus-
tion, from extending the heat backward too soon, under a wrong impres-
sion that the substance was all burnt. Were it not for this circum-
stance, it is believed that this would have been a good analysis, although
the temperature of the air-bath was kept so low. That a higher tem-
perature of the bath is desirable, however, is shown by the fact that
the chloride of copper appeared diffused over a space of 2|- inches.
The length of the column of mixed asbestos and oxide of copper was
only four inches in this experiment, containing but one gramme of the
oxide.

Results of the Analysis. — 0.1568 gramme of chloride of amyl gave
0.3195 of carbonic acid, and 0.1522 of water.

Cio

Cal

culated.

Found.

Cai'bon

60

56.3910

55.574

Hydrogen

Hu

11

10.3383

10.784

Chlorine

CI

35.4

33.2707

Analysis 5. — The oxide of copper employed was of the same prep-
aration as that of Analyses 3 and 4. The temperature of the air-bath,
however, was considerably higher, ranging from 240° to 247°. The

96 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

mixture of asbestos and oxide of copper occupied a space of five inclieg
in length, but contained only two grammes of the oxide. At the close
of the combustion there was no appearance of chloride of copper, except
at the back end of the column, a space f of an inch in length.

Results of the Analysis. — 0.1631 gramme of chloride of amyl gave
0.3383 of carbonic acid, 0.1557 of water, and 0.2157 of chloride of
silver.

Calculated. Found.

Carbon

Cio

60

56.3910

56.542

Hydrogen

Hu

11

10.3383

10.607

Chlorine

CI

35.4

33.2707

32.649

100. 99.798

It can hardly have escaped observation, that the quantity of oxide of
copper or oxide of zinc required to absorb the chlorine by this process
is extremely small, in consequence of its being uniformly diffused
through a large mass of asbestos ; hence it is obvious that but little of
a solvent is needed to extract the chloride. In this respect the new
process bears a striking contrast to the old one, which involves the use
of a large quantity of lime, necessitating a corresponding quantity of
acid, and introducing disagreeable manipulation, which tend to in-
crease the liability to error.

I have not yet tried the process recently described by Carius,* as
the difficulty which I had found in obtaining tubes that would bear the
pressure incident to his process for the determination of sulphur gave
no encouragement of better success in the use of his process for the
determination of chlorine, which is performed in a similar manner,
although more complicated.

The advantage which my process affords, of being able to determine
the three elements carbon, hydrogen, and chlorine at a single combus-
tion, without the introduction of any difficult or hazardous manipula-
tion, induces the belief that it will be found preferable to any other
that has been devised.

* Annalen der Chimie uad Pharmacie.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MARCH 6, 1866. 97

Five hundred and sixty-second Meeting.

February 13, 1866. — Monthly Meeting.

The Vice-President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read letters relative to ex-
changes.

Professor Washburn read a paper on the nature of the tes-
timony of experts in courts of law ; and he suggested that a
legislative remedy might be found for the abuses to which the
employment of expert witnesses by the parties in a suit fre-
quently leads. A discussion of the questions raised in this
paper then followed, in which the following gentlemen took
part: Dr. C. T. Jackson, Professor H. R. Storer, Professor
C. W. Eliot, Professor Parsons, and Dr. J. Bigelow. *

Five hundred and sixty-third Meeting.

March 6, 1866. — Special Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of the Right Rev. John B. Fitzpatrick, of the
Resident Fellows.

Professor Washburn gave a recapitulation of his paper, read
at the previous meeting, on the testimony of experts.

A discussion of this subject then followed, in which Pro-
fessor Parker, Judge Bigelow, Mr. G. B. Emerson, Professor
Bowen, Dr. Jarvis, Professor H. R. Storer, and Dr. Pickering
took part.

On the motion of Professor H. R. Storer it was voted. That
a committee be appointed to consider and report upon the sub-
ject of this discussion. .

Pending the appointment of this committee the meeting
adjourned.

VOL. VTI. 13

98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Five bundred and sixty-fourth Meeting.

March 13, 1866. — Adjourned Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read letters relative to the
exchanges.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Mr. Jonathan P. Hall of Boston, of the Resi-
dent Fellows.

In accordance with the recommendation of the Finance Com-
mittee it was voted, That the additional sum of five hundred
dollars be appropriated for paper and printing, to be ex-
pended by the Publication Committee during the current
year.

A committee was appointed, in accordance with the vote of
the previous meeting, to consider and report upon the subject
of expert testimony in courts of law ; viz. Chief Justice Bige-
low, Professor Washburn, Professor H. R. Storer, Dr. Tyler,
Professor Rogers, Professor Horsford, and Professor J. Wyman.

Five hundred and slxty-Afth Meeting.

April 10, 1866. — Monthly Meeting.

The PresidiJnt in the chair.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Dr. Jared Sparks, of the Resident Fellows,
of Dr. Charles Beck, Vice-President of the Academy, and of
Dr. Whewell, of the Foreign Honorary Members.

The Secretary read a letter from the Treasurer of the Boston
Athenaeum to the Treasurer of the Academy, informing the
Academy of the termination, on the 1st of July next, of the
lease of the Academy's Hall, and notifying the Academy that
the Trustees of the Athenaeum propose to take possession of
the Hall, after that date, for the use of the Atheneeum.

On the motion of Mr. Bowditch the subject of this commu-
nication was referred to the Finance Committee, with powers to

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 10, 1866. 99

make such arrangements with the Boston Athenaeum as they
may find feasible and deem expedient.

On the motion of Mr. Paine it was voted that application be
made to the representatives of the late Jonathan P. Hall, for
the meteorological observations made by him during the past
nine years under the auspices of the Academy, and forming a
sequel to the observations of Mr. Hall already published by
the Academy.

Mr. Paine was appointed to make this application, and also
to receive the apparatus furnished by the Academy for Mr.
Hall's use.

Mr. C. M. Warren presented the following paper: —

Note on an Improved Apparatus for the Determination of
Vapor Densities by Gay-Lussac^s Method; being a Mod-
ification of Bunsen's Apparatus for measuring Aqueous
Vapor. By 0. M. Warren.

Having recently had occasion to employ the method of Gay-Lussac
for taking vapor densities, I decided to follow the lead of Carius,* and
substitute for this purpose the steam-bath apparatus, Fig. 1, devised by
Bunsen,t for measuring the aqueous vapor formed in the analysis of
gases, — this seeming to me preferable to the apparatus described by
Gay-Lussac. But when I came to use the apparatus which I had
constructed, in conformity, as I supposed, with that of Bunsen, I
found it defective in one particular. I allude to th& fact that, in con-
sequence of the accumulation of a stratum of water on the surface of
the mercury in the cup i, Fig. 1, in which the measuring-tube, e, stands
inverted, and also of an accumulation of water in dew-like drops on the
sides of this cup, and on the sides of the cylinder c c, it was found im-
possible to make an accurate reading of the lower level of mercury. J

As I was about to abandon the use of this apparatus and resort to
that of Gay-Lussac, it occurred to me that the defect above mentioned

* Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie, CXIX. 316.

t Gasometrische Methode, p. 52 ; English edition, p. 47.

I It is but just to remark, that my apparatus may have been defective in its pro-
portions, — as dimensions were not given in Bunsen's description, — for it does not
appear that either Bunsen or Carius had any difficulty in making accurate observa-
tions with the apparatus that they employed.

100

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Fig

might be entirely remedied by supplying an additional cup, n, Fig. 2,

within the other; the inner cup
being of such capacity that the
mercury expelled from the meas-
uring-tube during an experi-
ment would be certain to cause
an overflow of mercury (no
matter how little) from the
inner into the outer cup. With
such an arrangement it is ob-
vious that at the time of meas-
urement the inner cup would be
always full of mercury, and con-
sequently that the latter would
always stand at the same level
on the measuring-tube ; hence
that this level may be previously
ascertained, once for all, and
thus obviate the necessity of
making this reading during an
experiment. It will then only
be required to make the single
reading at the upper level of
the mercurial column. The dif-
ference between this level and
the constant level, previously
ascertained, at the top of the mercury in the inner cup, will give di-
^•e- 2. rectly the height of the column of mercury, which, corrected
for temperature, is to be deducted from that of the barometer
to find the pressure to which the vapor is subjected.

With this slight alteration of Bunsen's apparatus, it ap-
pears to me far preferable to the more complicated and
expensive apparatus of Gay-Liussac. It has not only the
advantage of greater simplicity, and of economy in the
quantity of mercury required, but recommends itself also
for its convenience, and the facility with which the vapor
may be brought to and maintained at a constant tempera-
ture.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 1, 1866. 101

Five hundred and sixty-sixth Meeting.

April 24, 1866. — Special Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President read a letter from Mr. Samuel F. Dalton, ad-
ministrator of the estate of the late Jonathan P. Hall, trans-
mitting to the Treasurer the sum of one hundred dollars, the
bequest of Mr. Hall to the Academy, " to be expended in pub-
lishing its memoirs and transactions."

On the motion of Professor Lovering it was voted. That the
thanks of the Academy be communicated to the representa-
tives of Mr. Jonathan P. Hall for this acceptable bequest.

On the motion of Professor Boweii a committee of six was
appointed to act with the Finance Committee on the subject
of the purchase or lease of a Hall for the use of the Academy.
The following gentlemen were appointed on this committee :
Mr. Loring, Dr. J. Bigelow, Mr. E. B. Bigelow, Mr. J, A.
Lowell, Mr. Andrews, and Professor Rogers.

Five hundred and sixty-seventh Meeting.

May 1, 1866. — Special Meeting.

The President in the chair.

Dr. J. Bigelow presented a report from the committee to
consider the purchase or lease of rooms for the Academy.

On the motion of Professor Lovering it was voted to con-
sider the subject of this report at the meeting to be held on
the 8th of May ; and the same committee was requested to
investigate the subject further.

Mr. Loring was excused from further service on this com-
mittee, and Professor Eliot was appointed in his place.

102 PaOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Five hundred and sixty-eigbth Meeting.

May 8, 1866. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read letters relative to ex-
changes ; also letters from the Reverend Barnas Sears, Pres-
ident of Brown University, and from Dr. Joseph Dalton
Hooker, Director of the Royal Gardens, Kew, in acknowl-
edgment of their election into the Academy.

Professor Loveriug reported, from the Committee of Publi-
cation, that Volume VI. of the Proceedings had been com-
pleted and was ready for distribution.

On the motion of Professor Levering it was voted, That the
sum of one hundred dollars bequeathed to the Academy by
the late Jonathan P. Hall, for the publication of its memoirs
and transactions, be appropriated to the publication of Mr.
Hall's meteorological observations.

Dr. Bigelow reported, from the committee to consider the
purchase or lease of rooms for the use of the Academy, that
no further action had been had on the subject.

On the motion of Mr. Bowditch the subject of this commit-
tee's previous report was indefinitely postponed, and the com-
mittee was discharged.

The whole subject of the accommodation of the Academy
was then referred to a new couimittee, consisting of Dr.
Bigelow, the Treasurer, Mr. Bowditch, Professor Cooke, Pro-
fessor Eliot, and Mr. J. A. Lowell.

Fl-ve hundred and sixty-ninth Meeting.

May 29, 1866. — Annual Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Treasurer presented his report, which was accepted and
referred to the Auditing Committee.

The Treasurer reported, from the committee to consider the
subject of a building for the accommodation of the Academy,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1866. 103

that negotiations were pending for the further lease of the
Hall now occupied by the Academy. The subject was recom-
mitted.

The Corresponding Secretary read, in abstract, the following

Report of the Council.

Through a wholly unprecedented mortality, the Academy has lost
during the past year seventeen members, among them its Vice-Presi-
dent and its Treasurer. Six of our deceased brethren were Resident
Fellows, three were Associates, and eight Foreign Honorary Mem-
bers.

Of the Resident Fellows thus removed, five were of the Third Class,
comprising the honored names of Spai"ks, Beck, Livermore, "Worcester,
and Fitzpatrick, and one, Mr. J. Patten Hall, was of the Second Class.

Jared Sparks was born at WilUngton, Connecticut, in 1789. His
boyhood was passed in the then usual pursuits, and with no more than
the then wonted opportunities and privileges of boys in the country.
He, however, early manifested a strong inclination and capacity for
mathematical study, and, with such aid as he could derive from stray
books on navigation that fell in his way, he attained to the calculation
of eclipses and other astronomical phenomena, and in one instance fur-
nished the mutanda for the year's almanac. He learned a carpenter's
trade, and connected with it the profession of a district schoolmaster.
With no distinct purpose other than that of qualifying himself for the
successful and honorable discharge of this last-named calling during
the winter months, he sought the tuition of his pastor, Rev. Mr. Loomis,
(afterward President of Shurtleff College, Illinois, and still living,) and
under his direction commenced a course of classical study, undertaking
to pay Mr. Loomis by shingling his barn. One day, when he was at
work on the barn, his teacher asked him to come into the house, and
construe a passage in Virgil in the hearing of Rev. Mr. Abbot, then
minister of Coventry. Mr. Abbot perceived at once the rich promise
that there was in the young carpenter, and wrote to his brother-in-law,
the principal of Exeter Academy, to solicit a scholarship for him. The
application was successful, and young Sparks walked to Exeter, more
than a hundred miles, in three days, Mr. Abbot (who with his wife
was meditating a visit to his brother and sister) conveying his trunk
behind his own chaise.

After a novitiate, in which he showed masterly power of acquisition,

104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

he entered Harvard College in 1811. Though his straitened circum-
stances made long absences for school-keeping necessary, and his health
at one time was greatly impaired, he yet maintained a high college
rank, and, in mathematics especially, was regarded as at the head of"
his class. After graduating in 1815, by invitation of the late Stephen
Higginson, Esq., he taught a private school at Lancaster, Massachu-
setts, in the parish of Rev. Dr. Thayer, with whom he commenced the
study of theology while engaged in the instruction of his sons. About
this time he thought seriously of devoting himself to the scientific ex-
ploration of unknown regions. Mungo Park's Travels had interested
him peculiarly in Africa, and arrangements were nearly completed for
his entering the service of an English society for African research.
The negotiation failed through no backwardness on his part, and from
causes which he never fully understood.

In 1817 he was recalled to Cambridge, as Tutor in Mathematics and
Natural Philosophy, and during the two years for which he held this
appointment he completed his preparation for the ministry. In 1819
he was ordained pastor of a new Unitarian Church in Baltimore.
Here he found himself unwillingly drawn into two separate controver-
sies, — one with liev. Mr. Wyatt, of Baltimore, on " The Ministry,
Ritual, and Doctrine of the Protestant Episcopal Church " ; the other
with Rev. Dr. Miller, of Princeton, on the " Comparative Moral Ten-
dency of Trinitarian and Unitarian Doctrines." The letters written in
these controversies respectively were published in separate volumes,
which, while they are monuments of their author's extensive learning
and marked polemic ability, are admirable for their genial temper, their
uniform courtesy, and their entire freedom from bitterness and invec-
tive. It is worthy of emphatic notice, that both of the divines who
were then his earnest antagonists became his warm personal friends.
He at the same time edited a monthly theological magazine, for which
he furnished the greater part of the materials. He also commenced
the editorship of a Collection of Theological Essays and Tracts by va-
rious authors, with biographical and critical notices by his own hand, —
a work undoubtedly suggested by that well-known series of tracts
bearing the name of Bishop Watson. This work was continued
through six volumes. During a portion of his residence in Baltimore
he served as Chaplain to the House of Representatives in Congress, at
a period when that office was not, as now, scrambled for by greedy
seeker^, but conferred unsought on the best man.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: MAY 29, 1866. 105

In 1823 he resigned his charge at Baltimore on account of enfeebled
health. He then removed to Boston, and became proprietor and
editor of the North American Review. During the seven years for
whicli this work was entirely, under his control, it reached a degree of
prosperity and an extended circulation which it has never equalled at
any subsequent time. In 1828 he published a " Life of John Ledyard,
the American Traveller."

Shortly after his removal from Baltimore he determined to attempt
the publication of "Washington's Life and Writings. In 1828 he spent
a year in Europe, employed principally in copying documents illustrar
tive of the history of the American Revolution in the public archives
of England and France. His great work appeared in twelve volumes,
in 1834-37. During its preparation, and chiefly from materials accu-
mulated in its furtherance, he published the " Life and Correspondence
of Gouverneur Morris," in three volumes, and the " Diplomatic Corre-
spondence of the American Revolution," in twelve volumes. The Amer-
ican Almanac, from the outset a work of national interest and impor-
tance, was also started by him, and he edited its first volume, — that for
1830. Simultaneously with the appearance of the first volume of his
Washington, he commenced the publication of his " Library of Ameri-
can Biography," which was continued through twenty-five volumes,
several of the memoirs having been written by himself, and all the rest
written by authors of his own procuring, and published under his imme-
diate supervision. In 1840 he completed, in ten volumes, his Life and
Writings of Franklin. In 1854 he published four volumes of the more
important Correspondence of the American Revolution. In these labors
he easily takes the lead of the historians of the United States. No
other man has approached him either in the amount or the value of
his contributions. He has done more, perhaps, than all others to
make it possible that a history of the American Revolution should be
written. His works bear abundant tokens of his conscientious faithful-
ness, his judiciousness as an historical critic, his freedom from preju-
dice and partiality, his perspicuity, grace, and dignity as a writer, his
sound judgment as an editor, and his skill in availing himself of tlie co-
operation of others. It is believed that no one has ever covered so
much ground with so few assailable points ; and the two or three in-
stances in which he has been called in question have only served to
bring into clearer view the patient industry, profound discretion, and

VOL. VII. 14

106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

single-hearted rectitude with which he had managed the many difficult
subjects that came under his treatment.

From 1839 to 1849 he was Professor of History in Harvard Col-
lege, and he was its President from 1849 to 1852. Since retiring from
the Presidency he has written little. It was his intention to write an
extended history of the United States, and he regarded his previous
labors as but a preparation for this. But a lameness of the right arm
precluded the free use of the pen, and the conscious difficulty of so chan-
ging all his habits of study, note-taking, and composition as to conform
himself to the use of an amanuensis postponed the commencement of
this plan till it was too late to carry it into execution. He continued
to live at Cambridge,' surrounded by many of his early friends, and by
many more by whom he was equally revered and loved. On the
evening of Mai'ch 6th, 1866, he was at a social party. On his return
home he was seized with chill, and on the next day pneumonia set
in, at his age with little or no hope of recovery. His sufferings
were probably not severe ; if they were, he bore them in perfect
serenity, and remained cheerful and self-collected till" a comatose con-
dition ensued but a few hours before his death. He died on the 14th
of March.

Mr. Sparks did nothing that was not done well, few things that
were not done superlatively well. His reputation rests not merely
on his capacity as an editor and compiler : had he written nothing
else, his biographies alone would have seemed work and glory enough
for one man ; and these, in the appreciation of their subjects, in the
grouping of persons and incidents, in the delineation of character,
and in the tracing of relations and sequences among events, give
ample evidence of a keen insight, an analytic faculty, and a con-
structive power, which the literary world would have better appre-
ciated, had not his more important biographies, those of Washington
and Franklin, been in form subsidiary to the publication of their
works.

In his private character no ordinary terms can convey the measure
in which he was honoi*ed and loved, most by those who knew him best.
He can have had no enemies ; and no man can have made more or
warmer friends. In meekness, modesty, kindness, generosity, a win-
ning politeness that went to the heart because it came from the heart,
the most tender concern for the well-being and happiness of others,
constant watchfulness for the opportunities of doing good, charity that

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1856. 107

dropped its benefactions in look, word, and deed all along his life-path,

— in these and other like traits he realized to many, with more fulness
than they can readily recall it elsewhere, the ideal of a Christian gen-
tleman. And it was his happiness and ours that he died, though full
of years, before the infirmities of old age had impaired either his ca-
pacity of enjoyment, or — what would have been to him the same thing

— the power of active beneficence. " Felix, non vitce tantum claritate,
sed etiam opportunitate mortis."

Charles Beck, late Vice-President of the Academy, died in Cam-
bridge, March 19, 1866, after an illness of only three hours. He
was the son of a merchant, and was born at Heidelberg on the 19 th of
August, 1798. His mother afterwards marrying for her second hus-
band Professor De "Wette, the family moved to Berlin in the year 1810,
when De Wette, then about thirty years old, and already widely known
as a theologian, was called to a chair in the new University.

The boyhood and early youth of Dr. Beck were passed partly in
Carlsruhe and partly in Berlin, in which latter place he enjoyed un-
usual advantages. He was a pupil in the Werder Gymnasium, where,
among other instructors, he had the elder Zumpt : his step-father's liter-
ary and social position gave him an opportunity of seeing and hearing
the gifted men in whom Berlin then abounded ; and the events of the
War of Liberation, going on before his eyes, awakened in him a spirit of
patriotic fervor which never died out, and which made his example and
influence of great worth in after days to his adopted country. Indeed,
the chances of war made his home at times unsafe for women and chil-
dren : on one occasion it was thought best for his mother to leave town,
and as she travelled with her son they listened all day to the roar of
Napoleon's guns. The day after the battle of Grossbeeren, not far from
Berlin, August 23, 1813, he visited the battle-field, and was vividly
impressed with the dreadful reality of the contest in which his country
was engaged. He was one of the patriotic pupils in the Gymnastic
School of Jahn, established near Berlin in 1811 : he belonged also to
the Band of Virtue, an association which embraced the flower of the
German youth, and to the Burschenschaft.

The lessons of this period were not lost upon young Beck. His
well-knit frame was made strong and supple by the manly exercises for
which he retained a love all his life. His mind, naturally of a hardy
mould, acquired great force and a set determination. With the
shrewdest practical judgment, with the soundest common sense, he
was always ready to sacrifice everything to his ideas of right.

108 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

During his career as a student at the University an incident occurred
which gave a direction to his whole life. His stepfather, Professor De
Wette, who had enjoyed the hospitalities of the parents of the student
Sand, the assassin of Kotzebue, wrote a letter of condolence to the
mother of the unhappy young man. Although the letter, far from jus-
tifying the deed, merely pointed out general sources of Christian conso-
lation, the Prussian government was not inclined to pass it by unno-
ticed : on the 28th of August, 1819, Professor De Wette was asked if
he acknowledged the authorship of the letter ; two days after he was
summarily dismissed from the University. After an interval of three
years he was called to the University of Basle as Professor of Theol-
ogy. His step-son meantime having finished his theological and philo-
logical studies at the University of Berlin, and after passing his exam-
ination as candidate of theology, having been ordained as a clergyman
in Heidelberg (July 7, 1822), left Germany and joined his step-father
at Basle in the same year, and spent the next two years as a successful
Teacher of the Latin Language and Literature in the Pedagogium at
Basle. During this time he took the degree of Doctor of Philosophy
at Tubingen (September 18, 1823).

The state of affairs in Germany and Switzerland convinced Dr.
Beck that there was no field in either of these countries for one of his
sentiments. He left Switzerland accordingly in the year 1824, and
came to this country with his valued friend. Dr. FoUen. They landed
in New York, December 24th. The testimonials and letters brought
with him insured him a favorable reception at once. As an evidence
that America was henceforth to be his permanent home. Dr. Beck took
the preliminary steps to being naturalized in Philadelphia, a month af-
ter he landed : he was naturalized in Northampton, March, 1830. The
first five years of his American life were passed in Northampton, in the
well-known Round Hill School of Messrs. Cogswell and Bancroft. At
this school Gymnastics were taught for the first time in America. In
1830, he on the Hudson opened a school of his own for boys. Two
years after, in the beginning of 1832, he was called to Harvard Col-
lege as University Professor of Latin, and remained in that office till
1850. After his resignation he was occupied with his own private
studies, and with many trusts of a public chai'acter, till his death. He
was twice a member of the Legislature, Vice-President of the Oriental
Society, President of a Savings Bank, and Director of another Bank,
and a valued member of many boards and commissions in his own
town.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: MAY 29, 1866. 109

Dr. Beck visited Europe three times ; once in 1847, again in 1857,
and the last time in 1858. The last journey was undertaken prin-
cipally for a literaiy purpose.

In 1856 he published in the Memoirs of the Academy a most impor-
tant contribution, on the Age of Petronius Arbiter, in which he takes
ground against the hasty conclusions of Niebuhr and Studer, and ex-
hausts the treasures of antiquity and language to prove that this puzzling
fiction must have been written either in the reigrn of Augustus or Tibe-
rius. Finding that the text of Petronius was in a very untrustworthy
state, he resolved to collate the manuscripts himself. On his last jour-
ney to Europe, in 1858 and 1859, he compared twenty of the twenty-one
existing manuscripts of Petronius. The results of these studies he pub-
hshed in a beautiful quarto volume, printed in Cambridge, 1863, at his
own expense, and distributed gratuitously. It is not hazardous to say
that the manuscripts of no author have ever been collated with a more
minute and conscientious accuracy than those of Petronius. It was
hoped by Dr. Beck's friends that he might feel inclined to edit Petro-
nius, a task for which he was so peculiarly qualified. He was pre-
vented from doing this partly by occupations which he considered more
important, and partly by the publication of a new Petronius in Ger-
many. Beside the two works alluded to, he published a third bearing
the name of Petronius, an inedited lexical fragment discovered by him
and printed in Vol. VIII. of the Memoirs of the Academy. In former
years he had published a number of works ; among which were a
Treatise on Gymnastics, Northampton, 1828 ; the Medea of Seneca,
1834 ; Cicero's Brutus, 1837, and in an entirely new edition, 1853 ;
Latin Syntax, 1838, and a second edition, 1844; the Hercules Furens
of Seneca, 1845 ; Munk's Metres of the Greeks and Romans, (trans-
lated with Professor Felton,) 1844; and beside this he had contributed
to literary journals.

The same conscientious fidelity which mai'ks his writings pervaded
all he did. The rule of his life was to do his duty as he understood it,
and the whole of his duty, without fear or favor, and to do all he could
for his fellow-men. As an instructor he was rigorous and exacting, but
not more so toTvard his pupils than toward himself. In the distribution
of his means he showed judgment as well as generosity. His contribu-
tions to the various public calls that have been so frequent, of late years
particulai-ly, have been munificent. But his private charities have un-
doubtedly been greater still. No deserving foreigner ever appealed to

110 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

him for aid in vain ; and it was his habit to seek out intelligent young
American mechanics of good character, and lend them money to begin
their trade. As a citizen he was a model man. He took a warm in-
terest in all public matters, national and state ; he was more thoi'oughly
informed about municipal affairs than most born Americans. From
the first outbreak of the war he did all he could to help the national
cause. He thought that every good citizen should serve his country
as far as he could in person, and showed his sincerity by joining a mili-
tary organization and drilling with the zeal of the youngest recruit. He
went with his company into camp, where he was eager to do all the
drudgery of a common soldier ; and it was a sore trial to him that when
the company went into service he was rejected on account of his age.
The universal respect in which his lofty integrity and simplicity were
held was touchingly attested at his death, which was mourned by the
citizens as a great public calamity.

Mr. George Livermore died at his residence on Dana Hill, in
Cambridge, on Wednesday, August 30, 1865, of a disease of the veins,
followed by paralysis.

He was a son of Nathaniel and Elizabeth (Gleason) Livermoi'e, and
was bom in Cambridge, July 10, 1809, being therefore at the time of
his decease in his fifty-seventh year. He had been shortly before
chosen Treasurer of the Academy, glad, as he said, — with that pleasing
modesty which was one of the most winning traits of his attractive
character, — to prove his interest and good- will as a Fellow, in an office
which did not require the high scientific qualities displayed by his
brethren. To all his associates in literary pursuits, and to all who met
him in the walks of trade and business, he was known (as only in the
more private circles of aflFection he could be fully appreciated) as a man
of rare excellence of native disposition, of lofty integrity, ardent patri-
otism, and fulness and depth of Christian principle and culture. There
was a charm in his gentle bearing, and a grace in his speech and man-
ners which made him a most delightful companion, and impressed all
who were brought into contact with him. There was something singu-
larly engaging in his refined simplicity and quietness of spirit, and in
the almost feminine delicacy of his nature. Indeed, perhaps even his
nearest friends would not have fully known what energy and almost
passionate earnestness were latent in that nature, had they not been
called out by the perils and struggles of his country during the last
four years of his life. An all-absorbing patriotism sth-red him to the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1866. Ill

intensest interest in the war against the rebellion. The delicacy and
feebleness of his body alone prevented his becoming a soldier, but his
pen and purse, his. zeal and practical effort, were devotedly given
to filling the ranks of our army, promoting enlistments, gathering re-
cruits, providing for the welfare and comfort of soldiers on the march,
in the camp, on the battle-field and in the hospital, and even to furnish-
ing them with copies of a reprint of the famous " Soldiers' Bible " of
the Cromwellian troopers. It was with a view of meeting one of the
most exciting of the issues which the war incidentally opened, that he
was led to the investigations that resulted in the most elaborate pro-
duction of his pen. His " Historical Research respecting the Opinions
of the Founders of the Republic on Negroes as Slaves, as Citizens, and
as Soldiers," an epitome of which he read before the Massachusetts
Historical Society, in August, 1862, is one of the most thorough, com-
prehensive, and exhaustive productions to be found in our historical
literature. After his searching investigations had made him master of
the whole field covered by his subject, he published the result, at his
own cost, in very many forms, some of them elegant and expensive,
and distributed them far and wide. Senator Sumner asserts, as of his
own personal knowledge, that President Lincoln made use of this valu-
able " Research," while preparing his own final Proclamation of Eman-
cipation.

IVIr. Livermore had in his early years only those means of education
which Massachusetts offers to all her youth ; and as soon as his school
training was completed, he entered upon the mercantile and business
occupations which he pursued for the remainder of his life. In these
he was so far successful as to possess himself of ample means for grati-
fying his fine literaiy taste and his strong desire for studious culture.
The library which he gathered, at great cost, was in itself a remark-
able collection, and indicative of the qualities of his mind and char-
acter. A visit to Europe had afforded him facilities which he dili-
gently and wisely improved. Without yielding to the mere fancies of
the bibliomaniac, he availed himself of them for uses of wisdom. His
collection of Bibles, among which was one that had belonged to Me-
lancthon, and of works illustrating the Scriptures by art, was unique
and extremely rich. He was a diligent student of American history,
seeking for rare tracts and original materials. He had a conscience
for accuracy and thoroughness in his researches, and several of the,
pieces which he published prove a very wide and curious knowledge,

112 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

obtained by him through processes which justified his challenging the
deliberate judgments and statements of professional scholars and histo-
rians. He made contributions to the North American Review and to
the Christian Examiner. For fifty years a pupil or a teacher in a
Sunday school, he was also an efficient worker in the cause of educa-
tion in his native place. Harvard College, of whose Library Commit-
tee he was a valuable member, gave him the honorary degree of A. M.
in 1850. Mr. Livermore was a Trustee of the State Library and of
the Boston Athenaeuoi, a member of the American Antiquarian Society
and of the Massachusetts Historical Society.

Joseph Emerson "Worcester died in Cambridge, after a brief
£ illness, October ^, 1865. He was born in Bedford, New Hampshire,
August 24, 1784, the second in a family of fifteen children. In 1794 he
removed to Hollis, N. H., where he resided till he became of age, assist-
ing his father in labor on the farm. During this period his opportunities
for education were limited, but he early manifested an ardent thirst for
knowledge ; and it is related that after the toils of the day he often sat up
till midnight or later in company with his elder brother, Jesse, reading
RoUin's Ancient History, Josephus, and similar works, by the light of
pitch-pine knots. At the age of twenty-one, though entirely dependent
on his own exertions for support, he resolved, if possible, to obtain a
liberal education, and began his preparation for college at Phillips
Academy in Andover. He afterwards pursued his studies for this pur-
pose at Boscawen and Salisbury, N. H., and especially at Salem, Mass.,
where he spent two years or more in teaching. In 1809 he entered
the Sophomore Class in Yale College, and was graduated in 1811.
After leaving college, he was again employed in teaching for several
years in Salem, where he commenced the preparation of his first work,
a " Geographical Dictionary or Universal Gazetteer, Ancient and
Modern," which was pubhshed at Andover in 1817, in 2 vols. 8vo.
(A new edition, greatly enlarged and improved, appeared in 1823.)
This was followed by a " Gazetteer of the United States," published
in 1818. In 1819, for the sake of greater literary advantages, he
removed to Cambridge, which thenceforth became his permanent
residence.

The same year he published his • " Elements of Geography, An-
cient and IModern," a work far superior to the previous text-books
on the subject, and which passed through several stereotype editions.
Tills was succeeded by his " Sketches of the Earth and its Inhab-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1866. 113

itants," in 2 vols., 12mo, Boston, 1823. His " Elements of History,
Ancient and Modern," accompanied by an " Historical Atlas," admira-
bly adapted to its purpose, was first published in 1826, and has probably
been more extensively used in our schools than any similar manual.
It has been repeatedly stereotyped. In 1825 Mr. Worcester commu-
nicated to the American Academy, " Remarks on Longevity, and the
Expectation of Life in the United States, relating more particularly to
the State of New Hampshire, with some Comparative Views in rela-
tion to Foreign Countries," which was published in Vol. I. of the Sec-
ond Series of our Memoirs. His fi^rst production in the field of Eng-
lish lexicography, which he afterwards so successfully cultivated, was
an edition of " Johnson's Dictionary as improved by Todd, and abridged
by Chalmers, with Walker's Pronouncing Dictionary combined," which
was published in Boston in 1828. In 1829 he was induced by Mr.
Converse, the publisher of Webster's large American Dictionary, to
prepare an abridgment of that work.' His own " Comprehensive Pro-
nouncing and Explanatory English Dictionary," which he had com-
menced before undertaking the abridgment of Webster, appeared in
1 830. Its extensive list of words of various orthography, distinguishing
the form commended by the best usage, and, in the case of words differ-
ently pronounced by orthoepists, its exhibition of the principal authori-
ties for the pronunciation, were novel features of the work, which
greatly contributed to its popularity. Its publication gave occasion to
an ill-considered charge of plagiarism on the part of Dr. Webster, who
enumerated one hundred and twenty-one words which he regarded as
pirated from his Dictionary. Mr. Worcester's reply must be regarded
as completely triumphant, and, as a specimen of good writing, has not
often been surpassed in literary controversy.

Near the close of the year 1831, Mr. Worcester made a voyage to
Europe, where he spent about seven months, visiting many of the chief
places of interest in England, Scotland, France, Holland, and Germany,
and furnishing himself with the literary apparatus required for more
extensive researches in his chosen fields of labor. In the year 1831 he
assumed the editorship of the "American Almanac," which he con-
ducted for eleven years with eminent success. His " Universal and
Critical Dictionary of the English Language," the fruit of many years
of labor and study, appeared in 1846, and gave occasion to the famous
" War of the Dictionaries," waged with so much^ ferocity by the rival
publishers. No person was ever less disposed than Dr. Worcester to

vol; VII. 15

114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

disparage the merit of a fellow-laborer, and the spirit of the whole con-
troversy was utterly uncongenial with his feelings. It became neces-
sary for him, however, to expose a gross literary fraud, when the work
just referred to was issued by an unscrupulous London publisher with
a garbled Preface, and the utterly false title, " A Universal, Critical,
and Pronouncing Dictionary of the English Language, .... compiled
from the Materials of Noah Webster, LL. D., by Joseph E. Worcester."
A pamphlet setting forth the facts in the case was published by him in
1853, and enlarged with a third Appendix in 1854.

In 1847-49 Dr. Worcester experienced one of the severest trials
that can befall a scholar, in the threatened loss of sight, and the actual
inability to use his eyes for reading, or hardly any other purpose, for
about two years. During this period he had three operations performed
on his right eye for cataract, and two on his left, the last of which, hap-
pily, was entirely successful. This great affliction was borne through-
out without a murmur, in the spirit of true Christian resignation and
trust.

In 1847 Dr. Worcester published an enlarged and improved edition
of his Comprehensive Dictionary, which contained, among other addi-
tions, a " Vocabulaiy of Modern Geographical Names," with their pro-
nunciation. This volume was still further improved and enlarged in
1849 ; and in 1855 it appeared with the title, " A Pronouncing, Ex-
planatory, and Synonymous Dictionary of the English Language " ;
the discrimination of synonymes being an important and distinguishing
feature of the work. It also contained a list of the Christian Names of
Men and Women, with their etymological signification, introduced for
the first time in an English dictionary.

The crowning literary labor, however, of Dr. Worcester's life was his
" Dictionary of the English Language," published in 1860, in a large
and beautifully printed quarto volume of one thousand eight hundred
and fifty-four pages. In the preparation of this work, the author was
aided by a number of able and industrious collaborators, and in the ex-
planation of terms of a technical character he enjoyed the assistance of
men eminent in various departments of literature and science, including
some of the most honored members of the American Academy. The
various appendixes of Classical, Scripture, and Geographical Names,
and of Names of Distinguished Persons of Modern Times, were all
elaborated anew, and made, it is believed, far more complete and accu-
rate than in any preceding work. It will not be deemed invidious to

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1866. 115

say, that, at the time of its publication, notwithstanding the great merits
of its chief competitor, the general verdict of scholars at home and
abroad placed it at the head of English lexicographical literature ; and
if it has since been equalled or surpassed, we may indulge a pardon-
able pride in the fact, that the only dictionary of the English language
which even now can pretend to rival it in fulness and accuracy is also
the product of American enterprise, industry, and scholarship.

All the works of Dr. Worcester give evidence of sound judgment
and good taste, combined with indefatigable industry and a conscien-
tious solicitude for accuracy in the statement of facts. The tendency
of his mind was practical rather than speculative. As a lexicographer,
he did not undertake to reform long-established anomalies in the Eng-
lish language : his aim w^as rather to preserve it from corruption ; and
his works have certainly contributed much to that end. In respect both
to orthography and pronunciation, he took great pains to ascertain the
best usage ; and perhaps there is no lexicographer whose judgment re-
specting these matters in doubtful cases deserves higher consideration.
In the mazy paths of etymology, if he cannot claim the merit of an
original explorer, his good sense preserved him from the wild aberra-
tions and extravagances into which many have been misled. His defi-
nitions, for neatness and precision, will not suffer, perhaps, in compari-
son with those of any of his predecessors ; but it must be confessed that
all our English dictionaries too often mistake a special application of a
word for an essential change of meaning, and hide its precise significa-
tion in a cloud of undiscriminated synonymes.

In 1827 Mr. Worcester was elected a member of the Massachusetts
Historical Society ; and he was an Honorary Corresponding Member
of the Royal Geographical Society of London. He was also one of
the earliest members of the American Oriental Society. In 1847 he
received the degree of Doctor of Laws from Brown University, and
afterwards from Dartmouth College.

Though somewhat cautious and reserved in the expression of his
feelings. Dr. Worcester was a man of strong affections, and great be-
nevolence of character. He delighted especially to render aid to those
who, like himself in early life, were struggling with difficulties in the
pursuit of knowledge ; and his sympathy for the poor and unfortunate
was warm and active. During the late contest for the maintenance of
the Union, and of the principles which lie at the foundation of our
Republic, he was thoroughly patriotic. He had no children to conse-

116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

crate to the cause, but nine of his nephews served in the United States
Army, whom he encouraged by constant correspondence ; and the va-
rious charities of the war met from him a ready and liberal response to
their calls. Closing his earthly career at the advanced age of eighty-
one years, he has left behind him -the memory of a useful and spotless
life ; and by his literary labors he has not only won a title to the grati-
tude and respect of his countrymen, but of all who speak and write the
English language.

The Right Rev. John Bernard Fitzpatrick was the son of Irish
parents, of humble circumstances but earnest piety, who came over to
America in 1805, Born in Boston on the 1st of November, 1812, he
owed his early education to the common schools of his native city. He
was a pupil successively of the Adams and Boylston Schools, and after-
wards for three years of the Boston Latin School. He seems to have
been a most exemplary and diligent scholar, having twice received the
Franklin medal, besides obtaining several other prizes for excellence in
special departments of study. From his earliest youth he was the sub-
ject of deep religious impressions, and found his highest satisfaction in
the teachings and services of the Church to which his parents belonged.
To that church and its ministry he soon resolved to devote his life, and
with this view he broke off from his secular studies, and left his home
at seventeen years of age to enter the Roman Catholic College at
Montreal. After four years of faithful study in that institution, he
greatly distinguished himself by the part which he took in a public
disputation in four languages, — Latin, Greek, French, and English, —
and was immediately thereafter appointed Professor of Rhetoric and
Belles-Lettres. In this capacity he spent four years more at Montreal,
and thence repaired for the completion of his theological preparation to
the great Seminary of St. Sulpice in France. He was connected with
this seminary for nearly three yeai's, and was not less devoted or less
distinguished as a scholar at Paris than he had been at Boston or Mon-
treal. The time had now arrived for him to enter on the practical duties
of the ministry. In May, 1839, he received the order of sub-deacon.
In December of the same year he was ordained a deacon, and in the
following year was promoted to the priesthood. Recrossing the Atlan-
tic in November, 1840, he returned at once to his native city, where
for a year or two he was occupied with pastoral duties at the Cathedral
or at St, Mary's Church. During another year or two, he held the
pastorate of East Cambridge. But higher duties soon awaited him,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1866. 117

and in 1844, at thirty-two years of age, he received the appointment
of Coadjutor to the Bishop of Boston, — the health of Bishop Fen-
wick requiring him to rehnquish in part the care of the Diocese.
He was consecrated Coadjutor in March, 1844, and on the death
of Bishop Fenwick, a little more than two years afterwards, he suc-
ceeded to the full duties and dignities of Roman Catholic Bishop of
Boston.

It was no light responsibility for any one to succeed to an office
which had been held before only by the excellent Fenwick and the
sainted Cheverus. Of the latter, at least, it may safely be said, that no
ecclesiastic of any sect or denomination who ever lived in Boston has
left behind him a more enviable memory. The charm of his conversa-
tion, the humility of his manners, the simplicity of his life, the untiring
benevolence and beneficence which he exhibited towards the suffering
poor, endeared him to the whole community ; and his departure for
France in 1823, to become the Bishop of Montauban, and afterwards
Archbishop of Bordeaux and a Cardinal, while all acknowledged the
justice of the promotion, was the subject of deep and wide-spread
regret. It is enough to say of Bishop Fitzpatrick, that he proved a
worthy successor to the eminent prelates who preceded him. He was
a man of an excellent spirit, of a genial temper, of peculiar tact and
sterling common-sense, of rare accomplishments, of a noble presence ;
without anything of presumption or ostentation, yet of striking dignity ;
shrinking from all display, except such as was inseparable from the
ceremonies of the Church over which he presided, and devoting his
whole time and thoughts and strength to the care of his diocese. He
had, indeed, too little self-appreciation for his own worldly fame, and
has left no record of his learning and acquirements except in the mem-
ory of those who knew him. He seldom delivered formal discourses.
He engaged in no doctrinal controversies. He wrote no theological
essays. He committed absolutely nothing to the press. Not a sino-le
pamphlet, hardly a single printed page, is left to preserve his name
in our libraries. But his memory will be cherished in the hearts of
the whole religious denomination to which he belonged, and in those of
a large circle of personal friends of all denominations.

His devoted labors in the Episcopacy for twenty years proved too
much for his strength and health. He sought relief and restoration in
foreign travel, but returned after an absence of two or three years
without permanent benefit, and died in Boston on the 13th of February
1866, universally respected and lamented.

118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Jonathan Patten Hall was born in Medford, Massachusetts,
July 22, 1799, and died in Boston on March 6, 1866. He was
fitted by Daniel Staniford for Harvard College, where he was gradu-
ated in 1816. His own inclination was for a student's life, particularly
for the profession of medicine ; but he yielded to the wishes of his
father, and was engaged with him in business as a druggist for twenty-
three years. Mr. Hall was interested in Chemistry and also in Bot-
any. In 1821 he began to keep a regular journal of the atmospheric
temperature, recording his observations three times a day. He contin-
ued this journal to within a few days of his death. The last observa-
tion recorded by himself was on November 13, 1865, but the work
was done under his direction until March 1, 1866. On May 28,
1850, Mr. Hall was elected a Fellow of the Academy, and on the 14th
of August of the same year he was appointed Meteorological Obsei'ver
of the Academy. In 1858 he published his meteorological observations
in the Memoirs of the Academy (Vol. VI. p. 229), under the following
title : " Register of the Thermometer for Thii-ty-six Years, from 1821 to
1856, to which is added the Quantity of Rain falling in Boston, Mass.,
for Thirty-four Years, from 1823 to 1856." Mr. Hall was singularly shy
and retiring in his nature, but in his unassuming way he served faith-
fully the interests of science. Harvard College and the American
Academy of Arts and Sciences were equally remembered by him in
his modest bequests ; the former receiving one hundred dollars for its
Library, and the latter an equal sum for its Publication Fund.

From our list of Associate Fellows we have to lament the loss of the
Rev. Dr. Wayland, Bishop Alonzo Potter, and Colonel James D. Gra-
ham, — the two former distinguished for their learning and eloquence
as divines, and for their zealous and fruitful labors in behalf of educa-
tion, — the latter well known for his various services as an officer of
the Corps of our National Engineers.

Francis Wayland, the son of Rev. Francis and Mary "Wayland
(the father a Baptist clergyman of worth and reputation), was born in the
city of New York on the 11th of March, 1796. He was graduated at
Union College in 1813. He then made choice of the medical profession,
in which he had completed a three years' course of study, when, deem-
ing himself called to a more sacred field of service, he, in 1816, became a
member of the Andover Theological Seminary. Here he remained
but a year, and then accepted a tutorship in Union College, which he
held for four years. In 1821 he became pastor of the First Baptist

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1866. 119

Church in Boston, and during a ministry of only five years rose to as
high a reputation as any American preacher has ever attained. It was
at this time that he delivered, at an Andover anniversary, his celebrated
Sermon " On the Moral Dignity of the Missionary Enterprise." It is
said that the greatness of this magnificent discourse was hardly sus-
pected even by the most appreciative of its hearers, so little was there
then in the preacher's voice and manner to constrain attention ; but it
had no sooner issued from the press than it passed into rapid and ex-
tensive circulation, was republished in many successive editions on both
sides of the Atlantic. The brilliant reputation thus won concurred with
his previous success as a member of the Board of Instruction to pro-
cure for him an invitation to the Professorship of Mathematics and
Natural Philosophy in his Alma Mater. Hardly had he entered on
the duties of this office, when he was chosen President of Brown Uni-
versity. He promptly accepted the trust, and remained at the head of
that institution for more than twenty-eight years. Though he resigned
his presidency on account of impaired health, the few years that suc-
ceeded his resignation were a season of undiminished mental vigor and
industry. During a temporary engagement as acting pastor of a church
in Providence, he preached with greater eloquence and efficiency than
at any previous time, and the printed sermons of this period transcend
in vigor of thought, fervor of religious feeling, and the higher qualities
of style and diction, all his earlier writings, the one master work ex-
cepted. He died in consequence of an attack of paralysis, on the 30th
of September, 1865.

Dr. Wayland's publications have been numerous. Besides many
sermons, lectures, and addresses, issued singly and in volumes, he was
the author of valuable treatises for school and college use, on Political
Economy, Mental Philosophy, and Moral Philosophy ; the last of which
has had a very extended circulation, and is believed to be more gener-
ally employed as a text-book in our colleges than any other manual in
that department.

Dr. Wayland seemed born to command, and could not but have been
a controlling mind in whatever sphere of life he might have chosen.
Strong in his convictions, with not a little native impetuosity, which
strenuous self-discipline directed rather than repressed, and with an
energizing sense of right and duty in whatever he undertook, he usually
succeeded not only in having his own way, but in drawing to it the
current of surrounding opinion and feeling. In the administration of

120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

the University he was inflexibly just, accurate, and thorough, solicitous
to raise the intellectual and moral standard of the institution, and self-
sacrificingly kind to students who deserved his kindness. Others may
have won more love in their daily intercoui-se with their pupils ; his
students left him with a respect, which rose into reverence as they grew
into sympathy with his lofty aims, and deepened into affection as they
recalled the sincerity and earnestness of his endeavors to do them good.
As a teacher, he was distinguished for the clearness of his exposi-
tions, the wealth of pertinent illustration which he brought to bear on
every point, the enthusiasm he awakened, and the impulse to vigorous
and independent thought which he imparted to his pupils.

As a writer, he was compact, clear, and strong. No style could be
more free than his from rhetorical artifice. His most glowing discourses
exhibit no outbreaks of sentiment or emotion, but have a sustained force
and fervor which commands undivided attention.

In the private relations of life. Dr. Wayland was upright and faith-
ful, unselfish and generous. As a citizen, he was public-spirited and
philanthropic. No one could have been more loved, honored, and
confided in than he was throughout the community in which the greater
part of his life was passed.

The Right Rev. Alonzo Potter was born in Beekman (now La
Grange), New York, July 10, 1800. He entered Union College in
1814, was graduated in 1818, became Tutor in the following year, and
two years later, at the age of twenty-one, he was chosen Professor
of Mathematics and Natural Philosophy. Having meanwhile taken
orders in the Episcopal Church, he accepted in 1826 the rectorship of
St. Paul's Church in Boston, where in a ministry of but five years he
won the enduring respect and affection of members of every Christian
communion, and held a place second to none of his contemporaries
among the clergy as a man of learning and ability, as an efficient and
successful preacher, and as a devoted and faithful minister. In 1831
he was recalled to Union College as Professor of Moral Philosophy, to
which office was shortly added that of Vice-President. In this latter
capacity he had on his hands the principal portion of the interior disci-
pline of the college, — financial engagements and the external affairs
of the institution occupying the greater part of Dr. Nott's time. While
here he continued in the frequent exercise of his profession, and was
regarded as one of the pillars of his Church ; so that, in the vacancy
of the important Bishopric of Pennsylvania, he was chosen to that

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1866. 121

office not only by the vote of the electing body, but equally by the ap-
proving suffrages of a widely extended public. He was consecrated as
Bishop in 1845. He found his post of service as arduous as it was
honorable, and for the first twelve years he performed an incredible
amount of labor, both in the visitation of a diocese larger than some
important kingdoms of the Old World, and in the preparation of sermons,
charges, and other official papers, which continued to bear the marks of
fresh, strong thought, and to betoken a mind no less industrious in
his now crowded and care-cumbered arena than it had been during
the quiet of his academic life. But RFs overtasked brain at length
yielded to a stroke of paralysis in 1857. In 1858 he was relieved
of a portion of his official duty by the appointment of an assistant
bishop." A few months spent in foreign travel restored him to his
work, which he was permitted for a few years longer to pursue with
little less than his former vigor. But threatening symptoms again
supervened, and by advice of his physician he sought relief by a sea-
voyage. He took passage for California in a new steamer belonging
to the Pacific Mail Company. From Panama he went to Aspinwall
to consecrate a chapel. He was detained there over night, and was
subjected to malarious influences, which, after he had embarked on the
Pacific, issued in malignant fever. On arriving in the harbor of San
Francisco he appeared so far convalescent that arrangements were
made for his removal on shore. But a relapse ensued, and he died
on shipboard, July 4, 1865.

Bishop Potter published, in addition to numerous pamphlets, a trea-
tise on Political Economy for college use, and several other educational
works. He was also the author of the first part of " The School and
Schoolmaster," a work prepared by him in connection with Mr. George
B. Emerson, and placed in every school-house in Massachusetts and
New York.

He was an easy, graceful writer. His imagination, evidently vivid,
else his words would not have been so transparent, was employed, not in
imagery and ornament, but in the presentment of the objects of thought
in their true aspects and relations. Never forsaking, postponing, or
slighting the duties incumbent on him by virtue of his station, he was
always ready to renounce needed rest or leisure in aid of any worthy
cause. His services in behalf of the reformed system of common-school
education will be beneficently felt long after they have ceased to be
remembered.

VOL. VII. 16

122 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

In private life he was greatly and worthily beloved. Simplicity and
sweetness of spirit and mien, tender thoughtfulness for all around him,
with all the amenities and graces that go to constitute the Christian
gentleman, marked his daily intercourse, won for him troops of friends,
and made it hardly possible that he should have an enemy. In his
ecclesiastical relations, while loyal to his own Church, and steadfast in
his own convictions of truth and right, he lived in mutual esteem and
in the interchange of the kindest Christian offices with good men of
every denomination.

Colonel James Duncan ?jrRAHAM, of the U. S. Engineers, was born
in Virginia. He entered the United States service as Third Lieutenant
of Artillery in the year 1817, was appointed a Captain (by brevet) of
Topographical Engineers, January 15, 1829, and rose in this corps by
the regular course of seniority to the grade of Lieutenant-Colonel ; he
was brevetted to this grade January 1, 1847, and obtained his actual
commission for it, August 6, 1861. Upon the consolidation of the two
corps of Engineers and Topographical Engineers, he received a colo-
nel's commission in the combined corps, which he held at the time of
his decease, December 28, 1865.

His scientific labors have been for the most part either directly in the
line of military engineering duty, or incidentally connected therewith.
Of the former class were his labors upon the Northeastern Boundary
and Mexican Boundary Commissions, and upon the survey of the
Northern and Northwestern Lakes. He was very assiduous as an in-
structor in practical astronomy to the younger officers under his com-
mand, and was himself an admirable observer. The latitudes and longi-
tudes of the points upon our Northeastern Boundary were determined by
him and his subordinates with great precision. He often availed himself
of his travels in this line of duty to contribute largely to the advance-
ment of American geography, and his determinations are always very
accurate, though often made with apparently inadequate means. Thus
a large number of the most accurate positions yet determined of our
Lake ports, are due to his sextant observations made within ten years,
while he was in charge of the Lake Harbor improvements.

Colonel Graham was an admirable example of a military astron-
omer, — a class to whom in every country a great deal of the progress
of astronomical geography is due.

From the roll of our Foreign Honorary members it becomes our sad
duty to withdraw the names of Encke, Lubbock, Sir William Rowan

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAT 29, 1866. 123

Hamilton, Whewell, Sir William Hooker, Lindley, Admirals Smyth
and Duperrey, all distinguished in the walks of science, and most of
them illustrious for their original investigations.

John Francis Encke was born in Hamburg, September 23, 1791.
His father was a deacon in the Jacobi Church. After completing the
course of study of the college or gymnasium in Hamburg, he entered
the University of Gottingen in October, 1811, where he remained a
student under the instructions of Gauss until the spring of 1813, when
he entered the army and marched to Hamburg for the rescue of his
country from the domination of the French. After the fall of Ham- .
burg he entered the Hanseatic Legion, and served in the horse artillery
until June, 1814. In the autumn of this year he returned to Gottingen
and resumed his studies. In 1815 he entered the Prussian service for
a short time. After the battle of Waterloo and the restoration of peace
he completed his studies under Gauss, and was appointed assistant to
Lindenau, in the Observatory of Lemburg, in 1816. He received the
title of Professor in 1818, of Vice-Director in 1820, and in 1822 he
succeeded Lindenau as Director of the Observatory. In 1825, at the
recommendation of Bessel, he was appointed Director of the Observa-
tory at Berlin. He died in Spandau, of disease of the brain, on the
26th of August, 1865, having been relieved from all astronomical work,
in consequence of the approach of the disease, from the beginning of
1864 up to the time of his death.

It would be impossible within the limits of such a notice as this to
give anything like a detailed account of the services to science of this
great astronomer. The bare enumeration of the titles of his many valua-
ble papers would exceed them, and in fact such a notice of his work is
not necessary here. The name of no one of the great astronomers of
this century is more familiarly known in America than that of Encke,
and his published labors have instructed astronomers in all parts of the
world. They may be found, for the beginning of his career, in Lach's
Correspondence and Lindenau's Zeitschrift, and, later, in the supplement
to the Berlin Jahrhuch, in the Memoirs and Monthly Reports of the
Berlin Academy, in the Astronomische Nachrichten, and in the volumes
of the Berlin Observations.

It may be that Encke has contributed most to the advancement of
his favorite science in Europe by the improvements that he introduced
into the Berlin Ephemeris, by the character that he impressed on the
Berlin Observatory, and by the pupils that he trained during his forty

124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

years' professorship, who have had a large share in aiding the progress
of astronomical knowledge. But astronomy in America is most indebted
to him for his papers on the Method of Least Squares, and on the Com-
putations of Special Perturbations. The Method of Least Squares,
which originated with Legendre and Gauss, was systematically and
successfully applied in Encke's earlier investigations upon the motions
of the comet which bears his name, and its inestimable practical value
illustrated. His papers on the subject, together with the numerous
examples which his applications of it furnish, have placed the method
easily within reach of the student, and have enabled many a young
mathematician, with no other aid, to proceed with confidence and success
in computations which could never have been undertaken otherwise
without the instructions of a master. So admirable have been his
arrangements of these difficult computations, and so explicit his instruc-
tions upon every part of the work, that it may be truly said that the
greater part of what has been done since by astronomers anywhere in
the correction of orbits of comets or minor planets, or the computation
of their perturbations, has been done under Encke's direction. It was
in such work as this that he excelled ; and while he showed no want of
ability to take the highest rank in any department of theoretical or
practical astronomy, it was as a comi^utist that he was pre-eminent.

Sir John William Lubbock, Baronet, was bom March 26, 1803 ;
educated first at Westminster School, then at Trinity College, Cam-
bridge, taking the Bachelor's degree in 1825, the Master's in 1833 ; was
admitted to the Royal Society (of which he was a Vice-President at
the time of his death) in 1829 ; married in 1833; succeeded to the
baronetcy in 1840, on the death of his father, the eminent banker, Sir
John Lubbock ; and transmitted the title to his eldest son, John, — also
of scientific eminence, — by his death at High Elms, Kent, June 20,
1865. Between the time of reading his memoir on the determination
of the orbits of comets before the Royal Society in 1829 and the year
1849, he contributed more than forty papers to the Transactions of that
body and of other learned societies, on the moon and the tides, the per-
turbations of planets, the orbits of comets, and other matters of astron-
omy, terrestrial physics, and pure mathematics.

He holds a conspicuous place among those who have contributed to
the perfection of the Lunar Theory. His claims are thus stated by
himself in the Transactions of the Royal Astronomical Society for 1860 :
" I am confident that a just posterity will give to us [that is, to Plana,

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1866. 126

Ponticoulant, and Lubbock, who, in 1846, furnished the means of con-
structing tables of the moon without any empirical hypothesis] the
credit of first bringing; the Lunar Tables within the limits of error of
observation, and thereby of bringing to perfection the solution of the
problem of finding the longitude at sea by means of lunar observations."
Of the excellence of the work here referred to, Sir J. Lubbock appears
to have first been made aware by its near agreement with the formula
from which the American Tables of the Moon were constructed, and
the very close agreement of these tables with observation.

Sir William Rowan Hamilton, Astronomer Royal for Ireland,
son of Ai'chibald Hamilton, Esq., of Dublin, was born in that city,
August 5, 1805, and early put under the tuition of his uncle, Rev. James
Hamilton, curate of Trim, by whom his remarkable taste and ability for
learning languages were so much fostered, that by the age of fourteen he
had made great progress in thirteen languages besides his own, in which
he also showed the finest rhetorical powei's. His taste for mathematics
(perhaps derived from his mother, whose maiden name was Sarah Hut-
ton, and who was of the family distinguished in that science) was so
strong that it led him, with very little aid from tutors, to rapid self-
directed progress. He began geometry at the age of ten, algebra at
twelve ; at seventeen he had thoroughly mastered the calculus, and at
nineteen, while an undergi'aduate at Dublin, laid the foundations of a
new science ; at the age of twenty-two, not yet having taken his Bache-
lor's degree, he was made Andrews Professor of Astronomy in his own
University ; not because he was an astronomer, nor because his Alma
Mater wished him to become an astronomer ; but because she wisely
wished to secure the residence of a son of such rare genius and virtue.
His mathematical writings consist of a single volume. Lectures on
Quaternions, published in 1853, and of numerous contributions to the
Transactions of the Royal Irish Academy, from 1828 to 1847 ; to the
Philosophical Magazine, from 1831 to 1861 ; and to the first four vol-
umes of the Cambridge and Dublin Mathematical Journal. These
contributions all relate to pure Mathematics or to Analytical Mechanics,
— his wealth of metaphysical, poetical, and philological learning and
ability never luring him from his chosen walk, — and all show a mas-
ter's hand.

His papers on Optics were the first example of extended investiga-
tions into the phenomena of motion abstracted from the idea of force ;
and his prediction of conical refraction, having been verified by subse-

126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

quent observation, has in it the same sort of moral sublimity as that
which attaches to the discovery of Neptune in consequence of Le Ver-
rier's predic'tions. Led by a remarkable expression of Kant to en-
deavor to develop the science of pure Time, Hamilton succeeded, first
in giving a new and better interpretation to algebra, and afterwards in
inventing, or as he modestly says discovering, a quaternion notation for
Space, having a generality that enables one to express in a brief equa-
tion truths that previously required a volume. We live too near the
time of its origin to comprehend its value ; but a notation capable of such
condensation of expression should be an engine of incalculable power.
This Science of Quaternions, first given to the Royal Irish Academy
in November, 1843, and published in the Philosophical Magazine in
July, 1844, has four kinds of symbols, one for real quantities, and three
for imaginary.

In private life he was admired and loved ; the highly poetical im-
agination which was at the foundation of his geometrical ability showed
itself constantly in his conversation. His impulsive, ardent temper-
ament never led him into controversy, but his regard for the rights, the
opinions, and wishes of other persons was continually manifesting itself
in thoughtful courtesies and kindnesses. He made pure mathematics
his study, and metaphysics a favorite relaxation, reaching heights of
speculation in both to which few attain ; but he held with devout sim-
plicity to that Christian faith which was the guide and joy of his life.
He died September 2, 1865.

The Rev. William Whewell, D. D., was born at Lancaster, May
24, 1794, and died at the Lodge, Trinity College, Cambridge, March
5, 1866, in consequence of being thi'own fi'om his horse some days be-
fore. He took the Bachelor's degree at Trinity College in 1816, obtained
a Fellowship, was a Tutor for some years, and was apj^ointed to a Pro-
fessorship of Mineralogy in 1828, holding that office four years, when
he resigned. In 1838 he was made Professor of Moral Theology, and
resigned the chair in 1855, when he became Vice-Chancellor of the
University. He was also ajjpointed Master of Trinity College in 1841,
and held that high position at the time of his death.

Di'. Whewell was a man of great and varied learning, handling with
ability the most diverse subjects of inquiry ; beginning with Reports to
the British Association on the Tides, and on the Mathematical Theo-
ries of Heat, Magnetism, and Electricity, and with the Bridgewater
Treatise on Astronomy, and text-books on Elementary Mechanics ;

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAT 29, 1866. 12.7

«

then proceeding to a History of the Inductive Sciences, and a Philoso-
phy of the same, afterward called a History of Scientific Ideas ; passing
thence to the editing of Mackintosh's Introduction to Ethical Philoso-
phy, to volumes of his own upon Morals, and to translations from
Plato's Ethical Dialogues ; then to the editing of Richard Jones on
Pohtical Economy, and a volume of his own upon that subject, and
finally amusing himself with Notes on the Architecture of Churches in
France and Germany, writing EngHsh Hexameters, and an anonymous
book on the Plurality of Worlds.

Dr. Whewell undoubtedly exercised a large influence on public edu-
cation in England, especially in commending the physical sciences, and
giving them an honorable place in the University at Cambridge. His
style was singularly clear, and his views of every subject comprehen-
sive, if not marked by peculiar originality. His attachment to the Col-
lege in which he was educated was earnest, and showed itself not only
in his pertinacious resistance of every claim or pretension on the part
of others which he thought inconsistent with her dignity, even when
claiming rights in behalf of the Crown ; but also by his munificent gift
of a large hostel for her students, and of an endowment for its support
and enlargement.

The names of Hooker and Lindlet, which stood side by side in
our botanical section, are naturally associated as those of the two most
eminent botanists in Great Britain, — also by the parallel course, and
near coincidence in the close, of their lives. Born in the same neigh-
borhood, in youth receiving their education at the same school, and
early drawn together by similar predilections, they both devoted them-
selves with singular energy and perseverance to their chosen pursuit ;
exerted for many yeax's, although in somewhat different ways, a para-
mount influence upon the advancement of botanical science ; and died
near together in place and time, — the elder at Kew, on the 12th of
August last, at the age of eighty-one years ; the younger at Turnham
Green, on the first of the ensuing November, at the age of sixty-six
years. For a long time they were the two most distinguished teachers
in Great Britain, one at a northern, the other at the metropolitan Uni-
versity. They severally conducted two of the principal serial works
by which botany contributes to floriculture; and they developed into
highest usefulness those two great establishments, the Royal Gardens
at Kew, and the Horticultural Society of London. Both wrote and
published largely ; — Hooker only upon descriptive botany, in which he

123 I'ilOOiiiiii^LNtio Ob' THE AMERiOAN AUADEMr

greatly excelled, while Lindley traversed a wider field, and grappled
with abstruser problems in every department of the science, always
with confidence and facility, but not with unvarying success.

"William Jackson Hooker was born on the 6th of July, 1785, at
Norwich, where resided Sir James Edward Smith, the possessor of the
Linntean herbarium, and a leading botanist of the time. It was he,
probably, who directed young Hooker's attention to botany ; but his
fondness for natural history, especially for ornithology, was already de-
veloped in the school-boy. Going up to London as a young man, he
made the acquaintance of Sir Joseph Banks and of the able botanists
he had drawn around him ; in the year 1809 he went to Iceland ; on
his return from a successful exploration, the vessel in which he had
embarked with all his collections, notes, and drawings, was fired and
everything was lost, save the lives of the crew and passengers. In 1811
he published his earliest work, the " Journal of a Tour in Iceland " ; be-
fore 1820, he had brought out his monograph of the British Junger-
manniece, and the 3Iuscologia Britannica, both illustrated by his own
pencil. From 1820 to 1840 he filled, with distinguished success, the
chair of the Regius Professorship of Botany at the Univei'sity of Glas-
gow ; and he brought out, during these twenty most active years, the
greater part of his extensive writings upon Phgenogamous Botany,
among which we should especially notice his Flora Boreali-Americana,
or Botany of British America, founded on the collections of the Arctic
explorers, and of his correspondents in Canada and Western North
America, including what is now Oregon and Washington Territoiy.

In the year 1841, when it was determined that the gardens and
plant-houses at Kew, then crown domain, should be converted into
a great national establishment. Doctor, now Sir William Hooker, was
naturally looked to as the proper person to take charge of it. He ac-
cepted the trust, and, generously supported by the government under
every administration, he devoted his energies and rare talents for organ-
ization to the creation and development of the conservatories, museums,
gardens, and plantations, stocked with the vegetable productions of all
lands, which (including also the vast and unrivalled herbarium that he
had himself amassed) have, within the short space of a quarter of a cen-
tury, made Kew the botanical metropolis of the world.

All this he did without much abatement of his activity in botanical
investigation and authorship ; although of late years restricting his
proper studies very much to the Ferns. His most comprehensive work

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1866. 129

upon this great order, the Species Filicum, was completed only two years
ago ; when the indefatigable author, upon the verge of fourscore, irarae- •
diately and courageously entered upon the preparation of a condensed
Synopsis of all known Fei-ns, and had made considerable progress in
the undertaking, when the attack of a prevalent epidemic suddenly
closed his long, honored, and most useful life.

Sir William Hooker was doubtless the most prolific botanist of the
age, even exceeding Linneeus in this respect, — having published about
seventy volumes (including the journals he edited) and over four thou-
sand plates, all the earlier ones from his own drawings, and having de-
scribed as many new species as thei'e were of plants known in the time
of Linnaeus. This is not so extraordinary when we consider that his
terra of authorship covers fifty-five years, no part of which was unpro-
ductive, and that his opportunities were unusually great, through his
numerous pupils and distant correspondents, — inspired by his zeal and
attached by his generosity and winning ways, — who sent him the vege-
table productions of all lands; as also by his public spirit and influence
with men in office, through which governmental facilities were secured,
and botanists appointed when possible to all exploring expeditions and
voyages. His opportunities, therefore, were of his own making, and
were improved by a sustained industry and single devotion to his pur-
suit, that have never been surpassed. Like Linnteus also, but unlike
most naturalists, so well had he calculated his powers and directed his
aims, that he left no half-finished works behind him, but completed
everything he undertook, excepting that upon which he had just en-
tered when he was called to his rest. Mere amount of publication in
descriptive botany may be of small or equivocal merit. Of Hooker it
is to be remarked, not only that he did a vast amount of botanical work,
but that he did it surpassingly well.

John Lindley was born at Catton, near Norwich, on the 5th of
February, 1799, and was educated at the grammar school of that town.
His father was a nurseryman of some consideration, and the author of
a well-known work upon the orchard and kitchen garden.. Young
Lindley's bent for natural history was congenital, and his special voca-
tion, as the practical illustrator and introducer of the natural system
into common use wherever the English language is spoken, was early
indicated. In one of his first lectures, a sketch of which has just been
printed from his manuscript, he gave a lively account of his early
endeavors after botanical knowledge, and the small satisfaction that

VOL. VII. 17

130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

rewarded them ; of the kind notice that was taken of him by Sir James
Edward Smith, the head of the prevailing school, and the maintainer
of the full sufficiency of the Linnaean artificial system, who, by caution-
ing the young man not to be led astray by new and false lights, first
awoke a curiosity which began to be gratified when he soon afterwards
visited his friend Hooker, and was by him introduced to Jussieu's
Genera Plantarum, and Richard's Analyse du Fruit. It was then, as
he says, tliat his botanical life commenced, and a translation from the
French of Riohard which he made on the spot, at one sitting of three
days and two nights, was the first of his numerous publications. In
1818 or 1819, he went up to London, and, introduced by Hooker to
Sir Joseph Banks, was employed by him for a time as assistant libra-
rian. Sir Joseph introduced Lindley to Mr. Cattley, a wealthy mer-
chant and amateur cultivator, who wanted scientific assistance in illus-
trating and publishing some new plants of his collection. In this
service, Lindley in 1821 brought out the fine folio volume entitled
Collectanea Botanica. He dedicated it to Mr. Sabine, the Honorary
Secretaiy of the Horticultural Society of London, under whom the next
year he became Assistant Secretary, just when the famous garden at
Chiswick was to be laid out. In 1826, as sole Assistant Secretary,
and afterwai'ds as Vice Secretary, Lindley became, and long remained
the practical head of this important establishment, which, under his
wise and energetic administration, has rendered vast service to horti-
culture and to botany. From the year 1829 to 1861 he was Professor
of Botany in the London University, and at the same time lecturer at
the Apothecaries' Garden at Chelsea. In 1830, he published the first
edition of his Introduction to the Natural System of Botany, revised
and amplified it in 1836, and in 1846 he expanded it into that ency-
clopajdia of botanical knowledge, " The Vegetable Kingdom, or the
Structure, Classification, and Uses of Plants, illustrated upon the Nat-
ural System." The several works upon structural and physiological
botany, which accompanied the systematic ones already mentioned,
those upon medical and economical botany, his Theory and Practice of
Horticulture, and the like, need not here be enumerated, being among
the best known and most widely used botanical books of the age. Tlie
same may be said of Loudon's Encyclopaedia of Plants, the scientific
part of which was by Lindley, and of the Botanical Register, the rival
of the Botanical Magazine, which he edited for about twenty years.
He originated, in 1841, the Gardeners' Chronicle, and conducted it

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1866. 131

until recently, when his health gave way. Of his various labors and
writings relating to horticulture, it has been said to be mainly due to
them " that this branch of knowledsje has risen from the condition of
an empirical art to that of a developed science." At least it may be
asserted that scientific horticulture in Great Britain owes more to
Lindley than to any other pex'son, except, perhaps, to his predecessor.
Knight. In systematic botany his most considerable and profound
works related to orchideous plants, upon which he has long been the
paramount authority. Physiologist, morphologist, and systematic bot- ,
anist, he displayed equal genius in all these departments of the science;
and, if he worked too rapidly to do full justice to his great powers in
any one of them, he must be allowed to have contributed efficiently to
the advancement of them all.

His distinguished scientific career was cut short in the year 1862, by
an affection of the brain, brought on by protracted and severe over-
work ; and he died of apoplexy on the first of November last, leaving
a void not easy to be filled.

Louis Isidore Duperrey, Admiral in the French Navy, was born
in Paris, October 22, 1786. He entered the Navy in 1802, and was
for a long time in active service. In 1811 he executed a hydrographic
survey of the coast of Tuscany. In the French expedition of 1817,
for determining the figure of the globe and the elements of terrestrial
magnetism and other purposes, he was entrusted with the hydrograph-
ical operations. Soon after this, in 1822, he was placed in command of
a new expedition around the world for scientific discovery. An account
of this voyage was published in Paris, in six quarto volumes, in the
years 1828-32. His observations on the invariable pendulum, and on
the inclination and declination of the magnetic needle, made in this
voyage, were published in 1827. He also published papers on the
configuration of the magnetic equator in 1830 ; on the direction and
intensity of terrestrial magnetism in 1837, and in 1841, a paper upon
the geographical positions of the magnetic poles, and especially on the
position of the southern magnetic pole. He died in Paris, after a long
illness, on the 25th of August, 1865.

Twenty-two members have been elected into the Academy during
the year. Nine of these are Resident Fellows, two of the first class,
two of the second, and five of the third class.

Nine are on the Associate or Non-resident list, two in the first, two
in the second, and five in the third class.

Four are Foreign Honorary Members, viz. : J. Victor Poncelet of

132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Paris, in the Fourth Section of the First Class, to fill the vacancy caused
by the death of Wilhelm Struve of the Astronomical Section ; Arthur
Cayley of London, in the Mathematical Section of Class I., in the place
of the late Sir Wm. Rowan Hamilton ; M. Delauney of Paris, in place
of the late Sir John Lubbock of the same Class and Section ; and
Dr. Joseph Dalton Hooker, of Kew, in place of his father, the late
Sir William Jackson Hooker, of the Second Class and the Botanical
Section.

Professor Loverhig, as Chairman of the Committee of Pub-
lication, presented a report accounting for the expenditures in
printing under the appropriations of the past year. The re-
port was accepted.

Professor Cooke presented the report of the Library Com-
mittee ; which was accepted.

Mr. Paine reported that he had received from the represen-
tatives of the late Jonathan P. Hall the thermometer belonging
to the Academy, and the records of Mr. Hall's observations.

Mr. Paine was authorized to obtain the barometer of the
Academy used by Mr. Hall, and to get it repaired.

Remarks were made by the President and by the Librarian
on the aid rendered by the Smithsonian Institution in effecting
the exchanges of the Academy ; and on the motion of the Li-
brarian it was

Voted, That the thanks of the Academy be presented to the
Smithsonian Institution for the generous and efficient aid
which it has rendered through its system of foreign exchanges
and distribution of publications, by which the Academy has
greatly profited.

The President announced from the Finance Committee that
the unexpended balances of past appropriations were not in-
cluded in the appropriations recommended for the current
year. In accordance with information from Professor Eliot
concerning a sum of money raised by subscription for the
general expenses of the Academy, the recommendations of the
Finance Committee were amended, and the following appro-
priations passed : —

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 29, 1866. 133

For General Expenses .... $1,400

For the Library 1,000

For Publication 1,000

The election resulted in the choice of the following officers
for the ensuing year : —

Asa Gray, President.

George T. Bigelow, Vice-President.

William B. Rogers, Corresponding Secretary.

Chauncey Wright, Recording Secretary.

John C. Lee, Treasurer.

Frank H. Storer, Librariaji.

Council.

Thomas Hill, "^

Joseph Lovering, V of Class L

John B. Henck, J

Augustus A. Gould, ~|

Louis Agassiz, V of Class II.

Jeffries Wyman, J

Robert C. Winthrop, ^

George E. Ellis, V of Class HI.

Andrew P. Peabody, J

Rumford Committee.

Joseph Lovering, Joseph Winlock,

Morrill Wyman, Wolcott Gibbs,
William B. Rogers, Frank H. Storeb,

JosiAH P. Cooke.

Committee of Finance.

' ( ex officio^ by statute.
John C. Lee, )

Thomas T. Bouve, by election.

The other Standing Comihittees were appointed on the
nomination of the President, as follows : —

134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Committee of Publication.

Joseph Lovering, Jeffries Wyman,

Charles W. Eliot.

Committee on the Library.

John B. Henck, Charles Pickering,

John Bacon.

Committee to audit the Treasurer's Accounts.
Charles E. Ware, Charles J. Sprague.

The following gentlemen were elected members of the
Academy : —

Nathaniel Thayer of Boston, to be Resident Fellow in Class
III. Section 3.

Professor William P. Atkinson of Cambridge, to be Resident
Fellow in Class III. Section 2.

Hon. Horace Gray, Jr. of Boston, to be Resident Fellow in
Class III. Section 1.

Stephen P. Ruggles of Boston, to be Resident Fellow in
Class I. Section 4.

Professor Noah Porter of Yale College, to be Associate Fel-
low in Class HI. Section 1.

Chief Justice Ira Perley of New Hampshire, to be Associate
Fellow in Class III. Section I.

Dr. A. W. Chapman of Appalachicola, to be Associate Fellow
in Class II. Section 2.

George Bentham of London, to be Foreign Honorary Mem-
ber in Class II. Section 2, in place of the late Professor
Lindley.

Herve Auguste Etienne Alban Faye of Paris, to be Foreign
Honorary Member in Class I. Section 2, in place of the late
M. Encke.

William John Macquorn Rankine to be Foreign Honorary
Member, in Class I. Section 4, in place of the late Admiral
Smyth.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 135

Five hundred and seventietli Meeting.

June 12, 1866. — Adjourned Annual Meeting.

The President in the chair.

Professor Lovering communicated an unanimous recommen-
dation from the Rumford Committee that the following vote
be passed, viz. : — That the Rumford Premium be awarded to
Alvan Clark of Cambridge, for his improvements in the manu-
facture of refracting telescopes, as exhibited in his method of
local correction.

Professor Lovering described Mr. Clark's methods of testing
and polishing lenses, and recounted the grounds of the Com-
mittee's recommendation.

The report was accepted, and on motion of Dr. Jacob Bige-
low the vote was unanimously passed.

Five bundred and seventy-first Meeting.

September 11, 1866. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President read letters relative to exchanges ; also let-
ters from Professor Rankine and M. Faye in acknowledgment
of their election into the Academy.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Professor Henry D. Rogers of Glasgow, of
the Associate Fellows, formerly a Resident Fellow ; also of
Dr. Reuben D. Mussey and Mr. James Hayward of the Resi-
dent Fellows.

Professor Winlock read the following communication from
Professor Daniel Treadwell : —

The force of every moving body, or that attribute by which a moving
body overcomes any resistance oppo^^ed to it, is the product of two
factors, namely, mass and velocity. There is an old dispute as to the
true value of one of these factors, the velocity ; but it may, I think, be
at the present time confidently assumed that the value assigned to it
by Leibnitz, namely, its square, is the true value in this case. Taking

136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

this then to be established, we have a very simple, easy, and direct
method of comjjaring, one with another, the forces of cannon-balls of
every possible weight, or rather inertia, as measured by their weight,
moving with any velocity that may be impressed upon them. In
making this comparison between the forces of the balls used, espe-
cially in the most powerful of the vaunted American and English
cannon of modern construction, it will be necessaiy first to establish
some standard which may be used as the unit of measure, with which
the others are severally compared and tried. To do this I shall take
the ball of the old 32-pounder under a velocity of 1,600 feet a second,
this being a mass and velocity with which all artillerists are familiar,
being that produced by eight pounds of powder, the full charge of this
gun ; and I shall use the force possessed by this ball under these con-
ditions as the standard, or unit of the standard, by which the force
of any others may be compared or measured.

It is very desirable that the unit of every standard of measure should
be taken from some simple and familiar object, of the quantity of which
we can not only form a conception, but with which we have a familiar '
sensible acquaintance. Our common standards of weight and measure
have been thus derived, the grain of wheat forming the unit of one,
and the human ai'm and foot that of the other. In the more complex
instance of the power of the steam-engine, the strength of the horse
furnishes the basis ot I'^s standard of measure, and this again is defined
in a certain number of pounds raised one foot high against the opposing
force of gravitation. It will bi at once perceived that, although a
32-pound shot moving with a velocity of 1,600 feet a second may
form some image capable of being grasped by the conception, yet we
must utterly fail to form a distinct idea of the quantity represented by
32 multiplied by the square of 1,600, or of the algebraic symbols mv^,
representing the product of a mass by the square of a velocity. It
will be seen, however, that we may bring the proposed standard of
comparison out of this dark envelope, by changing the factor of the
velocity into a physical equivalent taken in a vertical line a certain
number of feet high. Thus, instead of saying that the force of a 32-
pound shot under a velocity of 1,600 feet a second is numerically
represented by 32x2,560,000, we may substitute for this last factor
the height to which the shot would rise if it were pointed directly
upwards in vacuo, so that it should be freed from every atmospheric
and other resistance except that of gravitation alone. To do this we

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 137

have only to calculate the height to which a body will rise under the
given conditions, and for which we have a very simple formula, —

v^ . . .

— = ^, in which v is the velocity of the shot, g the velocity acquired by
9 • »

a body falling one second, and h the height sought ;

and we then have our standard unit in pounds raised to a known
height. In the case before us we shall find the height to be 40,000
feet; and if we multiply this by the weight of the ball or shot, 32
pounds, we have a product of 1,280,000, or 1,280,000 pounds raised
one foot high, as the equivalent of the force of a 32-pound shot
moving with a velocity of 1,600 feet a second. We can have no diffi-
culty in forming a conception of this amount of force, or power, and
applying it a's a measure of the force of shot of other weights moving
with other velocities. We may, in fact, compare it witli the force of a
steam engine, reducing both to a common measure in the horse power.
Thus, the horse power being 33,000 pounds one foot high in one
minute, we have ^ffg^g- = 39 ; or the 32-pound shot, when it
leaves the mouth of its cannon, equal to the work of 39 horses during
one minute of time.

Although we may, by this method ascertain, with great exactness,
the comparative forces and, consequently, value, of difterent shot, it
requires yet another step of computation to enable us to compare
together the value of different guns ; to ascertain their relative strength,
whether it be derived from the different materials of which they are
made, or the peculiar mode or form of their construction. Thus, sup-
pose it to be determined by accurate experiment that a certain ball
from a cast-ii'on Rodman gun has the same force that is possessed by a
ball from a wrought-iz'on coil gun. This fact can give no warrant to
the inference that the cast iron is equal in strength to wrought
iron, or that a certain method of casting produces a gun of equal value
and efficiency to guns made of forged coils. It may be, and must be
in this case, that a much greater weight of the inferior metal is
required to produce the strength supplied by a smaller amount of the
better metal.

To supply the deficiency of the computation thus pointed out, and
extend the proposed standard so as to become a measure of the
strength of the gun" as well as of the force of the shot, we shall
find to require but a moment's attention. Having already seen that
our standard 32-pound shot has a force of 1,280,000 pounds one

VOL. VII. 18

138 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

foot high (32 X 40,000), if we divide this product, representing the
strength of the whole gun, by the weight of the metal of which the
gun is made up in pounds, we shall obtain the strength, or work which
may be done by each pound of which the gun is constituted. We
shall find the result of this computation (the weight of our standard
32-pounder being 7,500 pounds) to be (J-SJinJ/a = 171) 171 pounds,
in shot, raised one foot high by every pound of metal which forms the
body of our standard gun.

By this form of computation we may compare, numerically, the
strength of one gun with another, and assign to each the true value
derived from its peculiar metal, or the method employed in its con-
struction, free from all adventitious sti'ength that may be supplied by a
mere increase of mass or quantity of material. The accuracy of the
result will of course depend upon the experimental determination of
the weight of the shot and the velocity which the gun may be relied
upon to enable us actually to produce and practise, without exceeding
the limits of the strength of the gun.

Dahlgren.
I now proceed to the application of these forms of computation to
the guns now most relied upon in the American and English service.
First the cast-iron ten-inch gun known in this country as the ten-inch
Columbiad, and described as follows : —

Diameter of bore, 10 inches.

Weight of gun, 15,059 pounds.

Weight of shot, 128 "

Charge of powder, 18 "

Initial velocity of shot, 1,044 feet.

From these several elements the following results are obtained by the
mode of computation before pointed out.

Height to which the shot will rise if pointed directly upward, in vacuo, 17,030

feet.
Force in pounds raised one foot high, 2,179,840,
Force compared with the 32-pound shot under a velocity of 1,600 feet a

second, this being taken as 1, 1.7.
Force in number of horses working one minute of time, 66.2.
Number of pounds (in shot) raised one foot high, by each pound in the

weight of the gun, 144.7.

Rodman.
Passing from this to the giant of the service, the Rodman fifteen-
inch gun, which gives the following elements to be subjected to com-
putation : —

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 139

Diameter of calibre, 15 inches.

Weight of gun, 49,099 pounds.

Weight of shell, 315 "

Charge of powder, 50 "

Initial velocity of shot, 1,118 feet.

From which we obtain : —

Height to which the shot will rise in vacuo, 19,530 feet.

Force in pounds raised one foot high, 6,051,950.

Force compared with the 32-pound shot under a velocity of 1,600 feet a

second, this being taken as 1, 4.80.
Force in number of horses workins: one minute, 186.4.
Number of pounds (in shot) raised one foot high by each pound in the weight

of the gun, 125.

Next let us examine the 300-pounder coil gun, as constructed by Sir
William Armstrong. This is described as follows: —

Diameter of calibre, 10^ inches.

Weight of gun, 26,880 pounds.

Weight of shot, 300 "

Weight of charge, 60 "

Initial velocity of the shot, 1,500 feet.

From which we obtain the following: —

Height to which the shot will rise if fired in vacuo directly upwards, 35,156 feet.
Force in pounds raised one foot high, 10,546,800.
Force compared with a 32-pound shot, being taken as 1, 8.24.
Force in number of horses working one minute, 319.

Number of pounds raised one foot high (in shot) for each pound of metal in
the gun, 392.

The last gun that I propose to examine is the Armstrong coil gun
throwing a 600-pound shot. Described as follows : —

Diameter of calibre, 13|- inches.

Weight of gun, 49,280 pounds.

Weight of shot, 600 "

Charge of powder, 100 "

Initial velocity, 1,400 feet.

These elements give the following results : —

Height to which the shot will rise, if fired in vacuo, 30,625 feet.
Force in pounds raised one foot, 18,375,000.
Force, a 32-pound shot taken as 1, 14.35.
Force in number of horses one minute, 556.8.

Number of pounds raised one foot high (in shot) by each pound of metal in
the gun, 372.8.

The foregoing facts are comprised in the following table :

140

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

^

0 a

*»

M-So

s

J«5

0

a

i

•

ht to which
luld ascend i
pwardu in v

0
0

o_

0"

0

0

CO

CO

f—t
in"

in

<N

to

0"

0.

ounds
by eac
Q the

d

l^

■*

CO

in

ok

CO

-^

1— t

»-H

CO

CO

V. 0-3

f-

F- <

(N

CO

CO

CO
0

Number 0

raised 1 Fo

of Met

-S

a

4->

r^

bJO

d

>»

CO

03

0

.a

^

+j

t> .

0 •

•^

O 4J>

0

T)<

00

0

0

H-2

^

,

.0

^

^M

0

0

r: 3

,*.

U5

s «?,

0^

1— <

in

-*

o.S

c

|"3

1—4

rH

IIH

fM

f— 1

feS

q

q

•*

q

00

d
0

® B to

? Q

oi

CO

CO

OJ

CO

u

'3

CO

<o

00

t— (

in

CJ

M

I-*

CO

«o

CJ

»

2

-d

•S 0

-4^

2

0

.9

h

li(

d

^ (C

•

,6 00

00

0

0

0

tha32-lb.
locity of
as Unity).

*

it

o

^

»-4

m

to

0

.w d
0 3

d fcJD

8.

pared wi
der a Tel
Second (

Q

o>

CO

■*

in

.2 bD

r-H

CO

-*

06

CO

fcXJo

l-H

*C d

si

m «^

00

m

0

0

It

w

■501

^■3

jQ CO

(N

CO

0

CO

0

CO

Force

Sh(

1,600

w> d

(S -g

0 ii)

0 «

CQ

S 0

0
0

0

■*

0
in

0

0

0
0

8 a

03

II

0

CT>

0

0

0

0"

00_^

"V

00_^

0"

q^
in"

• 0

in

ff>

00

00

00

t^

in

■*

r~

*00

•
St

2^^

0^

0^

°°^

c^

(N^

.*

fM

in

eo^

2

^?

-" t^

in"

a>

ixT

oT

0.2

r- *

c><

co"

0"

00"

<4-l
0

1— 1

•*

(N

-*

0 u

t—t

l-H

^

<»
CO

2

u

_d

0

•

•

•

•

•

J3

.t^

^

^

_

•

a

4J

ei

.d

•

•

•

■

■

4^

*

be

be

bo

bD

t3
.2

a

0

1.

Description,
Kind of Gun.

a

fl

•

a

2
".S

a
0

B

0

2
-<

d

1

a
0

i
0

S

CO

a

>-•
53

s

a

<

a

.3

s

.0

0

fS

0

«

'X3

a

■73

a

s

1

0

«

d

a

CO

a

a

s

s
0

P-i

CO

a

d
0

P-l

d
0

2
"d

S

1— 1

M

M

hH

0

Q

0

TS

0

0

J3

0

0

»n

Q

0

.—1

0

0

in

0

0

CO

»— 1

»— 1

CO

CD

l-H

f— t

CO

CO

4^

HH

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866.

141

I

Q

142

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

o -a

13 'o

o o
•^ a

•= '3
"' a>

-= s

■♦J u

.s s

a.
X

s
o

o

1 ^

u
O

I OF ARTS AND SCIEIJWES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 143

The President communicated, by title, the following paper,
with some remarks upon Mr. Mann's botanical explorations in
the Sandwich Islands.

Eniuneration of Hawaian Plants. By Horace Mann.

During a visit to the Hawaian Islands, made for the purpose of study-
ing especially the Botany of the Group, and which extended from
the 4th of May, 1864, to the 18th of May, 1865, I botanized over five
of the largest of these islands, and brought together a collection which
forms the basis of the following Enumeration. In its preparation I
have been permitted to examine the other collections of Hawaian
plants in the Gray Herbarium ; namely, that by the United States
South Pacific Exploring Expedition under Commodore Wilkes, — the
fullest hitherto made in these islands ; a set of the specimens gathered
by Jules Remy under the auspices of the Paris Museum, given by
that institution ; some of Macrae's plants, given by the London Hor-
ticultural (now Royal Horticultural) Society ; and a 'ievf of Gaudi-
chaud's, Chamisso's, Douglas's, and Nuttall's. These materials, and all
his own memoranda upon them, were freely offered to my use by
Professor Gray, without whose friendly encouragement this enumera-
tion would never have been undertaken, and could not have been ac-
complished.

The botanists who have collected at the Hawaian Islands, so far as
known to me, are as follows : —

David Nelson, who accompanied Captain Cook on his third voy-
age, and collected at the Islands in 1778- 1779. The plants collected
by him are stored at the British Museum, and, excepting a few Lahiatce,
have scarcely been examined until recently.

Archibald Menzies, a most indefatigable botanist and collector,
visited the Islands with Vancouver in 1792, 1793, or 1794, or perhaps
in each of these years, and made large and valuable collections, mostly
on Hawaii. Sets of his plants are in the Hookerian, Smithian, and
Banksian Hei'baria.

Albert Chamisso accompanied Kotzebue in the voyage of Ro-
manzoff, and collected principally on Oaliu, late in each of the years
1816 and 1817. He published notes and descriptions of new species
in the Linncea, in conjunction with Schlechtendal. Frederick
Eschscholtz was the physician of the expedition.

144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Charles Gaudichaud, as botanist of the expedition under Frey-
cinet, in the Corvettes "Uranie " and " Physicienne," visited the Islands
in August, 1819. He returned to the Islands on the "Bonite" in
1836. The results of his first expedition were published as the Bota-
nique du Voyage de V Uranie, in 1826 (as on title-page, but really not
appearing till 1830), in 1 vol. 4to, with a folio atlas. Of the collec-
tions of the second visit a ^ew plates of Hawaian plants appeared in a
folio atlas {Bot. Voy. Bonite, bearing no date), v^rithout descriptions, or
any clew to localities. The lower Cryptogams were elaborated and in
part figured by the late Dr. Montagne in the same work.

James Macrae collected for the London Horticultural Society,
in Brazil, Chili, and the Hawaian Islands, which last he visited in
1825. His specimens were mainly distributed to the herbaria of
Bentham, Hooker, Lindley, and De Candolle.

Messrs. Lay & Collie, who accompanied Captain Beechey during
the Voyage of the "Blossom," visited the Islands in 1826-1827, and
made the collections which formed the basis of the botany of this voy-
age by Hooker and Arnott.

Francis Julius Ferdinand Meten accompanied Captain W.
Wendt, on the Prussian vessel " Princess Louise," and visited these
islands in 1831. After his death, descriptions of species collected by
him were published as a volume of the Nov. Act. Acad. Cses. Leop.-
Carol. Nat. Cur., in 1843, here cited as the Reliquice Meyeniance.

David Douglas, as collector sent out by the London Horticul-
tural Society to N. W. America, closed his most important explora-
tions by a visit to the Hawaian Islands, which he reached in the last
week in the year 1833. He immediately went to Hawaii, where he
collected until the 12th of May, when he met a violent death on the
flanks of Mauna Kea. His collections are mainly in the herbaria
of the Royal Horticultural Society, and of Hooker, Bentham, and
Lindley.

Barclay was botanist on the " Sulphur," commanded by Sir Ed-
ward Belcher, and visited tlie Islands in 1837 or 1839.

Rev. John Diell was American Seaman's Chaplain at Honolulu,
and sent small collections to Prof. Asa Gray, which he communicated
to Sir W. J. Hooker.

"W. D. BuACKENRiDGE and Charles Pickering made almost all
the botanical collections on the United States South Pacific Exploring
Expedition, under command of Charles Wilkes, at least those at the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 145

Hawaian Islands, which were visited in 1840. The Polypetalae were
published in full in the Botany of the Expedition by Gray, who has
also published new species of MonopetaliB in Vols. IV., V., and VI. of the
Proceedings of this Academy. But few of the Apetaloe have yet been
noticed. The Ferns, by Brackenridge, were published as a separate
volume of the Botany of the Expedition ; but nearly the whole of the
edition was destroyed by fire. Another partially published volume
comprises the Mosses by Sullivant, the Lichens by Tuckerman, and
the Algae by the late Professors Bailey and Harvey.

NuTTALL visited the Islands in 1835, from the Northwest Coast, and
made a small collection. Most of his specimens are in the Hookerian
Herbarium ; a few probably in that of the Philadelphia Academy. He
published notes and descriptions of some Hawaian Compositce, Lobe-
liacece, and Vacciniece in the Transactions of the American Philosoph-
ical Society.

Jules Remy went to the Islands under the auspices of the Paris
Museum, and made a fine collection in the years 1851 - 1855.

Wm. Hillebrand, a physician resident in Honolulu, has recently
sent interesting collections to Kew, among them a new genus of
BegoniacecB, which Prof. Oliver has named after its discoverer.

W. T. Brigham, with whom I visited the Islands, aided me con-
stantly in collecting, and remained five months after my return, obtain-
ing several species not in my own collection.

The Hawaian Islands lie just within the northern tropic, between
18° 55' and 22° 20' N., and 154° 50' and 160° 40' W. Their climate is
not extreme, being much moderated by the N. E. trade winds, which
blow pretty steadily for three fourths of the year. The mean annual
temperature at Honolulu is about 79° Fahr. ; that of the summer, or
from May to October, about 81°, and that of the remaining half-year,
or winter months, about 75° ; the thermometer ranging mostly between
60° and 86°. Lahaina, under the lee of the mountain of "West Maui,
and Waimea, in the same relative position to the mountain of Kauai,
are the two hottest places, while on the summits of the highest moun-
tains the snow persists through nearly the whole year. The snow
descends on the flanks of the high mountains to a level of 6,000 or
7,000 feet above the sea, at least in cold winters, but never lies at that
elevation long, quickly retreating upward with the return of a warm
day.

VOL. VII. 19

146 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE AMEEICAN ACADEMY

The group comprises thirteen islands, only seven of which, how-
ever, are of any considerable size. These extend in a curved line
from E. S. E. to W. N. W., about 600 miles in length. Their super-
ficial area is about 6,500 square miles ; the largest island, which is
also the most easterly one, Hawaii, being about 100 miles long, by
80 or 90 miles wide, of an irregular oval shape. It also presents
the highest mountains of the group, as well as of the Pacific, — Mauna
Kea being 13,980 feet, and Mauna Loa, 13,760 feet; Hualalai some-
what exceeds 8,000 feet.

The next island to the west, Maui, is the next in size also. It con-
sists in fact of two islands, joined by a low sandy isthmus, so low that
more than one vessel has been wrecked by attempting to pass between
them, mistaking the gap for the Molokai Passage, next westward.
The eastern end of Maui is composed of the mountain Haleakala,
somewhat exceeding 10,000 feet in height. West Maui is about 6,500
feet high ; its mountain is known as Eeka ; several of its highest por-
tions also bear distinctive appellations.

Molohai lies next to the westward, but is the fifth in size. The
highest point is near the eastern end, and perhaps reaches 3,500 feet.

Lanai lies a few miles S. S. W. from West Maui, and is the sixth
in size. It probably does not exceed 2,500 feet m height.

Oahu, west of Molokai, is the fourth in size. Its mountains are two
somewhat parallel ridges of unequal length, lying nearly east and west,
the northern one twice the length of the southern. The northern
ridge is partly divided by Nuuanu Valley, the mountains to the east
taking the name of their highest peak, Konahuanui; those to the west,
the name of Waiolani, the highest peak on that side. Each of these
peaks probably a little exceeds 4,000 feet. The farther western end
of this range (sometimes called the Waialua Mountains) spreads out to
a very considerable breadth, and is extremely difficult of access, so
much so that it is probable no white man has ever been to the heart of
the region. The southern ridge is known as the Kaala Mountains.

Kauai, the island next west, is the third in size, consisting in great
part of a central mountain, 6,500 or 7,000 feet high, with an extensive
plateau on its leeward flank, at the height of from 3,000 to 4,000 feet.

Niihau, the most westerly island (excepting a few mere rocks) lies
to the S. W. of Kauai, is the seventh as regards size, is in no part
above 2,500 feet, and is destitute of forests.

Returning again to Hawaii, where on the whole the climatic condi-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER H, 1866. 147

tions are the plainest, and the regions of vegetation best defined, we
have an island whose shores are the lower slopes of three mountains,
the relative position of which is that of the three angles of a nearly
equilateral triangle. These mountains enclose an extensive plateau at
an elevation of about 5,000 feet. The windward shores and slopes of
Hawaii are the most rainy part of the group, in consequence of the
high peaks above, which condense the moisture of the trade winds,
and keep it almost continually falling. The elevated plateau is dry,
as much on account of its sterility, as it is sterile on account of its dry-
ness ; for whatever rain reaches it sinks into the porous lava soil as
fast as it falls, -^he low region is comparatively sterile on account of
its being cut off by the high intervening peaks from the reach of the
trade winds, and its heat quickly evaporates any thin clouds which
may drift over it. The higher leeward regions possess of themselves
sufficient coolness to condense the moisture of the air into clouds ; and
it is owing to the protecting influence of the mountain peaks that the
clouds are not blown away by the strong trade winds before they de-
posit their moisture, as is the case in some places. Thus we have a
wet region all along the eastern side of the island, and extending
around to the south and to the west, until it reaches the base of
Hualalai ; and this wet region, between the height of 1,500 or 2,000
feet to about 5,000 feet, is the most heavily wooded of the group.
The parts between 1,500 feet and the sea level comprise compara-
tively few species, and but little of the peculiar vegetation. The high
and dry mountain tracts, above 4,000 or 4,500 feet, are very distinct
in their character and vegetation from either of the regions below.
The highest lava summits are nearly destitute of vegetation.

Similar considerations, making allowances for physical contour, &c.,
explain the similar distribution of wet and dry regions, and of vege-
tation, on the other islands. Thus, the summit of Haleakala, above
6,000 feet, has the character and nearly the same plants as the higher
parts of Hawaii, and its windward slopes are wet and heavily wooded.
The high summit stands in the way of the winds in such a manner as
to make an eddy to the leeward, where clouds gather every day, and
supply sufficient moisture to sustain a forest, while other parts are more
frequently cloudless and drier. The summits of West Maui, Oahu, and
Kauai, lying between the heights of 4,000 and 6,500 feet, are just in
the cloud level, and, being also peaks where denudation has long been
active, the soil has become somewhat impervious to moisture, which

148 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

therefore remains on the surface. The region has a peculiar aspect,
which is at once recognized in ascending the mountains. The only
forest-tree, the ohia lehua (Metrosideros polymorpha) becomes stunted ;
the trunks are covered with a thick coating of Mosses and Hepaticce,
which retains the moisture so as to render everything dripping wet;
and not more than a dozen species of flowering plants and ferns occur
in the whole. Above this, on the mountains of "West Maui and Kauai,
there is an open tract, where the lehua, one of the largest forest-trees,
at an elevation of 2,000 feet, has become dwarfed, a foot or two high,
in spreading clumps, but still flowering luxuriantly. In the midst of
such clumps are found the violets peculiar to these regions, and in the
neighboring tussocks of sedge (an Oreoholus) are found the few other
plants, which occur here and nowhere else, to the number of eight or
nine ; also Drosera longifoUa, thousands of miles from its next nearest
known habitat.

The lower parts of the Kaala mountains, and the lower parts of the
leeward flank of Kauai, have many characteristics in common, both
being somewhat deprived of moisture by high land to the windward.

By far the greater portion of the soil has been formed by disinte-
gration of the lava ; the thin sandy soil of those parts which consist of
raised coral reefs (as some of the shore regions of Oahu), and that
which is formed by the drifting inland of the calcareous beach sands,
support a few species which are not found elsewhere.

It is the purpose of this enumeration to give as complete a list as
possible of the plants indigenous to the group, inserting also the prob-
ably introduced plants which have become thoroughly naturalized.
Those which are without doubt indigenous have been left unmarked.
Those which are probably of aboriginal introduction are marked with
an asterisk (*) ; the few which are in all probability recent introduc-
tions, with a dagger (f).

The specimens which have been distributed, under numbers, from
the collection of Mr. Brigham and myself, are referred to by the ini-
tials M. & B. The numbers of Remy's plants are cited, as far as
they have been met with in the Gray Herbarium. Hillebrand's col-
lection is not here represented fully enough to make it worth while or-
dinarily to cite his numbers.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 149

RanunculacecB.

1. Ranunculus Hawaiensis, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1,
p. 10. (M. & B. 314.)

2. Ranunculus Matiensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 11, & rar.jS. (M. &
B. 446 ; Remy, 920.)

MenispermacecB.

3. CoccuLus Ferrandianus, Gaud. Bot. Voy. Freyc. p. 477, t.
101 ; Walpers, Rel. Meyen. p. 298. Nephroica Ferrandiana, Gray,
Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 39. (M. & B. 110.)

Cruciferce.

4.t Card AMINE hirsuta, Linn..; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp.
1, p. 50. (M. & B. 311.)

5. Lepidium Owahiense, Cham. & Schlect. in Linnaea, 1, p. 23 ;
Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 78 ; Walp. Rel. Meyen. p. 250 ;
Gray, 1. c. p. 63. The cotyledons, at least in some seeds, are accum-
bent. (M. & B. 343, 593 ; Remy, 523, 524.)

6. Lepidium serra (sp. nov.) : fruticosum, fere glabrum ; foliis
lanceolatis crebre arguteque laciniato-serratis membranaceis ad apicem
ramorum confertis inferne in petiolum gracilem longe attenuatis ;
pedunculis gracillimis folia subsuperantibus racemos breves corymbosos
bracteis filiforraibus stipa^os gerentibus ; floribus longe pedicellatis ;
siliculis junioribus ovato-rhomboideis stylo apiculatis, raaturis oblato-
orbiculatis, stylo ex emarginatura minima vix exserto ; cotyledonibus
accumbentibus. — Hanapepe, Kaiiai. — A sti'aggling, much branched
shrub, 2-3 feet high. The young inflorescence is slightly puberulent.
The cotyledons are clearly accumbent ! (M. & B. 588.)

7.t Senebiera didtma, Pers. Ench. 2, p. 185 ; Desv. Journ. Bot.
3, p. 164 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 63.

Capparidacece.

8. Cleome Sandwicensis, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p.
65. Cleome spinosa, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 78 ; "Walp.
Rel. Meyen. p. 251, non Linn.

9. Capparis Sandwichiana, DC Prodr. l,p. 245; Hook. &, Arn.
Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 59 ; Gaud. Bot. Voy. Bonite, t. 55 ; Gray, 1. c.
p. 69. (M. & B. 108 ; Remy, 529.)

150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

ViolacecB.

10. Viola Kavaiensis, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 85.

11. Viola Maviensis (sp. nov.) : glabra; caudicibus elongatis suf-
fruticosis adsurgentibus stipulis squamaceis ovato-lanceolatis diu per-
sistentibus vestitis apice conferte-foliaceis ; foliis rotundatis in petioles
graciles cuneato-decurrentibus adpresse serratis, dentibus glanduliferis ;
scapis elongatis bibracteatis umbellato-bi - quadrifloris ; petalis cseruleis
imberbibus sepala lanceolata bis terve superantibus, inferiore latissime
saccato. — Top of the mountain of "West Maui. — The ascending cau-
dices a foot long, clothed at the summit with densely imbricated ovate-
lanceolate acuminate setigerous-dentate stipules. Leaves clustered
at the apex of the caudex. Scape 3-8 inches long, bearing two
bracts about the middle. Pedicels umbellate from the bracted summit
of the scape. Petals dark blue, the lower one very broadly short-
saccate. (M. & B. 432.)

12. Viola Chamissoniana, Ging. in Linnaea, 1, p. 408 ; Gray, 1. c.
p. 86. V. tracheliifolia, Ging. 1. c. p. 409. (M. & B. 594; Remy,
532.)

13. IsoDENDEiON PYRiFOLiUM, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp.
1, p. 93, t. 8.

14. IsoDENDRiON LONGiFOLiuM, Gray, 1. c. p. 95, t. 9.

15. IsoDENDRiON LAURiFOLiUM. Gray, 1. c. p. 96.

Bixacece.

16. Xtlosma Hawaiense, Seem. Fl. Vitiensis, p. 7, adnot. (M.
& B. 206 ; Remy, 536; Hillebrand; Barclay, 1256.)

PittosporacecB.

17. PiTTOSPORiJM coNFERTiFLORUM (Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl.
Exp. 1, p. 232, t. 19) : foliis crasse coriaceis obovatis supra glabris
subtus ramisque novellis lanato-tomentosis ; umbella terminali subses-
sili confertiflora ; calyce quinquesepalo majusculo pedicellisque tomen-
tosissimis, sepalis orbiculatis obtusis petalis duplo brevioribus ; stamini-
bus tubo petalorum subgequilongis ; antheris oblongis ; ovario tomentoso
stylo ajquilongo ; stigmate simplici truncate ; capsula tuberculato-ru-
go?a ; seminibus rugulosis.

Var. /3. foliis subtus aurato-tomentosis ; calycis lobis angustioribus.
— P. terminalioides, var. /3. Gray, 1. c. p. 231. (M. & B. 337.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 151

18. PiTTOSPOKUM CAULiFLORUM (sp. nov.) : foliis amplis crasse
coriaceis obovatis vel elongato-obovatis obtusissimis basi attenuatis supra
glaberrimis subtus petiolisque novellis tomentulosis ; pedunculis secus
caulem infra folia brevissimis paucifloris cum calyce tomentulosis ; sepa-
lis late ovatis petalis quintuple brevioribus ; antheris sagittatis ; stylo
ovario tomentoso triplo breviore; stigraate bilobo ; seminibus leviter ru-
gulosis. — Kaala Mountains, Oahu. — A tree, 30 feet or more high, with
a trunk 8 or 10 inches in diameter. Leaves from 3 to 8 inches long, by
15 to 30 lines wide. Petiole half an inch to an inch and more in length.
Flowers cream-colored or white, 6 lines long, borne far below the leaves
on the naked stems. Capsule an inch in diameter, clothed at first with a
fine deciduous tomentum. Endocarp orange-yellow. (M. &B. 601.)

19. PiTTOSPORUM TERMiNALioiDES (Planchon, in Herb, Hook.) :
foliis coriaceis oblongo-obovatis obtusis basi attenuatis subtus (prgeser-
tim junioribus) cum inflorescentia brevissima pauciflora tomentosis,
pube SEepius ferruginea ; pedunculis ssepissime axillaribus ; sepalis
crassis ovalibus petalis quintuple brevioribus ; staminibus petalis plus
dimidio brevioribus ; antheris sagittatis ; ovario tomentoso stylo aequi-
longo ; stigmate simplici ; capsula tomentulosa fere Isevi ; seminibus
scabro-rugosis. — Gray, 1. c. p. 231 (a). P. glahrum, Putterl. Syn.
Pittosp. p. 11, pro parte, non Hook. & Arn. (M. & B. 313.)

20. PiTTOSPORUM SPATHULATUM (sp. nov.) : fohis tenuiter coria-
ceis spathulatis vel cuneato-oblongis apice rotundato nunc apiculatis
ramisque glaberrimis ; pedunculis tomentulosis brevibus axillaribus vel
infra folia 3 - 7-floris ; sepalis late ovatis obtusis ; staminibus petalis
plus dimidio brevioribus; antheris sagittatis; ovario tomentoso stylo
asquilongo; stigmate capitate ; capsula glabra fere Isevi ; seminibus Isevi-
bus. — Kaala Mountains, Oahu. — P. terminalioides, var. ? y, Gray,
1. c. — A small tree, 15 or 20 feet high. Leaves 3 or 4 inches long,
by 1 to 1 1 wide. Petiole very short. Flowers white or cream-colored, .
5 lines long. Capsule nearly smooth. (M. & B. 602; Remy, 572.)

21. PiTTOSPORUM GLABRUM (Hook. & Am. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 100,
vix Putterl. Pittosp.) : undique glabrum ; foliis tenuiter coriaceis cune-
ato-oblongis oblanceolatisve subacuminatis, venulis minus reticulatis ;
peduncuhs brevibus terminalibus seu axillaribus subracemoso-5-9-flo-
ris ; sepalis ovatis acutis petalis quadruple brevioribus ; staminibus
tubum petalorum subaequantibus ; antheris oblongis; stylo ovario glabro
bis lengiore ; stigmate truncate ; capsula globosa tuberculato-rugosa. —
Gray, 1. c. p. 229. (M. & B. 203.)

152 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

22. PiTTOSPORUM ACUMINATUM (sp. nov.) : foliis chartaceis ob-
lanceolatis acuminatis glaberritnis ; pedunculis axillaribus gracilliiuis
petiolum bis superantibus corymboso-5 - 8-floris ; sepalis bracteisque
angustissimis subulatis ; staminibus petalis plus dimidio brevioribus ;
antheris sagittatis ; stylo gracili ovario tomentoso longiore ; stigmate
capitato ; capsula globosa tomentosa tuberculato-rugosa. — On the
mountains above Waimea, Kauai, 3,000 feet. — A small tree, 15 or 20
feet high ; branches slender. Leaves 3 to 6 inches long, 6 to 20 lines
wide. Petioles about half an inch long. Peduncles 10 to 20 lines long.
Bracts and sepals a line and a half long. Flowers about 5 lines long.
Capsule much tuberculate-roughened. (M. & B. 603.)

Caryophyllacece.

23. SiLENE STRUTHiOLOiDES, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1,
p. 109, t. 10. (M. & B. 312.)

24. SiLENE LANCEOLATA, Gray, 1. c p. Ill, t. 10.

SCHIEDEA, Cham, et ScklechL, Char. Gen. emend.*

Calyx quinquepartitus, persistens. Corolla nulla. Staminodia sub-
petaloidea 5, hyalina, sepalis opposita. Stamina fertilia 10, imo calyci
inserta, quinque sepalis opposita cum basi stamiuodiorum accreta, quin-
que alterna breviora. Styli filiformi 3, rarius 4 - 5 - 7. Ovarium uni-

* Synopsis. — Reprinted from the Proceed. Bost. Soc.Nat. Hist., Vol. X., 1866.

§ EuscHiEDEA. Filamenta capillaria. Styli 3, rarius 4 - 5, intus stigmatosi. —
Flores parvi, thyrsoideo-congesti vel effuse paniculati.

* Panicula deliquescens, effusa : sepala acuminata : folia uninervia.
■*- Staminodia apice bifida : filamenta longe exserta.

1. S. NUTTALLII, ^00^.

2. S. DIFFUSA, Gray.

■*- -I- Staminodia lanceolata, acuminata : filamenta calyco breviora.

3. S. AMFLEXICAHLIS, Sp. UOV.

4. S. STELLAKIOIDES, Sp. UOV.

* * Panicula contracta, ramosa, deliquescens : folia trinervia.

5. S. Menziesii, Hook.

6. S. HooKERi, Grai/. '

* * * Panicula thyrsoidea, contracta, interrupta: folia uninervia.
t- Staminodia apice bifida: filamenta longe exserta.

7. S. LiGusTKiNA, Cham, d ScMeclit.

8. S. SFERGULINA, Gvat/.

■*- ■*- Staminodia apice bifida : filamenta calyce breviora.

9. S. Remyi, ap. nov.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 153

loculare ; ovulis plurimis columelljE central! affixis. Capsula trivalvis,
raro 4 - 5 - 7-valvis. Semina plurima, estrophiolata. Embryo annu-
laris, albumen farinaceum cingens. — SufFrutices vel lierba? perennes,
Sandwicenses, oppositifolii, exstipulati ; cymulis thyrsoideo-congestis
vel effuse paniculatis, raro cyraa pauciflora.

25. ScHiEDEA NuTTALLii, Hook. Ic. PI. t. 649, 650 ; Gray, 1. c. p.
137. Eucladiis suffruticosus, Nutt. in herb. Hook. (Remy, 547.)

26. ScHiEDEA DIFFUSA, Gray, 1. c. p. 138, t. 11. (Remy, 546.)

27. ScHiEDEA AMPLEXiCAULis (H. Mann, in Proceed. Bost, Soc.
Nat. Hist. vol. 10, p. 310, Apr. 1866): suffruticosa ; foliis oblongo-
linearibus obtusis mucronatis uninerviis basi lata auriculata amplexi-
caulibus ; panicula ramosissima patentissima ; pedicellis minutissime
hirsutis ; sepalis ovato-lanceolatis acuminatis scarioso-fibrilloso-margi-
natis hispidulis enerviis capsula 3-valvi pauUo longioribus ; staminodiis
lanceolatis apice attenuate integerrimis; filamentis brevibus; seminibus
IfEvibus. — " Kauai or Niihau." — Leaves oblong-linear from a wide
auriculate and clasping base, one-nerved, obtuse, mucronate, about 2
inches long, and 5-6 lines wide. Panicle compound, diffusely spread-
ing, bracted, about a foot long, its younger parts and the calyx minutely
hirsute. Pedicels capillary, 4-8 lines long. Calyx 2 lines long,
sepals ovate-lanceolate, acuminate, with scarious and fibrillose margins,
Staminodia lanceolate, with an entire attenuated apex. Stamens shorter
than the calyx. Capsule few-seeded, nearly equalHng the calyx in
length, splitting into 3 valves. Seeds smooth. (Remy, 548''''.)

28. ScHiEDEA STELLARioiDES (H. Mann, 1. c. p. 310): caule basi
suffruticoso ramosissimo ; foliis spathulato-linearibus obtusis mucronatis
emarginatisve uninerviis, junioribus basi attenuata hirsuto-ciliatis ; pa-
nicula effusa gracili ; pedicellis primum pubescentibus ; sepaHs attenu-
ato-lanceolatis enerviis capsula 3-valvi paullo longioribus ; staminodiis
lanceolatis apice attenuato integerrimis ; filamentis brevibus ; semini-
bus rugulosis. — On the mountains above Waimea, Kauai. — Bushy
and very much branched from a suffruticose base. Finely hirsute in

* * * * Thyrsus globosus, nunc tripartitus : folia tripli - quintupli-nervia : sta-
minodia Integra obtusa : filamenta brevissima.

10. S. GLOBOSA, sp. nov.

§ NoTHOSCHiEDEA. Filamenta complanata subulata. Styli 7, undique stigma-

tosi. Staminodia Integra, obtusa, brevissima : filamenta calyce breviora.

Flores pro genere maximi, perpauci, sepalis subpetaloideis.

11. S. viscosA sp. nov.

VOL. VII. 20

154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

the axils of the leaves and on the inflorescence. Leaves numerous,
small, spathulate-linear, entire at the obtuse apex and raucronate, or
slightly notched, one-nerved, tapering at the hirsute-ciliate base into a
very short petiole. Panicle compound, diffusely branched, bracted.
Calyx 2 lines long, the sepals lanceolate, acuminate, rather thick, nar-
rowly scariou^-margined, longer than the 3-valved capsule. Stamino-
dia, stamens, etc., as in S. amplexicaulis. Seeds few, tuberculate-
roughened. (M. & B. 595.)

29. ScHiEDEA. Menziesii, Hook. Ic. PI. foL 649, adnot.

30. ScHiEDEA HooKERi, Gray, L c. p. 133, adnot.

31. ScHiEDEA LiGUSTRiNA, Cham. & Schlecht. in Linngea, 1, p. 46;
Fenzl, in Endh Atakt. Bot. t. 14, & Ann. Wein. Mus. 2, p. 273 ;
Gray, 1. c. p. 133. Portulacea, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p.
188. (M. & B. 578.)

32. ScHiEDEA SPERGULINA, Gray, 1. c. t. 11. (M. & B. 342.)

33. ScHiEDEA Remyi (H. Maun, 1. c. p. 310): suffruticosa ; foliis
inferioribus angustato-linearibus uninerviis faseiculatis, superioribus
subiilatis ; panicula thyrsoidea contracta e cymulis brevibus puberulis
compositis ; sepalis ovatis obtusis plurinerviis capsulam supcrantibus ;
staminodiis apice bifidis ; filamentis brevibus ; semiuibus fere laivibus.
— Molokai. — Lc:aves very narrowly linear, 2-3 inches long, a line
wide, with smaller ones often fascicled in their axils. Inflorescence a
very much crowded thyrsus, minutely pubescent. Sepals ovate, obtuse,
many-nerved. Staminodia short, bifid at the apex. Stamens short,
of about the length of the staminodia. Ovary ovoid. Styles 4-5,
rather long. Capsule ovoid, shorter than the calyx. Seeds numerous
(30 - 40) , small. (Remy, 55 1 .)

34. ScHiEDEA GLOBOSA (H. Maun, 1. c. p. 311) : humilis; caulibus
e caudice herbaceo erectis simphcissimis ; foliis inferioribus obovato-
lanceolatis sessilibus 3 -5-plinerviis, superioribus angustioribus parvis
tripli-nerviis ; cymulis plurifloribus in capitulum terrainale globosum
raro trifidum longius pedunculatum arete congestis ; sepalis ovatis
obtusis infra medium nervatis capsula ovato-lanceolata 4-valvi brevi-
oribus ; staminodiis integerrimis obtusis staminibusque calyce 2 - 3-plo
brevioribus ; seminibus paucis rugulosis. — Oahu. — Herbaceous, prui-
nose-puberulent on the upper part of the stem and on the inflorescence,
otherwise glabrous. The simple branches rising from the base a span
to a foot high, bearing 4 or 5 pairs of leaves. The lower leaves obo-
vatc-lanceolate from a narrowed sessile base, somewhat fleshy, about

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER U, 1866. 155

4 inches lone:, nnd an inch wide or le?s, 3-5 nerved, the upper dimin-
ished into small subulate bract-like 3-nerved leaves, only three fourths
of an inch long, and a line and a half wide. Tlie upright stem bear-
ing a compact globose thyrsus of an inch in diameter (rarely with two
lateral ones), composed of numerous many-flowered short cymules.
Sepals ovate, obtuse, nerved below the middle, a line and a half long,'
shorter than the ovate-lanceolate capsule. Stamiuodia very short,
blunt, entire, about the length of the stamens. Seeds few, large for
the section, and tuberculate-roughened. (M. & B. 580 ; Remy, 552.)
35. SCHIEDEA VISCOSA (H. Mann, 1. c. p. 311) : decumbens, suffru-
ticosa, glanduloso-pubescens ; ramis adsurgentibus foliosis apice laxe
2- 6-floribus ; foliis breviter oblongis utrinque acutissirais petiolatis
trinervatis demum glabratis ; sepahs ovatis acuminatis plurinerviis
capsulara 7-valvem superantibus ; filamentis calyce brevioribus stamino-
dia late ovata obtusa 3-plo superantibus, iis staminodiorum oppositis
latioribus ; seminibus plurimis tuberculato-rugulosis. — At three thou-
sand feet elevation, on the mountains of Waimea, Kauai. — This species
differs so entirely in its aspect from the rest of the genus, in its almost
trailing manner of growth, and in its peculiarly nerved leaves and
large flowers (nearly half an inch long, forming a comparatively simple
cyme), as to form quite a distinct section. Plant sutFruticose, decum-
bent and spreading with branches 2 or 3 feet long, sending up suberect
flowering stems 8 to 12 inches high. Whole plant covered with a
glandular pubescence, which is viscous, especially on the peduncles and
pedicels. Leaves 14-- If inches long, 4-5 hues wide, evenly taper-
ing at each end to a sharp point, lielow into a margined petiole 2 lines
long, becoming glabrate on the upper surface with age, nerved with
three well-marked veins running from the base to the apex. The
peduncled terminal cymes, composed of 2 - 6 flowers on pedicels about
6 lines long, arising from the axils of small (6 lines long and 1^ hne
wide) floral leaves. The pubescent calyx 5-6 lines long, of five sub-
petaloid ovate-acuminate many-nerved sepals, which enclose and surpass
in length the ovate-lanceolate 7-valved capsule. Staminodia widely
ovate, obtuse, small in proportion to the size of the flower, a line long
and nearly as wide at the base. Stamens 10; those opposite the sepals
inserted with the staminodia, the filaments dilated subulate ; those
alternate narrowly subulate and a little shorter. Styles 7, short at
first and stigmatose all round, but becoming longer with age. Seeds
borne on a central placenta, very numei'ous, tuberculate-roughened
with short obtuse points. (M. & B. 579.)

156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Alsinidendron, H. Mann.

Calyx quadripartitus, sepalis decussatim imbricatis ovalibus subcar-
nosis albidis etiam sub anthesi conniventibus, raro cum quinto minimo
interno. Petala et staminodia nulla. Stamina 10, margini disci tenu-
issimse basi calycis accreti inserta : filamenta filiformia : autherte line-
ari-oblongoe, utrinque emarginataj. Ovarium uniloculare ; ovulis plu-
rimis columelloe centi'ali affixis : styli 4-7, breviter filiformes, apice
intus stigmatosi. Capsula 4 - 7-valvis, polysperma. Semina estrophio-
lata. — Frutex Sandwicensis, orgyalis, fere glaber ; ramis foliosis ;
foliis oppositis araplis ovatis ovalibusque cuspidato-acuminatis basi in
petiolum subito angustatis eximie trinervatis subeveniis ; cymis pluri-
floribus pedunculatis ex axillis superioribus, floribus subglubosis in
pedicellis filiformibus pendulis.

36. A. TRINERVE, H. Mann, 1. c. p. 312. — Kaala Mountains, Oahu,
at an elevation of about 2,000 feet. Collected probably at the same
station by Dr. Hillebrand, in fruit, which proves to be capsular. The
generic character is here corrected, or completed in this respect, from a
capsule sent from Kew herbarium from Dr. Hillebrand's collection.
(M. & B. 582.)

Porlulacacece.

37. Sesuvium portulacastrum, Linn. ; Gray, 1. c. p. 142. (M. &
B. 107.)

38. PoRTULACA viLLOSA, Cham, in LinnfBa, 6, p. 5G5 ; Walp.
Repert. 2, p. 234; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 140.

39. PoRTULACA SCLEROCARPA, Gray, 1. c. p. 141. (M. & B.
340.)

Guttiferce.

40.* Calophyllum inophylluji, Linn. ; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif.
Expl. Exp. 1, p. 218. (M. & B. 121 ; Remy, 564.)

Ternstrcemiacece.

41. EuRYA Sandwicensis, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p.
209. (M. & B. 524 ; Remy, 562.)

Malvacece.

42. GossYPiu.M tomentosum, Nutt. mss. ; Seem. Fl. Vitiensis, p.
22 (1865). G. religiosum. Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 179,
non Cavanilles. G. Sandvicense, Pari. Sp. Coton. p. 37. t. 6. f. B.
(1866). (M. & B. 228 ; Remy, 567.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 15T

43.t GossTPiUJVi RELiGiosuM, Linn. Syst. Nat. ex Seem. Fl. Vitien-
sis, p. 22. adnot. G. Barhadense, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 60 ;
Gray, 1. c. G. Taitense, Pari. Sp. Coton. p. 39, t. 6. f. A.

44. GossYPiUM DRYNARioiDES, Seem. Fl. Vitiensis, p. 22, adnot.
A very well mai'ked species. (Remy, 568?)

45. Hibiscus tiliaceus, Linn. ; Cav. Diss. 3, t. 55 ; Grertn. Fruct.
t. 135; DC. Prodr. 1, p. 454. Paritium tiliaceum, Adr. Juss. in St.
Hil. Fl. Bras. Mer. 1, p. 256; Wight, Ic. PI. Ind. Or. t. 7 ; Gray, 1. c.
p. 178. (M. & B. 86.)

46. Hibiscus Youngianus, Gaud. Bot. Voy. Freyc. p. 91 (abs.
char.) ; Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 79 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 174. (M.
& B. 598; Remy, 559, 561.)

47. Hibiscus Brackenridgei, Gray, 1. c. p. 175. (Remy, 560.)

48. Hibiscus Arnottianus, Gray, 1. c. p. 176. H. Boryanus,
Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy- p. 79, non DC. (M. & B. 530.)

49. Abutilon incanum, Don; Gray, 1. c. p. 168. Sida incana,
Link, Enum. Hort. Berol. 2, p. 204; DC. Prodr. 1, p. 468.

50. Abutilon Menziesii, Seem. Fl. Vitiensis, p. 15, adnot.

51. Sida fallax, Walp. Reliq. Meyen. p. 306; Gray, 1. c. p. 161.
Sida rotundifolia, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 79, non Cav.
Sida Diellii, Gray, 1. c. p. 162. Anoda ovata, Meyen, Riese, 2, p. 139.
(M. & B. 390, 247, 65 ; Remy, 554.)

52. Sida Sertum, Nutt. in Herb. Hook.; Gray, 1. c. p. 163. Sida
rotundifolia, var.. Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 79.

53. Sida Meyeniana, Walp. Rel. Meyen. p. 307 ; Gray, 1. c. p.
164. Sida idmifolia, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech, Voy. p. 79, non Cav.
(M. & B. 31, 238 ; Remy, 555, 558.)

54.t Sida rhombifolia, Linn. ; Gray, 1. c. p. 158. (M. & B. 66 ;
Remy, 556.)

55.t Malvastrum tricuspidatum, Gray, PI. Wright, (in Smith-
son. Contrib. 3) 1, p. 16; Gray, 1. c. p. 148. (M. & B. 18.)

Sterculiacece.

56.* Waltheria Americana, Linn.; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl.
Exp. 1, p. 189. W. Indica, Linn. (M. e^ B. 5 ; Remy, 569.)
57. Waltheria pyrol^folia. Gray, 1. c. p. 190.
57\t GuAZUMA TOMENTOSA, H B K., was found by Mr. Brigham.

158 PROCEEDINGS OF TPTE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Tiliacece.

58. ElvEGCARPUS bifidus, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 110,

t. 24; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 205. Beythea bifida,

Endl. ; Walp. Repert. 1, p. 365,, & 5, p. 121. (M. & B. 125 ; Remy,

561.)

Zygoplnjllacew.

59. Tribulus cistoides, Linn. ; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp.
1, p. 125. (M. & B. 33 ; Remy, 627.)

Geraniacece.

60. Geranium multiflordm, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1,
p. 311, t. 29.

61. Geranium cuneatum, Hook. Ic. PI. t. 198 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 312,
t. 29. Var. a. Menziesii, Hook. 1. c. ; Gray, I. c. (M. & B. 307 ; Re-
my, 628.) Var. jS. hypoleucum. Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 433.) Var. y.
hololeucum, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 429.)

62. Geranium ovatifolium, Gray, 1. c. p. 314, t. 30.

63. Geranium arboreum. Gray, 1. c. p. 315, t. 31.
64.t OxALis CORNICULATA, Linn. ; Gray, 1. c. p. 320.

65.t OxALis Martiana, Zucc. Oxal. Nachtr. p. 27. (M. & B. 37.)

Rutacece,

66. Pelea clusi^folia, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 340,
t. 35 ; H. Mann, in Proceed. Bost. Soc Nat. Hist. 10, p. 312. Glusia
sessilis, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 80, non Forst. (M. & B.
599.)

67. Pelea sapot^folia (H. Mann, 1. c. p. 312) : foliis (amplis
chartaceis) quaternatim verticillatis elongato-oblongis emarginatis basi
subattenuatis supra glaberrimis subtus prfesf^rtim ad costam pnbe?centi-
bus crebre penninerviis chartaceis longiuscule petiolatis ; calycis lobis
late ovatis petalis ovatis brevioribus ; stylo qitadripartito ovario lon-
giore ; capsula. ... — Kauai, in the valleys of Kealia and Hanalei, on
the windward side of the island. (M. & B. 559.)

68. Pklea auricul^folia. Gray, 1. c. p. 343, t. 36 ; H. Mann, 1.
c. p. 313.

69. Pelea Kavaiensis (H. Mann, 1. c. p. 313) : foliis ovalibus supra
glaberrimis subtus praesertim ad costam velutino-villosis petiolatis ;
fioribus in axilUs solitariis pedicellatis parvis; calycis lobis ovato-rotun-
datis petalis ovatis dimidio brevioribus ; stylo ovario glabro asquilongo ;

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 159

capsula parva quadripartita glaberrima. — Kauai, on the mountains
above Waimea, at the elevation of three thousand feet. — A small tree,
fifteen or twenty feet high. (M. & B.)

70. Pelea anisata (H. Mann, 1. c. p. 314) : glabra ; foliis charta-
ceis oblongis obtusis petiolatis ; tloribus in axillis solitariis raro binis
vel ternis brevissime pedicellatis ; calycis lobis late ovatis obtusis petalis
ovato-oblongis triplo brevioribus ; stylo ovarium bis superante ; capsula
leviter quadi'iloba. — Kauai, on various parts of the island, but most
abundant in the neighborhood of Hanalei. (M. & B. 557.)

71. Pelea oblongifolia, Gray, 1. c. p. 343; H.Mann, 1. c. p.

315. (M. & B. 208, 235, 376, 600.)

72. Pelea rotundifolia, Gray, 1. c. p. 344, t. 37 ; H. Mann, 1. c.
p. 315. (M. &. B. 209.)

73. Pelea Sandwicensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 345, t. 37 ; H. Mann, 1. c.
p. 315. Brunellia Sandwicensis, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 93, sine
descr. ; Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 80. (Remy, 622.)

74. Pelea volcanica, Gray, 1. c. t. 38 ; H. Mann, 1. c. (M. &B.)

75. Melicope cinerea. Gray, 1. c. p. 350, t. 39 ; H. Mann, 1. c. p.

316. (M. & B. 558.)

76. Melicope barbigera, Gray, 1. c. p. 351, t. 39 ; H. Mann, 1. c.
p. 316. (M. «&B. 560.)

77. Melicope spatiiulata, Gray, 1. c. p. 352 ; H. Mann, 1. c.

78. Melicope elliptica. Gray, 1. c. p. 353 ; H. Mann, 1. c. p.

317. (M. & B. 377.)

Platydesma, H. Mann.

Flore? hermaphroditi. Calyx quadrisepalus, persistens, imbricatus ;
sepalis rotundatis, exterioribus majoribus interiora asstivatione inclu-
dentibus. Petala 4, aestivatione late convoluto-imbricata vel convoluta,
ampla, obovata, apice recurva. Discus planus, leviter 4-lobus. Sta-
mina 8, disco inserta, infra medium monadelpha ; filamentis nudis ovatis
seu ovato-lanceolatis crassis ; antherie sagittat^e, facei interiori infra
apicem lilamenti adnatte. Ovarium 4-partitum : stylus centralis : stic-
mate 4-lobo : ovula in loculis 5, amphitropa. Cocci erecti, omnino
discreti, subsucculenti, abortu sgepissime dispermi, endocarpio tenui
cartilagineo. Embryo .... — Arbuscula Sandwicensis, fere glabra,
graveolens. Folia opposita, ampla, simplicia, lanceolata vel obovato-
lanceolata, obtusa vel acuminata, petiolata. Cymas axillares pauciflorse,
pedicellis 2-bracteolatis. Fioi'es magni, albi.

160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

79. Plattdesma campanulata, H. Mann, I.e. p. 317. — Oahu,
on the mountains behind Honolulu, at middle heights. — A small tree.
Leaves 5 to 15 inches long. Flowers an inch long. (M. & B. 94.)

80. Zanthoxylum Kaviense (Gray, 1. c. p. 354 ; H. Mann, 1. c.
p. 318): " inerme, glabrum ; foliis alternis pinnatis 3 - 5-foliolatis ;
foliolis coriaceis ovalibus integerrimis baud punctatis; paniculis axil-
laribus compositis ; fructibus stipitatis"; — floribus tetrameris ; calycis
lobis ovato-subulatis petalis fl. masc. lanceolatis triplo, fl. foem. lineari-
ligulatis quadruplo brevioribus ; antheris ovalibus ; ovario solitario. —
Kauai. Hawaii. — The fruit has been described from the specimens of
the South Pacific Exploring Expedition. I have described the flowers
from a specimen, probably of the same species, collected on Hawaii by
Remy, but differing in the thinner texture of the leaves, which appear
with the flowers. Calyx four-lobed ; the lobes ovate-subulate, about
three fourths of a line long, in the male flowers thrice shorter than the
lanceolate petals : stamens four, a line in length ; filaments capillary ;
anthers oval. In the female flower the sepals are four times shorter ,
than the linear-ligulate petals, which are imbricated in aestivation ;
stamens reduced to four glands ; ovary unilocular, stipitate ; stigma
globular. (Remy, 614.)

81. Zanthoxylum Maviej^se (H. Mann, 1. c. p. 319): inerme,
pube tenuiter velutina cinereum ; foliis alternis 3-foliolatis ; foliolis
coriaceis ovalibus (lateralibus basi hinc excisa valde incequilateris)
integerrimis baud punctatis ; paniculis axillaribus ; coccis solitariis
estipitatis lunulato-ovoideis. — Maui. — The specimen is apparently from
an unarmed tree, bearing mature fruit only ; it is cinereous with a fine
velutinous pubescence, especially on the under surface of the alternate
trifoliolate leaves. Petioles fifteen to twenty lines long. Leaflets
ovate, truncated at the base ; the two lateral ones unequal, the upper
base being three lines shorter than the lower, two to two and a half
inches long by fifteen to twenty lines wide. Panicle several-flowered.
Carpel solitary, estipitate, four to five lines long, lunulate-ovoid, becom-
ing two-valved ; the endocarp adnate. Seed solitary, filling the cell.
Known only from Remy's collection. (Remy, 615.)

82. Zanthoxylum (Blackburnia) dipetalum (H. Mann, 1. c. p.
319) : inerme, glabrum ; foliis alternis 3 - 9-foliolatis ; foliolis coriaceis
oblongis vel ovatis integerrimis punctatis ; paniculis florura sterilium
compositis ; petalis 2 ovalibus crassissimis jestivatione valvatis calyce
4-dentato quadruplo longioribus ; antheris oblongis : — flores fertiles

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 161

fructusque ignoti. — Oahu? — A tree about thirty feet high, entirely gla-
brous. The specimens furnish immature sterile flowers. Leaves alter-
nate, 3 - 9-foliolate, petioled. Leaflets two to four inches long by seven
to twenty lines wide, oblong or oblong-ovafe, obtuse, coriaceous, punc-
tate, pinnately veined, entire, equal at the base, and with one or two
email (three to nine lines long) foliar bodies arising from just below
the lower leaflets, which, were it not for their anomalous position,
might be likened to large stipules. Panicles axillary or terminal,
cymosely many-flowered, with a very thick and nodose peduncle and
axis. Calyx small, less than a line long, four-lobed. Petals only two,
oval, valvate in aestivation and remarkably thick, in the bud three or
four lines long, probably caducous. Stamens four ; filaments short, sub-
ulate ; anthers oblong. (Collected only by Hillebrand.)

IlicinecB.

83. Byronia Sandwicensis, Endl. in Ann. Wein. Mus. 1, p. 184,
«fc Gen. PI. p. 1093 ; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 296, t. 26.
Ilex? anomala, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. Ill, t. 25. (M. &
B. 205 ; Remy, 578.)

CelastracecB.

84. Perrottetia Sandwicensis, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp.
1, p. 291, t. 24. (M. & B. 93 ; Remy, 575, 576.)

Rhamnace(E.

85. CoLUBRiNA AsiATiCA, Brongn. Rham. in Ann. Sci. Nat. 10, p.
368 ; Guillem. Zeph. Tait. p. 68. Ceanothus Asiaticus, Linn. ; Cav.
Ic. 5, t. 440 ; DC. Prodr. 2, p. 30. C. capsularis, Forst. Prodr. Fl.
Ins. Aust. p. 18. (Remy, 580 ; W. T. Brigham.)

86. CoLUBRiNA OPPOSiTiFOLiA (Brongn. in Herb. Gray) : glabra,
inermis ; foHis oppositis oblongo-ovatis v. ovalibus integerrimis coriaceis
penninerviis ; cymis petiolo suba?quilongis. — At once distinguished by
its opposite entire leaves. (Remy, 581 ; Hillebrand, 128.)

87. Alphitonia excelsa, Riessek, in Endl. Gen.; Benth. Fl. Aust.
1, p. 414. A. zizyphoides, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 278, t.
22. A.franguloides, Gray, 1. c. p. 280, t. 22. Colubrina excelsa, Fenzl
in Hijgel, Enum. 20. Zizyphus pomaderroides, Fenzl, 1. c. Rhamnus
zizyphoides, Sol. in Forst. Prodr. Ins. Aust. p. 90, no. 510 (absq.
char.) ; Spreng. Syst. 1, p. 768 ; DC. Prodr. 2, p. 27. Ceanothus
dealbatus, Dryand. mss. in Herb. Mus. Brit. Zizyphoides argentea,

VOL. VII. 21

162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Sol. Prim. Fl. Pacif. p. 378. Pomaderris zizyphoides. Hook. & Am.
Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 61. Rhamnus incana, Roxb. ; Spreng. Sjst. Veg.
Cur. Post. p. 86 ? fide spec. Hort. Calc. (Remy, 582, 583, 584.)

88. GouANiA viTiFOLiA, Gray, 1. c. p. 283.

89. GocANiA ORBICULARIS (Walp. Rel. Meyen. p. 323) : ramis
erectis v. decumbentibus cum inflorescentia sericeo-pubescentibus vel
glabratis ; foliis orbiculatis seu oblongis integerrimis coriaceis penni-
nerviis ; cymulis axillaribus confertis petiolum baud superantibus ; fruc-
tibus crasse alatis. — Gray, 1. c. p. 284. G. integrifolia, Meyen,
Riese, 2, p. 156. non Lam. (M. & B. 344.) Var. /3. pedunculis
gracillimis folio longe petiolato paullo brevioribus. (Remy, 586.)

Sapindacea.

90. DODON^A viscosA, Linn. Mant. p. 238 ; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif.
Expl. Exp. 1, p. 260 ; Seem. Fl. Vitiensis, p. 49. D. spathulata,
Smith, in Rees, Cyel. no. 2 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 261. (M. & B. 308, 239,
410 pro parte.)

91. DoDON^A ERIOCARPA, Smith, in Rees, Cycl. ; Gray, 1. c. p.
261. (M. & B. 410 pro parte ; Remy, 570.)

92.* Cardiospermum Halicacabum, Linn., var. C microcarpum,
H B K. <M. & B. 380,)

Anacardiacece.

93. Rhus seaiialatum, Murr. in Comm. Goett. 1784, & in Linn.
Syst. Veg. ed. 14. i?. Sandwicensis, Gray, in Bot. S. Pacif. Expl.
Exp. 1, p. 369. (M. & B. 412.)

Connaracece.

94. CoNNARUS ? Kavaiensis (sp. nov.) : arborea, glaber ; foliis
nunc palmato- nunc pinnato-3-5-foliolatis ; foliolis crasse coriaceis ova-
libus seu obovatis venis subtus prominulis transverse costatis, terminali
saepe basi inaequali, lateralibus plerumque parvis difformibus margine
revolutis (an monstruosis ?) ; pedunculo paucifloro oppositifolio ; sepalis
4 minutis incrassatis ; folli<;ulo obovato lignescente glabro substipitato ;
semine atro-nitido exarillato loculum implente, testa crassa Crustacea ;
radicula supera. — Mountains above Waimea, Kauai, 3000 feet. — A
tree, 25 or 30 feet high, and glabrous throughout. Leaves palmately
or pinnately 3 - 5-foliolate : leaflets 3-5 inches long, 2-3 wide, the
upper surface punctuated with black dots. The reticulations are much
imbedded, and therefore not very conspicuous ; the two lower and

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 163

lateral leaflets are very small, about an inch long, and with the mar-
gins strongly revolute (perhaps a diseased state ?). Peduncles oppo-
site the leaves, three to four inches long, and few- (to 8 ?) flowered.
As the specimens are only in fruit the flowers are unknown, but the
four very small and thick persistent sepals appear to have been slightly
imbricated, and about a line long. Follicle quite woody, an inch long,
and entirely filled by the very hard black seed, which seems to be in-
serted along the whole ventx'al suture, and is entirely without an arillus !
Cotyledons thick and fleshy, plano-convex. Radicle short, included,
superior. — Only a single tree seen. (M. & B. 581.)

Leguminosce.

95.t Crotalaria Assamica, Benth., in Hook. Lond. Journ. Bot. 2,
p. 481. (M. & B. 62.)

96.* Crotalaria sericea, Retz. ; "W. & Arn. Prodr. 1, p. 186.

97.t Crotalaria longirostrata, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech.
Voy. p. 285. (W. T. Brigham.)

98.t Indigofera Anil, Linn. (M. & B. 4.)

99.* Tephrosia piscatoria, Pers. ; Guill. Zeph. Tait. p. 62 ;
Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 407. (M. & B. 61.)

100. Sesbania tomentosa, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p.
286, excl. loco natali. Agati tomentosa, Nutt. in Herb. Hook. ; Gray,
1. c. p. 409. (Reray, 654, 655 ; W. T. Brigham.)

101.* Sesbania grandiflora, Poir. Diet. 7, p. 127. Agati grandi-
jlora, Desv. Jour. Bot. A. coccinea, Desv. 1. c. (M. & B. 589.)

102. Desmodium Sandwicense, E. Meyer, Ind. Sem. Hort. Regio-
mont. 1850, & in Linnsea, 24, p. 230 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 433. — This has
very much the aspect of an introduced plant, as it is generally sup-
posed to be, by the residents. (M. «&; B. 26 ; Remy, 657.)

103.* Desmodium triflorum, DC. Prodr. 2, p. 334 ; Gray, L c.
p. 432. (M. & B. 115 ; Remy, 658.)

104. ViciA Mexziesii, vSpreng. Syst. Veg. 3, p. 267 ; Gray, 1. c. p.
420. V. grandiflora, Smith, in Rees, Cych no. 7. (Remy, 656.)

105. Erythrina monosperma, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 486, t.
114 ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 81 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 444. (M. & B. 394.)

106. Strongtlodon lucidum. Seem. Fh Vitiensis, p. 61. Gly-
cine lucida, Forst. Prodr. n. 272. RJujnchosia lucida, DC. Prodr. 2,
p. 387. Strongylodon ruber, Vogel, in Linngea, 10, p. 585 ; Gray,
1. c. p. 446, t. 48. Mucuna altissima, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy.
p. 81, non alior. (M. «fe B. 134 ; Remy, 672.)

164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

107. MucuNA GIGANTEA, DC. Prodr. 2, p. 405 ; Guill. Zeph. Tait.
p. 62 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 442 ; Seem. Fl. Vitiensis, p. 59. (Remj^, 670.)

108. MucuNA URENS, DC. Prodr. 2, p. 405 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 443.
Dolichos urens, Linn'. (M. & B. 395.)

109. DiocLEA viOLACEA, Mart. ; Benth. in Ann. Wien. Mus. 2, p.
133 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 439 ; Seem. Fl. Vitiensis, p. 57. (Remy, 673.)

110. Canavalia galeata, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 486, adn. ;
Gray, 1. c. p. 441 ; Vogel, in Linnaea, 10, p. 584. Dolichos galeatus,
Gaud. 1. c. p. 486, t. 115. Canavalia Gaudichaudii, Endl. Syn. Fl.
Ins. Aust. in Ann. AVein. Mus. 1, p. 186. Var. ^. pdbescens,
Gray, 1. c. p. 441. G. pubescens, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 81 ;
Vogel, in Linnsea, 10, p. 584. (M. & B. 393 ; Remy, 664.)

111.* Phaseolus Truxillensis, HBK. Nov. Gen. Am. 6, p.
451. P. Cummingii, Benth. Comm. Legum. (in Ann. Wein. Mus.) p*
75. P. amoenus, Sol. in Forst. Prodr. Ins. Aust. no. 553, abs. char.
P. rostratus, Wall. PI. Asiat. Rar. 1, p. 50, t. 63. (Remy, 674, foliis
angustis.)

112.* Phaseolus semierectus, Linn. ; Jacq. Ic. Rar. t.>658. (M.
& B. 47.)

113. ViGNA lutea. Gray, 1. c. p. 452 ; Seem. Fl. Vitiensis, p. 62.
Scytalis anomala, Vogel, Rel. Meyen. p. 33 ? (W. T. Brigham.)

114. ViGNA Oahuensis, Vogel, in Linntea, 10, p. 585 ; Gray, 1. c.
p. 450. V. villosa, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p- 81, non Savi.

115. ViGNA Sandwicensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 451, t. 50. (M. & B.
445 ; Remy, 675.)

116.* Dolichos Lablab, Linn. Spec. p. 725. (M. & B. 48.)
117.* Cajanus Indicus, Spreng. Syst. 3, p. 248 ; Gray 1. c. p. 453.
(M. & B. 52.)

118. SoPHORA (Edwardsia) chrtsophylla. Seem. Fl. Vitiensis,
p. 66. Edivardsia chrysoiihylla, Salisb. ; Gray, 1. c. p. 459. (M. &
B. 352 ; Remy, 677.)

119. C^SALPiNiA (Guilandina) Bonduc, Benth.; Seem. 1. c.
Guilandina Bonduc, Linn. ; Gray, 1. c. p. 461. (M. & B. 109.)

120. C^SALPiNiA Kavaiensis (sp. nov.) : arborea, inermis ; ramis
novellis pubescentibus ; foliis abrupte-bipinnatis ; pinnulis 3-5-jugis;
foliolis oblongis obtusis emarginatisve basi obtusis vel in petiolum
brevera atLeuuatis ; racemis pluritloris ; pedicellis floribus duplo longi-
oribus ; stamiiiibus corollam paullo superantibus ; filamentis hirsutis. —
On the leeward verge of the mountains of Kauai. — A small tree with.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 165

remarkably durable, very dark-colored wood, the " Uhiuhi " of the
natives. Leaves with about 3 pairs of primary pinnae. Leaflets one
or two inches long, ^ to ^ inch wide, paler underneath, glabrous ex-
cepting the base of the midrib below in the young parts. Flowers
purple, I of an inch long. (M. & B.)

121. Cassia Gaudichaudii, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 81 ;
Gray, 1. c. p. 4^3. (M. & B. 13 ; R. 680, 681.)

122. Acacia Koa, Gray, 1. c. p. 480. Acacia heterophylla, Hook.
& Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 81. (M. »fe B. 78 ; Remy, 689.)

123.t Acacia Faunesiana, Willd. Spec. 4, p. 1083. (M. & B.)

RosacecB.

124. RuBus Hawaiensis, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p.
504, t. 56. (M. & B.)

125. RuBus MACRiEi, Gray, 1. c. p. 505, t. 57. (M. & B. 425.)

1 26. Fragaria Chilensis, Ehrh. ; Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 424.)

127. Ac^NA ExiGUA, Gray, 1. c. p. 498. (M. & B. 431.)

128. OsTEOMELES ANTHYLLIDIFOLIA, Lindl. in Trans. Linn. Soc.
13, p. 98, t. 8 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 507. (M. & B. 423.)

Saxifrag-acece.

129. Broussaisia arguta. Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 479, t. 69 ;
Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 683, t. 87 ; Hook. & Arn. Bot.
Beech. Voy. p. 84. B.pellucida, Gaud. Bot. Bonite, t. 9, sine descr. ;
Gray, 1. c. p. 685. The character of the more or less superior ovary is
inconstant : that of the whorled leaves (in threes) in B. pellucida ap-
pears insufficient to warrant its separation as a distinct species, though,
as far as known, it is constant. (M. «& B. 320, 421, 529 ; Remy,
515.)

Droseracece.

130. Drosera longifolia, Linn, pro parte ; Fries Novit. p. 82;
Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 100. D. Anglica, Huds. Fl.
Angl. p. 135 ; DC. Prodr. 1, p. 318 ; Hook. Brit. Fl., & Fl. Bor.-Am.
1, p. 81.

Halorasrece.

131. GuNNERA PETALOiDEA, Gaud. Bot. Frcyc. Voy. p. 512 ; Gray,
Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 629, t. 78, 79. (M. & B. 626 ; Remy,
165.)

166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Myrtacece.

132. Metrosideros polymorpha, Gaud. Bot. Voj. Freyc. p. 99,
& 482, t. 108, 109 ; Hook. & Am. Bot. Beech. Voj. p. 82 ; Gray, Bot.
S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 5G2. (M. & B. 72, var. /3 ; 96, var. y ; 96%
var. f.) Var. lute A : floribus flavis. M.lutea, Gray, 1. c. p. 560, t.
69, B. (M. & B. 212.)

133. Metrosideros rugosa, Gray, 1. c. p. 561, t. 69, A.

134. Metrosideros macropus, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p.
83 ; Gray, L c. p. 564, t. 70. (M. & B.)

135.t PsiDiuM GuAJAVA, Linn. Spec. ed. 1, p. 470 ; Gray, 1. c. p.
550. (M. & B.)

136.* Eugenia (Jambosa) Malaccensis, Linn. Spec. p. 672 ;
Gray, 1. c. p. 510. Some tr^es bear only pure white flowers, though
the more common color is red-purple. (M. & B. 119.)

137. Eugenia (Syztgium) Sandwicensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 519.
This is one of the largest forest trees, growing at times to a diameter
of four or five feet at the base. (M. & B. 204.)

Lythracece.

138. Lythrum maritimum, HBK. ; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif Expl.
Exp. 1, p. 606. (M. & B. 8 ; Remy, 632, 633.)

139.t Cuphea Balsamona, Cham. & Schlecht. in Linnsea, 2, p. 363.
(Remy, 635.)

Onagracece.

140.* Jussi^A. viLLOSA, Lam. ; W. & Arn. Prodr. Fl. Penins. 1,
p. 336. J. octofila, DC. Prodr. 3, p. 57. /. octonervia, Lam. ; Walp.
in Rel. Meyen. p. 326; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 619.
(M. & B. 46.)

Cucurhitacece.

141.* Lagenaria vulgaris, Ser. in DC. Prodr. 3, p. 299 ; Seem.
Fl. Vitiensis, p. 106.

142.* Cucurbita maxima, Duch. in Lam. Diet. 2, p. 151 ; Seem.
Fl. Vitiensis, p. 107, adnot.

143. SiCYOS (Sicyocarya) pachycarpus, Hook. & Arn. Bot.
Beech. Voy. p. 83 ; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif Expl. Exp. 1, p. 650, t. 80.
(M. & B. 444 ; Remy, 537.)

144. SiCYOS (Sicyocarya) macrophyllus. Gray, 1. c. t. 81.

145. SiCYOS (Sicyocarya) cucumkrincs, Gray, I.e. p. 652, t. 82.
(M. & B. 604, var. y.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 167

146. SiCTOS (Sictocarta) microcaepus (sp. nov.) : foliis cor-
dato-rotundis obtuse 4-6-angulatis serratis dentibus mucronulatis supra
papilloso-scabridis subtus hispidulo-puberulis ; pedunculis masculis elon-
gatis paucifloris, foemineis brevissimis ; fructibus perplurimis pusillis
ovato-pyramidatis rostrato-apiculatis inermibus puberulis in capitulum
globosum arete congestis. — Oahu. — Stem slender, strongly angled.
Leaves on slender petioles of more than their own length, 1 to 2^
inches in diameter, membranaceous. Male panicles on very slender
axillary peduncles, exceeding the leaves in length. Female flowers
30 to 40 in a head ; the fruit but 2 lines long, and quite sessile on the
apex of a peduncle only 2 or 3 lines long. — Known only from Remy's
collection. (Remy, 541.)

Papayacece.

147.* Papaya vulgaris, DC. in Lam. Diet. vol. 5, p. 2. Carica
Papaya, Linn.; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 640.

BegoniacecB.

148. HiLLEBRANDiA * Sandwicensis, Oliver, in Trans. Linn. Soc.
25, p. 362, t. 46. An interesting new genus, of a single species, first
collected by Mr. Baldwin, of Lahaina, W. Maui, in the mountain val-
leys behind that town, where also Hillebrand obtained his specimens ;
seen abundantly and collected by us on the mountains of Kauai. (M.
& B. 583.)

Umbelliferce.

149. Hydrocotyle interrupta, Muhl. ; Gray, Bot. S. Pacif.
Expl. Exp. 1, p. 692. (M. & B. 28.)

* HILLEBRANDIA, Oliver, 1. c. " Flores monoici. Masculi : Sepala 5.
Petala 5, parva, cucullata, sepalis alterna. Stamina indefinita, filamentis liberis, an-
theris oblongis ellipticisve muticis rima niarginali dehiscentibus. Fceminei: Calyx
tubo hemisphoerico exalato, limbo perigyno 5-partito. Petala 5, eis fl. masc.
similia, perigyna, lobis calycis alterna. Styli 5, distincti, persistentes, lobis calycis
oppositi, bifurcati, lobis spiraliter stigmatosis. Ovarium apice liberum, hians, sub-
uniloculare ; placentis 5 parietalibus bilamellatis utrinque ovuliferis plus minus
basi irregulariter coalitis. Capsula membranacea, vertice exserta, foramine lato
inter stylos aperta. Semina indefinita, oblongo-obovoidea, exalbuminosa, testa areo-
lata; embryone cotylcdonibus brevibus, radicula obtusa. — Herba habitu omnino
BegonicE : dlfFert floribus petaliferis, placentatione atque capsula apice hiante indehis-
cente."

168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

150. Sanicula Sandwicensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 705.
151.t Daucus pusillus, Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1, p, 164; Gray,
I.e. p. 711.

AraliacecB.

152. Hedera Gaudichaudii, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp.
1, p. 719, t. 90. Aralia trigyna, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 474, t. 98.
Panax ? Gaudichaudii, DC. Prodr. 4, p. 253 ; Hook. & Arn. Bot.
Beech. Voy. p. 84. Var. yS. Panax ? ovatum, Hook. & Arn. 1. c.
(M. & B. 379.)

153. Hedeka plattphylla, Gray, 1. c. p. 720, t. 91. Panax'?
•platyphjUum, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. (M. &. B. 605.)

154. Heptapleurum (Pterotropia *) Kavaiense (sp. nov.) :
arboreum ; foliis impari-pinnatis, junioribus inflorescentiaque dense fur-
furaceo-puberulis demura glabratis ; foliolis 15-19 coriaceis elongato-
oblongis acutiusculis integeri'imis basi truncatis brevi-petiolatis ; pani-
cula composita; floribus racemoso-umbellatis ; umbellis 10-20floris;
petalis per antbesin patentibus staminibusque 6 ; stylo longiusculo ;
ovario subsemisupero 4-loculari. — Mountains above Waimea, Kauai, at
an elevation of 2000 - 3000 feet. — A large, soft-wooded tree, often
40 or 50 feet high. Leaves two feet long, leaflets 7 or 8 inches long,
2 inches wide. Flowers nearly half an inch across when expanded.
Drupe 5 or 6 lines long, pointed with the sulcate style and stigma.
(M. & B. 606.)

155. Heptapleurum (Pterotropia) diptrenum (sp. nov.) :
arborescens ; foliis impari-pinnatis, junioribus inflorescentiaque dense
furfuraceo-puberulis demum glabratis ; foliolis 13-15 coriaceis oblon-
gis vel ovatis obtusis integerrimis basi cordatis brevissime petiolatis ;
panicula composita; floribus racemoso-umbellatis; umbellis 6-12-
floris ; stigmatibus 2 sessilibus ; ovario maxima parte supero biloculari
(an semper?). — Lanai. — A small tree, 15 or 20 feet high. Leaves

* Ovarium semisuperam. Folia impari-pinnata. — (Stylus aut longiusculus, aut
nullus.) — Unless genera are founded upon the foliage merely, these two Hawaiian
species must apparently be referred to Heptapleurum, Gffirtn. {Paratropia, DC),
in which, however, they form a marked section, on account of their pinnate leaves.
The summit of the ovary is more or less free in several of the genuine species; in
one of ours the drupe is about one third, in the other even two thirds superior. One
of them has a conspicuous style and a 4-lobed stigma ; the other two sessile stig-
mas, just as Miquel's two sections differ ; and one of them is remarkable for the
extreme reduction in the number of the carpels.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 169

a foot or more long. Leaflets 3 inches long, 15 to 20 lines wide. In-
florescence (in both species) compound racemose-umbellate, both the
primary divisions, or peduncles, and the secondary, or pedicels, umbel-
late at the apex and racemose below. Immature drupe four lines
long. Flowers unknown. (M. & B. 349.)

156. Reynoldsia Sandwicensis, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp.
1, p. 724, t. 92. (M. & B. 607.)

157. Tetraplasandra Hawaiensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 728, t. 94.
(M. & B. 378.)

158. Gastonia ? Oahuensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 726. A small tree,
15 or 20 feet high, known to the natives as "Ohe mauka" (while
Reynoldsia Sandwicensis is " Ohe makai ") ; seen by me in the Kaala
mountains, but unfortunately without flower or fruit, so that the genus
remains as doubtful as ever : probably it is no Gastonia. There are
fragments of three other Hawaiian Araliacese in the collections.

"a

Loranthacecs.

159. ViscuM moniliforme, Blume. Bijdr. p. 667, & Fl. Jav.
Loranth. t. 25 ; Cham. & Schlecht. in Linnnea, 3, p. 202 ; Gray, Bot.
S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. 1, p. 744. (M. & B. 7.)

Rubiacece.

160. CoPROSMA RHYNCHOCARPA, Gray, in Proceed. Amer. Acad.
4, p. 48. (Remy, 333.)

161. CoPROSMA LONGiFOLTA, Gray, L c. p. 48. (M. & B. 132.)

162. CopROSMA FOLiosA, Gray, 1. c. p. 48. (M. & B. 531, 609;
Remy, 629''■^)

163. CoPROSMA PUBENS, Gray, 1. c. p. 49. (M. & B. 561.)

164. CoPROSMA Menziesii, Gray, 1. c. p. 49. (M. & B. 317, 454,
455 ; Remy, 334.)

165. CoPROSMA ERNODEOiDES, Gray, 1. c. p. 49. (M. & B. 453 ;
Remy, 317, 318.)

166. Nertera depressa, Banks, in Gaertn. Fr. 1, p. 124, t. 26.
(M. & B. 128.)

167.t RicHARDSONiA SCABRA, St.-Hil. (Remy, 319.)

168. P^DERIAFCETIDA, Linn.;DC. Prodr. 4, p. 471. (M.&B. 522.)

169. Canthidm lucidum, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 65.
Myonima umbellata, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 86. (M. & B. 346 ; Remy
329.)

VOL. VII. 22

170 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

170. PsYCHOTRiA HEXANDRA (sp. nov.) : glabra; stipulis amplis
foliaceis ovatis connatis petiolum vix adiEquantibus deciduis ; foliis ob-
lanceolatis utrinque acuminatis supra viridibus subtus pallidis, venis
primariis 10-14; cyma decomposita ; floribus hexameris ; calyce cu-
puliformi 6-dentato ; corolla fauce villosa, limbo tubo subinfundibuli-
formi triplo breviore ; antheris stylisque subinclusis ; stigmate bifido.
— On the mountains above Waimea, Kauai. — A large shrub. Leaves
3 to 6 inches long, 1 to If wide, abruptly acuminate at the apex, and
tapering to a narrowly cuneate base, paler beneath. Flowers white, a
half to three fourths of an inch long. (M. & B. 564, 570.)

171. PsYCHOTRiA GRANDiFLORA (sp. nov.) : fere glabra; stipulis
caducis ; foliis obovatis vel oblongo-ovatis obtusis margine tenuiter
revolutis basi in petiolum brevem angustatis coriaceis, venis primariis
conspicuis utrinque 6-9, venulis reticulatis ; cyma 12 - 20 flora minute
ferrugineo-puberula ; limbo corollse tubo subinfundibuliformi triplo bre-
viore ; antheris stylisque breviter exsertis ; stigmate emarginato ; fruc-
tibus ovalibus 8-costatis calycis limbo parvo cupuliformi coronatis ;
pyrenis cartilagineis intus planis dorso convexo tricostatis. — On the
mountains above Waimea, Kauai. — A large shrub or small tree, 20
feet high. Leaves 2 to 4 inches long, 1 to 2 inches wide, obtuse at
both ends, or tapering slightly into the short petiole, dark green. Cyme
on a long peduncle, nearly equalling the leaves. Corolla waxy white,
three fourths of an inch long, very handsome. (M. & B. 566.)

172. Straussia Kaduana, Gray, 1. c. p. 43. Coffea Kaduana,
Cham. & Schlecht. in Linn^a, 4, p. 33 ; Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech.
Voy. p. 86 ; Walp. in Rel. Meyen. p. 352. (M. & B. 563, 567 ; Remy,
321, 325.)

173. Straussia Mabiniana, Gray, 1. c. p. 43. Coffea Mariniana,
Cham. & Schlecht. 1. c. Coffea Chamissonis, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. The
only characters upon which this species can be kept distinct from the
first are, so far as the specimens now show, the slightly longer tube of
the corolla, which is bearded within.

174. Straussia Hawaiensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 43.

175. BoBEA ELATiOR, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 473, t. 93 ; Gray,
1. c. p. 36. (M. & B. 114 ; Remy, 336, 337.)

176. BoBEA BREViPES, Gray, 1. c. p. 36. (M. & B. 621.)

177. GuETTARDELLA Sandwicensis, H. Mann. Chomelia'?
Sandwicensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 38. (M. & B. 341.)

178.* MoRiNDA ciTRiFOLiA, Linn. (M. & B. 225.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 171

179. Gardenia Brighamii (sp. nov.): arborescens, inermis ; foliis
ovatis basi rotundatis breviter petiolatis, costa subtus hispidula; stipulis
ovatis acutis deciduis, basi persistente hispida cupuliforrai ; flore termi-
nal! sessili ; calycis tubo angulato, limbo 4-partito, lobis verticalibus
lineari-lanceolatis foliaceis corolla} hypocraterimorphae tubum adjequan-
tibus ; stigmate clavato ; bacca papillosa imperfecte 3 - 6-loculari. —
West end of Lanai ; also Kaala Mountains, and Nunanu Valley, Oahu.
— Leaves 1 to 4 inches long, 8 to 25 lines wide, obtuse, quite veiny.
Sepals at first linear-lanceolate, somewhat wider in fruit, an inch long.
Berry slightly ribbed by the decurrent costa of the sepals, rather more
than an inch long. Closely allied to G. Taitensis, from which it differs
in the rounder leaves and longer lobes of the calyx. I take pleasure
in dedicating this species to my friend and companion Mr. W. T.
Brigham. (M. & B. 348.)

180. Gardenia Remyi (sp. nov.) : arborea, inermis ; foliis araplis
oblongo-ovatis breviter petiolatis coriaceis ; stipulis cupuliformibus
truncatis vel breviter utrinque acuminatis tarde deciduis ; flore termi-
nali ; calycis limbo 4-partito, lobis verticalibus ovatis coriaceis reticu-
lato-venosis tubum corollse superantibus ; coroll?e lobis ovatis basi an-
gustatis ; bacca papillosa. — Woods on the windward side of Kauai,
and on the mountains above Honolulu, Oahu. — A tree, often 40 feet
high. Leaves 3 to 8 inches long, 1| to 3 or 4 inches wide, obtuse at
both ends, or shortly acuminate, strongly veined. Lobes of the calyx
an inch or more long, nearly twice the length of the corolla-tube.
Corolla, as in the preceding species, white and very fragrant, an inch
or more in diameter. (M. & B. 565 ; Remy, 344.)

181. GouLDiA Sandwicensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 310. Kadua affinis,
Cham. & Schlecht. in Linniea, 4, p. 164. Var. terminalis. Petesia ?
terminalis, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 85. Var. coriacea.
Petesia ? coriacea, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. Var. hirtella. (M. & B.
131, 382, 416, 418, 526; Remy, 331.)

182. Kadua laxiflora (sp. nov.) : fruticosa; ramis pedunculis
pedicellisque glaberrimis ; foliis chartaceis minute strigosis sessilibus,
inferioribus oblongis utrinque acuminatis, superioribus floralibusque
cordatis acuminatis ; cyma laxe pluriflora ; lobis calycis lanceolatis
ovario bis longioribus ; capsula apice convexiuscula ; seminibus im-
marginatis. — Wailuku Valley, West Maui. — A sarmentose shrubby
species. Stem somewhat four-angled. Leaves 4 to 6 inches long,
1^ to 2 inches wide; the floral leaves an inch or more long. Calyx-
lobes 2 to 3 lines long, half the length of the corolla. (M. & B. 422.)

172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEAIY

183. Kadua CENTRANTnoiDES, Hook. & Am. Bot. Beech. Voy. p.
85 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 317.

184. Kadua glomerata, Hook. & Am. 1. c. ; Gray, 1. c. (M. & B.)

185. Kadua cordata, Cham. & Schlecht. in Linncea, 4, p. 160;
Hook. & Arn. L c. ; Gray, 1. c. (M. «fe B. 210 ; Remy, 352, 353.)

186. Kadua Cookiana, Cham. & Schlecht. in Linnsa, 4, p. 158 ;
Gray, 1. c. p. 317.

Var. ? elatior: cyma decomposita pluriflora ; foliis petiolatis lan-
ceolato-linearibus utrinque acuminatissimis. — Kauai ; Molokai. —
Probably a luxuriant variety of K. Cookiana, with which it agrees
in the essential characters, but a much larger plant than Chamisso's,
often two feet high, the leaves 6 to 8 inches long, and 6 or 8 lines
wide. The cyme is much more ample, but the flowers are hardly
larger than those of the original specimens. (M. «fe B. 569.)

187. Kadua parvula, Gray, 1. c. p. 317.

188. Kadua glaucifolia. Gray, 1. c. p. 318. (M. & B. 568.)

189. Kadua Menziesiana, Cham. & Schlecht. in Linna^a, 4, p.
160; Gray, 1. c. p. 318. Hedyotis coriacea, Smith, in Rees, Cycl. 17.
H. conostyla, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 147, t. 94. Kadua Smithii,
Hook. & Am. 1. c. p. 86. (M. & B. 319.)

190. Kadua acuminata, Cham. & Schlecht. in Linnssa, 4, p. 163 ;
Hook. & Am., 1. c. p. 85 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 318. (M. «fe B. 234.)

191. Kadua petiolata. Gray, 1. c. p. 318. (M. & B. 523.)

192. Kadua grandis, Gray, 1. c. p. 318. (M. & B. 417; Remy,
350, 351.)

CompositcB.

193. Adenostemma viscosum, Forst. (M. & B. 12 ; Remy, 263.)
194.t Ageratum contzoides, Linn. (M. & B. ; Remy, 229.)
195, Lagenophora Maviensis (sp. nov.) : minutim viscoso-pubes-

cens, scape valido bracteato e caudice crasso repente ; foliis coriaceis
cuneatis vel spathulato-oblanceolatis basi breviter vel in petiolum mar-
ginatum augustatis versus apicem argute serratis hirtellis demum gla-
bratis ; capitulo pro genere maximo ; involuci'i squarais linearibus ;
ligulis pallide roseis brevibus discum pauUo superantibus ; acheniis
lanceolatis l^evibus, rostro brevi glanduloso. — Top of the mountain of
West Maui. — Leaves about 2 inches long, 4 to 6 lines wide. The
stout, bracted scape, 5 to 10 inches high, bears a single head 6 to 9
lines in diameter. The leafy bracts of the scape are Hnear-oblanceolate
and usually entire. (M. & B. 440.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 173

196. Aster (Tripolium) divaricatus, Nutt., var. Sandwicen-
Sis, Gray. A. subulatus, Less, in Linnaea, 6, p. 120, non Michx. ; Hook.
& Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 87. Trip, subulatum, var., DC. Pi-odr. 5,
p. 254. Erigeron multijiom'm, Hook. & Arn. 1. c, ex spec, in herb.
Hook, (fide Gray, mss. Bot. S. Pacit". Expl. Exp.).

197. ViTTADiNiA HUMiLis, Gray, in Proceed. Araer. Acad. 5, p.
118. (M. & B. 516 ; Remy, 244.)

198. ViTTADiNiA TENERRiMA, Gray, 1. c. p. 119. Aster- tenernmus,
Less, in Linnaea, 6, p. 120. Tetramalopium tenerrimum, Nees.

199. VITTADINIA Remyi, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 373 ; Remy, 239.)

200. ViTTADiNiA Chamissonis, Gray, 1. c. p. 119. Erigeron lepi-
dotum, Less, in Linnasa, 6, p. 502. E. paucijlorus. Hook. & Arn. Bot.
Beech. Voy. p. 87. (M. & B. 355.) Var. ? arbuscula. Gray, 1. c.

201. Vittadinia consanguinea. Gray, 1. c. p. 120.

202. Vittadinia arenaria, Gray, 1. c. p. 120. (M. & B. 519.)

203. Vittadinia conyzoides, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 532.) Var.
DENTATA : foHis majoribus remote dentatis. (M. & B. 361.)

204.t Erigeron Canadense, Linn. (M. & B.)

205. t Franseria tendifolia. Gray. (M. & B.)

206.t AcANTHOSPERMUM Brasilum, Schrank, PI. Rar. Hort. Mo-

nac. t. 53. A. xanthioides & A. hirsutum, DC. Prodr. 5, p. 522. Cen-

trospermiim xanthioides, H B K. Nov. Gen. & Spec. 1, p. 271, t. 397.
207.t EcLiPTA ALBA, Hask. PI. Jav. Rar. p. 528 ; Miq. Fl. Ind.

Bot. 2, p. 65. E. erecta & E. prostrata, Linn. Mant. p. 216, etc. E.

procumbens & brachypoda, Michx. FL 2, p. 129. Cotula alba, Linn.

Syst. Nat. 2, p. 564, et Verbesina alba, L.

208. Coreopsis Maviensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 125. (M. & B. 372 ;
Remy, 289.)

209. Coreopsis (Campylotheca) macrocarpa. Gray, ]. c. p.
126. (W. T. Brigham.)

210. Coreopsis (Campylotheca) Macr^i, Gray, 1. c. p. 126.
Campylotheca grandijlora, DC. Prodr. 5, p. 293. (Remy, 285.)

211. Coreopsis (Campylotheca) cosmoides. Gray, ]. c. p. 126.
(M. & B. 537 ; Remy, 278.) A large sufFruticose species, the elon-
gated herbaceous branches erect and spreading five to eight feet. The
heads always pendent at the ends of the naked peduncles, two inches
in diameter, and very showy.

212. Coreopsis (Campylotheca) Menziesii, Gray, I. c. p. 127.
Campylotheca australis. Less, pro parte ? (M. & B. 520 ; Remy, 290.)

174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

213. Coreopsis (Ca^iptlotheca) micraxtha, Gray, 1. c. p. 127.
Bidens micrantha, Gaud. 1. c. p. 464, t. 85 ; Hook. &, Arn. 1. c. Campy-
lotheca aiistralis. Less, in Linnfea, 6, p. 509, excl. syn. Forst. & Spreng.
Campylotheca micrantha, Cass. diet. 51. (M. & B. 450 ; Remy, 280.)

214. BiDEXS Sakdavicensis, Less, in Linnsea, 6, p. 508. B.
micrantha, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 86, non Gaud. 1. c. B.
peduncidaris, DC. Prodr. 5, p. 598, non Gaud. 1. c. B. paniculata,
Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 66. AdenoJepis pulchella. Less. 1. c. p. 511. (M.
& B. 541 ; Remy, 279, 283.) Var. heterophtlla, Gray, 1. c. p. 128.
B. hixurians, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 86. (Remy, 281.) A'^ar. ovati-
FOLiA, Gray, 1. c.

215. Bidens Hawaiensis, Gray, 1. c. p. 128. (M. & B. 98.)
216.t Bidens pilosa, Linn. (M. & B. 49.)

217.t Bidens chrtsanthemoides, Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. 2. p. 136,
non Pursh. B. helianthoides, H B K. Nov. Gen. &. Sp. 4, p. 230. , B.
quadriaristata, DC. Prodr. 5, p. 595. (Remy, 258''".)

218. LiPOCH^TA AUSTRALis, Gray, 1. c. p. 129. Lipotriche austra-
lis, Less. Var. connata, Gray, 1. c. Verbesina connata, Gaud. Bot.
Freyc. Voy. p. 464. Lipochceta connata, DC. Prodr. 5, p. 611.
(Remy, 271.) Var. decurrens, Gray, 1. c. Microchceta lanceolata,
Nutt. in Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 7, p. 451. (M. & B. 375, 540, 542.)
Var. LOBATA, Gray, 1. c. p. 130. Verbesina lobata. Gaud. 1. c. p. 464;
Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 87. T'. hastidata, H. «fe A. 1. c.
Lipochceta lobata & hastidata, DC. Prodr. 5, p. 611. (Remy, 273.)

219. LiPOCH^TA suBCORDATA, Gray, 1. c. p. 130.

220. LiPOCH.tTA CALTCOSA, Gray, 1. c. p. 130.

221. LiPOCH^TA LAV ARUM, DC. Pi'odr. 5, p. 611 ; Gray, 1. c. p.
130. Verbesina lavarum, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 464. (M. & B.
358, 374 ; Remy, 277.)

222. LiPOCH^TA INTEGRIFOLIA, Gray, 1. c. p. 130. Microchceta
integrifoUa, Nutt. in Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 7, p. 451. (M. &. B. 371 ;
Remy, 255.)

223. LiPOCHiETA succuLENTA, DC. Prodr. 5, p. 611. Gray, 1. c.
p. 130. Verbesina succidenta, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 87.
(Remy, 257, 258.)

224. LiPOCH^TA HETEROPHTLLA, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 359.)

225. LiPOCH^TA TENCiFOLiA, Gray, \. c. p. 131. (M. & B. 534 ;
Remy, 276.)

226. L1POCH.ETA MICRANTHA, Gray, 1. c. p. 131. Schizophyllum

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 175

micranthwn, Nutt. in Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 7, p. 453. Aphanopap-
pus Nutlallii, Walp. Eep. 2, p. 620. (M. & B. 536 ; Remj, 245.)

227. LiPOCH^TA Remti, Gray, 1. c. p. 131. (M. & B. 533 ; Remy,
260.)

228. Argtroxiphium Sandwicense, DC Prodr. 5, p. 668 ; Gray,
1. c. p. 136. (Remy, 254.)

229. Argtroxiphium macrocephalum, Gray, in Proceed. Amer.
Acad. 2, p. 160, &. 5, p. 137. — The tuft of linear silvery-pubescent
leaves from the shoft and thick stem is sometimes as much as four feet
in diameter, and the compound branching panicle arising from their
midst, six or eight feet high, bears innumerable heads of flowers, which
are yellow in the disk and purple in the ray. (M. & B.)

230. WiLKESiA GYMXOXiPHiUM, Gray, 1. c. 5, p. 136. — This looks
much like an ArgyroxipMum raised upon a stem 6 or 8 feet high. The
leaves are Yucca-like, whorled, and their connate cup-like bases over-
lapping one another from below upwards. The compound panicle is
one to three feet long, bearing small yellow heads, about half an inch in
diameter, on very slender peduncles and pedicels. — Only found on the
dry southwestern slopes of the mountain of Kauai. (M. & B. 535.)

231. DuBArxiA PLAXTAGiNEA, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 469, t. 84 ;
Gray, 1. c. p. 134. (M. & B. 365 ; Remy, 237.) Var. l^vigata.
D. IcEvigata, Gray, 1. c. p. 135. (M. & B. 538.)

232. Dubautia laxa, Hook. & Am. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 87 ; Gray,
1. c. p. 135. (M. & B. 133 ; Remy, 238.)

233. DuBATJTiA PALEATA, Gray, 1. c. p. 135.

234. Raillardia latifolia, Gray, 1. c. p. 132. (H. Mann.)

235. Raillardia scabra, DC. Prodr. 6, p. 441 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 133.
(M. & B. 366 ; Remy, 248, 249.)

236. Raillardia laxiflora, DC. Prodr. 6, p. 441 ; Gray, 1. c.
p. 133. (Remy, 250 ; W. T. Brigham.)

237. Raillardia ciliolata, DC. Prodr. 6, p. 441 ; Gray, 1. c.
p. 133. (M. & B. 517, 518 ; Remy, 247, 251, 252, 253.)

238. Raillardia Hillebrandi (sp. nov.) : ramis pubescentibus ;
foliis ternatis confertiusculis ovatis oblongisve acutis basi subamplexi-
cauli sessilibus trinerviis pubescentibus ; paniculis folioso-bracteatis ; ca-
pitulis elongatis 4 - 5-floris. — "Waimea, Hawaii (U. S. Expl. Exped. ;
Hillebrand, no. 14). Differs from H. linearis in its heads not being
cymosely-fascicled, in their larger size, and in the broader and pubes-
cent sessile leaves.

176 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

239. Raillardia linearis, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 469, t. 83 ;
DC. Prodr. 6, p. 440. Gray, 1. c. p. 133. (M. & B. 356.)

240. Raillardia Menziesii, Gray, 1. c. p. 133. (M. & B. 367.)

241. Raillardia flatyphylla. Gray, 1. c. p. 134.

242. Raillardia arborea, Gray, 1. c. p. 134.

243. Raillardia Montana (sp. nov.) : fruticosa, orgyalis ; ramis
patentibus confertiuscule foliaceis ; foliis patentibus lanceolato-oblongis
acutis 5-nerviis glabris vel minute pubescentibus denticulatis sessilibus
plerisque alternis ; panicula subsimplici ; capitulis longe pedicellatis
15-23-floris. i?. arhorea, var. foliis angustioribus. Gray, in herb. —
Hualalai, Hawaii, at 6,000 feet elevation. — A much-branched shrub,
differing from the preceding species in its manner of growth, in the thin-
ner leaves, which are smoother, and not closely imbricated; from R.pla-
typhylla by its narrower leaves with fewer veins, etc. (M. & B. 521.)

244. Raillardia struthioloides, Gray, 1. c. p. 134.

245. Artemisia australis, Less, in Linnaja, 6, p. 522 ; Gray, 1. c.
p. 137. Var. Eschscholtziana, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 539.) Var.
Maviensis, Gray, 1. c. Var. microcephala. Gray, in herb. (Hille-
brand.) — In favorable situations a large shrub, 6 feet high, branching
from the base.

246. Gnaphalium luteo-album, Linn. G. Sandwicensium, Gaud.
Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 466, fide Gray. (M. & B. 309 ; Remy, 236.)

247. Senecio Sandwicensis, Less, in Linntea, 6, p. 526 ; DC.
Prodr. 6, p. 375.

248.t Centaurea Melitensis, Linn. (M. «fe B. 3 ; Remy, 294.)

249. Hesperomannia arborescens, Gray, in Proceed. Amer.
Acad. 6, p. 554. — The only known Lahiatijiora from any of the
pi-oper Pacific Islands. The genus belongs to the group Flotowiece of
Weddell's arrangement of the Mutisiacece ; and is related to Chuqui-
raga and Donio-phyton on the one hand, and to Stiftia and Anastra-
phia on the other. A small tree, about 20 feet high, and divaricately
branched, bearing several flower-heads at the ends of the branches.
Leaves 3 to 5 inches long, 1 to 1^ inches wide, near the ends of the
branches; the heads are 1^ to 2 inches in diameter, with bright yellow
flowers and tawny pappus. — Only one tree seen, on the summit of
Lanai, at about 2,500 feet elevation. (M. & B. 357.)

250.t SoNCHUS ASPER, Linn.

251.t YouNGiA Japonica, DC. Prodr. 8, p. 149. Prenanthes Ja-
ponica, Linn. Crepis Japonica, Benth. (M. & B. 244.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 177

LobeliacecE.
RoLLANDiA, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 458.*
Calyx tubo ovoideo, lobis abbreviatis a3qualibus. Corolla arcuato-
gibbosa, a latere compressa, tubo integro superne inflato dorso fisso,
calyce multo longiore, limbo quinquepartito subbilabiato, lobis lanceo-
latis. Columna staminea inferne corollae postice et lateraliter adnata.
Anthera3 dua? inferiores barbata;. Stigma bilobum. Bacca bilocularis,
calyce diu persistente coronata. — Frutices lactescentes, Sandwicenses,
racemis axillaribus brevibus, pedicellis nudis. Folia Integra, sesqui -
tripedalia.

252. RoLLANDiA LANCEOLATA (Gaud. 1. c.) : fruticosa ; foliis ob-
longo-lanceolatis duplicato-dentatis subtus hirtellis utrinque acutis, petio-
lis sesqui-bipollicaribus ; pedunculis petiolo subfequilongis paucifloris ;
calycis lobis glabris obovatis obtusis tubo ovoideo triplo brevioribus ;
columna staminea antherisque hirsutis ; corolla fere glabra; stigmate
nudo; semina minutissime striato-reticulata. — R. lanceolata, & var.
grandifolio, DC. Prodr. 7, p. 344. R. Delessertiana, Gaud. Bot. Bonite,
t. 75. Delissea lanceolata. Gray, in Proceed. Amer. Acad. 5, p. 147.
— Oahu. (W. T. Brigham.)

253. ROLLANDIA CRiSPA (Gaud. 1. c.) : fruticosa; foliis obovato-
lanceolatis inferne longe attenuatis breviter petiolatis membranaceis
fere glabris margine serrulatis undulatis vel integerrimis ; pedunculo
petiolum adtequante paucifloro ; calycis lobis oblongis obtusis subfolia-
ceis velutinis valde imbricatis ovario a^quilongis; columna staminea
glabra ; corolla cinereo-puberula ; stigmate nudo. — Cyanea f Rollan-
dia, Gray, 1. c. p. 149. — Oahu. (M. & B. 58.)

254. RoLLANDiA HuMBOLDTiANA (Gaud. Bot. Bonite, t. 76) : fru-

* The diagnostic characters of the four fleshy-fruited genera of Lobeliaceae pecu-
liar to the Hawaiian Islands may be stated thus : —

RoLLANDiA. Calycis lobi breves. Corolla arcuato-gibbosa a latere compressa.
Columna staminea corollas postice et lateraliter adnata. Caudex fere herbaceus.

Delissea. Calycis lobi breves seu brevissimi, ssepius dentiformes. Corolla
arcuata, tubo cylindraceo. Columna staminea libera. Arbusculae columnieformes
vel ramos£e.

Cyanea. Calycis lobi foliacci vel prtelongi. Corolla arcuata vel rcctiuscula.
Columna staminea libera. Frutices vel arbores columnaeformes.

Cleemontia. Calycis lobi corollam sequilongam sub anthesi valvatim inclu-
dentes, caduci. Columna staminea libera. Arbusculae ramosae.
VOL. VII. 23

178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

ticosa ; foliis lanceolatis vel obovato-lanceolatis inferne attenuatis lon-
giuscule petiolatis fere glabris serrulatis vel integerrimis ; pedunculo
petiolura adtequante vel superante paucifloro ; floribus hirtellis ; calycis
lobis lanceolatis ovario dimidio brevioribus ; columna staminea glabra ;
stigmate pilis cincto. — Oahu. (W. T. Brigham.) — I have fortu-
nately been able to identify a single specimen, which Mr. Brigham col-
lected, with the figure of this species : as is shown by the description,
drawn from the specimen, aided by Gaudichaud's excellent figure, it
has characters of value upon which to stand.

Delissea, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 459.

Calyx tubo hagraispherico vel turbinato, lobis brevibus sgepius denti-
formibus. Corolla arcuata, tubulosa, bilabiata, tubo ssepius dorso fisso,
labiis longitudine Eequalibus. Columna staminea a corolla libera. An-
therae duje inferiores barbatas. Stigma bilobum. Bacca subglobosa,
bilocularis. — Frutices vel arbuscute lactescentes, Sandwicenses, foliis
integris vel pinnatifidis, racerais axillaribus, pedicellis ssepe bibracteo-
latis.

255. Delissea clekmontioides (Gaud. Bot. Bonite, t. 47) : fruti-
cosa, hirtella ; foliis coriaceis oblongis utrinque acuminatis creberrime
serrulatis supra glabris breviter petiolatis ; pedunculis bracteatis pauci-
floris petiolum adcequantibus vel superantibus ; pedicellis pedunculo
aequilongis bibracteolatis ; lobis calycis brevissimis triangularibus ; co-
rolla bipoUicari sub-bilabiata ; bacca angulato-sphaerica apice truncata
(poUicari) ; seminum testa leevissima. — Gray, 1. c. p. 147. — This
character has been drawn up from a young specimen in the collection
of the United States Exploring Expedition, helped out by Gaudi-
chaud's figure.

256. Delissea coriacea (Gray, 1. c. p. 147) : " fruticosa, glabra ;
foliis amplis (pedalibus et ultra) oblongo-lanceolatis coriaceis repando-
serrulatis basi acutis longiuscule petiolatis, venulis conspicue reticula-
tis ; racemis plurifloris petiolum baud superantibus ; calycis limbo
obsoleto seu dentibus 5 minutis instructo ; corolla (glabra) pollicari
subourvata." — Kauai. (Remy, 302.)

Var. ? /3. " foliis spathulato-lanceolatis in petiolum brevem longe
attenuatis." — Fruit as large as a cherry. — Haleakala, East Maui.
This may be ray D. arborea.

Var.? y. PiNNATiLOBA (Gray, 1. c. «fe in Bot. S. P. Expl. Exped.
ined.) : "foliis profunde sinuato-pinnatifidis, lobis utrinque 5-7 obtu-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 179

sissimis integerrimis." — Mountains of Kauai. This was doubtfully
referred by Gray to D. Delessertiana, Gray, 1. c., which is Rollandia
Dehssertiana, Gaud. Bot. Bonite, t. 75, which again appears to be iden-
tical with R. lanceolata, Gaud. I have httle doubt that it is a variety
of D. coriacea, but only some leaves have been collected.

257. Delissea obtusa (Gray, 1. c. p. 148): "fruticosa; ramis
junioribus floribusque undique pubescentibus; foliis (5-8-pollic.) mem-
braiiaceis oblongis serrulatis apice vel utrinque obtusis subtus parce
pubescentibus ; racemis plurifloris petiolum gracilem baud superanti-
bus ; calycis limbo minuto vel fere obsoleto ; corolla gracili subpollicari
incurva " ; columna staminea glabra ; seminum testa lievissima niti-
diuscula. — Mountains of Maui. (M. & B. 466.)

Var. MOLLIS (Gray, 1. c.) : " caule crassiori ; foliis elongatis (subpe-
dalibus) oblongo-lanceolatis basi in petiolum breviusculum attenuatis
supra puberulis subtus molliter pubescentibus ; floribus pollicaribus
crassiusculis cceruleis." — Mouna Kea, Hawaii.

258. 'Delissea hirtella (sp. nov.) : fruticosa, ramosa, hirtella ;
foliis oblanceolatis utrinque acurainatis crebre serrulatis supra glabris
petiolatis ; pedunculis paucifloris petiolo brevioribus ; lobis calycis
lanceolatis ovario multo brevioribus. — Mountains above Waimea,
Kauai. — A large branching shrub, 20 feet high, hirsute with short
rusty hairs. Leaves 7 to 10 inches long, 2 to 3 wide. Petioles about
2 inches long. Only tlower-buds seen, in which the sepals are scarcely
a line long. (M. & B. 574.)

259. Delissea acuminata (Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 475, t. 76 ;
DC. Prodr. 7, p. 342, non Gray, 1. c. p. 148) : fruticosa, ramosa ;
foliis oblongis utrinque acuminatis denticulatis membranaceis pilosius-
culis subtus pallidioribus longiuscule petiolatis ; pedunculis petiolo bre-
vioribus ; pedicellis filiformibus nudis, floribus racemosis; calycis lobis
lanceolatis puberulis ovario dimidio brevioribus; corolla (12-16 lin.
longa) glabrata ; columna staminea hirtella; seminum testa l^evissima
flava. — Oahu. (M. & B. 233.)

260. Delissea angustifolia (Presl, Prodr. Lob. p. 47) : fruti-
cosa, ramosa ; foliis lanceolatis acutis serratis, serraturis obtusis, peiiolis
limbo dimidio brevioribus ; pedunculis axillaribus plurifloris petiolo
aequilongis ; floribus corymbosis ; pedicellis filiformibus nudis ; calycis
lobis dentiformibus ciliolatis caducis ; corolla cum columna staminea
glabra; seminum testa laevissima nitidiuscyla. — DC. Prodr. 7, p. 343,
D. acuminata, & yar, angustifolia, Gray, 1, c. p. 148. Lobelia- angu$~

180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

tifolia, Cham, in Linnaea, 8, p. 219. — Oahu. (M. & B. 231 ; Remy,
299.)

261. Dklissea rhytidosperma (sp. nov.) : arborescens ; foliis
lanceolatis petiolatis membranaceis utrinque acuminatis serratis, serra-
turis acutis; pedunculis axillaribus paucifloris petiolo brevioribus ; flori-
bus racemosis ; pedicellis nudis ; calycis lobis dentiformibus persisten-
tibus ; seminurn testa valde undulato-rugosa. — Mountains above
Waimea, Kauai. — A small tree, glabrous in all parts as far as known.
Leaves 3 to 5 inches long, 1 to 1|^ inches wide, thin and somewhat
reticulated-veiny. Petioles an inch long or less. Peduncles quite
short. The persistent calyx-lobes less than half a line long. Flowers
unknown. (M. & B. 576.)

262. Delissea arborea (sp. nov.) : canle simplicissimo fere gla-
bro ; foliis bipedalibus subcoriaceis oblanceolatis superne creberrime
serrulatis inferne longe gradatim attenuatis integerrirais sessilibus ;
pedunculis axillaribus brevibus paucifloris; calycis limbo fere obsoleto;
corolla alba fere recta. — Ulapalakua, E. Maui. — Trunk simple, erect,
20 feet high, bearing a large tuft of horizontally spreading leaves at the
apex, among the sessile bases of which are the short-peduncled clusters
of flowers. (M. & B. 461.)

263. Delissea subcordata (Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 457, t.
77) : fruticosa, ramosa, glaberrima ; foliis ovatis subcordatis acutis in-
sequaliter serratis, dentibus acutis, petiolo limbo sequilongo ; pedunculis
petiolo JBquilongis vel brevioribus ; pedicellis nudis ; calycis lobis bre-
vissimis pilosiusculis ; corolla (sesquipoUicari) dorso ad medium fissa ;
bacca turbinata; seminum testa eximie rugosa. — DC. Prodr. 7, p.
342. D. undulata, Gray, 1. c. p. 148, pro parte. — Kaala Mountains,
Oahu ; Kauai. (M. & B. 573.)

264. Delissea undulata (Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 457, t. 78) :
fruticosa ; caule simplicissimo glaberrimo ; foliis ovato-lanceolatis acutis
serratis in petiolum limbo dimidio breviorem v. isquilongum angustatis,
nunc subcordatis ; pedunculis brevibus confertis pluritloris ; pedicellis
nudis ; calycis lobis brevissimis ; corolla (subpoUicari) dorso ad medium
usque fissa ; bacca ovoidea; seminum testa laeviuscula. — "Kauai" or
more probably " Niihau " (Remy, 300'''^), where it was also found
by Mr. W. T. Brigham.

265. Delissea platyphylla (Gray, 1. c. p. 148) : caule fruticoso
orgyali petiolisque tuberculis aculeisve conicis mollibus obsitis ; foliis
sesquipedalibus obovato-oblongis repandis membranaceis glabris petio-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 181

latis ; pedunculis axillaribus brevibus crassis paucifloris; pedicellis sub-
poUicaribus nudis ; lobis calycis brevibus subulatis ; floribus fere bipol-
licaribus. — Puna, Hawaii, in woods near Hilo. (M, & B.)

266. Delissea RACEMOSA (sp. nov.) : fruticosa ; foliis oblongo-lan-
ceolatis vel ovato-lanceolatis utrinque acutis minute eroso-crenulatis in
petiolum brevem longe attenuatis, supra pilis conicis brevibus raris, sub-
tus albidis pubescentibus venis brunneis ; pedunculis folium adajquanti-
bus bracteatis ; pedicellis bracteolatis ; calycis lobis glabratis oblongis
obtusiusculis ovario multo brevioribus. — Oahu. — An unbranched
shrub, 5 or 6 feet high. Leaves a foot long, about 4 inches wide,
tapering gradually at the base into a petiole but an inch long. The
pubescence on the under surface of the leaf whitish, except on the
brown veins, and quite characteristic. Peduncles loosely several-flow-
ered. Ovary 6 or 7 lines long. Sepals hardly exceeding a line in
length. (M. & B.)

267. Delissea caltcina (Presl. Prodr. Lob. p. 47) : foliis ob-
longo-lanceolatis utrinque acutis in petiolum brevem louge attenuatis
in^equaliter eroso-crenulatis supra planis pilisque conicis brevibus raris
sparsis conspersis subtus reticulato-venosis in rete fuscescente prsesertim
hirtis ; calyce glabro, lobis oblongis obtusiusculis uninerviis ; ovario sub
anthesi obconico, grossificatione olivosformi, vertice lobis calycis erectis
coronato ; corolla limbo hirtella ; tubo antherarum circa basin sursum-
que in sulcis hirto. Lobelia calycina, Cham, in Linniea, 8, p. 222. —
Leaves crenulate, shining above, li feet long, 3 inches wide. Petiole
1 inch long. In some notes which Prof. A. Braun has obligingly
communicated concerning Chamisso's specimen of this plant in the
Berlin herbarium, he shows that the common peduncle is but an inch
or two long, much thickened, and that the sepals are ovate-lanceolate,
3 lines long and half as wide. It thus differs in several respects from
the preceding species, which I had at first thought should be referred
here, but I am not so sure now that this species should not stand in
Cyanea, and near C aspera. Gray.

268. Delissea pinnatifida (Presl. 1. c. p. 47) ^: ramosa; foliis
oblongo-lanceolatis utrinque acutis in petiqlum brevem decurrentibus
remote pinnatifidis leviter sinuato-duplicato-dentatis, dentibus brevibus
pinnisque obtusis calloso-mucronu latis, supra planis glabris, subtus
reticulato-venosis in rete fuscescente pra5sertim hirtis ; racemis axil-
laribus ; calycibus coroUisque hirtis ; ovario obconico lobis calycis auri-
culatis ovatis obtusis coronato. Lobelia pinnatijida, Cham, in Linntea,
8, p. 220. — Oahu.

182 . PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

269. Delissea ambigua (Presl. 1. c. p. 47) : foliis oblongo-lanceo-
latis utrinque acutis in petiolum brevem longe angustatis sinuato-
duplicato-triplicatoque-dentatis (dentibus calloso-mucronulatis) supra
planis glabris subtus hirtis reticulato-venosis rete fuscescente ; racemis
axillaribus ; ovario obconico glabrescente ; lobis calycis ovatis subemar-
ginato-obtusis mucronatis paululum hirtellis ; corolla in nervis pr^ser-
tim hirta. Presl. — According to Chamisso, perhaps not distinct from
the preceding, but the calyx-lobes less auricled, etc. Lobelia ambi-
gutty Cham. 1. c. p. 221. — I know nothing of this or the preceding
species. Perhaps they should stand in Cyanea.

270. Delissea Mannii (W. T. Brigham, in litt.) : fruticosa, ramosa,
puberula; foliis lanceolatis acutis serratis subtus pallidioribus ; pedun-
culis petiolo subsequilongis pollicaribus ; calycis lobis linearibus ovario
bis longioribus ; corolla fere recta ; seminum testa minutissime striato-
reticulata. — Molokai. — Leaves 5 or 6 inches long, 1 to H inches
wide. Calyx lobes 3 or 4 lines long, less than a line wide. (W. T.
Brigham.)

271. Delissea fissa (sp. nov.) : fruticosa, ramosa; foliis sesqui-
pedalibus in petiolum longe attenuatis obovato-lanceolatis utrinque
prfesertim basi acuminatis crenatis supra glaberrimis subtus parce hir-
sutulis ; racemis brevibus 8-12-floris; pedunculis pedicellisque brac-
teolatis cum floribus (sesquipollicaribus) glanduloso-villosis ; lobis caly-
cis lanceolatis ovario longioribus ; corolla purpurea dorso usque ad
basim fissa ; columna staminea glaberrima. — Valleys of Kealia and
Hanalei, Kauai. — A branching slirub about 10 or 12 feet high. (M.
& B. 577.)

272. Delissea pilosa : " caule frutescente ; foliis subpedalibus
membranaceis obovatis utrinque acutis vel acuminatis eroso-crenatis
pilis brevibus mollibus hirsutis ; racemis brevibus in pedunculo 1 — 2-
poUicari hirsutissimo paucifloris; floribus parvis griseo-cteruleis pedicel-
lisque glabris ; lobis calycis linearibus [subfoliaceis] ovario oblongo
sequilongis." — Cyanea pilosa, Gray, 1. c. p. 149. — Mauna Kea,
Hawaii.

273. Dehsse\ asplenifolia (sp. nov.) : fruticosa, fere glabra ;
foliis membranaceis amplis (ultrapedalibus) pinnatisectis ; segmentis
lanceolatis sinuato-subpinnatifidis ala sinuata contiuentibus ; costa
rhachi petiolisque plurifloris aculeis brevibus armatis ; pedicellis brac-
teolatis; lobis calycis oblongis obtusiusculis ovario dimidio brevioribus ;
corolla gracili fere bipoUicari. — Waiehu Valley, West Maui. — A

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 183

small simple-stemmed shrub 3 to 5 feet high. Leaves much like those
of Cyanea Grimesiana. (M. & B. 464.)

Ctanea, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 457.

Calyx profunde o-fidus, tubo turbinato, lobis sequalibus foliaceis
persistentibus. Corolla tubulosa, subarcuata, 5-fida, dorso ad medium
vel basim usque fissa, lobis sub-bilabiatis Eequilongis lineari-lanceolatis.
Columna staminea a corolla libera. Antherae duaj inferiores vel omnes
barbatai. Stigma bilobum. Bacca bilocularis. — Frutices vel arbores
lactescentes, Sandwicenses, soepius tuberculato-aculeatae, foliis integris
vel pinnatipartitis, racemis axillaribus.

274. Cyanea aspera (Gray, 1. c. p. 148): "foliis oblongo-ovatis
acuminatis denticulatis subtus ad venas venulasque ochraceo-hirtellis
utrinque setulis basi papillatis asperis, petiolo muricato ; calycis glabri
lobis ovalibus obtusissimis foliaceis tubum elongato-obconicum a^quanti-
bus ; corolla 2^-pollicari curvata." — Oahu. (Expl. Exp.)

275. Cyanea arborescens (sp. nov.) : ramosa, glabra ; foliis cori-
aceis obtusis basi angustatis crebre repando-serrulatis supra viridissimis
subtus pallidioribus ; pedunculis axillaribus paucifloris ; bacca flava
diametro sesquipollicari ; lobis calycis succulentis pollicaribus vel ses-
quipollicaribus oblongis obtusis. — West Maui. — A small tree 20 or
25 feet high, much branched. Leaves 3 to 6 inches long, 1 to li inches
wide. Fully expanded flowers not seen, but the young bud an inch
long. (M. & B.; Hillebrand?)

276. Cyanea lobata (sp. nov.) : fruticosa, glabra; foliis sesquipe-
dalibus oblanceolatis obtusis ingequaliter sinuato-lobatis subtus pilis bre-
vibus rarissimis (petiolo 3 - 4-pollicari aculeis conicis sparsis) obsitis ;
pedunculis bracteatis paucifloris petiolo suba^quilongis, bracteis line-
aribus subfoliaceis ; sepalis foliaceis late oblongis obtusis mucronatis
plurinerviis pollicaribus ovario multo longioribus; corolla magis curvata
2 - 3-pollicari ; stigmate valde bilobo nudo. — West Maui. — A small
shrub. (M. & B. 467.)

277. Cyanea Grimesiana (Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 4, t. 75) .
fruticosa, glabra; foliis cum petiolo 6-pollicari bi - tripedalibus pinnati-
sectis, segmentis lanceolatis sinuatis ; petiolis aculeis conicis armatis ;
pedunculis longis laxe paucifloris pluribracteatis, bracteis lanceolatis
foliaceis ; pedicellis bipoUicaribus bracteolatis ; lobis calycis oblongis
acuminatis foliaceis plui'inerviis ultrapollicaribus ovario longioribus ;
corolla curvata 2 - 3-pollicari ; stigmate bilobo pilis cincto ; bacca longe
turbinate.— Oahu. (M. & B. 20L)

184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Var. ? ciTRDLLiFOLiA (Gray, 1. c. p. 148) : "foliis bipinnatipartitis,
segmentis sinuatis; caule aculeis conicis creberrimis horrido." — Hawaii.
Oahu.

278. Cyanea leptostegia (Gray, 1. c. p. 149): "glabra; foliis
ad apicem caulis siraplicis arborei confertis lanceolatis subsessilibus in-
tegerrimis undulatis (bipedalibus et ultra) ; raeemis brevissimis confer-
tifloris ; calycis segmentis prtelongis e basi latiori angustissime lineari-
bus patentibus corolla gracili longioribus per.^istentibus." — Mountains
above Waimea, Kauai. — A very remarkable-looking plant, the erect
columnar trunk 30 or 40 feet high, bearing at its apex a dense spread-
ing tuft of leaves. Flowers dark purple. (M. & B. 575.)

279. Cyanea tritomantha (Gray, 1. c. p. 149) : "caule simplici
arborescente orgyali ; foliis lato-lanceolatis membranaceis subintegerri-
mis fere glabri basi acutis tripedalibus (incl. petiolo crasso 5 - 8-polli-
cari) ; floribus confertis magnis ; calyce pubescente, lobis linearibus
pollicaribus foliaceis ovario cylindraceo longioribus ; corolla tripollicari
extu.s tomento?o-pubescente in segmenta 3 longo-linearia mox divisa."
— Mouna Kea, Hawaii. (Expl. Exp.)

280. Cyanea superba (Gray, 1. c. p. 149) : caule arborea simpli-
cissima ; foliis ad apicem caulis confertis lanceolatis eroso-crenulatis
subcoriaceis bi- tripedalibus petiolatis; inflorescentia corollisque tomen-
tosis ; pedunculis elongatis nutantibus crebre bracteatis capitulo com-
pacto globoso terminatis ; lobis calycis oblongis foliaceis (margins
imbricatis?) ; corolla bipollicari tubulosa unilabiata, laciniis linearibus
patentibus. — Macrochilus superbiis, Presl. Prodr. Lob. p. 47. Lobelia
superba, Cham, in Linnaja, 8, p. 223, 225. — Seen growing on the
Kaala Mountains, Oahu, but unfortunately not in flower.

Clermontia, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 459.

Calyx coloratus, supra ovarium productus, arcuatus, corollam asqui-
longam sub anthesi valvatira includens, ab ovario circumcisse caducus.
Corolla tubulosa, arcuata, semi-quinquefida dorso ad basim usque fissa,
lobis sub^qualibus. Columna staminea a corolla libera. Antherae 2
inferiores barbatse. Stigma bilobum. Bacca subglobosa, biiocularis. —
Arbusculie lactescentes, Sandwicenses, foliis integris, raeemis axillari-
bus, pedicellis bibracteolatis.

281. Clermontia grandiflora. Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 459,
t. 73; Gray, 1. c. p. 150. Var. brevifolia. Gray, 1. c. Var. OB-
LONGIFOLIA, Gray, I. c. C. persiccefoUa et C. oUongifoUa, Gaud.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 185

1. c. t. 71, 72. Var. longifolia, Gray, 1. c. G. grandifiora, Hook.
& Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 88. O. Kakeana, Meyen, in Presl, Lob.
C. macrophylla, Nutt. G. macrocarpa, Gaud. Bot. Voy. Bonite, t. 49.
Though variable in the leaves, and in a lesser degree in the flowers,
this is a well-marked species, at once recognized wherever seen in
the mountain forests which it inhabits, and of which it at times almost
forms a part, as it is a large, much-branched shrub or small tree, 10
to 30 feet high. (M. i& B. 232.)

282. Clermontia parviflora, Gaud.; Gray, 1. c. p. 150. G. 6b-
longifoUa, Hook. & Arn. 1. c, non Gaud. A small branching shrub.
(M. & B. 296.)

Brighamia, Gray, nov. gen.

" Calyx tube oblongo eximie 10-costato, dentibus parvulis. Corolla
hypocraterimorpha ; tubo praelongo fere recto antice sinubus 2 profun-
dius fisso ; lobis ovato-oblongis aequaliter patentibus consimilibus, nisi
2 anticis longiter unguiculatis. Columna staminea coroUiB tubo infra
medium (postice altius) adnata; synanthera subinclusa apice recurvo
barbata. Ovarium biloculare. Stigma bilobum, nudum. Capsula
primum carnosa, loculis demum rimis 2 longitudinaliter dehiscentibus.
Seraina oblonga ; testa tenuiter Crustacea Iceviuscula : embryo rectus al-
bumine oleoso brevior. — Arbuscula Sandwicensis, carnosa, glabra ; caule
orgyali simplicissimo folia obovata subintegerrima creberrirae quasi capi-
tatim conferta gerente ; pedunculis axillaribus folio brevioribus apice
racemoso-paucifloris ; floribus pedicello recto baud resupinatis albis.

283. "Brighamia insiginis. — Molokai. (W. T. Brigham.) 'Kauai
or Niihau.' (Remy, 309'".) — Stem 5 to 18 feet high. Leaves (in
the specimens) only 6 or 8 inches long, contracted at the base into a
very short petiole, evidently more or less fleshy, and forming a close
tuft at the summit of the columnar stem. Peduncles stout and mani-
festly fleshy, 3 to 5 inches long ; the thick ascending pedicels half an
inch or an inch long : bracts deciduous. Calyx-teeth much shorter
than the tube, oblong-linear, slightly accrescent and persistent on the ripe
fruit collected by Mr. Brigham, deciduous from that of Remy's speci-
men. Corolla showy, white with a tinge of cream-color ; the rather
slender tube about 4 inches long, slightly incurved ; the 5 lobes when
expanded about an inch long, thickish, valvate in aestivation, with the
pointed tips inflexed, in equality of size and position apparently as
nearly regular as in Isotoma, but the two anterior lobes separated from

VOL. VII. 24

186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

each other and from the lateral ones by sinuses, forming narrow claws
of nearly the same length as the lobe. The anther-tube half an inch
long, scarcely projecting beyond the cleft of the corolla, straight, with
the apex abruptly curved toward the upper side of the flower, and
tipped with a uniform tuft of beard, otherwise glabrous. Stigma
neither bearded nor indusiate, of two small and flat rounded lobes.
Ovary acutely and nearly equably 10-ribbed. Fruit three fourths of
an inch long, fleshy-coriaceous, 10-ribbed, evidently capsular; each cell
opening by two equidistant, longitudinal, intercostal chinks or clefts
extending from just below the apex to the base. Seeds very numer-
ous, half a line long. — Described from a specimen in Remy's collec-
tion, communicated by the Paris Museum, and from flowers and fruits
collected by Mr. Brigham, and preserved in alcohol. — This very in-
teresting addition to the peculiar Lobeliacese of the Sandwich Islands,
I have dedicated to Mr. Mann's companion in Hawaiian exploration,
William T. Brigham, Esq., who not only, after M. Remy, discovered
it, and brought the materials needful to complete its characters, but
who has paid particular attention to this group of plants, collecting spec-
imens, and especially making sketches of the arborescent species he
met with. The fruit of my specimen from Remy would rather be
thought to be baccate; but Mr, Brigham's prove it to be capsular.
The resemblance of our plant to Isotoma is mainly in the great length
and general form of the corolla. But its true relationship is evidently
with the unfortunately little-known Sclerotheca arborea, A. DC. (Lobe-
lia arborea, Forst.) of Tahiti. In that, however, so far as is made out,
the corolla is no longer than the foliaceous calyx-lobes, and cleft to the
base, and the capsule opens at the vertex by two round pores. The one-
flowered peduncle is of small moment, as it is bibracteate ; and I sup-
pose it is not certain that the flower is resupinate after the manner of
the order, although so described by De Candolle. In the present plant
there is no torsion of the pedicel, and the odd sepal is anterior. Unless
future discoveries invalidate the characters, Brighamia and Sclerotheca
must surely be regarded as distinct, related genera." A. Gray, mss.

284. Lobelia macrostachys, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 88 ; Gaud.
Bot. Voy. Bonite, t. 46 ; Gray, 1. c. p, 150. A shrub with an upright
simple stem, 4 to 8 feet high, dividing at the top into a crown of flow-
ering branches, spreading like the arms of a chandelier. When the
light pink flowers have expanded, it is an exceedingly showy plant.
(M. & B. 463.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 187

285. Lobelia Gaudichaudii, A. DC. Prodr. 7, p. 384; Gaud.
1. c. t. 45 ; Gray, 1. c. Var. Kavaiensis, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 462.)

286. Lobelia neriifolia, Gray, 1. c. p. 150. (M. & B.)

Goodeniacece.

287. Sc^vola sericea, Forst. Prodr. n. 504 ; Gray, in Proceed.
Am. Acad. p. 15L S. plumerioides, Nutt. in Trans. Am. Phil. Soc.
n. ser. 8, p. 252. (M. & B. 248 ; Remy, 315.)

288. SciEvoLA CORIACEA, Nutt. 1. c. p. 253 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 151.
In the three forms or varieties designated. (M. & B. 388 ; Remy, 313,
315*'^)

289. Sc^voLA Gaudichaudii, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy.
p. 89; DC. Prodr. 7, p. 507; Gray, 1. c. p. 151, non S. Gaudi-
chaudiana, Cham. S. montana, Gaud, in Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 460,
non Labill. S. Menziesiana, var. glal^ra, Cham, in Linntea, 8, p. 227 ?
Temminchia Gaudichaudii, De Vriese, Gooden. p. 11. (M. & B. 385 ;
Remy, 314.)

290. Sc^voLA Chamissoniana, Gaud. 1. c. p. 461, t. 82 ; Hook.
& Arn. 1. c. p. 89 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 152. S. {Chamissoniana, Gaud.?)
Gaudichaudiana, Cham, in Linngea, 8, p. 226. >S'. Menziesiana, Cham.
1. c. p. 227, excl. var. S. ciliata, G. Don. Syst. 3, p. 128; DC.
Prodr. 7, p. 506. S. ligustrifolia, Nutt. in Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. 1. c.
S.pubescens, Nutt. 1. c. (M. & B. 9 ; Remy, 310, 311.)

291. Sc^vOLA mollis. Hook. & Arn. 1. c. ; DC. 1. c. ; Gray, 1. c.
p. 152. Temminckia mollis, De Vriese, Gooden. p. 12, t. 2. (M. & B.
127; Remy, 312.)

292. Sc^vola glabra. Hook. &, Arn. 1. c. ; DC. 1. c. ; Gaud. Voy.
Bonite, t. 48 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 152. Camphusia glabra, De Vriese, 1. c.
p. 15, t. 1. (M. & B. 122.)

EricacecB.

293. Vaccinium reticulatum. Smith, in Rees, Cycl. ; Gray, in
Proceed. Am. Acad. 5, p. 323. V. cernuum, Cham. & Schlecht. in
Linnoga, 1, p. 527 ; Hook. Ic. PI. t. 87. Var. dentatum. Gray, 1. c.
V. dentatum. Smith, 1. c. Var. calycinum. Gray, 1. c. V. calycinum.
Smith, 1. c. Var.? lanceolatum. Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 303.)

294. Vaccinium penduliflorum, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 454,
t. 68 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 323. (M. & B. 102.) Var. berberifolium,
Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 430.)

188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Epacridece.

295. Ctathodes Tameiamei^, Cham, in Linnaea, 1, p. 539; Gray,
in Proceed. Am. Acad. 5, p. 325. Var. Chamissoi, Gray, 1. c. C.
Tameiameice, Cham. ; Hook. &, Am. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 89. Var.
Brownii, Gray, 1. c. C. Banksii, (Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 98 ?)
& MacrcBana, DC. Prodr. 7, p. 742. (M. & B. 123 ; Remy, 488.)

296. Ctathodes imbricata, Stschelglew, in Mosc. Bull. 32, p. 10;

1859. C. Douglasii, Gray, 1. c. p. 325. Var. struthioloides,

Gray, 1. c.

EbenacecB.

297. Maba Sandwicensis, A. DC Prodr. 8, p. 242 ; Gray, in
Proceed. Am. Acad. 5, p. 327. (M. & B. 124; Remy, 470, 518.)

298. Maba Hillebrandii, Seem. Fl. Vitiensis, p. 151. (Hille-
brand, 274 in Herb. Kew. ex Seemann, 1. c.)

Sapotacece.

299. Sapota Sandwicensis, Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad. 5, p.
328. (M. & B. 363 ; Remy, 475, 476, 478.)

Mijrsinacece.

300. Mtrsine Gaudichaudii, A. DC. in Ann. Sc. Nat. ser. 2, 16,
p. 85, & Prodr. I much doubt if this is distinct from the next, but
have no specimens, authentic or otherwise.

301. Mtrsine Lessertiana, A. DC. 1. c. p. 85. (M. & B. 614,
foliis angustioribus, 207 ; Remy, 467.)

302. Mtrsine Sandwicensis, A. DC. 1. c. p. 85. (M. & B. 525;

Remy, 468.)

Primulaceos.

303. Ltsimachia Hillebrandi, Hook. f. Gray, in Proceed. Am.
Acad. 5, p. 328. Var. a. (M. & B. 229.) Var. )3. daphnoides. Gray,
1. c. Var. y. ANGUSTIFOLIA, Gray, 1. c. (Remy, 458.)

304. Ltsimachia lineariloba, Hook. & Am. Bot. Voy. p. 268 ;
Gray, 1. c. p. 329. (Remy, 459, 460, vars.)

Planta2;inacecB.

305. Plantago princeps, Cham. & Schlecht. in Linntea, 1, p.
167; Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad. 6, p. 54; DC. Prodr. 13, p.
704. P. Quelcneana, Gaud, in Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 445, t. 50 ; Cham.
& Schlecht. 1. c. p. 186 ; Hook. & Am. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 93 ; DC. 1.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 189

c. p. 700. (M. «& B. 85 ; Remy, 427.) Var. p. laxifolia, Gray, 1. c.
Var. y. niRTELLA, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 613.) Var. S. longibrac-
TEATA ; bracteis ovato-subulatis floribus inferioribus 2 - 3-plo longiori-
bus : ctet. /3. — On wet rocks in Waioli valley, Kauai. (M. & B. 612.)

306. Plantago pachyphylla, Gray, 1. c. p. 54. Var. a. Mavi-
ENSis, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 428.) Var. /3. Hawaiensis. Gray, 1. c.
(Remy, 429.) Var. y. Kavaiensis, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 439.)

306\t Plantago major, Linn. (M. & B.)

Plumbag-inacecB.

307. Plumbago Zeylanica, Linn. (M. & B. 226; Remy, 227.)
The natives use the acrid juice of this, as of SisyrincJiium acre, for tat-

toomg.

Gesneriacece.

308. Cyrtandra cordifolia, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 446,
t. 56; Gray, in Proceed. Amer. Acad. 5, p. 350; Hook. & Am. Bot.
Beech. Voy. p. 91. (M. & B. 63.)

309. Cyrtandra platyphylla. Gray, 1. c. p. 350.

310. Cyrtandra Pickeringii, Gray, 1. c. p. 350.

311. Cyrtandra triflora, Gaud. 1. c. t. 52; Hook. & Am. 1. c.
p. 91 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 351. Var. Gaudichaudii, arguta, «fe lysio-
sepala. Gray, 1. c.

312. Cyrtandra grandiflora. Gaud. 1. c. t. 55; Hook. & Arn.
1. c. p. 91 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 351. The peduncle is one- or sometimes two-
flowered ; the flowers subtended by two large and foliaceous, somewhat
connivent bracts, which are more or less distinctly 3-nerved from the
base, and slightly reticulate- veiny, the nerves and veins with a rusty
pubescence like that of the leaves. The bracts at once distinctly char-
acterize the species.

313. Cyrtandra cenobarba (sp. no v.) : humilis, decumbens, sub-
carnosa ; caule petiolisque crassis pilis rigidulis atro-rufis reflexis cre-
berrime barbatis ; foliis ovatis vel subcordatis vix acutis denticulatis ad
venas prajsertim rufo-hirsutis supra glabresccntibus ; pedunculis 1-2-
floris petiolum suba^quantibus ; calyce oblongo 5-fido barbato, lobis
ovato-lanceolatis acuminatis foliaceis corolla pollicari glaberrima cum
limbo amplo explanato paullo brevioribus. — Wahiawa falls, and in
"Waioli Valley, Kauai. — Stems low and spreading, only one or two
feet high, somewhat succulent. Leaves thickish, 2|^ to 3|^ inches long,
on very stout petioles (half an inch to 2 inches longjj which, like the

190 PROCEEDINaS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

stem, are very densely bearded with stiff and reflexed, many-jointed,
brownish-red hairs : these are much longer, denser, and more persistent
than those of the rest of the plant. The ample foliaceous bracts, char-
acteristic of the related C. grandijlora, are here wanting. Corolla fully
an inch long, white, the throat ampliate, and the lobes widely spreading.
— It is to be regretted that the specimens secured of this remarkable
species are scanty and imperfect. (M. & B. 616 pro parte.)

314. Cyrtandra Lessoniana, Gaud. 1. c. t. 54; Hook. & Am. 1.
c. p. 91 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 351. C Hillebrandi, Oliver, in herb. Gray,
is apparently a form of this species with broadly ovate calyx-lobes,
which are separated nearly or quite to the base. There is also an-
other form, if it be not a distinct species, with very narrow, almost
linear calyx-lobes, which are more or less united, in some cases form-
ing a tubular calyx which is split down on one side, or with a single
free lobe ; the corolla is arcuate with a broad lip, and the leaves prom-
inently reticulate-veiny beneath. (M. & B. 617, 77 pro parte.)

315. Cyrtaxdra paludosa, Gaud. 1. c. ; Hook. &, Arn. 1. c;
Gray, 1. c. Described as glabrous, but showing a soft fulvous pubes-
cence on the young shoots in the more common form of the species,
which becomes quite pronounced on the petioles and large veins of the
leaves as well, and with something of the character of that of C. oeno-
harba, on a form (probably referable here) from the foot of Wahiawa
falls, Kauai, where it is constantly kept moist by the spray.

316. Cyrtandra Garnottiana, Gaud. 1. c. t. 53; Hook. «&; Arn.
1. c. ; Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 116, 126, 77 pro parte.)

317. Cyrtandra laxiflora (sp. nov.) : foliis ovali- seu ovato-ob-
longis acuminatis argute serratis membranaceis basi plerumque obtusis
supra hirsutulis subtus molliter pubescentibus ; pedunculis petiolum
gracilem adaiquantibus laxe cymoso-multifloris ; pedicellis filiformibus
hirsutis ; calyce 5-partito, lobis linearibus corolla cylindrica hirsuta
(fere semipoUicari) dimidio brevioribus ; fructu glabro ovato-globoso. —
Waialua Mountains, Oahu. — A well-marked species, resembling C
Macrcei in foliage and inflorescence ; but the leaves are narrower,
the larger ones 6 or 7 inches in length by 3 or 4 in breadth ; the pedun-
cles are much longer, as also the pedicels, the latter nearly half an
inch long, and hirsutely pubescent ; the flowers are nearly twice as
large and pubescent; the calyx lobes linear and obtuse. Ovary almost
glabrous. Immature fruit half an inch long, ovate, inclining to globose.
(M. & B. 615.) ^

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 191

318. Ctrtandra MACRiEi, Gray, 1. c. (W. T. Brigham.)

319. Cyrtandra Menziesii, Hook. & Am. 1. c. p. 91, adn. ; Gray,
1. c. The leaves are apparently always in fours, and obovate-oblanceo-
late or oblong, with a long tapering or cuneate entire base. (M. & B.
310.)

Solanacea.

320. SoLANUxM Nelsoni, Dunal, in DC. Prodr. 13, p. 123?;
Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad. 6, p. 42. (Remy, 442.) Var. thoma-
si^FOHUM, Seemann, in Journ. Bot. 1, p. 209.

321. SoLANUM PUBERULUM, Nutt. mss. in Herb. Mus. Brit., fide
Seemann, 1. c. — I do not identify this.

322. SoLANUM Sandwicense, Hook, and Am. Bot. Beech. Voy.
p. 92 ; Gray, 1. c. S. Sandwicense & Woahense, Dunal, in DC. 1. c.
(M. & B. 202.) Var? Kavaiense, Gray, 1. e.

323. SoLANUM INCOMPLETUM, Dunal, in DC. 1. c. ; Gray 1. c. (M.
&B. 457,458; Remy, 451.)

324. SoLANUM OLERACEUM, Dunal, in DC. 1. c. p. 50.

325.t SoLANUM ACULEATissiMTJM, Jacq. Coll. 1, p. 100, & Ic.
Rar. 1, t. 41. S. xaiithocarpum, Seemann, 1. c. p. 206, non Schrad.
& Wendl. Sert. Hanov. 1, p. 8, t. 2. (Seem. n. 1721 in Hb. Gray.)

326. Ltcium Sandwicense, Gray, 1. c. (M. «& B. 596, 597.)

327. NoTHOCESTRUM LATiFOLiUM, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 413.)

328. NoTHOCESTRUM LONGiFOLiUM, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 414.)

329. NoTHOCESTRUM BREViFLORDM, Gray, 1. c. p. 49.

330. NoTHOCESTRUM SUBCORDATUM, (sp. nov.) : arborcum, fere
glabrum ; foliis ovatis ellipticisve subcordatis ; pedunculis solitariis ;
corolla 4 - 5-partita extus dense sericea tubo calycis campanulato inse-
qualiter quadridentato quadrangulato fere duplo longiore ; staminibus
4 - 5 ; bacca globosa. — In ravines of the Kaala Mountains, Oahu. —
A tree 20 or 30 feet high. Leaves 2 to 5 inches long, IJ to 4 inches
wide, subcordate or rounded at the base, more or less obtuse at the
apex. Calyx 4 to 5 lines long. Corolla yellow, as in N. longifolium
and latifolium. (M. & B. 620.)

331.* Physalis Peruviana, Linn. Spec. 2, p. 1670. (M. & B. 29.)

Scrophulariacece.

332. Herpestis Monniera, HBK. (M. & B. 53.)
333.t ScoPARiA DULCis, Liun. (Seemann, Fl. Vitiensis.)

192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Labiatece.

334. Plectranthus parviflorus, "Willd. Hort. Berol. 1, t. 65,
non R. Br. PI australis, Hook. &, Am. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 92, non
R. Br. ? This is, however, probably nothing more than the true PL
australis, R. Br. Prodr. Fh N. HoU. p. 506, and if so, will bear the
prior name. (M. & B. 41, 84, 293 ; Remy, 403.)

335. Sphacele hastata. Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad. 5, p. 341.
(M. & B. 401.)

336. Phyllostegia vestita, Benth, in Bot. Reg. sub 1292, & in
DC. Prodr. 12, p. 553 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 342. P. dentata, Benth. 1. c.

337. Phyllostegia GRANDiFLORif, Benth. 1. c; Gray, 1. c. p.
342. Prasium macrophyllum, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 453, t. 65,
fig. 3, non Benth. 1. c. (M. & B. 6 ; Remy, 383.)

338. Phyllostegia brevidens. Gray, 1. c. p. 343. Var.? am-
BiGUA, Gray, 1. c. p. 343.

339. Phyllostegia glabra, Benth. in Linnfea, 6, p. 79, & in
Bot. Reg. 1. c. ; Gray, 1. c. p. 343 ; Hook. & Am. Bot. Beech. Voy. p.
92. Prasium glabrum, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 452, t. 64. Phyl-
lostegia Chamissonis, Benth. in Linnaea, 1. c. ; Hook. & Am. 1. c; DC.
Prodr. 1. c. P. Macrcei, Benth. in DC. Prodr. 1. c. (M. & B. 224,
354 ; Remy, 385.) '

340. Phyllostegia? hirsuta, Benth. in Bot. Reg. & in DC.
Prodr. 1. c. p. 555 ; Gray, I. c. p. 344.

341. Phyllostegia parviflora, Benth. in Linnaea, 6, p. 79, & in
DC. Prodr. 1. c. p. 554 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 344. (M. & B. 553, 554,
405, 404.) Var. Gaudichaudii, Gray, 1. c. Var. glabriuscula,
Gray, 1. c. P. macrophylla, Benth. in Bot. Reg. & in DC. Prodr.
1. c. p. 554. Var. mollis. Gray, 1. c. P. mollis, Benth. in Linnaea,
6, p. 79, & in DC. 1. c. p. 554.

342. Phyllostegia stachyoides. Gray, 1. c. p. 344.

343. Phyllostegia clavata, Benth. in Bot. Reg. & in DC.
Prodr. 1. c. p. 554 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 344. (M. & B. 415 ; Remy,
386.)

344. Phyllostegia racemosa, Benth. in Bot. Reg. & in DC.
1. 0. ; Gray, 1. c. p. 344. (M. & B. 555 ?)

345. Phyllostegia haplostachya. Gray, 1. c. p. 345. (Remy,
394.) Var. leptostachya, Gray, 1. c.

346. Phyllostegia truncata. Gray, 1. c. p. 345. (Remy, 395.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 193

347. Phyllostegia floribunda, Benth. Lab. p. 653, & in DC.
1. c. p. 555 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 345.

348. Stenogyne macrantha, Benth. in Bot. Reg. 1. c. & in DC.
Prodr. 12, p. 555. (M. & B. 402.) Var. Grayi : labio inferiore
breviore. S. macrantha, Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad. 5, p. 346.
(Remy, 381.)

349. Stenogyne rotund ifolia, Gray, 1. c. p. 347. (M. & B. 403.)

350. Stenogyne cordata, Benth. Lab. p. 654, & in DC. 1. c. ;
Gray, 1. c. p. 347.

351. Stenogyne sessilis, Benth. Lab. p. 654, & in DC. 1. c;
Gray, 1. c. Var. /3 : foliis lasvibus ; pedicelHs calyce (fructifero) jequi-
longis. (M. & B. 406.)

352. Stenogyne calaminthoides, Gray, 1. c. (Remy, 380.)

353. Stenogyne scrophularioides, Benth. in Bot. Reg. sub t.
1292, & in DC. 1. c. p. 556 ; Gray, 1. c. p. 347. Var. /3. Gray, 1. c.
S. Nehoni, Benth. Lab. p. 655. PhcBopsis montana, Nutt. in herb.
Hook. (Remy, 376.) Var. y : undique hirsuta ; foliis grosse dentatis.
(Hillebrand, 339.)

354. Stenogyne purpurea (sp. nov.) : parce hirsuta, divaricato-
ramosa ; fohis ovato-lanceolatis acurainatis serratis basi rotundatis vix
truncatis petiolatis supra glabratis ; verticillastris 6-floi-is ; pedicelHs
calyce subisquilongis ; dentibus calycis ajqualibus acutis ; corolla un-
dique hirsuta, labio superiore longiore. — Mountains above Waimea,
Kauai. — Leaves 3 to 4 inches long, 12 to 20 lines wide, long-acumi-
nated. Calyx 4 or 5 lines long, scarcely half as long as the corolla.
Most nearly allied to S. scrophularioides. (M. & B. 552.)

355. Stenogyne rugosa, Benth. in Bot. Reg. 1. c. & in DC. 1. c.
p. 556 ; Gray, L c. (M. & B. 295 ; Remy, 382.)

356. Stenogyne angustifolia. Gray, 1. c. p. 348. (Remy, 393.)

357. Stenogyne parviflora (sp. nov.) : molliter villoso-pubes-
cens, ramosissima; foliis deltoideis grosse crenatis basi truncatis vel
subcordatis (4-6 lin. latis) petiolatis; verticillastris 6-7-floris, pedi-
cellis calyce suboequilongis ; calycis (fructiferi ampliati) lobis subinae-
qualibus latis obtusis tubo multo brevioribus ; corolla extus pubescente
labio inferiore quam superius longiore calyce plus duplo longiore;
staminibus baud exsertis. — On the northwest side of Haleakala, East
Maui, at 6000 or 7000 feet elevation. — By its several-flowered
■whorls, and by the lower lip being longer than the upper, this is most
nearly related to the large-leaved group, but resembles S. diffusa in its

VOL. VII. 25

194 PROCEEDINQS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

manner of growth, its small leaves, and general aspect. Spreading,
much branched, sufFruticose at the base. Leaves 7-10 lines long,
4—6 lines wide, the crenatures often a line and a half deep ; petioles
3-4 lines long. Calyx about two lines long, on a pedicel little shorter
than itself. Flower 3 or 4 lines long, the lower lip large in proportion,
nearly 2 lines long. The sterile specimen referred to by Gray, 1. c.
p. 348, is from the same locality and belongs here. (M. & B. 407.)

358. Stenogyne microphylla, Benth. Lab. p. 655, & in DC. c. 1.
p. 556; Gray, 1. c. p. 348. (M. & B. 294; Remy, 397.)

359. Stenogyne crenata, Gray, 1. c. p. 348. (M. & B. 408.)

360. Stenogyne diffusa, Gray, 1. c. p. 348.

Verbenacece.

S61.t Priva aspera, HBK., 2, p. 278; DC. Prodr. 11, p. 534.
(M. & B. 74.)

362. ViTEX TRiFOLiA, Linn., var. ? unifoliolata. (M. & B. 409.)

363.t Verbena Bonariensis, Linn., has been introduced and be-
come a very troublesome weed.

363\t Stachytarpha dichotoma, Vahl. Enum., 1, p. 207.
(Eemy, 405.)

Myoporinece.

364. Myoporum (Polyccelium) Sandwicense, Gray, in Pro-
ceed. Am. Acad. 6, p. 52. M. tenuifoUum, Hook. &, Arn. Bot.
Beech. Voy. p. 93, vix Forst. & R. Br. Polyccelium Sandwicense,
A. DC. Prodr. 11, p. 706. (M. & B. 387; Remy, 462, 463, the
normal form.) The normal form of this species is that of a tree 20 to
40 feet high, which is usually found growing on the outskirts of forests
at medium elevations, and in rather dry places. With that, it seems
necessary to connect a form, in all details of structure apparently
similar, but with the leaves much thickened and succulent, as also
the petals in a less degree, and growing as a decumbent shrub on
the sea-coast, where seeds have doubtless been carried by mountain
torrents. (M. & B. 585; Remy, 461.) The wood of this species has
very much the fragrance of sandal-wood and is known as bastard
sandal-wood. It is exported to some extent as sandal-wood, but does
not appear to retain its fragrance so well.

BorraginacecB.

365. CoRDiA SUBCORDATA, Lam. 111. no. 1899; Cham. & Schlecht.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 195

in Linnasa, 4, p. 474. (7. Sehestena, Forst. Prodr. p. 18, n. 108, non
Linn. (M. & B. 350 ; Remy, 408.)

366. Heliotropium anomalum, Hook. & Am. Bot. Beech. Voy.
p. 66 ; Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad. 5, p. 339 ; & var. argenteum,
Gray, 1. c. Lithospermum incanum, Forst. sp. 1, p. 158. Pentacarya
heliotropoides, DC. Prodr. 9, p. 559. (M. & B. 587 ; Remy, 411.)

367. Heliotropium Cdrassavicum, Linn. ; Hook. & Arn. Bot.
Beech. Voy. p. 91. (M. & B. 50 ; Remy, 409»)

368.t BoTHRiosPERMUM TENELLUM, Fisch. & Mcy. (M. «& B. 41.)

Hydrophijllacece.

369. Nama Sandwicensis, Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad. 5, p. 338.
(M. & B. 97 ; Remy, 425.)

Convolvulacece.

370. Batatas acetos^efolia, Choisy, Conv. Rar. (Remy, 416.)
371.* Batatas edulis, Choisy, Conv. Or. p. 53.

372. Batatas pentaphylla, Choisy, 1. c. p. 54. (M. & B. 351.)

373. Ipom^a (Calonyction) Bona-nox, Linn. Calonyction spe-
ciosum, Choisy, Conv. Or. p. 59. (M. & B.)

374. Ipom^a (Pharbitis) insularis, Steud. Pharhitis insularis
Chois. Conv. Or. p. 57, & in DC. Prodr. 9, p. 341. Convolvulus pur
pureus, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 90, non Linn. Remy's
No. 414 has the leaves lobed, and more obtuse. (M. & B. 36, 120
Remy, 413, 414, 415.)

375. Ipom^a Pes-capRuE, Sweet. Convolvulus Pes-caprcB, Linn.
Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 90. Ipomcea maritima, R. Br. Prodr. 486.

376. Ipom^a Turpethum, R. Br. Prodr. 485. (M. & B. 42.)

377. Ipom^a Forsteri, Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. ined.
I. carnea, Forst. Prodr. Fl. Ins. Aust. p. 15, non Jacq. I. obscura,
Guillem. Zeph. Tait. p. 44, vix Rrera. & Schult. I. sepiaria, Seem, in
Bonpl. 1861, p. 258, vix Koenig. Var. Hawaiensis, Gray, 1. c.
(W. T. Brigham.)

378. Ipom^a palmata, Forsk. Descr. p. 43. Choisy, in DC. Prodr.
9, p. 386. Conv. Cairicus, Linn. According to the description our
plant belongs here, as it has silky -tomentose seeds. It otherwise agrees
with /. ticberculafa, Roem. & Sch., which is said by Gray, 1. c. to grow
on the Islands, though perhaps by a mistaken determination, as he had
no ripe fruit. (M. & B. 345, 227.)

196 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

379. Jacquemontia Sandwicensis, Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad.
5, p. 336. Convolvulus ovalifolius, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy.
p. 90, non Vahl. Ipoincea ovalifolia, var. puhescens & var. tomentosa,
Choisy, Conv. Or. p. 67, & in DC. Prodr. 9, p. 357. (M. & B. 619 ;
Remy, 420.)

380. BoNAMiA Menziesh, Gray, 1. c. p. 336. Convolvulus ovali-
folius var.? Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 90. (M. & B. 618 ;

Remy, 421.)

381. CuscuTA Sandwichiana, Choisy, Cuscut. p. 184, t. 5, f. 4;
Engelm. Cuscut. in Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, 1, p. 497.

Gentianacece.

382. Ertthk^a SABiEOiDES, Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad. 6, p.
40. Schenkia sabceoides, Griseb. in Bonpl. 1, p. 226. (M. & B. 64 ;
Remy, 375.)

Loganiacece.

383. Labordea fagr^oidea (Gaud.) : foliis crasso-coriaceis ob-
longis seu lanceolato-oblongis acutis supra glabris subtus parce hirsutis
breviter petiolatis ; cyma sessili pauciflora ; pedunculis bibracteatis ;
lobis calycis ovatis vel ovato-lanceolatis petalis (intus pubescentibus)
lineari-lanceolatis flavidis crassis duplo triplove brevioribus ; stigmate
elongato-clavato pubescente ; ovario bi - triloculari ; capsulis breviter
pedunculatis sublignosis bi - trivalvibus. — L. fagrceoidea, Gaud. Bot.
Freyc. Voy. p. 450, t. 60, non Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad. 5, p. 323.
L. sessilisy Gray, 1. c. I cannot doubt that this is the original species,
as figured and described by Gaudichaud. It differs from the next in the
much broader lobes of the calyx and corolla, the fewer-flowered cyme,
and the thicker, hirsute leaves. (M. «fc B. 434.)

384. Labordea pallida (H. Mann.): glabra; foliis obovato-ob-
longis oblongisve basi in petiolum breviusculum attenuatis penninerviis
subcoriaceis, subtus pallidis ; cyma sessili pluriflora ; calyce (nunc hir-
sutulo) amplo fere 5-secto, segmentis lanceolatis subfoliaceis nervosis
corolla (lobis lineai'ibus) fere dimidio brevioribus ; stigmate elongato
subclavato; ovario bi- triloculari. — L. fagrceoidea, Gray, 1. c. p. 323,
non Gaud. (M. & B. 611.)

385. Labordea hirtella (sp. nov.) : foliis coriaceis obovatis ob-
lanceolatisve subito acutis supra glabratis subtus pubescentibus breviter
petiolatis ; cyma laxe pauciflora cum calyce 5-secto pubescente ; lobis
calycis subulatis corollas tubo (fauce ampliato) dimidio brevioribus ; cap-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 197

sulis sublignosis bivalvibus. — On the summit of Lanai. — Shrub 5 or
6 feet high, irregularly much branched. Leaves 1| to 2| inches long,
9 to 12 lines wide. Flowers on rather long peduncles and pedicels ;
as in the other species, yellow. Capsule nearly an inch long. (M.
& B. 335.)

386. Labordea membranacea (sp. nov.) : foliis amplis ovalibus
breviter acuminatis membranaceis subtus pallidis in petiolum basi at-
tenuatis cum ramis novellis inflorescentiaque pilis atro-rufis papilloso-
hirsutis ; cyma sessili quasi umbellato-contracta ; calyce subinflato 5-fido
lobis lanceolatis nervosis. — Mountains above Honolulu, Oahu. — A
small tree. Leaves 3 to 6 inches long, 1|^ to 3 inches wide, thin and
membranaceous. (M. & B. 149.)

387. Labordea (Geniostemoides) tinieolia, Gray, 1. c. p. 322.
An upright tree 25 or 30 feet high. (M. & B. 562, 610 ; Remy, 320,
360, 361, 361^^)

ApocynacecB.

388. Altxia oliv^formis, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 451. A.
sulcata, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 90. (M. & B. 99 ; Remy,
369, 370.)

389. Rauwolfia Sandwicensis, A. DC. Prodr. 8, p. 339. (M.
& B. 113, 336; Remy, 368.)

390. OcHROSiA Sandwicensis, a. DC. Prodr. 8, p. 357 ; Gray,
in Proceed. Am. Acad. 5, p. 333. Cerhera parvijlora, Hook. & Arn.
Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 90, non Forst. — There are specimens of an
Ochrosia with oblong-elliptical obtuse coriaceous leaves, and bearing
fruit, in Dr. Wm. Hillebrand's collection ; but, wanting flowers, they
are too imperfect to be identified with any known species, or to war-
rant describing as new. (M. & B. 447 ; Remy, 366, 367.)

391.t ViNCA rosea, L. (M. & B.)

OleacecB.

392. Olea Sandwicensis, Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad. 5, p. 331.
(M. & B. 338 ; Remy, 479, 482.)

Nyctaginacece.

393. PisONiA GRANDis, Parkinson, ined. ; R. Br. Prodr. p. 422.
P. inermis, Forst. Prodr. n. 397, non Jacq. P. procera, Bertero,
Deless. Ic. Sel. t. 87. P. Brunoniana, Endl. (Remy, 217 ? )

198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

394. PisoNiA EXCELSA, Blume, Bijdr. p. 735. P. macrocarpay
Presl. Symb. t. 56. P. Forsteriana, Endl. in Eel. Meyen. t. 51. P.
Sinclarii, Hook. f. Fl. N. Zeal. 1, t. 50. P. sylvestris, Teesm. P. mitis,
Endl. P. viscida, Seem, in Bonpl. P. timbellifera, Seem. 1. c. & in
Journ. Bot. 1, p. 244. (M. & B. 347, 622 ; Eemy, 219.)

395. BcERHAAViA DIFFUSA, Linn. Spec. p. 4. (M. «& B. 111.)

PhytolaccacecB.

396. Phytolacca Bogotensis, HBK. Nov. Gen. & Spec. 2,
p. 183 ; Moq. in DC. Prodr. 13, 2, p. 33. P. Ahyssinica, Hook. &
Am. Bot. Beech. Voy. 94. P. hrachystachys, Moq. in DC. 1. c. p. 31.
(M. & B. 81, 426, 460; Eemy, 212.)

Polyg;onace(E.

397. EuMEX GiGANTEUs, Ait. H. Kew. ed. 2, 2, p. 323 ; Meisn. in

A. DC. Prodr. 14, p. 53. — Climbing to the height of forty or fifty
feet in the dense forest of Hawaii, and highly ornamental when in fruit,
bearing large loose panicles ; the calyces turning to a brilliant red.
(Eemy, 211; M. & B.)

398. EuMEX LONGiFOLius, DC? or some allied species, noticed on
the Kaala Mountains by the botanists of the Exploring Expedition,
(fide Gray, Bot. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. ined.)

399.t Polygonum glabrum, Willd. (M. & B. 19 ; Eemy, 210.)

Santalacecs.

400. Santalum Freyienetianum, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. t.
45 ; Gray, in Proceed, Am. Acad. 4, p. 326, & in Bot. S. Pacif. Expl.
Exp. ined.; A. DC. Prodr. 14, p. 682. Var. Gaudichaudii, Gray,
Bot. Expl. Exp. 1. c. Var. ellipticuji, Gray, Bot. Expl. Exp. 1. c.
S. ellipticum, Gaud. 1. c. p. 442 ; A. DC. Prodr. 14, p. 682 ; Gray, in
Proceed. Amer. Acad. 4, p. 327. Var. latifolium. Gray, in Proceed.
1. c. S. panicnlatum, Hook. & Am. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 94. M. &

B. 353 ; Eemy, 503, 506, 507, 509.)

401. Santalum pyrularium. Gray, in Bot. Expl. Exp. 1. c, «fe in
Proceed. Am. Acad. 1. c. p. 327. Vars. a. & /3. Gray, I. c. (Var. a.
M. & B. 625 ; Eemy, 505. Var. /3. M. & B. 396.)

402. ExocARPus Gaudichaudii, A. DC. Prodr. 14, p. 90 ; Gray,
Bot. Expl. Exp. 1. c. E. cupressiformis, Hook. &, Arn. Bot. Beech.
Voy. p. 95, non E. Br. Var. /3. foliosa. Gray, 1. c. (Var. a. M. & B.
299 ; Eemy, 511. Var. ^. M. & B. 117 ; Eemy, 513, 514.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 199

Lauraceas.

403. Oreodaphne? — We collected specimens of a small tree grow-
ing at an elevation of about 2000 feet on the mountains above Waimea,
Kauai, in fruit and with very young flower-buds, which may be an
Oreodaphne. The young branches and inflorescence are silky with a
rusty -colored pubescence ; the leaves (2| to 4 inches long, by 14 to 20
lines wide) are densely reticulate-veiny but not scrobiculate, smooth
and shining above and glabrate beneath ; the panicles are short, axil-
lary, and few-flowered. (M. & B. 584.)

404. Cassttha filiformis, Linn. (M. & B.)

Thymeleacece.

405. Wickstrcemia F(etida, Gray, in Seemann's Jour. Bot. 3,
p. 302. Var. ? Oahuensis, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 16, 130 ; Remy, 223.)

406. Wickstrcemia elongata. Gray, 1. c. p. 303.

407. Wickstr(emia Sandwicensis, Meisn. in DC. Prodr. 14, p.
545 ; Gray, 1. c. 303.

408. Wickstrcemia Uva-ursi, Gray, 1. c. (M. & B. 623 ; Remy,
225.)

409. Wickstrcemia buxifolia, Gray, 1. c. p. 304.

410. Wickstrcemia phillyre^folia, Gray, 1. c. p. 304. (M. &
B. 304 ; Remy, 222.)

Chenopodiacece.

411. Chenopodium Sandwichieum, Moq. Chenop. Enum. p. 28;
& in DC. Prodr. 13, 2, p. 67. (M. & B. 315 ; Remy, 209.) Var. ?
maritima : humilius ; foliis farinosissimis ; paniculis densis. — On the
coast, Oahu. (M. & B. 527.)

412. Chenopodium murale, Linn.; Moq. in A. DC. 1. c. p. 69.
(M. & B. 80.)

413. Chenopodium album, Moq. in A. DC. 1. c. p. 70. Var.
CANDICANS. Atriplex Oahuensis, Meyen, Riese, 2, p. 127.

414. Chenopodium ambrosioides, Linn.; Moq. in A. DC. 1. c.
p. 72.

415. Batis maritima, L. ; Torr. in Smithson. Contrib. (M. & B.
118.)

Basellacece.

416.* Basella rubra, L. (M. & B.)

200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Amaranthacece.

417. Ptilotus (Nototrichium) Sandwicensis, Gray,* in Bot.
S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. ined. (M. & B. 590 ; Remy, 207.)

418. AcHTRANTHES (AcHTROPSis) MUTicA, Gray,t in Bot. S.
Pacif. Expl. Exp. ined. (Remy, 208.)

419. AcHYRANTHES SPLENDENS, Mart, in A. DC. Prodr. 13, 2,
p. 316. (Remy, 206.)

420. AcHTRANTHES BiDENTATA, Blume, Bijdr. p. 545 ; A. DC. 1. c.
p. 312. (Remy, 209.)

421. Aerva sericea, Moq. in A. DC. Prodr. 1. c. p. 305.

422. EuxoLUS LiNEATus, Moq., in A. DC Prodr. 1. c. p. 276.

423. Charpentiera ovata. Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 444, t. 48 ;
Moq. in A. DC. Prodr. 1. c. p. 322. C. obovata, Gaud. 1. c. t. 47 ;
Moq. 1. c. I see no sufficient reason for keeping these two species
apart. (M. & B. 79 ; Remy, 205.)

UrticacecB.

424. Urtica Sandwicensis, Weddell, Monogr. Urtic. p. 67.

425. Fleurta interrupta. Gaud.: var. spicata, Wedd. 1. c. p. 116.
Fleurya spicata, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 497.

426. Urera glabra, Wedd. 1. c. p. 149. Procris glabra, Hook. &
Am. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 96; & var. mollis, Wedd. (M. & B. 398,
400 ; Remy, 200.)

427. Urera Sandwicensis, Wedd. in Ann. Sc. Nat. ser. 3, 18, p.
177, & in Urtic. p. 150. (Remy, 202.)

* "P. fruticosus, tomentoso-sericeus ; foliis oppositis petiolatis ovatis ovalibusque
nunc obovatis subtus incanis ; spicis ovatis seu cylindraceis pedunculatis vel ad
apicem pedunculi ternato-confertis ; sepalis ovato-oblongis obtusis dorso cum brac-
teis rhachique villosissimis, fructiferis conniventibus.

" Var. a : ramis floriferis etiam lignescentibus ; foliis ovatis nunc ovato-lanceolatis
plerisque acuminatis, rarius ovali-oblongis obtusis basi pi. m. attenuatis.

"Var. /?. IvAVAiENSis : ramis fere herbaceis ; foliis obovatis obtusissimis basi
magis attenuatis subtus tomento subaurato." Gray, Mss.

Hawaii, near the coast ; O.ahu. Var. (i. Coast of Kauai.

t "A. glabella; caule fruticoso ramosissimo ; foliis obovatis spathulatis seu fere
lanceolatis obtusis viridibus in petiolum gracilem attenuatis ; spicis ovatis sessilibus
densifloris nunc paucifloris, rhachi subvillosa ; bracteis bracteolisque late ovatis mu-
cronulatis flore patente 2-3-plo brevioribus ; sepalis 5 ovato-lanceolatis obtusiusculis
coriaceo-palcaceis trinerviis ; staminibus antheriferis 5 ; staminodiis oblongis apice
laciniatis filamenta adeequantibus."

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 201

428. PiLEA PEPLOiDES, Hook. & Am. 1. c. p. 96 ; Wedd. Urtic. p.
179. P. pygmcea, Miq. in Zoll. Syst. Verzeichn. p. 106. Duhrueilia
peploides, Gaud. 1. c. p. 495. (M. & B. 11 ; Remy, 199.)

429. BcEHMERiA STiPULARis, Wedd. in Ann. Sc. Nat. ser. 4, 1,
p. 200, & Urtic. p. 377. Urtica grandis, Hook. & Am. 1. c. p.
95. (M. & B. 397 ; Remy, 195.)

430. PiPTURUS ALBiDUS, Gray, ined. P. Taitensis, Wedd. in
Ann. Sc. Nat. ser. 4, 1, p. 196, & Urtic. p. 449. Boehmeria albida,
Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 96. Var. Gaudichaudianus, Wedd. Urtic. 1. c.
Pipturus Gaudichaudianus, Wedd. in Ann. Sci. Nat. 1. c. — This cer-
tainly should retain the specific name of Hooker and Arnott,
especially as the name Taitensis, given by Weddel, is wholly in-
appropriate for a plant entirely unknown to Tahiti. (M. & B. 45 ;
Remy, 191.)

431. Neraudia melastom^folia, Gaud. 1. c. p. 500, t. 117;
Wedd. Urtic. p. 438, t. 12. N. ovata. Gaud. 1. c. Boehmeria melas-
tomcefolia. Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 96. (M. & B. 220.)

432. Neraudia sericea, Gaud. 1. c. p. 500, & Bot. Voy. Bonite, t.
133 ; Wedd. 1. c. p. 439. (M. & B. 624.)

433. ToucHARDiA LATiFOLiA, Gaud. Bot. Voy. Bonite, t. 94 ;
Wedd. Urtic. p. 142, t. 13, (M. & B. 399.)

434.* Artocarpds incisa, Linn.

435.* Brousonettia papyrifera, Vent.

436. MoRus pendulina, Endlich. Prodr. Fl. Norfolk, no. 34.
Our plant appears to be the same as the Norfolk Island plant described
by Endlicher, and belongs to a section of the genus which, with Morus
Brunoniana, of Australia, (figured by Endlicher in Atakt. Bot. t. 32,
from a drawing by Ferd. Bauer,) has a dry and unchanged calyx in
fruit. (Remy, 203, 204.)

EuphorbiacecB.

437. Euphorbia CLUSiiEFOLiA, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p.
95 ; Boiss. in A. DC. Prodr. 15-2, p. 11. (M. & B. 627.)

438. Euphorbia (Anisophyllum, Gymnadeni^) Remyi (Gray,
Bot. S. P. Expl. Exp. ined.) : " fruticosa, orgyalis, glabi-a ; ramis de-
nudatis ad articulationes nodosis ; stipulis in unam interpetiolarem
triangularem coalitis ; foliis breviuscule petiolatis oblongis vel ellipticis
submembranaceis lucidis tenuiter crebre penninerviis integerrimis sub-
acutis vel subacuminatis, basi rotundata fere asquali rarius angustata in-

VOL. VII. 26

202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

leqnali ; cymis nxillaribus 1 - S-cephalis subsessilibus ; pedicellis folio
multo brevioribus ; involucri campanulati lobis minimis, glanclulis
transverse ovalibus ; capsulse (aut glabras aut tomentulosse) coccis
vix carinatis ; semine tetragono-obovato scrobiculato-rugoso. — Kauai.
Oalm. — Allied to E. cliisicefolia, but much taller, inclining to be sim-
ple stemmed and arborescent, glabrous, except the slight pubescence
on the involucre, and a deciduous tomentum on the capsule. Leaves
from 1^ to 5 inches long, and from 10 to 20 lines wide, much thinner
than in E. clusicefolia, and the primary veins (from 20 to 30 pairs)
more evident, but the ultimate reticulation of veinlets less distinct ; the
apex never retuse, usually pointed. Petioles 3 to 6 lines long. Pedi-
cels 2 to 3 lines long, sometimes solitary. Lobes of the involucre
almost obsolete, emarginate. Styles short ; their lobes short and
thickish. Capsules small, acutely triangular-3-lobed, and glabrous
(immature?), or much larger, 2 lines long, the cocci obtuse on
the back. Seed coarsely scrobiculate-rugose." Gray, mss. (H.
Mann ; Remy, 598.)

439. Euphorbia multiformis, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. absq.
descr. ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. ; Boiss. in DC. 1. c. Var. ^. tomentella
(Boiss. L c.) : ramis junioribus et foliis tomentellis. Vai*. y. tenuior
(Gray, 1. c. ined.) : glabra ; ramis gracilibus ; foliis elHpticis oblongisve
tenuioribus viridioribus. Var. 8. lorifolia (Gray, 1. c. ined.) : foliis
lineari-elongatis (bipollicaribus) crassis ; pedicellis involucro 2 - 4-plo
longioribus. Var. e. celastroides (Gray, 1. c. ined.) : glabra; foliis
obovato-oblongis spathulatisve basi angusta truncato-subcordata ; pedi-
cellis involucro pluries longioribus. — E. celastroides, Boiss. in DC. \. c.
(M. & B. 101 [y.], 389 [S.] ; Eemy, no. lost.)

440. Euphorbia Hookeri, Steud. Nora. 1, p. 612 ; Boiss. in DC.
1. c. E. myrtifolia. Hook. &, Arn. 1. c. (M. & B. 103.)

441. Euphorbia cordata, Meyen, Reise, 2, p. 150 ; Rel.
Meyen. p. 412; Boiss. in DC. L c. p. 13. (M. & B. 106; Remy,
589.)

442.t Euphorbia pilulifera, Linn. Amcen. Ac. 3, p. 114, non
herb. ; Boiss. in DC. 1. c. p. 21. (M. & B. 35 ; Remy, 597.)

443.1 Euphorbia Heliscopia, Linn. Spec. p. 658; Boiss. in
DC. \. c. p. 136.

444. Antidesma platyphyllum (sp. nov.) : arborescens ; foliis
orbiculatis oblongisve obtusis vel acutiusculis chartaceis glabris breviter
seu brevissime petiolatis ; paniculis ferrugineo-puberulis ; bracteis ova-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 203

tis ; floribus spicatis; calyce masc. sessili 5- vel plerumque 4-lobo 4-5-
(rarissime 6-) andro extus ferrugineo-tomentoso intus glabro ; disco
lobato glabro ; ovarii rudimento obconico hirsuto ; stigmate terminali ;
drupa pedicellata. — Hawaii, Maui, Oahu, Kauai, not uncommon in
forests at an elevation of 2,000 or 3,000 feet. — Very closely related to
A.fallax of Pei;ang, as described by Miiller in DC. Prodr. 15-2, p.
253, but differing in the rounder and more obtuse and shorter-petioled
leaves, and in the calyx being glabrous within. (M. & B. 427 ; Remy,
609 ; Hillebrand, 278"'^)

445. Phyllanthus Sandwicensis, Mtill. Arg. in Linna3a, 32, p.
31, & in DC. 1. c. p. 389. P. distichus, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech.
Voy. p. 95. (M. & B. 104 ; Remy, 601, 603.)

446.t Phyllanthus Niuri, Linn. ("W. T. Brigham.)

447. Claoxylon Sandwicensis, Mtill. Arg. in Linngea, 34, p.
165, & in DC. 1. c. p. 780. (M. & B. 586 ; Remy, 600.)

448. Aledrites Moluccana, Willd. Spec. 4, p. 590; Miill. in
DC. 1. c. p. 723. A. triloba, Forst. (M. «fe B. 51 ; Remy, 600.)

449.* Manihot utilissima, Pohl. PI. Bras. 1, p. 32, t. 24, inclus.
i8 & y, ex Miill. in DC. 1. c. p. 1064. (M. & B.)
450.* RiciNus COMMUNIS, Linn. (M. & B.)

PiperacecB.
451.* Piper (Macropiper) methysticum, Forst. Prodr. Ins. Aust.
n. 21; Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 96. Macropiper, Miq. in
Comment. Phytogr. p. 36, & Syst. Pip. p. 217.

452. Peperomia pallida, A. Dietr. Spec. 1. p. 153 ; Miq. 1. c.
p. 103 ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. Pi^^er pallidum, Forst. 1. c. n. 24. — I am
not able to give a satisfactory list of species of the Islands, nor can
much dependence be placed on these determinations. There are some
forms which do not agree with any descriptions which I can find ;
but rather than add any further confusion by introducing new
names, I merely refer to them in this way, especially as the forth-
cominir volume of the Prodromus will soon exhibit all that is now
known concerning them.

453. Peperomia membranacea, Hook. &, Arn. 1. c. ; Miq. 1. c. p.
120. (Hillebrand, 453, pro parte ; M. & B.)

454. Peperomia Gaudichaudii, Miq. 1. c. p. 137. — This appears
scarcely to differ from P. membranacea, allowing that (as Miquel's
character does not) to have both opposite and whorled leaves.

204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

455. Peperomia Sandwicensis, Miq. 1. c. p. 126, & 111. Pip. p.
19, t. 14. (M. & B.)

456. Peperomia insularum, Miq. in Hook. Lond. Journ. Bot. 4,
p. 422 ; Walp. Ann. 3, p. 340.

457. Peperomia latifolia, Miq. Syst. p. 128, & 111. Pip. p. 20,
t. 15. (M. & B. 243.)

458. Peperomia hypoleuca, Miq. 1. c. p. 136, & 111. Pip. p. 21,
t. 17. (Remy, 187, 189 ; Hillebrand, 453, pro parte.)

459. Peperomia pachtphylla, Miq. 1. c. p. 137. P. verticillata,
Hook. & Arn. 1. c. Piper verticillatum, Linn. ; Spreng.

460. Peperomia Macr^ana, Miq. in Seem. Journ. Bot. 4, p. 145.

461. Peperomia leptostachya, Hook. & Arn. 1. c; Miq. Syst,
Pip. p. 138.

462. Peperomia replexa, A. Dietr. 1. c. ; Miq. 1. c. p. 169.
Piper rejlexum, Linn. fil. Suppl. p. 91. Forma Forsteriana. Piper
tetraphyllum, Forst. 1. c. n. 25. Peperomia rejlexa, GuiU. Zeph. Tait.
P. tetraphylla, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. (M. & B. 242 ; Remy, 174.)

463. Peperomia . A species with narrowly lanceolate,

whorled, one-nerved leaves, 9 to 12 lines long, by 2 or 3 lines wide,
and small, short-peduncled, axillary and terminal spikes. (Remy,
184.)

Palmece.

464. Pritchardia Martii, Herm. Wendl. in Bonplandia, 10, p.
199. Livistonia2 Martii, Gaud. Bot. Bonite, t. 58, 59; Mart. Palm,
p. 242.

465. Pritchardia Gaudichaudii, Herm. Wendl. 1. c. Livi-
stonia? Gaudichaudii, Mart. 1. c. (M. & B. 419.)

466. There is a third Palm with flabellate leaves, growing on
inaccessible cliffs, which, I doubt not, is different from either of the
preceding.

467.* Cocos nucifera, Linn. Spec. p. 1658.

Pandanacece.

468.* Pandanus verus, Rumph. Herb. Amb., ex Kurz, in Seem.
Journ. Bot. 5, p. 125. P. odoratissimus, Linn. f. Suppl. p. 424.

469. Freycinetia arborea, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 431, t.
41. F. scandens, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 97, non Gaud.
— There is only one Freycinetia known in the Hawaiian Islands, and
this is well figured and described by Gaudichaud, the founder of the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBEE 11, 1866. 205

genus, under the name of F. arborea. It is, however, never known
to grow upright, but climbs over and among trees, making a dense
tangle, and is expressively named by the natives i-e - i-e, i-e mean-
ing to step over. Possibly Gaudichaud may have been misled by plants
growing over the Draccena aurea, and have mistaken the two plants
for one, the leaves being somewhat similar ; but his specific name, how-
ever ill-chosen, could not now well be superseded. Hooker & Arnott,
having scandent specimens destitute of flower and fruit, unfortunately
referred them to F. scandens, Gaud. 1. c, of Molucca and Timor, a
species with a single small stigma, and in other respects totally different
from the Hawaiian one, which has a clavate ovary with a truncate apex
bearing 5 to 7 stigmas. This has created a confusion in all subsequent
works, which even Kurtz, with Gaudichaud's figures before him, has
failed to clear up in his recent monograph of the genus (in Seem. Journ.
Bot. 5, p. 133). So far from the species "not existing in nature," it
is one of the two species upon which Gaudichaud founded the genus,
and differs much from F. scandens. (M. & B.)

Aroidea.

470.* COLOCASIA ANTIQUORUM, var. ESCULENTA, Schott.

The natives distinguish a great number of varieties, some of which
yield a much better esculent than others. There is a form which
grows high up in mountain valleys, known as apii, which has very
large leaves and a small and useless corm. The cultivation of the halo
is carried on mostly, if not exclusively, by planting the top of the corm
(sliced off with the bases of the leaves adhering) usually in artificial
ponds : but where there are no surface streams, it is carefully mulched.

Taccacece.

471. Tacca pinnatifida, Forster, Gen. PI. Ins. Aust. t. 35 ; See-
mann, Journ. Bot. 3, p. 261. T. oceanica, Nutt. in Amer. Journ.
Pharmac. 9, with a plate.

Naiadacew.

472. Najas major. All., var. angustifolia, A. Braun, in Seem.
Journ. Bot. 2, p. 275.

473. RuppiA MARiTiMA, LiuD. First detected by Chamisso.

474. PoTAMOGETON Gaudiohaudii, Cham, in Linna^a, 2, p. 199.

475. PoTAMOGETON FLUiTANS, var. OwAiHiENSis, Cham, in Liu-
nsea, 2, p. 228.

206 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

476. PoTAMOGETON PAUciFLORUs, Pursli, Fl. 1, p. 121 ; Cham.
1. c. p. 176, t. 4, f. 7. (M. & B. 57.)

Zlng-iberacecs.

477. Zingiber Zerumbet, Rose, in Trans. Linn. Soc. 8, p. 384.
(M. & B.)

478-1 Canna Indica, Linn., has run wild in many places. Also a

yellow variety ?

IridacefB.

479. SiSYRiNCHiUM ACRE (sp. nov.) : glaberrimum ; caule simplici
ancipiti ; foliis radicalibus linearibus 8-10-nerviis scapo brevioribus ;
spatha communi pedicellis paucis sequilongis vel brevioribus ; perigonio
flavo, lobis ovatis obtusis 5 - 7-nerviis ; filamentis antheris brevioribus
brevissime monadelphis ; stigmatibus (stylo longioribus) perigonio bre-
vioribus ; capsula obovata. — Common near Ivilauea, Hawaii, and on
the mountains of that and other of the islands, in dry land. Remark-
able for its very short style, and barely monadelphous filaments. The
acrid juice of the root is used by the natives for tattooing ; applied to
the skin it raises blisters, and leaves an indelible blue stain. (M. &
B. 438; Remy, 166.)

Dioscoreacece.

480.* Helmia bulbifera, Kunth, Enum. PI. 5, p. 435. Dioscorea
hdhifera, Linn. (Remy, 162.)

481.* Dioscorea PENTAPnyLLA, Linn.

Smilacinece.

482. Smilax Sandwicensis, Kunth, 1. c. p. 253. (M. & B. 222.)

483. Smilax anceps. Willd. Spec. 4, p. 782. (Remy, 157.)

Commelynacece.

484.t Commelyna Catennensis, Rich. C. agraria, Kunth. (M.
& B. 57.)

485.t Tradescantia floribunda, Kunth, Enum. PI. 4, p. 89.
(W. T. Brigham ; Hillebrand.)

OrchidacecB.

486. Anoectochilus (Myrmechis) Sandwicensis, Lindl. Gen. &
Sp. Orch. p. 500.

487. An(ectociiilus Jaubertii, Gaud. Bot. Bonite, 1. 100. — This

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 207

belongs to tbe section of the genus which has the lip fimbriate or den-
tate on the margin, and can thus be easily distinguished from A. Sand-
wicensis, the lip of which is entire on the margin. (M. & B. 469, 470.)

488. LiPARis Hawaiensis (sp. nov.) : foliis binis ovalibus oblon-
gisve obtusis membranaceis plicatis petiolatis scapo angulato dimidio
brevioribus ; racemo plurifloro ; labello obovato integerrimo vel cre-
nato concolore (flavido) ; sepalis lanceolatis ; petalis filiformibus ; cap-
sula obovato-clavato costata. — In mountain woods, on trees. — Inter-
mediate between L. Lceselii and L. Uliifolia in general aspect. Leaves
2|- to 4 inches long, by 1 to 2^ inches wide, abruptly contracted into a
conspicuous vaginate petiole of an inch or two in length. The labellum
is about 3 lines long, and a little shorter than the sepals. The bulb is
small (M. & B. 471.)

Liliacew.

*

489. Drac^na aurea (sp. nov.) : arborea, ramosa ; foliis coria-
ceis planis linearibus attenuato-acuminatis ; paniculis recurvo-pendulis
folioso-bracteatis ; pedicellis laxe racemosis solitariis raro geminis ; peri-
gonio (sesqui - bipollicari) tubuloso subinfundibuliformi leviter curvato
flavo, tubo lobis erectis lineari-oblongis triple longiore. — Not uncom-
mon throughout the islands. — A tree 20 to 25 feet high. The linear
and recurved-spreading leaves 1 J to 2 feet long, an inch or less wide.
Panicle a foot long, more or less, the bright lemon-yellow flowers very
showy. This differs from the typical species of the genus in the erect
lobes as well as the long tube of the perigonium. , The bei'ry is red,
4 to 8 lines in diameter, and is much sought after by birds.

490.* CORDYLINE TERMiNALis, Kunth, in Act. Acad. Beroh 1820,
p. 30. Dracaena terminalis, Reichard ; Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 91 ;
Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 97. Gordyline Eschscholtziana,
Mart, in Schult. Syst. 7. p. 347. (M. & B.)

491. DiANELLA ODORATA, Blume, Enum. 1, p. 13; Hook. & Arn.
1. c. p. 218. D. Sandwicensis, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 97. (M. & B.
89, 364; Remy, 152.)

492. AsTELiA Menziesiana, Smith, in Rees, Cycl. App. — Leaves
narrowly linear, glabrate. above, silky-hairy and chalFy beneath, as is
the rest of the plant, excepting the perianth, which is nearly or quite
glabrous, its divisions united at the base to form a short tube. (M. &
B. 217.)

493. AsTELiA VERATROiDES, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 420, t. 31.
Perhaps only a form of the last ; but the leaves are broader, often 8

208 PHOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

inches wide, and the whole plant is much more silky, and often densely
chaffy. Divisions of the perianth rather broader than in A. Menzi-
esiana, and very little if at all united at the base. (M. & B. 392.)

Juncacece.

494. LuzuLA CAMPESTRis, DC. Fl. Fr. 3, p. 161. (M. & B. 171,
323 ; Remy, 151.)

495. JoiNviLLEA ASCENDENS, Gaud. Bot. Bonite, t. 39, 40. (M.
& B. 330.)

Cyperacece. ,

496. Cyperus track ysanthos, Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. Voy.
p. 99.

497. Cyperus Prescottianus, Hook. «& Arn. 1. c. p. 100.

498. Cyperus caricifolius, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 99. (M. & B.
54, perhaps referable here.)

499. Cyperus multigeps, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 100.

500. Cyperus mucronatus, Rottb. Gram. 19, t. 8, f. 4; Hook. «fe
Arn. 1. c. p. 99. (M. & B. 43 ; Reray, 120.)

501. Cyperus brunneus, Sw. Fl. Ind. Occ. 1, p. 116; Hook. &
Arn. 1. c. p. 99. (M. & B. 14; Remy, 115.)

502. Cyperus polystachyus, Rottb. Gram. 39, t. 11, f. 1. (M. &
B. 70; Remy, 114.)

503. Cyperus pennatus. Lam. 111. 1, p. 114. C canescens, Vahl.
Enum. 2, p. 355. Mariscus albescens, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 415.
(M. & B.; Remy, 118.)

504. Cyperus viscosus, Ait. Kew, 1, p. 79 ; Jacq. Ic. 2, t. 295.

505. Cyperus c^spitosus, Poir. Diet. 7, p. 250 ? ; Hook. & Arn.
1. c. p. 99.

506. Cyperus paniculatus, Rottb. ? Hook. & Arn. 1. c.

507. Cyperus strigosus, Linn. ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c.

508. Cyperus auriculatus, Nees & Meyen, in Linntea, 9, p. 285.

509. Cyperus (Mariscus) Kunthianus. M. Kunthianus, Gaud.
Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 415 ; (M. & B. 324.)

510. Cyperus (Mariscus) phleoides. 31. phleoides, Nees, ex
Steud. Glum. p. 62.

511. Cyperus (Mariscus) Hawaiensis (sp. nov.) : ciilmo trique-
tro laevi basi folioso ; foliis linearibus margine scabris culmum adaequan-
tibus ; involucro 6 - 8-phyllo, foliolis 2 elongatis; spicis ovalibus pluribus
subsessilibus arete congestis vel breviter pedunculatis ; squamis inferi-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 209

*

oribus minimis, mediis triple majoribus 9-nerviis Igevibus, interiorlbus
brevioribus uninerviis. — On the mountains of Hawaii, Maui, and
Kauai. — Somewhat resembling M. phleoides, but smaller, and the
spikes shorter. (M. & B. 246.)

512.t Ktllingia monocephala, Rottb. Gram. p. 13, t. 4. (M.
& B. 23 ; Remy, 123.)

513. Eleocharis obtusa, Schult. Mant. 2, p. 89 ; Gaud. Bot.
Freyc. Voy. p. 414 ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. (M. & B. 27 ; Remy, 128.)

514. Eleocharis palustris, R. Brown. Prodr. p. 244.

515. SciRPUs MARiTiMus, Linn. ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 98. (M. &
B. 69, 230; Remy, 129.)

516. SciRPUS RiPARius, Presl,Rel. Ha^nk. l,p. 192. (M.&B. 25.)

517. FiMBRiSTTLis CTMOSA, R. Br. Prodr. p. 228 ; Hook. & Arn.
1. c. p. 98. (M. & B. 22.)

518. FiMBRisTYLis UMBELLATO-CAPiTATA, Steud. ? A very varia-
ble plant, from Waterlandt Island, Tutuilla, etc., as well as the Hawaiian
Islands. The spikes are always sessile in a head, but the heads are
solitary, or few, or numerous, subtended by 3 - 5 very short (or with
one or two longer) awl-shaped bracts. The squamiB are ovate, acut-
ish, concave, and somewhat keeled ; the styles trifid and the stamens
two ; the achenia are less convex on one side than the other, three-
angled and very obtuse at the apex. Probably not the species quoted,
from which it differs in several particulars, but I am unable to identify
it satisfactorily, though it must be well known.

519. Rhynchospora lavarum, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 415 ;
Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 98. (M. & B. 219 ; Remy, 134.)

520. Rhynchospora thyrsoidea, Nees & Meyen, 9, p. 297.
E. scleroides, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 99. (M. & B. 90 ; Remy, 132.)

521. Cladium leptostachyum, Nees & Meyen, in LinntBa, 9, p.
301, & Rel. Meyen. p. 115. (M. & B. 112.)

522. Baumea Meyenii, Kunth, Enum. p. 314. Vincentia angusti-
folia, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 98. (M. & B. 92 ; Remy, 138.)

523. Vincentia angustifolia, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 417,
non Hook. & Arn. 1. c.

524. Gahnia GaudicHaudii, Steud. Glum. p. 164. Lamprocarya
Gaudichaudii, Brongn. in Bot. Dup. Voy. p. 166. Morelotia gahnice-

formis, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 416, t. 28. — Dr. Hooker, in Fl. N.
Zeal., while, through some oversight, he refers M. gahniceformis to L.
a^m's, Brongn. {Gahnia arenaria. Hook. I.e.), speaks of the Hawaiian
VOL. VII. 27

210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

plant as a different but closely allied species ; as it is. The charac-
ter upon which Brown distinguished the genus Lamprocarya from
Gahnia (that of not having a transversely grooved nut) only throws
the most closely allied species into different genera.

525. Gahnia Beecheyi (sp. nov.) : glaberrima ; culmo tereti laevi ;
foliis linearibus longissimis superne filiformibus reclinatis arete convo-
lutis margine scabris dorso aculeis parvis asperatis ; panicula (10- 12-
poUicari) spicis axillai'ibus (sesqui — bipollicaribus) multifloris ; bracteis
ut foliis ; bracteolis ovato-lanceolatis mucronatis, carina ciliata ; spicu-
lis unifloris ; squamis ovato-lanceolatis acutis, intimis obtusiusculis ;
nuce oblonga obscure trigona flava nitida styli basi cuspidata intus
transverse sulcata, — On mountain ridges at 1,000 to 3,000 feet eleva-
tion. — Apparently most nearly allied to G. schcenoides of Tahiti. (M.
& B. 91 ; Remy, 136 ; Macrae.)

526. Gahnia globosa (sp. nov.) : glaberrima ; culmo tereti Isevi ;
foliis linearibus elongatis culmum superantibus convolutis subtus Itevius-
culis, margine nervis supraque scabris ; spicis globosis axillaribus e spi-
culis (18-25) unifloris arete congestis compositis ; bracteis e basi lata
lanceolatis acuminatissimis ; bracteolis ovato-lanceolatis acuminatis ;
squamis late ovatis orbiculatisve acuminatis, intimis obtusis ; nuce ovata
flava extus longitudinaliter rugosa styli basi cuspidata intus baud sul-
cata.— With the preceding. — At once distinguished by the dense
globose spikes in a short interrupted panicle, and the broadly ovate
squamte. Apparently often gathered by collectors, but by Hooker &
Arnott confounded with 3Iorelotia GahnicBformis, Gaud., and by others
with Lamprocarya affinis, Brongn., &c. Probably identical with a
poor specimen of Seemann's, no. 672, from the Viti Islands, wliich
he has called L. affinis, Brongn. (W. T. Brigham.)

527. Oreobolus furcatus (sp. nov.) : dense pulvinato-csespitosus,
ramosus, foliosus ; foliis basi vaginantibus nervosis dense imbricatis
lineari-subulatis acutis obtusiusculisve rigidis serrulatis ; scapo sulcato
terminal! simplici vel furcato 1 - 4-floro ; bracteis foliosis ; bracteolis
scariosis ; perianthii foliolis ciliatis integerrimis. — On the summits of
the mountains of Maui and Kauai. — Most nearly allied to 0. ohtusan-
gulus, Gaud., from which it differs in its often several-flowered scape, in
the leaves being serrulate, etc. (M. & B. 436 ; U. S. Expl. Exped.)

528. ScLERiA TESTACEA, Nees, 1. c. 9, p. 303. (M. & B. 329.)

529. Carex Commersoniana, Sieb. ex Kunth, Enum. p. 291.
(M. & B. 260, 391.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 211

530. Carex Meyenii, Nees, in Rel. Meyen. p. 123 ; Steud. Glum.
p. 195. (Remy, 141, fide Boott.)

531. Carex Wahuensis, C. A. Meyer, Cyp. Nov. in Mem. Acad.
St. Petersb. 1, p. 218, t. 10; Boott, 111. Gen. Carex, 3, p. Ill, t.
351-354. (M. & B. 328, 331 ; Remy, 145.)

532. Carex ndptialis, Boott, in herb. Gray. (Remy, 142.)

533. Carex Prescottiana, Boott, in Linn. Trans. 20, p. 135, &
111. Gen. Carex, 1, p. 45, t. 115. (M. & B. 325 ; Remy, 148.)

534. Carex festiva, Dewey, in Am. Journ. Sc. 29. (M. & B.
332 ; Remy, 146,)

535. Uncinia Lindletana, Kunth, Enum. 2, p. 526. (M. & B.
437 ; Remy, 140.)

Gra^ninece.

The Grasses being all in the hands of Colonel Munro, I cannot at pres-
ent give a list of them. They show considerable novelty, and a large
proportion are peculiar to the Group. There are about fifty species.

Filices.^

536. Gleichenia glauca. Hook. Sp. Fil. 1, p. 4. Mertensia
glauca, Sw. Syn. Fil. p. 164 & 390 (non Gleichenia glauca, Sw.) ;
Brack. Fil. S. Pacif. Expl. Exped. p. 292. (M. & B. 496.)

537. Gleichenia glabra. Brack. 1. c. p. 292, sub Mertensia.

538. Gleichenia Owhthensis, Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 9. Mertensia
Haivaiensis, (a much better name,) Brack. 1. c. p. 295. (M. & B.
472.)

539. Gleichenia dichotoma. Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 12. Mertensia
dichotoma, Willd. Spec; Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 301 ; Brack. 1. c.
p. 297. (M. & B. 145.)

540. Gleichenia emarginata, Brack. 1. c. p. 297, t. 42. (M. &
B. 495.)

541. CiBOTiUM GLAucuM, Hook. & Am. Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 108,
(excl. syn. Kaulf. & Gaud.) ; Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 82, t. 29, A ; Brack. 1.
c. p. 279. (M. & B. 543 ; Remy, 48.)

* I have to thank Prof. D. C. Eaton, of New Haven, for most kindly rendering
assistance and advice concerning all difficult points in this order. For the deter-
minations and synonymy as here adopted, however, I am alone responsible.

212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

542. CiBOTiTJM Chamissoi, Kaulf. Enum. Fil. p. 230, t. 1, f. 14;
Hook. I. c. 1, p. 83 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 279. Pinonia splendens, Gaud.
Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 369, t. 21. (M. & B. 141.)

543. CiBOTiUM Menziesii, Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 84, t. 29, C. ; Brack.
1. c. p. 280. (M. & B. 511 ; Remy, 50.)

544. Deparia prolifera, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 108 ; Hook. Gen.
Fil. t. 44, B; Hook. Spec. 1. c. 1, p. 84; Brack. 1. c. p. 240. D.
Macrmi, Hook. «fe Grev. Ic. Fil. t. 154. Dicksonia prolifera, Kaulf.
Enum. Fil. p. 225. Cibotium proliferiim, Presl, Tent. Pterid. p.
69, t. 11, f. 10. (M. & B. 151.)

545. Odontoloma Macr^ana, Brack. 1. c. p. 226. Davallia
Macrceana, Hook. «& Arn. 1. c. Referred by Hook, in Spec. Fil. 1,
p. 175 to D. (0.) Boryana, Presl, but it appears to be , sufficiently
distinct. (M. & B. 148.)

546. MiCROLEPiA TENUiFOLiA, Mcttcn. DavalUa tenuifolia, Sw.
Syn. Fil. p. 133, 350; Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 186; Brack. 1. c. p. 248.
D. remota, Kaulf. Enum. Fil. p. 223 ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 108.
(M. & B. 143 ; Remy, 47.)

547. MiCROLEPiA HiRTA, Presl, Tent. Pterid. p. 125 ; Brack. 1. c.
p. 239. Dav. kirta, Kaulf. 1. c. p. 223 ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 108 ;
Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 181. Dicksonia Kaulfussiana, Gaud. Bot. Freyc.
Voy. p. 368?; Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 71 ? (M. & B. 144; Remy, 44, 46.)

547^ MiCROLEPiA POLTPODIOIDES, Presl, 1. c. Dav. polypodioides,
Don; Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 181. Recorded by Hooker as a native of the
Islands, and mentioned by Brackenridge under D. hirta, but I have
seen nothing like it.

548. MiCROLEPiA Mannii, Eaton (sp. nov.) : " caudice repente ;
stipitibus basi fere nudis exarticulatis spithamaeis crassitie pennee cor-
vinge teretibus rhachique atris nitidis ; fronde bipedali anguste lanceo-
lata bipinnata; pinnis triangulari-lanceolatis 2 -3-uncialibus costa tenui
nigrescente instructis ; pinnulis bipinnatifidis ; segmentis ultimis opaco-
viridibus lineari-spathulatis augustissimis venulis singulis donatis, fer-
tilibus apice dilatatis sorumque transverse-oblongum ferentibus sim-
plicibus vel saepe raraum brevem e latere exteriori infra sorum emit-
tentibus ; involucris pallidis basi lata vel semicirculari adnatis. —
Mountains of Waimea, Kauai, 2,000 to 3,000 feet above the sea. —
This Fern is to be placed in the same group with 31. gibberosa {Davallia
gibberosa, Sw.), with which species it agrees pretty well in the position
and form of the sori and involucres, though the black and shining

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 213

stipe and rhacliis and the very narrow segments (about |- of a line
wide) make it at once a very distinct and extremely elegant species."
Eaton, mss. (M. & B. 546.)

549. Cystopteris Douglasii, Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 200; Brack. 1. c.
p. 232. C. Sandioicensis, Brack. 1. c. p. 234. (M. & B. 480.)

550. Adiantum Capillus- Veneris, Linn.; Hook. 1. c. 2, p. 36 ;
Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 404; Brack. 1. c. p. 96. (M. & B. 138.)

551. Pell^a ternifolia, Fee, Gen. Fil. p. 129 ; Hook. 1. c. 2, p.
142. Platyloma ternifolia, Brack. 1. c. p. 94. (M. & B. 262.)

552. Pteris Cretica, Linn. ; Hook. 1. c. 2, p. 159 ; Brack. 1. c. p.
113. (M. & B. 252 ; Remy, 34.)

553. Pteris irregularis, Kaulf. Enum, Fil. p. 189 ; Hook. 1. c.
2, p. 173 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 116. P. alata. Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p.
391, t. 19 ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 107. (M. & B. 162 ; Remy, 35, 36.)

554. Pteris excelsa. Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 388 ; Hook. 1. c.
2, p. 183, t. 136 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 115. (M. & B. 163.)

555. Pteris aquilina, Linn. ; Hook. 1. c. 2, p. 196 ; Brack. 1. c. p
119. P. decomposita, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 393. (M. &. B. 484.)

556. Pteris (Litobrochia) decipiens. Hook. 1. c. 2, p. 209.
Pt. pedata, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 107; Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 384.
Doryopteris pedata, Brack. 1. c. p. 103 " as far only as the specimens
from the Sandwich Islands are concerned." Hook. 1. c. (M. & B.
136.)*

557. Pteris (Litobrochia) decora, Hook. 1, c. 2, p. 210. Dory-
opteris decora, Brack. 1. c. p. 103. (M. «fe B. 253.)

558. Sadleria ctatheoides, Kaulf. Enum. Fil. p. 1 62 ; Hook. &
Arn. 1. c. p. 107. Blechnum Fontanesianum, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy.
p. 397, t. 15 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 133. Bl. Kaulf ussianum, Gaud. Bot.
Bonite, t. 78. (M. & B. 155 ; Remy, 33.)

559. Sadleria pallida, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. pp. 75 & 107. El.
pallidum, Brack. 1. c. p. 133. El. Soideytianum, Gaud. Bot. Bonite, t.
134. (M. & B. 188 ; Remy, 32.)

560. Sadleria squarrosa. El. squarrosum, Gaud. Bot. Bonite,
t. 2, f. 1-6. El. polystichoides. Brack. 1. c. p. 134. — These Ferns

* Pellaa geranicB/oUa, Fee, is recorded by Hooker, 1. c. 2, p. 133, as a native of
the Hawaiian Islands ; but I presume he intends to correct that when he says on p.
209, " This I had at one time believed to be identical with P. geranicefolia," &c. I
have never seen, nor do I know of P. geratiicefolia occurring at the Hawaiian
Islands.

214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

appear to be sufficiently distinct. The first two species are decidedly
arborescent, the trunk of S. pallida being often 6 feet high, while the
whole plant is often 12 or 15 feet high, and of a much more erect
manner of growth than S. cyatheoides. S. squarrosa, on the contrary,
is diminutive in comparison with the two others, usually having but a
very small trunk-like caudex, or none at all. I have seen specimens
not over a foot high, including caudex and all, in luxuriant fructification.

561. DooDiA KuNTHiANA, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 401, t. 14;
Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 107; Brack. 1. c. p. 137. (M. & B. 165;
Remy, 30.)

562. LiNDS^A (Diellia) erecta, Brack. 1. c. p. 218, t. 31, sub
Diellia. (M. & B. 483.)

563. LiNDS^A (Diellia) falcata, Brack. 1. c. p. 219, t. 31, sub
Diellia.

564. LiNDS^A (Diellia) pumila. Brack, 1. c. sub Diellia.

565. AsPLENiUM (Thamnopteris) Nidus, Linn.; Hook. 1. c. 3,
p. 77. Neottopteris Nidus, Brack. 1. c. p. 175. (M. & B. 137.)

566. AsPLENiUM OBTUSATUM, Forst. Prodr. Ins. Aust. p. 80 ;
Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 96. Var. obliquum, Hook. f. Fl. Ant. p. 108,
Fl. N. Zeal. 2, p. 33. A. obliquum, Forst. 1. c. ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p.
106 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 154. (M. & B. 169.)

566^ AsPLENiUM LUCiDUM, Forst. 1. c. p. 80; Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 98.
— It is not improbable that a form of the last species (if the two are
really distinct) has been taken for this, in referring it to the Hawaiian
Islands. Menzies is, so far as I know, the only authority for this
habitat.

567. AsPLENiUM GEMMiFERUM, Schrad. Gott. Gel. Anz. 1818, p.
916; Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 99. Darea Jlaccida, /3. Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p.
107.

568. AsPLENiCM ENATUM, Brack. 1. c. p. 153, t. 21 ; Hook. 1. c. 3,
p. 106. (M. & B. 485.)

569. AsPLENiDM Kaulfussii, H. Mann, non Schrad. A. proten-
sum, Kaulf. Enum. Fil. p. 167, a. 1826 (non Schrad. a. 1818, in Gott.
Gel. Anz. p. 916) ; Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 106, adnot. ; Brack. 1. c. p. 153.
Perhaps this is what Hooker refers to under A. falcaium when he
credits it as " very small, whole plant not 4 inches high," to the Ha-
waiian Islands. — It is with some hesitation that I have altered this
name, but the protensum of Schrader has six years the precedence of
that of Kaulfuss. The species under consideration appears to be

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 215

known to very few botanists, and to be thought of somewhat doubtful
existence by Hooker, 1. c. p. 106. (M. & B. 571.)

570. AsPLENiUM ERECTUM, Bory ; Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 126, which see
for synonymy. Var. proliferum, Hook. Fil. Exot. t. 72. A. pavoni-
cum, Brack. 1. c. p. 150. (M. & B. 186 ; Remy, 23.) Var. subpin-
NATiFiDUM, Hook. (M. & B, 173 pro parte, 490.)

571. AsPLENiUM RESECTUM, Smith, Ic. Ined. t. 72 ; Hook. & Grev.
Ic. Fih t. 114; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 106 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 149 ; Hook.
1. c. 3, p. 130. (M. & B. 168 ; Remy, 25.)

572. AsPLENiuM Trichomanes, Linn.; Hook. 1. c. p. 136. A.
densum, Brack. 1. c. p. 151, t. 20. (M. & B. 257 ; Remy, 22.)

573. AsPLENiUJi MONANTHEMUM, Linn. ; Brack. 1. c. p. 151, t. 20,
f. 2; Hook. 1. 0. 3, p. 140. A. Menziesii, Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil. t.
100 ; Brack, h c. p. 151. (M. & B.)

574. AsPLENiUM FRAGILE, Presl, Tent. Pterid. p. 108 ; Hook. Ic.
PI. t. 932 ; Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 144. A. rhomhoideum, Brack. L c. p. 156,
t. 21, f. 2.

575. AsPLENiUM CAUDATUM, Forst. Prodr. Ins. Aust. p. 80 ; Hook.
1. c. 3, p. 152.

576. AsPLENiUM HORRiDUM, Kaulf Enum. Fil. p. 175; Hook. &
Arn. 1. c. p. 106; Brack. 1. c. p. 158; Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 153, t. 193.
(M. & B. 158.)

577. AsPLENiuM CONTIGUUM, Kaulf. Enura. Fil. p. 175 ; Hook. &
Arn. 1. c. p. 106; Brack. 1. c. p. 158; Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 156, t. 194.

A. filiforme, Kaulf. 1. c. ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. ; Brack. 1. c. In a
specimen in our collection some fronds bear pinnae but 7 lines long by
6 lines wide, while others from the same root have pinnjE 2^ inches
long and but 5 lines wide. (M. «fe B. 156, 160, 280.)

578. AsPLENiUM FALCATUM, Lam. ? A Fern, probably distinct
from A. falcatum, which I have not been able to identify satisfactorily.
(M. «& B. 514.)

579. AsPLENiUM FURCATUM, Thunb. Prodr. Fl, Cap. p. 172 ;
Brack. 1. c. p. 162 ; Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 165. (M. & B. 261 ; Remy, 27.)

580. AsPLENiUM NiTiDUM, Sw. Syn. Fil. pp. 84, 280 ; Hook. 1. c.
p. 172; A. cristatuni, Brack. 1. c. p. 163, t. 21, f . 3 ? (non Wall.) A.
insiticum, Brack, pro parte. (M. & B. 167, 191, 515.)

581. AsPLENiDM SPATHULiNUM, J. Sm. in Hook. Journ. Bot. 3, p.
408; Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 170. A. insiticum, Brack, pro parte. (M. &

B. 264, 477; Remy, 31.)

216 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

582. AsPLENiuM ACUMINATUM, Hook. & Am. 1. c. p. 106; Brack.
1. c. p. 164 ; Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 183, t. 206. (M. & B. 494.)

583. AsPLENiUM Adiantum-nigrum, Linn.; Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 187.
Var. Gaudichaudianum, Hook. 1. c. 3, p. 188. A. Adiantum-
nigrum, Brack. 1. c. p. 320. A. patens, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p.
320. (M. & B. 259 ; Remy, 36.)

584. AsPLENiUM DissECTUM, Brack. 1. c. p. 170, t. 24; Hook. 1. c.
3, p. 189. (M. & B. 478, 572.)

585. AsPLENiuM Macr^i, Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil. t. 217 ; Brack.
1. c. p. 159. (M. & B. 173 pro parte, 549 ; Remy, 24.)

586. AsPLENiuM STRiCTUM, Brack. 1. c. p. 168, t. 23, f. 1 ; Hook.
1. c. 3, p. 200. A. patens. Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 106 (non p. 274).

587. AsPLENiuM DEPARioiDES, Brack. 1. c. p. 172.

588. AsPLENiuM PoRiETiANUM, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 327, t.
13 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 175. (M. & B. 265.)

589. AsPLENiUM MULTisECTUM, Brack. 1. c. p. 174. (M. & B.)

590. AsPLENiuM Sanwichianum, Metten. Asplen. p. 197. Athy-
r?'i<m, Presl, Epim. Bot.

591. Aplenium arborescens, Metten. Fil. Hort. Lips, p. 78.
Perhaps the ^s^)Z. diplazioides, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 107, will claim
rank as a good species after all, as there is a Diplazioid Fern which is
by no means aborescent.

592. Asplenium polypodioides, Metten, 1. c. — I quote this name
and the last, to represent what are probably two species of Diplazioid
Ferns from the Islands, but I am not satisfied that the determinations
are correct. They are numbered 166 & 172 in our collection.

593. AspiDiUM aculeatum, Sw. ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 18. Var. This
seems never to have been collected on the Hawaiian Islands before.
We found it on the Western base of Mauna Loa, in woods in Kona,
Hawaii, at an elevation of 5,000 or 6,000 feet. (M. & B. 258.)

594. AsPiDiuM Haleakalense, Brack. 1. c. p. 204, t. 28 (sub
Polysticho) . I cannot at all agree with Hooker in referring this very
well marked Fern to A. aculeatum. (M. & B. 481.)

595. AspiDiUM (Cyrtomium) carytoideum, Wall. Cat. n. 376 ;
Hook. «&; Grev. Ic. Fil. t. 69 ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 41 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 184.
(M. & B. 487.)

596. AsPiDiuM (Sagenia) cicutarium, Sw. in Schrad. Journ.
1803, 2, p. 279 ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 49. Aspid. apiifoliicm, Schk. Fil. p.
128, t. 36, B. ? ; Brack. 1. c. p. 182. Nephrodium apiifoUum, Hook.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 217

& Arn. 1. c. p. 313 ! Aspidium sinuatum, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p.
343. I have specimens from 6 inches long, and nowhere truly pin-
nate, to others 2 or 3 feet long, and tripinnatifid or tripinnate, the
segments varying much in shape. (M. & B. 184.)

597. Aspidium Hudsonianum. Nephrodium, Brack. 1. c. p. 189,
t. 25. This is referred by Hooker, 1. c. 4, p. 72, to A. extensum, Blume.
(M. & B. 153.)

598. Aspidium cyatheoides. Nephrodium, Kaulf. Enum. Fil. p.
234 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 189 ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 76, t. 241, A. Polystiehum
Dubreuillianum, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 333, t. 9. (M. & B. 152 ;
Remy, 13.)

599. Aspidium unitum, /3 hirsutum, Metten. in Ann. Mus. Lugd.-
Bat. 1, p. 230. A. resiniferum, Kaulf. Nephr. resiniferum, Hook. &
Arn. 1. c. p. 105 ; Bi'ack. 1. c. p. 185. Polyst. propinquum, Gaud. Bot.
Freyc. Voy. p. 330. — It is in vain that I have tried to unravel the rest
of the synonymy of this species ; it however appears to be both the
N. propinquum & unitum of R. Br. Prodr. p. 148, and not N. unitum,
Sieber, in Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 81. (M. & B. 269 ; Remy, 20, 21.)

600. Aspidium patens, Sw. Syn. Fil. p. 49. Nephrodium, Hook.
1. c. 4, p. 95.

601. Aspidium globuliferum. Lastrea globuUfera, Brack. 1. c.
p. 194. Nephrodium, Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 96.

602. Aspidium Filix-mas, Sw. 1. c. p. 55. Nephrodium, Rich. ;
Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 116. Lastrea truncata, Brack. 1. c. p. 195, t. 27. Var.
PALEACEUM. (M. & B. 255.)

603. Aspidium latifrons. Brack. 1. c. p. 196. Nephrodium,
Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 138. (M. & B. 189, 195, 196.)

604. Aspidium rubiginosum. Lastrea, Brack. 1. c. p. 201. Ne-
phr odium, Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 143. N. Fijiense, Hook. 2d Century of
Ferns, t. 67.

605. Aspidium squamigerum. Nephrodium, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p.
106 ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 144. Lastrea squamigera. Brack. 1. c. p. 198.
(M. & B. 505.)

606. Aspidium glabrum, Metten. Lastrea glabra, Brack. 1. c. p.
200. (M. & B. 266, 185 pro parte.)

607. Aspidium ? An undetermined species. (M. & B.)

608. Nephrolepis exaltata, Schott ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 152 ;
Brack. 1. c. p. 211. Nephrodium exaltatum. Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy.
p. 336. (M. & B. 142 •„ Remy, 43.)

VOL. VII. 28

218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

609. Phegopteris Honolulensis. Pohjpodium, Hook. 1. c. 4, p.
254 (sub nom. Hillebrandi ; vide Hook. 1. c. p. 288, adnot.)

610. Phegopteris crinalis. PoJypodium, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p.
105 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 15 ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 266. (M. & B. 502.)

.611. Phegopteris unidentata. Polypodium, Hook. & Arn. 1. c.
p. 105 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 17 ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 267. (M. & B. 185 pro
parte, 501, 592.)

612. Phegopteris Sandwicensis. Polypodium, Hook. & Arn.
1. c. p. 105 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 17 ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 267. (M. «fe B. 591.)

613. Phegopteris Keraudreniana. Polypodium, Gaud. Bot.
Freyc. Voy. p. 362, t. 7; Brack. 1. c. p. 15 ; Hook. 1. c. .4, p. 268.
Var. ^ Hook. 1. c. (M. & B. 278.)

614. Phegopteris procera. Polypodium, Brack. 1. c. p. 14, t.
3 ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 269. — Hooker's var. /3 of the last species is so
entirely intermediate between the simplest form of P. Keraudreniana
and the present Fern, as to render it altogether probable that they pass
into one another, as he supposes. (M. & B. 508.)

615. Phegopteris microdendron, Eaton, mss. Polypodium
Sandwicensis, Hook. I. c. 5, p. 5 (non Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 267.) Stegno-
gramma Sandwicense, Brack. 1. c. p. 26. (M. & B. 476.)

616. Polypodium pseudo-grammitis. Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. 4,
345 ; Hook. «& Arn. 1. c. p. 103, t. 21, B ; Brack. 1. c. p. 3 ; Hook. 1.
c. 4, p. 165. (M. & B. 180.)

617. Polypodium Hookeri, Brack. 1. c. p. 4; Hook. 1. c. 4, p.
171. P. setigerum, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p, 103, t. 21, A., non Blume?
(M. & B. 482.)

618. Polypodium serrulatum, Metten. Polypod. p. 32 ? ; Hook.
1. c. 4, p. 174? P. minimum, Brack. 1. c. p. 5, t. 1. Xiphopteris
Jamesoni, Hook. 2d Cent, of Ferns, t. 14? — The Hawaiian Fern
has a different appearance from the West Indian and South Ameri-
can one. (M. & B. 550.)

619. Polypodium subpinnatifidum, Blume, Enum. ; Hook. 1. c.
4, p. 177. P. Haalilioanum, Brack. 1. c. p. 5. (M. «& B. 178.)

620. Polypodium Adenophorus, Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 104, t.
22; Brack. 1. c. p. 8; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 195. P. pendidum, Gaud.
Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 349 (non Sw.). Adenophorus pinnatijtdus, Gaud.
1. c. p. 365. (M. & B. 283.)

621. Polypodium sarmentosum, Brack. 1. c. p. 8, t. 2, f. 3;
Hook. 1. c. p. 195. (M. & B. 200.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 219

622. PoLTPODiUM PELLUCiDUM, Kaulf. Enum. Fil. p. 101 ; Gaud.
Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 356 ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 103 ; Hook. Ic. PI. t.
944 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 10 ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 206. Var. bipinnatifidum ;
Hook. Ic. PI. t. 495. P. myriocarpum, Hook. Ic. PI. t. 84. (M. &
B. 179.)

623. PoLYPODiUM (Adenophorus) htmenophtlloides, Kaulf.
Enum. Fil. p. 118; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 228. Adenophorus, Hook. &
Grev. Ic. Fil. t. 176. A. minutus, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 365, t.
8, f. 3. (M. & B. 276.)

624. PoLYPODiUM (Adenophorus) tamariscinum, Kaulf. Enum.
Fil. p. 117 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 12 ; Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 228. a. Adenopho-
rus Tamarisci, Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil. t. 175. A. hipinnatus, Gaud.
Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 365, t. 8, f. 2 ; Hook. & Grev. 1. c. t. 174. ^. A.
tripinnatijidus, Gaud. 1. c. p. 365, t. 8, f. 1. P. tripinnatijidum,
Brack. 1. c. p. 13. (M. & B. 198 ; Remy, 15, 16.)

625. PoLYPODiUM (Adenophorus) tripinnatifidum, Presl. P.
Hlllebrandii, Hook. 1. c. 4, p. 228, t. 279, A? (M. & B. 199.)

626. PoLYPODiuM (Adenophorus) abietinum, Eaton (sp. nov) :
" parvum, delicatulum, glandulis clavatis rubris conspersum, caudice
paleaceo brevi repente ; rhachi flexuosa subcapillacea ; frondibus
ovato-oblongis pinnatis ; pinnis oblongis ad costam capillaceara pinna-
tisectis; segmentis 9-15 anguste spathulatis venulam unicam ad
apicem soriferam excipientibus ; soris latitudinem segmentorum multo
excedentibus. — Hawaii (Brackenridge, mixed with P. hymenophyl-
loides) ; Oahu, or trees 3,000 feet above the sea (D. D. Baldwin) ;
Hanalei, Kauai (M. & B.). — Fronds 1-3 inches high, very delicate,
apparently bipinnate, the pinnules less than a line long, and about one
sixth of a line broad, the sorus near the end, and nearly three times
the width of the pinnule. Perfectly distinct from P. hymenophylloides,
and much more delicate than P. tamariscinum, from which its hairlike
flexuous rachis will also distinguish it." Eaton, mss.

627. PoLYPODiUM atropunctatum, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p.
346 ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 103. Pleopeltis elongata, Kaulf. Dryna-
ria elongata, Brack. 1. c. p. 42. — Hooker, 1. c. 5, p. 57 unites this and
many other supposed species under P. loriforme, Wall. (M. & B.
177 ; Remy, 5.)

628. PoLYPODiUM Spectrum, Kaulf. Enum. Fil. p. 94 ; Hook. &
Arn. 1. c. p. 103 ; Hook. 1. c. 5, p. 74. Drynaria Spectrum, J. Sm. ;
Brack. 1. c. p. 46. Polypodium Thouinianum, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy.
p. 345, t. 5, f. 1. (M. & B. 154.)

220 PROCEEDINQS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

629. Gymnogramme Javanica, B1. Fil. Jav. p. 95, t. 41 ; Hook.

I. c. 5, p. 145. G. pilosa, Brack. 1. c. p. 22, t. 4. (M. & B. 486.)

630. ViTTARiA RiGiDA, Kaulf. Enuin. Fil. p. 193 ; Brack. 1. c. p.
61 ; Hook. 1. c. 5, p. 184. V. plantaginea, Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil. t.
187 ; Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 382. (M. & B. 146.)

631. ACKOSTICHUM CONFORME, Sw. Syii. Fil. p. 10 & 192, t. 1,
f. 1 ; Hook. 1. c. 5, p. 198. A. cemulum, Kaulf. Enum. Fil. p. 63 ?
^laphoglossum cemulum, Brack. 1. c. p. 71. (M. & B. 507.)

632. AcROSTiCHUM MiCRADENiUM, Fee, Acrost. p. 43, t. 8, f. 1 ;
Hook. 1. c. 5, p. 216. Elaphoglossum nitidum, Brack. 1. c. p. 70, t. 9.
Elaphoglossum pellucidum. Gaud. Bot. Voy. Bonite, t. 79, f. 5 - 7 ?
(M. & B. 544.)

633. AcROSTiCHUM SQUAMOSUM, Sw. in Schrad. Journ. 1800, 2, p.

II, & Syn. Fil. p. 10; Hook. 1. c. 5, p. 239. A. splendens, Bory, in
Willd. Spec. 5, p. 104; Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 303; Hook. &
Arn. 1. c. p. 103. A. crassifolium, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 303 ?
Elaphoglossum splendens, Brack. 1. c. p. 68. (M. & B. 493.)

734. ACROSTICHUM (Olfersia) gorgoneum, Kaulf. Enum. Fil.
p. 63 (non Bl.) ; Hook. 1. c. 5, p. 254. Elaphoglossum gorgoneum.
Brack. 1. c. p. 74. (M. & B. 286.)

635. ACROSTICHUM (Chrysodium) reticulatum, Kaulf. Enum.
Fil. p. 64; Brack. 1. c. p. 81 ; Hook. 1. c. 5, p. 267. Elaphoglossum
reticulatum, Gaud. Bot. Voy. Bonite, t. 79, f. 1-4. (M. «& B. 182.)

636. Hymenophyllum recurvum. Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p.
376; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 109;. Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 104, t. 37, C;
Brack. 1. c. p. 269. (M. & B.)

637. Hymenophyllum lanceolatum. Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 109 ;
Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 94, t. 34, B; Brack. 1. c. p. 263. (M. & B. 551.)

638. Hymenophyllu3i obtusum, Hook. & Arn, 1. c. p. 109 ;
Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 93, t. 33, D ; Brack. 1. c. p. 263. (M. & B. 281.)

639. Trichomanes parvulum, Poir. ex Kaulf. Enum. Fil. p. 260,
fide Brack. 1. c p. 250. T. saxifragoides, Presl ? (IM. & B. 548.)

640. Trichomane.s radicans, Sw. Syn. Fil. p. 143?; Hook. 1. c.
1, p. 125?; Brack. 1. c. p. 254? T. Sandwicense, v. d. Bosch. (M. &
B. 164.)

641. Trichomanes meifolium, Bory, in Willd. Spec. 5, p. 509 ;
Hook. 1. c. 1, p. 137 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 259. (M. «fe B. 275.)

642. Trichomanks Draytonianum, Brack. 1. c. p. 252, t. 36.
(M. & B. ; Reuiy, 53.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866, 221

643. Tkichomanes ? An apparently undescribed species,

but not fruiting, and therefore the genus doubtful. (M. & B. 545.)

644. OrHiOGLOSsuM ellipticum. Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil. t. 40, A;
Hook. Bot. Misc. 3, p. 217 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 314.

645. Ophioglossdm concinnum. Brack. 1. c. p. 315, t. 44.

646. Ophioglossum pendulum, Linn, ex Sw. Syn. Fil. p. 170;
Hook. & Arn, 1. c. p. 102; Brack. 1. c. p. 316. (M. & B. 139;
Remy, 60.)

647. BoTRYCHiuM suBBiFOLiATUM, Brack. 1. c. p. 317, t. 44. (H.
Mann.)

648. Marattia alata, Sw. Syn. Fil. p. 168; Hook. & Arn. 1. c.
p. 102; Brack. 1, c. p. 311. Stibasia Douglasii, Presl, Suppl. Tent.
Pterid. p. 16. (M. & B. 271 ; Remy, 57.)

649. Schiz^a australis, Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 296; Brack.
1. c. p. 302. S. palmata, Montagne, Bot. Voy. Astrol. & Zelee, t. 4.
f. Z. sine descr. (M. & B. 475.)

LycopodiacecB.

650. PsiLOTUM TRiQUETRUM, Sw. Syn. Fil. p. 187; Hook. & Arn.
Bot. Beech. Voy. p. 102 ; Brack. Fil. U. S. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. p.
319 ; Spring, in Mem. Acad. Brux. 24, p. 269. Bernhardia dichotoma,
Willd. ; Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 290. (M. & B. 140 ; Remy, 65.)

651. PsiLOTUM COMPLANATUM, Sw. 1. c. p. 188 & 414, t. 4, f. 5;
Spring, 1. c. p. 271 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 319 ; Hook. & Arn. 1. c. p. 102.
Bernhardia complanata, Willd. (M. & B.)

652. Lycopodium polytrichoides, Kaulf. Enum. Fil. p. 6 ;
Spring, 1. c. p. 32, & 15, p. 73. Brack. 1. c. p. 323. L. verticilla-
tum, Spring, 1. c. 15, p. 46 (pro Ins. Haw.). (M. & B. 549.)

653. Lycopodium varium. Hook. fil. Bot. Ant. Voy. p. 115 (ex
parte) ; Spring, 1. c. 24, p. 24, non Spring, 1. c. 15, p. 57. L. sulci-
nervium, Brack. 1. c. p. 322 ; Spring, 1. c. 15, p. 39. (M. & B. 147 ;
Remy, 73.)

654. Lycopodium pachystachyon. Spring, in Gaud. Bot. Voy.
Bonite, t. 34; Spr. in Mem. Acad. Brux. 15, p. 66, and 24, p. 29;
Brack. 1. c. p. 326. L. phyllanthon, Hook, and Arn. 1. c. p. 102 ;
Spring, 1. c. 15, p. 73. (M. & B. 135.)

655. Lycopodium nutans. Brack. 1. c p. 327. (M. & B. 150.)

656. Lycopodium Phlegmaria, Linn., var., or perhaps a distinct
species, as it differs in a few particulars. (M. & B. 506.)

222 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

657. Ltcopodium fastigiatum, R. Br. Prodr. 1, p. 163; Spring,
1. c. 15, p. 88, & 24, p 41. L. heterophyllum, Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil.
t. 113 (non Wilkl.) ; Spr. 1. c. 15, p. 88 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 330.

658. LYCOroDiuM vendstulum, Gau^J. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 285,
t. 22 ; Spring, 1. c. 15, p. 84 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 329.

659. Lycopodium cernuum, Linn.; Spring, ]. c. 15, p. 79, «fe
24, p. 37. L. curvatum, Bl. Enura. PI. Jav. 2, p. 266; Gaud. Bot.
Freyc. Voy. p. 284 (non. Svv.) ; Brack. 1. c. p. 325 (non. S\v.). (RL
& B. 176 ; Remy, 68.)

660. Ltcopodium Haleakal^, Brack. 1. c. p. 321, t. 45.

661. Ltcopodium erubescens, Brack. 1. c. p. 320, t. 45.

662. Ltcopodium volubile, Forst. Prodr. Ins. Aust. p. 86, n.
482 ; Spring, 1. c. 15, p. 105, & 24, p. 49.

663. Selaginella arbuscula. Spring, 1. c. 24, p. 183 ; Brack.
1. c. p. 332. Lycopodium Arbuscula, Kaulf. Enum. Fil. p. 19 ; Gaud.
Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 288 ; Hook. & Arn. I.e. p. 102. (M. & B. 174.)

664. Selaginella Springii, Gaud. Bot. Voy. Bonite, t. 12;
Spring, 1. c. 24, p. 184.

665. Selaginella Menziesii, Spring, 1. c. 24, p. 185. Lycopo-
dium Menziesii, Hook. & Grev. Enuna. Fil. n. 131 ; Hook. & Arn.
1. c. p. 102 ; Brack. 1. c. p. 333. Lycopodium Arhiscida, Hook. &
Grev. Icon. Fil. t. 200, non Kaulf. (M. & B. 175.)

666. Selaginella deflexa, Brack. 1. c. p. 332, t. 45. (M. & B.
474.)

Hydropterides.

667. Marsilea villosa, Kaulf. Enura. Fil. p. 272 ; Brack. 1. c. p.
341. M. vestita, Hook. & Grev. Ic. Fil. t. 159. M. quadrifolia.
Gaud. Bot. Freyc. Voy. p. 406. M. hirsuta, R. Br. Prodr. p. 167?
(Remy, 63.)

The Mosses and Hepaticoe may form the subject of some future
communication.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 223

LiCHENES.* (By Edw. Tuckerman.)

Tx'ib. I. Parmeliacei, Fr.

Fam. 1. Usneei.

SiPHULA PiCKERiNGii, Tuckerm. (Bot. U. S. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp.)
Appears scarcely referable to S. torulosa (Thunb.) to which Nylander
(Lich. exot.) has referred it; but possibly to S. pteruloides, Nyl. 1. c,
a Peruvian Lichen. — On the earth, among mosses, Oahu (Pickering),
Tuck. 1. c.

Ramalina Manni (sp. nov.) : thallo subfoliaceo depresso lacero-
laciniato glauco, subtus nigricante, laciniis lacunosis margine eroso-den-
ticulatis, fertilibus suberectis ; apotheciis podicellatis margine evanido.
Sporae octonse in thecis, parvae, diblastse, curvulae, diam. 2 - 2| plo lon-
giores, incolores. — Trunks, Makawao, East Maui (Mann). — Exhibits
a close approach to the foliaceous thallus of Getraria ; and the de-
pressed habit and differently-colored sides are new to the present
genus, with which it is none the less associated by the characters of
fructification. Tlife rather short, lacunose, and, especially when fertile,
ascendant lobes are about one quarter of an inch in diameter ; the apo-
thecia reach the same size. Spores .013 -.014'"'" long.

Ramalina l^vigata, Fr. — Trunks, Mountains of Kauai (Mann).

Ramalina calicarts (L.) Fr., var. fraxinea, Fr. — Trunks, Oahu
(Mann). Var. parinacea, Scha^r. ? R. complanata, Ach. ? —
Hawaii (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c. Var. inflata. R. injlata. Hook.
— Trees, Kaala Mountains, Oahu (Mann).

UsNEA BARBATA (L.) Fr., var. FLORIDA. Fr. — Trunks, Hawaiian
Islands, Nyl., Tuck. ; as also in the form microcarpa (Pers., e Gau-

* The list is meant to include all that is known of the Lichen-Flora of the
Islands. This makes part only of a larger Flora, the limits of which arc scarcely
settled ; and is not to be understood without constant reference to what has been
determined of the latter. Montague and Jardin have illustrated portions of the
wider field ; and Dr. Nylander has combined their results with important ones of
his own, in his Lichenes Polynesienses, which makes the second part of his Lichenes
exotici (Ann. Sci. Nat. 4, 11). Besides this enumeration, reference is made in
. what follows to the list of Lichens (prepared by the present writer) in the Botany
of the U. S. S. Pacif. Expl. Exp. It is scarcely to be doubted that other Lichens,
cited as Polynesian, have been determined by European Lichenists in specimens
from the Sandwich Islands, and among these some of those here credited to Mr.
Mann may well occur : but the catalogue will still show how large a proportion of
our knowledge, especially in the crustaceous groups, is due entirely to his re-
searches; — directed, as these were, by previous study of North American Lichens.

224 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

dichaud) Nyl. 1. c. ; (Mann.) Var. hirta f. rubiginea. — Trees,
Mountains of Kauai (Mann), Var. ceratina, Schser. — Trunks,
Hawaiian Islands (Remy), Nyl. I. c.

Fam. 2. Parmeliei.

TlIELOSCHISTES CHRYSOPHTHALMUS, Var. FLAVICANS, Wallr.

Oahu & Hawaii (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c. ; mountains of Kauai and
Maui (Mann).

Parmelia perlata (L.) Ach., var. olivetorum, Ach. — Ha-
waiian Islands (Hillebrand). Var. ciliata, Schaer. — Hawaiian Isl-
ands, Nyl. 1, c. ; (Mann).

Parmelia perforata (Jacq.) Ach. — Oahu (Meyen), Herb.
Berol. Hawaii (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c. ; (Mann).

Parmelia l^vigata (Sm.) Ach. — Trunks, Hawaii (Pickering),
Tuck. 1. c. ; Waialua Mountains, Oahu (Mann).

Parmelia cervicornis, Tuck. — Trunks, Hawaii (Pickering),
Tuck. 1. c. ; East Maui, 7,000 feet alt. (Mann).

Parmelia tiliacea (Ehrh.) Floerk. — A fragment perhaps refer-
able here. — Oahu (Mann).

Parmelia pertusa (Schrank.) Schger. — Hawaiian Islands ; Nyl.
1. c. — Oahu (Mann).

Parmelia caperata (L.) Ach. — Hawaiian Islands (Remy), Nyl.
1. c. ; Mouna Kea, Hawaii (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c.

Parmelia conspersa (Ehrh.) Ach. — Rocks, East Maui and
Mauna Kea, Hawaii (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c. ; Hualalai, Hawaii, 6,000
feet alt. (Mann).

Physcia speciosa (Wulf, Fr.) var. hypoleuca, Ach. f. hypo-
MELA. — Trees, mountain of "West Maui (Mann). Var. obesa.
P. obesa (Pers.) Nyl. P. papulosa, Mont. — Mountain of West
Maui (Mann). Var. leucomela, Eschw. — Hawaii (Pickering),
Tuck. 1. c. ; (Hillebrand).

Physcia stellaris (L.) var. astroidea. Tuck., forma. — Lava,
Oahu (Mann).

Physcia picta (Sw.) Nyl. — Trunks, common (Mann).

Pyxine cocoes (Sw.) Nyl. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann).

Pam. 3. Umhilicariei.

Umbilicaria vellea (L.) Fr., e hahitu. — Rocks, region of
Sophora, Mauna Loa, Hawaii, infertile (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 225

Fam. 4. Peltigerei.

Sticta crenulata (Hook.) Del. — Trunks, Hawaiian Islands
(Gaud.), Nyl. 1. c. ; West Maui and other islands, abundant (Mann).

Sticta orygm^a, Ach. S. flavicans Tayl. S. Durvillei, var.
Jlavicans, Nyl. — Trees, mountain of West Maui (Mann).

Sticta aurata (Sm.) Ach. — Trees, Oahu (Mann).

Sticta Mougeotiana, Del., Nyl. — Hawaiian Islands (Gaud.),
Nyl. 1. c.

Sticta crocata (L.) Ach. — Walls of crater. East Maui and
Hawaii (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c. ; mountain of West Maui, fertile
(Mann).

Sticta argyracea (Bor.) Del., Nyl. — Oahu (Mann).

Sticta quercizans (Michx.) Ach., Nyl. — Near Hilo, Hawaii
(Pickering), Tuck. 1. c. ; Oahu (Mann). Var lutescens, Nyl. —
Hawaiian Islands (Gaud.), Nyl. 1. c. ; Oahu (Mann).

Sticta Ambavillaria (Bor.) Del. — Hawaiian Islands (Reray),
Nyl. 1. c. ; Hawaii, Oahu, and West Maui, 3,000 - 5,000 feet alt.
(Mann).

Sticta filix (Sw.) S.JiUcina, Ach. — Oahu (Mann).

Nephroma tomentosum (Hoffm.) Koerb., var. Helveticum,
Fr. — Trunks, Oahu, and mountain of West Maui (Mann).

Nephroma l^vigatum, Ach., var. rufum, Babingt. — Trunks,
Oahu (Mann).

Peltigera rufescens, Hoffm. — Hawaiian Islands (Remy), Nyl.
1. c. Walls of crater, East Maui (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c. ; Hawaii
(Mann).

Peltigera polydactyla, Hoffm. — Hawaiian Islands (Remy),
Nyl. 1. c. ; Hawaii, and Kaala Mountains, Oahu (Pickering), Tuck. 1.
c. ; Oahu (Mann).

Erioderma unguigerum (Bor.) Nyl. — Trees, Oahu (Mann).

Fam. 5. Pannariei.

Pannaria molybd^a (Pers.) Coccocarpia parmelioides, Tuck,
in Wright, Lich. Cub. — Trees, Oahu (Mann).

Pannaria lurida (Mont.) Nyl. — Trees, Hawaiian Islands
(Gaud.), Mont. Bot. Voy. Bonite (Mann). Var. hypomela. —
Hawaiian Islands (Hillebrand ; Mann).

Pannaria pannosa (Sw.) Del. — Trees, Hawaiian Islands (Gaud.),

VOL. VII. 29

226 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Nyl. 1. c. (Hillebrand). Common on trunks at low and medium
altitudes (Mann).

Pannabia rubiginosa (Thunb.) Del. — Hawaii (Pickering), Tuck.
1. c. ; on the earth, summit of Hualalai, Hawaii, 8,000 feet alt., and on
trunks (Mann).

Pannaria nigrocincta (Mont.) Nyl. — Oahu (Mann).

Fam. 6. Lecanorei.

DiRiNA repanda (Fr.) Nyl. — On lava, Oahu (Mann).

Placodium ciNNABARiNUM (Ach.) Anz. — On lava, Oahu (Mann).

Placodium aurantiacum (Lightf.) Nseg. & Hepp. — Hawaiian
Islands (Remy), Nyl. 1. c.

Placodium albidellum (sp. nov.) : thallo areolato-verruculoso
glaucescente ; apotheciis minutis sessilibus demum lutescentibus, disco
piano pulverulento, margine obtuso. SporiB octon:© in thecis, medi-
ocres, polari-diblastae, diam. 2-3 plo longiores, incolores. — On lava,
Oahu (Mann). — The rather obscure yellowish tinge at length observ-
able in the simple exciple is the only external feature associating this
lachen with the group to which its spores refer it.

Placodium Brebissonii (Fee, sub Xecit/ea). Zeca?2ora, Nyl. —
Hawaiian Islands (Remy), Nyl. 1. c.

Placodium spadiceum (sp. nov.) : thalli granulis mox isidiomor-
pho-elongatis adscendentibus ramulosis dein stipatis cinereo-fuscescenti-
bus ; apotheciis mediocribus biatorinis sessilibus, disco piano castaneo
nudo, margine tenui elevato pallidiori subintegro, thallino obsolescente.
Sporae octonae in thecis, mediocres, ellipsoidere, polari-tetrablastcE, diam.
2-3 plo longiores. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann). — Agrees with the last
species in exhibiting the highest known modification of its type of
spore, but differs remarkably in the isidioid evolution of its thallus,
and in the colors. The North American P. camptidium is perhaps
best comparable in the latter respect.

Lecanora pallescens (L.) Schfer. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann).

Lecanora glaucoma, Ach. — Volcanic rocks, Oahu (Mann).

Lecanora subfusca (L.) Ach. — Oahu (Mann).

Lecanora granifera, Ach. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann).

Lecanora punicea, Ach. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann).

RiNODiNA sophodes (Ach.) — Volcanic rocks, Oahu (Mann).

RiNODiNA mamillana (sp. nov.) : thallo subtartareo rimoso-areo-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 227

lato pallide stramineo, hypothallo nigricante ; apotlieciis minutis sessili-
bus lecanorinis, margine obtuso mox fusco-nigricante, disco concolore
papillate, demum rugoso-plicatis. Sporge octonje in thecis, parvie, obtu-
sissime ellipsoidete, diblastoe, diam, subduplo longiores, fuscae. — Volcanic
rocks, Oahu (Mann). — Apothecia at length rather elevated, and cu-
riously contorted ; illustrating, both in this respect and in their decol-
oration, those of Umbilicaria.

Pertusaria velata (Turn.) Nyl, Scand., the states resembling
Lindig, Lich. N. Gran. u. 2,G58. — Trees, Waialua Mountains, Oahu
(Mann).

Pertusaria Wulfenii, DC. — Volcanic rocks, Oahu (Mann).

Pertusaria leioplaca (Ach.) Schser. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann).

Gyalecta lutea (Dicks.) Tuck. — Hawaiian Islands (Remy),
Nyl. 1. c. ; Oahu, Lanai (Mann).

Urceolaria cinereo-c^sia (Sw.) Ach. — On the earth, Kaala
Mountains, Oahu (Mann).

Urceolaria actinostoma, Pers. — Volcanic rocks, Oahu (Mann).

Thelotrejia calvescens, Fee. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann).

Thelotrema terebratum, Ach. — Trees, Oahu (Mann).

Thelotrema cavatum, Ach., Nyl., var. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann).
* Thelotrema piluliferum (sub-sp. nov.) : thallo subtartareo con-
tiguo 1. aequabili 1. verruculoso glaucescente albidove cum hypothallo
confuso; apotheciis confertis superficialibus globularibus subclausis,
excipulo exteriori apice poro pertuso propi'ium integrum fuscum
fovente, disco concavo pallido. Sporas octonce, cocciformes, muriformes
(ser. transv. dein 6, long. 2-3) diam. subduplo longiores, incolores. —
Trees, Oahu (Mann). — With quite the aspect, in some of the speci-
mens, of a Pertusaria, not remote from conditions of P. velata. The
Lichen is evidently closely allied to Thelotrema pachystomum, Nyl.
(Wright, Lich. Cub. n. 131; Lindig, herb. N. Gran. n. 55, 88, coll.
2dae^ from which it especially differs in its cocciform, muriform-pluri-
locular spores ; the spores of the other being regularly quadilocular,
and affording no indications of ulterior development. But both alike
of these decolorate spore-forms belong, we believe, to the colored type ;
and in fact one of them expresses what is exactly the younger condi-
tion of the other. The discrepancy in shape and in the measurements
between the spores of the Oahu Lichen, and those of the West Indian
and South American ones appears to be due entirely to the distention
which so commonly accompanies the evolution of the muriform stage.

228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

It appears therefore likely, the general agreement between these plants
beino- undeniable, that they express only conditions of the same species.

Thelotrema leucomelanum, Nyl. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann).

Thelotrema Bahianum, Ach. — Trunks, mountain of "West
Maui, and Oahu (Mann).

Thelotrema Auberianum, Mont. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann).

Thelotrema lepadodes, Tuck. — Trees, Oahu (Mann.)

Trib. II. Lecideacei, Fr.
Fam. 1. Cladomei.

Stereocaulon ramulosum (Sw.) Ach., f. proxlmum. «S'. proxi-
mum, Nyl. — Walls of crater. East Maui (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c. ;
Kaala Mountains, Oahu (Mann). — The greater or less elongation
of the nodules in the gonimous layer of the cephalodia scarcely af-
fords a satisfactory difference.

Stereocaulon mixtum, Nyl. — Hawaiian Islands (Gaud.), Nyl.
1. c. ; mountains of Oahu (Andersson), Th. Fr. — The series of forms,
— including the East Indian S. piluUferum, Th. Fr., the oldest and
most significant name, — brought together here by Dr. Nylander, has
been shown by him to be marked by a curious difference in the struc-
ture of the gonimous layer of the cephalodia. In other respects there
is little to distinguish these forms from S. ramulosum ; and even the
dwarfed and otherwise noticeable lichen of the Himmalayah (Herb.
Hook. ; Hook. & Thorns, herb. Ind. Or.) well compares with a simi-
larly small condition (Oahu, Mann ; comp. S. claviceps, Th. Fr., Nyl.)
of the latter.

Stereocaulon pilophoroides. Tuck. — Hawaiian Islands (Hil-
lebrand).

Cladonia pyxidata (L.) Fr. — East Maui (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c.

Cladonia gracilis, var. elongata, Fr. — Mauna Loa, Hawaii
(Pickering), Tuck. 1. c.

Cladonia fimbriata (L.) Hoffm. — Hawaii (Pickering), Tuck. 1.
c. Var. adspersa. Tuck. — Hawaii (Mann).

Cladonia furcata (Schreb.) Fr. — Hawaii (Pickering), Tuck.
1. c. ; Waialua Mountains, Oahu (Mann).

Cladonia squamosa, Hoffm. — Hawaii (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c.

Cladonia rangiferina (L.) Hoffm. — Hawaiian Islands, Nyl. ;
Mauna Loa, Haivaii, and Kaala Mountains, Oahu (Pickering), Tuck.
1. c. ; Mountain of West Maui, etc. (Mann).

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 229

Cladonia angustata, Nyl. — Hawaiian Islands (Remy), Nyl. 1.
c. ; Hawaii and Lanai (Mann).

Cladonia MACiLENTA (Ehrh.) Hoffm. — Hawaiian Islands, Mon-
tague ; Mountain of West Maui (Mann).

Cladonia muscigena, Eschw. — Hawaiian Islands (Remy), Nyl.
1. c. ; Hawaii (Pickering), Tuck. I. c. ; West Maui (Mann).

Fam. 2. Lecideei.

B^OMYCES FUNGOiDES (Sw.) Acli. — Mountain of West Maui,
on the earth (Mann).

BiATORA AURiGERA (F^e). — Trunks, Oahu (Mann).

BiATORA CYRTELLOiDEs (Nyl.) — Hawaii (Remy), Nyl. 1. c.

BiATORA TRiSEPTATA (Hepp.) Mont. & V. d. Bosch. — On the
earth, Mountain of West Maui (Mann).

BiATORA RUBELLA (Ehrh.) Rabenh., var. {spadicece, aff.) —
Trunks, Waialua Mountains, Oahu (Mann). Var. incompta, Nyl.
— Hawaiian Islands, Nyl. 1. c.

Heterothecium Taitense, Mont. — Trunks, Oahu, and West
Maui, very common (Mann).

Heterothecium Domingense -(Pers.) H. gyrosum, Plot. —
Trunks, Oahu (Mann).

Heterothecium leucoxanthum (Spreng.) H. tricolor, Flot.,
Mont. — Hawaiian Islands, Nyl.; Oahu, and East Maui (Mann).

Lecidea trachonoides, Nyl. Lich. N. Caled., e descr. — Trunks,
Mountain of West Maui, and Oahu (Mann).

BuELLiA PARASEMA (Ach.) Kocrb. — Mountain of West Maui
(Mann). Var. (ERUGinascens, Nyl. — Trees, Oahu (Marin). —
Var. ENDOCOCCiNA, Tuck. — With the last (Mann).

BuELLiA ATROALBA (Ach., Plot.) Th. Fr. — Volcanic rocks, Oahu
(Mann).

Trib. III. Graphidacei, Eschw., Fr., Nyl.

Fam. 1. Lecanactidei.

Lecanactis premnea (Ach.) Tuck. — Trunks, Waialua Moun-
tains, Oahu (Mann).

Fam. 2. Opegraphei.

Opegrapha subcentrifuga, Nyl. — Trunks, Hawaii (Remy),
Nyl. 1. c.

230 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Opegrapha atra, Pers. — Trees, Hawaii (Remy), Nyl. 1. c. ;
Oaliu (Mann).

Opegrapha lentiginosa, Lyell. — Trees, Oahu (Mann).

Graphis scripta (L.) Ach., emend. — Trees, Oahu (Mann). —
Var. assimilis. G. assimilis, Nyl. — Oahu (Mann).

Graphis discdrrens, Nyl., var. Kaalensis : apotheciis crassi-
oribus dendritico-ramosis ; sporis (octonis) majoribus 8-blastis. —
Trunks, Kaala Mountains, Oahu (Mann). — A larger plant than the
Lichen (Hong Kong, Wright) described by Nylander, and with rather
the aspect of conditions of G. vernicosa, Fee.

Graphis elegans (Sw.) Ach. f. striatula. G. striatula, (Ach.)
Nyl. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann). Var. substriatula. G. substria-
tula, Nyl. — With the last (Mann).

Graphis rigida (Fee) Njl. — Trees, Oahu (Mann).

Graphis fulgurata, Fee, e descr. — Trees, Oahu (Mann). —
Small, with a little of the aspect of G. discurrens, a, the colored spores
of which species also look towards the section represented by G. den-
dritica ; but approaching more evidently to the latter, with which it
was arranged by Fee, in its open disk.

Graphis dendritica, Ach., excip integro. — Trees, Waialua
Mountains, Oahu ; and Hawaii (Mann). Var. inusta. G. inusta,
Ach,, Nyl. — With the last, Oahu (Mann). Var. leucocheila. G.
leucocheilce (Fee) Nyl. prox. accedens. — Trees, Kaala Mountains,
Oahu (Mann).*— The Oahu Lichen last named has the habit of lai'ge
forms of G. scalpturata, Ach., in which the thalline margin is conspicu-
ous (Lindig, Lich. N. Gran. n. 54, coll. 2'^"*) but the spores of G. den-
dritica ; differenced here, as commonly in the Carolina Lichen, by an
occasional passage of one or more of the sporoblasts into two, — the
beginning of the muriform-multilocular stage. And it certainly sug-
gests that G. scalpturata (compare especially the specimen of this in
Lindig's n. 752 with that of G. dendritica in n. 2,563 of the same
collection) is only a condition (the ultimate one as respects sporal de-
velopment) of G. dendritica ; analogous to G. scripta, var. sophistica.
(G. sophistica, Nyl.)

Graphis patellula (Meissn.) Nyl. in litt. Opegrapha, Meissn.
in Fee Suppl., Lecanactis, Nyl. Enum. Var. paterella. Leca-
nactis, Tuck, in litt. — Trees, Oahu (Mann). — Spores (as in the
Carolina Lichen) 8 - 10-locular. Those of Fee's Lichen are described
by him as 15 - 18-locular.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 231

Graphis frumentaria, Fee, var. ciilorocarpa, Nyl, G. chloro-
carpa, Fee. — Trunks, Oabu (Mann).

Graphis tumulata, Nyl., e descr. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann). —
Spores brown, cocciform, submuriform (transverse series of sporo-
blasts four ; longitudinal, one to tbree), as described in the cited spe-
cies, from New Caledonia.

Graphis oscitans (sp. nov.) : thallo tenui contiguo sequabili albo;
apotbeciis innato-prominulis simplicibus subramosisve flexuosis, mar-
ginibus excipuli profunde canaliculati nigricantis tenuibus, dein hianti-
bus nudis, cum thallino crassiusculo concretis, hypothecio incolore.
Sporse octonos in thecis, mediocres, oblongge, submuriformes (ser. tr.
6-8, long. 1-2) diam 3-3|plo longiores, fuscescentes. — Trunks,
Oahu (Mann). — With the aspect of the closed apothecia of G. dimor-
pha, Nyl., and agreeing in size ; but not assuming the habit of G. den-
dritica ; and better comparable with species of the present group.

Graphis grammitis. Fee. — Trunks, Waimea, Kauai, and moun-
tain of West Maui (Mann). — One of the sporoblasts now divided
into two ; an indication of the true type of this decolorate spore.

Graphis radiata, Nyl. — Trees, Oahu (Mann). — One of the
specimens resembling Fissurina nitida, M. and v. d. Bosch. Lich. Jav.,
which I take to be the Java Gr. radiata of Nyl. Eimm., — the first
named authors not having had the advantage of comparing the Lichen
with Eschweiler's Diorygma nitidum ; — and the other smaller, and
more like G. radiata as published in Lindig's New Granada Lichens.
The spores of the forms named scarcely differ. There is still another
of these debased types of Graphis (Oahu ; Mann) intermediate in the
size of the apothecia between the coarser and slenderer forms just
noticed, but otherwise similar, which is remarkably differenced by the
colored (cocciform and regularly quadrilocular) spores ; suggesting G.
heterospora, Nyl., of Bourbon : the only described instance of colora-
tion in the present section (Fissurina).

Fam. 3. Glyphidei.

Chiodecton perplexum, Nyh — Trees, Kaala and Waialua
Mountains, Oahu (Mann).

Gltphis heteroclita, Mont. — Trees, Kaala and Waialua Moun-
tains, Oahu (Mann).

Glyphis Achariana, Tuck. Suppl. 1858. G. cicatricosa and G.
favulosa, Ach., and G. conjluens, Mont. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann).

232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Fam. 4. Artlioniei.

Arthonia cinnabarina (DC.) "Wallr. ; var. adspersa, Nyl. — •
Trunks, Hawaiian Islands (Remy), Nyl. 1. c.

Arthonia carib^a (Ach.) Nyl., forma. — Trees, Oahu (Mann).

Arthonia interducta, Nyl. — Trees, Oahu (Mann). — Spores
5-7-locular, but all the narrower sporoblasts broken (in these speci-
mens constantly, so far as observed) into smaller ones, and the spores
becoming thus submuriform-multilocular ; the large terminal sporoblasts
remaining entire.

Arthonia platygraphidea, Nyl., e descr. — Trees, Oahu (Mann).
— Answering well to the described Mexican lichen, and remarkable
for its fusiform, 12-15-locular spores in oblong sporesacks, like those
of some Opegrapha.

Arthonia astroidea, var. Swartziana, Nyl. — Trees, Hawaii
(Remy), Nyl. 1. c.

Trib. IV. Caliciacei.

AcoLiUM PROTRUDENS. Tyloplwron, Nyl. — Trunks, Waialua
Mountains, Oahu (Mann). — The separation of this type, as of the
Californian saxicoline species, from Acolium, on account of the dis-
tinct, excipular relation of the thallus to the proper exciple, appears
to be precluded by the structure, as well of other recognized mem-
bers of the group (as A. ocellatum (Flot.) Koerb.) as especially of A.
tigillare. These new forms may then be regarded as affording only
a better exhibition of the highest view of the generic type, as sug-
gested by the older ones. And ennobled thus, as by the lobulate
thallus of A. Californiciim, the present genus may claim perhaps
no uncertain place in the closest affinity to the fruticulose Acro-
scyphus. The Hawaiian specimens agree best with Tylophoron pro-
trudens, Nyl., as exhibited in Lindig's N. Granada Lichens, the
apothecia being larger than in the T. moderatum of the same work ;
but the latter (Lindig, herb. n. 2,653, 2,891, and 38, coll. 2^'"') is
clearly inseparable, in my view, from the former. In 2,891 {T. mod-
eratum) the spores also are smaller than in 2,633 (T. protrudens), but
in no. 38 though the apothecia are reduced, the spores cease to afford
any available difference.

Acolium Havtaiense (sp. nov.) : thallo tenuissimo glaucescente
cum hypothallo albido confuso ; apotheciis mediocribus elevatis lecano-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 11, 1866. 233

roideo-depressisve, excipulo proprio in thallocle crasso margine radiato-
rugoso immerso, disco piano purpureo-nigro immarginato. Sporse octo-
n£e in thecis, minutae, obtusissime ellipsoideae, diblastse, fuscae. — Trunks,
Waialua Mountains, Oahu (Mann). — The interior exciple (white, inner
layer of the hypothecium) appears often (as more or less observable
also in A. protrudens) externally, making a membranaceous, lacerate-
denticulate border to the disk ; or once again, as in Thelotrema, this
border disappears, and is represented by a white, powdery, at length
irregularly cracked veil which conceals the here concave disk. Proper
exciple pale, so far as observed, immersed in a thalline wart, the thick
border of which is, more or less distinctly, radiately cleft, or striate.
Apothecium reaching a line in diameter. Spores averaging only one
third of the size of the largest ones of the preceding species, or in
length scarcely more than .006"°" ; those of the Hawaiian A. protru-
dens exceeding, at length, .018°'™.

AcoLiuM Javanicum (Mont, and v. d. Bosch) Stizenb. — Trunks,
Oahu (Mann).

Calicium tub^forme (Mass.) Sphinctrina^ Mass. S. microce-
phala, Nyl. — On thallus of Fertusaria sp., Oahu (Mann).

Trib. V. Verrucariacei (Fr. 1821, Fee), Stizenb.

JFam. 1. Endocarpei.

NoRMANDiNA JuNGERMANNi^ (Del.) Nyl. — Growing on Sticta
cremdata in the mountains of West Maui, and on Pannaria molyhdcea
in Oahu (Mann).

Fam. 2. Verrucariei.

Trypethelium pallescens, Fee, Nyl. — Trees, "Waialua Moun-
tains, Oahu (Mann). *

Ptrenula planitjscula. Verrucaria, Nyl., e descr. — Trees,
Oahu (Mann). — Not unlike V. insidata, Fee (determ. Nyl.), but with
spores of twice the dimensions.

Pyrenula Cinchona (Ach. e Nyl. N. Gran.) Verr. prostans,
Mont. — Trees, Oahu (Mann). — Specimens also occur from the same
region, belonging apparently to the little cluster of forms which Dr.
Nylander (under his Verr. subprostans, Pyrenoc. p. 56) has regarded
as possibly reducible to a single species. In the size of the spores
these specimens approach rather to V. subprostans, but in shape to V.

VOL. VII. 80

234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

viridiseda, Nyl. The wliole cluster approaches very closely, it should
seem, to P. Ginchonce.

Pyrenula planorbis (Ach.) — Trees, "Waialua Mountains, Oahu
(Mann).

Pyrenula diluta (Fee). — Trees, Oahu (Mann).

Pyrenula nitida, Ach. var. nitidella, Floerk. — Trunks, Oahu
(Mann). — A Lichen also occurs with a white crust, but otherwise
allied to this, which I take for P. CincJionoe, Fee, included by Ny-
lander under his Verr. nitida.

Pyrenula makginata. Hook. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann). Var.
Santensis, Nyl. Verrucaria, Tuck, in litt. — With the last, from
which it differs in its smaller apothecia, and cocciform spores.

Pyrenula leucostoma, Ach. — Trunks, Oahu (Mann). — Identi-
cal with a Japanese Lichen determined by Dr. Nylander.

Pyrenastrum astroideum (Fee) Eschw. — Trunks, Oahu
(Mann). Var. duplicans, Nyl. — "With the last (Mann).

Lichenes Collemacei.

Leptogium tremelloides (Ach.) Fr. — Hawaiian Islands (Z.
mana?2Mm, Mont., e Nyl.) Nyh — Oahu (Mann). Var. laciniatum.
Tuck. — Oahu (Pickering), Tuck. 1. c. ; (Mann).

Leptogium saturninum (Dicks.) Nyl. — Trees, Ulapalakua, East
Maui (Mann).

Leptogium chloromelum (Sw.) Nyl. — Oahu (Mann).

Leptogium phyllocarpum (Pers.) Nyl. — Oahu (Mann).

, Addenda et Corrigenda.

John Miers, in the Annals and Magazine of Natural History, 19, n.
109, Jan. 1867* sustains Loureiro's genus Nephroica as distinguished
from Cocculus by the cleft petals and other characters, and his genus
Hohpeira, distinguished from both the others by the broad, emarginate
petals and the peculiar perforated putamen, etc. He then arranges
the Hawaiian species (of which he distinguishes three) thus : —

Nephroica ovalifolia, Miers. Cocculus ovalifolius, DC. C.
umbellatus, Steud. Menispermum ovalifolium, Vahl., and refers to
a specimen in herb. Brit. Mus., and to Barclay's, 1271. According to
him, it also grows in Corea.

Nephroica Ferrandiana, Miers. Ferrandia okifolia, Gaud.,

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 14, 1866. 235

Gocculus Ferrandianus, Presl. Apparently confined to the Hawaiian
Islands.

HoLOPEiRA CoNCHOPHTLLA., Miers. Coeculus Ferrandianus^
Seem, (non Gaud.) Fl. Vitiensis, and refers to specimens in herb.
Hook. (Hillebrand) and Seemann's n. 2281.

Myonima umhellata, referred as a i^ynonyme to Canthium lucidum,
should, according to the specimens (ex Seemann, Fl. Vitiensis), be i-e-
ferred to a Straussia.

Under number 400, for S. Freyienetianum read S. Freycinetianum.

Under number 312, insert (M. & B. 40) ; 324, insert (M. & B. 305) ;
489, insert (M. & B. 36).

After 422 insert 422^ Euxolus viridis, Moq. 1. c. p. 273. (M.
& B. 67).

Five b^indred and seT-euty-second Meeting.

October 9, 1866. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

Professor Horsford presented a communication on the pop-
ular doctrine that sunlight retards combustion.

Professor Henry presented a communication on the causes
and physical nature of fogs, and on the means of warning
vessels, befogged on our coasts, by sound-signals.

Five hundred and seventy-third Meeting.

November 14, 1866. — Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read letters relative to ex-
changes ; also letters from Professor Noah Porter of Yale
College, Chief Justice Ira Perley of New Hampshire, and Dr.
A. W. Chapman of Apalachicola, in acknowledgment of their
election into the Academy as Associate Fellows.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Mr. Samuel Swett of the Resident Fellows.

The President announced that since the last meeting Mr.
George Peabody had founded an important institution for the

236 PROCEEDnsTGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

advancement of American Archaeology and Ethnology, and
had included the President of this Academy in the trust.
He read the letter and deed of trust from Mr. Peabody, and
suggested that they should be copied into the records.

Professor Agassiz spoke at length upon the great importance
of this new establishment, and offered the following resolu-
tions : —

^^ Resolved, That the documents now presented by the President
relative to the foundation by Mr. George Peabody of a Museum and
Professorship of American Archaeology and Ethnology be entered
upon the records of the Academy.

" Resolved, That the Academy with much satisfaction recognizes the
sagacity and liberality of Mr. Peabody in providing these means and
inducements for the investigation of subjects of esyecial interest to us
as Americans, and of universal interest to all inquirers into the nature
of man and the records of his growth and development.

" Resolved, That the Academy gladly acknowledges, as among the
duties of its President, those which devolve upon him as an ex officio
trustee of Mr. Peabody's foundation."

The resolutions were unanimously adopted.

The Treasurer's accounts for the year ending at the last
Annual Meeting, approved by the Auditing Committee, were
received and ordered to be entered upon the record.

Professor Levering as Chairman of the Committee of Publi-
cation moved a special appropriation of five hundred dollars
to complete the publication of Dr. Storer's Memoir on the
Fishes of Massachusetts ; and the motion was referred to the
Finance Committee.

The following gentlemen were elected members of the
Academy : —

Dr. James D. Whelpley, to be Resident Fellow in Class I.
Section 3.

Dr. Henry W. Williams, to be Eesident Fellow in Class II.
Section 4.

Mr. John M. Batchelder, to be Eesident Fellow in Class I.
Section 4.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: DECEMBER 11, 1866. 237

Mr. William Gray, to be Resident Fellow in Class III.
Section 3.

Dr. James C. White, to be Resident Fellow in Class II.
Section 8.

Mr. J. Eliot Cabot, to be Resident Fellow in Class III.
Section 4.

Mr. William R. Ware, to be Resident Fellow in Class I.
Section 4.

Dr. Frederic H. Hedge, to be Resident Fellow in Class III.
Section 1.

Mr. Charles Dean, to be Resident Fellow in Class III.
Section 3.

Dr. Isaac Ray of Philadelphia, to be Associate Fellow in
Class III. Section 1.

Henry Sumner Maine, to be Foreign Honorary Member in
Class III. Section 1, in place of the late Dr. Whewell.

Professor Peirce presented by title an investigation on
" Linear Algebra."

Five liundred and seventy-fourtli Meeting.

November 21, 1866.. — Special Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Rev. Dr. William Jenks of the Resident
Fellows.

Dr. J. Bigelow read a paper on " Classical and Utilitarian
Studies."

Five hundred and seventy-fiftli Meeting.

December 11, 1866. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read letters relative to ex-
changes.

Dr. Kneeland read a communication on certain fungoid
parasites which grow from the bodies of insects.

238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Mr. G. W. Hill gave an account of the present state of the
Lunar Theory.

Mr. T. S. Hunt presented some theoretical considerations
in explanation of the chemical activity of substances in the
" Nascent State."

Five Iiundred and seventy-sixth. Meeting.

January 8, 1867. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read letters relating to ex-
changes ; also an invitation to the members of this Academy
from the Imperial Mineralogical Society of St. Petersburg,
to attend the fiftieth anniversary of its foundation.

The following communication was presented : —

On the Object and diethod of Mineralogy. By T. Sterry

Hunt, P. R. S.

Mineralogy, as popularly understood, holds an anomalous position
among the natural sciences, and is by many regarded as having no
claims to the rank of a distinct science, but as constituting a branch of
chemistry. This secondary place is disputed by some mineralogists,
who have endeavored to base a natural-history classification upon such
characters as the crystalline form, hardness, and specific gravity of min-
erals. In systems of this kind, however, like those of Mohs and his
followers, only such species as occur ready formed in nature are com-
prehended, and the great number of artificial species, often closely re-
lated to native minerals, are excluded. It may moreover be said, in
objection to these naturalists, that in its wider sense the chemical his-
tory of bodies takes into consideration all those characters upon which
the so-called natural systems of minei'al classification are based. In
order to understand clearly the question before us, we must first con-
sider what are the real objects, and what the provinces, respectively, of
mineralogy and of chemistry.

Of the three gi'eat divisions or kingdoms of nature, the classification
of the vegetable gives rise to systematic botany, that of the animal to
zoology, and that of the mineral to mineralogy, which has for its sub-
ject the natural history of all the forms of unorganized matter. The

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 8, 1867. 239

relations of these to gravity, cohesion, heat, light, electricity, and mag-
netism belong to the domain of physics, while chemistry is the history
of their relations to each other, and of their transformations under the
influences of heat, light, and electricity. Chemistry is thus to mineral-
ogy what biology is to organography, and the abstract sciences, physics
and chemistry, must precede and form the basis of the concrete science,
mineralogy. Many species are chiefly distinguishable by their chemi-
cal activities, and hence chemical characters must be greatly depended
upon in mineralogical classification.

Chemical change implies disorganization, and all so-called chemical
species are inorganic, that is to say, unorganized, and hence really be-
long to the mineral kingdom. In this extended sense mineralogy takes
in not only the few metals, oxides, sulphides, silicates and other salts
which are found in nature, but also all those which are the products of
the chemist's skill. It embraces not only the few native resins and
hydrocarbons, but all the bodies of the carbon series made known to us
by the researches of modern chemistry.

The primary object of a natural classification, it must be remembered,
is not, like that of an artificial system, to serve the purpose of detei'-
mining species, or the convenience of the student, but so to arrange
bodies in genera, orders, and classes as to satisfy most thoroughly nat-
ural affinities. Such a classification, in mineralogy, will be based upon
a consideration of all the physical and chemical relations of bodies, and
will enable us to see that the various properties of a species are not so
many arbitrary signs, but the necessary results of its constitution. It
will give for the mineral kingdom what the labors of great naturalists
have already nearly attained for the vegetable and animal kingdoms.

Oken saw the necessity of thus enlarging the bounds of mineralogy,
and in his Physiophilosophy attempted a mineralogical classification ;
but it is based upon fanciful and false analogies, with but little refer-
ence either to physical or chemical characters, and in the present state
of our knowledge is valueless, except as an effort in the right direc-
tion, and an attempt to give to mineralogy a natural system. With
similar views as to the scope of the science, and with far higher and
juster conceptions of its method, Stallo, in his Philosophy of Nature,
has touched the questions before us, and has attempted to show the
significance of the relations of the metals to cohesion, gravity, light, and
electricity, but has gone no further.

In approaching this great problem of classification we have to exam-

240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

ine, first, the physical conditions and relations of each body, considered
with reference to gravity, cohesion, light, electricity, and magnetism ;
secondly, the chemical history of the body, in which are to be consid-
ered its nature as elemental or compound, its chemical relations with
regard to other bodies, and these chemical relations as modified by
physical conditions and forces. The quantitative relation of one min-
eral (chemical) species to another is its equivalent weight, and the
chemical species, until it attains to individuality in the crystal, is essen-
tially quantitative.

It is from all the above data, which would include the whole phys-
ical and chemical history of inorganic bodies, that a natural system of
mineralogical classification is to be made. up. Their application may
be illustrated by a few points drawn chiefly from the history of certain
natural families.

The variable relation to space of the empirical equivalents of non-
gaseous species, or, in other words, the varying equivalent volume ob-
tained by dividing their empirical equivalent weights by the specific
gravity, shows that there exist in different species very unlike degrees
of condensation. At the same time we are led to the conclusion that
tlie molecular constitution of gems, spars, and ores is such that these
bodies must be represented by formulas not less complex, and with
equivalent weights far more elevated than those generally assigned to
the polycyanides, the alkaloids, and the proximate principles of plants.
To similar conclusions conduce also the researches on the specific heat
of compounds.

There probably exists between the true equivalent weights of non-
gaseous species, and their densities, a relation as simple as that be-
tween the equivalent weights of gaseous species and their specific gravi-
ities. The gas or vapor of a volatile body constitutes a species distinct
from that same body in its liquid or solid state, the chemical formula
of the latter being some multiple of the former, and the liquid and solid
forms themselves often constituting distinct species of different equiva-
lent weights. In the case of analogous volatile compounds, as the hy-
drocarbons and their derivatives, the equivalent weights of the liquid
or solid species approximate to a constant quantity, so that the density
of these species, in the case of homologous or related alcohols, acids,
ethers, and glycerides, is subject to no great variation. These non-gas-
eous species are generated by the chemical union (identification) of a
number of volumes or equivalents of the gaseous species, which num-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 8, 1867. 241

ber varies inversely as the density of the latter species. It follows from
this, that the equivalent weights of the solid and liquid alcohols and fats
must be so high as to be a common measure of the vapor-equivalents
of all bodies belonging to the above-named series. The empirical for-
mula Cii4 Hjio Oi2, which is the lowest one representing the tristearic
glyceride, ordinary stearine, is probably far from representing the true
equivalent weight of this fat in its liquid or solid state ; and if it should
hereafter be found that its density corresponds to six times the above
formula, it would follow that the equivalent of liquid acetic acid, whose
density differs but slightly from that of fused stearine, must have a for-
mula and an equivalent weight about one hundred times that which we
deduce from the density of acetic acid vapor. C4 H4 O4.

Starting from these high equivalent weights of hquid and solid hydro-
carbonaceous species, and their correspondingly complex formulas, we
are prepared to admit that other orders of mineral species, such as oxides,
silicates, carbonates, and sulphides, have formulas and equivalent weights
corresponding to their still higher densities, and we proceed to apply to
these bodies the laws of substitution, homology, and polymerism, which
have so long been recognized in the chemical study of members of the
carbon series. The formulas thus deduced for various native silicates
and carbon-spars show that these polybasic salts may contain many
atoms of different bases, and their frequently complex constitution is
thus explained. In the application of the principle of chemical homol-
ogy we find a ready and natural explanation of the variations, within
certain limits, occasionally met with in the composition of certain crys-
talline silicates, sulphides, etc., from which some have conjectured the
existence of a deviation from the law of definite proportions in what is
but an expression of that law in a higher form. The principle of poly-
merism is exemplified in related mineral species, such as meionite and
zoisite, dipyre and jadeite, hornblende and pyroxene, calcite and arra-
gonite, opal and quartz, in the zircons of different densities, and in the
various forms of titanic acid and of carbon, whose relations become at
once intelligible if we adopt for these species high equivalent weights
and complex molecules. The hardness of these isomeric or allotropic
species and their indifference to chemical agents increase with their
condensation, or in other words vary inversely as their empirical equiv-
alent volume, so that we here find a direct relation between chemical
and physical properties.

It is in these high chemical equivalents of the species, and in certain

VOL. VII. 31

242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

ingenious but arbitrary assumptions of numbers, that is to be found an
explanation of the results obtained by Playfair and Joule in comparing
the volumes of various solid species with that of ice, which they as-
sume to be represented by H O, instead of a high multiple of this for-
mula. The recent ingenious but fallacious speculations of Dr. Mac-
vicar, who has arbitrarily assumed comparatively high equivalent
weights for mineral species, and has then endeavored by conjectures as
to the architecture of crystalline molecules to establish relations between
his complex formulas and the regular solids of geometry, are curious
but unsuccessful attempts to solve some of the problems whose signifi-
cance I have here endeavored to set forth. I am convinced that no geo-
metrical groupings of atoms, such as are imagined by Macvicar and by
Gaudin, can ever give us an insight into the manner in which Nature
builds up her units, which is by interpenetration and identification, and
not by juxtaposition of the chemical elements.

None of the above points are presented as new, though they are all,
I believe, original with myself, and have been from time to time brought
forward and maintained, with numerous illustrations, chiefly in the
American Journal of Science, since March, 1853, when my Essay on
the Theory of Chemical Changes, and on Equivalent Volumes, was
there published. I have, however, thought it well to present these
views to the Academy in a connected form, as exemplifying my notion
of some of the principles which must form the basis of a true miuera-
log-ical classification.

o

Mr. G. W. Hill presented a communication on the Inequali-
ties produced in the Moon's Motion by the secular variation
of the position of the Ecliptic.

Five hundred and se-reuty-seventh. Meeting.

January 30, 1867. — Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read a letter from Professor
A. C. Kendrick of Rochester, New York, in acknowledgment
of his election into the Academy.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of M. Cousin of the Foreign Honorary Mem-
bers.

OF AETS AND SCIENCES : FEBRUARY 26, 1867. 243

Nominations for election into the Academy were presented
from the Council.

In accordance with the recommendation of the Finance
Committee, a special appropriation of five hundred dollars
■was voted for the engraving of plates to complete the publi-
cation of Dr. Storer's Memoir on the Fishes of Massachusetts.

The following gentlemen were elected members of the
Academy : —

Dr. Gustavus Hay of Boston, to be Resident Fellow in
Class I. Section 1.

Dr. Richard M. Hodges of Boston, to be Resident Fellow
in Class H. Section 4.

Mr. Charles S . Peirce of Cambridge, to be Resident Fellow
in Class HI. Section 1.

Five Iiundred and seventy-eiglitlx Meeting.

February 12, 1867. — Adjourned Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary presented letters from Mr.
C. S. Peirce and Dr. R. M. Hodges in acknowledgment of
their election into the Academy.

The Committee appointed at the Special Meeting, May 8,
1866, to consider and report on the accommodation of the
Academy, were discharged.

Professor Levering reported from the Rumford Committee
that the Medals voted to Mr. Alvan Clark were ready for
presentation to him.

Five hundred and seventy-nintli Meeting.

February 26, 1867. — Special Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Dr. Henry Bryant of the Resident Fellows,
and of Dr. Alexander Dallas Bache of the Associate Fellows.

Professor Levering reported from the Rumford Committee

244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

the completion of the Medals awarded to Mr. Alvan Clark,
and placed them in the hands of the President. In present-
ing them to Mr. Clark, the President addressed the Academy
as follows : —

Gentlemen of the Academy : —

Three quarters of a year have passed since, by your unanimous vote,
the Rumford premium was awarded to Mr. Alvan Clark. It will be
very proper, thei'efore, now that the gold medal and its silver duplicate
are before us, briefly to rehearse the grounds upon which the Rumford
Committee recommended, and you decided, to mark by these insignia
your appreciation of the service which Mr. Clark has rendered to as-
tronomical science in the perfecting of its most important instrument of
research, the lens of the refracting telescope.

The two great classes of telescopes, reflectors and refractors, labor
under difficulties of construction peculiar to each ; and one class or the
other has enjoyed the preference of astronomers, according to the de-
gree in which these difl&culties have respectively been overcome.

In the refracting telescope the obstacles are, — 1. the want of homo-
geneousness in the glass ; 2. the dispersion of the substance ; and 3.
imperfection in the figure of the lens. If the first of these difficulties
has been reduced to a minimum by a selection of the best materials,
then the artist has to contend with the other two. He must give to the
four surfaces of his compound achromatic lens such shapes as will pro-
duce the maximum of distinctness and the minimum of discoloration in
the image of the object seen through it. After all has been accom-
plished which can be expected from a faithful adherence to general
formulae, the last degree of perfection will depend on the skill of the
artist.

Now, just where most artists have supposed that their work was done,
our associate has thought that his had only begun. Selecting either a
real star, or for greater convenience substituting a fictitious one, he now
enters upon an examination of his lens, ring by ring, ascertaining by an
ingenious test which annuli have too long and which too short foci.
The lens is then dismounted and retouched at the defective places, is
examined and retouched again and again, until his simple test assures
him that every portion will converge the rays to the same focus. The
long underground tunnel which Mr. Clark has excavated on his
grounds, communicating with his workshop, is an original contrivance

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : FEBRUARY 26, 1867. 245

for providing a fictitious star, for converting day into night, so that he
may examine and repolish at any hour ; it also provides a sufficient
space filled with homogeneous air, much better adapted for nice obser-
vations than the external atmosphere. All this is what is meant by
Mr. Clark's method of local correetion, for which the Rumford premium
was awarded. The late Mr. Fitz of New York also used a method of
local correction. But he retouched only one surface of his compound
lens, and was therefore obliged to leave it with such irregulai-ities as
must result from the local working ; as it could not be returned to the
tool upon which it was originally polished, without rapidly losing all
the advantage gained by the local treatment.

Whenever Mr. Clark dismounts his lens and retouches it, he sepa-
rates the component parts, and applies his local correction to each of
the four surfaces. These will tend to fall back to the primitive figure,
but, while the elasticity of the tools and the lens together suffice to pre-
vent a very rapid change, under Mr. Clark's skilful and delicate hand-
ling he allows for and guards against this by a slight excess of local
working. It is, therefore, to this nice, artistic handling that our asso-
ciate's lenses owe, in no small degree, their pre-eminence.

The justification of the Academy's award is found in the importance
and the originality of this method of local correction.

Its importance is assured and measured by the fact that by it a lens
of 18 to 20 or even 24 inches' aperture is as manageable under con-
struction now, as 9 to 12 or 15 inch lenses lately were without it.
Thi'ough this invention and the consummate skill by which it is turned
to account, supremacy in this high art, which lingered long in London
under the influence of the Dollands, and then deserted its ancient home
for Munich, has now confessedly taken up its abode with us in Mr.
Clark's unpretending but most efficient establishment at Cambridge.

The originality of the invention will hardly be questioned when it is
known that Foucault, as recently as 1858, tried something of the same
kind on the single surface of a reflector, with fine results, and then sug-
gested its application to lenses, in honest ignorance that this was what
Mr. Clark had been doing for ten years, and in the most delicate and
refined way.

In the administration of Count Rumford's trust, the Academy could
take notice only of such work as comes within its specific terms, and
could adjudge his premium solely in regard to the absolute merit of
some particular invention. It could take no account of the difficulties

246 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

and disadvantages under which Mr. Clark has struggled on, — without
early scientific training, without access to any of the gathered experi-
ence which is handed down in optical workshops, without having seen
before any, even the commonest, process which he had to execute, with
little means of knowing what had already been done, much less how
it had been done, without even encouragement until after success
achieved made encouragement superfluous, earning by daily toil in one
fine art the means and opportunity of developing his genius in an equal-
ly refined and to us more important one, — we must allow that where
moderate success were highly praiseworthy, the exquisite and unprece-
dented results which our associate has reached are worthy of double
honor. '

Nor could the Academy in its award take cognizance of the well-
known fact that Mr. Clark's skill and success, not to say genius, in
using his telescope are rivalled only by that displayed in perfecting it.
Yet this might fairly have been introduced as testimony. For the
prompt and brilliant discovery of the before invisible companion of
Sirius, and the detection of more than a score of new double stars in
the quarter of the heavens which had been most diligently searched for
them, especially that most delicate of observations in discovering the
companion of v Herculis, having been made by our associate with his
own glasses, and mostly in testing their power, — these should be re-
•ceived as direct witnesses to the importance of his inventions, showing,
as an experienced astronomer has remarked, " that objects of great dif-
ficulty and delicacy may be detected with veri/ perfect telescopes of
smaller size, which have escaped the most diligent scrutiny with far
larger instruments " ; showing also, perhaps, as the same astronomer
suggests, in reference to stars which, after withstanding the Pulkova
fifteen-inch refractor, Mr. Clark proved to be double with his object-
glass of only half that diameter, " that his eye as well as h'is telescope
must possess an exti-aordinary power of definition."

It is a satisfaction to know that, in an art where genius is so rare, it is
sometimes hereditary ; that, in this instance, the sons are the compeers
of the father ; so that, where much has already been secured, still more
may be expected. So that now, as the Academy consigns these medals
to your hands, Mr. Clark, it gives with them not only the heartiest con-
gratulations, but also the wish and hope of your assembled associates
that you may long enjoy the honors you have worthily won ; that you
may add to tliem many other triumphs of skill ; that you and your

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : FEBRUARY 26, 1867. 247

sons with you, and in the course of nature after you, may prolong and
enhance the reputation of the estabhshment at Cambridge port, so that
in future years it may contribute largely, as it now does, to the honor
of the country and the advancement of astronomical research.

Mr. Clark responded in the following remarks : —

Mr. President and Gentlemen of the Academy : —

I know not how I can better express my gratitude for these honors,
than by giving some brief account of the manner in which my efforts
as a working optician were commenced and have been carried on.

Up to 1844, and when more than forty years of age, I had never
witnessed or attempted the grinding of a lens of any description. My
elder son, George B. Clark, then a youth of seventeen, during a school
vacation, sought amusement in casting and grinding small reflectors for
telescopes ; and without any thought or design beyond assisting him to
find interest and instruction in his pastime, I joined him.

After working, and talking with astronomical friends, and consulting
books, until we found that reflectors, even when wrought with utmost
skill, were little sought for, I proposed to the youth to try a refractor ;
but he objected by saying, " The books represent it as a very difficult
thing."

Materials were however procured, and the attempt made, with such
results as to induce a repetition, and finally another, until it became a
settled occupation for us both. Thus it began, as boys' play, and so
far as my own spirits and feelings have been affected by it, it has been
boys' play all through. So I cannot appeal to your sympathies by any
gloomy tale of disappointment or privation.

Hope and courage have been well sustained, and though my circum-
stances were such that I could not go far, unless purchasers for my
lenses could be found, I was fortunately soon able to give them a char-
acter which insured their sale.

There exists among the double stars such a variety, in distances and
magnitudes, that tests for the excellence of telescopes of different di-
mensions are always at hand ; and through them the value of a glass
can be made known, pretty accurately, to a distant correspondent, who
has had experience, and is well versed in such matters.

The evidence must, of course, have more weight if the stars selected
had never found a place in Struve's or any other catalogues, and were
of a character making very sharp defining necessary to exhibit them.

248 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY .

It was in this way the attention of the Rev. W. R. Dawes of Eng-
land was first called to my seemingly incipient, obscure, and humble
labors. I have since sold him five object-glasses, of from seven and a
quarter to eight and a quarter inches' aperture, and his published re-
ports upon their qualities have brought orders enough, for a number of
years past, to secure for me, in making proficiency, the full benefit
of an abundant practice.

The need of sympathy and co-operation from those nearer home,
which was sometimes pressing at the outset, was thus, through the in-
fluence of Mr. Dawes, greatly alleviated.

I never suffered from the lack of good wishes, but a lack of confi-
dence in my ability to prosecute such an art to successful results pre-
vailed for a time among those who had knowledge of my antecedents.

In April, 1860, an order came from the University of Mississippi for
an object-glass of unusual dimensions. In undertaking this it became
necessary for me to remove to some more commodious place than the
one I had previously occupied. In the same month a site was select-
ed, and dwellings and a workshop erected in the course of the ensuing
summer. The material was ordered from Chance & Co. of Bii'ming-
ham, and preparations made for the work.

This lens was completed in the autumn of 1862, when all communi-
cation with Mississippi was cut off. Fortunately they had paid noth-
ing upon it, and J felt at liberty to put it in the market.

Geoi'ge P. Bond manifested much interest in it, visiting me repeat-
edly while my rough proving tube was in such a position that he could
deliberately examine the great nebula in Orion through it ; and he
placed his opinion of it on record, at the next meeting of the visiting
committee, by recommending its purchase for the Cambridge*Observa-
tory, and measures were soon on foot for raising the money. When
the sum of $ 4,500 had been reached, and my expectations were centred
in that direction, I was suddenly and most unexpectedly called upon by
a purchaser from Chicago, with a tender of the full price I was to have
received from Mississippi. With the assistance of my sons I have
since made a mounting for it, and put the instrument up at the Chicago
Observatory, where Professor Saffbrd has it in charge.

It was with this glass that my younger son, Alvan G. Clark, discov-
ered the companion of Sirius, on the first occasion of its being looked
for, and before the star had been in the field three seconds. Through
this business I have been made acquainted with many of the great and

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: MARCH 12, 1867. 249

important facts in astronomy, and the laws of light and vision, branches
wonderfully calculated to arrest and occupy the attention, in certain
stages of mental development, especially when faith in the universality
of God's providence goes with them.

The respect and companionship, in a degree I never could have an-
ticipated, of those who dwell by the fountains of knowledge, have
cheered me ; men whose virtues and accomplishments I can never
think to emulate, and whose envy, if they had any, could not descend
upon me.

Mr. President, I have said nothing of methods. "When first ques-
tioned by the Rumford Committee as to what was original in my mode
of working, I proposed that they should visit my shop, where I could
show and explain to them the course pursued, and they might judge
for themselves of the value or originality of any part of it. They have
done so ; and I accept their decision, trusting the egotism displayed in
this little history of achievements may be excused.

You will not fail to perceive, that, after so many years of hopeful,
cheerful, and patient toil, mingled with no ordinary share of painstak-
ing, a high appreciation on the part of the recipient must follow this
award, as naturally as light comes with the rising of the sun.

Five hundred and eightieth Meeting.

March 12, 1867. — Adjourned Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
necessity of some action for the accommodation of the Academy,
and proposed that a committee be appointed to consider this
subject.

On the motion of Professor Rogers, it was voted, that a
committee of three be appointed, and on the nomination of
the President, Colonel Lyman, Mr. C. M. Warren, and Pro-
fessor C. W. Eliot were chosen.

On the motion of Dr. Clark, this committee were instruct-
ed to inquire concerning the co-operation of other societies
in providing a building for their common accommodation.

The following paper was presented.

VOL. VII. 32

250 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

On an Improvement in Boole's Calculus of Logic. By C. S.

Peirce.

The principal use of Boole's Calculus of Logic lies in its applica-
tion to problems concerning probability. It consists, essentially, in a
system of signs to denote the logical relations of classes. The data of
any problem may be expressed by means of these signs, if the letters
of the alphabet are allowed to stand for the classes themselves. From
such expressions, by means of certain rules for transformation, ex-
pressions can be obtained for the classes (of events or things) whose
frequency is sought in terms of those whose frequency is known.
Lastly, if certain relations are known between the logical relations and
arithmetical operations, these expressions for events can be converted
into expressions for their probability.

It is proposed, first, to exhibit Boole's system in a modified form,
and second, to examine the difference between this form and that
given by Boole himself.

Let the letters of the alphabet denote classes whether of things or
of occurrences. It is obvious that an event may either be singular,
as " this sunrise," or general, as " all sunrises." Let the sign of
equality with a comma beneath it express numei'ical identity. Thus
a == i is to mean that a and h denote the same class, — the same
collection of individuals.

Let a -\r h denote all the individuals contained under a and b tosreth-
er. The operation here performed will differ from arithmetical addition
in two respects: 1st, that it has reference to identity, not to equality;
and 2d, that what is common to a and h is not taken into account twice
over, as it would be in arithmetic. The first of these differences, how-
ever, amounts to nothing, inasmuch as the sign of identity would indi-
cate the distinction in which it is founded ; and therefore we may
say that

(1.) If No a is 6 a^b = a-\-b

It is plain that
(2.) a -jr a == a

and also, that the process denoted by -jr, and which I shall call the
process of logical addition, is both commutative and associative.
That is to say

(3.) a^b=:b^a

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MARCH 12, 1867. 251

and

(4.) ^a-\rl)-Vc=zaJ^{hJ^c).

Let a , h denote the individuals contained at once under the classes
a and b ; those of which a and b are the common species. If a and b
were independent events, a , b would denote the event whose proba-
bility is the product of the probabilities of each. On the strength of
this analogy, (to speak of no other,) the operation indicated by the
comma may be called logical multiplication. It is plain that

(5.) a ,a== a.

Logical multiplication is evidently a commutative and associative
process. That is,

(6.) a ,b== b ,a

(7.) (a,b) ,c = a,{b,c).

Logical addition and logical multiplication are doubly distributive,
so that

(8.) (a-\rb),c = a,c-\rb,c

and

(9-) a,J + c=(a4-c),(J-|rc).

Proof. Let a = a'-\-x-\-i/-{-o

b == b' -]- X -\- z-\- 0

where any of these letters may vanish. These formula compre-
hend every possible relation of a , 5 and c ; and it follows from them,
that

a -{r b == a' -{- b' -\- X -\- y -\- z -\- 0 (a-{rb) ,c = y -[- z -\- o.
But

«j^=Fy + o b,c==z-{-o a,c-\rb,c = y-{-z-\-o .'.(8).
So

a,5==a;-|-o a,b-\rC=zc'-\-x-\-y-\-z-\-o.
But

{a-\rc),{b^c)=pc'-\-x-^y-\-z-^o .-. (9).

252 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Let — be the sign of logical subtraction ; so defined that

(10.) K b -\r X == a X = a — b.

Here it will be observed that x is not completely determinate. It
may vary from a to a with b taken away. This minimum may be
denoted by a — b. It is also to be observed that if the sphere of b
reaches at all beyond a, the expression a -r- b is uninterpretable. If
then we denote the contradictory negative of a class by the letter
which denotes the class itself, with a line above it,* if we denote by v
a wholly indeterminate class, and if we allow [0 -7- 1] to be a wholly
uninterpretable symbol, we have

(11.) a -T- b = V ,a ,b -{- a ,b -\- [0 — l^, ci,^

which is uninterpretable unless

a,b=pO.

If we define zero by the following identities, in which x may be any
class whatever,

(12.) 0 = X -r X =p x — X

then, zero denotes the class which does not go beyond any class, that
is nothing or nonentity.

Let a;b he read a logically divided by b, and be defined by the
condition that
(13.) l{b,x==a x — a;b

X is not fully determined by this condition. It will vary from a
to a -\- b and will be uninterpretable if a is not wholly contained
under b. Hence, allowing [1 ; 0] to be some uninterpretable symbol,

(14.) a',b==a,b-\-v,d,b-\-[^].;0^ a ,b

which is uninterpretable unless

. a , & r=r 0.

Unity may be defined by the following identities in which x may be
any class whatever.
(15.) 1 == a: ; x == a; rx.

Then unity denotes the class of which any class is a part ; that is,
what is or ens.

* So that, for example, a denotes not-a.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: MARCH 12, 1867. 253

It is plain that if for the moment we allow a:b to denote the maxi-
mum value of a;b, then

(16.) X == 1 — X == 0 :x.

So that

(17.) x,(l — x) = 0 x-jrO:x = l.

The rules for the transformation of expressions involving logical
subtraction and division would be very complicated. The following
method is, therefore, resorted to.

It is plain that any operations consisting solely of logical addition
and multiplication, being performed upon interpretable symbols, can
result in nothing uninterpretable. Hence, if (jd -}- X ^ signifies such
an operation performed upon symbols of which x is one, we have

cp-{-Xx = a,x-\-b,(l — x)

where a and b are interpretable.

It is plain, also, that all four operations being performed in any
way upon any symbols, will, in general, give a result of which one
term is interpretable and another not ; although either of these terms
may disappear. "We have then

cpx==i,x-{-J , (1 —x).

We have seen that if either of these coefficients i and j is unin-
terpretable, the other factor of the same term is equal to nothing, or
else the whole expression is uninterpretable. But

<P (1) =F * and cjp (0) =/
Hence
(18.) q>x==<p{l),x-\-cp (0) ,(l—x)

tp (x and y) = qp (1 and l),x ,y -\- cp (1 and 0) , x,y -\-(p (0 and 1) , x , y

-}- 9 (0 and 0) ,x ,y.

(18'.) cpx=(cpil)-\rx), (cp (0) + x)

cp (x and y) == (qp (1 and 1) -\r x -\r §) , ((p (I and 0) -\rx-\ri/),
{<p (0 and 1) + :r -jr y) ,(9 (0 and 0) -jr a; -}r y).

Developing by (18) a: — y, we have,

x — y==(l — l),a;,y+(l — 0),x,§-{- (0 -r l),x,y+(0 -^ 0),x,y.

So that, by (11),

(19.) (l^l) = y 1-0 = 1 0 - 1===[0 -,-1] 0-0 = 0.

254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Developing x;y in the same way, we have *

x;y==l;l,x,y-\-l;0,x,y-{-0;l,x,y-\-OiO,x,§.
So that, by (14),
(20.) 1;1=f1 1;0==[1;0] 0;1 = 0 0^0 = 1;.

Boole gives (20), but not (19).

In solving identities we must remember that

(21.) (a-\rb) — b=za

(22.) (a -r b) -{r b == a.

From a -r b the value of h cannot be obtained.

(23.) {a ,b) -^ b =z a

(24.) a;b ,b=pa.

From a ; b the value of b cannot be determined.

Given the identity gj a; = 0.

Required to eliminate x.

cf (I) = X ,cf {I) + {I - x) ,cp {\)

cf (0) =x ,cp {0) -^ {I - x) ,q> {0).

Logically multiplying these identities, we get

g. (1) ,9, (0) =^,9 (1)^9 (0) + (1 — x) ,9, (1) ,g, (0).

For two terms disappear because of (17).

But we have, by (18),

(p 0) ,x-\- cf>{0),{l—x) = q>X = 0.

Multiplying logically by x we get

(p{\),x = Q

and by (1 — x) we get

q> (0) , (1 _ x) = 0.

Substituting these values above, we have

(25.) <P (1) J <? (0) = 0 when (f>x = 0.

* a;b ,c must always be taken as (a;b) , c, not as a ; (6 , c).

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: MARCH 12, 1867. 255

Given qp a: = 1.

Required to eliminate x.
Let q,' X ==\ — (fx=.0

9' (1) ,<y' (0) -F (1 - <? (1)) , (1 - 9 (0)) - 0
1_(1_^(1)),(1_^(0)) =1.

Now, developing as in (18), only in reference to 9) (1) and qp (0)
instead of to x and y,

1 - (1 ~ q, (1)) , (1 - 9, (0)) = 9, (1) , g, (0) + 9, (1) , (1 - cy (0))

+ 9(0), (1-9(1)).
But by (18) we have also,

9(l) + 9(0)=^9(l),9(0) + 9(l),(l-9(0)) + 9(0),(l-9(l))-

So that

(2G.) q> (1) + 9 (0) = 1 when (fx=l.

Boole gives (25), but not (26).

We pass now from the consideration of identities to that of equa-
tions.

Let every expression for a class have a second meaning, which is
its meaning in an equation. Namely, let it denote the proportion of
individuals of that class to be found among all the individuals ex-
amined in the long run.

Then we have
(27.) If a = & a = h

(28.) a -\- h = {a -\r h) -\- {a ,b).

Let b^ denote the frequency of ^'s among the a's. Then considered
as a class, if a and h are events bg_ denotes the fact that if a happens b
happens.

(29.) ab^ = a ,b.

It will be convenient to set down some obvious and fundamental
properties of the function b^.

(30.) ab^ = ba^

(31.) (f (5a and c„) = (qp {b and c)),

(32.) (1 _ i)^ = 1 _ h.

^a

256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

(33.) ^'^^l + ^a-^A^-l)

(34.) «b = l ^\i-a)

(35.) (^a\=(cp(l)),.

The application of the system to probabilities may best be ex-
hibited in a few simple examples, some of which I shall select from
Boole's work, in order that the solutions here given may be compared
with his.

Example 1. Given the pi'oportion of days upon which it hails, and
the proportion of days upon which it thunders. Required the propor-
tion of days upon which it does both.

Let 1 = days,

p ■==. days when it hails,

q ■=. days when it thunders,

r == days when it hails and thunders.

p,q = r

Then by (29), r=p ,q=pq^ = qp^.

Answer. The required proportion is an unknown fraction of the
least of the two proportions given.

By p might have been denoted the probability of the major, and by
q that of the minor premise of a hypothetical syllogism of the following
form : —

]f a 7101 se is heard, an explosion always takes place ;
If a match is applied to a barrel of gunpowder, a noise is heard ;
,' . If a match is applied to a barrel of gunpowder, an explosion
always talces place.

In this case, the value given for r would have represented the proba-
bility of the conclusion. Now Boole (p. 284) solves this problem by
his unmodified method, and obtains the following answer : —

r=pq-\-a {l — q)

where a is an arbitrary constant. Here, if 5^ ^ 1 and jo = 0, r = 0.
That is, his answer implies that if the major premise be false and the
minor be true, the conclusion must be false. That this is not really so

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MARCH 12, 1867. 257

is shown by the above example. Boole (p. 286) is forced to the
conclusion that "propositions which, when true, are equivalent, are
not necessarily equivalent when regarded only as probable." This is
absurd, because probability belongs to the events denoted, and not to
forms of expression. The probability of an event is not altered by
translation from one language to another.

Boole, in fact, puts the problem into equations wrongly (an error
which it is the chief purpose of a calculus of logic to prevent), and
proceeds as if the problem were as follows : —

It being known what would be the probability of T, if X were to
happen, and what would be the probability of Z, if Zwere to happen ;
what would be the probability of Z, if X were to happen ?

But even this problem has been wrongly solved by him. For,
according to his solution, where

p= T^ q = Zy r=z Z^,

r must be at least as large as the product of p and q. But if X be
the event that a certain man is a negro, Zthe event that he is born
in Massachusetts, and Z the event that he is a white man, then neither
p nor q is zero, and yet r vanishes.

This problem may be rightly solved as follows : —

Let/= Y^ = X,T

q' = Z^ = X,Z

r'=Z,= X,Z

Then, r' =^ p' , q' -, p' ■== p' , q ; q'-

Developing these expressions by (18) we have

=FP',q' + ^'p-.a' (?''?') + ^'p'.a' ip'^9')'

The comparison of these two identities shows that

r'=y,^' + r'p,,^, ip' ,q').

Ti.Tr I -^ > 2/ ) ^

Let F == r'piq, == , -

VOL. VII. 33 .

258 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Now p', q' zipip' — p' ,q' ■===. q' — q' ,^'

p' ,q' =pq' —p' ,q' =pp' — q'^p'

And p' ,q' =zp' — 2^\' q' =Fq' — q'^'P'

p',q' = q' — q'^,p' =p' —p'^^^q' ■
Then let

^---^*-- y,z

T> -/ x,y,z-\-x,y,z-^x,y,z-\-x,y,z

^^^^'-^ ^^^y

p -, 'x ,y ,z -{-X ,y ,z -\- X ,y ,z -[-X ,y ,z

^-r-PA'-r- Y^irj^^ -

And we have
Y

^ ~ Z

= yp+v(L-q)-a+V,{h-q-B{^))

= q+v(^'-/P)-{i+V)(q-jD^p)

Ex. 2. (See Boole, p. 276.) Given r and q-, to find j3.

p:=zr;q=^r-\-v, (1 — q) because p is interpretable.

Ans. The required proportion lies somewhere between the pro-
portion of days upon which it both hails and thunders, and that added
to one minus the proportion of days when it thunders.

Ex. 3. (See Boole, p. 279.) Given, out of the number of questions
put to two witnesses, and answered by yes or no, the proportion that
each answers truly, and the proportion of those their answers to which
di><agree. Required, out of those wherein they agree, the proportion
they answer truly and the proportion they answer falsely.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MARCH 12, 1867. 259

Let 1 == the questions put to both witnesses,
p == those which the first answers truly,
q =. those which the second answers truly,
r == those wherein they disagree,
w == those which both answer truly,
to' == those which both answer falsely.
w==p,g w'=pp,q r==p -{r g — w==p -{rq — w'.

Now by (28.)

p-\rq=p-\-q — w p J^ q = p — p -\- I — q —

Substituting and transposing,

2w =p -\- q — r 2w' = 2 — p — q — r.

Now W7i_ J = —^ ^ but w ,(\ — r) =w.

w'.

w\_,= '^ "1 but<(l— r) =

1 — r

w

2(1 — 7-) u-r)— 2(1— r) •

The differences of Boole's system, as given by himself, from the
modification of it given here, are three.

1st. Boole does not make use of the operations here termed logical
addition and subtraction. The advantages obtained by the introduc-
tion of them are three, viz. they give unity to the system ; they
greatly abbreviate the labor of working with it ; and they enable us
to express particular propositions. This last point requires illustra-
tion. Let i be a class only determined to be such that only some one
individual of the class a comes under it. Then a -r e , a is the ex-
pression for some a. Boole cannot properly express some a.

2d. Boole uses the ordinary sign of multiplication for logical
multiplication. Tliis debars him from converting every logical iden-
tity into an equality of probabilities. Before the transformation can
be made the equation has to be brought into a particular form, and
much labor is wasted in bringing it to that form.

3d. Boole has no such function as a^. This involves him in two

260 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

difficulties. When the probability of such a function is required, he
can only obtain it by a departure from the strictness of his system.
And on account of the absence of that symbol, he is led to declare
that, without adopting the principle that simple, unconditioned events
whose probabilities are given are independent, a calculus of logic
applicable to probabilities would be impossible.

The question as to the adoption of this principle is certainly not one
of words merely. The manner in which it is answered, however,
partly determines the sense in which the term " probability " is taken.

In the propriety of language, the probability of a fact either is, or
solely depends upon, the strength of the argument in its favor, sup-
posing all relevant relations of all known facts to constitute that argu-
ment. Now, the strength of an argument is only the frequency with
which such an argument will yield a true conclusion when its premises
are true. Hence probability depends solely upon the relative fre-
quency of a specific event (namely, that a certain kind of argument
yields a true conclusion from true premises) to a generic event
(namely, that that kind of argument occurs with true premises).
Thus, when an ordinary man says that it is highly probable that it
will rain, he has refex'ence to certain indications of rain, — that is, to
a certain kind of argument that it will rain, — and means to say that
there is an argument that it will rain, which is of a kind of which but a
small proportion fail. " Probability," in the untechnical sense, is there-
fore a vague word, inasmuch as it does not indicate what one, of the
numerous subordinated and co-ordinated genera to which every argu-
ment belongs, is the one the relative frequency of the truth of which
is expressed. It is usually the case, that there is a tacit understand-
ing upon this point, based perhaps on the notion of an infima species
of argument. But an infima species is a mere fiction in logic. And
very often the reference is to a very wide genus.

The sense in which the term should be made a technical one is
that which will best subserve the purposes of the calculus in question.
Now, the only possible use of a calculation of a probability is security
in the long run. But there can be no question that an insurance
company, for example, which assumed that events were independent
without any reason to think that they really were so, would be sub-
jected to great hazard. Suppose, says Mr. Venn, that an insurance
company knew that nine tenths of the Englishmen who go to Madeira
die, and that nine tenths of the consumptives who go there get well.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867. 261

How should they treat a consumptive Englishman? Mr. Venn has
made an error in answering the question, but the illustration puts in a
clear light the advantage of ceasing to speak of probability, and of
speaking only of the relative frequency of this event to that.*

Five hundred and eiglity-lirst Meeting.

April 9, 1867. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The following paper was presented.

On the Natural Classification of Arguments. By C. S. Peirce.

Part I. § 1. Essential Parts of an Argument.

In this paper, the term " argument " will denote a body of premises
considered as such. The term " premise " will refer exclusively to
something laid down, (whether in any enduring and communicable
form of expression, or only in some imagined sign,) and not to any-
thing only virtually contained in what is said or thought, and also ex-
clusively to that part of what is laid down which is (or is supposed to
be) relevant to the conclusion.

Every inference involves the judgment that, if such propositions as
the premises are are true, then a proposition related to them, as the
conclusion is, must be, or is likely to be, true. The principle implied
in this judgment, respecting a genus of argument, is termed the leading
principle of the argument.

A valid argument is one whose leading principle is true.

In order that an argument should determine the necessary or proba-
ble truth of its conclusion, both the premises and leading principle
must be true.

§ 2. Relations between the Premises and Leading Principle.

The leading principle contains, by definition, whatever is considered
requisite besides the premises to determine the necessary or probable
truth of the conclusion. And as it does not contain in itself the
subsumption of anything under it, each premise must, in fact, be
equivalent to a subsumption under the leading principle.

* See a notice, Venn's Logic of Chance, in the North American Review for July,
1867.

262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The leading principle can contain nothing irrelevant or superfluous.

No fact, not superfluous, can be omitted from the premises without
being thereby added to the leading principle, and nothing can be
eliminated from the leading principle except by being expressed in
the premises. Matter may thus be transferred from the premises to
the leading principle, and vice versa.

There is no argument without premises, nor is there any without a
leading principle.

It can be shown that there are arguments no part of whose leading
principle can be transferred to the premises, and that every argument
can be reduced to such an argument by addition to its premises. For,
let the premises of any argument be denoted by P, the conclusion by
C, and the leading principle by L. Then, if the whole of the leading
principle be expressed as a premise, the argument will become

ZandP

.-. a

But this new argument must also have its leading principle, which
may be denoted by L'. Now, as L and P (supposing them to be
true) contain all that is requisite to determine the probable or necessary
truth of C, they contain L'. Thus L' must be contained in the lead-
ing principle, whether expressed in the premise or not. Hence every
argument has, as portion of its leading principle, a certain principle
which cannot be eliminated from its leading principle. Such a princi-
ple may be termed a logical principle.

An argument whose leading principle contains nothing which can
be eliminated is termed a complete., in opposition to an incomplete,
rhetorical, or enthymematie argument.*

* Neither of these terms is quite satisfactory. Enthymeme is usually defined as
a syllogism with a premise suppressed. This seems to determine the same sphere
as the definition I have given ; but the doctrine of a suppressed premise is objec-
tionable. The sense of a premise which is said to be suppressed is either conveyed
in some way, or it is not. If it is, the premise is not suppressed in any sense which
concerns the logician ; if it is not, it ceases to be a premise altogether. What I
mean by the distinction is this. He who is convinced that Sortes is mortal because
he is a man (the latter belief not only being the cause of tlie former, but also being
felt to be so) necessarily says to himself that all sncJi arguments are valid. This
genus of argument is either clearly or obscurely recognized. In the former case,
the judgment amounts to another premise, because the proposition (for example),
" All reasoning from humanity to mortality is certain," only says in other words

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867. 263

Since it can never be requisite that a fact stated should also be
implied in order to justify a conclusion, every logical principle con-
sidered as a proposition will be found to be quite empty. Considered
as regulating the procedure of inference, it is determinate ; but
considered as expressing truth, it is nothing. It is on this account
that that method of investigating logic which works upon syllogistic
forms is preferable to that other, which is too often confounded with it,
which undertakes to enunciate logical principles.

§ 4. Decomposition of Argument.

Since a statement is not an argument for itself, no fact concluded
can be stated in any one premise. Thus it is no argument to say
All A\?, B ; ergo Some A is B.

If one fact has such a relation. to another that, if the former is true,
the latter is necessarily or pi'obably true, this relation constitutes a
determinate fact ; and therefore, since the leading principle of a com-
plete argument involves no matter of fact, every complete argument
has at least two premises.

Every conclusion may be regarded as a statement substituted for
either of its premises, the substitution being justified by the other
premises. Nothing is relevant to the other premises, except what is
requisite to justify this substitution. Either, therefore, these other
premises will by themselves yield a conclusion which, taken as a prem-
ise along with the first premise, justifies the final conclusion; or else
some part of them, taken with the first premise, will yield a conclusion

tliat every man is mortal. But if the judgment amounts merely to this, that the
argument in question belongs to some genus all under which are valid, then In one
sense it does, and in another it does not, contain a premise. It does in this sense,
that by an act of attention such a proposition may be shown to have been virtually
involved in it; it does not in this sense, that the person making the judgment did
not actually understand this premise to be contained in it. This I express by say-
ing that this proposition is contained in the leading principle, but is not laid down.
This manner of stating the matter frees us at once from all psychological perplexi-
ties ; and at the same time we lose nothing, since all that we know of thought is but
a reflection of what we know of its expression.

These vague arguments are just such as alone are suitable to oratory or popular
discourse, and they are appropriate to no other; and this fact justifies the appella-
tion, "rhetorical argument." There is also authority for this use of the term.
" Complete" and "incomplete" are .idjectives wliicii I have preferred to "perfect"
and " imperfect," as being less misleading when applied to argument, although the
latter are the best when syllogism is the noun to be limited.

264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

which, taken as a premise along with all the others, will again justify
the final conclusion. In either case, it follows that every argument
of more than two premises can be resolved into a series of arguments
of two premises each. This justifies the distinction of simple and
complex arguments.

% 5. Of a General Type of Syllogistic Arguments.

A valid, complete, simple argument will be designated as a syllogis-
tic argument.

Every proposition may, in at least one way, be put into the form,

Sis P',

the import of which is, that the objects to which S ov the total subject
applies have the characteristics attributed to every object to which P
or the total predicate applies.

Every term has two powers or significations, according as it is sub-
ject or predicate. The former, which will here be termed its breadth,
comprises the objects to which it is applied ; while the latter, which
will here be termed its depth, comprises the characters which are
attributed to every one of the objects to which it can be applied. This
breadth and depth must not be confounded with logical extension and
comprehension, as these terms are usually taken.

Every substitution of one px'oposition for another must consist in
the substitution of term for term. Such substitution can be justified
only so far as the first term represents what is represented by the
second. Hence the only possible substitutions are —

1st. The substitution for a term fulfilling the function of a subject
of another whose breadth is included in that of the former ; and

2d. The substitution for a term fulfilling the function of a predicate
of another whose depth is included in that of the former.

If, therefore, in either premise a term appears as subject which does
not appear in the conclusion as subject, then the other premise must
declare that the breadth of that term includes the breadth of the tei'm
which replaces it in the conclusion. But this is to declare that every
object of the latter term has every character of the former. The
eliminated term, therefore, if it does not fulfil the function of predi-
cate in one premise, does so in the other. But if the eliminated term
fulfils the function of predicate in one premise, the other premise
must declare that its depth includes that of the term which replaces
it in the conclusion. Now, this is to declare that every character of

OF AETS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867. 265

the latter term belongs to every object of the former. Hence, in the
other premise, it must fulfil the function of a subject. Hence the
general formula of all argument must be

if is P

S isM

.-. S is P;

which is to be understood in this sense, — that the terms of every syllo-
gistic argument fulfil functions of subject and predicate as here indi-
cated, but not that the argument can be grammatically expressed in
this way.

Part H. § 1. Of Apagogical Forms.

If G is true when P is, then P is false when C is. Hence it is
always possible to substitute for any premise the denial of the conclu-
sion, provided the denial of that premise be at the same time substitut-
ed for the conclusion.* Hence, corresponding to every syllogistic
argument in the general form,

S is M; MisP;

S h P.
There are two others : —

It is false that Sis P; Mis P; Sis 31; it is false that ^ is P;

It is false that S is 31. It is false that if is P.

% 2. Of Contradiction.

The apagogical forms make it necessary to consider in what way
propositions deny one another.

If a proposition be put into the general form,

>S'is P,

its contradictory has, 1st, as its subject, instead of S, "the S now

* This operation will be termed a contraposition of the premise and conclusion.

VOL. VII. 34

266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

meant " * or " some *S"'; and has, 2d, as its predicate, instead of P, that
which differs from P or " not P."

From these relations of contradictories, from the necessities of the
logic of apagogically related arguments, therefore, arises the need of
the two divisions of propositions into affirmative and negative on the
one hand, and into universal and particular on the other. The con-
tradictory of a universal proposition is particular, and the contradic-
tory of an affirmative proposition is negative. Contradiction is a recip-
rocal relation, and therefore the contradictory of a particular propo-
sition is universal, and that of a negative proposition is affirmative.
The contradiction of particular and negative propositions could
not be brought under the general formula, were the distinctions of
affirmative and negative absolute and not merely relative ; but, in
fact, not-not-P is the same as P. And, if it is said that " what is now
meant of the part of S meant at another time, is P" since the
part of S meant at another time is left to be determined in whatever
way the proposition made at another time may determine it, this can
only be true if All S is P. Therefore, if one man says " some *S' is
not P" and another replies, " some of that same >S' is P" this second
person, since he allows the first man's some S, which has not been
defined, to remain undefined, in effect says that All S is P.

Whether contradictories differ in other respects than these well-
known ones is an open question.

§ 3. Of Barbara.

Since some S means " the part now meant of S" a particular prop-
osition is equivalent to a universal proposition with another subject; and
in the same way a negative proposition is equivalent to an affirmative
proposition with another predicate.

The form, S is P,

therefore, as well as representing propositions in general, particularly

represents Universal Affirmative propositions ; and thus the general

form of syllogism

ATis P; ^ is M;

S is P,
represents specially the syllogisms of the mood Barbara.

* What <S is meant being generally undetermined.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867. 267

§ 4. Of the First Figure.

Since, in the general form, S may be any subject and P any predi-
cate, it is possible to modify Barbara by making the major premise and
conclusion negative, or by making the minor premise and conclusion
particular, or in both these ways at once. Thus we obtain all the
modes of the first figui'e.

It is also possible to have such arguments as these : —

Some M is P,

S has all the common characters of that part of 31 (whatever
that part may be, and therefore of each and every M),

.'. S is P,
and

All not-Jf is P,

S is not M,

.: S is P;

but as the theory of apagogical argument has not obliged us to take
account of these peculiar modifications of subject and predicate, these
arguments must be considered as belonging to Barbara. In this sense
the major premise must always be universal, and the minor affirmative.
Three propositions which are related to one another as though major
premise, minor premise, and conclusion of a syllogism of the first figure
will be termed respectively Hule, Case, and Result.

§ 5. Second and Third Figures.
Let the first figure be written thus : —

Fig. 1.

Any IVI

IS

is not

Some S '^

Any « is Q

Some %]9 is not j^^

Then its two apagogical modifications are the second and third
figures.

268

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Any

Some
Any

Some
Any

Fig. 2.

Fig. 3.

IVI is not

P

Some
Any

^J is not 1^

^5 is not
O is

P

Any
Some

S » M

§ is not

M

Some

lYI is r'

It is customary to enumerate six moods of the third figure instead
of four, and the moods Darapti and Felapton appear to be omitted.
But a particular proposition is asserted (actually and not merely
virtually) by the universal proposition which does not otherwise differ
from it; and therefore Darapti is included both under Disamis and
Datisi, and Felapton both under Bocardo and Ferison. (De Morgan.)

The second figure, from the assertion of the rule and the denial of
the result, infers the denial of the case ; the third figure, from the
denial of the result and assertion of the case, infers the denial of the
rule. Hence we write the moods as follows, by allowing inferences
only on the straight lines : —

Fig. 1.

Assertion of Rule,
Assertion of Case ;
Assertion of Result.

Fig. 2.

Assertion of Rule,
Denial of Result ;
Denial of Case.

Fig. 3.
Denial of Result,

Assertion of Case ;

Denial of Rule.

The symmetry of the system of moods of the three figures is also
exhibited in the following table.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867.

269

Enter at the top the proposition asserting or denying the rule ;
enter at the side the proposition asserting or denying the case ; find in
the body of the table the proposition asserting or denying the result.
In the body of the table, propositions indicated by italics belong to
the first figure, those by black-letter to the second figure, and those by
script to the third figure.

I A E O

J

Or

A

m

E

0)

fi

I

0

9

©

%

I
o

If, as the denial of the result in the second and third figures, we
put the form " Any N is N" we have —

Fig. 2.

No iHf is N

Any N \^ N

.-. No N is M.

Fig. 3.

Any N IS N

Some N is M
.-. Some M is N.

These are the formulje of the two simple conversions. Neither can
be expressed syllogistically except in the figures in which they are
here put (or in what is called the fourth figure, which we shall con-
sider hereafter). If, for the denial of the result in the second figure,
we put " No not-iV^ is iV^" (where " not-iV" has not as yet been
defined) we obtain

All M is N,

No not-iV is N;

.'. No not-A^ is M.

In the same way, if we put " Some A^is some-A'"" (where some-A'has
not been defined) for the denial of the result in the third figure, we have

Some N is some-A^

All N is M

.: Some M is some-Ai

270 PROCEEDINaS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

These are the two ways of contraposing the Universal AflEirmative.

There are two ostensive reductions of each mood of the second and
third fisrures. I shall distino;uish them as the short reduction and the
long reduction. The short reduction is effected by converting or con-
traposing that premise which is not the denial of the result. The long
reduction is effected by transposing the premises, contraposing or con-
verting the denial of the result, and contraposing or converting the
conclusion. The alteration thus produced in the order of the terms is
shown in the following figure : —

Short Reduction. Long Reduction.

N M M N MS

S M 3 M N M

S N S N N S

2 n 2 n HP

2 p pi: n 2

p n p n n p

The names bestowed by Shyreswood, or Petrus Hispanus, upon the
moods indicate the p6ssibility of the short reduction in the case of
Cesare and Festino of the second figure, and of Datisi and Ferison
of the third figure ; also the possibility of the long reduction of
Camestres of the second figure and of Disamis of the third.

The short reduction of Camestres and Baroco is effected by intro-
ducing the term not-P, and defining it as that which S is when it is
not P. Hence for the second premise (Any or some Sis not P) we
substitute "Any or some S is not-P"; and as the first premise,
Any M is P, gives by contraposition Any not-P is not M, the
moods

Any ■ M \& P,

Any or some S is not P ;

.'. Any or some S is not M,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867. 271

are reduced to

No not-P is M,

Any or some S is not-P ;

.'. Any or some S is not 31.

The short reduction of Disamis and Bocardo is effected by intro-
ducing the term some-S, defining it as that part of S which is or is
not P when some S is or is not P. We can therefore substitute for
the first premise, Some S is or is not P, All some-S is or is not
P ; while, for the second premise. All S is M, can be contraposed into
"Some 31 is some-S": and thus the forms

Some S is (or is not) P,

Any S is 31;

.'. Some 3f is (or is not) P,
are reduced to the following : —

Any some-S is (or is not) P,

Some 31 is some-A^;

.'. Some 31 is (or is not) P.

To reduce Cesare, Festino, and Baroco in the long way, it is neces-
sary to introduce the terms not-P and some-ASl Not-P is defined as
that class to which any 31 belongs which is not P. Hence for the
first premise of Cesare and Festino we can substitute " Any 31 is
not-P." Some-S is defined as that class of S which is (or is not)
P, when some S is (or is not) P. Hence for the second premises of
Festino and Baroco we can first substitute "Any some-AS' is (or is
not) P"; and then, by contraposition or conversion, we obtain "Any P
(or not-P) is not some-AS." Then, by the transposition of the prem-
ises, we obtain fi'om Cesare, which is

No 71/ is P Any not-P is not . S

Any S is P Any 3f is not-P

(.-. No S is 31). .-. Any 3f is not-S.

272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

And from the conclusion of this reduced form we obtain the conclu-
sion of Cesare by simple conversion. So Festino and its long reduc-
tion are

Any 31 is not P, Any not-P is not some-^S!,

Some *S' is P\ Any M is not-P;

(.-, Some S is not 31.) .*. Any 31 is not some-*S ;

and the conclusion of Festino is obtained from that of the reduced
form by a substitution which may be made syllogistically thus : —

Any 31 is not some-/S',

Some S is some-zS';

.*. Some S is not M.

Baroco and its long reduction are

Any 31 is P, Any P is not some-A^,

Some S is not P ; Any J/ is P ;

(.•. Some S is not 31.) .'. Any 3f is not some-zS;

and the conclusion of Baroco is obtained from the conclusion of the
reduction in the same way as that of Festino.

In order to reduce Datisi, Bocardo, and Ferison in the long way,
we must define Some-A^as that ;S' which is TJfwhen some iS' is 3f, and
Not-P as that which some (or any) S is when it is not P. Hence for
" Some /Sis M" we can substitute "Any some-^S is 3P'; and for "Some
(or any) S is not P," " Some (or any) S is not-P." " Some S is
not-P" may be converted simply; and "Any S is not-P" may be con-
traposed so as to become " Some not-P is some-A^." Then Datisi
and its long reduction are

Any S is P, Any some-*S^ is 3f,

Some S is 3f', Some P is some-*S';

(.-. Some if is P.) .-. Some P is 3f.

And from the conclusion of the reduction, the conclusion of Datisi is

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867. 273

obtained by simple conversion. Ferison and its long reduction are

Any S is not P, Any some-AS' is M,

Some S is 3f; Some not-P is some-zS* ;

(.*. Some M is not P.) .•. Some not-P is M.

And from the conclusion of the reduction, the conclusion of Ferison
may be obtained by a substitution whose possibility is expressed syllo-
gistically thus : —

Any not-P is not P,
Some not-P is M;
.'. Some M is not P.
Bocardo and its long reduction are

Some S is not P, Any S is M,

Any S' is M; Some not-P is S;

(.'. Some 31 is not P.) .-. Some not-P is M.

And the conclusion of Bocardo is obtained from that of its reduction
in the same way as the conclusion of Ferison.

The ostensive reduction of the indirect or apagogical figures may
be considered as the exhibition of them under the general form of
syllogism,

S is M; M is P:

.-. ^ is P.

But, in this sense, it is not truly a reduction if the substitutions made
in the process are inferences. But although the possibility of the con-
versions and contrapositions can be expressed syllogistically, yet this
can be done only by taking as one of the premises,

"All N is N,"

" Any not-i\^ is not N,"

or " Some N is some-^."
VOL. VII. 35

274 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Now, these are properly not premises, for they express no facts ;
they are merely forms of words without meaning. Hence, as no com-
plete argument has less than two premises, the conversions and contra-
positions are not inferences. The only other substitutions which have
been made have been of not-P and some-*S for their definitions.
These also can be put into syllogistic form ; but a mere modification
of language is not an inference. Hence no inferences have been em-
ployed in reducing the arguments of the second and third figures to
such forms that they are readily perceived to come under the general
form of syllogism.

There is, however, an intention in which these substitutions are in-
ferential. For, although the passage from holding for true a fact
expressed in the form " No A is B," to holding its converse, is not an
inference, because, these facts being identical, the relation between
them is not a fact ; yet the passage from one of these forms taken
merely as having some meaning, but not this or that meaning, to
another, since these forms are not identical and their logical relation
is a fact, is an inference. This distinction may be expressed by
saying that they are not inferences, but substitutions having the form of
inferences.

Thus the reduction of the second and third figures, considered as
mere forms, is inferential ; but when we consider only what is meant
by any particular argument in an indirect figure, the reduction is a
mere change of wording.

The substitutions made use of in the ostensive reductions ai*e shown
in the following table. Where

e, denotes simple conversion of ^;

i, denotes simple conversion of /;

a2, contraposition of A into £ ;

tts, contraposition A into /;

0-2, the substitution of " Some S is not M" for " Any J/is not some-*S"' ;

O3, the substitution of "Some iJ/is not F" for "Some not-P is M";

e", introduction of not-P by definition ;

i", introduction of some-S by definition.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES: APRIL 9, 1867.

275

Reduction of Second Figure.

Name of Mood.

Short Reduction.

Long Reduction.

Cesare

e

e" a, 6

Camestres

02 e"

e e

Festino

e

e" i" «2 O2

Baroco

«2 e"

i" e Oo

Reduction of Third Figure.

Name of Mood.

Short Reduction.

Long Reduction.

Disamis

«3 *"

^ I

Datisi

•

i" U'i i

Bocardo

«3 *"

e" i 03

Ferison

i

i" e" 03 03

With the exception of the substitutions i" and e", which will be con-
sidered hereafter, all those which are used in the reduction of the
moods of either oblique figure have the form of inferences in the same
figure.

The so-called reductio per impossihile is the repetition or inversion
of that contraposition of propositions by which the indirect figures
have been obtained. Now, contradiction arises from a difference both
in quantity and quality ; but it is to be observed that, in the contrapo-
sition which gives the second figure, a change of the quality alone, and
in that which gives the thii'd figure a change of the quantity alone, of
the contraposed propositions, is sufficient. This shows that the two

276 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

contrapositions are of essentially different kinds, and that the reduc-
tions per impossibile of the second and third figures respectively involve
the following formal inferences.*

Figure 2.

The Result follows from the Case ;
. • . The Negative of the Case follows from the Negative of the Result.

Figure 3.

The Result follows from the Rule ;
. • . The Rule changed in Quantity follows from the Result changed in
Quantity.

But these inferences may also be expressed as follows : —

Figure 2.
Whatever {S) is M is n^p-,
.: Whatever {S) is "°^^ is not M.

Figure 3.
Any Bojf e s is whatever (P or not-P) M is ;

.-. Some M is whatever {P or not-P) ^°7 ^ is.

Now, the limitations in parentheses do not affect the essential nature
of the inferences ; and omitting them we have,

Figure 2.
Any M is „ofi',

.-. Any ""j.-^ is not M.

Figure 3.
Any some 5 is 31;

.-. Some 31 is =°'5f ^^
* A formal inference is a substitution having the form of an inference.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867. 277

We have already seen that the former of these is of the form of
the second figure, and the latter of the form of the third figure of
syllogism.

Hence it appears that no syllogism of an indirect figure can be re-
duced to the first figure without a substitution which has the form of
the very figure from which the syllogism is reduced. In other words,
the indirect syllogisms are of an essentially different form from that
of the first figure, although in a more general sense they come under
that form.

§ 6. The Theophrastean Moods.

It is now necessary to consider the five moods of Theophrastus, viz.
Baralipton, Celantes, Dabitis, Fapesmo, Frisesomorum. Baralipton is
included in Dabitis, and Fapesmo in Frisesomorum, in the same way
in which Darapti is included in Disamis and Datisi, and Felapton in
Bocadro and Ferison. The Theophrastean moods are thus reduced to
three, viz. : —

No X is Y, No X is Y, Some Y is Z,

All Z is X; Some Y is Z; All Z is X;

.-. Any Y is not Z. .'. Some Z is not X. .'. Some X is Y.

Suppose we have, 1st, a Rule ; 2d, a Case under that rule, which is
itself a Rule ; and, 3d, a Case under this second rule, which conflicts
with the first rule. Then it would be easy to prove that these three
propositions must be of the form,

1. No X is r:

2. All Z is X.

3. Some Y is Z.

These three propositions cannot all be true at once ; if, then, any two
are asserted, the third must be denied, which is what is done in the
three Theophrastean moods.

These moods are resolved into one another by the contraposition of
propositions, and therefore should be considered as belonging to differ-
ent figures.

They can be ostensively reduced to the first Aristotelian figure in
two ways ; thus,

278 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Short Reduction. Long Reduction.

B A B A Br

r B ' r B A B

AT FA AT

The verses of Shyreswood show how Celantes and Dabitis are to be
reduced in the short way, and Frisesomorum in the long way. Celan-
tes and its long reduction are as follows : —

Any X is not Y, Any not-X is not Z,

Any Z is X; Any Y is not-^;

.'. Any Y is not Z. .'. Any Y is not Z.

" Any X is not Y" becomes, by conversion, " Any Y is not X."
The terra "not-X" is then introduced, being defined as that which Y
is when it is not X. Then " Z is X" becomes " Any not- A" is not Z" ;
and, the premises being transposed, the reduction is effected.

Dabitis and its long reduction are as follows : —

Any Z is X, Any some-^ is Y,

Some Y is Z; Some X is some-^;

.*. Some X is Y. .*. Some X is Y.

" Some Y is Z" becomes, by conversion, " Some Z is Y." Then
the terra "sorae--^" is introduced, being defined as that Z which is
Zif "some Z is Y" Then "Any Z is X" becomes •" Some X is
some-^," and, the premises being transposed, the reduction is effected.

Frisesomorum is,'

Some Y is Z,

Any X is not Y;

.'. Some Z is not X.

Let some-Z be that Y which is Z when some Z^ is Z; and then
we have,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867. 279

Some T is some-J^

Any X is not Y;

.'. Some some-Z^ is not X.

Then let not-Xbe that which any l^is when some l^is not X, and
we have,

Some some- 1^ is not-X,

which yields by conversion,

Some not-X is some- J[^;

and we thus obtain the reduction,

Any some-1^ is Z,

Some not-X is some-I^;

.*. Some not-X is Z.

From the conclusion of this reduction, the conclusion of Frisesomo-
rum is justified as follows : —

Some not-X is Z,

Any X is not not-X;

.•. Some Z is not X.

Another mode of effecting the short reduction of Frisesomorum
is this : Let not- J" be that which any Xis when no Xis Y, and we
have

Some 7" is Z,

Any not-1^ is not Y;

.'. Some Z is not not- 2^

Let some-^ be that Z which is not not- T' when some Z is not- 7",
and we have,

Any some-^ is not not-1^
and by conversion,

Any not- 7" is not some-^.

280 PROCEBDINQS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Thus we obtain as the reduced form,

Any not- J" is not some-^,

Any X is not- J";

.*. Any X is some-Z.

From the conclusion of this reduction, we get that of Frisesomo-
rum thus : —

Some some-i^ is Z,

Any X is not some-^;

.*. Some Z is not X.

In either reduction of Celantes, if we neglect the substitution of
terms for their definitions, the substitutions are all of the second syl-
losistic figure. This of itself shows that Celantes belongs to that
figure, and this is confirmed by the fact that it concludes the denial of
a Case. In the same way, the reductions of Dabitis involve only sub-
stitutions in the third figure, and it concludes the denial of a Rule.
Frisesomorum concludes a proposition which is at once the denial of
a rule and the denial of a case : its long reduction involves one conver-
sion in the second figure and another in the third, and its short reduc-
tions involve conversions in Frisesomorum itself. It therefore belongs
to a figure which unites the characters of the second and third, and
which may be termed the second-third figure in Theophrastean syl-
logism.

There are, then, two kinds of syllogism, — the Aristotelian and The-
ophrastean. In the Aristotelian occur the 1st, 2d, and 3d figures,
with four moods of each. In the Theophrastean occur the 2d, 3d,
and 2d-3d figures, with one mood of each. The first figure is the
fundamental or typical one, and Bai'bara is the typical mood. There
is a strong analogy between the figures of syllogism and the four
forms of proposition. A is the fundamental form of proposition, just
as the first figure is the fundamental form of syllogism. The second
and third figures are derived from the first by the contraposition of
propositions, and £J and / are derived from A by the contraposition
of terms ; thus : —

Any S is P.

Any not-P is not S. Some P is some-S.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867. 281

0 combines the modifications of E and 7, just as the 2d-3d figure
combines tlie 2d and 3d. In the second-third figure, only 0 can be
concluded, in the third only / and 0, in the second only E and 0, in
the first either A E I 0. Tims A is the first figure of proposition,
E the second, / the third, 0 the second-third.*

§ 7. Mathematical Syllogisms.

A kind of argument very common in mathematics may be exem-
plified as follows : —

Every part is less than that of which it is a part,
Boston is a part of the Universe ;
. • . Boston is less than the Universe.

This may be reduced to syllogistic form thus : —

Any relation of part to whole is a relation of less to greater.
The relation of Boston to the Universe is a relation of part to whole ;
. • . The relation of Boston to the Universe is a relation of less to greater.

If logic is to take account of the peculiarities of such syllogisms,
it would be necessary to consider some propositions as having thi*ee
terms, subject, predicate, and object ; and such propositions would be
divided into active and passive. The varieties in them would be
endless.

Part III. § 1. Induction and Hypothesis.
In the syllogism,

Any M is P,

r s' is M;

.-. r/S' is P;

where ^' S' denotes the sum of all the classes which come under M.
if the second premise and conclusion are known to be true, the first

* Hypotheticals have not been considered above, the well-known opinion having
been adopted that, "If Jl, then ZJ," means the same as "Every state of things in
which A is true is a state of things in which B is (or will be) true."

VOL. VII. 36

282 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

premise is, by enumeration, true. Whence we have, as a valid demon-
strative form of inference,

• X S'

is

P,

r/S"

is

31;

.-. 31

is

P.

This

is

called perfect induction.

It

would be better to call it formal

induction.

In a

similar way, from the syllogism

>

Any 31

is

n' p',

Any S

is

31',

."• Any S is HP;

where U' P' denotes the conjunction of all the characters of M, if
the conclusion and first premise are true, the second premise is true by
definition ; so that we have the demonstrative form of argument.

Any 31 is n' P',

Any S i^ U P ;

:. Any S is 3L

This is reasoning from definition, or, as it may be termed, formal
hypothesis.

One half of all possible propositions are true, because every prop-
osition has its contradictory. Moreover, for every true particular
proposition there is a true universal proposition, and for every true
negative proposition there is a true aifirmative proposition. This
follows from the fact that the univer.-al affirmative is the type of all
propositions. Hence of all possible propositions in either of the forms,

X S is 31, and 31 is n' P',

one half are true. In an untrue proposition of either of these forms,
some finite ratio of the /S"s or P's are not true subjects or predicates.
Hence, of all propositions of either of these forms which are partly
true, some finite ratio more than one half are wholly true. Hence, if
in the above formulce for formal induction or hypothesis, we substitute

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867. 283

S' for ^' S' and P' for U' P' we obtain formula} of probable in-
ference. This reasoning gives no determinate probability to these
modes of inference, but it is necessary to consider that, however
weak synthetic inference might have been at first, yet if it had
the least positive tendency to produce truth, it would continually
become stronger, owing to the establishment of more and more
secure premises.

The rules for valid induction and hypothesis deducible from this
theory are as follows : —

1. The explaining syllogism, that is to say, the deductive syllogism
one of whose premises is inductively or hypothetically inferred from
the other and from its conclusion, must be valid.

2. The conclusion is not to be held as absolutely true, but only
until it can be shown that, in the case of induction, S' was taken from
some narrower class than J/, or, in the case of hypothesis, that P' was
taken from some higher class than 31.

3. From the last rule it follows as a corollary that in the case of
induction the subject of the premises must be a sum of subjects, and
that in the case of hypothesis the predicate of the premises must be a
conjunction of predicates.

4. Also, that this aggregate must be of different objects or qualities
and not of mere names.

0. Also, that the only principle upon which the instanced subjects
or predicates can be selected is that of belonging to M.*

* Positivism, apart from its theory of history and of the relations between the
sciences, is distinguished from other doctrines by the manner in which it regards
hypotheses. Almost all men think that metaphysical theories are valueless, be-
cause metaphysicians differ so much among themselves ; but the positivists give
another reason, namely, that these theories violate the sole condition of all legiti-
mate hypothesis. This condition is that every good hypothesis must be such as
is certainly capable of subsequent verification with the degree of certainty proper
to the conclusions of the branch of science to which it belongs. There is, it seems
to me, a confusion here between the probability of a hypothesis in itself, and its
admissibility into any one of those bodies of doctrine which have received distinct
names, or have been admitted into a scheme of the sciences, and which admit only
conclusions which have a very high probability indeed. I have here to deal with
the rule only so far as it is a general canon of the legitimacy of hypotheses, and not
so far as it determines their relevancy to a particular science ; and I shall, therefore,
consider only another common statement of it; namely, "that no hypothesis is
admissible which is not capable of verification by direct observation." The positivist
regards an hypothesis, not as an inference, but as a device for stimulating and

284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Hence the formulae are

Induction.

S' S" S'", &c. are taken at random as M's,

S' S" S>", &CC. are P ;

.'. Any iT/is probably P.

directing observation. But I have shown above that certain premises will render an
hypothesis probable, so that there is such a thing as legitimate hypothetic inference.
It may be replied that such conclusions are not hypotheses, but inductions. That the
sense in which I have used '"hypothesis" is supported by good usage, I could prove by
a hundred authorities. Tlie following is from Kant : " An hypothesis is the holding
for true of the judgment of the truth of a reason on account of the sufficiency of its
consequents." Mill's definition (Logic, Book III. Ch. XIV. § 4) also nearly coin-
cides with mine. Moreover, an hypothesis in every sense is an inference, because it is
adopted for some reason, good or bad, and that reason, in being regarded as such,
is regarded as lending the hypothesis some plausibility. The arguments which I
term hypothetic are certainly not inductions, for induction is reasoning from par-
ticulars to generals, and this does not take place in these cases. The positivist
canon for hypotheses is neither sufficient nor necessary. If it is granted that hy-
potheses are inferred, it will hardly be questioned that the observed facts must
follow apodictically from the hypothesis without the aid of subsidiary hypotheses,
and that the characters of that which is predicated in the hypothesis, and from which
the inference is drawn, must be taken as they occur, and not be picked out in order
to make a plausible argument. That the maxim of the positivists is superfluous
or worse, is shown, first, by the fact that it is not implied in the proof that hypothetic
inference is valid ; and next, by the absurdities to which it gives rise when strictly-
applied to history, which is entirely hypothetical, and is absolutely incapable of
Tcrifieation by direct observation. To this last argument I know of but two
answers : first, that this pushes the rule further than was intended, it being con-
sidered that history has already been so verified ; and second, that the positivist
does not pretend to know the world as it absolutely exists, but only the world which
appears to him. To the first answer, the rejoinder is that a rule must be pushed
to its logical consequences in all cases, until it can be shown that some of these cases
differ in some material respect from the others. To the second answer, the re-
joinder is double : first, that I mean no more by " is " than the positivist by
"appears" in the sense in which he uses it in saying that only what "appears " is
known, so that the answer is irrelevant ; second, that positivists, like the rest of
the world, reject historic testimony sometimes, and in doing so distinguish hy-
pothetically between what is and what in some other sense appears, and yet have
no means of verifying the distinction by direct observation.

Another error in reference to hypotliesis is, that the antecedent probability of what
is testified to cannot affect the probability of the testimony of a good witness. This
is as much as to say that probable arguments can neither support nor weaken one
another. Mr. Venn goes so far as to maintain the impossibility of a conflict of
probabilities. The difficulty is instantly removed by admitting indeterminate
probabiUties.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 9, 1867. 285

Hypothesis.

Any 3/ is, for instance, P' P" P", &c.,

S is P' P" P", &c. ;

••. aS is probably M.

§ 2. Moods and Figures of Probable Inference.

It is obvious that the explaining syllogism of an induction or
hypothesis may be of any mood or figure.

It would also seem that the conclusion of an induction or hypothesis
may be contraposed with one of the premises.

§ 3. Analogy.
The formula of analogy is as follows : —

aS', aS", and S'" are taken at random from such
a class that their characters at random are such as P', P", P".

t is P, P\ and P" .

S', S", and S'" are q.

.'. t is q.

Such an argument is double. It combines the two followiner : —

1.

S', S", S'" are taken as being P', P', P".
S', S", S'" are q.
.'. (By induction,) P, P", P" is q.
t is P',P",P".
.'. (Deductively,) t is q.

2.

S', S", S'" are, for instance, P, P", P'".

t is P', P", P".

.: (By hypothesis,) t has the common characters of aS*, S", S'".

S', S", S"' are q.
.: (Deductively,) t is q.

286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Owing to its double character, analogy is very strong with only a
moderate number of instances.

§ 4. Formal Relations of the above Forms of Argument.

If we take an identical proposition as the fact to be explained by
induction and hypothesis, we obtain the following formulce.

By Induction.
S, S', S" are taken at random as being M,

S, S', S" have the characters common to S, S',_ S".

.: Any J/ has the characters common to S, S', S".

By Hypothesis.
ilf is, for instance, P, P', P".

Whatever is at once P, P', and P" is P, P, P".

.-. Whatever is at once P, P', and P" is 31.

By means of the substitution thus justified, Induction and Hypoth-
esis can be reduced to the general type of syllogism, thus : —

Ifiductio)i.

S, S', S" are taken as M,
S, S', S' are P;
.-. Any 31 is P.

Reduction.
S, S', S" areP;

Almost any il/has the common characters of S, S', S' .

.'. Almost any 31 is P.

Hypothesis.
31 IS, for instance, P, P", P",

S is P, i?", P" ;

.-. S is 31.

Reduction.
Whatever is, at once, P, F", P"' is hke 31,

S is P, P", P" ;

.-. S is like 31.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 14, 1867. 287

Induction may, therefore, be defined as argument which assumes
that a whole collection, from which a number of instances have been
taken at random, has all the common characters of those instances ;
hypothesis, as an argument which assumes that a term which necessa-
rily involves a certain number of characters, which have been lighted
upon as they occurred, and have not been picked out, may be predi-
cated of any object which has all these characters.

There is a resemblance between the transposition of propositions by
which the forms of probable inference are derived and the contraposi-
tion by which the indirect figures are derived ; in the latter case there
is a denial or change of modal quality ; while in the former there is
reduction from certainty to probability, and from, the sum of all re-
sults to some only, or a change in modal quantity. Thus probable
inference is related to apagogical proof, somewhat as the third figure
is to the second. Among probable inferences, it is obvious that
hypothesis corresponds to the second figui-e, induction to the third,
and analogy to the second-third.

Five liuuclred and eigUty-second Meeting.

May 14, 1867. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read letters relative to ex-
changes.

The President read a letter from Dr. J. Mason Warren, pre-
senting to the Academy a copy of his work on " Surgical
Operations."

The following paper was presented : —

On a New List of Categories. By C. S. Peirce.

§ 1. Tins paper is based upon the theory already established, that
the function of conceptions is to reduce the manifold of sensuous im-
pressions to unity, and that the validity of a conception consists in the
impossibility of reducing the content of consciousness to unity without
the introduction of it.

§ 2. This theory gives rise to a conception of gradation among those
conceptions which are universal. For one such conception may unite the
manifold of sense and yet another majt be required to unite the con-
ception and the manifold to which it is applied ; and so on.

288 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

§ 3. That universal conception which is nearest to sense is that of
the present, in general. This is a conception, because it is universal.
But as the act o^ attention has no connotation at all, but is the pure de-
notative power of the mind, that is to say, the power which directs the
mind to an object, in contradistinction to the power of thinking any
predicate of that object, — so the conception of what is present in gen-
eral, which is nothing but the general recognition of what is contained
in attention, has no connotation, and therefore no proper unity. This
conception of the present in general, or it in general, is rendered in
philosophical language by the word " substance " in one of its meanings.
Before any comparison or discrimination can be made between what is
present, what is present must have been recognized as such, as it, and
subsequently the metaphysical parts which are recognized by abstrac-
tion are attributed to this it, but the it cannot itself be made a pred-
icate. This it is thus neither predicated of a subject, nor in a sub-
ject, and accordingly is identical with the conception of substance.

§ 4. The unity to which the understanding reduces impressions is
the unity of a proposition. This unity consists in the connection of
the predicate with the subject; and, therefore, that which is implied in
the copula, or the conception of being, is that which completes the
work of conceptions of reducing the manifold to unity. The copula
(or ratlier the verb which is copula in one of its senses) means either
actually is or would be, as in the two propositions, '' There is no grif-
fin," and " A griffin is a winged quadruped." The conception of bei7ig
contains only that junction of predicate to subject wherein these two
verbs agree. The conception of being, therefore, plainly has no con-
tent.

If we say " The stove is black," the stove is the substance, from
which its blackness has not been differentiated, and the is, while it
leaves the substance just as it was seen, explains its confusedness, by
the application to it of blackness as a predicate.

Though being does not affect the subject, it implies an indefinite
determinability of the predicate. For if one could know the copula
and predicate of any proposition, as " .... is a tailed-man," he
would know the predicate to be applicable to something supposable,
at least. Accordingly, we have propositions whose subjects are entirely
indefinite, as " There is a beautiful ellipse," where the subject is merely
something actual or potential; but we have no propositions whose
predicate is entirely indeterminate, for it would be quite senseless to

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 14, 1867. 289

say, " A has the common characters of all things," inasmuch as there
are no such common characters.

Thus substance and bein"; are the besinninor and end of all con-
ception. Substance is inapplicable to a predicate, and being is equally
so to a subject.

§ 5. The terms " precision" and "abstraction," which were formerly
applied to every kind of separation, are now limited, not merely to men-
tal separation, but to that which arises from atfentiun to one element
and neglect of the other. Exclusive attention consists in a definite con-
ception or supposition of one part of an object, without any supposi-
tion of the other. Abstraction or precision ought to be carefully dis-
tinguished from two other modes of mental separation, which may be
termed discrimination and dissociation. Discrimination has to do mere-
ly with the essences of terms, and only draws a distinction in meaning.
Dissociation is that separation which, in the absence of a constant
association, is permitted by the law of association of images. It is the
consciousness of one thing, without the necessary simultaneous con-
sciousness of the other. Abstraction or precision, therefore, supposes
a greater separation than discrimination, but a less separation than dis-
sociation. Thus I can discriminate red from blue, space from color,
and color from space, but not red from color. I can prescind red from
blue, and space from color (as is manifest from the fact that I actually
believe there is an uncolored space between my face and the wall) ;
but I cannot prescind color from space, nor red from color. I can dis-
sociate red from blue, but not space from color, color from space, nor
red from color.

Precision is not a reciprocal process. It is frequently the case,
that, while A cannot be prescinded from B, B can be prescinded from
A. This circumstance is accounted for as follows. Elementary con-
ceptions only arise upon the occasion of experience ; that is, they are
produced for the first time according to a general law, the condition
of which is the existence of certain impressions. Now if a conception
does not reduce the impressions upon which it follows to unity, it is a
mere arbitrary addition to these latter ; and elementary conceptions do
not arise thus arbitrarily. But if the impressions could be definitely
comprehended without the conception, this latter would not reduce
them to unity. Hence, the impressions (or more immediate concep-
tions) cannot be definitely conceived or attended to, to the neglect of an
elementary conception which reduces them to unity. On the other

VOL. VII. 37

290 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

hand, when such a conception has once been obtained, there is, in
general, no reason why the premises which have occasioned it should
not be neglected, and therefore the explaining conception may fre-
quently be prescinded from the more immediate ones and from the im-
pressions.

§ 6. The facts now collected afford the basis for a systematic method
of searching out whatever universal elementary conceptions there may
be intermediate between the manifold of substance and the unity of
being. It has been shown that the occasion of the introduction of a
universal elementary conception is either the reduction of the manifold
of substance to unity, or else the conjunction to substance of another
conception. And it has further been shown that the elements conjoined
cannot be supposed without the conception, whereas the conception
can generally be supposed without these elements. Now, empirical
psychology discovers the occasion of the introduction of a conception,
and we have only to ascertain what conception already lies in the data
which is united to that of substance by the first conception, but which
cannot be supposed without this first conception, to have the next con-
ception in order in passing from being to substance.

It may be noticed that, throughout this process, introspection is not
resorted to. Nothing is assumed respecting the subjective elements
of consciousness which cannot be securely inferred from the objective
elements.

§ 7. The conception of being arises upon the formation of a prop-
osition. A proposition always has, besides a term to express the sub-
stance, another to express the quality of that substance ; and the
function of the conception of being is to unite the quality to the sub-
stance. Quality, therefore, in its very widest sense, is the first concep-
tion in order in passing from being to substance.

Quality seems at first sight to be given in the impression. Such
results of introspection are untrustworthy. A proposition asserts the
applicability of a mediate conception to a more immediate one. Since
this is asserted, the more mediate conception is clearly regarded indepen-
dently of this circumstance, for otherwise the two conceptions would not
be distinguished, but one would be thought through the other, without
this latter being an object of thought, at all. The mediate conception,
then, in order to be asserted to be applicable to the other, must first be
considered without regard to this circumstance, and taken immediately.
But, taken immediately, it transcends what is given (the more imme-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES .* MAY 14, 1867. 291

diate conception), and its applicability to the latter is hypothetical.
Take, for example, the proposition, " This stove is black." Here the
conception of this stove is the more immediate, that of black the more
mediate, wliich latter, to be predicated of the former, must be dis-
criminated from it and considered in itself, not as applied to an object,
but simply as embodying a quality, blackness. Now this blackness is a
pure species or abstraction, and its application to this stove is entirely
hypothetical. The same thing is meant by " the stove is black," as by
" there is blackness in the stove." Embodying blackness is the equiv-
alent of black.* The proof is this. These conceptions are applied
indifferently to precisely the same facts. If, therefore, they were dif-
ferent, the one which was fii'st applied would fulfil every function of
the other ; so that one of them would be superfluous. Now a super-
fluous conception is an arbitrary fiction, whereas elementary concep-
tions arise only upon the requirement of experience ; so that a super-
fluous elementary conception is impossible. Moreover, the conception of
a pure abstraction is indispensable, because we cannot comprehend an
agreement of two things, except as an agreement in some respect, and
this respect is such a pure abstraction as blackness. Such a pure
abstraction, reference to which constitutes a quality or general attribute,
may be termed a ground.

Reference to a ground cannot be prescinded from being, but being
can be prescinded from it.

§ 8. Empirical psychology has established the fact that we can know a
quality only by means of its contrast with or similarity to another. By
contrast and agreement a thing is referred to a correlate, if this term
may be used in a wider sense than usual. The occasion of the intro-
duction of the conception of reference to a ground is the reference
to a correlate, and this is, therefore, the next conception in order.

Reference to a correlate cannot be prescinded from reference to a
gi-ound ; but reference to a ground may be prescinded from reference
to a correlate.

§ 9. The occasion of reference to a correlate is obviously by com-
parison. This act has not been sufficiently studied by the psycholo-
gists, and it will, therefore, be necessary to adduce some examples to
show in what it consists. Suppose we wish to compare the letters

* This agrees with the author of " De Generibus et Speciebus," Ouvrages Inedits
d'Abelard, p. 528.

292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

p and b. We may imagine one of them to be turned over on the
line of writing as an axis, then laid upon the other, and finally to be-
come transparent so that the other can be seen through it. In this
way we shall form a new image which mediates between the images
of the two letters, inasmuch as it represents one of them to be (when
turned over) the likeness of the other. Again, suppose we think of a
murderer as being in relation to a murdered person; in this case we
conceive the act of the murder, and in this conception it is repre-
sented that corresponding to every murderer (as well as to every mur-
der) there is a murdered person ; and thus we resort again to a medi-
ating representation which represents the relate as standing for a cor-
relate with which the mediating representation is itself in relation.
Again, suppose we look out the word homme in a French dictionary ;
we shall find opposite to it the word man, which, so placed, represents
homme as representing the same two-legged creature which man itself
represents. By a further accumulation of instances, it would be found
that every comparison requires, besides the related thing, the ground,
and the correlate, also a mediating representation which represents the
relate to he a representation of the same correlate which this mediating
representation itself represents. Such a mediating representation may
be termed an interpretant, because it fulfils the office of an interpreter,
who says that a foreigner says the same thing which he himself says.
The term representation is here to be understood in a very extended
sense, which can be explained by instances better than by a definition.
In this sense, a word represents a thing to the conception in the mind
of the hearer, a portrait represents the person for whom it is intended
to the conception of recognition, a weathercock represents the di-
rection of the wind to the conception of him who understands it, a
barrister represents his client to the judge and jury whom he influ-
ences.

Every reference to a correlate, then, conjoins to the substance the
conception of a reference to an interpretant ; and this is, therefore, the
next conception in order in passing from being to substance.

Reference to an interpretant cannot be prescinded from reference
to a correlate ; but the latter can be prescinded from the former.

§ 10. Reference to an interpretant is rendered possible and justified
by that which renders possible and justifies comparison. But that is
clearly the diversity of impressions. If we had but one impression, it
would not require to be reduced to unity, and would therefore not

OF AKTS AND SCIENCES: MAY 14, 1867. 293

need to be thought of as referred to an interpretant, and the concep-
tion of reference to an interpretant would not arise. But since there
is a manifold of impressions, we have a feeling of complication or confu-
sion, which leads us to differentiate the impression from that, and then,
having been differentiated, they require to be brought to unity. Now
they are not brought to unity until we conceive them together as being
ours, that is, until we refer them to a conception as their interpre-
tant. Thus, the reference to an interpretant arises upon the holding
together of diverse impressions, and therefore it does not join a con-
ception to the substance, as the other two references do, but unites
directly the manifold of the substance itself. It is, therefore, the last
conception in order in passing from being to substance.

§ 11. The five conceptions thus obtained, for reasons which will be
sufficiently obvious, may be termed categories. That is,

BEING,

Quality (Reference to a Ground),
Relation (Reference to a Correlate),
Representation (Reference to an Interpretant),
SUBSTANCE.

The three intermediate conceptions may be termed accidents.

§ 12. This passage from the many to the one is numerical. The con-
ception of a third is that of an object which is so related to two others,
that one of these must be related to the other in the same way in which
the third is related to that other. Now this coincides with the concep-
tion of an interpretant. An other is plainly equivalent to a correlate.
The conception of second differs from that of other, in implying the
possibility of a third. In the same way, the conception of self implies
the possibility of an other. The Ground is the self abstracted from
the concreteness which implies the possibility of another.

§ 13. Since no one of the categories can be prescinded from those
above it, the list of supposable objects which they afford is.

What is.

Quale — that which refers to a ground,
Relate — that which refers to ground and correlate,
Representamen — that which refers to ground, correlate, and
interpretant.

It.

§ 14. A quality may have a special determination which prevents

294 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

its being prescinded from reference to a correlate. Hence there are
two kinds of relation.

l«;t. That of relates whose reference to a ground is a prescindible
or internal quality.

2d. That of relates whose reference to a ground is an unprescindi-
ble or relative quality.

In the former case, the relation is a mere concurrence of the corre-
lates in one character, and the relate and correlate are not distin-
guished. In the latter case the correlate is set over against the relate,
and there is in some sense an opposition.

Relates of the first kind are brought into relation simply by their
agreement. But mere disagreement (unrecognized) does not consti-
tute relation, and therefore relates of the second kind are only brought
into relation by correspondence in fact.

A reference to a ground may also be such that it cannot be pre-
scinded from a reference to an interpretant. In this case it may be
termed an imputed quality. If the reference of a relate to its ground
can be prescinded from reference to an interpretant, its relation to its
correlate is a mere concurrence or community in the possession of a
quality, and therefore the reference to a correlete can be pre-cinded
from reference to an interpretant. It follows that there are three
kinds of representations.

1st. Those whose relation to their objects is a mere community in
some quality, and these representations may be termed Likenesses.

2d. Those whose relation to their objects consists in a correspondence
in fact, and these may be termed Indices or Sig?is.

3d. Those the ground of whose relation to their objects is an im-
puted character, which are the same as general signs, and these may
be termed Symbols.

§ 15. I shall now show liow the three conceptions of reference to a
ground, reference to an object, and reference to an interpretant are
the fundamental ones of at least one universal science, that of loiiic.
Logic is said to treat of second intentions as applied to first. It would
lead me too far away from the matter in hand to discuss the truth of
this statement ; I shall simply adopt it as one which seems to me
to afford a good definition of the subject-genus of this science. Now,
second intentions are the objects of the understanding considered
as representations, and the first intentions to which they apply are the
objects of those representations. The objects of the understanding,

QF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 14, 1867. 295

considered as representations, are symbols, that is, signs which are at
least potentially general. But the rules of logic hold good of any
symbols, of those which are written or spoken as well as of those
which are thought. They have no immediate application to likenesses
or indices, because no arguments can be constructed of these alone,
but do apply to all symbols. All symbols, indeed, are in one sense
relative to the understanding, but only in the sense in which also all
things are relative to the understanding. On this account, therefore,
the relation to the understanding need not be expressed in the defini-
tion of the sphere of logic, since it determines no limitation of that
sphere. But a distinction can be made between concepts which are
supposed to have no existence except so far as they are actually
present to the understanding, and external symbols which still retain
their character of symbols so long as they are only capable of being
understood. And as the rules of logic apply to these latter as much
as to the former, (and though only through the former, yet this charac-
ter, since it belongs to all things, is no limitation,) it follows that logic
has for its subject-genus all symbols and not merely concepts.* We
come, therefore, to this, that logic treats of the reference of symbols in
general to their objects. In this view it is one of a trivium of con-
ceivable sciences. The first would treat of the formal conditions of
symbols having meaning, that is of the reference of symbols in general
to their grounds or imputed characters, and this might be called formal
grammar; the second, logic, would treat of the formal conditions of the
truth of symbols ; and the third would treat of the formal conditions
of the force of symbols, or their power of appealing to a mind, that is,
of their reference in general to interpretants, and this might be called
formal rhetoric.

There would be a general division of symbols, common to all these
sciences ; namely, into,

1° : Symbols which directly determine only their grounds or imputed
qualities, and are thus but sums of marks or terms ;

* Herbart savs : " Unsre sammtlichen Gedanken lassen sich von zwei Seiten
betrachten ; theils als Thatigkeiten unscres Geistes, theils in Hinsicht (lessen, was
dureh sie gedacht wird. In letzerer Biziehung lieissen sie Begriffe, welches Wort,
indem es das Begriffene bezeiclinet, zu abstrahiren gebietet von der Art und Weise,
wie wir den Gedatiken empfangen, produciren, oder reproduciren mogen," But
the whole difference between a concept and an external sign lies in these respects
which logic ought, according to Herbart, to abstract from.

296 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

2° : Symbols which also independently determine their objects by
means of other term or terms, and thus, expressing their own objective
validity, become capable of truth or falsehood, that is, are propositions ;
and,

3° : Symbols which also independently determine their interpretants,
and thus tlie minds to which they appeal, by premising a proposition
or propositions whicli such a mind is to admit. These are arguments.

And it is remarkable that, among all the definitions of the proposition,
for example, as the oratio indicativa, as the subsumption of an object
under a concept, as the expression of the relation of two concepts, and
as the indication of the mutable ground of appearance, there is, per-
haps, not one in which the conception of reference to an object or
correlate is not the important one. In the same way, the conception
of reference to an interpretant or third, is always prominent in the
definitions of argument.

In a proposition, the term which separately indicates the object of the
symbol is termed the subject, and that which indicates the ground is
termed the predicate. The objects indicated by the subject (which
are always potentially a plurality, — at least, of phases or appearances)
are therefore stated by the proposition to be related to one another on
the ground of the character indicated by the predicate. Now this re-
lation may be either a concurrence or an opposition. Propositions of
concurrence are those which are usually considered in logic ; but I
have shown in a paper upon the classification of arguments that it
is also necessary to consider separately propositions of opposition, if
we are to take account of such arguments as the following: —

Whatever is the half of anything is less than that of which it is
the half;

A is half of B:

.'. A is less than B.

The subject of such a proposition is separated into two terms, a
"subject nominative" and an "object accusative."

In an argument, the premises form a representation of the conclu-
sion, because thc^y indicate the interpretant of the argument, or repre-
sentation representing it to represent its object. The premises may
afford a likeness, index, or symbol of the conclusion. In deductive
argument, the conclusion is represented by the premises as by a
general sign under which it is contained. In hypotheses, something

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES: MAY 14, 1867. 297

like the conclusion is proved, that is, the premises form a likeness of
the conclusion. Take, for example, the following argument : —

31 is, for instance, P', P", P", and P'^ ;

S isP', P", P'", andPi^:

.-. S is M.

Here the first premise amounts to this, that " P P", P", and P'^ "
is a likeness of M, and thus the premises are or represent a likeness
of the conclusion. That it is different with induction another example
will show.

S', S", S'", and /S'^ are taken as samples of the collection M;

S', S", S"',and S'^ areP:

.-. All 31 is P.

Hence the first premise amounts to saying that " S', S", S'", and S''' "
is an index of 31. Hence the premises are an index of the conclu-
sion.

The other divisions of terms, propositions, and arguments arise
from the distinction of extension and comprehension. I propose to
treat this subject in a subsequent paper. But I will so far anticipate
that, as to say that there is, first, the direct reference of a symbol to
its objects, or its denotation ; second, the reference of the symbol to
its ground, thx'ough its object, that is, its reference to the common
characters of its objects, or its connotation ; and third, its reference to
its interpretants through its object, that is, its reference to all the syn-
thetical propositions in which its objects in common are subject or
predicate, and this I term the information it embodies. And as every
addition to what it denotes, or to what it connotes, is effected by means
of a distinct proposition of this kind, it follows that the extension
and comprehension of a term are in an inverse relation, as long as
the information remains the same, and that every increase of informa-
tion is accompanied by an increase of one or other of these two quan-
tities. It may be observed that extension and comprehension are
very often taken in other senses in which this last proposition is not
true.

This is an imperfect view of the application which the conceptions

VOL. VII. 38

298 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

which, according to our analysis, are the most fundamental ones find
in the sphere of logic. It is believed, however, that it is sufficient to
show that at least something may be usefully suggested by con-
sidering this science in this light.

Five Uuudred and eiglity-third Meeting.

May 28, 1867. — Annual Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The following Report of the Council upon the changes
which had occurred in the Academy during the past year
was presented.

In surveying the events of the past year, as respects the membership
of the Academy, the Council would first call attention to the losses
which we have sustained, and would put upon record some brief tribute
to the memory of our deceased associates. We have lost six Fellows,
two Associate Fellows, and one Foreign Honorary Member, — nine in
all.

Four of the six taken from our immediate circle, Messrs. Hayward,
Mussey, Swett, and Jenks, were well advanced in years ; two, Dr.
Gould and Dr. Bryant, were suddenly removed from active life and
stations which they might have been expected much longer to adorn.
All have left names and memories to be affectionately cherished by
this society.

James Hayward was born in Concord, Massachusetts, in the year
1786, and died July 27, 1866. His youth was passed on his father's
farm, first in Concord, and afterwards in Plainfield, Hampshire County,
to which place his father removed when James was eight years old.
Anxious to obtain a liberal education, he left his home at the age of
eighteen, in the hope of finding in Boston employment that would give
him the means of accomplishing his purpose. After three years of
fruitless effort he returned to his old home, and took the management
of his father's farm, teaching school in winter, and studying at intervals.
It was not until 1815, when he was twenty-nine years old, that he was
able to caiTy out his purpose of entering college at Cambridge. Grad-
uating in 1819, he entered the Divinity School, and went througli its
course* but having been appointed tutor in mathematics in the Col-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: MAY 28, 1867. 299

lege in 1820, he continued in that office until 1826, when he became
Professor of Mathematics and Natural Philosophy. The very next
year, however, he resigned his professorship, to devote himself to Civil
Engineering ; and the same year he was appointed a member of the
State Board of Internal Improvements, and also engineer to this Board.

His first work appears to have been a survey, made in 1827, of a line
from Boston to Providence for a railroad to be worked by horse-power.
This was followed by a survey of a line from Plymouth to Wareham.
In 1829 he visited Pennsylvania and Maryland, and made a report on
the internal improvements of those "States. These and similar labors
give him an honorable place among those who introduced the railway
system into Massachusetts. Subsequently (1836 to 1845) he was en-
gineer of the Boston and Maine Railroad, the greater part of which
was built by him. He was President of this road from 1853 to 1856.
Mr. Hayvvard also took an early interest in the preservation of the
harbor of Boston, and was a member of the first Board of Harbor
Commissioners. Besides the extended surveys then made, and others
ten years later, as a Commissioner on the third Board he was con-
sulted, in 1850, by a Committee of the Legislature on the Harbor, and
in 1853 by a Commitiee of the City Government on the Harbor, and
made reports to both these bodies. In the former of these reports
he recommended the building of a sea-wall along the northern border
of the South Boston flats to Fort Independence, which is one of the
main features in the present plans for improving the harbor. Mr.
Hayward was elected into this Academy in 1834.

At the close of his long and useful career, Mr^Hayward testified
his love of science and his interest in the elevation of his fellow-men
by many noble bequests. Among the most important of these were
three of $ 20,000 each to the Observatory at Cambridge, to the Massa-
chusetts Institute of Technology, and to the Unitarian Association, for
the support of foreign missions.

Dr. Reuben Durrand Mussey died in*Boston on the 21st of
June, 1866, at the age of eighty-six years, having been born at Pel-
ham, New Hampshire, June 23, 1780. His childhood was passed in
different country towns of New Hampshire, in which his father suc-
cessively resided, until, at the age of twenty-one, he entered the Junior
class at Dartmouth College. He pursued his medical studies at the
same institution, under the tuition of the celebrated Professor Nathan
Smith, and afterwards at the University of Pennsylvania, from which

300 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

he took the degree of Doctor in Medicine in 1809. Dr. Mussey was
a representative of a class not uncommon in New England, of young
men early thrown upon their own i-esources, whose diligence, enter-
prise, good sense, and indomitable self-reliance have gradually conducted
them to elevated positions in society. He was an original thinker, an
honest reformer, a leader rather than a follower of public opinion.
While a student at Philadelphia he instituted some important experi-
ments on the subject of cutaneous absorption, which gave distinction
to his name then and afterwards. He began the practice of medicine
at Salem, with much success ; and took at once so marked a position
that he was elected into this Academy at the anniversary meeting in
1811, fifty-six years ago. He was soon (in 1814) made Professor of
the Theory and Practice of Medicine in Dartmouth College, where
he was the principal pillar of the Medical School, lecturing simul-
taneously on three several departments of medical science. His prac-
tice, especially in surgery, was large and arduous. His celebrity as
a teacher procured for him invitations to join the medical schools of
several of the most important cities of the West, and ended in his
establishment at Cincinnati as one of the pi'incipal professors in the
Ohio Medical College. After fourteen years in this service, and six
in connection with the Miami Medical College, he resigned his official
du^es, and returned to spend a serene old age among his friends and
kindred in Boston.

Dr. Mussey was a prominent friend of temperance ; and his unspar-
ing efforts, both by precept and example, have done much to abate the
abuse of stimulatiiig liquors in our own country, if indeed that crying
evil can be said to be yet abated. His opinions as to diet were those
of an ultraist. It is well known, that he subsisted for the last thirty
years of his life without meat or stimulants, confining himself wholly
to vegetable food, water, and milk. It is probable that he will not
have many followers in this ascetic mode of living ; yet, as he enjoyed
unusual health and activity of body and mind to a very advanced age,
his example, added to others previously known, may at least help to
establish the fact that such a diet, when not contra-indicated, is safe
and salutary, as it is economical.

Dr. Augustus Addison Gould died in Boston, suddenly, of
jholera, on the 15th of September last, in the sixty-first year of his
age. He was born at New Ipswich, New Hampshire, April 23, 1805.
When old enough to labor, the larger part of the year was given to

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 28, 1867. 301

his father's farm, -^ a few winter months to the common schooh When
only fifteen years old he toolv the whole charge of the farm, but still
managed to secure a few months for study, so that, after a year in an
academy, he was able to enter Harvard College, in 1821 ; although, as
he tells us, so ill prepared that his college life was a continual struggle
to overcome the barriers which straitened means had placed between
himself and the things he aspired to. By severe industry and strict
economy he made his way, both as to livelihood and learning, and was
graduated with respectable rank. He became a private tutor in Mary-
land, and at the same time began the study of medicine, which he
completed in Boston, passing a year in the Massachusetts General
Hospital, as house student, and taking his degree of M. D. in 1830.
His struggle with poverty was not yet ended. He had to undertake
various tasks, the most Herculean of which was the preparation of the
catalogue, in four large folio volumes, of the fifty thousand pamphlets
in the library of the Boston Athenceum. But he always found some
time for the scientific studies in which he soon became eminent. His
taste for Natural History, which had begun to show itself in college,
especially in the way of botany, now took its particular bent. His
first scientific memoir, communicated to the Boston Society of Natural
History, — of which he was one of the earliest, and always one of the
most efficient members, — was on the Oicindelce of Massachusetts.
The next was a monograph of the species of the genus Pupa, found
in the United States, in which he points out how their classification
might be improved by the use of the microscope. In 1841 he read
before the same society a paper on the geographical distribution of the
shells of Massachusetts, dealing with considerations which had at that
time attracted little attention. He showed the proportion between the
marine and the fresh-water species (forty-two of the latter to two hun-
dred and three of the former), and stated that, on a careful comparison,
he was unable to satisfy himself that any of the fresh-water species
were common to the Old World and the New; and, finally, he indi-
cated the fact that Cape Cod forms an impassable barrier to the exten-
sion of many marine species.

But the most considerable of his earlier contributions to science was
his Report on the Invertebrate Animals of Massachusetts, chiefly de-
voted, however, to the Mollusca. Up to this time there had been few
if any attempts at so complete a survey of the zoology of any partic-
ular region of the United States. This fills a volume of 400 pages.

302 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

illustrated by more than 200 figures skilfully drawn with his own
hands, and every species was described anew, — the whole in a man-
ner to atti-act the attention and admiration of naturalists, both at home
and abroad, and to secure for the author a prominent position in their
ranks. His largest and most important work was that upon the shells
of the United States Exploring Expedition under Captain Wilkes, the
text of which fills a large quarto volume, the illustrations an imperial
folio atlas. This was undertaken under peculiar difficulties, growing
mainly out of the fact that Captain Couthouy, by whom the collection
was chiefly made, had left the expedition before the voyage was fin-
ished ; that the shells were not well cared for, and were much confused
at Washington before Dr. Gould was called to the rescue of this very
valuable collection. The published results of his investigation are
comprised, not only in the generic and specific characters and descrip-
tions, but in some valuable generalizations and suggestions in the intro-
ductory part of the volume, upon geographical distribution, upon what
are called representative forms, urging also tliat animals from widely
distant or dissevered regions should be assumed to be different, however
close their resemblance, until their identity can be proved, — a rule,
the earlier recognition of which would have saved much labor and con-
fusion in the determination of synonymes. He also here indicates the
fact that shells of particular and separated regions have each a physi-
ognomy of their own, just as have the human races.

Of Dr. Gould's numerous lesser scientific labors and writings the
most noteworthy are his completion of the admirable work on the
Terrestrial Air-breathing Mollusca of the TJnited States, left unfinished
by the late Dr. Binney ; a portion of the Principles of Zoology, written
conjointly with Professor Agassiz ; accounts of collections of shells
received from Rev. Francis Mason, missionary to Burmah, from Doc-
tors Savage and Perkins, missionaries to Africa, and from Dr. Bates,
U. S. N., from the coast of Liberia ; also of collections made in the
Pacific Railroad Surveys and other expeditions. These papers all
relate to conchology, in which he was high authority. But that his
scientific interests and activities were not restricted is well known to
his associates in this Academy, and in the Natural History Society,
and may be seen from his communications upon a great variety of
topics, printed in their Proceedings, or often merely referred to ; for
he seldom wrote out his communications, and thus mucli of value has
been lost.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 28, 1867. 303

In considering as we have done Di\ Gould's various and fruitful
labors as a naturalist, it must not be forgotten that these were performed
in the intervals of the duties of a most exacting profession, to which
he was thoroughly devoted, and in which he was distinguished. He
called one of his books, in which the fruits of his principal concholog-
ical work are usefully gathered and systematized, Otia, being, as he
says, " the pi'oduct of leisure moments in active professional life, and
indeed of moments to no small extent stolen from sleep."

Of the high estimation in which he was held by his medical brethren
we need not here speak. His term of service as President of the
Massachusetts Medical Society ended only a few months before his
death. His inaugural address, pronounced at the anniversary of that
society, upon the Observation of Nature, was a masterly discourse, and
shows better than his technical writings could do the range and the
solid character of his mind. By an analysis of some of the facts
contained in the census of the United States for 1860 Dr. Gould
was enabled to bring out and confirm certain important conclusions
respecting the geographical distribution of consumption ; from which
it appears that the greatest mortality from this disease occurs in the
extreme north ; and that this diminishes southward almost regularly
with the latitude, — causing, for instance 29 per cent of all the
deaths in Maine ; but only 3 per cent in Arkansas. He adds some
valuable suggestions as to the choice of places of resort for invalids,
especially for disabled soldiers of the United States.

As a citizen Dr.. Gould, upon principle, never excused himself from
his full share of duty on the ground of professional or scientific pre-
occupations ; but in the public schools and charities, in the religious so-
ciety which he joined in early life, and in the scientific and various
other associations of which he was an honored and influential member,
he well exemplified the rule that those who are busiest are apt to have
most leisure to be helpful.

A model of industry, he seldom rested from toil, and to the end each
day was full to the round. Yet he found time for social intercourse,
if not as much as his genial temperament and symp'athetic nature
craved; and he enjoyed it, when he could, with real zest. His refined
taste and exact knowledge made him a discerning and judicious critic ;
and during his life many volumes, scientific and other, passed under
his eye for friendly revision.

His love for natural scenery was genuine and hearty, and to him a

304 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

source of great enjoyment, especially when he could share it with
others. Unlike many naturalists to whom the shores they tread and
the mountains they climb offer nothing beyond the forms they would
describe and arrange, all else being as if it were not, our late asso-
ciate (than whom no one ever toiled more industriously over indi-
vidual forms and nice distinctions) was touched and w^armed by every
aspect of nature, in its grander and gentler scenes ; not that he
was peculiarly enthusiastic or emotional, but rather from the delicate
perception and calm contemplation of a refined, devout, and responsive
spirit.

He was elected into this Academy in May, 1841, and for many years
he rendered useful service in various offices.

Dr. Henry Bryant, whom we lost as suddenly and unexpectedly
as Dr. Gould, and fi'om the same section of the Academy, died in Porto
Eico, on the 31st of Januai'y last, in early manhood, not having com-
pleted his forty-seventh year. He was born in Boston, May 12, 1820;
entered Harvard College in 1836, and was graduated in 1840, without
literary distinction, but with a mind awakened to the attractions of
natural science. After taking his degree of Doctor of Medicine, in 1843,
he went to Paris to prosecute further his professional studies. There
he received, after severe competitive examination, the post o^ interne at
the Hospital Bemijou ; but was soon obliged by ill health to resign it.
Partly for the re-establishment of his health, he accepted the invitation
of some officers of the French army to accompany them to Algeria,
where he served during a winter campaign as volunteer surgeon.

He came home in 1847, and commenced the practice of his profes-
sion. But his precarious health obliged him finally to abandon it.
Thenceforth he devoted his time principally to natural history, and par-
ticularly to ornithology, which had been a favorite pursuit from boy-
hood. This was the occupation most suitable to his delicate health, as
it led him to live a good deal in the open air. He visited, in the way
of scientific exploration. Nova Scotia, Canada and Labrador, Florida
and the Bahamas, Cuba, Jamaica, and Porto Rico, some of them repeat-
edly, — to the great profit of his favorite science, as is shown in the
various ornithological papers he communicated to the Boston Society of
Natural Histoiy. Besides these papers, he made, while in Paris, a
communication to the French Academy of Sciences, on the nervous
system of bii'ds, which is published in the Comptes Rendus for 1848.

Dr. Bryant was a very vigilant and acute observer, — one who

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 28, 1867. 305

always insisted upon seeing with his own eyes, and was not overmuch
indined to reverence authority, or rely on commonly received state-
ments. ' Not only were his own personal services very considerable in
the exploring of regions ditficult of access, or in the investigation of
facts difficult to observe ; but when, as of late years, he could command
the means, these were liberally given in aid of other explorers in his
favorite fields.

At the outbreak of the Eebellion he went at once to Washington
and oiFered his services to the government. Commissioned as assistant
surgeon in the regular army, without waiting for a position he accepted
that of surgeon in the Twentieth Regiment of Massachusetts Volun-
teers in July, 1861, and was made brigade surgeon in the following
September, but remained with his regiment until after the disaster of
Ball's Bluif in October. Afterwards he served on the staffs of Generals
Lander and Shields, until he was oi'dered to Washington to take charge
of the Lincoln Plospital, — one of the first large hospitals established,
while the medical department of the army was as yet imperfectly organ-
ized, so that the whole responsibility for plan and execution came mostly
upon the surgeon in charge. In this position Dr. Bryant's remarkable
talent for administration was conspicuous ; and his hospital, was pro-
nounced, by professional men, to be admirable. His failing health
obliged him to resign his commission before the close of the war. Af-
terwards he went abroad with his family ; and in France he bought
and presented to the Boston Society of Natural History the La Fres-
naye collection of birds, comprising nearly nine thousand specimens,
and probably unequalled in types of American species by any cabinet
in Europe. Returning home late in the year 1866, he sailed for the
West Indies, as winter drew on, intending thence to rejoin his family
in France, and in spring to return home with them. Landing at
Porto Rico, he was seized, on the 30th of January, with a severe ill-
ness, of uncertain character, but rode with great suffering twenty-five
miles to Araceibo, where, the next day, he closed — for us, far too
soon — a life of rare excellence and promise.

Rev. Dr. William Jenks, — the most venerable of our late de-
parted associates, — died in Boston on the 13th of November last,
in the eighty-eighth year of his age. He was born at Newton, Massa-
chusetts, November 25, 1778, and was the son of Captain Samuel and
Mary (Haynes) Jenks. His parents having removed to Boston in his
early childhood, he received a classical education in the Latin School,

VOL. VII. 39

306 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

and entered Harvard College in 1793, where he was devoted to the study
of Greek, and was one of the founders of the Hasty Pudding Club. He
was graduated in 1797, and at his death left the Hon. Horace Binney,
of Philadelphia, the only survivor of his class. He married, October
22, 1797, Miss Betsey Russell of Boston, with whom he enjoyed fifty-
three years of domestic companionship, as the mother of his children
and his associate in varied professional cares, till her death in Boston
in September, 1850. He and his wife were among the first in the
country to celebrate a " golden wedding." As a teacher, pastor, and
scholar in classical and Oriental studies, and as a most earnest and de-
voted laborer in various causes of humanity and philanthropy, he was
enabled to crowd a long life with much valuable service.

After his graduation he devoted himself to the work of instruction,
having pupils from various parts of the country. While pursuing the
study of Theology he was employed as reader in the Episcopal Church
in Cambridge, and prepared twenty-five students for college. Having
adopted the views and principles of the Congregationalists, he accepted,
in 1806, a pastorate in that communion at Bath, Maine, which he filled
for twelve years. During the last three of those years he served as
Professor of Oriental and English Literature in Bowdoin College,
declining an invitation which he had received to succeed the eminent
Dr. Buckminster in the ministry at Portsmouth, New Hampshire. He
was ever an active friend of Bowdoin, and for many years a trustee
and overseer. The degree of Doctor in Divinity was conferred upon
him by Bowdoin College in 1825, and by Harvard in 1842, and that
of Doctor of Laws, at a subsequent period, by the former college.
While living in Maine, Mr. Jenks was Regimental and afterward
Brigade Chaplain in our army, till the close of the war of 1812.

In 1818 Mr. Jenks returned to Boston, and opened a private school;
continuing, however, to preach as opportunity offered, interesting him-
self in the religious instruction of seamen, for whom he procured
the erection of free chapels, in which he ministered. He performed
this service as Secretary of the Boston Society for the Moral and
Religious Instruction of the Poor, being, in fact, the first "missionary
at large" in the city. He opened seven distinct religious assemblies
in as many different localities, which generally became established
churches. His zeal, and the high estimation in which he was held,
led to the gathering of a new religious society and church, who built a
place of worship in Green Street, installing him its pastor in 1825, for

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 28, 1867. SOT

a ministry of twenty years.' While sustaining tins office he undertook
and completed the chief literary labor of his life, — the preparation and
publication of a compend of various expository and illustrative works
on the contents of the Holy Scriptures. This appeared from the press
during the years 1833-1838, in six imperial octavo volumes, entitled
"A Comprehensive Commentary on the Holy Scriptures," a list of twen-
ty thousand subscribers having anticipated its publication. He also, sub-
sequently, prepared his " Explanatory Bible Atlas." He was among
the very fii'st in the circle of our literary men to cultivate and pursue
the study of the Oriental languages and literature ; and, in connection
with our late President, the Hon. John Pickering, and the Rev. Dr.
Anderson, he led the way in founding the American Oriental Society.
He was also an active member of the Massachusetts Historical Society.
His acquaintance with the present State of Maine, while it was a
District of Massachusetts, and his known philanthropical and religious
interest in the aborigines, led to his appointment by this Common-
wealth to induce the Indians to exchange a roaming life as hunters
for that of permanent residents and tillers of the soil.

For all his trusts and duties he proved himself a most faithful and
efficient agent. He gathered a large and valuable library, characteris-
tic in its contents of his own mind and tastes. He wrote for publica-
tion numerous papers, small and brief in their size and contents, but
requiring scholarship, research, and the exercise of intelligent judg-
ment, in their subject-matter. Some of these appeared in pamphlet
form, others will be found in the Collections, Transactions, or Proceed-
ings of the Societies of which he was a member". There are poetical
pieces above ordinary merit from his pen, and he left in manuscript
many valuable fruits of his industrious and lengthened life.

The large and very miscellaneous library, the manuscripts and dia-
ries which this venerable man has left behind him, bear witness alike
to his conscientious industry, the wide scope of his mental activity, and
the pure and lofty aims of his heart. It is to be considered that he en-
gaged upon the most difficult linguistic studies, even of the languages
of China, Hindostan, Turkey, &c., before commerce or missionary zeal,
or the accumulation of the many facilities and the helpful apparatus
of our times had brought to the aid of the inquirer any external guid-
ance or labor-saving appliances. Yet, when actual need was felt in
our community of men and information for opening the way to the
extended intercourse and the Christian enterprise of the last forty

308 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

years, Dr. Jenks proved to be a most valuable pioneer and counsel-
lor. He had never crossed the ocean ; but it is believed that he could
have imparted valuable information touching their own countries, in
his own home, to travellers hither from all parts of the world.

The personal character of this excellent man, distinguished as he
was by many virtues, and beloved for his winning and gracious ways,
deserves for its rehearsal more space than could be fitly occupied here.
He was short in stature, and distinguished in bodily presence by one
characteristic which has marked him during the last few years as he
walked the streets, as he attended the meetings of the learned, the
humane, or the religious fellowships in which his mind and heart were
so engaged, or silently shared the platform or the pulpit close beside
the speakers. An infirmity of hearing visited upon him a severe dep-
rivation of what he craved so much. He carried with him a large
ear-trumpet which he set upon its office when a friend approached to
speak with him, or when he put a question which required an answer.
The exquisite urbanity and courtesy of his manner, his venerable
looks, and his grateful appreciation of the effort made to commu-
nicate with him, removed all the irksomeness and constraint from that
fettered mode of intercourse. He seemed to be the last survivor of
the old school of Christian gentlemen among us, — modest, deliberate,
and refined in his bearing ; considerate and measured in his speech,
and carrying with him everywhere an atmosphere of grace and gentle-
ness. He was a profoundly religious man. His relations and inter-
course with eminent and worthy as well as with humble and untaught
members of the different religious fellowships, and the wide compass
of his studies, gave him a most comprehensive friendliness, and a lai'ge
liberality. He exhibited constant fidelity to his own convictions, with
a strong allegiance in love with those who coincided in them, and a
most respectful recognition of views from which he differed, and of
those who held them.

Colonel Samuel Swett, who died in Boston on the 28th of Octo-
ber last, had reached the age of eighty-four years. He was born at
Newburyport June 9, 1782; was prepared for college at the Grammar
School of his native town by his father. Dr. John Barnard Swett ; and
received his degree of Bachelor of Arts at Harvard, with the class of
1800. Having studied law, first with Judge Jeremiah Smith of New
Hampshire, and afterwards with Judges Jackson and Livermoi'e of
Massachusetts, he commenced the practice of his profession at Salem in

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: MAY 28, 1867. 309

«
1803, but relinquished it in 1810, to become a partner with his brother
in the mercantile house of William B, Swett & Co. in Boston, having in
the mean time married a daughter of the eminent mei'chant, the late
Hon. William Gray. Soon after the breaking out of the war of 1812
he was active in organizing a volunteer corps in Boston, under the
name of the New England Guards, of which he was the first com-
mander, and which, under his lead, rendered important service in defence
of our coast and harbor. Joining the United States Army as a volun-
teer, in 1814, he served as a topographical engineer on the staff of
General Izard, with the rank of Major. After the declaration of
peace he was an aid-de-camp to Governor Brooks, and was ever after-
wards known as Colonel Swett. He had a strong taste for military
service, and devoted not a little study to the science of war, even to
the latest years of his life. Few men followed the campaigns of the
late Rebellion with more intelligent and patriotic ardor, or were more
ingenious and fertile in the suggestion of whatever might contribute
to the comfort, safety, and success of the Union soldiers. He was a
member, successively, of the Common Council and of the School
Committee of Boston, and for three years one of its Representatives
in the Legislature. He was a frequent contributor to some of our mag-
azines and newspapers ; and, on his return from Europe, whither he
had gone about the time of Napoleon's return from Elba, he pub-
lished in the Boston Daily Advertiser an account of his tour, and of
the events he had witnessed during the memorable Hundred Days.
His principal, if not his only, independent publication, however, was
an elaborate account of the Battle of Bunker Hill, in a pamphlet,
which went through more than one edition. He was elected into the
Academy in May, 1813.

Of his five children, two sons and a daughter survive him ; but his
wife died in 1844, and his eldest son, a Unitarian clergyman of many
remarkable gifts, in 1843. Colonel Swett bore his bereavements and
infirmities with a brave heart ; and his familiar figure, though sorely
bent by age, was seen in our streets, and at the meetings of our own
Academy, until Avithin a few months of his death.

Henry Darwin Rogers, for many years one of our most distin-
guished Resident Fellows, and whose name was, in consequence of his
change of abode, transferred to the Associate list two years ago, died
at Shawlands, near Glasgow, upon the very day of our annual meet-
ing last year, namely, on the 29th of May, 1866. Born in Phila-

310 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

delphia on the 1st of August, 1808, he had not completed his fifty-
eighth year.

He was the third in age of four brothers, — only two of whom sur-
vive, — who, inspired and guided by their father, Dr. Patrick Kerr
Rogers, Professor of Natural Philosophy and Chemistry in William
and Mary College, Virginia, — as if by mutual agreement, all gave
their lives to the cultivation and teaching of physical science. From
his youth, the subject of the present notice evinced so decided a predi-
lection for these studies and became so proficient in them, that, in his
twenty-second year, he was made Professor of Physics and Natural
History in Dickinson College, at Carlisle, Pennsylvania, where, at the
same time, he edited a periodical called a " Messenger of Useful Know^l-
edge." Here he began his first independent studies in structural and
dynamical geology, in which he was destined greatly to excel.

Seeking better opportunities, he soon resigned his chair, and passed
a year in England, studying chemistry under the late Professor Turner,
and accompanying the late De la Beche in his geological explorations.
Returning to Philadelphia, he devoted his whole time to scientific in-
vestigations. In conjunction with our other lately deceased associate.
Professor Bache, he made and published a valuable series of analj^ses
of the ashes of coal ; and he aided his brother, our own William B.
Rogers, in experiments upon " the laws of the Voltaic battery " (pub-
lished in Silliman's Journal), and in preparing two memoirs upon " the
Tertiary Formations of Eastern Virginia," which were published in the
Transactions of the American Philosophical Society. At the request
of the Council of the British Association for the Advancement of Sci-
ence, he prepared a report on the Geology of North America, which
was printed in the third Annual Report of that body, and was in part
republished in this country in Bradford's edition of Murray's Encyclo-
paedia of Geography.

His first systematic geological labor was that of conducting the sur-
vey of the State of New Jersey, of which he published a report in
8vo, with a geological map. While thus engaged a similar survey
of the great State of Pennsylvania was provided for by the Legislature,
and placed under his direction. Tliis, the most important scientific
labor of his life, was commenced early in the year 1836, and, with va-
rious interruptions and embarrassments growing out of legislative in-
action, was completed by him in the spring of 1855. The fruits of these
prolonged labors have been given to the world in his great work en-

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 28, 1867. 311

titled " Geology of Pennsylvania, Government Survey ; with a General
View of the Geology of the United States, Essays on the Coal Forma-
tion and its Fossils, and a Description of the Coal Fields of North Amer-
ica and Great Britain." This great woi*k is contained in three royal
quarto volumes, illustrated by forty-five sketches of scenery, forty-seven
geological sections, two plates of columns of strata, twenty-three plates
of coal fossils, and seven hundred and seventy-eight wood engravings
of views and diagrams of coal-beds, &c., and accompanied by a general
geological map of the State, a special map of the anthracite coal-
basins, and two large sheets containing the nine general sections, eluci-
dating the geological map.

During the early progress of this work he produced, in conjunction
with his brother, William B. Rogers, the well-known memoir " On the
Physical Structure of the Appalachian Chain," unfolding certain dy-
namical laws which have regulated the elevation of mountain chains.
About the same time (1842) he published an elaborate paper on the
origin of the Appalachian coal strata, bituminous and anthracitic, con-
taining much original observation and important speculative views ;
his brother pursuing a parallel system of investigations in Virginia,
where the formations are identical with those of Pennsylvania. The
result of the labor of these two brothers, carried on for ten years
together, was the grand discovery of the structural unity of central
North America, between the Appalachian chain and the Eocky
Mountains, the great lakes and the Delta inclusive ; a ftict of such im-
portance that it must serve in future as a guide to all general reseai'ch-
es ; since it is not reasonable to suppose that so large a portion of the
earth's surface should have been formed in any other than the normal
mode. Occupying at this time the chair of Geology in the University of
Pennsylvania, he gave instruction in that science in the intervals of
his labors on the State Survey. He also delivered courses of lectures
at the Lowell Institute and elsewhere ; on all such occasions showing
that readiness and felicity of diction, without the use of notes, for
which, he had always been remarkable.

He was one of the founders, and an early President, of the American
Association of Geologists, which, after an active and most useful career,
expanded into the American Association for the Advancement of Sci-
ence. Although chiefly devoted to geological research. Professor Rogers
paid much attention to those sciences of which geology is the extended
application, — Natural History, Climatology, and Physical Geography.

312 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

In 1855 he contributed to Keith Johnson's Physical Atlas the Geo-
logical Map of the United States and British North America; and the
Chart of the Arctic Basin, with the accompanying letter-press, and
the text of the somewhat later Geographical Atlas of North America,
is from his pen. The philosophical questions arising from these studies
especially intei'ested him ; indeed, the whole bent of his mind was in
an eminent degree philosophical rather than technical.

In the year 1857, while in Edinburgh superintending the publica-
tion of his Geological Report, he was appointed Regius Professor of
Natural History and Geology and Curator of the Hunterian Museum,
in the University of Glasgow, and thenceforth became a resident of
Scotland. While devoting himself to the duties of his chair, he be-
came associated with Jardine and Balfour in the editorship of the Edin-
burgh New Philosophical Journal, contributed a paper on ^' The Laws
of Structure of the more disturbed Zones of the Earth's Crust ""to the
Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, and found time ibr a
number of scientific essays, published in Blackwood and Good Words,
as well as for occasional lectures on his favorite geological topics in
London, Edinburgh, and elsewhere.

On revisiting, as it proved for the last time, his native country, in
1855, his friends were concerned to see that his health had given way
under his prolonged and excessive labors, overtasking a constitution,
elastic indeed, but not naturally robust. He returned to Glasgow, re-
invigorated it was thought ; but we soon heard, with sorrow, that he
was no more.

Although the eminent position in geology held by our Jate associate,
and somewhat of the nature and dominant influence of the general
views of the associated brothers, may be inferentially gathei'ed from
this biographical sketch, yet we are, for obvious reasons, prevented
from entering upon their consideration here, nor indeed is it neces-
sary to do so. Of him whom we have lost, suffice it to record, here,
in simplest and briefest phrase, that he was a most accomplished
investigator, a graceful and persuasive teacher, and fascinating com-
panion ; that to rare powers and attainments he added a lively sym-
pathy in all the interests of humanity, and a courageous devotion to
whatever he deemed just and true.

Alexander Dallas Bachk, born in Philadelphia on the 19th of
July, 1806, was the son of Richard Bache, and grandson of the only
daughter of Benjamin Franklin. His mother was Sophia Dallas,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: MAY 28, 1867. 313

daughter of Alexander J. Dallas, of a family also well known in the
history of this country. Remarkable from early boyhood for his
aptitude in the acquisition'of learning, he was appointed a cadet in the
National Military Academy at West Point before he had completed
the fifteenth year of his age. Here, although the youngest pupil, he
soon reached a high grade of scholarship, and maintained it throughout
the coui-se, graduating in 1825 at the head of his class; — a class of
such marked ability that it furnished no less than five successful can-
didates to the corps of Engineers. It has been mentioned as a solitary
instance in the history of the Academy, noted for its rigid discipline,
that he passed through the entire course of four years without a single
mark of demerit, and, what may be hardly less uncommon, without
calling forth the least manifestation of envy. Indeed his classmates,
as well as the teachers, seem to have taken pride in the high character
and scholarship of the youthful cadet. His room-mate, several years
his senior, and by no means noted for studious or regular habits,
assumed the office of guardian, sedulously protecting him from inter-
ruption or intrusion during the hours of study, and, it is said, habitually
excused his own shortcomings by pleading the importance of the duty
he thus performed. Not that yomig Bache himself needed a guardian,
except for his tender years and to protect him from hindrance on the
part of others. Sensible beyond his years of the responsibility which
would devolve upon him in the support of his widowed mother and
her younger children, and of the obligations incurred in his education
at the National School, he resolved from the first to exert his utmost
energies, — doubtless not unconscious, moreover, that, as a descendant
of Franklin, something more than ordinary might be expected from
him. Upon such a mind as his, the adage noblesse oblige could not
but have a powerful influence.

Upon his graduation he was selected, on account of his high standing,
to remain at the Academy as Assistant Professor, — a position which
gave him a desired opportunity to review and extend his studies.
But after a year in this service he was, at his own request, assigned
to engineering duty at Newport, Rhode Island, under the late General,
then Colonel Totten. Here for two years he was engaged in construct-
ing fortifications, devoting his extra hours to the study of physics
and chemistry.

The most important event of this pei-iod, however, and doubtless the
most influential upon his future success, was the acquaintance and

VOL. VII. 40

314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

engagement he formed with Miss Fowler, the daughter of an old and
highly respected citizen of Newport. The scanty pay of a Lieutenant
of Engineers, charged with the support of his mother and the younger
members of her family, forbade all init the remote prospect of marriage ;
when, fortunately as unexpectedly, he w'as invited to take the chair of
Natural Philosophy and Chemistry in the University of Pennsylvania,
at Philadelphia. This, while it opened to him his scientific career,
enabled him at once to gratify the warmest wish of his heart, and to
secure the companion and helpmate, who, devoting all her thoughts
and powers to encourage and assist him, contributed most efficiently to
his distinguished usefulness throughout his active life.

Important as was the offered position to his hopes and necessities,
and congenial to his tastes, the young officer so far distrusted his
ability to fill it, that he prudently retained his connection with the
army while the trial was made, — taking a year's leave of absence
without pay. But before the year elapsed his fitness for the vocation
was assured, and the entire confidence of the authoi'ities. and pupils of
the University secured. He could now undertake to do something for
the advancement of science by researches of his own. He became a
member, and soon an active officer of the Franklin Institute, then
newly established for the promotion of the mechanic arts, and was
thus brought into intimate association with the principal manufacturers,
engineers, and artisans of the city, as well as with persons more
directly engaged in scientific pursuits; workshops and laboi'atories
were throvA'n open to him, and other facilities supplied which he could
not otherwise have commanded ; and skilful men on every side ofJered
ready assistance in realizing the conceptions of his suggestive mind.
No doubt his descent from the illustrious philosopher and statesman,
whose name the Institute bears, added somewhat to the command-
ing influence which he acquired, mainly and worthily, however, by his
own industry, ability, courtesy, and rare powers of administration.
The volumes of the Journal of the Franklin Institute, from 1828 to
1835 inclusive, abundantly testify to his scientific activity.

The most important of these investigations was that upon the causes
of the explosion of steam-boilers, carried on by the Institute under bis
direction, and soon recognized by the General Government by an ap-
propriation to cover the expense. The results of these elaborate
researches and experiments, executed with skill and interpreted with
logical discrimination, were embodied in a series of propositions which,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 28, 1867. 315

after the lapse of more than thirty years, have not been superseded by
any others of more practical value. The most frequent cause of ex-
plosion was found to be the sudden generation of steam from allowing
the water to become too low, and its subsequent contact with the over-
heated sides of the boiler. Other assigned causes, such as the genera-
tion of gas from the decomposition of water, or the dispersion of water
in the form of spray through superheated steam, were successively
disproved.

Early elected into the American Pliilosophical Society, Professor
Bache was then associated with Hare, Espy, and other investigators.
Erecting for the purpose an observatory in the yard of his dwelling,
and with the aid of his wife and his pupil, afterwards his successor,
Professor Frazer, he accurately determined, for the first time in this
country, the periods of the daily variation of the magnetic needle,
and afterwards, the connection of the fitful variations of the direction
of the magnetic force with the appearances of the aurora borealis.
He also, in connection with Mr. Espy, made a minute survey of
the relative change of position of the trees and other objects upturned
by a tornado which passed over New Brunswick, New Jersey; and
deduced the fact that the tornado was a progressive and ascending
column of rarefied air, to which objects at a distance on eitlier side of
the track were drawn ; and not a horizontal rotation at the surface,
which would tend to throw them outward. In connection with Pro-
fessor Courtenay he made a series of determinations of the magnetic
dip at various places in the United States. Terrestrial magnetism
was with him a favorite subject, to which he continued to make valu-
able contributions at intervals during his life. He was also interested
in the phenomena of heat ; and he was the first to show, contrary to
the generally received opinion, that the radiation, and consequently
the absorption, of dark heat is not affected by color.

It should be noticed that these investigations were prosecuted in tlie
intervals of time not occupied by his duties as Professor in the Universi-
ty, into which his main strength was heartily thrown, and which absorbed
several hours a day, nor claimed by committees of the Franklin Institute
and the Philosophical Society. He was enabled to execute these mul-
tifarious labors, and to establish his character for promptitude in all
his engagements, by rigid system and an exact allotment of his time.
He thus found opportunity for all his duties, and, among them, to
attend to the claims of friendship and society.

316 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Professor Bache had just attained the thirtieth year of his age when,
in 1836, the Trustees of the Girard College for Orphans, preparatory^ to
orcfanizing that nobly-endowed charity, determined to select a suitable
person as President, and to send him abroad to study the organization
and methods of instruction of similar institutions in Europe. The eyes
of the community being with one accord turned to him, he was pre-
vailed upon to accept this important position, and — with lingering
regret for the scientific pursuits from which he was likely to be sepa-
rated — to turn his attention and powers of administration in a new
direction. He visited Europe under the most favorable circumstances
for becoming intimately acquainted with its scientific and educational
institutions ; he devoted two years to the work, and, on his return,
embodied the results in his well-known Report to the Trustees of
Girard College. This report fills a large 8vo. volume, and is an
almost exhaustive exposition of the systems of education in use at the
time in the schools of England, France, Germany, Switzerland, and
Italy, — the facts all founded on personal inspection, and recorded on
the spot with his habitual regard to entire accuracy ; and the practical
inferences and pregnant suggestions with which it abounds show how
thoroughly he had entered into a new line of inquiries.

He w^as now ready to commence the organization of the College ;
but this being deferred by the Trustees, Professor Bache, desirous of
turning the knowledge he had acquired to immediate practical account,
offered his services gratuitously to the municipal authorities of Phila-
delphia, and entered upon the organization of a system of public edu-
cation for that city on an improved basis. At the end of a year,
finding the Trustees of Girard College still unprepared to open the
institution, he declined the salary while yet retaining the office of
President, and devoted his time mainly to the organization of the
schools, now accepting from the city the salary needful for his support,
but much smaller than that he relinquished.

In 1842, having successfully established what was regarded as the
best system of combined free education which had at that time been
adopted in this country, and Girard College still remaining in a
statical condition, he resigned his connection with it, and, yielding to
solicitations of the Trustees of the University, returned to his former
chair of Natural Philosophy and Chemistry. He could now resume
the favorite pursuit of his life, the cultivation of physical science, —
which, however, he had never wholly abandoned. While abroad.

OF ARTS' AND SCIENCES : MAY 28, 1867. 317

with a set of portable instruments, he kept up a series of raagnetical
observations at selected points, with the view of accurately ascjertaining
the relative strength of the magnetic force in Europe and America, by
comparison with parallel observations made in this country. He had
also engaged in the combined enterprise, pi'oposed and furthered by
the British Association, to determine the fluctuation of the magnetical
and meteorological elements of the globe by contemporaneous obser-
vations at many widely separated stations. For this he established an
Observatory at Girard College, which was equipped with instruments
by the Trustees, and supported by the American Philosophical Society
and several liberal citizens. The observations here made, which were
kept up, at intervals of one and two hours, night and day for five years,
form a rich mine of statistics from which, down to the last two years
of his life, he continued to draw interesting series of results without
exhausting the material.

A new epoch in Professor Bache's life now approached. Before he
was well settled in his old position at the University, in November,
1843, upon the death of Mr. Hassler, he was called to the charge of
the United States Coast Survey, of which for about twenty years he
was the efficient and distinguished head. His education at West
Point, his well-proved skill in investigation, his thorough familiarity
with the principles and details of applied science, all the acquisitions
and experience of his previous life, and, not least, his placid and
even temper, urbane deportment, exquisite tact, and executive ability,
all conspired to his eminent fitness for the place, and to the achieve-
ment of the immense development and complete success of this great
national undertaking in his hands. We cannot enter here into the
history of the United States Coast Survey, intimately connected
as it is with that of its late superintendent. It must suffice to say,
that when Professor Bache took charge of it, the survey was in its
infancy, had touched upon only four or five hundred miles of the
Atlantic coast, was subject to misapprehension, annually assailed by
ignorant prejudice, and in danger of being suspended or abolished.
Before he died, it had extended its lines over the whole coast of the
national domain, upon both oceans, from the Bay of Fundy to the Rio
Grande, and from San Diego to Puget Sound; had conquered unjust
prejudice, silenced opposition, and now passes into the charge of our
associate the present incumbent, firmly established as one of the
bureaus of the Executive Government.

318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The importance of the survey, always appreciated by the mariner,
was recently impressed upon the general public, by the essential
service which it i-endered during the war of the rebellion. Its accu-
rate charts and sailing directions guided our squadrons along the
Southern coast ; its officers' accompanied and piloted them in the
attack upon every stronghold ; the superintendent himself was person-
ally called into frequent consultations over plans of attack or defence ;
besides serving upon an important confidential commission, to which
various projects for improving the art of war were referred, and also
as a member of that great voluntary association for the relief of
imminent wants and mitigation of the soldier's suffering, the Sanitary
Commission. Indeed Mr. Bache may be ranked among the victims
of the service ; for it was when, overwhelmed with other public labors,
he planned, at the request of the Governor of the State, a line of defences
for his native city of Philadelphia, and was personally superintending
their construction, that his health gave way under the first indications
of the cerebral disease which not long afterwards arrested his labors,
gradually and peacefully withdrew him from the outer world, and
nearly three years afterwards terminated his invaluable life. He died
on the 17th of February, 1867, in the sixty-first year of his age.

The amount and value of Mr. Bache's labors and public services
would be much under-estimated if we omitted to state that he was like-
wise, while at the head of the Coast Survey, the Superintendent of
"Weights and INIeasures, in which capacity he completed the work,
begun by Mr. Hassler, of constructing accurate standards for distribu-
tion amonsr the several States of the Union ; — that he was one of the
Commission appointed to examine the condition of the Lighthouses
of the United States, bore a leading part in the organization of the ad-
mirable system now in operation, and continued to be an influential
member of the Lighthouse Board in which the original Commission
was merged ; that he was the President of the National Academy of
Sciences recently chartered by Congress ; — and, finally, that he was
one of the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, named in the act
of incorporation in 1846, and was continued in this important trust by
successive re-elections until his death. To him probably more than to
any other member of the Board the credit is due of shaping the policy
of the establishment, of retrieving initial mistakes, aud of securing the
appropriation of the income of this most important trust mainly to the
advancement of science.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 28, 1867. 319

In all these positions, and especially in the often difhcult management
of the affairs of the Coast Survey, his extraordinary influence and success
may be attributed to his sterling honesty and simplicity as well as fixedness
of purpose, to the even balance of a symmetrically developed and well-
stored muid, to a quiet winning persuasiveness which, on a personal
interview, rarely failed to convert even an opponent into a friend, and,
in a word, to a consummate practical wisdom and shrewdness which
may somewhat remind us of his distinguished ancestor. The conduct
of affairs and details of administration which absorbed most of his
best years, and for which he was so peculiarly fitted, took from him
the opportunity of doing much that he had planned and might have
done in original investigation. But even in this field he has left a
name not unworthy of his lineage.

Victor Cousin, the only Foreign Honorary Member deceased
during the past year, died at Paris, about the middle of January last,
in the 75th year of his age. His career has been long, brilliant, and
prosperous. For nearly half a century his name has been indisputably
the first among the philosophers of France, while his numerous writ-
ings have occupied and rewarded the attention, not only of the special
students of psychological and metaphysical science, but of educated and
thoughtful men generally. Though not well fitted either by his tastes
or habits to gain political distinction, or to hold high office in the state,
he was for a while a prominent member of that remarkable group
of men, eminent in letters and science, who were the legislators and
statesmen of France under Louis Philippe ; he was created Councillor
of State, member of the Royal Council of Public Instruction, Peer of
France, and finally entered the Cabinet under the short-lived ministry
of Thiers, in 1840, as Minister of Public Instruction. After the de-
feat of that ministry, he retired to his old pursuits and apartments in
the Sorbonne, where he occupied, as a bachelor, the same rooms almost
continuously for nearly thirty-five years, constantly employed on his
numerous and successful publications, collecting a noble library, amass-
ing an ample fortune, and leaving at his death both his books and
money for the encouragement of philosophical studies.

That Cousin was able to accomplish so much, though -he began life
without any extraneous advantages, indicates what has been the essen-
tially democratic constitution of society in France during the first half
of the present century, whatever may have been for the time its
nominal form of government. Mobility of fortune and station, splendid

320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

prizes for ambition, and a career open in any direction for talents and
character have stimulated youthful effort at Paris ever since the
Revolution of '89. Cousin entered upon the stage at the right time,
and with the right temperament, to profit by these advantages. He
was the son of a watchmaker at Paris, where he was born November
28, 1792. He finished the earlier part of his education at the Lycee
Charlemagne, obtaining a number of prizes at the competitive exami-
nation, and the first honors in the department of rhetoric. Then he
became a pupil in the Normal School, where, under the tuition of
Laromiguiere, Royer-Collard, and Maine de Biran, he completed his
elementary training in philosophical studies with so much promise that
he was placed in the way of rapid promotion as a teacher. He became
Tutor of Greek in this school in 1812, and Master of Conferences in
Philosophy only two. years afterwards, acting at the same time as a
Professor in this department in the Lycee Napoleon. In 1815, at the
early age of twenty-three, he was appointed Adjunct Professor to
Royer-Collard in the chair of Philosophy at the Faculty of Letters in
the Sorbonne, taking upon himself, as is usual in such cases, the entire
performance of the duties of the office, his principal then virtually
quitting philosophical for political pursuits, and retaining the Pro-
fessorship only as a sinecure. Never was rapid advancement in a high
profession more fairly earned, or better justified by the result. With
great facility of acquisition, and an immense capacity for labor. Cousin
had also the ardent temperament, the unflagging interest in his voca-
tion, and the rhetorical power which are needed to attract and animate
a band of zealous young disciples. With such he soon found himself
surrounded ; and ten years afterwards he was able to allude with ex-
cusable pride to the fact, that the three most distinguished graduates
of his first class in philosophy at the Normal School, in 1816, were
Bautain, Jouffroy, and Damiron. Indeed, it may fairly be said of him,
that his best works at this early period were his pupils.

Yet his pen was by no means idle ; he fed the press with a succes-
sion of voluminous publications, any one of which would have cost
most men many laborious years. Before 1827, he had completed an
edition of Proclus, edited from the MSS., with notes, in six octavo vol-
umes ; about the same time appeared his edition of Descartes, in eleven
volumes ; and while these were passing through the printer's hands, he
was also occupied on a translation of all the works of Plato, with
elaborately prepared arguments, in thirteen volumes ; which was not

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 28, 1867. 321

completed till 1840. A quarto volume of the previously unpublished
writings of AbeLird appeared under his editorial care in 1836, and
three years afterwards he published his translation of Tennemann's
Manual of the History of Philosophy.

These were only editorial labors expended upon the writings of
others. The most important of his own philosophical works, many of
which had previously passed through several editions, reappeared in a
collected form in 1847, in twenty-two volumes. But his literary
activity was not even then exhausted. Turning from philosophy prop-
er to history and helles-lettres, he found amusement and occupation for
his declining years in writing about a dozen volumes of biographical
sketches and memoirs, illustrative of the state of French society and
politics in the seventeenth century, and perhaps a score of miscel-
laneous publications, many of which first appeared in Reviews and
other periodical collections. Separate notice should also be taken of
his labors in the cause of public education ; two elaborate and exten-
sive reports, made by him, under government authority, on the state of
primary and public school instruction, the one in Holland, and the
other in Prussia and other portions of Gei'many, appeared in 1838 and
1840, and had considerable influence in modifying the school system
not only in France, but here in America. On the whole, a busier and
more productive life, and one more efficient in its action upon the
opinions and conduct of men, could hardly be found anywhere in
the annals of letters and philosophy.

Cousin visited Germany for the first time in 1817, and there became
personally acquainted with Hegel, whose conversation and writings had
a marked influence upon his subsequent speculations in philosophy ; but
after the revolution of 1848 he forsook and disavowed this school of pan-
theistic metaphysics. Then, also, after he had been for a quarter of a
century a leader of the liberal and doctrinaire party in the long warfare
between the University and the Church, he read his palinode, and joined
heartily in the attempt made by his philosophical associates in the
Institute to re-establish, by a series of brief popular treatises, the main
doctrines of morality and religion, of order and law, in the minds of a
deluded and exasperated populace. His contribution to this combined
effort was a singular one ; it was a republication of Rousseau's well-
known " Savoyard Vicar's Confession of Truth," with notes and a brief
preliminary treatise, both even more earnestly religious in tone than
the text. It must have been edifying to the numerous students of the

VOL. VII. 41

322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

philosophical doctrines which he had been expounding for so many
years, to find him maintaining in these notes, in opposition to Rousseau,
the doctrine of the efficacy of prayer. Another tract which he con-
tributed to this remarkable series, entitled "Justice and Charity,"
contained a refutation of the doctrines of the Socialists. His former
lectures on the True, the Beautiful, and the Good, were also repub-
lished by him in 1853, so materially amended and purified as to win
for him the hearty applause of the most conservative party in the
Church and the State. Indeed, it was only in the earliest portion of
his career that Cousin espoused liberal opinions in politics with a zeal
that lacked discretion.

In his second visit to Germany, in 1825, he was arrested by the
police on suspicion of complicity in some Carbonari plots, and suffered
an imprisonment of a few weeks at Berlin ; and he profited by this
enforced leisure to make a more thorough study of the Hegelian
philosophy. He had been silenced as a lecturer by the Villele ministry
at home; but the triumph of the Martignac party in 1827 restored to
him and his colleagues the exercise of their professorial functions.
Then, as one of the illustrious triumvirate with Gui20t and Villemain,
he contributed his full share to that unparalleled triumph of letters,
philosophy, and eloquence, which gave greater attraction and renown for
a season to the lecture-rooms at the Sorbonne than belonged to any legis-
lative or forensic assembly in Europe. A hall could not be found spacious
enough to accommodate the immense crowd, representing all that was
most distinguished in rank, fortune, and reputation in Paris, which
flocked daily to hear three University Professors lecture upon phi-
losophy, history, and literature. The sensation created was all the
greater, as it had the aspect of a political triumph ; and each speaker
was vociferously applauded at the utterance of every remark which,
whether so intended or not, could be construed into a political allusion.
In fact, these three courses of lectures, delivered in 1828, were among
the chief determining causes of the Revolution of 1830, and the
peculiar character of the government by which it was succeeded.

The reputation of Cousin culminated at this epoch ; never after-
wards did he appear so original and ingenious as a thinker, or so
polished and eloquent as a writer, as when stimulated by this great
popular success. His lectures were immediately published, and
showed both the excellences and defects of his manner. They are
intensely French in conception, taste, and execution ; they abound in

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: MAY 28, 1867. 823

glittering generalities and perilous leaps in reasoning ; and the rhet-
oric, though ornate, is too often declamatory ; but they must be tried
by the writer's national standard, and not by English principles
of criticism. They were excellent in their kind, though inferior in
depth and originality of thought, and in all the higher merits of philo-
sophical disquisition, to the admirable lectures on history delivered
at the same period by Guizot. The lectures of the following year, on
the philosophy of the eighteenth century, though less popular, were
really of a higher quality, more carefully studied, less rhetorical, richer
in matter, more precise in statement, and more instructive in expo-
sition and criticism. Eegarded generally, they are Cousin's best work,
his ablest contribution to the history of philosophy. Taken in con-
nection with the course of the preceding year, they afford a satis-
factory view, an interesting exposition and defence, of the writer's
system of philosophy, so far at least as he could be said to have any
system sufficiently original to be appropriately designated by his
name. He was avowedly an eclectic ; not professing to make dis-
coveries, or to invent a theory of his own, he chose the humbler but
more useful task of expounding and criticising the theories of pre-
decessors, adopting some things and rejecting others, and thus piecing
together out of selected fragments a body of coherent doctrine. From
the Scotch philosophers, as represented by Eeid and Stewart, he bor-
rowed a method of inquiry, a theory of the foundation of morals, and a
refutation of the sensualism and materialism that had been taught by
Helvetius and Condillac. Among his countrymen, he was chiefly in-
debted to Maine de Biran, whom he followed implicitly in his theories
of personality, of causation, and of the freedom of the will. From the
Germans, especially from Schelling and Hegel, but with considerable
modifications, he adopted his doctrines of the absolute, of the imperson-
ality of reason, and of the a priori method of studying the necessary
development of historical events. The principal result of Cousin's
labors, therefore, may be said to be the reconciliation, and the general
adoption in France, of the leading dogmas of the Scotch and German
schools of philosophy.

To have the reputation of being a skilful expounder and critic of other
people's opinions may not appear very flattering ; yet such work ought
not to be held in light esteem. To break up the distinctions between
various schools, to harmonize doctrines which have been made to
appear incongruous only because originally incorporated into rival

824 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

systems, and to give universal currency to the treasures of thought,
learning, and taste, which had otherwise been confined to one language
and people, is an office which has sure claims on the gratitude, though
it may not challenge the admiration, of mankind. One cannot, even
if he would, avoid incorporating into his own system some portion of
the labors of others, whether these elements remain as they were
when first announced, or have since passed out into the world as famil-
iar principles of thought or conduct ; and Cousin will probably be re-
membered by posterity, not as the founder of a new method or school,
but as an able histoi-ian and critic of previous systems of metaphysics,
and an eloquent expounder and teacher of many truths in philosophy
which have long been the common heritage of mankind.

The accessions to our ranks during the past year have been unusu-
ally large, consisting of sixteen Resident and four Associate Fellows,
and four Foreign Honorary Members.

In the Foreign Honorary Membership, Mr. Bentham, President of
the Linna^an Society, replaces the late Professor Lindley.

M. Faye, of Paris, replaces Encke, of Berlin.

Professor Rankine, of Glasgow, was chosen in place of the late
Admiral Smyth, and Henry Sumner Maine, in that of the late Dr.
Whewell.

In conclusion, the Council submitted a nomination to fill
the vacancy in the list of Foreign Honorary Members made by
the decease of M. Cousin ; also nominations to the list of As-
sociate Fellows.

The Annual Report of the Treasurer was received, read, and
ordered to be entered on the records.

Professor Levering, as chairman of the Committee of Publi-
cation, presented the report of this Committee, accounting for
expenditures in printing the Memoirs and Proceedings under
the appropriations of the past year.

Professor Henck, as chairman of tlie Library Committee,
presented the report on the condition of'the Library.

A recommendation from this Committee to increase the
salary of the Assistant Librarian, was referred to tlie Rumford
Committee.

Professor Levering presented a report from the Rumford

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 28, 1867. 325

Committee, recommending an appropriation for the purchase
of certain Journals and other publications. The report was
accepted and 532 dollars were appropriated to the use recom-
mended.

Mr. C. M. Warren made a brief report from the Committee
to provide accommodations for the Academy.

Professor Eliot was excused from further service on this
Committee, and Professor Cooke was appointed in his place.

Action on the appropriations recommended by the Treasurer
was postponed to an adjourned meeting.

The following gentlemen were elected members of the
Academy : —

Dr. C. Edward Brown-Sequard, to be a Resident Fellow in
Class II. Section 3.

Commodore John Rodgers, U. S. N., to be a Resident Fel-
low in Class I. Section 4.

Dr. J. Lawrence Smith of Louisville, Kentucky, to be an
Associate Fellow in Class I. Section 3.

Hon. Horace Binney of Philadelphia, to be an Associate
Fellow in Class III. Section 1.

Hon. Daniel Lord of New York, to be an Associate Fellow
in Class III. Section 1.

Major-General Sabine, President of the Royal Society, Lon-
don, to be Foreign Honorary Member in Class II. Section 1,
in place of the late Admiral Duperrey.

Nominations for election into the Academy were presented
and read.

The annual election resulted in the choice of the following
officers for the ensuing year : —

Asa Gray, President.

George T. Bigelow, Vice-President.

William B. Rogers, Corresjjonding Secretary.

Chauncey Wright, Recording Secretary.

John C. Lee, Treasurer.

Frank H. Storer, Librarian.

326 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Council.

Thomas Hill,

Joseph Lovering, \ of Class I.

John B. Henck,

Louis Agassiz,

Jeffries Wyman, )^ of Class II.

Charles Pickering,*

Robert C. Winthrop,

George E. Ellis, )- of Class III.

Andrew P. Peabody,

Rumford Committee.

Joseph Lovering, Joseph Winlock,

Morrill Wyman, Wolcott Gibbs,

William B. Eogers, Josiah P. Cooke,

Frank H. Storer.

Committee of Finance.

' ( ex officio, by statute.
John C. Lee, )

Thomas T. Bouve', by election.

The other Standing Committees were appointed on tho
nomination of the President, as follows : —

Committee of Publication.

Joseph Lovering, Jeffries Wyman,

Charles W. Eliot.

Co7nmittee on the Library.

John B. Henck, Charles Pickering,

John Bacon.

Committee to audit the Treasurer's Accounts.
Charles E. Ware, Charles J. Spraghe.

* Elected at the adjourned meeting.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 827

Five hundred and eighty-fourth Meeting.

June 11, 1867. — Adjouened Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

A portion of the Annual Report of the Council was read.

Professor Levering reported from the Rumford Committee
a recommendation that 200 dollars be paid by the Treasurer,
from the Rumford Fund, to Dr. Francis Dana, for services as
Assistant Treasurer during the ensuing year. The recom-
mendation was adopted.

On the motion of Professor Levering it was voted to renew
the appropriation of 500 dollars, which was made last year to
complete the publication of Dr. Storer's Memoir.

The following appropriations were voted : —

For General Expenses, from the General Fund . $ 2,100
" " " from the Rumford Fund . 200

For Publication 1,100

For the Library ....... 600

Dr. Charles Pickering was elected a member of the Council,
to fill a vacancy left at the annual election.
The following paper was communicated : —

Characters of New Plants of California and Elsewhere^ prin-
cipally of those collected by H. N. Bolander in the State
Geological Survey. By Asa Gray.

Ranunculus alism^folius, Geyer, var. alismellus : pusillus ;
caulibus subscapiformibus spitharaaeis ; foliis tenuioribus subovatis ob-
longisve (pollicaribus), petiolo stepius gracillimo. — Lake Tenayo and
on Mount Dana, Sierra Nevada, to the height of 12,000 feet, Bo-
lander. With the aspect of R. Flammula, has the ovary and style of
R. alismcefolius.

Ranunculus Andersonii : R. glaciali similis, sed calyce glaber-
rirao, ovariis semiorbiculatis compressis immarginatis stylo nudo subu-
late recurvato terniinatis. Planta tripollicaris, aut tota glabra, aut basi
dilatata petiolorum lobisque foliorum pilis albidis deciduis parce ciliatis.
Flos poUieem diametro ; petalis saturate roseis ; sepalis margine ru-
bellis. Segmenta foliorum petiolulata. — Near snow, on Blind Springs

328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Mountain in the Eastern Sierra Nevada, Dr. C. L. Anderson, 18GG.
The allied JR. Chamissonis has the achenia winged, as much as R.
glacialis.

Ranunculus (Aphanostemma) hystriculus: glaber; radice fas-
ciculata; foliis omnibus radicahbus reniformi-rotundatis 5-lobis crenato-
lobuhitisque ; scapis folia superantibus nudis unifloris rariusve unifoli-
atis bifloris ; sepalis (5 - 6) petaloideis albis ovalibus ; petalis totidem
staminibus brevioribus nectariforraibus, ungue longo lamina parva ovali
subcarnosa basi foveolata terrainato; carpellis lanceolatis tenuiter mem-
branaceis pilosciusculis stylo subrecurvo rostratis in capitulum subglo-
bosum hystricinum arete digestis. — Foot-hills of the Sierra Nevada,
at Forest Hill and at New Castle, Placer Co., April, 1865, Bolander.
Also, 18G6, by Mr. Rattan, a state with longer petioles (G inches long),
and scapes nearly a foot high : apparently in wet soil. Sepals nearly
half an inch long, deciduous. Petals inconspicuous, 1^ to 2 lines long,
apparently yellow, gland-like, consisting of a minute fleshy lamina,
with its base impressed with a nectariferous pit, raised on a claw of
twice its length. Carpels 3 lines long when nearly full grown, re-
markably slender and tapering, not striate nor margined. Ovule
ascending as in Ranunculus. — Nothing like this has before been met
with ; but the characters, as to calyx and corolla, are those of St.
Hilaire's Aphanostemma, although the subulate carpels very different ;
so that this accession, remarkable as it is, haidly tends toward the
re-establishment of that genus.

Aquilegia Califoknica, Lindl. in Gard. Chron. 1854, p. 83G, &
1857, p. 382. A. eximia, Van Houtte, Fl. des Serres, Jan. 1857,
cum ic. This is common in California (is Hartweg's, no. 1635), and
comes also from Oregon. In cultivation the characters do appear to
be well marked. That is, the sepals are reflexed ; the spurs, scarcely
longer than the sepals, are much thickened at the tip, and truncate at
the mouth, the limb of the petals being extremely short. But Fisch-
er's A. formosa is intermediate between this and A. Canadensis in the
relative length of the spurs and sepals, the latter widely spreading.
In cultivation A. Californica comes into flower a mouth later than A.
Canadensis.

Draba DouGLASir : Leucodraha ; caudice multicipiti ; foliis omni-
bus rosulatis subcartilagineis fere eveniis integerrimis margine crebre
hispido-ciliatis facie aut glabris aut cum seapo aphyllo corymboso-
plurifloro hii'sutulis (pilis omnibus simplicibus), imis ovatis, sujjeriori-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 829

bus obovatis spathulatisve ; floribus majusculis albis ; silicula ovata
puberula stylo gracili superata, loculis sub apice biovulatis. — High
Sierra Nevada ; on the gravelly ' divide ' between East Carson and
West Walker Rivers, April, Dr. C. L. Anderson. I have a small
fruiting specimen of this from Douglas's collection in the interior of
Oregon or California ; hence the name adopted for what appears to
be a very distinct new species. In the firmness of the leaves, the size
of the flowers, and the slender style (a line long and almost half the
length of the silicle) this approaches the Aizopsis section, but is a
genuine Leucodraha. Flowers as large as those of D. ciliata : sepals
oval, glabrous, half the length of the bright white petals. D. densi-
folia, Nutt., as to the published character comes near to our species,
but, from Nuttall's incomplete specimen kindly supplied by Mr. Du-
rand, I take that to be a form or near relative of D. glacialis, with long-
ish style. It is quite hirsute, even to the sepals, with 2 - 3-forked as
well as some simple haii's, and the petals appear as if they were pale
yellow : the cells of the ovary are 6-ovulate.

Lepidium dicttotum : annum, tenellum, undique puberulura ; foliis
angusto-linearibus integerrimis subgramineis ; floribus (an semper ?)
apetalis tetrandis; siliculis subtiliter reticulatis subovatis apice subalato
profunde emarginatis pedicello piano erecto longioribus. — Nevada, at
Steamboat Springs, Horace Mann ; and in most sage-bush lands, Dr.
C. L. Anderson. Specimens only 3 inches high ; the grassy leaves
one or two inches long : racemes strict. Silicle 2 lines long, and with
a deeper notch than in those of L. lasiocarpum, Nutt. (in which,
moreover, they are widely spreading), also more puberulent and more
evidently reticulated.

Cleomella obtusifolia (Torr. in PI. Wright. 1, p. 12), char,
suppletus : bracteis inferioribus trifoliolatis ; stipulis in criues solutis ;
calycis lobis setoso-fimbriatis, seta terminali prjelonga ; stipite gracil-
limo, fructifero in pedicellum paullo longiorem refracto ; stylo ovario
bis longiori ; capsula bicornuta ; seminibus la^vibus. — In sand, near
Soda Lake, June 1, 1861, J. G. Cooper ; branches, in flower and fruit. '
The scarious stipules are cut up into what appears to be a conspicuous
tuft of bristles in the axil of the petiole ; and the sepals are similarly
but more sparingly crinite. Ovules 4 - 6 on each placenta. The
capsule is more strongly lobed than in any other species, the back of
each valve in well developed specimens being abruptly produced into
a divergent horn (3 lines long, nearly as long as the style) ; when the

VOL. VII. 42

330 PROCEEDINaS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

valve is detached it may be likened to a cornucopise with a very flaring
mouth, holding 2 seeds.

SiLENE BoLANDERi : multicaulis, nana, tomentulosa ; caulibus 1-5-
floris ; foliis spathulatis acutis basi (suramis exceptis) longe attenuatis ;
calyce oblongo-clavato baud viscoso, dentibus ovato-oblongis acutius-
culis ; petalis pallide roseis calyce duplo longioribus dentibus 2 minimis
coronatis, ungue lato basim versus villoso-ciliato, lamina 4 - 6-partita,
segmentis lanceolatis seu linearibus uno alterove nunc apice bifidis ;
ovario brevissime stipitato. — Wooded hillsides, Long Valley, Plumas
Co., Bolander. Stems 3 to 5 inches high, many from a deep perpen-
dicular root, leafy. Leaves 1^ to 2 inches long, including the tapering
base or winged petiole. Peduncle of the primary flower an inch and
a half long. Calyx-teeth 2 or 3 lines long. " A very showy " and
distinct species.

SiLENE iNCOMPTA : viscoso-pubcrula ; caulibus csespitoso-aggregatis
patulis (ultrapedalibus) foliosis thyrso laxifloro racemiformi vel panicu-
lato terminatis ; foliis oblongis seu ovali-lanceolatis acutis ; pedicellis
flore brevioribus ; calyce cylindraceo (fructifero ovoideo vix semi-
pollicari), dentibus lanceolatis tubo dimidio brevioribus ; petalis albidis
parvulis, lamina lineari-oblonga ungue apice utrinque unidentato vix
latiori bifida, lobis nunc emarginatis vel bilobis, corona e dentibus
subulatis. — Mount Bullion, and in the Yosemite Valley, in large tufts,
Bolander. — Calyx sometimes purplish towards the base. Lamina of
the petals only 3 lines long.

ACHYRONYCHIA, Torr. & Gray, nov. gen.

Calyx 5-fidus, persistens ; tubo 10-nervi coriaceo demum cyHn-
draceo ; lobis mox radiato-patentibus ovalibus muticis prjeter basim
calloso-incrassatam argenteo-scariosis enerviis. Petala nulla. Fila-
menta vel staminodia 15 fauci uniseriatim inserta, tenuia, subulata,
unicum (rarissime 2 ?) antheriferum, csetera sterilia. Anthera didyma.
Ovarium uniloculare, filo conductorio axili tenuissimo percursum:
stylus brevis, bifidus. Ovula 2, basilaria, erecta, anatropa ? funiculis
brevibus. Utriculus tenuis, calycis tubo indurato inclusus, pyriformis,
ovulo altero sterili superstite monosperraus. Semen oblongo-pyri-
forme, facie recta rhaphi bx-evi cum chalaza longe infra medium notata.
Embryo dorsalis, albuminis parci farinacei hinc applicitus, radicula
elongata fere recta, cotyledonibus brevibus accumbenti-incurvis. —
Herbula annua, depressa, Paronycln(x seu Alter nantherce sessilts facie ;

or ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 831

foliis spathulatis opposltis, altero minore ; stipulis majusculis hyalino-
scariosis ; floribus in axillis cymoso-congestis.

AcHYRONYCHiA CooPERi. — In dry sand, Mohave River at Camp
Cady, Dr. J. G. Cooper, June, 1861. In Arizona or Sonora, A. B. Gray.
— Stems spreading from the slender root, 2 or 3 inches long, glabrous,
as is the whole plant. Leaves thickish and veinless, the larger of each
pair from a quarter to half an inch long, its fellow barely half as large.
Stipules interpetiolar, one on each side, orbicular or ovate, nearly
entire, silvery-scarious. Flowers in dense subsessile clusters, bright
silvery-white from the scarious calyx-lobes and stipular bracts, these
lobes about half a line long, at first longer than the tubinate calyx-tube,
which at maturity considerably exceeds them and becomes cylindra-
ceous and thickened in the manner of Scleranthus. The firm texture
and thickening of the tube extends into the axis of the broad and plane
oval or orbicular lobes for nearly one third of their length, making a
strong herbaceous, or at length more indurated, callosity in the base
of each; all the rest is purely scarious, and without a vestige of midrib.
The filaments are very short and delicate, with their broadish bases
contiguous : if any arrangement can be traced it is, perhaps, that they
are single before each calyx-lobe, and in pairs before each sinus. The
fertile stamen is before a calyx-lobe ; and one flower out of many
examined apparently bore two anthers. The ovules appear to be
truly anatropous, on very short funiculi. But in the seed the chalaza,
as in Pollichia, is very much nearer the pointed hilar extremity, with
which it is connected by a delicate short rhaphe ; the seed is straight
and somewhat edged on that side, rounded above on the other ; the
thinnish testa delicately lineate ; the slender embryo neax'ly the length
of the seed. The very thin utricle bursts irregularly, at least when
the seed is extracted. — This curious little plant confirms the judgment
of Bentham and Hooker in retaining Pollichia with Paronychia and
its nearest allies, notwithstanding the geminate ovules. With the aspect
somewhat of Paronychia polygonifolia and the like, and a calyx which
Siphonychia somewhat resembles, this combines the geminate erect
ovules, one fertile the other sterile, and the straight seed and straightish
embryo of Pollichia. It is most peculiar in the remarkably silvery-
scarious calyx-lobes, and in the numerous sterile filaments or staminodia.
To separate entirely from the Garyophyllaeece these plants, along with
Scleranthus and the other exstipulate genera, while leaving Queria,
Sphcerocoma, and the Polycarpece generally, requires narrow and devi-
ous, and probably at length impracticable distinctions.

832 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Talinum PTGM^mi (Gray, in Eep. Exped. Bryan, ined. & in
Sill. Jour. 33, p. 407) : foliis linearibus scapisque unifloris (nunc
2 - 3-floris) 1 - 2-polIicaribus e radice crasso confertis ; sepalis orbicu-
latis glanduloso-dentatis ; petalis roseis purpureisve ; staminibus 6 ;
stigmatibus 3-5. — Rocky Mountains, H. Engelmann, Dr. Parry, &c. ;
Cascade Mountains, Washington Terr., alt. 7,500, Dr. Lyall ; and now
collected in the Sierra Nevada, California, by Bolander. The thick
caudex or root is rather fusiform in most specimens, in Bolander's it is
napiform. Ovules numerous. Seeds as in the genus.

SiDALCEA viTiFOLiA : hirsuto-pubesccns ; caule valido elato ra-
moso folioso ; foliis cordato-quinquelobis, lobis brevibus crenato-dentatis
subincisis ; spicis brevibus capitulisve densifloris brevipedunculatis
subcorymbosis ; calycis nudi lobis deltoideis acutatis ; petalis albis
obcordatis ; phalangibus indistinctis ; coccis muticis laevibus. — Bear
Harbor, Mendocino Co., Bolander. Plant " from 3 to 6 feet high,
in tufts," the upper part or branches leafy ; the branchlets terminated
by short and dense spikes or heads of one or two inches in length.
Stipules subulate, caducous. Leaves 2-4 inches in diameter, beset
especially beneath and on the petioles, as also the branches, with a
short and roughish stellate pubescence. Pedicels extremely short,
subtended by a filiform bract, which is often 2-cleft or toothed at the
apex and deciduous : bractlets none. Calyx very slightly or sparsely
hirsute, 3-4 lines long, cleft to the middle. Corolla 6 lines long,
apparently white ; the petals rather narrow. Stamens of the exterior
series closely approximate to the inner, consisting of 10 narrow and
2-cleft biantheriferous filaments, i. e. each fork bearing a single anther ;
the inner set of about as many anthers, on mostly uncombined filaments.
Branches of the style and carpels 9 or 10, the latter reniform, torn open
on the ventral face as they separate from the axis. This new species,
so unlike the rest of the genus in appearance, is closely related to

SiDALCEA MALACHROIDES (Malva malachroides, Hook. & Arn.) ;
hispida, gracilior ; foliis cordato-rotundis sublobatis crenato-incisis ;
calyce setoso-hispidissimo 2 - 3-bracteolato (bracteolis setaceis deci-
duis), lobis triangulari-lanceolatis : cast, fere prajcedentis. — The two
series of stamens, the exterior of 20 in pairs, I had not before detected
in this rare plant. The fruit not yet seen. In a fragment of a fertile
plant collected by Dr. Andrews the column is truncate and without a
single anther in all the flowers ; while in Douglas and Coulter's speci-
mens, with good anthers, the ovules are appai'cntly good. The anthers,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 333

if not wanting, are deciduous from the column in some flowers of *S'.
vitifolia, as in some cultivated specimens of aS'. malvcejiora.

Malvastrdm rotundifolium : annuum, hispidum ; caule erecto ;
foliis subreniformi-rotundatis grossius crenatis indivisis ; pedunculis
gracilibus folia plerumque superantibus ; bracteolis angustissime line-
aribus calycis segmentis sensim acuminatis paullo brevioribus ; petalis
roseo-purpureis basi macula rubra ; carpellis ultra 40 orbiculatis muti-
cis reticulatis. — Sand hills at Fort Mohave (along with M. exile.
Gray), Dr. J. G. Cooper. — In aspect not unlike some South Amer-
ican species, but more after the fashion of a Sidalcea than any of our
species. The stigmas, however, are capitate, and the filaments not clus-
tered. Plant rather spai'sely, or the calyx more densely, hispid with
simple or fascicled bristly spreading hairs. Leaves somewhat resem-
bling those of Malva rotiindifolia. Stem " two feet," or in depauperate
specimens barely a span high. Calyx deeply 5-cleft. Corolla 1^
inches broad, apparently showy.

LiNUM SPERGULINU3I : annuum, fere glaberrimum ; caule tenui
(subpedali) superne effuse paniculato ; pedicellis omnibus filiformibus
flore multo longioribus mox patentissirais ; foliis sparsis filiformibus ;
glandulis stipularibus nullis ; sepalis ovalibus obtusis margine minutim
glandulosis ; petalis roseis albisve, ungue ima basi utrinque unidentato
intus appendice linguaeformi aucto ; sinubus inter stamina obsolete
crenulato-bidentatis ; antheris oblongis ; stylis 3; stigmatibus parvis. —
Hills at Cloverdale, Sonoma Co., June, Bolander. Glabrous throughout,
except a minute and sparse pubescence on some of the branchlets and
pedicels, 6-12 inches high; the flowering branches more paniculate
and much more effuse than those of L. Californicum, and with flowers
only about half the size, all on almost setaceous, naked, and at length
mostly declined pedicels of 4-6 lines in length. Sepals barely 1^ lines
long. Petals 2 lines long, obovate, with a narrow claw, its ovate or
oblong appendage adnate to its front, more conspicuous than that of
L. Californicum. Tliis and the following are interesting additions to
the section Hesperolinon which was indicated in a former paper
(6, p. 521) upon three Californian species; but these accessions re-
quire some modification of subsidiary characters ; — this one, for in-
stance, in the length of the pedicels and the very diffuse inflorescence.

LiNUM MiCRANTHUM : annuum ; caule gracili superne aperte pa-
niculato ; rarais cum pedicellis calyce saepius longioribus quandoque
puberulis ; foHis alternis angusto-linearibus ; glandulis stipularibus

334 PBOCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

minimis ; sepalis oblongis obtusiusculis vix ciliolato-glandulosis : pe-
talis albis basi utrinque subunidentatis ; sinubus inter stamina dente
brevissinao glandulteforrai instructis ; stylis 3 ; stigmatibus subclavatis
recurvis. — On Mount Bullion, Mariposa Co., Bolander. About a foot
higb. Flowers as much smaller than in the preceding as those are
than in L. Californicum, even smaller than in L. Virginianum and
L. striatum, TValt. (Z. oppositifoUum, Engelm.). This differs from
the four other trigynous species now known, in wanting the little
appendage to the face of the claw of the petal, and the lateral teeth
are less distinct. The three false partitions of the globular capsule
are almost complete. (In the old Liniim trigynum of our conser-
vatories I can no more find even a trace of appendages to the
petals in fresh flowers, than could Bentham and Hooker in dried
specimens. So far as regards this species the genus Reinwardtia
has no characters.

LiNUM DIGYNUM : annuum, glabrum ; caule exili (spithamceo) apice
subcymoso-plurifloro ; foliis oppositis oblongis (lin. 3-6 longis) ; glan-
dulis stipularibus nullis ; pedicellis strictis calyce brevioribus ; sepalis
oblongo-lanceolatis obtusis uninerviis margine lacerato-denticulatis
glandulosisque ; petalis flavis ; dentibus inter stamina nullis ; stylis 2
liberis; stigmatibus capitatis; capsula quadrilocellata. — Mariposa Trail,
Yosemite Valley, rare, Bolander. — Flowers small, but rather larger
than in the foregoing. Petals not appendaged at the base. While all
the other peculiar Californian species are trigynous, this is digynous !

Lupin us Breweki : fruticulosus, ramosissimus, csespitoso-humi-
fusus, pube appressissima argenteo-sericeis ; stipulis subulatis ; foliolis
7-10 spathulatis cuneatisve retusis (lin. 3 - 4 longis) ; racemo brevi
(pollicari) densifloro ; calycis bracteolati labio superiore bipartite ;
corolla violaceo ; carina vix ciliata. — " Prostrate, trailing on the
ground or on rocks, on the Yosemite trail, alt. G,000 feet," Prof.
Brewer. Nevada near Carson, Dr. C. L. Anderson ; a form with
flowers only 3 lines long, the keel not in the least ciliate ; while in
Prof. Brewer's specimens the flowers are 4 or 4^ lines long, and with
a few hairs on the margins of the keel. — This ranks with the andine
species forming Agardh's tribe 31icrophyUi.

LupiNUS Lyalli : fruticuloso-caespitosus, nanus, hirsuto-sericeus :
stipulis subulatis ; foliolis 5-6 obovato-oblongis (lin. 3-longis) ; pe-
duiiculo scapiformi nudo bipollicari capitulum multiflorum gerente ;
calycis bracteolati labio inferiore tridentato, superiore bipartite ; corolla

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 835

(ut videtur) saturate caerulea, carina nuda. — Summit of the Cascade
Mountains, lat. 49°, Dr. Lyall (Coll. Oregon Bound. Comm., distrib.
Herb. Kew.). — The short, tufted shoots spring from a woody base
barely an inch high, terminated by the solitary naked peduncle, bearing
a head (half or two thirds of an inch in diameter) of deep blue or violet
flowers. Pedicels short : bracts shorter than the calyx, caducous.

LuPiNUS Danaus : herbaceu?, e caudice perenni csespitosus, pu-
milus, strigoso-hirsutulus ; stipulis subulatis ; foliolis 4-5 oblanceo-
latis (lin. 2-4 longis) •, racemo oblongo (pollicari) densifloro ; calycis
minute bracteolati labio inferiore tridentato, superiore profunde bifido ;
corolla albo-violacea, carina rectiuscula ciliata. — Mount Dana, alt.
about 12,500 feet, Bolander. — This interesting little Lupine maybe
held to bear the name either of the lofty peak it inhabits, or of the
distinguished geologist and naturalist whom the mountain commemo-
rates. It was very scantily collected, and is probably rare or out of
reach. The slender and diffuse or ascending flowering stems are only 2
or 3 inches high, and 1 — 3-leaved below the middle. Bracts subulate,
rather shorter than the calyx, twice the length of the pedicel. Co-
rolla 3 lines long ; the vexillum and wings apparently white and tinged
with blue or violet, the keel deep violet. — This and the two preceding
seem very distinct from all other North American species. Neither of
them can well be L. minimus, Dough, which I do not identify.

Trifolium Bolanderi : T. repenti subsimile, multiceps e caudice
incrassato, glaberrimum ; caulibus adsurgentibus 1 - 2-floris ; stipulis
herbaceis ; foliolis obovato-oblongis vix retusis ; pedunculis (spitha-
mjeis) folia longe superantibus ; floribus (coerulescentibus ?) arete capi-
tatis mox deflexis ; pedicellis etiam fructiferis brevissimis ; calycis
dentibus subulatis tubo campanulato basi gibboso subajquilongis ; ovario
dispermo. — Westfall's Meadows above the Yosemite Valley, at the
elevation of 8,000 feet, Bolander.

Trifolium barbigerum (Torr. Bot. WhippL Exped.), var. An-
DREWSii : multo majus, subpedale, villosum ; foliolis majoribus sub-
pollicaribus ; involucre explanato quandoque fere pollicem lato (corollis
atropurpureis). — Collected by the late Dr. Andrews in 1856; but
now Mr. Bolander sends it from Mendocino City (4781), with heads
&c. fully as large as those of the related T. cyathiferum, and also,
from drier and sandy soil (4755), in a form like the original of Bige-
low and Fitch, but less depauperate.

Dalea divaricata, Benth. Bot. Voy. Sulph., var. cinerea : pube

836 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

minuta praesertim calycis albescens ; pedunculis baud divaricatis
bi-tripollicaribus; spicis virgatis laxe 25-40-floris; calycis dentibus
ovato-oblongis, infimo paullo longiore. — Fort Mobave, on gravelly
hills, Dr. J. G. Cooper. " Stems two or three feet high : flowers dark
purple." Except for the minute hoaiy pubescence and other minor
particulars, this would seem to be Bentham's D. divaricata, from the
coast of Lower California (and a comparison of specimens made at
Kew discloses no specific differences). There is nothing divaricate in
the specimens, however.

Petalostemon foliosus : undique glaber ; caullbus crebre folio-
sis; foliolis 8-14- (sa^pius 12-) jugis lineari-oblongis mucrone cuspi-
datis, glandulis paucis parvis ; spica cylindrica brevi-pedunculata ;
bi'acteis aristatis e basi lanceolata ; calycis dentibus suba^qualibus tubo
cylindraceo diraidio brevioribus ; floribus roseo-purpureis. — Banks of
Fox River, Kane Co., Illinois, Burgess Truesdell, 1867. Also near
Nashville, Tennessee, Mr. Hatch, 1854. A well-marked species,
which has been singularly overlooked, or else is very local. It , has
the habit of P. villosus, but with yet more numerous leaflets, and is
glabrous throughout, even to the ovaiy. Tiie very numerous and equa-
ble leaflets, thicker spikes with mare exserted bracts, shorter calyx-
teeth, &c., no less than the color of the flowers, distinguish it at once
from P. ca7ididus. Both ovules are apt to be fertile in this and the
last-named species.

Astragalus malacus : undique molliter villosus ; caulibus e
caudice perenni gracili erectis 2 — 3-foliatis (spithama^is vel pedali-
bus) ; foliolis 6 - 7-jugis obovatis retusis ; pedunculis folia superantibus
spicam multifloram demum laxifloram gei'entibus ; calycis tubo cylin-
drico dentibus setaceo-subulatis triplo longioribus ; corolla Icete pur-
purea ; legumine oblongo-lanceolato ai'cuato baud stipitato crebre
mollissime villoso tenuiter coriaceo subcompresso sutura dorsali (extus
leviter sulcata) usque ad ventralem acute marginatam inti'usa bilocellato
polyspermo (sectione transversa auguste obcordata). — Nevada, near
Carson City, Dr. C. L. Anderson. I formerly confounded an imper-
fect specimen of this with A. Parryi, Gray ; and I know of no other
more nearly related to it. But it is more softly villous, and usually
more caulescent, has far longer peduncles, and spikes of bright purple
or violet flowei's, in a raceme which at length elongates, often to the
length of 4 inches, the tube of the calyx is longer and narrower (flower
over half an inch long) ; and the very villous legumes are thinner,

OF AKT3 AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 337

little over an inch in length, and when apparently mature not at all
obcompressed but somewhat flattened laterally, with the acute ventral
suture salient, completely bilocellate.

Astragalus Artiiu-Schottii, Gray, Rev. Astr., char, fruct.
emend. : spitharaa;us ad tripedalem ; legumine raaturo ovato acuminate
(lin. 7-8 longo) canescente chartaceo ad suturam ventralem pro-
fundius sulcato ob septum dorsalem corapletum bilocellato. — In sand
on the Mohave River, at Camp Cady and elsewhere, Dr. J. G. Cooper.

Astragalus Bolanderi : subpedalis, cinereo-puberulus ; stipulis
brevibus scariosis adversus petiolum connatis ; foliolis G-9-jugis
sublinearibus oblongisque ; pedunculis folio brevioribus capitato-pluri-
floris ; pedicellis brevi&simis, fructiferis reflexis ; legumine in stipitera
e calyce exsertum hamato-incurvo ovato acutato obcompresso turgido
coriaceo glabro (lin. 8-9 longo 3 — 4 lato) polyspermo ob septum com-
pletum bilocellato. — Dry ground, at Ostrander's Ranch, Yosemite
Valley, Bolander. Flowers not seen. The teeth of the calyx are
almost setaceous, and more than half the length of the cylindraceous
tube. Stipe 4 lines long. The species is to be ranked, perhaps, with
the Oroboidei, although the stipules are connate and the legume com-
pletely two-celled.

Lathyrus Torreti : pusillus (spithamajus ad pedalem), villoso-
pubescens ; radice perenni ; stipulis semisagittatis angustis ; foliolis
4 - 6-jugis ovalibus mucronatis (lin. 4 - 8-longis) ; cirrho simplici
saspius brevissimo ; pedunculo brevi vel brevissimo srepius unifloro ;
calycis lobis setaceo-subulatis tubo duplo longioribus ; corolla pur-
purascente ; legumine pauci-ovulato monospermo in pedicellum deflexo.
L. ? villosus, Torr. in Stevens (Cooper & Suckley) Pacif. R. R. Rep. ;
a preoccupied name. — Mendocino or south part of Humboldt Co.,
Bolander. A neat and peculiar little species, very different from any
other, at least in North America, in slenderness, in the small size of
the leaflets, and the single-flowered peduncles. The latter are some-
times scarcely longer than the stipules, and seldom half the length of
the leaf. Bolander's specimens are past the flowering state ; the young
legume minutely pubescent, semi-oblong, flat, apparently maturing only
a single seed.

Prunus (Amtgdalus) Andersonii : glaberrima ; ramis spi-
nescentibus ; foliis fasciculatis parvis (lin. 4-9 longis) spathulatis ob-
longisve obtusis tenuiter subnervoso-venosis subserrulatis eglandulosis ;
floribus longiuscule pedicellatis ; calycis (ebracteolati) lobis iuteger-

VOL. VII. 43

338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

rirnis tubo turbinate brevioribus ; petalis l^ete roseis ; ovario cum styli
basi hirsutissirao; drupa sicca subglobosa pubera. — Foot-hills of the
eastern side of the Sierra Nevada, near Carson : fl. March, Dr. C. L.
Anderson. [Also collected by Dr. Torrey.] " About 3 feet high."
Flowers showy ; the petals apparently of nearly the color of peach-
blossoms, 4 lines long, entire. Lobes of the calyx broadly triangular
and obtuse, at length oblong. Stamens as long as the petals, 25, tri-
seriate, but approximate. Drupe half an inch long.

HoRKELiA BoLANDERi : humilis, cosspitosa ? vej humifusa e cau-
dice lignescente ; foliis pube molli densa villoso-incanis ; foliolis 13-21
cuneatis palraatifidis, lobis 3-5 ovatis oblongisve ; stipulis angusto-
linearibus integerrirais ; cyma parva densillora ; calycis alte 5-fidi
segraentis accessoriis oblongis quam vera latiora subdimidio breviori-
bus ; petalis obovatis vix unguiculatis ; filameutis lanceolatis. — Dry
alkaline soil, near Clear Lake, coll. January, 1863, Bolander. Only
winter specimens known ; the flowering stems rising 3 to 5 inches
above the lignescent and tufted leafy base. This and the following
are among those species which go far to justify the views of Bentham
and Hooker, and now also of Engelmann, who would combine Horkelia
and Ivesia with Potentilla. I am reluctant to adopt this conclusion,
but have chosen a specific name which is not preoccupied in the latter
great genus.

Ivesia tridentata {Horkelia tridentata, Torr. Bot. Whippl. t. 6) :
pube mollissima villosa ; caulibus patentibus vel erectis (pedalibus)
gracilibus apice nudis ; foliis junioribus argenteo-sericeis, adultis sub-
glabratis ; foliolis 5-11 subdissitis oblongo-cuneatis apice plerumque
tridentatis ; stipulis pauci-laciniatis vel subintegris ; cymis peduncu-
latis confertifloris ; pedicellis evolutis florem adtequantibus ; calycis
carapanulati segmentis accessoriis linearibus tubo sequilongis quam vei'a
acutissima brevioribus ; petalis (albis) breviter unguiculatis ; sta-
minibus 10 ; carpellis 5 - 10 ? — In the Sierra Nevada. The chai'acter
is here drawn up from the very beautiful and complete specimens col-
lected by Mr. Bolander, in 18G6, in the region near Mount Dana.
The stems are about a foot high and erect or nearly so. Leaflets of
the earlier radical leaves- inclining to obovate, of the stem-leaves (re-
duced to 1 - 3 pairs) verging to linear-cuneate : some of the ujiper
stipules entire. The narrow filaments are adnate to the calyx-tube
up to the sinuses and base of the lobes, and are thus distant from the
(villous) receptacle, as in Horkelia and Ivesia generally, but not in

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 839

Potentilla. Carpels in these specimens usually 5. I have not found
so many as 10 ; although Dr. Torrey's figure represents a larger num-
ber, and also omits the villosity of the receptacle. This species is
certainly embarrassing to the maintenance of these genera ; but it ranks
with Ivesia, although the foliage is anomalous.

IvESiA UNGUICULATA : laxe villosa, subpedalis ; foliolis perpluri-
mis quasi- verticillatis laxis plerisque bis-bipartitis, segmentis linearibus ;
stipulis pauci-laciniatis vel integris ; floribus glomeratis ; pedicellia
brevissimis ; calycis segmentis accessoriis linearibus vera triangulari-
lanceolata acutissima fere adoequantibus ; petalis dilatato-cuneatis longe
tenuiter unguiculatis ; staminibus sub-15, filamentis filiformi-subulatis ;
carpellis 5-8. — Westfall's Meadows, Yosemite Valley, alt. 8,000 feet,
in wet places, Bolander. Stems in tufts from a thickish caudex, from
a span to a foot high. Leaves in aspect not unlike those of Horhelia
tenuiloba, but the leaflets crowded much like those of Ivesia Gordoni,
and whitish-silky or villous with long very soft hairs when young,
but glabrate with age. The leaflets are 2 or 3 lines long, more com-
monly twice 2-parted into linear or linear-spatulate divisions, some of
them simply 3-parted, others 2-parted, and the divisions cuneate and
2-cleft. Stipules lanceolate, acuminate and neai'ly entire, or broader
and cut into 2 or 3 lanceolate lobes. Cymes or dense clusters short-
peduncled. Calyx 3 lines long, deeply cleft. Petals 2 lines long,
the slender claw more than half the length of the broadly cuneate-
obovate lamina. Stamens shorter than the calyx, one inserted before
each petal and one each side of it, i. e. two to each true calyx-lobe,
not before its centre but lateral. The arrangement is, perhaps, more
clearly expressed by saying that, when 15, ten are alternate with the
ten calyx-lobes, counting the accessory ones, and five are opposite the
latter. These five appear to be always present ; but one or two, or
even three or four, of the ten are occasionally wanting. Receptacle
spai'ingly villous.

IvESiA SANTOLiNOiDES (Gray, Proceed. Amer. Acad. 6, p. 531),
char, suppl. : spithama3a ad pedalem ; cyma demum eff"usa raraossissima,
ramulis pedicelhsque capillaribus ; achenio subreniformi-globoso utricu-
lato calycem fructiferum implente. — From fine fruiting specimens
gathered by Bolander, on dry rocky hills along the Merced River, above
the Yosemite Vafley, alt. 9,000 feet. The inflorescence becomes pa-
niculate, exceedingly efl'use and decompound, and the pedicels generally
from a quarter to half an inch in length. Petals orbicular, sessile.

340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Stamens 15, one before each true caljx-lobe, and two before each
petal : fihiaients very capillary and as long as the calyx. Carpel only
one, gibbous, with a sublateral style, in fruit the coriaceous-utricular
achenium rising out of the cyathiform base of the calyx, and enclosed
by its conniving lobes. Cotyledons plano-convex, the short radicle
oblique, pointing to the base of the style. — It is really going too far
to rank this plant under Potentilla. -^

PoTERiUM OFFICINALE {Sauguisorha officinalis, L.), in a depaupe-
rate form, was collected by Mr. Bolander on the Mendocino Plains,
in 1864: new to this continent.

Gayophytum strictcm : pube molli cinereura ; caule (demum pe-
dali) simplicissimo vel inferne parce ramoso rigido, a basi ad apicem
in axillis foliorum angusto-linearum crebi'e florifero ; petalis (incarna-
tis) oblongis bifidis calyce longioribus ; antheris stam. breviorum pol-
liniferis ; stigmate subclavato breviter bifido ; capsulis arete sessilibus
arrectis lineari-subulatis quadricostatis folia subfequantibus ; seminibus
in quoque loculo biseriatis ovalibus planoconvexis. — Dry hills. Clover-
dale, Sonoma Co., Bolander. Petals 1^, and capsules 5 or 6 lines long.
My original specimen of G. ccesium is too imperfect for verifying the
published characters ; but the present plant seems to differ sufficiently
in its stx'ict and rigid habit, and closely sessile appressed pods with a
tapering point and much thicker valves, as well as in the stamens and
stigma ; and the seeds are more than double the size. The plant is
stouter than any other Gayophytum ; but the ovary is only 2-celled,
although the ovules are in four ranks.

OiInotheka. (Godetia) Whitneyi : minute puberula ; caule valido
usque ad apicem crebre foliato ; foliis oblongo-lanceolatis subinteger-
rimis ; floribus confertis maximis ; calycis tubo obconico segmentis
multo breviore ; antheris linearibus ; stigmatibus linearibus elongatis ;
capsulis sessilibus (nunc subsessilibus) fusiformi-oblongis hirsuto-canes-
centibus (8-12 lin longis), loculis polyspermis ; seminibus adscenden-
tibus. — Plains at Shelter Cove, Humboldt Co. : " very striking and
ornamental," Bolander. Stem about a foot high, simple. Leaves 1 or
2 inches long, tapering to both ends. Calyx-lobes fully an inch long.
Petals fully 2 inches long, pink-purple, sometimes apparently with a
crimson spot about the middle. Stigmas 3 lines long. The most
splendid of all the Godetias, and very desirable for cultivation, from
the fine color and great size of the flowers, crowded at the summit of
the stem. In habit and in the capsule it is allied to (E purpurea, &c. ;

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 341

but the stigmas nre long and yellow. The species is named for
Prof. Whitney, the distinguished head of the State Geological Survey,
in the prosecution of which it was discovered.

BOLANDRA, nov. gen. Saxifragearum.

Calyx camjjanulatus, dilatatus, ultra ovarium liberum longe produc-
tus, 5-fidus, lobis triangulari-lanceolatis acuminatis recurvis £Bstivatione
valvatis. Petala 5, fauci calycis inserta, subulato-attenuata, recurva,
persistentia. Stamina 5, petalis alterna, iisdem brevioi-a : antherae
cordato-bilobai. Ovarium ovatum, basi lata sessile, inferne biloculare
multiovulatum, superne longe bifidum, cornubus requalibus intus mox
apertis stigmate truncato terminatis. Styli proprii vix ulli. — Herba
glabella, parvula, caulibus e radice granulato-bulbillifera gracilibus
alternifoliis, foliis (subreniformibus 5-lobis) Saxifragce vel Boyhinice,
calyce TellimcB, petalis Tolmiece seu Tiarellce sed majoribus firmioribus
purpureo-viridulis calycis lobos subsimulantibus, carpellis mox hiauti-
bus Tiarellce, sed tequalibus stylo fere destitutis basi in ovarium bi-
loculare Saxifragce modo connalis. Flores majusculi, laxe subcorym-
bosi, longius pedicellati. Fructus maturus deest.

BoLANDRA Califoenica. — Yosemite Valley, on the Mariposa
Trail, among rocks, July, H. N. Bolander. [Also coll. by Dr. Torrey,
on foot-hills of the Sierra Nevada.) A span to near a foot high ; the
stems weak and slender. Leaves thin ; the radical and lowest cauline
round-reniform, about 5-lobed to near the middle, the broadish lobes
somewhat 2 - 3-lobed or crenate-incised, on long petioles which are
slightly dilated at the base ; or the lower cauline with a dilated and
clasping appendage at the base, resembling a pair of foliaceous adnata
stipules : the upper leaves, wanting the petiole, pass from panduriform
or cordate-clasping into ovate or oblong partly clasping bracts. Calyx-
tube 3 lines long, very much broader than the included ovary, greenish,
or the attenuate-pointed lobes, like the still more attenuate and longer
petals, tinged with purple. Anthers emarginate at the top ; the short
cells not confluent. The subulate-conical beaks or summits of the ovary
are hollow nearly to the stigma, but ovuliferous only below the junction:
above, the ventral suture opens early. — For the last few years no one
has done so much as Mr. Bolander for developing the botany of his
adopted State, and perhaps no one is likely to do so much hereafter.
It is with great pleasure that I find among his own discoveries a mod-
est but very interesting plant, inhabitant of the far-famed Yosemite

342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

valley, which, being a new generic type in a favorite order, may

most appropriately and deservedly bear Mr. Bolander's name and

commemorate his services to our science. In applying this name to

species, as I have occasion largely to do, I have reluctantly followed

the example set for me by Mr. Lesquereux and Professor Tuckerman,

in writing " Bolanderi" ; yet for the genus (notwithstanding the name

is doubtless Scandinavian) I prefer the form consecrated by unbroken

usage in the strictly similar case of Solander (also of Dryander, if that

is not a genuine Greek-made name), and here write Bolandra rather

than Bolandera.

Sedum obtusatuji : glabrum, subglaucum ; foliis planis spathulatis

cuneatisve, summis oblongis ; floribus laxe cymosis pedicellatis 5-

meris ; petalis ovali-oblongis " flavidis " sepala ovata longius super-

antibus, utrisque obtusissimis ; seminibus appendice cultriformi termi-

natis. — Gi'anite rocks in the Sierra Nevada, on Mount HotFraan and

above Sonora Pass, Brewer ; at Vernal Fall in the Yosemite Valley,

Bolander. Habit and aspect of S. spatkidifoUum and S. Oreganum ;

but the flowers larger than in the former, all pedicellate, and petals

paler, in the specimens mostly seeming to have been almost white.

DEWEYA, Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 1, p. 641. This genus,
which Bentham and Hooker have recently, with Velcea, reduced to
Arracacia, may be sustained upon the undivided carpophore and the
total want of stylopodia ; perhaps also on the completely involute seed.
There is, indeed, no decisive evidence as to the carpophore in the
original species, of which fully ripe fruit has not yet been examined,
but it remains quite entire after the fall of the carpels in the two
species now added. It is to be noted, however, that Bentham, in PL
Hartw. p. 187, describes Arracacia glaucescens as having "carpopho-
rum vix apice bilidum " ; but this is passed over in the Genera Plan-
tarum, where much is made of the carpophore in this tribe.

Deweya arguta, Torr. &, Gray, 1. c. ; Torr. in Bot. Mex. Bound,
t. 26. — Folia simpliciter pinnata. Calycis dentes subulati persis-
tentes. Fructus oblongus, jugis subalato-elevatis.

Deweya Haktwegi : fere acaulis, secus petiolos venas venulasque
foliorum scabrella; foliis biternatis et quinatis ; foliolis obovatis seu
ovali-oblongis quam D. arguta; minus argutis magisque confluentibus ;
calycis dentibus obsoletis ; fructus paululum brevioris jugis carinato-
elevatis vix alajformibus. — On the Sacramento, Hartweg, No. 1748,
in flower. Near San Francisco, Dr. A. Kellogg, in fruit. A leaf

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 843

and single umbel of mature fruit, sent by Dr. Kellogg, enable me to
confirm the suggested near relationship of this plant with D. arguta,
with which it closely agrees except in the particulars indicated. The
leaves have the stouter petiole first ternate, their divisions again
ternate and bearing mostly 3 leaflets on the lateral divisions and 5 on
the middle one, or else the lateral primary divisions are simply 5-7-
foliolate. Fruit barely 3 lines long, laterally contracted, the salient
ribs not so wing-like as in D. arguta, but otherwise similar. The
broad intervals contain 2 or 3 vittte. The mature seed is so involute
that the cross section is circular and the albumen completely encloses
a central cavity. This is also the case in Conium and Smyrnium when
fully ripe. Carpophore wholly entire.

Deweta Kellogii : acaulis, subpedalis ; foliis triternatis ; foliolis
parvulis 3 - 5-fidis, segraentis cuneatis versus apicem argute dentatis
incisisque, dentibus cuspidatis ; umbella in scapo simplici solitario,
involucellis e bracteis parvis subulatis ; calycis dentibus obsoletis ;
fructu didymo (lin. 2 longo et lato) ; mericarpiis turgidis ; jugis fili-
formibus, lateralibus commissurara angustam marginantibus ; valleculis
bivittatis. — Bolinas Bay, near San Francisco, June 23, with mature
fruit, Dr. A. Kellogg. Caudex or root tuberous-thickened (as prob-
ably in both the preceding), its branches sending up a tuft of leaves
about a span high, and a mostly taller naked scape. Involucre none.
Rays of the umbel one or two inches, of the umbellets 2 or 3 lines
long. Styles capillary. Fruit smooth. Carpophore entire, or only
minutely cleft at the apex. Mature seed circular iii cross section, with
a large central cavity. [As this sheet passes to press I find that I have
a flowering specimen, which was collected by Mr. Bolander, on Mission
Hills, near San Francisco: scape 1-leaved below; flowers yellow.]
Doubtfully referred to Deweya, but of widely different genus, is

Oreosciadium ACAVL'E=.Dewega? acaulis, Torr. Bot. Whippl.
Exped. Pacif. R. R. Survey, 4, p. (94) 38. As to the fruit a clear
congener of 0. montanum, Wedd., but with conspicuous calyx-teeth.

Apium (Ammoselinum) Vov'E.i=:AmmoselimimPopei,ToYY.&. Gray
in Pacif. R. R. Surv. 2, p. 165. C. Wright collected this in Texas, in
1851 ; but it is in Berlandier's collection of 1828, No. 1789. The
carpophore is not 2-parted, as described, but merely 2-toothed at the
apex ; and the plant will range near Leptocaulis and Helosciadium
leptophyllum, except for the. longer fruit and the corky development of
the lateral ribs filling the commissure.

344 PROCEEDINQS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Carum Gairdneri {Atcenia Gairdnen, Hook. <Ss Arn., & Edosmia
montana, prcealta, & Oregaiia, 'Nutt.) : var. latifolia : caule sesqui-
pedali ; segmentis foliorum 3-9 lanceolatis (ad semipollicem usque
latis). — Sierras, Ebbett's Pass, Yoseraite, and near Carson City,
Brewer, Bolander, Dr. C. L. Anderson.

Carum Kellogii : glaber ; radicibus fasciculatis stepius fusiformi-
seu tuberoso-incrassatis ; caule 2 - 4-pedali ; foliis 2 - 3-ternatis vel
1 - 2-teriiatis et pinnato-5 - 7-foliolatis, superioribus decrescentibus
7 - 1-foliolatis, petiolo communi spathaceo sublineari, foliolis linearibus
utrinque attenuatis integerrimis summisve fere filiforraibus ; involucro
aut abortivo 1 — 3-bracteato, aut perfecto e bracteis 5-9 lineari- seu
lanceolato-subulatis iis involucellorum similibus ; pedicellis brevibus ;
fructu leviter obovato stylopodiis magnis conicis caljcisque dentibus
subulatis conspicuis coronato, jugis inconspicuis impressis. — California
near the coast: San Jose, Brewer (832) ; Oakland, Bolander ; Bolinas,
Dr. Kellogg. [Also collected, I find, by Fremont, in 184G, only in
flower, but with thick farinaceous roots, as in C. Gairdneri.^ Accord-
ing to Dr. Kellogg the plant is known as " Wild Anise," and the fruit
yields a pleasant anisate odor. It is " very common," but being
" about the latest flowering plant on the Oakland hills," according to
Bolander, has escaped observation. The fully mature fruit, which I
have only from Bolander, is twice or thrice as large as in C. Gaird-
nei'i (2-2^ lines long), tumid, the very large single vittse filling the
intervals, and so turgid that the jugae are sunken, and the albumen
under each sulcate. Calyx-teeth often half a line or more in length.
Involucre and involucels when well developed conspicuous, rather
membranaceous or scarious, and very much as in C. Bidbocastanum.
The plant is, I presume, a congener of the preceding, which has been
well reduced to a mere section of Carum by Bentham and Hooker, and
is not to be widely separated from C. Bidbocastanum, notwithstanding
the different root and the calyx-teeth, which in this species ai'e espe-
cially conspicuous.

CicuTA Californica : foliis inferioribus tantum bipinnatis, superi-
oribus sajpe simpliciter pinnatis 5 - 7-foliolatis ; foliolis ovato-lanceo-
latis, venis primariis tenuibus in dentes desinentibus ; involucro vix
ullo ; fructus jugis contiguis subfequalibus vittas (in valleculis later-
alibus nunc subgeminas !) in madido tegentibus ; semine tereti. —
Apparently common on the Californian seaboard : Monterey, Hartweg
(1754), Brewer (707) ; San Francisco, Dr. Kellogg. The specimens

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 345

are tliinner-leaved than in C. inaculata, and with the uppermost leaves
and the 3-5 superior pinnas of the lower and radical leaves of simple
leaflets (or sometimes the lower 2-lobed), giving the plant the aspect
of a Stum.* Tlie involucels are mostly of broader bracts and the
fruit of rather broader outline than in 0. maculata ; the ribs all very-
corky : carpophore 2-parted : transverse section of the seed orbicular.
C. maculata, besides the difference in the leaves, and especially in their
venation, has the marginal jugfe, as seen in cross section, very much
larger than the others, and the seed either flat or decidedly concave on
the face.

PiMPiNELLA APiODORA : glabra, bi-tripedalis ; foliis ternato-decom-
positis, caulinis petiolo primario spathaceo, foliolis inciso-pinnatifidis
trifidisve, segmentis oblongis vel subcuneatis incisis ; involucellis e
bracteis lineari-subulatis vel setaceis ; floribus albis nunc roseo tinc-
tis ; fructu late ovato subdidymo, jugis prominulis. — Rocky hills along
the coast of California from Mendocino Co., Bolander, to San Fran-
cisco, Bolander, Kellogg, &c. Apparently not rare, it is singular that
it has remained so long unnoticed. The fleshy root, stems, and seeds
are strongly imbued with the odor and flavor of Celery. The fully
mature fruit is yet unknown ; but the form of the fruit and seed, the
numerous vittte, the absence of calyx-teeth, and the conspicuous pul-
vinate stylopodia indicate the genus ; which is new to this continent,
excepting P. integerrima (Zizia integerrima, DC), referred to it by
Bentham and Hooker.

PODOSCIADIUM, nov. gen. Scandicinearum.

Flores polygami, albi. Calycis dentes prominentes, tenues, scariosi
vel petaloidei, subulati. Petala obovata, acumine inflexo vel involute
longo, ob costam superne impressam emarginata. Stylopodia brevia,
conica. Fructus oblongus, a latere pi. m. compressus, ad commisuram
haud constrictus, apice subcontractus, jugis filiformibus vel angustissi-
mis, valleculis latis 1 - 2-vittatis. Semen facie late sulcatum, sulco
linea centrali prominula percurso, sectione transversa reniformi. Car-

f SiUM LiNEARE, Michx. I must dissent from the statement in Benth. &
Hook. Gen. PI. p. 888, that in this " valleculis perperam 2-3-vittatis dictis " ; both
this and S. Carsomi being found on re-examination to accord with the characters
assigned in my Manual, except that the vittte are very seldom solitary, even in the
dorsal intervals. I may add, as farther separating them from Apium, that both
species have a manifest, but very attenuated, completely 2-parted carpophore.

VOL. VII. 44

346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

pophorum bifidum. — Herbfe perennes, glaberrima?, subsimplices ; foliis
pinnatim vel subternatim decorapositis, segmentis linearibus angustis ;
umbellis longe pedunculatis pluri-radiatis, terminali fertili, lateralibus
masculis, involucris et involucellis e bracteis plurimis subscariosis line-
aribus seu lanceolatis setaceo-acuminatis. — A nearly allied plant,
probably, is No. 6 of Hartweg's Mexican collection, doubtfully appended
to Oreomyrrhis by Bentham ; but it has a simple umbel and obtuse
nearly plane petals.

PODOSCIADIUM Californicum ( Ghcerophyllum ? Calif ormcum,Torr.
Bot. Whipp. Exped. p. 37): caule 3 - 4-pedali ; segmentis foliorum
planis ; umbellis 9 - 12-radiatis ; calycis dentibus stylopodiis bi'eviori-
bus ; petalis acumine involuto obtuso ; fructus jugis filiformibus obtu-
sis ; semine sub vittis in valleculis solitariis magnis pi. m. sulcato. —
Knight's Ferry, Stanislaus River, Dr. J. M. Bigelow.

Podosciadium: Bolanderi : caule 2 - 3-pedali superne longe
nudo ; foliis plerisque subradicalibus, segmentis angustissime linearibus
fere filiformibus ; umbellis multiradiatis ; involucelli bracteis angustis
tenuiter aristatis pedicellos subrequantibus ; calycis dentibus petalis
acumine attenuato inflexo subdimido triplove brevioribus ; fructus
jugis angustissimis elevatis ; vittis in valleculis binis obscuris. — Mari-
posa Trail, Yosemite, Bolander. This cannot well be other than a
close congener of the preceding : the only doubt comes from the pair
of vittae in the intervals, which, however, are rather obscurely marked
in the thin pericarp, although the seed is well formed. Fruit much
smaller than in P. Californicum, only a line and a half long ; the
ribs exceedingly narrow, but sharp and salient. Calyx-teeth ovate-
subulate, as thin and delicate as the petals.

MYRRtllS § GLYCOSMA. {Glycosma, Nutt.) Fructus juga
Igevia, baud alaeformia. Styli brevissirai. Involucellum nullum. Fo-
liola pauciora, latiora, minus incisa.

M. occiDENTALis {G. occidentole, Nutt.): subpuberula ; foliolis
oblongis sublanceolatisve serratis raro incisis ; pedicellis fructiferis
flores sterilia subsuperantibus ; jugis fructus acutis.

M. Bolanderi : subpubescens ; foliolis ovatis magis incisis ; pedi-
cellis fructiferis floribus sterilibus brevioribus ; jugis obtusis. — lAt
Lambert's Lake, Mendocino Co., Bolander. Leaflets more numerous
than in Nuttall's species, and more like those of Osmorrhiza.
Pedicels of the fruit only a line and a half long. — Bentham and
Hooker have characterized the genus Myrrhis upon M. odorata alone,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 347

' and then added the American species without modifying the general
diagnosis.

LiGUSTicuM (Cynapidm, Nutt.) APiiFOLiuM. Nuttall's two forms,
Hall and Harbour's No. 218 from the Rocky Mountains, and the Cal-
ifornian specimens (some of them with leafless stems) may comprise
two or more species ; but wholly mature fruit has been collected only
by Nuttall. In this the seed is scarcely more concave on the face
than in some genuine species of Ligusticum, to which genus Bentham
and Hooker refer it.

Ligusticum scopulorum : L. {Gonioselino) i^«W«en affine ; mer-
icarpiis parum brevioribus ovali-oblongis ; alls angustioribus crassi-
oribus, interraediis et dorsali minus evolutis 1-2 stepe obsoletis ; vittis
perspicuis majusculis in valleculis omnibus 3 nunc in lateralibus 4 ;
sectione seminura fere reniformi. — Santa Antonita, New Mexico, Dr.
J. M. Bigelow, with ripe fruit ; the plant enumerated in the Botany
of Whipple's Expedition, p. 38, as Conioselinum Oanadense. Also in
the Rocky Mountains of Colorado Territory, being doubtless Parry's
No. 156, and Hall and Harbour's 216 (at least in part), published as
G. Fischeri. Apparently the same collected at Fort Steilacombe,
Washington Terr., by Dr. Suckley. Fruit in size and shape interme-
diate between that of Conioselinum Fischeri of the Old World, which
Bentham and Hooker refer to Ligusticum^ and G. Ganadense which
(having the vitta? usually solitary in the dorsal and in pairs in the
lateral intervals, and the carpels more orbicular) they remand to Seli-
num. Unless more definite distinctions can be found, it were better to
unite Selinum with Ligusticum. (The Gonioselinum from Ochotsk, in
Rodgers's Expedition, mentioned by Bentham and Hooker, is probably
the form or doubtful variety cited in the Flora Rossica and Flora
Ochotensis under G. cenolophioides.)

Ligusticum montanum = Thaspium ? 7nontanum, Gray, PI.
Fendl., PI. Wright, &c., (referred to Ligusticum by Bentham and
Hooker, but by their characters should be a Selinum,) has mericarps in
some specimens almost orbicular, including the broad marginal wings,
in others oblong-oval ; in both the strong vittae are sometimes single,
sometimes double. The foliage is very variable for one and the same
species ; but the form with long and slender divisions to the leaves
shows fruit of both shapes.

Angelica lineakiloba : glabra ; caule valido ; petiolis prorsus
spathaceo-dilatatis ; foliolis longe linearibus acutatis (1-2-poll.) inte-

348 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

geriitnis nunc 1 - 3-flentatis sen lobo divaricate instructis in rachin
maro-inatum decurrentibus ; involucre involucellisque subnullis ; flori-
l us albi.s ; fructus alis disco angusto oblongo paullo angustioribus ;
vittis semini adha3rentibus, lateralibus geminis. — Ostrander's Mead-
ows, Yosemite Valley, alt. 8,000 feet, Bolander. Stem 2 or 3 feet
high. The nearly full-grown fruit, including the wing, is oval-oblong,
about 4 lines long and 2J- wide ; mericarps flat. The stout root not
sweet-scented.

Angelica Breweri : glabra vel tenuiter puberula ; petiolis spatha-
ceo-dilatatis ; foliis triternatis vel triquinatis ; foliolis lato-lanceolatis
argute dentatis (dentibus cuspidatis) reticulato-venulosis, lateralibus
sessilibus basi inoequali hinc saepe adnata ; involucro involucellisque
nullis ; floribus albis ; fructu puberulo oblongo, alis crassis angustis ;
vittis in valleculis lateralibus quandoque geminis ; semine facie concavo
(sectione transversa lunata) dorso sub vittis sulcato. — Sierra Nevada,
near Ebbett's Pass, and on the Big-tree road, alt. 6,000 feet. Prof.
Brewer [and near Donner Lake, Prof. Torrey, with mature fruit].
Stem apparently tall and stout. Fruit 4^ lines long, with wings less
than half the width of the disk, cellular, and as thick as the edges of
the much-flattened seed : the vittae large, adherent on the one side to
the groove of the seed into which it is received, on the other to the
thin pericarp.

F KKVL A CxJ.iFon^iCA. = Leptofcenia? Californica, 'Nntt. The ma-
ture fruit of this, now collected by Bolander [also by Prof. Torrey],
but already quite well described by Torrey, in Bot. Whippl. Expl.,
is traversed with numerous conspicuous, although slender, often anas-
tomosing vittae, and the winged margin is no thicker than in some
species of Ferula, to which this plant appears clearly to belong. Its
dilated leaflets are in the manner of Narthex.

Ferula (Leptot^nia, Nutt.) dissecta, with vittaj obsolete, as
in several Old-World species of Ferula, has usually, and in some of
Nuttall's own specimens, an obvious involucre of many bracts ; the
fruiting pedicels very short.

Ferula (Leptot^enia, Nutt.) multifida, if, as is likely, the plant
in Spalding's Clear Water collection, has no involucre and longer ped-
icels to the flowers and fruit : the latter I have not seen full grown.
There are some indications of one or two more species.

Peucedanum Euryptera {Enryptera lucida, Nutt.), the good
figure of which in the Mexican Boundary Survey, t. 27, is not cited

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 349

in Bentham and Hooker's Genera Plantarum, is clearly inseparable
from Tommasinia, as those authors have indicated, and so to be
referred to Peucedaniim.

Garrya buxifolia : foliis parvis ovato-ellipticis mucronatis eras-
sis integerrimis supra mox glabris nitidis subtus argenteo-sericeis ;
spicis foemineis peudulis brevibus, bracteis alte connatis plerisque uni-
floris ; ovario glabro. — A low shrub, on the Red Mountains, Mendo-
cino Co., Bolander. Only the female plant. Leaves about the size
of those of Box, glossy bright green and glabrous above as soon as
they are grown, whitened beneath with a very fine and close silky
pubescence which seems scarcely if at all deciduous with age, almost
veinless. Female spikes nodding from the first, simple and short, sel-
dom much longer than the leaves. Pedicels very short and included
in the truncate-connate bracts ; the calyx-teeth obsolete.

Garrya Fremontii, Torr. Bot. Whippl. A specimen in fruit
found by Mr. Bolander " in a tavern on the Sonora road " in January,
1866, has the leaves oftener obtuse or retuse ; the fruiting spikes erect,
with bracts like those of the male. Berries glabrous, very short-
pedicelled : the two short calyx-teeth manifest.

LoNiCERA Breweri (Gray, in Proceed. Am. Acad. 6, p. 537,
char, emend.) : caule erecto ; foliis brevi-petiolatis ovalibus utrinque
rotundatis seu majoribus pi. m. acuminatis basique subacutis mem-
branaceis cum ramulis junioribus pubescentibus, pube brevi moUi ;
pedunculis floribus vix duplo longioribus ; bracteis bracteolisque con-
similibus minimis rotundatis cum basi ovariorum coadunatorum connatis
obsolescentibus ; corolla lurido-purpurea campanulata late gibbosa
ultra medium bilabiata, fauce ad staminura insertionem styloque vil-
losissimis. — Collected at the Mariposa Grove, Bolander, larger and
more developed than Prof. Brewer's specimens from Mount Dana.
[Also by Prof. Torrey, at Donner's Pass, &c.] The leaves in the
present specimens 1^, or the larger and later ones 2 inches in length,
and disposed to be acute at both ends or acuminate. Ovaries most
commonly united to or near the summit, the short calyx-teeth usually
blunt. — The present well-developed specimens show it is not L. nigra,
nor even L. Chamissoi, but the Mandchurian L. Maximowicii, Rupr.
to which this is most nearly related. In that, however, the pubes-
cence is much more sparse and pilose ; the leaves more ovate and
taper-pointed, with yeinlets conspicuously reticulated ; the peduncles
much longer ; the ovaries longer, tapering, and less united ; the style
more hairy, &c.

350 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Galium pubens : perenne, undique pube densa patente cinereum ;
caulibus (ultrapedalibus) adsurgentibus paniculato-ramosis inerrnibus ;
foliis quaternis quinisve ovatis vel oblongis (lin. 4-6 longis) fere mu-
ticis uninerviis secus margines costamque magis hispidulis ; cymulis
foliosis paucifloris, pedicellis fructiferis deflexis ; corollis albidis vel
carneis raro 3 - 5-fidis ; fructu ut videtur carnoso, immaturo pubero. —
Yosemite Valley and adjacent mountains, Bolander, Torrey. The
specimens collected by the former have perhaps only male flowers, on
very short pedicels ; those collected by the latter have fertile flowers,
on pedicels mostly twice the length of the flower and fruit. The
pubescence, although soft and velvety to the touch, is hispidulous,
but not uncinate, although rather hispid on the margins of the leaves ;
the angles of the stem not at all armed or roughened.

Galium Bolanderi : glabrum ; caulibus e radice perenni ramos-
simo diffuso (ultrapedali) ramulisque fere Isevibus ; foliis quaternis
lato-linearibus uninerviis margine rariter scabro-hispidulis (3-5 lin.
longis) ; paniculis laxe floribundis ; pedicellis flore purpureo brevi-
oribus vel a^quilongis ; fructu (immaturo) subgranulato glabro. —
Sierra Nevada, on the Mono Ti-ail, Bolander. — Flowers small : the
corolla only a line or a line and a half in diameter, apparently deep
dull purple.

Galium acutissimum : scabrido-puberulum, inerme ; caule gracili
ramoso ; foliis quaternis (lin. 3 longis) ovato-lanceolatis seu lanceolatis
valide uninerviis sensim in cuspidem rigidum acuminatis ; cymulis
paucifloris ; floribus albis brevissime pedicellatis ; ovario glabro. —
Between the Rio del Norte and New Mexico, Dr. Newberry. A very
small-flowered species, remarkable for its gradually attenuated, cuspi-
date, rather rigid leaves.

Brickellia incana : tomento implexo (setate subdeciduo) de-
albata; foliis ramorum alternis subcordatis vel ovatis sessilibus fere
integerriniis basi subtrinervatis ; capitulis ramos terminatibus breviter
pedunculatis multifloris ; involucri pluriserialis squamis obtusis, ex-
timis ovatis, intimis linearibus ; acheniis sericeis. — Providence Moun-
tain, in the Mohave district, 1861, Dr. J. G. Cooper. Only a single
specimen, which wants the lower part of the stem. Leaves rather
thin, the largest present less than an inch long, those on the flowering
branchlets barely half an inch long. Heads single on the branchlets,
even larger than those of B. lanata (an inch long, very many-flow-
ered), the down finer and whiter, completely hiding the veins.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 851

Lessingia leptoclada : floccoso-lanata, demum glabrescens, baud
viscosa ; caule erecto virgato superne ramos floridos sispius coryrabosos
filitbrmes proferentibus ; foliis infimis spathulatis subdentatis, superi-
oribus lanceolatis linearibiisque integerrimis basi brevissime sagittato-
adnatis, ramorum parvis nunc raris in bracteas subulatas transeuntibus ;
capitulis 5-20-tioris solitariis bi-quinisve ramulos seu pedunculos ter-
minantibus ; involucri squarais lanceolato-linearibus acutatis mucrona-
tis ; corollis consimilibus purpureis, limbo a^qualiter 5-partito ; pappo
corollse tubum ada^quante ; radice (ut in omnibus sp.) annua. — Tres
forrase admodum divers^e, ut videtur coUigendiB : — typica, 1 - 2-pe-
dalis, capitulis 18-20-floris; involucre turbinate pluriseriali, squamis
exterioribus gradatim brevioribus ; ramis floridis gracillimis nunc sim-
plicibus aj)ice 1 - 3-ceplialis, nunc proliferis pedunculis filiformibus
corymbosis. — Yosemite Valley, in sandy soil, Bolander. [And now
received from the collections of Bridges and Torrey, and in a collec-
tion from Dr. Kellogg, said to be from near San Fi-ancisco.]

Var. MiCROCEPHALA : sesqui - bipedalis ; caule foliisque caulinis
(argute dentatis rigidioribus) denudatis leviter glanduloso-scabridis ;
ramis tloridis filiformibus effuse paniculatis decorapositis ; capitulis parcis
lin. 3 tantum longis involucre 5-floro ; turbinate. — On Bear Mountain,
Dr. Torrey, 1865. I take this to be a form of L. leptoclada, probably
from a mere exposed station, and with depauperated inflorescence.

Var. TENUIS : 3 - T-pellicaris ; capitulis paucis 5 - 7-floris ; involucro
angusto e squamis paucioribus attenuatis minus imbricatis. — Yosemite
Valley, with the typical form, of which, as Mr. Bolander did net
distinguish the two, I infer it to be a remarkable-depauperate state.
But Dr. Torrey, who likewise collected it, regarded the three plants as
wholly distinct species. Further observation will determine. The
corolla in all is apparently light purple or whitish, as in all the other
species except L. Germanorum, where they are yellow : the lobes 2 or
3 lines long, oblong, becoming linear, their margins induplicate in aesti-
vation up to the nerves (as in the others) : inner flowers at length
probably as large as the outermost : genitalia included : appendages of
the style tipped with a prominent cusp much exceeding the bristles.

CoRETHROGYNE SPATHULATA : caulibus ctespitosis decumbentibus
apice vel ramis paucis adscendentibus foliosis menocephalis ; foliis obe-
vate-spathulatis versus apicem serratis, superioribus evalibus oblongisve,
summis in bracteas lineares transeuntibus ; capitulo pre genere maxi-
mo ;' involucre hemisphserico ; squamis linearibus vel subspathulatis

352 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

acutis glandulosis subrequilongis disco sequalibus ; paleis inter flores
nnllis. — On the coast at Shelter Cove and at Fort Bragg, Humboldt
Co., Bolander. " Forming large patches or tufts ; the stems lying on
the ground, only the heads rising above the grass." Ascending stems
or branches a foot or less high, covered like the foli'age with the floc-
cose cottony down of the genus. Leaves f-2 inches long. 6-10
lines M'ide, thin. Heads IJ- inches or more in diameter, including the
numerous violet-purple rays. The narrowest-leaved specimens might
pass for the broadest-leaved form of the variable G. jilaginifolia, but
the heads are like those of G. Galifornica, only still larger. From the
habit, the white-cottony leaves, and the showy heads of flowers, this
would be a very desirable acquisition to the gardens.

Aster Chilensis, Nees, common about San Francisco, was doubt-
less collected in California by Hasnke, and not in Chili, where, appar-
ently, it does not occur. So that Nuttall's name, A. Durandi, distrib-
uted with specimens, but not published, had better be substituted.

Aster (Orthomeris, Torr. & Gr., Xylorhiza, Nutt.) Andersonii
{Erigeron, Gelmisia, Andersonii, supra, 6, p. 540) : lana tenui mox
decidua glabratus ; caulibus e rhizomate nudo adsurgente erectis sim-
plicissimis monocephalis ; foliis gramineis linearibus coriaceis siepe
nitidis 3-5-nerviis (angustioribus fere uninerviis), radicalibus spitha-
mgeis, caulinis brevibus in bracteas subulatas sensim decrescentibus ;
capitulo nudo hemisphferico (^--f poll, lato) ; involucri subtomentosi
squamis lineari-lanceolatis acutis subherbaceis laxis 2-3-seriatis sub-
tequilongis ; ligulis oblongis (cseruleis vel purpureis) ; styli ramis fl.
herm. longe tenuiter subulatis, parte hispida terminali quam stigmatosa
3 - 4-plo longiori : acheniis oblongis villosis 4- 6-costatis ; pappi setis
subgequalibus barbellulatis. — Nevada, Carson City, Dr. C. L. Ander-
son. California, Lake Tenaya in the Sierra Nevada, alt. 8,000 feet,
Prof. Brewer. "Westfall's Meadows in the Yoseraite, 8,000 feet, and
in meadows on the Tuolumne, 9,700 feet, smaller and smoother speci-
mens, H. N. Bolander. The form from the highest station has the
radical leaves only 2 to 4 inches long and barely a line wide ; the
others of Bolander have the slender flowering stems 6 to 9 inches high,
and the conspicuously nerved Xyri-;-like radical leaves 2 lines wide.
Not satisfied with my former reference of this plant to Erigeron,
I now perceive that its pappus is neither scanty nor uniserial, and
that it must rank with Nuttall's Xylorhiza, Aster Xylorhiza, Torr. &
Gray Fl.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 353

Aster tortifolius (non 'M'\chx.) = Aplopappics tortifoUus, Gray,
afterwards Townsendia {Megalastrum) tortifolia, Gray, and the related
A. Wrightii, which had also been referred to Townsendia, are both
Asters of this Xylorhiza section.

Erigeron supplex : humile, subvilloso-pubescens ; caulibus e basi
decumbente adsurgentibus simplicissimis apice nudo monocephalis ;
foHis crebris integerrirais spathulato-lanceolatis summisve lineai'ibus
scepe glabratis hirsuto-ciliatis ; involucri squamis linearibus acuminatis
dorso villosis discum ada^quantibus laxis ; ligulis nuUis ; coroUis fl.
disci marginalium rariter difFormibus 2 - 4-dentati3 ; acheniis hispid-
ulis binervatis ; pappo e setis barbellato-scabris corolla paullo brevi-
oribus setulisque nonnullis brevibus. — Roadside near Mendocino City,
Bolander. I have also a specimen collected by Dr. Andrews, the
station not recorded. Stems 3 to 6 inches long, apparently numerous,
and spreading from a perennial root. Lower and larger leaves little
over an inch in length and 3 lines in width, tapering into a petiole-like
base. Head about half an inch in diameter, very many-flowered ; the
yellow disk flowers commonly all alike and perfect ; sometimes a few
of the outermost a little enlarged, and, as it were, essaying to become
ligLilate. Tips of the style very obtuse.

Aplopappus (Stenotus) acaulis = Stenotus acaidis, Nutt., a
Rocky-Mountain species, was collected on Mount Davison, Nevada, by
Mr. H. G. Bloomer.

Aplopappus (Pyrrocoma) Whitneyi : late ctespitosus, glandu-
loso-scabridus ; caulibus (ultrapedalibus) tenuiter pubescentibus usque
ad apicem gequaliter foliosis ; foliis oblongis subamplexicaulibus venulosis
grosse argutissime dentatis, imisve angustioribus integrioribus ; capit-
ulis paucis subpaniculatis ; involucro 20 - 25-floro oblongo-campanu-
lato, squamis lanceolatis acutis appressis ; ligulis 6-8 angustis discum
paullo superantibus. — Mono Trail and Sonora Pass, in open woods,
alt. 9,000 feet ; grows in large tufts, Bolander. This well-marked new
species (named for the Director of the Survey) has the foliage of a
Grindelia or of Aplopoppus Nuttallii, and few or several rather small
heads. The leaves are scarcely coriaceous, an inCh or an inch and a
half long, acute or obtuse, all but the lower beset with sharp teeth
even to the clasping or half-clasping base. Peduncles seldom lono-er
than the heads or the subtending leaf, terminated by one to three more
or less foliolose bracteate heads ; these three fourths of an inch lono- in
fruit. Scales of the involucre few-ranked. Branches of the style,

VOL. VII. 45

354 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

fulvous rigid jiappus, and glabrous striate-ribbed linear achenia as in
the species of this section.

Aplopappus (PruROCOMA) APARGioiDES : caespitosus, humilis,
villosulus seu glaber ; caulibus floridis subscapiformibus e caudice
crasso folia pleraque radicalia rosulato-conferta linearia seu lanceolata
laciniato-pinnatifida superantibus mono - tricephalis ; involucro hemi-
sphcerico multifloro, squarais 3 - 4-seriatim imbricatis sa?pius obtusis
appressis ; ligulis 20 - 24 oblongis exsertis. — At Soda Springs, on the
Tuolumne River, alt. 9,700 feet, Bolander. Also, sparingly, Carson
City, Nevada, Dr. C. L. Anderson. Stems about a span high, slender,
naked above ; the leaves reduced to small linear bracts, simple or
divided into one or two peduncle-hke branches. Radical leaves 2-5
inches long, in shape not unlike those of Leontodon autumnale, but
rigid. Head nearly half an inch in diameter, naked. Style, glabrous
striate achenia, and pappus of tlie section ; the later not very copious
nor rigid. One form has the stem slightly villous-pubescent and the
margins of the radical leaves sparingly hirsute-ciliate : the other form
is glabrous.

Aplopappus (Pyrrocoma) panicdlatus = Hoynopappus panic-
ulatus, Nutt., var. virgatus : capitulis numerosis minoribus. — Bridge-
port, on the eastern side of the Sierra, in alkaline soil, Bolander. Dr.
Anderson collected it at Carson City, Nevada, equally with slightly
haiiy ovaries ; but the heads larger, nearly as in Nuttall's plant.

Aplopappus (Ericameria) Bloomeri (Gray, supra, 6, p. 541),
var. ANGUSTATUS : foliis angustissime linearibus ; capitulis racemosis
plerumque 10 - 12-floris, ligulis 1-4 quandoque nullis. — On Mount
Shasta, alt. 6,000 feet. Prof. Brewer (1415) ; Little Yosemite Valley,
Empire Camp on the Yosemite Trail, and Soda Springs, alt. 9,700 feet,
Bolander. From an imperfect specimen it is probable that this was
also collected on the head-waters of the Sacramento in Wilkes's Explor-
ing Expedition. It seems to be connected by gradations with the
ordinary form of A. Bloomeri. It is a shrub, one or two feet in height,
according to Mr. Bolander.

LiNOSTRis (Chrtsothamnus) Bolanderi: fruticosa, pedalis, sub-
viscosa ; ramis lana valde implexa dealbatis ; foliis spathulato-lineari-
bus seu oblanceolatis acutatis baud rigidis subtx'inerviis ; capitulis pau-
cis pluribusve ad apicem ramorum corymboso-congestis bracteis 1-2
linearibus iisdem dimidio brevioribus stipatis ; involucro cylindraceo
7 - 11-floro, squamis 10 - 12 pauciseriatis lanceolato-linearibus attenu-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 355

ato-acuminatis fere glabris ; receptaculi alveolis in dentes subulatos
productis ; acheniis sericeo-pubescentibus. — Mono Pass, at 9 - 10,000
feet of elevation, Bolander. — In aspect and foliage (except that the
leaves are more lanceolate and acute or acuminate), this much resem-
bles Aplopappus Macronema, Gray (Macronema discoidea, Nutt.)
which is one of the many links connecting Aplopappus and Linosyris ;
but it is a near relative of L. Parryi, and a genuine Chrysothamniis.
The narrow and much crowded heads are about three fourths of an
inch in length.

CoNYZA. CouLTERi ( (7. suhdecurrens. Gray, PI. Fendl. p. 78, &
PI. Wright. 1, p. 102, non DC.) : molliter viscoso-pubescens ; caule
ramisque strictis ad apicem usque foliosis ; foliis adnato-sessilibus
lineari-oblongis vel inferioribus spathulatis plei'isque pinnatifido-denta-
tis incisisve ; panicula conferta virgata ; capitulis parvis (sesquilineam
longis) ; involucro disco breviore, squamis hirto-viscosis linearibus
acutis. — This is Coulter's No. 285 and 286, and has recently been col-
lected near Fort Mohave by Dr. Cooper. It is quite different from the
Mexican Conyza or Erigeron suhdecurrens, which I now possess from
Di-. Schultz. The pistillate flowers have no ligule, and the hermaphro-
dite flowers are only 5 - 7 ; so that, although the pappus is not copious,
the plant is better placed in Conyza.

Franseria eriocentra: fruticosa; foliis oblanceolatis vel spathu-
latis ssepius sinuato vel inciso-dentatis cinereis, junioribus ramulisque
villosulis ; involucris fructiferis fusiformibus unilocularibus monosper-
mis cum aculeis longis validis longe lanatis. — East slope of Provi-
dence Mountain, Arizona, May, 1861, Dr. J. G. Cooper. In fruit
only ; the male flowers not seen. Apparently a low shrub. Spines
of the involucre 2 lines long, larger than the diameter of the cell,
thickly clothed with long white wool.

ANCISTROCARPHUS, Nov. Gen.

Capitulum pluriflorum, heterogamum ; floribus omnibus tubulosis,
singulis palea receptaculi suff'ultis ; exterioribus 5-10 foemineis in re-
ceptaculo breviter cylindrico 1 - 2-seriatis, corolla filiformi ; centralibus
5 masculis, corolla 4-dentata. Invohicrum proeter paleas flores invol-
ventes nullum. Palete subcoriaceie, ovatos, acuminata^, fl. foem. saccatae,
apiceque breviter scarioso-appendiculat^ modo Psilocarphi, achenium
obovato-fusiforme vix obcompressum includentes cum eo tardius de-
ciduae ; steril. 5 majores flores longius superantes, concava^ vel sub-

356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

cymbfeformes, in cuspidern apice uncinatara rigidam sensim acuminatfe,
persistentes, fructu delapso stellato-patentes. Pappus nuUus. — Herba
exigua, digitalis, annua, Filaginis Gallicce facie ; foliis linearibus alter-
nis, summis capitulum vel glomerulum 3 - 4-cephaluin sessile involu-
crantibus.

Ancistrocarphus filagineus. — Dry hillsides. Round Valley,
Eel River, Mendocino Co., May, Bolander. Stems simple or sparingly
branched, slender, 2 to 4 inches high. Leaves narrowly spatulate-
linear, clothed as is the whole plant with light flocculent wool. Paleae
of the fertile flowers arachnoid-woolly, especially towards the involute
margins, those of the sterile flowers fully twice larger, becoming
nearly two lines long, more naked, the hooked tips prominent, making
the head or glomerule squarrose. To provide for this little plant I am
obliged to add yet another to the Micropoid genera. This is related on
the one hand to Nuttall's Psilocarphus, of which it has the achenia and
the enclosing fructiferous paleae ; on the other to Hesperevax caulescens
(which may be completely separated from Evax, to which I referred
it in Bot. Whipp., p. 45, t. 10), having like that a whorl of coriaceous
palefB surrounding the sterile flowers. One would like to combine
these last ; but the habit does not invite it, and the naked fertile paleae
of Hesperevax are open as in Evax, although apparently persistent.

Balsamorhiza Bolanderi: glulinosa, fere glabra; caulibus (sub-
pedalibus) e caudice longo adsurgentibus superne 3 -5-foliatis mono-
cephalis ; foliis omnibus petiolatis ovatis subrotundisve sfepissirae leviter
cordatis acuminulatis integerrimis ; capitulo maximo ; involucro duplici,
exteriori foliaceo 6 - 8-phyllo, phyllis ovatis oblongisve acutis disco longi-
oribus, interiori e squamis uniseriatis lanceolatis supra medium villosissi-
mis paleis receptaculi similibus ; acheniis (compressis vel obcompressis)
obovato-oblongis glabris areola epigyna parva. — Shady hillsides, at
Auburn, April, 1865, Bolander. " Rootstocks large ; whole plant
glutinous and of a strong resinous smell." The aspect of this remarkable
species is that of a Wyethia. Radical and cauliue leaves alike (2 to
4 inches long, on petioles of 6 to 20 lines in length), but the base of
the stout stems bears one or two scales in place of foliage ; the upper-
most leaf near the head or an inch or two below. Head in the dried
specimens 2 inches in diameter ; the yellow rays 12 or more, an inch
and a half long, broad. Achenia remarkably flattened for the genus.
[This, as now appears, was collected in 1844 by Fremont on the upper
Sacramento, and later by Major Rich.]

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE U, 1867. 357

AVyethia ovata : tomentoso-pubescens ; caule valido tripedali
superne raraoso, ramis nionocephalis ; foliis ovatis acutissimis tripli-
nerviis subtus canescentibus, majoribus nunc subcordatis deltoideisve
omnibus petiolatis ; capitulis mediocris ; involucri squamis lanceolatis,
exterioribus laxis discum baud superantibus ; ligulis 10-14; pappo
calyci formiii-l-egulari exaristato. — Dry hillsides at Clark's, Mariposa
Co., Bolander. [Also collected by the late Thomas Bridges.] — Cauline
leaves 5-7 inches long, on petioles of 1 or 2 inches ; those of the
flowering branches 2 or 3 inches long and less truncate or rounded at
base ; the principal veins and ribs prominent underneath ; veinlets not
reticulated. Heads an inch in diameter. Rays often with imperfect
stamens. Achenia about 4 lines, the pappus nearly a line long.

RUDBECKIA Californica : caule simplici inferne glabro apice
longe nudo pedunculiformi monocephalo ; foliis pube brevi molli in-
dutis ovato-lanceolatis penninerviis membranaceis parce ina;qualiter
serratis nunc inciso-dentatis, caulinis nunc lyrato-tripartitis, summis
semi-am plexicaulibus ; involucri squamis linearibus subuniseriatis ;
ligulis cuneato-oblongis sesquipollicaribus discum cylindraceum ad-
sequantibus vel superantibus ; fl. disci paleis acheniisque R. occiden-
talism Nutt. — Mariposa Big-tree Grove, Bolander. [Also in a collec-
tion of the late Thomas Bridges.] Stem 3 feet high, somewhat pubes-
cent at the summit. Leaves 3 to 6 inches long, all but the upper con-
tracted into margined petioles, occasionally obscurely triplinerved.
This may prove to be a radiate variety of R. occidentalis, in which
traces of pubescence are sometimes to be found.

Rigiopappus leptocladus. Gray, described from Dr. Lyall's
collection (supra, 6, p. 548), was gathered by Mr. Bolander at New-
castle in California, in 1865, and on Russian River in 1866.

BuRRiELiA LANOSA, Gray, in Bot. Whipp. (Pacif. R. R. 4), p. 51,
& Bot. Mex. Bound, p. 96. Near Fort Mohave, Dr. J. G. Cooper.
Better developed specimens than before collected, 2 to 4 inches high,
diffusely branching ; the leaves mostly narrowly spatulate, and the
cylindraceous heads peduncled. The rays prove to be white, and the
palete of the pappus vary from 8 to 12. All the upper leaves are al-
ternate. The involucre is that of a Bahia of the section Eriophyllum :
but the setiform appendages or cusps to the anthers (here remarkably
long) are as in Burrielia. They are similar, however, in Bahia rubella
and B. Wallacei, Gray, to which, especially to the former, the present
plant is very nearly related.

358 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

BuRRiELiA (Dich^ta) maritima: arenoso-pubescens, raoxglabrata;
caulibus diffusis ; foliis oblongo-linearibus integerrimis trinervulis ;
peclunculis folia paullo superantibus ; involucri squamis ovali-oblongis
G - 8 ; ligulis totidem brevissiinis ; corollis fl. disci (circiter 20) fauce
campanulata ; acheniis oblongo-linearibus pubescentibus ; pappi aristis
3-5 scabris achenio paullo brevioribus setulisque plurimis interjectis.
— On the Farallones, rocky islets off San Francisco, Mr. F. Gruber.
A span high : leaves an inch long : head 4 lines long : the broad ligules
barely equalling the disk.

Leptosynne Newberryi: L. Douglasii facie, stylis, etc.; tubo
coroUaruin brevioribus annulo barbato inconspicuo ; acheniis ala lata
tenui laevi cinctis (corona obsoleta) fere epapposis. — Sitgreaves Pass,
-Arizona or New Mexico, Dr. Newberry. Camp Grant, Arizona, Dr.
Edward Palmer. There are no capitate hairs or glands on the broad
and thin wing of the achenium, but some very short ones on the dorsal
face of its body. The flowers are intermediate between L. Douglasii
and L. StiUmaaii.

Leptosynne maritima = Tuclcermannia maritima, Nutt. The
characters upon which Nuttall's genus rested, never strong, are now
quite invalidated.

RiDDELLiA CooPERi : ramosissima (bipedalis, basi frutescens ?),
lana appressa canescens ; foliis augusto-linearibus integerrimis (imis
ignotis) ; pedunculis ramos terminantibus solitariis monocephalis gra-
cilibus ; ligulis stepius 4 ; pappi paleis oblongis aut integris aut eroso-
laceris corolla disci et achenio glabro 2 - 3-plo brevioribus. — Gravelly
banks at Fort Mohave, Dec. 1861, Dr. J. G. Cooper. On the Colo-
rado, Dr. Newberry. Camp Grant, &c., Arizona, Drs. Elliott Coues
and Edward Palmer. In Dr. Cooper's and Dr. Newberry's speci-
mens only are the palese of the pappus somewhat laciniate, making an
approach to R. arachnoidea, the Psilostrophe of De CandoUe's incertoe
sedis, — a name which, although a year or two earlier in publication,
we trust may remain disused, having been accompanied by an insuffi-
cient, and, in some important respects, erroneous character.

Helenium Bolanderi : tomentuloso-pubens, mox glabrescens ;
caule vaUdo (pedali ad sesquipedalem) apice aphyllo monocephalo rari-
usve ramoso 2 - 3-cephalo ; foliis ovatis obovatis vel spathulato-lance-
olatis integerrimis ima basi 5 - 7-nervatis in caulem pi. m. decurrentibus,
imis in petiolum angustatis ; capitulo pro genere maximo ; ligulis pluri-
mis aureis disco subgloboso tequilongis involucro multo longioribus ;

OF ART3 AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 359

receptaculo hemisphferico ; pappi paleis 6 - 8 e lanceolata vel subulata
sensim aristatis inferne rai'iter spinuloso-dentatis laciniatisve corollam
subiBquantibus achenio immaturo villoso subduplo longioribus. —
Plains of Mendocino, Sept. 1865, and (1866) from Shelter Cove on
the borders of Humboldt Co. down to the Albion River. Very com-
mon in moist open meadows and sphagnous swamps. The head with
the copious rays expanded is full three inches in diameter in the more
luxuriant specimens. — This, much the most showy species of the
genus, may well bear the name of the indefatigable discoverer.*

AcTiNELLA CooPERt : bipedalis, laxe ramosa, puberula ; foliis
(superioribus) tripartitis segmentis anguste linearibus ; capitulis sub-
paniculatis breviter pedunculatis lis A. Richardsonii similibus etsi duplo
triplove majoribus ; pappi paleis 5 late ovatis muticis corolla viscoso-
pubente plus dimidio achenio paullo brevioribus. — On Providence
Mountain in the Mohave district, alt. 5,000 feet, May, June, Dr. J. G.
Cooper. Lower part of the plant not collected. Rays half an inch
long, 3-lobed at the apex.

HuLSEA BREViFOLiA : viscoso-pubcsccns ; caulibus e radice gracili
adscendentibus sjepius ramosis (1 - 1^-pedalibus) ad apicem usque
ffiqualiter foliosis ; foliis oblongis lingulatisve ultra medium repando-
dentatis sessilibus, infimis basi attenuata spathulatis ; capitulis ramos
terminantibus minoribus ; involucri squamis linearibus obtusiusculis
biseriatis ; ligulis 10 - 12 luteis ; pappi paleis 2 dimidium tubi nudi-
usculi corollas adfequantibus, 2 alternis paullo brevioribus. — Mariposa
Big-tree Gi'ove, Bolander. Root perhaps only annual or biennial. Stem
and branches slender. Leaves thin, 1 - 1^, or some of the lower ones
2 inches long. Heads short-peduncled. Involucre half an inch long,
nearly equalling the disk, of about 20 scales. Rays small. Branches
of the style in the perfect flowers tipped with a very short blunt cone.
Achenia 3^ lines long, the villous hairs one half shorter than the con-
spicuous pappus. Mr. Bolander also collected, on Mount Dana, speci-
mens of the striking H. algida a foot in height, and in the Yosemite
Valley a single specimen of the following.

HuLSEA HETEROCHROMA : viscoso-pubescens ; caule e radice gra-
cili erecto bipedali ad apicem usque a^quahter foliosis oligocephalis ;

* Helenidm (HECUBiEA DC.) SCORZONER.EFOLIA, var. Ghiesbrechtii :
acheniis pappo minimo multipaleolato coronatis, paleolis latis truncato-obtusissimis
insiso-denticulatis. — Chiapas Ghiesbrecht. Except as to the pappus this seems to
be exactly De Candolle's Hecubcea.

360 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

foliis argute dentatis oblongis vel summis ovatis imis basi breviter at-
tenuata subspathulatis ; involucri squamis 2-3-seriatis lanceolatis ;
ligulis circiter 30 parvis rubellis ; pappi paleis oblongis, 2 tubi vil-
losissirai corollte dimidium ada^quantibus, 2 alternis brevioribus. —
Yosemite Valley ; only one specimen seen, Bolander. — Related to
the preceding ; but the heads (four or five and racemose at the sum-
mit of the stem) large ; rays much more numerous and smaller, the
slender ligule only 3 lines long and reddish purple, tube of the corolla
conspicuously villous, and leaves with sharp salient teeth, the larger
almost 3 inches long.

Layia PENTACHiETA, Gray in Bot. Whipp. p. 108, t. 16. Speci-
mens collected by Mr. Bolander in 1865, at Forest Hill, mixed with
L. yaillardioides (distinguishable only by the pappus), have in some
cases the pappus reduced to two or three set* or no pappus at all. It
is then still readily distinguishable from the following by the copious
stipitate glands, uniformly and deeper colored rays, naked receptacle,
and scales of the involucre loosely hirsute, without the short strigose
bristles of

Layia (Oxyura) chrysanthemoides. Oxynra chrysanthemoides
and Hartmannia ciliata, DC. This is seldom collected ; but it occurs
in Mr. Bolander's and Dr. Kellogg's recent collections.

Calycadenia mollis ; virgata, pube brevi molli (nusquam his-
pida vix villosa) cinerea ; glomerulis axillaribus dissitis breviter pe-
dunculatis ; ligulis 2-3 tubo brevi, lobis rotundatis jequalibus ; floribus
disci 4-6; paleis receptaculi truncato-obtusis subapiculatis eglandu-
losis ; pappi paleis circiter 5 subulato-aristiformibus scabris corolla
paullo brevioribus nunc 1-2 additis brevibus oblongis muticis. — At
Clark's, Mariposa Co., Bolander. — About a foot and a half high.
Principal cauline leaves 1 or 2 inches long, those of the axillary
fascicles and the floral ones or bracts more or less glanduliferous.
Fertile achenia rugose ; sterile ones a little hairy on the angles.

Anisocarpus Bolanderi : caule elato (3 - 4-pedali) ; foliis ple-
rumque integerrimis, inferioribus linearibus elongatis (6-10-pollicaribus
lin. 4 - 6-latis), superioribus brevibus (1 - 3-pollicaribus) e basi lata
lanceolatis; capitulis majoribus ; ligulis 15-20; fl. disci paleis jxippi
5-6 angustissime subulato-linearibus plumoso-fimbriatis corollam sub-
asquantibus. — Mariposa Big-tree Grove, Bolander. Heads twice
the size of those of A. madioides, and with about twice as many flow-
ers, the plant similarly hirsute and viscous. Ovaries of the disk-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 361

flowers linear, ovuliferous, but manifestly sterile. Mature fruit not
seen. Palete of the receptacle between the ray and disk-flowers linear,
unconnected. An interesting congener of the original Anisocai-pus of
Nuttall, ■ — ■ a genus which, thus supplemented, may fairly be kept disfmct
from Madaria.

Madaria elegans, DC, var. depauperata : spitham^ea, gracil-
lima ; foliis ut in var. coryinbosa eglandulosis ; ligulis 2 - 4 ; fl. disci
circ. 12. — Open woods on Mono Trail, 9,000 feet, Bolander. AH the
known forms of Madaria are manifestly of one species ; the present
is remarkable for its diminutive size and a corresponding reduction in
the number as well as the size of the flowers.

Artemisia Parryi : Abrotanum, glaberrima ; caule simplici (spi-
thamaio ad subpedalem) e radice perenni folioso ; foliis 2 - 3-pinnati-
partitis, pinnis 5-9 confertis, segmentis linearibus acutis ; panicula
racemosa polycephalo ; capitulis nutantibus ; involucri squamis ovatis
obtusisimis margine scarioso atro-fusco ; floribus marginalibus foemineis
paucis, coeteris fertilibus; corollis glaberrimis. — Huefano Mountains,
New Mexico, Dr. C. C. Parry, Sept. 1867. Heads nearly 3 lines
in diameter : segments of the leaves crowded, 3 to 5 lines long.

Cacalta Nardosmia : laxe floccoso-lanata ; caule pedali 1-2-
foliato apice subracemoso-5 - 7-eephalo ; foliis plerisque radicalibus
renifoi'mi-rotundatis 5 - 9-fidis, lobis grosse inciso- vel sinuato-dentatis
nunc sublobatis ; capitulis circa 50-floris ; involucri ecalyculati squamis
16- 20 lanceolatis acuniinatis disco parum brevioribus; floribus cerinis ;
styli ramis obiusiusculis nudis ; pappo albo rigidiusculd. — In open
pine woods, near the Geysers in Sonoma Co., on high ridges along Eel
River, Mendocino Co., and in similar situations in Humboldt Co.,
April and May, Bolander. The foliage of this interesting plant strik-
ingly resembles that of Nardosmia palmata. Heads almost an inch in
diameter, short-peduncled, showy : the " flowers of the color of yellow
beeswax, rather vivid, and with the odor of honey or beeswax." Not-
withstanding the yellow hue, I refer the plant to Cacalia. The flowers
are all alike and perfect : the style is of the Senecionoid sort ; its
branches narrowly linear, flat on the inner, slightly convex on the
outer face, which is minutely and uniformly upwardly scabrous
throughout ; the inner face bearing strong stigmatic lines which
vanish gradually as they run together nearly at the apex, where,
however, there is no short cone, nor ring of minute hairs, nor indeed
any vestige of appendage. A few plants with a somewhat similar style
VOL. VII. 46

362 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

have been referred to Senecio, to which I am unwilling this should be
added, notwithstanding the yellow hue of the flowers.

Senecio Clarkiands : elatus, glaber ; radice perenni ; caule
stri(7to (3 - 4-pedali) simplici folioso apice corymboso-5 - 20-eephalo ;
foliis lanceolatis utrinque attenuatis laciniato-pinnatifidis dentatisve,
dentibus patentissimis argutis ; involucro bracteolis plurirais filiformi-
subulatis laxe calyculato, squamis linearibus acuminatis ; lisulis 10 - 15 ;
acheniis glabris. — In Clark's, meadow, below the Mariposa Big-tree
Grove, Bolander. This striking tall species may well bear the name
of the valued guide and mountaineer, Galen Clark, in whose meadow
it grows, and who has done so much to make the Mariposa Grove of
Sequoia gignntea accessible. Lower leaves tapering into a slender
petiole, with the blade 6-12 inches long. Heads rather large, 6 to 8
lines long ; the yellow ligules about half an inch in length.

Senecio Mendocinensis : lana floeculosa decidiia glabrescens ;
radice perenni ; caule valido sesquipedali apice nudiuseulo coiymbuum
5 -S-cepIialura compactum gerente ; foliis succulentis denticulatis, radi-
calibus et inferioribus ovalibus oblongisve obtusis in petiolum angusta-
tis, sequentibus lanceolatis sessilibus, supremis in bracteas subulatas
diminutis ; involucro pluribracteolato, bracteolis setaceo-subulatis laxis
squamas proprias lanceolatas scarioso-marginatas acuminatas subae-
quantibus ; ligulis 12 - 15 oblongis brevibus ; ovariis glabris. — Open
plains at Noyo, Mendocino Co., May, Bolander. " Leaves thick and
succulent," according to Mi\ Bolander ; the lower 3 or 4 inches long
besides the petiole. The specimens resemble some forms of S. lugens
(including S. exaltatus, Nutt.) ; but the heads are considerably larger,
with more pointed scales of the involucre, and calyculate with numer-
ous very slender and conspicuous bractlets.

Senecio Bolanderi : tomento tenui deciduo glabratus ; caule e
radice perenni assurgente subpedali folioso ; foliis omnibus pinnatisectis
petiolatis, foliolis 5-7 rotundatis vel subcuneatis inciso-3 - 5-lobatis
(lin. 4-8 longis) cum 2-6 inferioribus parvis sparsis sjepius integer-
rirais, imis quandoque stipuliformibus ; capitulis paucis subcorymbosis ;
involucro e calyculato, squamis 12 - 15 linearibus ; ligulis 4- 6 ; ovariis
glabris. — Sandstone Bluffs at the mouth of the river below Mendo-
cino City, May, Bolander. The foliage of this well-marked species
may be likened to that of a Poterium or of some Potentilla : the leaf-
lets are seldom at all confluent. Involucre about 4 lines long; the
yellow ligules 4 or 5 lines long.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 363

Arnica parviflora : breviter pubescens, multicaulis ; foliis inae-
qualiter dentatis, inferioribus subcordatis longe petiolatis, superioribus
parvis saspe alternis stiblanceolatis spathulatisve in pe.tioluin margina-
tum angustatis, sensim in bracteis transeuntibus ; capitulis plurimis
paniculatis pro genere parvis ; ligulis nuUis ; aclieniis minutim glandu-
losis glabris. — Humboldt Co., in the northern part of California, in
thickets, Bolander. Rootstocks slender and branching. Stems a foot
high, slender. Radical and lower leaves 1 to 2 inches long, on petioles
of U to 3 inches in length. Heads 6 or 7 lines long, on rather slender
peduncles. Involucre slightly pubescent, of about 12 scales; the
flowers 20 to 30. Rays wanting in all the specimens. Achenia only
2 lines long.

PsATHYROTKS ANNUA: Gray, PI. Wright. 2, p. 100, non PI. Thurb.
p. 323, &c. Mono Lake, Bolander. [Also on sterile saline plains,
Humboldt, Humboldt Co., Nevada, Dr. Torrey.] — Here, at length, we
have good and abundant specimens of Nuttall's plant, the Bulbostylis
{Psathyrotm) annua of PI. Gambel. ; with which, in the lack of suffi-
cient materials, I had confounded a related but distinct species. The
character of the genus moreover needing some correction, a revision is
offered in the appended note.*

* PSATHYROTES, Gray, PI. Wright. 2, p. 100.

Capjtulum homogamum, multiflorum. Involucrum circ. biseiiale ; squamis
disco subffiqualilius. Roceptaculum convexum vel planum, luidum. Corollae e
tuho proprio brcvissimo cylindricie, apico 5-dentatiB, deiitibus brevibus latis extus
villosis. Stamina prope basim corollas inserta : amherte elongatae, e caudatse, ia-
clusEe, demum semi-exsertse. Scyli rami compressi, capitellato-triincati vel obtusi.
Achenia turbinata vel oblonga, villosa. Pappus pilosiis, corolla brevior, setis
rigidulis infequalibus (vix sea levissime serrelalis). Herbte parvulte, depressas,
monocarpicje, subviscosae, odore balsamico graveoleutes ; foliis alternis dilatatis
petiolatis ; floribus luteis.

§ 1. Ramosissimae, foliosse ; foliis Afriplicis facie longe petiolatis; capitulis alari-
bus et subcorymbosis breviter peduncutatis post anthesin nutantibus. Involucri
squamse 5 exteriores persistentes ; caeterse tenuiores, subscariosje, trinerves, cum
floribus 16-20 deciduae. Corollae angustas, apice lana longa implexa arachnoideae.
Styli rami breviusculi, apice subcapiteliato-truncati. Achenia villosissima, pilis
rigidiusculis summo apice plerisque (ut a Torreyo dicitur) bifidis.

P. KAMOSissiM.\ : albo-tomentosa; foliis rotundatis parce crenatis ; involucri
squarais oblongis obtusis, 5 exterioribus latioribus obtusissimis ; floribus saturate
flavis ; acheniis breviter turbinatis ; pappi setis pluriserialibus valde intequalibus.
Tetradymia { Pulycli/mia) ramosissima, Torr. in Emory, Rep. (1848) p. 145. Psathy-
rofes annuu, Gray, in PI. Thurb. p. 323, & Mex. Bound. Surv. p. 102, quoad PI.
Thurb., Emoi'y, etc.

3G4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

PHALACROSERIS, Nov. Gen. Cichoracearum.

Capitulum pluriflorum. Involucrum campanuUitum ecalyculatura,
e squamis 12 — 16 lato-lanceolatis aequalibus biserialibus ima basi con-
natis. Receptaculura convexuin nudum. Achenia conformia, breviter
oblonga, subquadrata vel 4 - 5-costata, Iseria, disco epigyno magno :
pappus nullus. — Herba Californica, glaberrima, Troximi facie ; fbliis
lineari-lanceolatis seu oblanceolatis integerrimis cum scapis prossus
nudis monocephalis e caudice perenni ; capitulo ante anthesin erecto ;
flofibus flavis.

Phalacrosekis Bolanderi. Wesffall's Meadows, above Yo-
semite Valley, alt. 8,000 feet, [also collected by Dr. Torrey in 1865,
specimens just received,] Bolander. Leaves tufted on the summit of
the thickish caudex, 3 to 9 inches long, about 3 lines wide, rather soft,
mostly obtuse. Scapes wholly leafless and naked, 6 to 14 inches high ;
the solitary head about the size of that of Leontodon autumnale. Scales
of the involucre about half an inch long, rather herbaceous, lanceolati,
acutish. Corolla with a short glabrous tube and an oblong-linear ex-
serted ligule. Achenia a line and a half long, thickish, somewhat
unequally 4 - 5-angled, very smooth, the bi-oad naked apex truncate. —
I know of no genus having a pappus with which this plant would readily
associate.

Calais (Scorzonella) glauca: 1 - 3-pedalis ; ramis peduncu-
lisve strictis saspe validis fistulosis ; foliis lanceolatis oblongisve acumi-
natis nunc integerrimis vel denticulatis nunc laciniatis ; pappi paleis
lanceolato- seu ovato-subulatis in aristam attenuatis. Hymenonema ?

P. ANNUA (Gray, PI. Wrij^ht. 1. c.) : fiirfuracea, cinerea ; foliis deltoideo-dilatatis
subreniformibus vel suprcmis cuneatis angulato-dentalis ; involucri squamis lanceo-
latis ; floribus luteis ; acheniis oblongo-turbinatis ; pappi setis paucioribus minus
insequalibus. Bulbostylis (Psathi/rotus) annua, Nutt. PL Gamb. p. 179. — !' Rocky
Mountains near Santa Fc," Dr. Gambel, according to Nuttall ; perhaps from fur-
ther West, having now been rediscovered in the Sierra Nevada of California.
Bolander's specimens accord with Nuttall's plant, which, however, wants the lower
leaves ; and the bristles of the pappus are less unequal, almost uniserial.

§ 2. Scaposae, capitulis subcorymbosis nudis erectis. Involucri squama; sub-
conformes, interiores vix nervat;e baud decidute. Corollae sursuin subampliattc,
dentibus extus pilis panels brevioribus viscosis prseditse. Styli rami longiores, ex-
tus hirtelli, apice obtuso. Achenia oblongo-turbinata, minus villosa. Pappi setae
valde inaequales.

P. SCAPOSA, Gray, PI. Wright. 1. c. t. 13.

P. incisa, Gray, PI. Thurb. 1. c. := TrichoptUium incisum, Gray in Bot. Mex.
Bound, p. 97.

i

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE H, 1867. 365

glaucum, Hook. Fl. Bor. Am. Scorzonella glauca, Nutt. — At Mark
West's Creek, 1864 ; also Cloverdale, Sonoma Co., and Eel River, &c.
Mendocino Co., in moist meadows, 1866-7, Bolander. The size of
most of these specimens and the breadth of the leaves made it doubtful
if they belong to tiie species indicated by Sir Wm. Hooker; but a
comparison made by Prof. Oliver with the solitary specimen preserved
in the Hookerian herbarium (the leaves of which are not "canaliculate "
but only longitudinally folded) assures me that they do. The leaves in
the California plant are from 4 to 12 inches long, and from 1 to 2^
wide, the midrib strong and broad. In specimens from Klamatli Co.,
Oregon, Dr. Kronkrite, they are narrower, approaching to " linear-
acuminate," and the head scarcely larger than in S. laciniata. In
Bolander's, the larger heads are an inch in diameter ; the achenia fully
2 lines, and the pappus nearly half an inch in length. The Californian
forms in general, being remarkably stout and tall, and so broadly-
leaved, may be distinguished as var. procera.

Calais Bolanderi: subscaposa e radice tuberoso-fusiformi ; cauli-
bus basi parce ramosis scapisve gracilibus 1 - 2-pedaiibus ; foliis linearl-
lanceolatis elongatis integerrimis imisve subdentatis nunc laciniatis ;
capitulis parvulis ante anthesin nutantibus ; involucri squamis gradatim
imbricatis e lanceolata vel ovato-lanceolata attenuato-acuminatis ; ache-
niis breviter linearibus (vix basi hand apice angustatis) glabris vel
exterioribus puberulis ; pappi sordescentis paleis 8-9 brevibus ovato-
oblongis ex apice obtuso vel eroso-bidentato in aristam scabram
achenio duplo longiorem productis. — Swamps at Fort Bragg, Mendo-
cino Co., Bolander. — Leaves 8-14 inches long (including the taper-
ing base or petiole), or those on the lower part of the stem 3-6 inciies
lonj^, 3 to 6 lines broad, more commonly entire; some denticulate or
coarsely toothed, or, in one specimen, laciniate-pinnatifid. Involucre
scarcely over half an inch in length. Achenia rather slender, barely
2 lilies long, about thrice the length of the somewhat rigid paleaj of the
pappus. The species is interesting from being, as it were, intermediate
between Eucalais and Scorzonella*

HiERACiUM Bolanderi: H. venoso q,^x\q ; foliis omnibus radicali-
bus sessilibus spathulato-oblongis vel oblanceolatis vix denticulatis infra
glaberrimis glaucescentibus (nunc purpureis) supra marginibusque pilis

* Htpocii^ris glabra, Linn., occurs in collections made by Dr. Kellogg and
Dr. Gibbons in the vicinity of San Francisco, perhaps recently introduced from
Europe.

366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

longissimis laxis barbatis ; scapo filiformi (3 - 9-pollicari) cum capi-
tulis 2-4 laxe coryrabosis glaberrimis ; involucre cylindraceo 10-15-
floro eglanduloso biseriali, squamis exteriorlbus brevibus ; ligulis flavis ;
acheniis fusifoi'raibus apice leviter attenuate ; pappo copioso sordido. —
On Red Mountain, Humboldt Co., Bolander. Achenia 2 lines long,
much longer than those of H. Scouleri, and fusiform, but less tapering
upwards than those of H. Gronovii.

Campanula linn^ifolia: fere glaberrima; caulibus teneribus a
basi ad apicera usque a^qualiter foliosis subunifloris ; foliis ovalibus
sessilibus (semipollicaribus) ci-enatis marginibus angulisque caulis se-
tulis minimis retrorsis ciliolatis ; pedunculo erecto flore ssepius longiore ;
calycis lobis lato-lanceolatis acutis tubo subhemisphasrico duplo longi-
oribus corolla campanulata vix ad medium 5-loba dimidio brevioribus ;
sinubus nudis ; stylo incluso. — In swamps at Noyo, Mendocino Co.,
Bolander. A delicate little species. Corolla blue, half an inch long ;
the lobes ovate, about 2 lines long.

Campanula prenanthoides, Durand, PI. Pratt. 1855 (evidently
C. jili flora, Kellogg in Proceed. Acad. Calif., 1858, a far from appro-
priate name, and with a description which implies that the narrow
corolla is barely 5-toothed, whereas it is really 5-parted in our speci-
mens, the segments linear) : to this probably belong specimens gathered
by Mr. Bolander in the Red Woods at Searsville, and by Prof. Brewer
on the Upper Sacramento, &c.

Arctostaphylos bicolor {Xylococcus bicolor, Nutt., Comarosta-
phylis bicolor, Klotsch) : erecta ; foliis coriaceis oblongis acutis breviter
petiolatis integerrirais raargine revolutis supra nitidis subtus cum race-
mis brevibus compactis ramisque junioribus incanis ; bracteis sepalisque
ovato-rotundis squamaceis ; corolla obovato-urceolata ; filamentis villo-
sis inferne vix dilatatis ; stigmate capitato crasso ; putamine 5-loculari
nunc abortu uniloculari. — Near San Diego, March, 1862, Dr. J. G.
Cooper, from whose specimens this character is taken. Nuttall found
it near Monterey, and describes the bony putamen as one-celled ; but I
find five one-seeded cells.

Arctostaphylos nummularia : erecta (1 -2-pedalis), ramosis-
sima ; ramis cum petiolis brevissimis setoso-hirsutis ; foliis crebris coria-
ceis (semipollicaribus) ovali-rotundatis nunc subcordatis nitidis venulosis
muticis integerrimis raro mucronato-serrulatis ; racemis parvis fascicu-
latis gUibris ; bracteis coriaceo-squaraaceis pedicello dimidio brevioribus ;
sepalis ovato-rotundis ; corolla ovato-globosa intus filamentisque glaber-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 367

rimis ; aristis antherae prgelongis genuflexis ; ovario tomentuloso. —
On the plains near Mendocino City. Leaves rounded at the apex and
seldom with any sign of a mucro. Flowers much smaller than those
of A. tomentosa, white. Fruit unknown.

BRYANTIIUS, Gmelin. Bryanthus & Phyllodoce (Salisb.), Don.
The beautiful Californian species described below makes it necessary
to combine Phyllodoce with the far earlier Bryanthus. Among the
characters to distinguish the genus from Menziesia are the fbliaceous
persistent bracts or leaves subtending the pedicels, as in Kalmia, &c.,
while Menziesia has strobilaceous flower-buds of scarious caducous
scales, as in Azalea, &c.

§ 1. Corolla patenti-campanulata usque ad medium o-fida ; stamina
exserta.

Bryanthus Brewert : glaber ; caulibus adscendentibus rigidis ;
foliis crebris linearibus la^vibus margine arete revolutis ; pedicellis plu-
rimis minute glandulosis flore vix longioribus ; sepalis oblongo-ovatis
glaberrimis; corolla rubro-purpurea; staminibus 10 (raro 7-8) styloque
longius exsertis ; antheris violaceis ; stigmate capitato. — High sierras
of California, alt. 10,000 feet ; on Wood's Peak, Eldorado Co., Prof.
Brewer; near Donner's Pass, Prof. Torrey ; and Mariposa Co., Bo-
lander : also Mt. Hoffmann, Brewer (forma compacta, floribus primum
capitato-congestis). In habit and foliage this resembles the following
species, but is larger, the leaves sometimes half an inch in length,
stems nearly a foot high; the bright "rose-violet" or "red-purple " co-
rolla half an inch in diameter when expanded, cleft to or rather beyond
the middle. Anthers, as in the other species, opening by terminal
chinks, but inclined to dehisce longitudinally.

§ 2. Phyllodoce. Corolla ore 5-dentata vel brevissime 5-loba,
stamina includens,

* Campanulata, glabra, rosea, lobis reflexis : folia lajvia margine
revoluta.

Bryanthus empetkiformis. Menziesia empetriformis (Smith)
& M. Grahamii, Hook. This {M. Grahamii, Hook., which appears
really to be the 3L empetriformis also) was collected on Mount Shasta
by Prof. Brewer. The style is either short-exserted or included on
the same plant.

Bryanthus intermedius, Menziesia intermedia, Hook., needs fur-
ther elucidation. One specimen from Dr. Lyall's collection in the
Rocky Mountains, with cylindraceous corolla, and narrower (but not

368 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

acuminate) .>;epals, leads to the conjecture that the species is not wholly
distinct from the foregoing.

* * Corolla ore contracta: folia marginibus hand revoliitis \)\. m.
serrulato- seu glanduloso^-scabiis : sepala lanceolata.

Bryanthus TAXiFOLius, having rose-colored or purple, rarely if
ever blue flowers, had better have the Pallassian than the Linnajan
name continued, that having been generally adopted under Phyllodoce.

Bryanthus Aleuticus (Menziesia Aleutica, Spreng., Bongard,
pro parte, Phyllodoce Pallassiana, Don) is known by the glabrous fila-
ments and (shorter, ochroleucous) corolla from

Bryanthus gland uliflorus (Menziesia glanduUflora, Hook.),
which occurs in Sitcha. The former I have seen only from Unalaschka
and Alaska.

ALLOTROPA, Torr. & Gray. '

Perigonium simplex, quam genitalia brevius, e phyllis (ut videtur
sepalis) 5 rotundatis jestivatione imbricatis. Stamina 10, glabra: anther*
didymae, fequales, extrorsum fere basifixjB, loculis I'ima brevi a basi
versus medium extensa dehiscentibus, sub anthesi arete inversai in-
trorsum pendulse, modo Pyrolce. Discus nullus. Ovarium globosum,
5-loculare : ovula in placentis axilibus innumera. Semina immatura
scobiformia, e nucleo undique longe producta linearia. Stylus primura
brevissimus, demum ovario plus dimidio brevior : stigma majusculum,
depresso-capitatum. llerba spithamtea, brunnea, glabra, caule squamis
inferioribus ovatis imbricatis superioribus lanceolatis obtusis patentibus
tecto, spica virgata multiflora, floribus brevissime pedicellatis patentibus
parvulis, superioribus bracteas lanceolato-lineares adaequantibus.

Allotropa virgata, Torr. & Gray, in Bot. Wilkes Exped. ined.
A single and imperfect specimen was collected by Dr. Charles Pick-
ering on the Cascade Mountains in Oregon. We now have it from
Mr. Bolander (in the usual excellent specimens which he is accustomed
to prepare), collected in Mendocino County, between Little Bear Har-
bor and Noyo, " generally near Quercus deiisijiora." The characters
of the proposed genus are briefly sketched in a synopsis of the known
genera of MonotrofexB which I contributed to Prof. Newberry's Report,
in Pacif. R. R. Survey, 6, Bot. p. 81. It was then su})posed (from
the examination of a single flower-bud) to be nearly related to
Monotro'pa, section Hypopltys ; but the character, it will be noticed,
lias now to be entirely recast, and the genus claims its relationship to

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 3G9

Schweinitzia and to Pyrola. The anthers of AJlolropa in the expanded
flower much resemble those of Schweinitzia, except that, in place of
the large orifice occupying the whole broad end of each cell, a slit
which opens broadly extends from the extremity to near the middle-
In view of this resemblance, and of Dr. Torrey's observation (which
I have confirmed) that the anthers of Schweinitzia in the flower-bud
are horizontal, so that one cell stands directly over the other, one may
suspect that here also they are extrorse and basifixed in the early bud ;
but I have no evidence that it is so. And the earliest flower-buds
which I have examined of Pterospora and Sarcodes show no indication
of resupination. Two subulate bractlets which were thought to have
been detected upon the original specimen of Allotropa are not seen in
the good specimens now in hand. I presume that its simple perianth
answers to the calyx of Schweinitzia, and that the corolla is wanting.

PLEURICOSPORA, Nov. Gen. Monotropearum.

Perigoniura duplex completum. Sepala 4-5, oblongo-lanceolata,
petalis totidem discretis oblongis subconformibus alterna et dimidio
breviora, utraque (supra medium prajsertim) margine laciniato-
fimbriolata. Genitalia petalis breviora, glabra. Stamina 8 vel 10 :
anthera? lineares, inuatee, filamento filiforrai complanato vix latiores,
callo brevi retuso apiculatns, loculis rima laterali leviter introrsa a basi
ad apicem dehiscentibus, valvis fere sequalibus. Discus nuUus. Ova-
rium ovatum in stylo crasso fequilongo attenuatum, uniloculare, pla-
centis 4-5 parietalibus bilamellatis undique ovuliferis. Stigma
depresso-capitatum. Ovula obovata. Capsula .... Semina ovalia,
nitidula, testa nucleo conformi. — Herba glabra, 3 - 5-pollicai'is, saepius
crassa ; squamis confertis imbricantibus, infimis ovatis margine erosulis,
superioribus floralibusque ovato-lanceolatis margine scariosis eroso-
fimbriolatis ; spica saspius cylindrica dense raultiflora ; floribus ut videtur
albidis semipoUicaribus bracteam adajquantibus.

Pleuricospora * FiMBRiOLATA. — In or near the Mariposa Sequoia
gigantea Grove, Bolander, sparingly collected. This interesting plant
is most allied to the one which, in Newberry's Report, above cited, I
described and had figured under the name of Hemitomes congestumi
and which, as this generic name, given upon a wrong idea of mine
as to the structure of the anther, is contradicted by the true character,

* The generic name alludes to the parietal placentation.
VOL. VII. 47

370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Dr. Torrey, in making the rectification, proposes to call Newherrya,
in honor of the distinguished vegetable pah^ontologist and geologist
who discovei-ed it. The principal differences between these two genera
appear in the subjoined synopsis. That of the seven genera of the
group, all but the Linntean one should rest upon single species, is not
altogether satisfactory to contemplate ; but their characters are • so
marked that it does not seem possible to combine any two of them.*

* Conspectus Generum Monotropearum.

Tribus I. EUMONOTROPE^. Ovarium 4 - 5-loculare, placentis axilibus in
columnam crassara concretis. Testa seminum laxa reticulata.

§1. Corolla nulla. Calyx 4 - 5-sepalus. Antherae in alabastro extrorsse basim
versus rimis brevibus dehiscentes, sub anthesi inversae introrsum pendulce. Semina
scobiformia. Nexus cum Pyroleis mediante Pyrola aphylla.

1. Allotropa, Torr. & Gray, supra.

§2. Corolla gamopetala. Calyx 4 - 5-sepalus. Antheras introrsae,
* MuticEe, apice foraminibus hiantes. CoroUse campanulata, 5-loba. Testa
seminum nueleo subconformis.

2. ScHWEiNiTZiA, Ell. Antherae breves, didymse, in alabastro transversae, sub
anthesi introrsum pendulfe. Discus 10-crenatus. Stylus brevis crassus.

3. Sarcodes, Torr. Antherte lineari-oblongae, erectse, supra basim affixae.
Discus nuUus. Stylus elongatus.

** Antherae introrsum pendulte, dorso biaristatae, longitrorsum dehiscentes.
Corolla ovata, 5-dentata. Semina scobiformia apice insigniter alata.

4. Pterospora, Nutt.

§ 3. Corolla 4 - .5-petala, petalis basi gibbosis vel saccatis. Calyx imperfectus,
e bracteolis sepalisve 2-5. Antherae innatte, didymae vel reniformes, confluentira
uniloculares, ab apice transversim bivalves. Discus e dentibus 8 vel 10 deflexis.
Semina scobiformia.

5. MoNOTROPA, Linn. {Hypopitys, Dill.)

Tribus II. PLEURICOSPORE^. Ovarium uniloeulare : placentse 4-5
parietales, bicrures vel bipartit£e. Testa seminum tenuis nueleo arete conformis.
Discus nullus. Antherae innate, oblongo-lineares, biloculares, loculis parallelis
longitudinaliter bivalves. Stylus elongatus.

6. Pleuricospora. Calyx completus, e sepalis 4-5 petalis discretis subcon-
formibus, utrisque fimbriolatis. Genitalia glabra. Antherae lateraliter dehiscentes
in valvibus fere aequalibus. Flores spicati.

7. Newberrta, Torr. in Ann. Lye. N. Y. 8, p. 7, 1864. (Hemilomes, Gray,
nomen falsum.) Calyx incompletus, disepalus, bracteoliformis. Corolla gamo-
petala, urceolato-tubulosa, 4-5-ioba, lobis intus villosulis. Filnmenta filiformia
stylusque superne villoso-crinita. Antherae introrsum dehiscentes, loculis inae-
qualiter bivalvibus. Flores capitati. — Newbekrya oongesta, Torr. = Ilemito-
mes congestum, Gray.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 371

Dou«LASiA MONTANA: subglabra ; foliis seeus ramos imbricatis
subulato-linearibus acutiusculis giabris ciliolatis; floribus plerisque soli-
tariis ; calyce basi vix truncate unibracteato, segmentis acutissimis tubo
paullo longioribus corollas tubum adgequantibus. — Rocky Mountains,
Montana Terr., Winslow J. Howard, M, A. Brown. Nearer to D. arctica
than to D. nivalis. To Douglasia belongs Gregoria^ Duby, apparently
founded in the same year, Lindley referring to Brande's Journal of
January, 1828, for his original character of Douglasia. But it is really
in the volume for 1827, which gives this name a clear priority.

Primula suffrutescens : casspitosa, glabra; caudicibus elongatis
humifusis incrassatis sublignosis ; foliis confertissimis spathulato-cune-
atis basi longe attenuatis apice 5 - 9-dentatis crassis fere aveniis ; seapo
foliis 2 - 3-plo longiore 3 - 7-floro ; involucri foliolis lineari-subulatis
pedicellis brevioribus ; calyce rainutim glanduloso (cum pedicellis),
segmentis lato- seu ovato-lanceolatis tubo brevissimo duplo longioribus
corollge rubro-purpureae tubo subdimidio brevioribus ; lobis corollas
leviter obcordatis. — California, Lobb, in herb. Hook. Sierra Ne-
vada, on Silver Mountain, alt. 10,500, near the snow. Brewer. Leaves
about an inch long, resembling those of Saxifraga cuneifolia,, but nar-
rower and thicker. Lobes of the calyx varying from lanceolate to
almost ovate. Corolla about half an inch long.

Plantago hirtella, HBK., var. Californica {P. Urvillei, var.
Californica, Fisch.), occurs along the coast at Monterey and San Fi-an-
cisco, and, more interior, at Los Angelos (Dr. Peckham). It accords
very well with Fendler's PI. Venez. No. 768, and perhaps was in-
ti'oduced into California.

Phelip^a tuberosa : nana, superne pruinoso-puberula ; caule
basi tuberoso-incrassato squamis strobilaceis imbricantibus tecto superne
breviter confertissime ramoso densifloro ; calyce bibracteolato profunde
inaequaliter 5-fido (sinubus 2 anticis fere ad basim usque, lateralibus et
posticis ultra medium extensis), segmentis aequilongis lanceolatis corolla
lutescente tubulosa paullo brevioribus ; antheris giabris vel ad suturas
parce lanigeris. — On a high and dry ridge of the Gavilan Mountains, in
sandy soil. Brewer. A span or less in height; the much-crowded flow-
ers barely half an inch in length. Nearly related to

Phelip^a pinetorum (^Orobanche pinetorum, Geyer in Hook.
Kew Jour. Bot. 3, p. 297) : caule ramisque pubescentibus ; squamis
inferioribus angustioribus ; calyce vix ad medium a;qualiter o-fido,
lobis subulatis. — Char, from fructiferous specimen collected in the val-
ley of the Columbia by Dr. Lyall, comm. Royal Gardens, Kew.

372 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Phelip^a erianthera, Engelm. MSS. (Orobanche multijlora
Nutt. PL Gamb. p. 179, ex char.): P. Ludoviciance peraffinis ; floribus
majoribus ; antheris crassioribus maxime lanigeris ; calycis segmentis
viilgo gracilioribus. — New Mexico, Fendler (585), Wright (1449,
anthers less woolly), J. M. Bigelow, Parry (147, coll. 1867) ; Pacliitiga,
Chihuahua, Thurber, cited in Bot. Mex. Bound. Survey as P. Ludo-
viciana. Apparently a quite distinct species, but the woolliness of the
anthers must not be too implicitly relied on.

* ANTIRRHINUM, Tourn.

On a survey of our North American species, which in California
are now rather numerous, it seems inevitable that Antirrhinum should
include the personate species of Maurandia, also Nuttall's Gambelia.
I propose the following arrangement : —

§ 1. Orontium, Benth. — I have seen no indigenous species.

A. CYATHiFERUM, Benth., by the description, and still more by the
figure, has a rather prominent palate to the ringent corolla.

A. CONFERTIFLORUJI, Benth., from Coultei-'s collection, I suspect to
be Mohavea viscida, which is No. 616, in fruit only, in Coulter's Cali-
fornian collection.

§ 2. S^RORHiNUM. Corolla palato prominente extruso faucem
baud vel vix claudente. Filamenta apice pi. m. dilatata. Capsula
infequalis. Seraina Antirrhinastri. — Herbae annuae, Californicae, ple-
rumque alternifoliae, nunc strictfe, nunc ditFusse et ramulos filifbrmes
saepe prehensiles proferentes. Pedicelli breves vel subnulli. Flores
ssepissime parvi.

A. glandulosum and A. Virga are the species in which the palate is
most appressed to the upper lip. In the diffuse species the corolla
more and more approaches that of the following section. Their slender
branchlets, mostly produced from the same axil with a flower, are
evidently sensitive to contact in the same manner as the petioles and
peduncles of Maurandia. In specimens of A. vagans and A. Breweri
they are not rarely found with one or two close turns around some
slender object, and the coil thickened and hardened in the manner of
most petiole-climbers. The similar twining branches of the erect and
spicate A. Cuulterianum have been noticed by Dr. Parry or Prof.
Thurber. A case of special interest, as a step in the transition from
leafy branch to tendril, occurring in a genus of which some species do
not climb at all, while others climb by tendril-like petioles and pedun-
cles.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 373

* Axillijiora ; axillis fere a basi ad apicem caulium simplicium vel
basi simpliciter ramosorum floriferis sine ramulo. Folia oblongo-line-
aria, obtusa, subpetiolata, conforraia, flores parvos brevissime pedieel-
latos plerumque superantia. Calyx subiequalis, segmentis linearibus.
Capsula stylo rigido subulato superata. Caulis erectus, strictus.

Antirrhinum cornutum, Benth. PL Hartw. : viscoso-villosum,
subglandulosum ; caiile subpedali basi ramoso ; corollae tubo calyce
labiisque suis longioribus, sacco prominente scroti f'ormi ; filamentis omni-
bus apice oblique obovato-dilatatis ; stylo capsula parum longiore ; semi-
nibus ecliinulato-favosis. — Known as yet only from Hartweg's No.
1888, from the valley of the Sacramento.

Antirrhinum leptaleum: viscoso-villosum, fere eglandulosum ;
caule sesquipedali simplicissimo vel basi parce ramoso ; corollas ut
videtur albas tubo calycem vix superante labiis (superiori alte bitido)
subtequilongo, lobis fere tequalibus obovatis leviter eroso-crenulatis,
sacco angusto scrotiformi ; filamentis longioribus apice oblique obovato-
dilatatis, brevioribus vix dilatatis ; stylo capsulae subasquilongo ; semin-
ibus rugoso-foveolatis. — Mariposa Co., at Clark's Ranch, Bolander,
Flowers shorter and more crowded than in A. cornutum ; the tube
only 2 or 2| lines long. Leaves at most an inch long.

* * Spicata ; floribus folia floraiia diminuta superantibus densius
spicatis. Folia angusta, pleraque sessilia. Caules erecti ramosi, in sp.
ultima ramulis prehensilibus instructi.

Antirrhinum Virga : glaberrimum ; caule simplicissimo stricto
(ultrabipedali) ; foliis caulinis angustissime linearibus suberectis (imis
ignotis), floralibus parvis subulato-setaceis calycem ad^quantibus ;
racerao spiciformi virgato densifloro (subpedali) ; floribus secundis mox
horizontalibus; corollae tubo labiis calycisque segmentis vix inasquali-
bus ex ovato-lanceolata subulatis duplo longioribus, sacco mammas-
formi, palato barbulato, lobis brevissimis ; filamentis viscoso-hirsutis,
longioribus prter^ertim apice dilatato anthera latioribus. — California,
No. 191, in collection of the late Thomas Bridges, distributed by the
Smithsonian Institution. Lowest leaves of the specimen about \^ inches
long, barely a line wide, tapering upwards. Corolla seemingly white
or whitish, half an inch long, the tube cylindrical. The fruit of this
very peculiar species not seen.

Antirrhinum glandulosum, Lindl. : elatum, undique pilis glan-
dulosis viscosissimum, late ramosum ; foliis lanceolatis, floralibus flore
pauUo brevioribus, racemo spiciformi itaque folioso ; coroUte rosete tubo

374 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

lato labiis ariuilongis oalyeisque segmentis intequalibus lato-lanceolatis
pauUo longioribus ; filameiitis conformibus sursuin leviter dilatatis ; stylo
longo; seminibus fimbrillato-favosis. — A])parently very common around
Santa Barbara, Santa Cruz, Santa Clara, &c. No filiform branches
accompanying the flowers; these over half an inch in length.

Antirrhinum Coulterianum, Benth. : caule gracili 2 - 4-pedali
glaberrimo erecto vel ope raraorum prehensiliura susterito; foliis glabris
linearibus vel inferioribus oblongis subpetiolatis, floralibus minutis ;
racemo spiciforrai conferto viscoso-piloso saepius glanduloso ; corollfe
tubo calycis segmentis paullo longiori, sacco mammaeforrai magno,
labio inferiori maximo tubo duplo longiori, superiori parvo patentissimo
bifido ; filaraentis sursum dilatatis ; stylo persistente capsula dimidio
breviore ; seminibus foveolatis. — Found only in the southern part of
California. " Stem supporting itself on other plants by its twining
slender branches." Some of these appear in the raceme, from the
same axils with the lower flowers, are tendril-like, flexuous or spirally
incurved ; the minute leaves at their apex also recurved, forming
hooks.

* * * Axilli-ramulosa ; floribus secus ramos diffusos sparsis, axillis
floriferis sub flore ssepius ramulo filiform! nunc tortili prehensili in-
structis. Folia petiolata, flore pleruraque longiora. Calyx ina^qualis,
sepalo postico majore.

-I— Pedunculi calyce longiores : filamenta sursum sensini dilatata.

Antirrhinum Nuttalliandm, Benth.: viscoso-pubescens ; foliis
ovatis imisve subcordatis, floralibus superioribus flore brevioribus ;
calycis segmentis subovatis, postico fere enervi caeteris modice majori-
bus tubo corollfe violaceae paullo brevioribus ; labiis tubo longioribus,
superiore suberecto emarginato-bilobo palatum adiequante ; seminibus
longitudinaliter undulato-costatis. {^Sairocarpus Culifornicus, Nutt.,
in herb.) — Collected apparently only near San Diego and Los An-
geles, by Coulter, Nuttall, Wallace, and Dr. Cooper. — Flower 4 or 5
lines long.

-1- -t— Pedunculi calyce breviores : filamenta apice oblique spathu-
lato-dilatato. Calyx pilis longis laxis hirsutus.

Antirrhinum Breweri : tenuiter viscoso-pubescens ; ramis gra-
cillitnis dissite floriferis ; foliis ovato- sen oblongo-lanceolatis obtusiuscu-
lis, superioribus retusis, suramis flore brevioribus ; calycis segmentis
linearibus seu lineari-lanceolatis, postico parum latiori tubo corollas
paullo breviori subuninervi ; corollae pallide violacea, labio superiori

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 375

parvo fere bipartite, lobis oblongis divergentibus ; seminibus inordinate
tuberculatis. — Upper Valley of the Sacramento, south of Mount
Shasta, Brewer. Lake County, Torrey. Mount Bullion, Mariposa
County, Bolander.

Var. ovalifolium: foliis ovalibus retusis, superioribus emarginatis,
ramealibus parvis orbiculatis ; calyce breviore, segmentis oblongis.
With Prof. Brewer's specimens from the Upper Sacramento. — Larger
leaves about an inch long, including the petiole. Flower 5 or nearly
6 lines long ; lower lip, with its very prominent palate and oval lobes,
very much larger than the upper.

Antirrhinum vagans : pilis patentissimis rigidulis interdum glan-
dulosis hirsutum, nunc glabratum ; foliis lanceolatis oblongisve, rame-
alibus nunc lineai'ibus nunc orbiculatis ; calycis segmentis valde inse-
qualibus, postico angusto- seu lato-oblongo obtusissimo 3 - 5-nervi
corollfe tubo fequilongo, caeteris linearibus ; corollae purpureas ? sacco
amplo, labio superiori bilobo palatum ada?quante ; seminibus inordinate
tuberculatis. — Near San Francisco, valley of the Upper Sacramento,
and other parts of California, collected by Fremont, Brewer, Bolander,
Torrey, Heermann, &c. Also a ver}^ glandular-hirsute form by the
late Mr. Bridges. Flowers from 6 to 8 lines long, sometimes much
scattered, often rather crowded and racemose or spicate at the upper
part of the branches.

Var. Bolanderi: floribus in axillis valde remotis; foliis superioribus
orbiculatis vel subcordatis ; calycis raaxime in^equalis segmento postico
late ovali. — In the Redwoods, jNIariii County, Bolander. This vari-
able species, and especially the variety here indicated, well shows the
cirrhose character of the slender branchlets, which frequently hook or
coil with one or two turns around some slender object, the coil thickening
and hardening as in analogous cases.

§ 2. Maurandella. {Maurandice sp. personatfe.) Corolla palato
prominente faucem vix ac ne vix claudente. Filamenta sursum vix
ampliata. Capsula fere sequalis. Semina fere Antirrhinastri. — Herbse
pedunculis petiolisve flexuosis vel cirrhiformibus sjepius scandentes,
foliis plerisque alternis.

* Herbge annuse, pedunculis elongatis tantura scandentes vel erectse,
basi pilosje, c^terum glabrae ; foliis integris, petiolis brevibus rectis vel
subnullis.

A. STRiCTUM {Maurandia stricta, Hook. & Arn., Benth.) : caule
erecto 1 - 2-pedali ; foliis lanceolatis, floralibus linearibus ; pedunculis

376 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

filiformibus flexuosis dissite racemosis ; corolla violacea semipollicari,
palato piloso ; capsula ovoideo-globosa Crustacea stylo longo rigido
superata calycis segmentis lato-lanceolatis paullo longiore ; seminibus
rugoso-muricatis. — Near Santa Barbara, Douglas ; a very slender and
strict, small-leaved form. Very dry hillside, Santa Inez Mountains,
Santa Barbara, March, 1861, Brewer; more robust and leafy : leaves
1^ to 2 2 inches long, many of the lower fully half an inch wide, con-
tracted at base into a distinct petiole of half an inch in length : branches
developing in many of the axils. The tortuous peduncles, about 2
inches long, evidently become prehensile upon occasion.

Antirrhinum filipes, Gray (in Ives Colorado Exped, Bot. p. 19):
teuellum, diffusum ; foliis lanceolatis imisve obovatis repandis in peti-
olum attenuatis ; pedunculis capillaribus pra^longis cirrhoso-tortilibus ;
floribus parvis " albis " ; capsula globosa. — Desert arroyos of the
Colorado, Dr. Newberry. Specimen imperfect. Allied to the next :
but the flowers seem to be very small, and are said to be white.

Antirrhinum Cooperi : gracile, ramosissimum, scandens ; foliis
linearibus seu lineari-lanceolatis in petiolum breve attenuatis ; pedim-
culis capillaribus cirrhosis, superioribus secus ramos filiformes nudos
racemosis ; corolla flava semipollicari, palato amplo piloso faucem sub-
claudente ; capsula globoso ; seminibus ventre ruguloso-muriculatis
dorso costis 3-4 crassis suberosis instructis. — Gravelly ravine near
Fort Mohave, Feb. 27, 1861, Dr. J. G. Cooper. "Twining 3-4 feet
high." Peduncles 2 or 3 inches long, coiling freely.

* Herbae petiolis pedunculisque prehensilibus scandentes ; foliis
cordato-hastatis angulatis ; radice perenni.

Antirrhinum maurandioides = Maurandia antirrhinijlora,
Willd. — Texas, Arizona, Mexico.

§ 3. Gambelia. {Gambelia, Nutt. PL Gamb., in Jour. Acad.
Philad. ser. 2. 1, p. 149.) Corolla tubulosa basi leviter gibbosa, palato
prominulo faucem non claudente, labiis brevibus, postico erecto bifido,
antico lobis 3 patentibus. Filamenta sursum vix ampliata. Capsula
aequalis. — Frutices vel suffrutices Austro-Californici, erecti, foliis op-
positis vel ternato-verticillatis passim subalternis integerrimis, summis
diminutis. Pedunculi axillares, longiusculi.

Antirrhinum speoiosum = Gambelia speciosn, Nutt. 1. c. Cata-
lina Island, Dr. Gambell. Leaves oval or oblong, an inch or less in
length, and with a short petiole, not unlike those of A. lutifoUiim.
Corolla almost an inch long, said to be " scarlet," apparently rather
pink-red, the narrow tube thrice the length of the lips.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 377

Antirrhinum junceum = Mauraudia juncea, Benth. Bot. Voy.
Siilpli. p. 41. From San Diego to tlie Bay oP Magdaleuii, Hinds. —
I have not seen this ; but it seems to be a congener of the last, but
with smaller flowers and leaves, the uppermost reduced to minute
scales. The seeds as described are those of AiitirrJmiastrum.

MAURANDIA, Ort.

This genus, relieved of the section Aaiirrhinijiorce Benth., and con-
nected through the wing-seeded M. IVisiizeiii with Lophospermum,
now secures more definite characters.

§ 1. EuMAURANDiA. (MaurandicB Gahesicejlorce, Benth.) Semina
tuberculata, aptera. Calyx fructifer stylusque fere iramutati, segmen-
tis angustis.

M. Barclayana, Lindl. — Calyx insigniter glanduloso-pilosus, seg-
mentis longe attenuatis.

M. SEMPERFLORENS, Ort. — Calyx glaberrimus, brevior.

§ 2. Epixiphium, Engelm. Semina ala integerrima cincta.
Calyx fructifer auctus, coriaceus, basi 5-angulatus, segmentis triangu-
lari-lanceolatis valde reticulatis. Capsula stylo toto indurato subulato
superata, loculis rima ex apice dehiscentibus.

M. WiSLiZENi, Engelm., Gray in Bot. Mex. Bound, p. 111.

§ 3. Lophospermum. {Lophospermum, Don.) Semina ala lacera
seu irregulari cincta. Calycis segmenta foliacea, fructifera stylu-
sque immutata.

M. ERUBESCENS = Zop/?05/>ermz<m erubescens, Zucc.

M. SCANDENS (nee Pers.) = L. scandens, Don. An prtecedentis var.

MO HAVE A, Gray.

Calyx 5-partitus, segmentis laneeolatis fere a^qualibus. Corolla
personata ; labiis amplissimis obovato-flabelliformibus campanulato-
suberectis vel patentibus tubo basi hinc gibbo multo longioribus, infe-
riore breviter trilobo, superiore bilobo, lobis eroso-subdentatis saspius
acutatis, palato prominente (quoad labium parvo) medio barbato. Sta-
mina 2 antica fertilia, antheris confluenti-unilocularibus : filamenta 2 pos-
tica abortiva. Stigma depresso-capitatum. Ovarium, stylus, capsula
(subaequalis) Antirrhini, semina hinc cyathifera § Orontii. — Herba
annua, erecta, simplex vel laxe ramosa, viscido-pubescens ; foliis laneeo-
latis in petiolum attenuatis, superioribus alternis ; floribus axillaribus
paucis subracemosis ; corolla ampla luteola intus purpureo-punctata.

VOL. VII. 48

378 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

M. visciDA, Gray in Bot. Whippl. (Pacif. R. R. Exped. 4) p. 66,
in Ives, Colorado Exped. Bot. p. 19. — In addition to the imperfect
specimens gathered by CouUer, Bigelow, Newberry, &c., we now have
it with both fine flowers and mature fruit, collected by Dr. J. G.
Cooper, February 18, 1861, in a gravelly ravine at Fort Mohave.
The specimens mostly do not exceed a span in heiglit ; but it is noted
that the plant attains the height of two feet. The flower is fully an
inch and a half in length. As already stated, I suspect Antirrhimun
confertijlorum, Benth., may be founded upon an imperfect specimen of
this remarkable plant ; yet the flowers are not subsessile, nor the
calyx-segments shorter than the tube of the corolla.

ToNELLA COLLTNSIOIDES, Nutt., taken up by Benth. in DC. Prodr.
10, p. 593, as Collinsia tenella, — having solitary ovules, corolla scarcely
gibbous at the base and with an open limb, with the sinuses between
the two lateral and the lower (explanate) segment rather deeper than
on the posterior side, — may fairly claim the generic rank. Bolander
collected it in Mendocino County.

Collinsia Torreyi: caule tenello ramosissimo superne cum pedi-
cellis calyceque glandulosis ; foliis glabris linearibus subdenticulatis
basi attenuatis, floralibus superioribus minimis vel obsoletis ; pedicellis
quasi verticillato-racemosis calyce duplo longioribus ; calycis segmentis
lanceolato-oblongis obtusis coroUfe labiis ina^quilongis plus diraidio
brevioribus. — Mariposa, Big-tree Grove, and near Donner Lake, Dr.
Torrey. At Clark's Ranch, Bolander. A span high, the cauline
leaves 1^ inches long. Verticillastri 4-6-flowered, mostly in a naked
raceme. Corolla blue, about as large as in C parvijiora, but the
calyx very much shorter, only about one third the length of the lower
lip, which moderately exceeds the upper. I name it for the earlier
discoverer, that it may be one of the permanent memorials of our oldest
active botanist's visit to California, and to the " Mammoth Grove," in
the shade of which this delicate little plant grows.

Collinsia coryjibosa, Hortul. (I know not the origin of the name,
which is less appropriate than capitata.wovAd. be), a depressed species,
with rounded leaves, almost capitate inflorescence, broad calyx-lobes,
and extremely short upper lip of corolla, was collected by Bolander on
the coast at Fort Bragg, Humboldt Co.

Collinsia solitaria, Kellogg, in Proceed. Acad. Calif. 2, p. 10.
Depauperate specimens collected by Prof. Brewer, in April, in Marin
Co., remarkable for their ovate calyx-lohes, equalling the broad tube of

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 379

the corolla, evidently are of this species. Dr. Brewer notes that the
tube of the calyx is rose-colored, while the lobes are green. According
to Dr. Kellogg, not only the calyx-tube, but also the peduncles, are
bright purple. According to Dr. Brewer, the corolla is dotted with
brown spots, the upper Up light yellowish.

Pentstemon Palmeri (inter P. Jamesii et Cohceam) : sesquipeda-
lis ; foliis lanceolato-ligulatis argute denticulatis cauleque glaucescenti-
bus, superioribus semiamplexicaulibus, inferioribus spathulatis in
petiolum attenuatis ; panicula nuda racemiformi virgata laxiflora
glanduloso-puberula ; bracteis minimis ; pedunculis 2 - 3-floris ; pedi-
cellis gracilibus ; sepalis ovatis glabriusculis ; corolla poUicari pallide
purpurea supra calycem latissime campanulato-ampliata, ore hiante,
labio inferiore intus hirsute ; filamento sterili leviter exserto apice
incurvo insigniter flavo-barbato. — Arizona, in Skull Valley, and on
Rio Verde, near Fort Whipple, Drs. Elliott Coues and Edward
Palmer. A well-marked species, with sterile filament bearded in the
manner of P. cristatus, and corolla even more dilated in proportion
than that of P. Cobcea.

Pentstemon Bridgesii { Saccanthera) : prjeter inflorescentiam
glaber ; caule erecto 1 - 2-pedali ; foliis integerrimis spathulato-lan-
ceolatis linearibusque, caulinis sessilibus ; panicula virgata racemosa,
pedunculis 2-5-floris; sepalis ovato-oblongis acuminatis cum pedicellis
sequilongis viscoso-pubentibus ; corolla coccinea (pollicari) cylindraceo-
tubulosa sursum leviter ampliata, fauce nuda, labio superiore erecto
apice bilobo, inferiore tripartito, lobis recurvis oblongis tubo 2 - 3-plo
brevioribus ; filamento sterili nudo apice complanato ; autheris quasi
sagittatis apice solum dehiscentibus (rima hirtello-denticulata), loculis
deorsum maxime productis diu parallelis. — No. 218 in Californian
collection of the late Thomas Bridges. Yosemite Valley, very scarce,
Bolander. A handsome and very interesting new species, having the
anthers most distinctly of the section Saccanthera, but the habit and
corolla of the section Elmigera. In cultivation it would rival P.
barhatus and its allies.*

* To the C/ielonece there is apparently to bo added a new genus, namely,

BERENDTIA, nov. gen. Chelonearum post Leucocarpum.

Calyx tubuloso-campanulatus, subangulatus, fere aequaliter 5-dentatus. Corolla
infundibuliforrais, bilabiata, labiis patentibus subaequalibus, superiore bilobo, in-
feriore trilobo, lobis brevibus rotundatis. Stamina 4, didynama, absque rudimento

380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

MiMULUS MONTioiDES : pusillus (semi - tripollicaris), glabei' ; radice
annua ; foliis linearibus seu lineari-spathulatis basi attenuata sessilibus
integerriraiis subtrinervibus pedunculos sfepissime adeequantibus vel
excedentibus, imis nunc oblongis ; calycis oblongi dentibus brevibus
gequalibus, ore recto ; corolla aurea nunc fauce purpureo-guttata calyce
2-3-plo longiore (lin. 6-9 longa, limbo amplo), nunc pallidiora parva
calyce pauUo longiore. — Higb sierras of Fresno Co., Prof. Brewer.
Near Carson City, Nevada, Dr. C. L. Anderson. Near Empire City
Nevada, Dr. Torrey. Mono Pass, Bolander. The latter of the small-
flowered variety, which a])parently was also collected in the Rocky
Mountaiias of Coloiado by Dr. Parry.

MiMULUS iNCONSPicuus (Gray in Bot. Whippl., char, reform.) :
glaber, erectus, 2 - 6-pollicaris e radice annua ; foliis ovatis fere inte-
gerrirais 3 - 5-nervatis sessilibus pedunculos sa^pius ada^quantibus ;
calyce prismatico, fructifero oblongo pedunculo asquilongo, ore recte
truncato, dentibus seu denticulis brevissimis ajqualibus ; corolla rosea
vel purpurea (3-5 lin. longa) calyce sesqui vel bis longiore. — Larger
specimens than those of Dr. Bigelow, collected near Monte. Diablo by
Prof. Brewer, in Placer Co., by Mr. Rattan, along with a still larger
form. No. 199 of Bridges' collection recently distributed by the Smith-
sonian Institution, enable me to give a better character to the species.

quinti : filamenta filiformia exserta : antheras bilocidarcs miitici«. Stylus filiformis
exsertus : stigma bilamellatum. Capsula loculicida, valvis integris medio septiferis
placentas aixferentibus. Scmina numerosissima, parva : testa nucleo conformis.
Siiftrutices Mexican!, scabrido- vel glanduloso-pubeiites ; foliis oppositis subses-
silibus rugoso-venosis ; pedunculis axillaribus brevilms aut unifloris plerumqiie
bibiacteatis aut trifloris ; corolla ampla purpurea vel rubra. (Char, carpologica e
B. Coulteri.)

Bekendtia Ghiesbkechtii : foliis obovato-oblongis basi cuneata integerrima
ultra medium crcnato-dentatis ; pedunculis sispissime unifloris ; calycis dentibus sub-
ulatis tubo 2 - 3-plo brevioribus ; coroUaj tubo (pollicari) limbo suo calyceque triple
longioribus ; stigmatis lobis lineari-oblongis ; antherse loculis divergentibus. —
Chiapas, Ghiesbrecht, Dr. H. Berendt (an indefatigable explorer of the archaeology
and natural history of Mexico, to whom the genus is dedicated). Flower, including
the exserted genitalia, Ij to nearly 2 inches ^png.

Bekendtia Coulteri : foliis oblongis seu obovatis fere integerrimis basi minus
angustatis ; pedunculis ssepius 3 -5-floris ; calycis dentibus latioribus tubo dimidio
brevioribus ; coiollffi tubo e calyce vix cxserto, limbo amplo ; antheris subsaggita-
tis ; stigmatis lobis ovalibus. — Mexico, No. 1334, 133.5, coll. Coulter, ex herb.
Trin. Coll. Dubl. — Limb of the corolla half an inch in width.

Bekendtia rugosa = Diplacus rugosus, Beiith. in DC. Prodr. 10, p. 368, is a
congener of the above, fide Benth. in litt.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE IT, 1867. 381

MiMULUS BoLANDERi : tenuiter viscoso-pubescens ; caule e radice
annua gracili simplicissimo Csemi- vel subpedali) stricto a basi fere
florifero; foliis oblongo- seu ovato-lanceolatis sessilibus fere integerrirais
parvis (lin. 7-9 longis) ; floribus subsessilibus ; calycis ovati plicati
dentibus infequalibus, postico dimidio longiore corolla (ut videtur rosea
limbo brevi) paiillo breviore ; capsula subiilato-fusiformi. — Dry hill-
sides, at Clark's Ranch, Mariposa Co., Bolander. Corolla about 9 lines
long, with included tube, funnel-form throat, and apparently very short
ascending lobes. Calyx-teeth almost as in M. brevipes, but rather
broader. Nearly allied to that species, but apparently distinct. It
begins to flower, like an Eunanus, from the axils of the lower leaves.

EuNANUS CouLTERi, Benth., Gray in Bot. Whipph p. 64 (120), var.
ANGUSTATUS * tubo corolla3 sesqui - bipollicaris calycem sexies ad octies,
folia linearia triplo quaduplove excedente. — Placer and Plumas Coun-
ties, Rattan, Bolander.

Eunanus bicolor : viscido-puberulus ; foliis oblongo-lanceolatis,
imis spathulatis ; calycis dentibus e basi lata angustato-lanceolatis fere
. a?qualibus tubo oblongo-campanulato dimidio brevioribus; corolla3 aureae
fauce lato-infundibuliformi atropurpurea, lobis lequilongis, tubo calyce
subduplo longiore ; stigmate lato-infundibuliformi integerrimo. — In the
sierras between King's and Kawiah Rivers, Prof. Brewer. Plant about
an inch high. Corolla from half to two thirds of an inch long.

CORDYLANTHUS, Nutt., Benth. {Adenostegia, Benth. olira.)

Calyx 1 - 2-phyllus, spathaceus, phyUis anticis et posticis nervatis
integerrimis vel postico emarginato raro apice bifido. Corolla tubulosa,
sursum leviter ampliata : labia brevia, fere semper gequilonga, inferius
latum obtusissime 3-crenulatum : galea recta, apice breviter quasi un-
cinata. Stamina OrtJiocarpi. Antherge loculi aut piloso-ciliati aut basi
apiceque barbulati. Stylus apice sa^pius uncinato-inflexus, sub stigmate
integerrimo terminali incrassatus. Ovula plura, adscendentia, fere or-
thotropa, apice rostellata seu apiculata, rostello mox inflexo, vel campy-
lotropo-reniformia. Capsula compi'essa, loculicida. Seminapauciuscula
vel plura, nucleo ratione testae parva, angusta, subrecta, apiculata : radi-
cula supera. — Herbse annu£e, ramosae, angustifolia^, floribus apice ramo-
rum capitatim spicatim aut paniculatim congestis flavidis vel sordido-
purpurascentibus.

§ 1. Adenostegia. Anthela composita. Flores sfepe breviter
pedicellati, 2 - 4-bracteolati, calyce diphyllo instructi, phyllo vel sepalo

382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

antico asstivatione exteriore. Folia floralia et bracteae apice (C.
laxijloro excepto) saepissime truncatte retusae vel subtridentatis callo
glaiiduteformi pi. m. manifesto instructae.

* Calyx phyllo antico sub-5-nervi, postico subscarioso binervi bificlo.
Stamina 2 : filamenta fere glabra : antheras biloculares. Folia floralia
tritida vel subpinnatifida.

CoRDYLANTHUS CAPiTATUS, Nutt. Appears to have been found
only by Nuttall. I possess a short flowering branch, on which I can
confirm the characters assigned by Bentham, and add that the posterior
division of the calyx is only 2-nerved (the nerves distant Tind running
to the apex of the lobes), as in no other known species. Appai'ently
the inflorescence is hardly as much capitate as in the next.

* * Calyx phyllis 5 - 6-nervibus, postico etiam integerrimo vel emar-
ginato. Stamina 4 : filamenta pi. m. villosa : anthers omnes bilocu-
lares. Folia angusto-linearia seu filiformia,

-i- Superiora et floralia 3 - 5-fida, cum ramis minutim scabro- vel
subglanduloso-puberula.

COKDTLANTHUS FiLiFOLius, Nutt., Benth. (Adetiosteffia rigida, .
Benth. olim.) Folia caulina inferiora integerrima ; floralia parce
hispida prtesertim ad margines, basi subcuneata, segmentis apice pi. m,
dilatatis. Floras capitato-conferti. Calycis phylla oblonga obtusa. —
I have no Nuttallian specimen of this, but one from Douglas and from
other collections. I possess a mere fragment of C ramosus, Nutt.,
which I suppose to be a slender and somewhat canescent form of
the present species.

CoRDTLANTHDS Wrightii, Gray in Bot. Mex. Bound, p. 120.
Folia omnia quae exstant 3 - 5-partita, filiformia ; floralia conformia,
nee hispida. Flores pauci ad apice ramorum, poUicares: calycis phylla
lanceolata. — Dr. Parry has recently collected this in New Mexico ;
the flowers evidently purple or purplish.

-i--i- Folia fere semper etiam floralia integerrima. Flores subpani-
culati.

CoRDYLANTHUS PiLOSUS : elatus (3 - 4-pedalis), pilis mollibus pa-
tentibus ut videtur subviscidis cinereus ; foliis linearibus, superioribus
plerumque apice truncato-emarginatis vel dilatato-trilobulatis ; floribus
confertis demum furcato-paniculatis ; calycis phyllis lanceolato-oblongis.
— Dry soil, near San Jose, Brewer : Oakland hills, Bolander : Upper
Sacramento, Dr. Newberry. — Var. Bolanderi : inferne viscoso-
glandulosus, parce seu vix pilosus ; floribus laxius paniculatis ; fohis

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 383

raro truncato-emarginatis, floralibus calycibusque longe laxeque
villojiis. — Coll. Bolander, probably not far from San Fi-ancisco. —
Flowers about the size of those of G. filifolius. Seeds orthotropous,
ovate-oblong, with a hooked point or beak, the testa apparently
fleshy and smooth.

CoRDYLANTHUS TENUIS : effuse paniculatus, bipedalis, subtilissitne
puberulus, fere glaber ; ramulis filiformibus ; foliis angusto- seu fililbrmi-
linearibus, floralibus apice calloso raro bidenticulatis vel emarginatis ;
floribus mox sparsis ; calycis phyllis oblongo-lanceolatis. — Dry sandy
soil near Lake Tahoe, Nevada, Brewer, Dr. C. L. Anderson. Near
Ostrander's, above Yosemite Valley, Bolander. — Flowers 6 to 8 lines
long, purplish and yellowish, scattered on the developed filiform
branches. Seeds (immature) resembling those of the foregoing species,
semi-ovate with a recurved beak, smooth.

* * * Calyx phyllis utrisque 6-nervibus, postico apice emarginato-
bifido. Corolla profundius bilabiata, labio inferior! galea dimidio bre-
viore. Stamina 4 : antherte omnes uniloculares, loculo inferiori aut
abortivo aut pra^sertim in stam. breviorura plane nuUo : filamenta
villosula. Folia brevia, linearia, conformia, fere semper integerrima.

CoRDYLANTHUS LAXIFLORUS, Gray, in Bot. Mex. Bound. 1. c. —
The flowers are said to be " bright yellow."

§ 2. Hemistegia. Flores ebracteolati, in spicam simplicem quan-
doque ramosam congesti, singuli in axilla bracte^e amplexantis sessiles,
calyce monophyllo (apice bidentato) instruct!, sepalo seu phyllo erga
bracteam deficiente. Filamenta glabra : antherae loculi basi tantum
ciliolati seu barbulati. — Eglandulosae, subviscosae, spitharagei ad
pedalem.

* Foha, etiam floralia seu bractea;, integerrima. Stamina 4, longi-
orum antheris bilocularibus, breviorum loculo unico parvo (superiore
deficiente). Semina rostellata, testa liBvi ?

CoRDYLANTHUS MARiTiMUS, Nutt. : subpubescens, pallidus ; foliis
linearibus seu lineari-lanceolatis glabratis plerisque obtusis patentibus ;
spica bref i simplici ; filamentis valde intequalibus. — Salt marshes
along the coast from San Francisco to San Diego.

CoRDYLANTHUS CANESCENS : pube brevi molli cinereus ; caule
erecto pedali ; foliis lanceolato-linearibus acutis suberectis ; bracteis
lanceolatis; spica seu capitulo paucifloro; floribus purpurascentibus. —
Near Carson City, Nevada, Dr. C. L. Anderson. At Lake Washoe
in the same district. Dr. Torrey.

384 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

** Folia caulina integerrima, floralia seu bracteaj latiora Sfepius
incisa. Stamina 2. Semina obtusa : testa favoso-reticulata.

CORDYLANTHUS MOLLIS : laxe subliirsuto-villosus ; caule I'amisque
diffii.sis ; fbliis caulinis linearibus brevibus ; bracteis oblongis inciso
2 - 3-dentatis vel integris corolla luteo-alba pauUo bi'evioribus ; spicis
nunc raino.'^is. — Mare Island, Bay of San Francisco, Charles Wright,
in N. Pacif". Expl. Expedition, November, 1855. No one else seems
to have met with it. It is a rather coarse, hairy plant, with leaves
hardly more than half an inch, the thick and either dense or lax spikes
2 or 3 inches long : bracts sometimes nearly an inch long. Seeds
moderately reniform, with a loose and thick cellular-reticulated integu-
ment, and no obvious rostellum, but the nucleus is slender-pointed.

Orthocarpus pallescens. Gray in Sill. Jour. 34 (ser. 2.) p.
339. JEuchroma pallescens, Nutt. herb. ; but in the flowers examined
the calyx not equally 4-cleft, only 2-cleft, with the segments 2-cleft at
the apex or to the middle. To this, however, I would refer a plant
of Dr. Lyall's Oregon Boundary collection, received from Kew as
" Gastilleia 'pallida var. ?" No. 291 of Geyer's Coll., mentioned in the
enumeration under C septentrionalis ; also Dr. Torrey's No. 363, from
Donner Lake in the Sierra Nevada, No. 186G ('' tips of bracts and
corolla white") and 2838 of Prof. Brewer's collection, from high
sierras, and in Klamath Valley, Southern Oregon, by Dr. Cronkhite.
It is not easy to decide whether it should be ranked under Orthocarpus
or Castilleia. The root is clearly perennial, as in no other Orthocar-
pus, and the lower lip is not as much triplicate as in some species of
Castilleia ; but in length it very nearly or quite equals the short
galea, and its oblong lobes are about as long as the undivided portion.
The coat of the seed appears to be cellular-favose, in the manner of
Castilleia, but at maturity it forms an arilliforra covering not much
larger than the nucleus, which lies loose within it. The .species of
Orthocarpus most like it is 0. attenuatus. Gray, which appears to be
distinct from 0. hispidus by its white corolla with less trisaccate lower
lip and proportionally longer lobes.

Pedicularis attollens: Faucidentes I^ongirostres ; caulibus erec-
tisgracilibus (semi- ad bipedalibus) apice cum spica elongata angusta
primum lanatis ; foliis (caulinis superioribus parvis) pinnatipartitis,
segmentis linearibus serratis incisisve ; calycis dentibus tubo subajqui-
longis ; corollie rubro-purpure^e galea cassidiformi e calyce breviter
exserta labio lato dimidio breviore, rostro abrupto super galeam elevato

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE H, 1867. 385

vel retrocurvo eaque tluplo longiore. — Swamps In the Sierra Nevada,
alt. 6 - 1 1,000 feet, Brewer, Torrey, Bolander, Bridges (193). A well-
marked and interesting addition to this section. Flowers about half
the size of those of P. Grcenlandica or surrecta; the linear rostrum
barely 3 lines long, thrown abruptly back over the galea and erect
or recurved. Capsule ovate, twice the length of the calyx.

Pedicularis SEMiB areata : Edentulce, subacaulis, fere glabra ;
foliis pinnatipartitis, segmentis inciso- 1 - 2-pinnatifidis, lobis dentibus-
que brevibus mucronatis ; floribus breviter pedicellatis folioso-bracteatis
in spicam subsessilem foliis multum brevioribus congestis ; calyce sub-
in?equaliter 5-fido, lobis e basi lata lanceolato-acuminatis ; corolla
ochroleuca (primum tomentulosa) calyce triple longiore, galea fere recta
obtusa inappendiculata labio erecto apice breviter a^quahter trilobo
paullo longiore ; filaments 2 longioribus supra medium pilis multiarticu-
latis villosis, brevioribus fere vel prorsus imberbibus ; antherse loculis
basi breviter cuspidatis. — On Mount Dana, alt. 10,000 feet, and Eb-
bett's Pass, 7 - 8,000 feet, Prof. Brewer. In or near the Yoseniite
Valley, Bolander, and Mariposa Grove, at and above 5,000 feet. Al-
lied rather to P. centranthera, Gray, than to any other ; the habit, foli-
age, and inflorescence similar, but the leaves more divided, only 3 or 4
inches long, and with seldom a trace of callous margins ; the flower
much smaller, only 7 to 9 lines long ; the anthers much shorter and
abruptly pointed. Capsule globular, obliquely mucronate, hardly
equalling the calyx.

MoNARDELLA LEUCOCEPHALA : annua, humilis, cinereo-puberula ;
foliis oblongis vel sublanceolatis obtusis integerrimis subpetiolatis ; in-
volucri bi'acteis ex toto albo-scai'iosis nitidis rotundatis 7 - 9-nervatis
subapiculatis flores (pro genere parvos) adjequantibus ; calycis brevius-
cule tubulosi dentibus subulatis supra medium albis tubo 15-nervi
dimidio brevioribus ; corolla parva. — Plains near Merced, in sandy
soil, June. Heads numerous, terminating the spreading branches, about
two thirds of an inch in diameter. The slender white tips of the calyx-
teeth more or less recurved. Corolla apparently white and but little
exserted. From the very white and probably enduring involucres of
the numerous heads, and the dwarf habit, this marked species may be
expected to be a fine ornamental annual in cultivation. — The other
annual species are M. Douglasii, differing from the others in the widely
divergent pinnate veins of the involucral bracts confluent into a strong
marginal false vein ; M. candicans, with very blunt calyx'teeth as well

VOL. VII. 49

386 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

as bracts, and the only species heretofore recognized as an annual ;
M. unduluta, with its larger forms (often confused with the foregoing),
the leaves of which are seldom at all undulate, and the bracts are more
rigid or foliaceous and less blunt ; and the following, which is most
like M. Douglasii on one hand and M. undidata on the other.

MoNARDELLA Brewehi : annua, hurailis, puberula ; foliis oblongis
vel spathulatis penninerviis petiolatis ; involucri bracteis latissirae ova-
tis subulato-acuminatis plerisque tenuibus 5— 7-nervatis vel quintupli —
septuplinerviis calyces tubulosos baud superantibus ; dentibus calycis
obtusiusculis ; corolla rosea longius exserta. — Corall Hollow on the
dry eastern side of the Californian Coast range south of Monte Diablo,
Brewer. Scantily collected, apparently a very distinct species : the
specimens little over a span in height. Calyxes merely soft-pubescent ;
the teefh rather broad, wholly pointless. Nerves of the involucral
bracts about 5 from the base, and one or even two pairs from tlie mid-
nerve near the base, converging to the pointed apex. Corolla 3 or 4
lines longer than the calyx. — The two perennial and more or less
sufFruticose species are found in California, M. odoratissima only in
the mountains, M. villosa in the low country and farther south, and
under several forms : among them the var. leptosiphon, Torr., passes
into var. ylabella {31. Shellonii, Torr. in Durand, PI. Pratten. ?) which
has smaller leaves and heads, no villosity at all, and scarcely any
pubescence.

PoGOGYNE (Hedeomoides, stam. fert. 2) serpylloides {Hede-
oma .^ serpylloides, Torr. Bot. Whippl.) : pusilla ; foliis spathulatis vel
. obovatis ; verticillastris paucifloris s«pe distantibus ; dentibus calycis
bracteisque nudiusculis parce hirsuto-ciliatis, 2 superioribus paullo
longioribus corollam adgequantibus ; filamentis 2 sterilibus rudimento
antherae capitatis ; stylo superne parcissime hispido ; stigmatis lobis
ina^qualibus. — Martinez, J. M. Bigelow. Oaklands, Marsh's Ranch
near Monte Diablo, Arroyo Grande, San Juan near Monterey, &c.,
Brewer, Bolander. Plant from 2 to 5 inches high, exhales a strong
scent of Pennyroyal. Corolla blue or purple-violet, very small.
Flowers in some specimens sparse in the manner of Hedeoma, in many
of the older ones numerous and interrupted-spicate as in Pogogyne.
Calyx deeply cleft, not bearded in the throat. If it were so, the plant
would manifestly belong to Hedeoma. But it is a clear congener and
very near relative of Pogoggue zizyphoroides, Benth. (sparingly col-
lected in flower by Mr. Bolander, with larger and roundish leaves).

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 887

which equally has two of the stamens sterile, although their filaments
are as long as the truly antheriferous ones. I discern a tendency to
the abortion of one pair of anthers and to the inequality of the lobes
of the stigma in P. parvljlora also.

AuDiBERTiA CAPiTATA : frutescens, bipedalis ; ramis ad apicem
usque foliosis glomerulo capitulaiformi solitario terminatis ; foliis A.
stachyoidei similibus sed minoribus brevioribus magis petiolatis subtus
tantum puberulis, floralibus bracteisque subcoloratis rotundatis vel
ovatis obtusis vel interioribus mucrone setifornii instructis flores ada?-
quantibus et involucrantibus. — Summit of Providence Mountain,
Mohave Desert, May, 1861, Dr. J. G. Cooper. Flowers purple. Re-
sembles A. stachyoides in the rugose leaves, &c., and A. incana in the
involucrate bracts of the head.

Scutellaria Bolanderi : Galericuhita, tenuiter pubescens ; cau-
libus (pedalibus) simplicibus vel inferne ramosis ad suramum apicem
usque oequaliter crebre foliosis ; foliis omnibus conformibus ovato-
eliipticis basi levissime cordatis sessilibus subintegerrimis (imisve
serrato-crenatis) merabranaceis penninerviis ; floribus axillaribus op-
positis folium suba^quantibus ; pedicellis calyce brevioribus ; corolla
pallide ca^rulea seu albida (fere poUicari). — Clark's Meadows, Mari-
posa Co., in patches, Bolander. Leaves an inch or less in length,
thin, rounded at summit, in their venation intermediate between *S'.
galericidata and S. nervosa.

Stachys albens : mollissime albo-tomentosa, nee unquam hir-
suta ; caule erecto valido (1 - 5-pedali) ; foliis cordato-ovatis vel sub-
cordato-oblongis crenatis, inferioribus petiolatis, superioribus plerisque
subsessihbus, floralibus calyces adi^quantibus ; verticillastris plurifloris
approximatis ssepius in spicam densam interruptam confertis ; bracteis
obsoletis ; calycibus subsessilibus villosissimis obconico-campanulatis,
dentibus deltoideis pungenti-cuspidatis ; corolla alba calyce duplo lon-
giori, tubo calycem pauUulo superante, galea superne villoso-barbata.
— California : Fort Tejon, Mr. Xautus (No. 80, taken for a var. of
S. pycnantha) : Ojai, Dr. Peckham ; Pechecos Pass, near water-
courses. Brewer, Bolander ; Yosemite Valley, a dwarf exceedingly
woolly form, Bolander. Stem in the taller specimens " often an inch
square at base, above much branched." Corolla white, with a i'tiw
purple or rose-colored dots near the base of the lower lip.

Trichostema laxum: Ort/iopodium, tenuiter pilosum vel pubes-
cens ; caule laxe ramoso ; foliis penninerviis lanceolatis sa^piusve ob-

388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

longo-lanceolatls utrinque attenuatis vel acutis longiuscule petiolatis ;
cymis axillaribus pedunculatis demum furcatis, ramis elongandis sfcun-
do-plurifloris; pedicellis calyce vix brevioribus ; lobis caljcis a?qualibus
pubovatis tubo iequilougis ; corollfe tubo tenui exserto. — Near Little
Geysers, Napa County, Brewer. Pope's Valley, Bolander. I have
also specimens raised from Californian seed, of unknown source, in
1866, by Mr. Elihu Hall. Most related to T. lanceolaf.um, Benth. ;
but with much more evolute cymes of smaller flowers ; and the
distant, petioled, feather-veined leaves are much more like those of
T. dichotomum.

• Lycium Cooperi : ramis validis; foliis viscoso-puberulis spathulatis
retusis rigidulis pauci-venosis (cum petiolo 6-9 lin. longis) ; floribus
5-meris ; calyce cylindraceo-campanulato basi abrupto quasi truncato
cum pedicello ajquilongo viscoso-pubescente, lobis oblongis obtusis tubo
suo jequilongis corolla infundibuliformi (semipollicari) dimidio brevi-
oribus ; filamentis basi pilosis ; antheris ovalibus mucrone minimo api-
culatis. — East slope of Providence Mountain, in the Mohave District,
Oalifornia, Dr. J. G. Cooper. Stems " 2 feet high " ; spines very
short. Pedicels 3 or 4 lines long. Lobes of the corolla ovate, very
much shorter than the tube. The species ranks between L. jmllidum
and L. puberulnm.

Lyciuji Andersonii : glaberrimura ; foliis parvis (1| - 3 lin. lon-
gis) spathulatis ; calyce brevi-carapanulato margine repando-quadri-
dentato seu denticulato pedicello (sesquilineam longo) sfepius breviore ;
corolla angusto-tubulosa fere semipoUicari fauce subarapliata, lobis 4
latissimis tubo multoties brevioribus antheras adgequantibus ; filamentis
basi glanduloso-pilosis. — S. E. part of State of Nevada, Dr. C. L.
Anderson. Allied to the L. Torreyi and L. Fremonti of my revision
of the genus.

Menodora (Bolivaria) spinescens : minutissime puberula, ra-
mosissima, ramis ramulisque divaricatis lignosis spinescentibus ; foliis
nunc ad squamas exiguas reductis nunc parvis (lin. 1-3 longis) spath-
ulatis, omnibus alternis ; calycis 5- (raro 6-) partiti segmentis lineari-
subulatis corollas tubum infundibuliformem (lobis obovatis suis paullo
longiorem) subccquantibus ; filamentis antheris oblongis subexsertis
brevioribus ; stigmate minuto emarginato ; ovarii loculis biovulatis. —
Canons and hillsides, southeastern part of the State of Nevada, fl.
March, Dr. C. L. Anderson. This is an interesting addition to the
genus, being apparently of the same group with the original South

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE 11, 1867. 389

American species of Bolivaria ; but the filaments are short and adnate
almost up to the throat of the corolla. The latter is about 3 lines
long, and apparently yellowish tinged with pink. Stems one or two
feet high.

MoNOLEPis SPATHULATA : foliis integerrimis spathulatis ; glomer-
ulis globosis ; utriculo pyriformi crebre papuloso-scabi'O ; semine hevis-
simo turgido immarginato. — Sierra Nevada, at Mono Pass, in loose
soil, Bolander. The seed is several times smaller than that of 31.
chenopodioides.

Eriogonum spergulinum : E, pharneceoidei Torr. simillimum ;
pube foliorum pilosa nunquam tomentosa ; inflorescentia floribunda
magis effusa ; involucris multo minoribus glabris quadrifidis unifloris ;
perigonii laciniis exterioribus oblongis. — Dry sandy soil, banks of Big
Creek below the Mariposa Big-tree Grove, Bolander. Also collected
by the late Mr. Bridges.

Habenaria Thurberi : H. dilatatce et hyperborece peraflfinis ; spica
angustissima ; sepalo postico rotundo-ovato ; labello angusto lineari e
basi baud dilatata defiexo sepalis duplo longiore calcare filiformi ova-
rium ada3quante vel superante pauUo breviore ; glandulis stigraatis
ovalibus. — Arizona, Thurber (925), C. Wright (1,900), referred by
Dr. Torrey in Bot. Mex. Bound., to Platanthera leucostachys, Lindl.,
which I take to be a form of P. dilatata. A variety of this with
more slender and loose spike of aj^parently more greenish flowers
is 6251 of Bolander's collection, from near the Mariposa Grove and
Yoseraite Valley.

Cypripedium Californicum : puberulum ; caule folioso (ad ses-
quipedalem) ; foliis inferioribus late ovalibus ovatisque, superioribus
lanceolatis ; floribus 4—6 dissitis folio brevioribus ochroleucis, sepalis
(postico e duobus conflato integerrimo rariusve apice bilobo) l^tissime
ovalibus petala lato-linearia obtusa plana labelluraque obovato-globosum
adiequantibus ; stamine sterili fornicato. — Swamps on Red Mountains,
Mendocino Co., Bolander. Flowers most like, and rather smaller than,
those of G, passerinum.

Brodi^a coccinea {Brevoortia Ida-Maia, A. Wood in Proceed.
Acad. Philad. June, 1867): scapo elato ; umbella 5-12-floro; peri-
gonio infundibulari-cylindraceo ventricoso pedicello tenui duplo longiore
coccineo, lobis viridulis mox flavidis ovatis recurvis tubo multo brevi-
oribus squamis faucialibus latissimis erosulis (antheras 3 sessiles sub-
aequantibus) snbduplo longioribus ; stigmate trifido, lobis emarginatis.

890 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

— Shasta Co. California, A. Wood, 18G6. On tlie divide between
Russian and Eel Rivers and northward, Bolander, 1867. Professor
Wood has naturally characterized this very striking and handsome
plant a^ a new genus, — to which, indeed, it has as good a claim as
Dichehstemma or perhaps even Stropholirion. But, however Brodicea
be limited, it cannot well fail to include this species, which has wholly
the structure of the typical B. grandijlora, only that the tube of the
flower is proportionally longer, the scales answering to the other set of
stamens much broader, and the color peculiar in the genus, although
not unlike that of Stropholirioji. In referring it to Brodicea we may
venture to discard the objectionable double-headed specific name,
given by the stage-driver, Mr. Buike (who showed the plant to
Professor Wood), " in affection for his little daughter."

Allium occidentale = A. reiiculatum, Hook. FI. Bor.-Am. pro
parte, & PI. Ilartw. No. 1995 ; ab A. reticutato Fras. differt bulbo
nunquam vaginis reticulatis tecto, segmentis perigonii latioribus,
ciistis seu dentibus ovarii brevissimis, etc. — Apparently common in
California.

Aloe yucc^folia (Yucca? parvijiora, Torr. Bot. Mex. Bound.
p. 221) : acaulis ; foliis elongatis angusto-linearibus recurvo-patentibus
rio'idis canaliculatis tenuiter striatis kevibus maro;ine Tuccce modo fili-
feris ; scapo 2 - 4-pedali scarioso-bracteato ; racemo vel panicula elon-
gata ; floribus fasiculatis ; perianthio sequali cylindrico dilute rubro ;
filamentis rectis subexsertis ; stylo demum longius exserto ; capsula
ovata primum carnosa demum 6-valvi. — S. W. Texas, C. Wright
(685, with flowers and mature fruit), 1908 (with unripe fruit, &c.),
J. M. Bigelow, ex Torr. Flowers an inch long. Style at length with
the exserted portion incurved or geniculate in the flowers developed
in Can»bridge Botanic Garden. Fruit and seeds, no less than the
leaves, resembling those of Tacca.

HESPEROCALLIS, Nov. Gen. Liliacearum.

Perigonium corollinum, infundibuliforme, marcescendo-persistens ;
limbo regular! 6-partito tubo longiore, segmentis conformibus oblongo-
spathulatis basi attenuatis medio 5 - 7-nervatis. Stamina 6, fauci in-
serta : filamenta filiformia, recta : anthera^ lineares, supra basim intror-
sum affixas. Ovarium triloculare, loculis multiovulatis: stylus filiformis:
stigma depresso-capitatum. Capsula subglobosa, loculicida, polyspeima.
Semina compressa, exalata, testa ut videtur subcarnosa molli. — Herba

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 391

glaberrima ; caiile foliato bipedali e " bulbo eduli " (an cormo ?) ;
foliis linearibus elongatis crassis planis margine insigniter undulatis ;
racerao paucifloro ; pedicellis brevibus bractea scariosa suffultis cum
Hore articulatis.

Hesperocallis UNDULATA. — Desert plains at Je?sup Rai)id?,
Arizona or New Mexico ; " the bulb eaten by Indians," Prof. New-
berry. Gravelly plains at Fort Mohave, Dr. J. G. Cooper. Flower
2 inches long. Capsule half an inch or more in length, apparently
thickish. The seeds seen not fully ripe, but evidently with a soft or
rather fleshy-coriaceous testa. The plant appears to be most related
to Hemerocallis, and the generic name is intended to suggest that atiin-
ity, along with the far western, instead of eastern habitat. The " bulb,"
whatever it may prove to be, did not accompany the specimens of
either collector.

Nakthecium ossifragrum, Linn., var. occidentale. Swamps
at Red Mountains, Humboldt Co., Bolander. An interesting discovery
in a geographical aspect, this, with the recent detection of a new species
(iV! Asiaticum, Maxim.) in .Japan, greatly extending the range of the
genus. While the Japanese species, by its narrow sepals, shortish
anthei's, and shorter more crisped wool of the filaments, most ap-
proaches N. Americanum, the present plant, with loose raceme and
broadish leaves, closely resembles the W. European plant ; from
which it seems to differ only in the rather broader, and perhaps larger,
divisions of the perianth. The position of the bractlet varies, as it also
does in the other forms.

Veratrum fimbriatum: floribus fere pollicem diametro insigne,
perianthii phyllis obovato-cuneatis supra unguem brevem latum com-
posite longeque fimbriatis ; foliis V. viridi similibus, majoribus sesqui-
pedalibus. — On the undulating plains west of the Redwoods in Men-
docino County, Sept., 1865, Bolander. The flowers of this most re-
markable species are apparently greenish-white, with two darker spots
at the base of the lamina.

Hemicarpha occidentalis : pallida; capitulis solitariis binisve
ovatis vel subglobosis hystricinis ; squamis e basi ovata scariosa costa
valida percursa in acumen patulum rigidum sequilongum productis
achenium cum squaraula interna ovata eroso-truncata vel excisa ter
longioribus. — Common in Yosemite Valley, Bolander. This appar-
ently grows, just as does H. suhsquarrosa in the Eastern United States,
in company with Cyperus injlexus. Heads much thicker than those

302 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

of the original species, owing to the long and squarrose points of the
scales, pale greenish.

Eleocharis Bolanderi : E. imiglumi similis, absque rhizomati-
bus repentibus modo E. multicaulis ; caule tenuiori striato-angulato ;
stigmatibus 3 ; achenio albido Itevi pyriformi angulis 3 acutis costato,
apice quasi truncato tuberculo latissimo depresso fere disciformi prorsus
confluente coronate ; setis tenuibus 3-4 retrorsum scabris achenio
2 — 4-plo brevioribus. — Mariposa County, on banks of stream near
Clarlfs, Bolander. Fruit mostly immature in the specimens : scales of
the spike dark brown.

SciRPUS (IsoLEPis) PYGMiEUS, — preserving the earliest specific
name for this common Californian as well as S. American and Austral-
ian plant, which was inadvertently named " Isolepis cari?iata " in an
early distribution of some of Mr. Bolander's plants, No. 57. It is
Isolepis leptocanlis, Torr. in Bot. Whippl. p. (153) 97. It appears
to grow in company with, but is quite distinct from,

SciRPUS (Isolepis) carinatus, the Isolepis carinata, Hook. &
Arn., which is near 7. cartilaginea, R. Br.

SciRPUS (Trichophorum) criniger : caulibus e rhizomatibus
dense cgespitosis strictis (bipedalibus) triquetris, anguhs sub apice
scabris ; foliis planis, radicalibus angusto-linearibus elongatis, caulinis
lato-linearibus brevibus sa^pius vagina brevioribus; spicis paucis oblongis
in capitulum unicum rariusve geminatum arete congestis ; involucro
monophyllo subulato vel subnuUo ; squamis ovatis tenuibus trinervibus
fulvis muticis (infima majore bracteante acuminata vel cuspidata) fila-
raentis 3 et perigynii setis 6 tenuibus antrorsum scabris dimidio brevi-
oribus ; achenio obovato-triquetro cuspide brevi apiculato. — In bogs,
on Red Mountain, Humboldt Co., Bolander. An interesting plant,
with nearly the habit and inflorescence of Eriophorum Virginicum, but
usually with only one glomerule, composed of 5 to 9 very crowded
spikes, and the involucre small and simple or none, and comose with
fulvous, but not very tortuous, long bristles and persistent filaments.
The number and the serrulation of these bristles refer the species
to Trichophorum ; rather than to Eriophorum. The rather broad
cauline leaves are from 3 to only 1^ inches long, acute, smooth, or
the edges minutely scabrous.

The Carices of these collections having been referred to Mr. Olney,
he has obligingly furnished characters of the following proposed new
species, along with two or three of Eastern habitat.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 393

Carices Novce a Stephen T. Olney, A. M., descripttB, 1868,

Carex Bolanderi, Olney, n. sp. : spica elliptica pallida albo-viridi
demura lutescente e spiculis 5-6 (rarius 4-10) parvis ellipticis ses-
silibus plerumque androgynis basi masculis, superioribus contiguis,
infima vel binis inferioribus remotis bracteatis ; stigmatibus 2 ; peri-
gyniis ovalibus vel ellipticis acuminato-rostratis bifidis plano-convexis
margins acutis serratis nervatis basi spongiosis squama ovata hispida
aristata albo-hyalina nervo viridi longioribus ; achenio orWculato vel
ovato punctulato stramineo, basi styli plus minus bulbosa. — Califor-
nia, Yoseraite Valley and Mariposa Big-tree Grove, Brewer, 1665; Dr.
Wm. Hillebrand, 2313 ; Bolander, 6201, 6209. This is closely allied
to C. Deweyana, Schweinitz, from which it differs in its less acutely
angled culm, more approximate and many- (10-30-) flowered spikes,
shorter bracts, the oval or elliptical and nerved perigynia, and long-
awned hispid scales.

Carex athrostachya, Olney, n. sp. : spica globosa capitata in-
volucrata straminea e spiculis 8-20 basi masculis dense congestis vel
infima subinde discreta ; bracteis 3-5 inferioribus foliaceis spicam
longe superantibus, basi expansa hyalino-marginata ; stigmatibus 2 ;
perigyniis ovato-lanceolatis in rostrum elongatum attenuatis basi spon-
giosis marginibus alatis serratis alte bifidis leviter nervatis ; squama
ovato- lanceolata acuminata membranacea ; achenio orbiculato plano-
convexo lucido nee punctulato. — California, Yosemite Valley, June
17, Brewer, 1650; Hillebrand, 2311, a van; Bolander, 6213; Silver
Valley, alt. 7,400 feet, Brewer, a variety. — Ctespitose : culms acutely
triangular, leafy, 1^-2 feet high; leaves narrow, shorter than the
culm. Allied to O. sycnocephala, Carey ; from which it differs in its
shorter leaves, heads with more spikelets, bracts expanding at the base
into a membranaceous border, and broader and more ovate irregularly-
nerved perigynia.

Carex straminea, Schk., var. congesta, Boott, in lift. Apr. 1863:
spica congesta, squamis castaneis. — California, Brewer, on Mount
Shasta, 1375, 1397, 1398, 1399.

Carex silicea, Olney: "spiculis 2-10 pallidis demum stramineis
plerumque alternatim remotiusculis omnibus (termin*Ji sa-pe magis
conspicue) basi conico-masculis nudis, infima subinde composita ;
perigyniis ovalibus vel orbiculatis e basi late alatis brevi plerumque
sensim rostratis compressis appressis plus minus plurinerviis squama
lanceolata acuminata acuta latioribus paulo longioribus vel sequantibus."

VOL. VII. 50

394 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

C. straminea, var. moniliformis, Tuckerm. Enum. p. 17. C. straminea,
var. Sartwell, Exsicc. No. 49. C fcenea, Boott, 111. Car. 3, p. 118, tab.
377. Cfcenea, var. ? sahdonum, Gray, Man. ed. 5. C adusta, Carey
in Gray, Man. ed. 1. non. Boott. C. festucacea, Sartwell, Exsicc. No. 44,
ex parte. — Maine, on the coast, rocks and beaches, Tuckerraan. New
Hampshire, Isle of Shoals, Canby. Rhode Island, on racks and beaches,
Narragansett Bay. Massachusetts, Ipswich, in sand, Oakes. New York,
Sartwell. Cape Henlopen, Delaware, Canby. June, July. — The dif-
ferent color, the alternate spikelets, nutant spikes (in this resembling
C. straminea, var. apcrta, Boott), and involute leaves, surely separate
this from C. foenea. The fruit matures early ; that of G.fcenea ripens
a month or more later.

Carex senta, Boott, n. sp. : " Mr. Brewer has recently found in
California specimens which, in habit, closely resemble C. angustata,
Boott, but differs in the perigynum being conspicuously toothed at the
margin, and the vagina of the leaves externally scabrous, and in the
larger size of the perigynum." Boott, 111. Car. 4, p. 174. It is
Brewer's No. 350, which was collected in a canon of the Santa Inez
Mountains, California.

Carex bifida, Boott, n. sp. " With the habit of G. Buxhaumii WahL
differs in the bifid orifice of the perigynum, which is not granulated ;
the leaves are broader, and scales shorter." Boott, MSS. April, 1863.
It is Brewer's No. 574, of Salinos Valley, south of Monterey, and Bo-
lander's 6476 from Red Mountain, Humboldt County.

Carex gynodynama, Olney, n. sp. : spicis 4-5 cylindricis erectis
ferrugineis, terminali masculi apiee foeminea, i-eliquis foemineis, suprema
masculam longe superante, infiraa reraota longe vaginata pedunculata ;
bracteis involutis ciliatis, infima culmo subajquali vel breviore ; stig-
matibus 3 ; perigyniis ellipticis rostratis bifidis olivaceis basi leviter
nervatis (apice purpureo pilis longis albis vestito, basi glabra) squama
ovata membranacea ciliata mucronata vel acuta castanea medio pallida
latioribus et brevioribus ; achenio obovato triquetro olivaceo. — Cali-
fornia, near Mendocino City, Bolauder, 4700. Caespitose : culms
10 -18 inches high, leafy, and with long sheaths : leaves much shorter
than the culnif flat, ciliate. Tliis species probably belongs to the
Ferrugiuece group.

Carex Whitneyi, Olney, n. sp. : spicis 4 (rarius 3-5) erectis
albo-viridibus, terminali masculi (rarius 2) oblonga vel cylindrica
rarius pedunculato, reliquis foemineis evaginatis sublaxifloris oblongis

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 395

contiguis, infima pedunculata (rarius reraota longissime exserte pedun-
culata) ; bracteis culmo brevioribus vel infima pauUo longiore ; stig-
matibus 3 ; perigyniis ovalibus acute triquetris rostratis nervatis glabris
(ore emarginato antice altius secto) ; squama ovata cuspidata membran-
acea apice ciliata medio viridi trinervi longioribus ; achenio ovato acute
triquetro. — California, Yosemite Valley, Brewer, 1639, Bolander,
6198, Hillebrand, 2305, 2308, 2314; Mount Dana, 12,000 feet, Bolan-
der, 5086; Soda Springs, 9,000 feet, Brewer, 1778. Whole plant
except perigynia and scales whitish or glaucous-pubescent ; the sheaths
densely so. Culm 1-3 feet high, erect, acutely triangular. Leaves
shorter than the culm, 3-4 lines wide. This and (7. pubescens, Muhl.,
01 dasycarpa, Muhl., C. tenax, Chapman, C triqxietra, Boott, and G.
Halleriana, Asso, form a very natural group, which Carey has indicated
in Herb. Gray as Triquetrce. Dedicated to the Director of the Sur-
vey under which the specimens were collected.

Carex luzulina, Olney, n. sp. : spicis4-5 rarius 6 fusco-ferru-
gineis ; supei'ioribus contiguis brevi-oblongis densifloris sessilibus, ter-
minali mascula, foemineis inferioribus bracteatis longe vaginatis, infima
interdum longe pedunculata remota; stigmatibus 3 ; perigyniis oblongo-
ovalibus vel ovatis rostratis bifidis obsolete nervatis glabris rostro
serrato squama ovata obtusa castanea nervo pallido-viridi ciliata brevi-
oribus ; achenio obovato. — California, Mendocino City, Bolander,
4740. Culms 7-12 inches high, leafy at base: leaves short, 2-4
inches long, 3 lines wide, smooth and flat ; the lower recurved. Allied
to C. prcecox, Jacq.

Carex glaucodea, Tuckerman, MSS. "Spicis4-5 cylindricis,
terminali mascula subsessili clavata, reliquis foemineis folioso-bracteatis
multifloris, superioribus approximatis exserte (inferiori reraota longe)
pedunculatis pallide viridibus ; stigmatibus 3 brevibus ; stylo agquali ;
perigyniis ovoideis turgidis obtusis ore sub-integro multinerviis glauco-
viridibus squama late ovata breviter cuspidata albida medio viridi tri-
nervi vix dein duplo longioribus ; achenio obovato triquetro." — Moist
trap rocks, summit of Mount Holyoke and Mount Tom, Tuckerman ;
New Jersey, C F. Austin ; woods near Philadelphia, C. E. Smith ;
Bethlehem, Penn., Prof. Porter ; Lancaster Co., Penn., L. Fiot ; Del-
aware, near Wilmington, Canby. — Plant scarcely erect; culms 6-12
inches high, smooth and glaucescent in all parts ; leaves wider than in
C. grisea, 2| - 4 lines wide, shorter than the culm. From C. grisea it
differs in its wider leaves, cylindrical densely and many-flowered spikes,

396 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

in the glumes, fewer-nerved perigynia, smaller ovoid always pointless
perigynia. From C. Jlaccosperma it differs in its smaller ovoid always
pointless perigynia. C. jlaccosperma and C. grisea agree in their ob-
long and pointed or almost rostrate fruit. The closest affinity of C.
glaucodea is probably with C. granulans.

Carex Sartwelliana, Olney, n. sp. : spica subelongata castanea
6 spiculis 5-6 (rarius 4- 8) cylindricis densifloris erectis, terminali
mascula, reliquis foemineis castaneis sub-squarrosis sessilibus approx-
imatis ; bracteis evaginatis, inferioribus culmura superantibus vel infima
subinde sterili reraota vaginata ; stigmatibus 3 ; perigyniis castaneis
triquetris rostratis (ore integro oblique secto) undique pubescentibus
squama ciHata et pubescente lanceolata cuspidata vel ovata castanea
nervo viridi latioribus et longioribus ; achenio perigynio conformi tri-
quetro angulis costatis. — California, Yosemite Valley, alt. 6,000 feet,
Brewer, 1,636 ; Bolander, 6,221. Culms 2-3 feet high, glaucous, and
whole plant pubescent, the sheaths of the leaves densely so. Allied to
C scahrata, Schw. and G. amplifolia, Boott ; the three species forming
a natural group. From the latter it may be distinguished by its shorter
fertile spikes and densely tomentose or pubescent perigynia : from the
former by the shape of its almost nerveless perigynia. — The C. Sart-
wellii of Dewey being only G. disticha, the present well-marked species
is now dedicated to the memory of the late Dr. Henry P. Sartwell,
of Penn Yan, New York, who has done so very much for the
Caricology of the United States.

Carex cinnamomea, Olney, n. sp. : spicis 3-5 erectis, terminali
mascula fusiformi cinnamomea longe pedunculata, reliquis foemineis
cylindraceis densifloris, superioribus appi-oximatis, inferioribus longe
exserte pedunculatis basi attenuatis laxifloris, infima remota ; bracteis
vaginalis culmo longioribus vel brevioribus ; stigmatibus 3 ; perigyniis
ellipticis triquetris viridibus rostellatis glabris nervatis (ore bidentato
intus ciliato) squama ovata vel obtusa membranacea spice ciliata cinna-
momea medio viridi latioribus longioribus ; achenio triquetro obovato.
— Swamps of Red Mountain, Humboldt Co., California, Bolander,
6477. Culms 12--2 feet long, erect, with short and narrow scabrous
leaves, the rudimentary ones dark purple. The species belongs to the
Debilis group, agreeing w^ith G. Sidlivantii, Boott, in having erect fir-
tile spikes, and with G. glabra, Boott, in its sharply two-toothed, prom-
inently nerved, and smooth perigynia.

S. T. 0.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 39T

*^* Garce Posteriores, 1868.
PARRYELLA, Tori\ & Gray, Nov. Gen. Leguminosearum.

Caiyx obconicus, 5-dentatus, dentibus brevibus sequalibus. Petala
nulla. Stamina 10 : filamenta ima basi calycis inserta, libera : antherae
uniformes. Ovarium biovulatum ; stylus crassiusculus e calyce leviter
exsertus, apice uncinatus ; stigma glandula^forme laterale EysenhardticB.
Legumen indehiscens, oblique obovatum, grosse glandulosum, basi at-
tenuata calyce persistente stipatum, semine solitario ovali repletum.
Cotyledones oblongce, foliaceaj ; radicula inflexa. — Frutex Novo-Mex-
icanus, parvus, ramosissimus, fere glaber; ramis tenuibus scopariis foliis-
que parce glanduloso-punctatis ; foliolis plurijugis cum imparl filifor-
mibus canaliculatis petiolulatis ; stipulis stipellisque nullis vel ad
glandulas parvas reductis ; floribus pusillis in spicis terminalibus.

Paryella filifolia. — New Mexico, along the Rio Grande be-
low Albuquerque, Dr. C. C. Parry. Flowers barely a line and a half
in length ; the turgid Psoralea-VikQ legume 3 or 4 lines long, not wrin-
kled, smooth, but beset with large yellowish glands in the manner of
Dalea^ its base only covered with the turbinate persistent calyx. Fila-
ments and pubescent style barely exserted. Although the stamens are
distinct to the bjtse, yet this is evidently a true Psoraleaceous plant, and
closely related to Eysenhardtia ; but not to be confounded either with
that genus or Amorpha. The preoccupation of the name Parrya in
behalf of the arctic navigator need not frustrate the natural desire that
our Dr. Parry's name should be commemorated in a generic type
of his own discovery, inhabiting some of the wide western regions
which he has so faithfully explored during the past twenty years.

Dalea Parryi, Torr. & Gray : suffruticosa, tenuiter puberula ;
ramis gracilibus difFusis mox glabris ; foliolis 7-11-jugis obcordatis
vel obovatis emarginatis (1J--2 lin. longis) parce grossius glanduloso-
punctatis ; spicis longe pedunculatis elongatis multifloris demum laxis ;
calyce sericeo-canescente ad medium usque 5-fido, lobis 4 oblongis
obtusis, infirao lanceolato acuto pauUo longiore ; corolla saturate vio-
laceo ; leguraine glabello. D. divaricata var. cinerea, supra, p. 335.
— Gravelly hills near Fort Mohave, Dr. J. G. Cooper, and lower
down on the Colorado, near the mouth of Williams River, Dr. C. C.
Parry. The specimens of the latter are smoother as to the foliage, and
therefore agreeing in this respect with Bentham's D. divaricata of
Lower California ; but the silky-canescent calyx (fully a line and a

398 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

half long) and the apparently larger corolla also (fully 4 lines long
when well developed, and richly colored) lead to the conclusion that
this is a distinct species.

Astragalus Auizonicus : {Micrantki?) procumbens, sufFrutes-
cens, pube strigulosa canescens ; stipulis parvulis petioli basi adnatis ;
foliolis 5 - 7-jngis linearibus acutis ; spicis in pedunculo folium super-
ante sparse plurifloris ; floribus subsessilibus ; calycis dentibus subu-
latis tubo carapanulato ajquilongis ; corolla albida sursum purpurea,
carina apice inflexo producto obtaso ; leguminibus immaturis oblongo-
linearibus estipitatis cano-puberulis pi. m. obcompressis septo completo
bilocellatis pleiospermis. — Arizona, near Camp Grant, April, Dr.
Edward Palmer. Probably same as the plant from Tubac, Dr. Parry,
and Los Nogales, Capt. E. K. Smith, mentioned at the end of my
revision of the genus (p. 234). But Dr. Palmer's specimens are less
white, the calyx with some dark hairs intermixed, and the flowers
smaller ; those in Capt. Smith's specimens are half an inch long, in
both too large to be properly ranked among Micranthi. The inflexed
and almost beak-like but obtuse summit of the keel is nearly as in A.
Sonorce and A. humistratus.

Astragalus (Phaca) Palmeri : cinereo-puberulus, glabratus ;
caule ultrapedali ; stipulis brevissimis ; foliolis 8-13-jugis oblongis ;
spicis in pedunculo folium superante strictis laxius multifloris ; bracteis
subulatis pedicello brevissimo sequalibus ; calycis dentibus subulatis
tubo campanulato fere {squilongis corolla purpureo-cerulea dimidio
brevioribus ; leguminibus arrectis estipitatis puberulis plano-compressis
semi-ovatis, suturis acutis hand introflexis, ventrali medio 5-7-sperma.
— Camp Grant, in Southern Arizona, Dr. Edward Palmer, comra.
En^elmann. Base of the stem not seen. Leaflets 6-9 lines long.
Spike 4-5 inches, flowers 3 lines, legumes half an inch in length.
From the fruit it should be placed with the Homalobi, but the habit is
rather different, and the pod very broad

Astragalus Hornii (Phaca, Injlati) : caule erecto (ut videtur
bipedali) glabro ; stipulis minimis subulatis discretis mox reflexis ;
foliolis multijugis oblongo-linearibus adpresse pilosulis ; pedunculis
folia aquantibus capitato-plurifloris ; floribus fere sessilibus ; calyce
corolla tlavida rectiuscula dimidio brevioribus, dentibus subulatis tubum
brevi-campanulatum suba^quantibus ; leguminibus (pro sectione parvu-
lis) arete capitatis estipitatis brevi-ovatis acuminatis pilosis inflatis
10 - lo-spermis. — Near Fort Tejon, or in Owen's Valley, Tulare Co.,

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JUNE 11, 1867. 399

in S. E. California, Dr. G. H. Horn, 1863. — This belongs to the sub-
division which comprises A. macrodon (of which the fruit is still un-
known) and A. Douglasii. It is remarkable for the ca[)itate flowers,
rather few ovules, and very pointed, ovate-acuminate, crowded pods,
which are barely two thirds of an inch in length.

Lathyrus sulphureus, W. H. Brewer {L. ochroleucus'^ Torr. in
Bot. Whippl., p. 21, non Hook.) : caulibus acute angulatis ; foliolis
8-12 oblongis vel ovato- seu oblongo-lanceolatis subcoriaceis rigidis
(lin. 6-18 longis) reticulatis ; stipulis semisaggitatis sensim acumin-
atis vel acutissimis ; pedunculis folium ada3quantibus plurifloris ; flori-
bus brevibus (semipoUicaribus) ; calycis dentibus valde ina^qualibus ;
corolla sulphurea obtusissima, vexillo alas carinamque latam semi-
rotundatam tantum asquantibus. — In woods, &c., along the foot-hills of
the Sierra Nevada, from several collectors. Variously confused with
L. ochroleucus, venosus, &c. Apparently the color of the flowers alone
has caused it to be referred to the former, and these are not " yellowish
white," but truly " sulphur-yellow." The limb of the keel is almost as
wide as long.

Cassia Covesii : pube brevi sericea subnitente undique incana ;
caule 1-2-pcdali e radice perenni ; stipulis setaceis ; foliolis 2-3-
jugis ellipticis basi in^equalibus mucrone cuspidatis, glandula cum
stipite tomentoso setacea inter omnia paria ; racemis corymbosis pluri-
floris ; legumine pollicari brevi-oblongo fere recto tumido canescente
pedicello pauUo longiore seminibus horizontalibus farcto, valvis sub-
marginatis. — Camp Grant, and south of Prescott, Arizona, Dr. Elliott
Coues (to whom the species is dedicated) and Dr. Edward Palmer.
" Root used by the Indians as a cathartic. Flowers bright orange-
yellow." In aspect, foliage, and flowers very like C. Lindheimeriana,
except that there are never more than 3 pairs of leaflets ; and the
legume is very different, resembling that of C. hauhinioides and G.
Rcemeriana, but more turgid ; the oval seeds apparently horizontal.

PoTENTiLLA (Comarum) depauperata, Engelm. MSS. : pilosula,
erecta ; foliis pinnatisectis ; foliolis lineai'i-lanceolatis, panicula pluri-
flora; sepalis purpurascentibus e basi lata attenuato-subulatis acces-
soria angusto-subulata bis excedentibus ; pefalis parvis linearibus atro-
purpureis ; staminibus 5 ; carpellis 2 in receptaculo longe villoso.
— Williams Mountain, Western New Mexico, A. L. Anderson. " A
remarkable species, connecting, as it does, Ivesia with the section
Coniarum." G. Engelmann.

400 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

CEnothera Whitneyi, p. 340, is evidently Godetia grandijlora,
Lindl. Bot. Reg. 28, t. 61 ; but it may retain this name in CEnothera
on account of the old (E. grandijlora, Ait.

Lewisia BRACHf calyx, Engelm. MSS. : foliis spathulatis vel sub-
linearibus ; scapo baud articulate nudo (ima basi tantum bibracteolato) ;
calyce herbaceo decussatim 4-sepalo (sepalis ovatis) petalis 7-9 cune-
ato-obovatis 2 - 3-plo brevioribus ; staminibus 10-15; stigmatibus
5-7 stylo breviore. — W. New Mexico, Dr. Newberry. Fort Whip-
ple, Arizona, Doctors Coues and Palmer ; and Utah, Dr. Brewer, in
herb. Engelmann. Plant with the habit of Talinum pygmoeum and
Calandrinia acaulis, but necessarily associated with Lewisia on account
of the number of the sepals and the dehiscence of the capsule (circum-
sissile at base) ; yet too closely related to Calandrinia. Flowers less
than an inch long, " fragrant ; petals white with purple veins." Coty-
ledons incumbent ; those of L. rediviva are figured in Bot. Beechey,
probably incorrectly, as accumbent. G. Englemann.

Leucothoe Davisi^, Torr. MSS. : Eideucothoe ; foliis elliptico-
oblongis utrinque obtusis tenuissime serrulatis breviter petiolatis ;
racemis terminalibus laxifloris folia longe superantibus ; sepalis ovato-
lanceolatis cum bi'acteolis bracteisque subsearioso - albidis ; antherte
loculis bimucronatis. — Nevada Co., near Eureka, California, Miss N.
J. Davis ; one out of a fine and beautifully prepared collection of plants
recently made by her in that district. In mode of growth, inflores-
cence, and flowers, this interesting new AVestern representative of the
genus accords with Leucothoe proper (as characterized in Gray's
Manual), except that the racemes are terminal and much surpassing the
leaves. These are one and a half or two inches long.

Phacelia (Eutoca) hydrophylloides, Torr. MSS. : humilis,
e rhizomate ramoso repente multicaulis ; foliis ovatis subrhombeis ob-
longisve obtusis inciso-paucidentatis lobatisve nunc lobis infimis fere
discretis lyratis utrinque nitenti-sericeis, petiolo laminam aequante
caule et inflorescentia hispidulis ; cyma terminal! parva conferta ;
corolla C£erulea campanulata calyce pauUo longiore, appendicibus latis-
simis maximis ; genitalibus exsertis ; placentis 6 - 8 - ovulatis ; cap-
sula oblonga acuta calycem ad^quante. — Ebbett's Pass, and near
Lake Tenaya, 8 - 9,000 feet, Brewer. Open woods along the trail of
the Yosemite, from 8,000 down to 5,000 feet, Bolander. Stems 3-6
inches high.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES: JUNE U, 1867. 401

DRAPERIA, Torr. Nov. Gen. Hydrophyllearum.

Calyx e sepalis 5 angustissimis. Corolla tubuloso-infundibuli-
formis, limbo 5-Iobo. Stamina 5, ina^quilonga ; filamentis inappendi-
culatis corollaj tubo intequaliter adnatis. Stylus filiformis, apice
bifidus ; stigmata capitellata. Ovarium biloculare : ovula in loculis
gemina, anatropa, ex apice fere placentae nerviformis pendula. Cap-
sula globosa, subdidyma, membranacea, loculicida, valvis a dissepi-
mento utrinque dispermo solutis. Semina loculos replentia, facie con-
cava medio carinata. — Herba multicaulis, humilis, sericeo-pilosa ;
caulibus diffusis basi lignescentibus ; foliis oppositis ovatis penniveniis
iutegerrimis longius petiolatis ; cymis scorpioideis nudis tenuiter pedun-
culatis ; floribus ebracteatis confertis pallide purpureis. Genus inter
Namam et Phaceliani quasi medium insigne.

Draperia systtla, Torr. Nama systyla, Gray in Proceed.
Amer. Acad. 6, p. 37. California, Lobb. ; in the Yosemite Valley,
Brewer, Torrey, Bolander ; Northern California, A. Wood; Nevada Co.,
Miss N. J. Davis. This genus, particularly interesting as a transition
from the Hydrolece to the proper Hydrophyllacece, is dedicated to Profes-
sor John W. Draper of New York, author of a Treatise on the Forces
which produce the Organization of Plants, and of other distinguished
physiological and philosophical works. It was first detected by Mr.
Lobb (station not recorded), and briefly characterized by Dr. Gray
as a Nama, without examination of the interior of the ovary of the
fragment sent to him by Dr. Hooker. With the corolla and nearly the
androecium of that genus it combines the gynaicium and seeds of
Phacelia proper, except that the ovary and pod are two-celled, and the
opposite leaves are peculiar. The embryo has not been found, even
in apparently full-grown seeds. J. Torrey.

Lepturus Bolanderi, Thurber, MSS. : pusillus ; culmo basi va-
ginato superne folio solitario lineari instructo ; ligula elongata acuta;
vaginis laxis striatis ; spica solitaria basi vaginata ; spiculis unifloris ;
glumis transversis subaequalibus flore vix longioribus ; paleis sub-
aequalibus, inferiore basi breviter barbata apice eroso-dentato longius
aristata. — Culmi 1 - 5-pollicares, siepius ad nodum solitarium genicu-
late Folium semipollicare. Palea inferior scabra, costa valida in
aristum palea ipsa dimidio breviorem producta. — Very distinct from
L. panicidatus, which is also found in California. Dry gravelly soil,
Russian River Valley, California, Bolander. G. Thurbei*.

VOL. VII. 51

402 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Five liundred and eighty-fifth Meeting.

September 10, 1867. — Adjourned Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Dr. J. Mason Warren and Dr. James Jack-
son, of the Resident Fellows ; of Jeremiah Day, former Presi-
dent of Yale College, of the Associate Fellows ; and of Sir
William Lawrence, Augustus Boeckh, and Michael Faraday, of
the Foreign Honorary Members.

The following paper was presented : —

Upon the Logic of Mathematics. By C. S. Peirce.

Part I.

The object of the present paper is to show that there are certain
general propositions from which the truths of mathematics follow syl-
logistically, and that these propositions may be taken as definitions
of the objects under the consideration of the mathematician without
involving any assumption in reference to experience or intuition.
That there actually are such objects in experience or pure intuition is
not in itself a part of pure mathematics.

Let us first turn our attention to the logical calculus of Boole. I
have shown in a previous communication to the Academy, that this cal-
culus involves eight operations, viz. Logical Addition, Arithmetical
Addition, Logical Multiplication, Arithmetical Multiplication, and the
processes inverse to these.

Definitions.

\. Identity, a == b expresses the two facts that any a is i and any
b is a.

2. Logical Addition, a -\j- b denotes a member of the class which
contains under it all the a's and all the b's, and nothing else.

3. Logical Multiplication, a , b denotes only whatever is both a and b.

4. Zero denotes nothing, or the class without extent, by which we mean
that if a is any member of any class, a -|t 0 is a.

5. Unity., denotes being, or the class without content, by which we
mean that, if a is a member of any class, a is a , 1 .

6. Arithmetical Addition, a -|- i, if a , 6 = 0 is the same as a -|r b,
but, if a and b are classes which have any extent in common, it
is not a class.

Condition 1.

((

2.

«

3.

a

4.

a

5.

a

6.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 10, 1867. 403

7. Arithmetical Multiplication, a b represents an event when a and h
are events only if these events are independent of each other, in
which case a b==a ,b. By the events being independent is meant
that it is possible to take two series of terms, A^, A^, A^, &c., and
^2> -^2 J -^3 5 <^c., such that the following conditions will be satisfied.
(Here x denotes any individual or class, not nothing; ^,„, A^,
B„^, 5„, any members of the two series of terms, and 2!! A, 2^B,
2^ {A, B) logical sums of some of the A„'s, the B^'s, and the
(^„, i?„)'s respectively).

No ^ni is A,^.
No B^^ is .Z?„.
x = 2:{A,B)

a==2^A.

b=2:B.

Some A^ is B^^.

From these definitions a series of theorems follow syllogistically, the
proofs of most of which are omitted on account of their ease and want
of interest.

Theorems.

I.
li a =.b, then b =p a.

II.
If a == 5, and b == c, then a =^ c.

III.

If a -\r b == c, then b -\r a ■==■ c.

IV.

If a -|r S =F ^ ^i^d b -\r c=p n and a -\r n z=:z x, then m -fr c = x.
Corollary. — These last two theorems hold good also for arithmeti-
cal addition.

V.

If a -f- i = c and a' -\- b ==: c, then a = a', or else there is nothing
not b.

This theorem does not hold with logical addition. But from defini-
tion 6 it follows that

No 05 is 6 (supposing there is any a)

No a' is b (supposing there is any a')

404

PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

neither of which propositions would be implied in the corresponding
formulae of logical addition. Now from definitions 2 and 6,

Any a is c

.*• Any a is c not b

But again from definitions 2 and 6 we have

Any c not h is a' (if there is any not h)

.\ Any a is a' (if there is any not V)

And in a similar way it could be shown that any a' is a (under the
same supposition). Hence by definition 1,

a == a' if there is anything not h.

Scholium. — In arithmetic this proposition is limited by the suppo-
sition that b is finite. The supposition here though similar to that is
not quite the same.

If a , 5 =p c, then b ,a = c.

VI.

VII.

If a ,b = m and b ,c == n and a ,n = x, then m, c = x.

VIII.

If m , n == b and a -{r m = u and a -\r n = v and a -\r b == x,
then u, V == X.

IX.

If m -\r n ■== b and a,m =^ u and a,n == v and a , b == x, then

u -\r V = X.

The proof of this theorem may be given as an example of the
proofs of the rest.

It is required then (by definition 3) to prove three propositions,
viz.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES .* SEPTEMBER 10, 1867. 405

1st. That any u is x.
2d. That any v is x.
3d. That any' a; not u is v.

First Proposition.
Since m == a , w by definition 3

Any u is m,
and since m -fr ^ = ^ by definition 2

Any m is b,
whence Any m is ^,

But since u^=z a ,m by definition 3

Any u is a,
whence Any u is both a and h.

But since a , & = x by definition 3

Whatevei" is both a and 6 is a;
whence Any m is a?.

Second Proposition.
This is proved like the first.

Third Proposition.
Since a ,m =: ic by definition 3,

Whatever is both a and m is m.

or "Whatever is not u is not both a and m.

or Whatever is not u is either not a or not m.

or Whatever is not ic and is a is not m.

But since a ,b == x hj definition 3

406 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Any X is a,
whence Any x not u is not u and is a,

whence Any x not u is not m.

But since a , 5 = x by definition 3

Any x\%h,
whence Any x not u is 5,

Any x not u is & not m.
But since m -jr ?i = ^ by definition 2

Any 6 not m is n,
whence Any x not u is n,

and therefore Any x not i« is both a and m.

But since a , re == v by definition 3

Whatever is both a and u is y,
whence Any x not m is r.

Corollary 1. — This proposition readily extends itself to arithmetical
addition.

Corollary 2. — The converse propositions produced by transposing
the last two identities of Theorems viii. and ix. are also true.

Corollary 3. — Theorems vi., vii., and ix. hold also with arithmeti-
cal multiplication. This is sufiiciently evident in the case of theorem
VI., because by definition 7 we have an additional premise, namely,
that a and h are independent, and an additional conclusion which is
the same as that premise.

In order to show the extension of the other theorems, I shall begin
with the following lemma. If a and b are independent, then corre-
sponding to every pair of individuals, one of which is both a and b, there
is just one pair of individuals one of which is a and the other b ; and
conversely, if the pairs of individuals so correspond, a and b are inde-
pendent. For, suppose a and b independent, then, by definition 7, con-
dition 3, every class {A„, B„) is an individual. If then A^ denotes any

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 10, 1867. 407

A^ which is a, and ^^ any i?„, which is h, by condition 6 (A^, 5„) and
(Jnj, 5b) both exist, and by conditions 4 and 5 the former is any indi-
vidual a, and the latter any individual b. But given this pair of indi-
viduals, both of the pair (A^, B^) and (^,„, B,,) exist by condition 6.
But one individual of this pair is both a and b. Hence the pairs cor-
respond, as stated above. Next, suppose a and b to be any two classes.
Let the series of A^& be a and not-a ; and let the series of 5„'s be
all individuals separately. Then the first five conditions can always
be satisfied. Let us suppose, then, that the sixth alone cannot be
satisfied. Then A^ and B^ may be taken such that {A^, B^) is noth-
ing. Since Jp and B^ are supposed both to exist, there must be two
individuals (A^, B^) and (A^, B^) which exist. But there is no cor-
responding pair (A„„ B^) and (A^, B^). Hence, no case in which the
sixth condition cannot be satisfied simultaneously with the first five is
a case in which the pairs rightly correspond ; or, in other words, every
case in which the pairs correspond rightly is a case in which the sixth
condition can be satisfied, provided the first five can be satisfied. But
the first five can always be satisfied. Hence, if the pairs correspond as
stated, the classes are independent.

In order to show that Theorem vir. may be extended to arithmetical
multiplication, we have to prove that if a and b, b and c, and a and
(b,c), are independent, then (a, b) and c are independent. Let s de-
note any individual. Corresponding to every s with (a, b, c), there is
an a and (b, c). Hence, corresponding to every s with s and with
{a, b, c) (which is a particular case of that pair), there is an s with a
and with (b, c). But for every s with {b, c) there is a & with c ; hence,
corresponding to every a with s and with (6, e), there is an a with b
and with c. Hence, for every s with s and with (a, b, c) there is an a
with b and with c. For evei-y a with b there is an s with (a, b) ; hence,
for every a with b and with c, there is an s with (a, b) and c. Hence,
for every s with s and with (a, b, c) there is an s with (a, b) and with
c. Hence, for every s with (a, b, c) there is an (a, b) with c. The
converse could be proved in the same way. Hence, &c.

Theorem ix. holds with arithmetical addition of whichever sort the
multiplication is. For we have the additional premise that " No m is
n " ; whence since " any u is tn " and " any v is n" " no u is v,"
which is the additional conclusion.

Corollary 2, so far as it relates to Theorem ix., holds with arithmet-
ical addition and multiplication. For, since no m is n, every pair, one

408 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

of which is a and either m or », is either a pair, one of which is a and
m, or a pair, one of which is a and n, and is not both. Hence, since
for every pair one of which is a and m, there is a pair one of which is
a and the other m, and since for every pair one of which is a, n
there is a pair one of which is a and the other n ; for every pair
one of which is a and either m or 7^, there is either a pair one of Which
is a and the other m, or a pair one of which is a and the other w, and
not both ; or, in other words, there is a pair one of which is a and the
other either m or n.

[It would perhaps have been better to give this complicated proof
in its full syllogistic form. But as my principal object is merely to
show that the various theorems could be so proved, and as there can
be little doubt that if this is true of those which relate to arithmetical
addition it is true also of those which relate to arithmetical multiplica-
tion, I have thought the above proof (which is quite apodeictic) to be
sufficient. The reader should be careful not to confound a proof which
needs itself to be experienced with one which requires experience of
the object of proof.]

X.

If a J = c and a' b ==. c, then a == a', or no h exists.

This does not hold with logical, but does with arithmetical multipli-
cation.

For if a is not identical with a', it may be divided thus

a =■ a , a' -\- a , a'

if «' denotes not a'. Then

a,h=: {a ,a') ,b -\- (a ,a') , h

and by the definition of independence the last term does not vanish
unless (a , a')-==0 or all a is a' ; but since a,b =1 a' ,b =p {11 ,a') ,b -\-
(^a , a') , b, this term does vanish, and, therefore, only a is a', and in a
similar way it could be shown that only a' is a.

XI.

1 -|^ « = 1.

This is not true of arithmetical addition, for since by definition 7,

1 a; , 1 == a; 1

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: SEPTEMBER 10, 1867. 409

by Theorem ix.

x,(l-\-a)==x(l-\-a)==xl-\-xa==x-\-xa

Whence x a == 0, while neither x nor a is zero, which, as will
appear directly, is impossible.

XII.

0,a = 0

Proof. — For call 0 ,a == x. Then by definition 3
x belongs to the class zero.
.'. by definition 4 a: = 0.

Corollary 1. — The same reasoning applies to arithmetical multi-
plication.

Corollary 2. — From Theorem x. and the last corollary it follows
that if a 6 == 0, either a == 0 or 5 = 0.

XIII.

a ,a == a.

XIV.

a -\r a = a.

These do not hold with ai'ithmetical operations.

General Scholium. — This concludes the theorems relating to the
direct operations. As the inverse operations have no peculiar logical
interest, they are passed over here.

In order to prevent misapprehension, I will remark that I do not
undertake to demonstrate the principles of logic themselves. Indeed,
as I have shown in a previous paper, these principles considered as
speculative truths are absolutely empty and indistinguishable. But
what has been pi'oved is the maxims of logical procedure, a certain
system of signs being given.

The definitions given above for the processes which I have termed
arithmetical plainly leave the functions of these operations in many
cases uninterpreted. Thus if we write

VOL. VII. 52

410 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN. ACADEMY

a -\- b == h -\- a

a-\-(bJrc) = (a-\-b)-[-c

b c == c b

{ab) c =■ a (b c)

a (m -\- ii) ==^ a m -\- a n

Ave have a series of identities whose truth or falsity is entirely un-
determinable. In order, therefore, yi<//y to define those operations, we
will say that all propositions, equations, and identities which are in
the general case left by the former definitions undetermined as to trulh
shall be true, provided they are so in all iuterpretable eases.

On Arithmetic.

Equality is a relation of which identity is a species.

If we were to leave equality without further defining it, then by the
last scholium all the formal rules of arithmetic would follow from it.
And this completes the central design of this paper, as far as arith-
metic is concerned.

Still it may be well to consider the matter a little further. Imagine,
then, a particular case under Boole's calculus, in which the letters ai'e
no longer terms of first intention, but terms of second intention, and
that of a special kind. Genus, species, difference, property, and acci-
dent, are the well-known terms of second intention. These relate par-
ticularly to the comprehension of first intentions ; that is, they refer
to different sorts of predication. Genus and species, however, have at
least a secondary reference to the extension of first intentions. Now
let the letters, in the particular application of Boole's calculus now
supposed, be terms of second intention which relate exclusively to the
extension of first intentions. Let the differences of the characters of
things and events be disregarded, and let the letters signify only the
differences of classes as wider or narrower. In other words, the only
logical comprehension which the letters considered as terms will have
is the greater or less divisibility of the classes. Thus, n in another
case of Boole's calculus might, for example, denote " New England
State " ; but in the case now supposed, all the characters which make
these States what they are being neglected, it would signify only what

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : SEPTEMBER 10, 1867. 411

essentially belongs to a class which has the same relations to higher
and lower classes which the class of New England States has, — that
is, a collection of" six.

In this case, the sign of identity will receive a special meaning.
For, if m denotes what essentially belongs to a class of the rank of
"sides of a cube," then m=pn will imply, not that every New Eng-
land State is a side of a cube, and conversely, but that whatever
essentially belongs to a class of the numerical rank of "■ ISew England
States " essentially belongs to a class of the rank of " sides of a cube,
and conversely. Identity of tliis particular sort may be termed equality,
and be denoted by the sign = .* Moreover, since the numerical rank
of a logical gum depends on the identity or diversity (in first intention)
of the integrant parts, and since the numerical rank of a logical
product depends on the identity or diversity (in first intention) of parts
of the factors, logical addition and multiplication can have no place in
this system. Arithmetical addition and multiplication, however, will not
be destroyed. a,b = c will imply that whatever essentially belongs at
once to a class of the rank of a, and to another independent class of
the rank of b belongs essentially to a class of the rank of c, and con-
versely, a -\- b = c implies that whatever belongs essentially to a
class which is the logical sum of two mutually exclusive classes of the
ranks of a and b belongs essentially to a class of the rank of c, and
conversely. It is plain that from these defi^nitions the same theorems
follow as from those given above. Zero and unity will, as before, de-
note the classes which haye respectively no extension and no compre-
hension ; only the comprehension here spoken of is, of course, that
comprehension which alone belongs to letters in the system now con-
sidered, that is, this or that degree of divisibility ; and therefore unity
will be what belongs essentially to a class of any rank independent of
its divisibility. These two classes alone are common to the two sys-
tems, because the first intentions of these alone determine, and are de-
termined by, their second intentions. Finally, the laws of the Boolian

* Thus, in one point of view, identity is a species of equality, and, in another,
the reverse is the case. This is because the Being of the copula may be consid-
ered on the one hand (with De Morgan) as a special description of " inconvertible,
transitive rehition," while, on the other hand, all relation may be considered as a
special determination of being. If a Hegelian should be disposed to see a contra-
diction here, an accurate analysis of the matter will show him that it is only a
verbal one.

412 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

calculus, in its ordinary form, are identical with those of this other so
far as the latter apply to zero and unity, because every class, in its
first intention, is either without any extension (that is, is nothing), or
belongs essentially to that rank to which every class belongs, whether
divisible or not.

These considerations, together with those advanced on page 293
(§ 12) of this volume, will, I hope, put the relations of logic and
arithmetic in a somewhat clearer light than heretofore.

Five liuiidred and eiglity-sixtli Meeting.

October 8, 1867. — Monthly Meeting.

The Corresponding Secretary in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read letters relative to ex-
changes ; also a letter from Major-General Sabine in acknowl-
edgment of his election as Foreign Honorary Member of the
Academy.

The Corresponding Secretary announced the recent decease
of Hon. Charles G. Loring, of the Resident Fellows.

Dr. C. G. Putnam presented the meteorological observations
of the late Dr. Jackson.

Professor Levering presented for Professor Treadwell the
following paper : —

Corrections to a Paper " On the Comparative Streno;th of Can-
non of Modern Construction,^^ published in Vol. YH. of the
Proceedings of the Academy. By Daniel Treadwell.

In a paper " On the Comparative Strength of Cannon of Modern
Construction," written by me in January, 1866, communicated to the
Academy in September of the same year, and published in the last
volume (the seventh) of our Proceedings, I, by some inadvertence
for which I am now unable to account, in computing the force of the
600 pounder, or 13-3-inch coil gun, as constructed by Armstrong, de-
scribed it as capable of bearing a charge of 100 pounds of powder.

Although tliis quantity of powder was no doubt fired in it, I know
not how many times, yet it ought not by any means to be rated as its
service charge ; and I recognize it as an oversight in me to have taken

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : OCTOBER 8, 1867. 418

it as such. In fact, I have no belief that more than 70 pounds of
powder should be assigned as the service charge of the Armstrong
13*3-inch gun ; as no gun can be trusted for long-continued firing with
more than y^^g- of the largest charge of powder which it may have
withstood, and no cast-iron gun with so much as this.

I have not the data necessary to determine accurately the velocity, and
consequently the force, which this reduction of the charge of powder
must make in the shot ; but if we take the force of the shot in the
direct ratio of the weight of the charge of powder, we shall have 261,
instead of 372-8, as representing the " number of pounds of shot raised
one foot by each pound of metal in the gun," as these numbers are in
the ratio of 70 to 100.

I am not able to state what has constituted the greatest charge of
powder borne by Armstrong's gun of 12 tons, carrying a shot of 300
pounds ; but reducing the charge of 60 pounds, as given by me in the
ratio of 70 to 100, we have a charge of 42 instead of 60 pounds of
powder, and a consequent reduction of the force of the gun from 392
"foot pounds" to 273 "foot pounds."

I have thought it the more necessary to make this correction, as in
a computation of the force of the Dahlgren and Rodman guns, given in
the same paper to which this is a correction, the quantity of powder
then understood by me from all that had been published by govern-
ment authority as constituting a service charge was taken as one of
the factors in assigning the measure of the force to those guns. It is
now claimed, however, to have been discovered that the Rodman gun is
capable of withstanding much larger charges of powder than were
authorized to be used when my paper was communicated to the Acad-
emy.

Professor Lovering made the following remarks on the
Optical Method of studying Sound, illustrating the subject
by many experiments : —

When the science of Acoustics is studied by means of the ear ex-
clusively, we judge of the process simply by the result, that is, by the
sensation. The optical method of investigation often gives us an in-
sight into the process itself. Sound begins with a stationary vibration
in the sonorous body ; it is propagated by a progressive undulation ;
and it ends, physically and mechanically considered, in a vibration of
some one of the three thousand nervous filaments discovered by Corti in

414 PROCEEDINaS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

the labyrinth of the human ear. Whether we regard the sound,
therefore, at its origin, in its promulgation, or in the sensation, it is
nothing but a vibration ; and vibration is motion, and motion is the
subject of vision. So that to see sound is only to see the motions
which cause it. The only difficulty in seeing sound lies in the fact
that the acoustic vibrations are upon a microscopic scale of magnitude,
and, by their quick succession, the sepax-ate eiFects of individual vibra-
tions blend into one sensation, in the eye as well as in the ear, by vir-
tue of what is called in both cases the persistency of the impression
on the organ of sensation. To overcome" the first difficulty a beam of
light is reflected from the vibrating body, or a mirror attached to it,
which moves m angle twice as fast as the body itself, while the motion
in arc may be amplified to any extent by increasing the length of the
beam of light. The second difficulty is surmounted by reflecting the
vibrations of the sonorous body itself, or some more visible effect
which they originate, from a revolving mirror. By this device of
looking at the image of the body, instead of the body itself, its vibra-
tions, which coexist in space, are disentangled from each other, and
individual vibrations, hundreds of which succeed each other in a
single second of time, are translated into a long belt of space, in which
even two successive ones do not overlap.

The optical method of studying sound embraces, in general, Sa-
vart's contrivance for discovei'ing and exhibiting the nodal lines of
plates by means of sand sprinkled over their surface, the investigation
of the nodes and bellies of sounding strings by mounted riders, and of
columns of air by a little drumhead suspended in the pipes, and, more
recently, Lissajous's mirrors attached to tuning-forks, etc., Kcenig's
flames played upon by vibrating columns of air and reflected in a re-
volving mirror, and, finally, Melde's strings excited by the sympathetic
vibration of an attached tuning-fork or bell.

The present communication is confined, however, to Koenig's re-
flected flames, in which are seen the individual vibrations of an organ-
pipe ; by which can be beautifully demonstrated to the eye : First, —
That the number of vibrations increases with the audible pitch ; Second,

— That coexisting vibrations produce maxima and minima of motion
corresponding to the beats whicli are recognized by the ear ; Third,

— That one column of air will respond, in sym|)athetic vibration, to
another, when there is an agreement between their fundamental notes
or some of their harmonics ; Fourth, That two unison-pipes, brought

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : OCTOBER 8, 1867. 415

into intimate neighborhood, will move so that the vibrations of the air
cross one another and produce silence, as Savart showed experi-
mentally in the case of pendulums of equal length vibrating in com-
pany.

This peculiar case of unison-pipes I have made a subject of special
investigation. In complex cases, it would doubtless be impossible so
to arrange the voices and instruments that the total volume of sound
should be multiplied in the same ratio as the number of performers.
The effect of a large chorus or a large orchestra will disappoint expec-
tation, from the unavoidable interferences of sound-waves. But, in
the simple case of two unison-pipes, can they be prevented from
silencing each other ? The remedy for the evil would be : First, —
To sacrifice in a measure the perfection of the unison ; or, Second, —
To place them at a distance beyond each other's influence ; or. Third,
— To separate them by one half of the wave-length which propagates
a sound of the given pitch, or by some odd multiple of that quantity.
The latter remedy would answer for auditors in the direction of the
line which united the two pipes, though not for the audience generally.
In studying the effect of position, I have made the following experi-
ments, the ear being the judge ; or the eye, looking at the broken
ribbon of light in the revolving mirror.
I. The pipes are placed side by side.

1. With similar ends together, they silence each other.

2. With dissimilar ends together, they silence each other.

II. The pipes are placed with their axes upon the same straight
line.

1. If similar ends are together, whichever of the two ends

be selected, they silence one another.

2. If dissimilar ends are together, they silence each other.

III. The pipes are placed at right angles to one another, with one
extremity of each pipe at the angle.

1. If the ends that are played are at the angle, the pipes

re-enforce each other.

2. If the other ends are at the angle, they tend to silence

each other.

3. If dissimilar ends are at the angle, they re-enforce each

other.

416 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

In all these experiments, the pipes employed were open at botli
ends.

Now that science is in possession of this delicate optical method,
which requires for its success no nice musical ear, other problems,
heretofore settled by assumption, may be brought within the range of
demonstration.

Five hundred and eighty-seventh. Meeting.

November 13, 1867. — Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President announced the decease of Professor Mitter-
maier, of the Foreign Honorary Members.

Professor Levering; announced that Vol. IX. Part I. of the
Memoirs, was ready for distribution.

Professor Edward C. Pickering was elected a Resident Fel-
low in Class I. Section 3.

Dr. C. H. F. Peters was elected an Associate Fellow in Class
I. Section 2.

On the motion of Dr. G. E. Ellis, the Rumford Committee
was instructed to collect papers relating to the life of Count
Rumford.

The following paper was presented : —

Upon Logical Comprehension and Extension. By C. S.

Peirce.

§ 1. That these Conceptions are not so Modern as has been repre-
sented.

The historical account usually given of comprehension and ex-
tension is this, " that the distinction, though taken in general
terras by Aristotle, and explicitly announced with scientific precision
by one, at least, of bis Greek commentators, had escaped the marvel-
lous acuteness of the schoolmen, and remained totally overlooked and
forgotten till the publication of the Port Royal Logic." * I would offer

* This is quoted from Baines (Port Royal Logic, 2d ed. p. xxxiii.), who
says that he is indebted to Sir William Hamilton for the information.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: NOVEMBER 13, 1867. 417

the following considerations to show that this interpretation of history
is not exactly true. In the first place, it is said that a distinction was
taken between these attributes, as though they were previously con-
founded. Now there is not the least evidence of this. A German
logician, has, indeed, by a subtle misconception, considered extension as
a species of comprehension, but, to a mind beginning to reflect, no no-
tions seem more unlike. The mental achievement has been the bring-
ing of them into relation to one another, and the conception of them as
factors of the import of a term, and not the separation of them. In
the second place it is correctly said that the doctrine taught by the
Port Royalists is substantially contained in the work of a Greek com-
mentator. That work is no other than Porphyry's Isagoge * ; and there-
fore it would be most surprising if the doctrine had been totally over-
looked by the schoolmen, for whether their acuteness was as marvellous
as Hamilton taught or not, they certainly studied the commentary in
question as diligently as they did the Bible. It would seem, indeed,
that the tree of Porphyry involves the whole doctrine of exten-
sion and comprehension except the names. Nor were the scholastics
without names for these quantities. The partes suhjectives and partes
essentiales are frequently opposed ; and several other synonymes are
mentioned by the Conimbricenses. It is admitted that Porphyry fully
enunciates the doctrine ; it must also be admitted that the passage in
question is fully dealt with and correctly explained by the medieval
commentators. The most that can be said, therefore, is that the doc-
trine of extension and comprehension was not a prominent one in the
medieeval logic, f

* Poi'phyry appears to refer to the doctrine as an ancient one.

t The author of " De Generibus et Speciebus " opposes the integral and diffinitive
wholes. John of Salisbury refers to the distinction of comprehension and exten-
sion, as something "quod fere in omnium ore celebre est, aliud scilicet esse quod
appellativa significant, et aliud esse quod nominant. Nominantur singularia, sed
universalia significantur." (Metalogicus, lib. 2, cap. 20. -Ed. of 1620, p. 111.)

Vincentius Bellovacensis [Speculnm Doctrinale, Lib. III. cap. xi.) has the fol-
lowing : " Si vero quseritur utrum hoc universale ' homo ' sit in quolibet homine
secundum se totum an secundem partem, dicendum est quod secundum se totum,

id est secundum quamlibet sui partem diffinitivam Non autem secundum

quamlibet partem subjectivara." William of Auvergne (Prantl's Geschichte, Vol.
III. p. 77) speaks of "totalitatera istam, qiise est ex partibus rationis seu diffinitionis,
et hae partes sunt genus et differentias ; alio modo partes specie! individua sunt,
quoniam ipsam speciem,cum deeis pr{)edicatur,sibi iavicem quodammodo partiunter."
VOL. VII. 53

418 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

A like degree of historical error is commonly committed in reference to
another point which will come to be treated of in this paper, allied, at
least, as it is most intimately, with the subject of comprehension and ex-
tension, inasmuch as it also is founded on a conception of a term as a
whole composed of parts, — I mean the distinction of clear and distinct.
Hamilton tells us " we owe the discrimination to the acuteness o^
the great Leibniz. By the Cartesians the distinction had not been
taken ; though the authors of the Port Royal Logic came so near that
we may well marvel how they failed explicitly to enounce it." (Lec-
tures on Logic ; Lecture IX.) Now, in fact, all that the Port Royal-
ists say about this matter * is copied from Descartes,t and their
variations from his wording serve only to confuse what in him is
tolerably distinct. As for Leibniz, he himself expressly avows that
the distinction drawn by Descartes is the same as his own. $ Never-
theless, it is very much more clear with Leibniz than with Descartes.
A philosophical distinction emerges gradually into consciousness ; there
is no moment in history before \vhi('h it is altogether unrecognized, and
after which it is perfectly luminous. Before Descartes, the distinction
of confused and distinct had been thoroughly developed, but the difier-
ence between distinctness and clearness is uniformly overlooked.
Scotus distinguishes between conceiving confusedly and conceiving the
confused, and since any obscure concept necessarily includes more
than its proper object, there is always in what is obscurely conceived
a conception of something confused ; but the schoolmen came no nearer
than this to the distinction of Descartes and Leibniz.

§ 2. Of the Different Terms applied to the Quantities of Extension and

Comprehension.

Extension and comprehension are the terms employed by the Port
Royalists. Owing to the influence of Hamilton, intension is now fre-
quently used for comprehension ; but it is liable to be confounded with
intensity, and therefore is an objectionable word. It is derived from
the use of cognate words by Cajetan and other early writers. Exter-
nal undi internal quantity are the terms used by many early Kantians.

If we were to go to later authors, the examples would be endless. See any com-
mentary in Phys. Lib. I.

* Part I. chap. ix. t Principia, Part I. § 45 e/ seq.

\ Eighth Letter to Burnet.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 13, 1867. 419

Scope and ybrce are proposed by De Morgan. Scope in ordinary lan-
guage expresses extension, but force does not so much express com-
prehension as the power of creating a lively representation in the
mind of the person to whom a word or speech is addressed. Mr. J, S.
Mill has introduced the useful verbs denote and connote, which have
become very familiar. It has been, indeed, the opinion of the best
students of the logic of the fourteenth, fifteenth, and sixteenth centuries?
that connotation was in those ages used exclusively for the reference to
a second significate, that is (nearly) for the reference of a relative term
(such as father, brighter, &c.) to the correlate of the object which it pri-
marily denotes, and was never taken in Mill's sense of the reference of a
term to the essential characters implied in its definition. § Mr. Mill has,
however, considered himself entitled to deny this upon his simple au-
thority, without the citation of a single passage from any writer of that
time. After explaining the sense in which he takes the term connote,
he says: "The schoolmen, to whom we are indebted for the greater
part of our logical language, gave us this also, and in this very sense.
For though some of their general expressions countenance the use of
the w^ord in the more extensive and vague acceptation in which it is
taken by Mr. [James] Mill, yet when they had to define it specifically as
a technical term, and to fix its meaning as such, with that admirable
precision which always characterized their definitions, they clearly ex-
plained that nothing was said to be connoted except forms, which
word may generally, in their writings, be understood as synonymous
with attributes." As scholasticism is usually said to come to an end
with Occam, this conveys the idea that connote was commonly em-
ployed by earlier writers. But the celebrated Prantl considers it
conclusive proof that a passage in Occam's Smmna is spurious, that
connotative is there spoken of as a term in frequent use ;* and remarks
upon a passage of Scotus in which connotatum is found, that this con-
ception is here met with for the first time, f The term occurs, how-
ever, in Alexander of Ales, % who makes nomen connotans the
equivalent of appeUatio relativa, and takes the relation itself as the
object of connotare, speaking of creator as connoting the relation of

* Prantl, Geschichte, Vol. III. p. 364.

t Ibid. p. 134. Scotus also uses the term. Quodlib. question 13, article 4.
J Summa Theologica, Part I. question 53.

§ Cf. Morin, Dictionnaire, Tome I. col. 684 ; Chauvin, Lexicon, both editions ;
Eustachiiis, Summa, Part I. Tr. I. qu. 6.

420 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

creator to creature. Occam's Summa * contains a chapter devoted to
the distinction of absolute and connotative names. The whole deserves
to be read, but I have only space to quote the following : " Nomen
autem connotativum est illud quod significat aliquid priraario et aliquid
secundario ; et tale nomen proprie habet ditlinitionem exprimentem
quid nominis et frequenter oportet ponere ahquid illius ditiiuitionis in
recto et aliud in obliquo ; sicut est de hoc nomine album, nam habet
diffinitionem exprimentem quid nominis in qua una dictio ponitur in
recto et alia in obliquo. Unde si queratur quid significat hoc nomen
album, dices quod idem quod ilia oratio tota ' aliquid informatum albe-
dine ' vel ' aliquid habens albedinem ' et patet quod una pars oi'ationis

istius ponitur in recto et alia in obliquo Huiusraodi autem noraina

connotativa sunt omnia noraina concreta prirao modo dicta, et hoc quia
talia concreta signijicant unimi in recto et aliud in obliquo, hoc est
dictu, in diffinilione expriraente quid nominis debet poni unus rectus
significans unam rem et alius obliquus significans aliam rem, sicut pa-
tet de omnibus talibus, iustus, albus, animatus, et sic de aliis. Huius-
modi etiam nomina sunt omnia nomina relatiua, quia semper in eorum
diffinitionibus ponuntur diversa idem diuersis modis vel diuersa signi-
ficautia, sicut patet de hoc nomine simile. Mere autem absoluta sunt
ilia qua3 non significant aliquid principaliter et aliud vel idem secundario,
sed quicquid significatur per tale nomen teque primo significatur sicut
patet de hoc nomine animal." Eckius, in his comment on Petrus His-
panus, has also some extended remarks on the signification of the terra
connote, which agree in the main with those just quoted.f Mr. Mill's
historical statement cannot, therefore, be admitted.

Sir William Hamilton has borrowed from certain late Greek writers
the terms breadth and depth, for extension and comprehension respec-
tively. J These terms have great merits. They are brief; they are
suited to go together ; and they are very familiar. Thus, " wide" learn-
ing is, in ordinary parlance, learning of many things ; " deep" learning?
much knowledge of some things. I shall, therefore, give the prefer-
ence to these terms. Extension is also called sphere and circuit ; and
comprehension, matter and content.

* Part I. chap. X. (Ed. of 1488, fol. 6, c.)

t Fol. 23. d. See also Tatareti Expositio in Petr. Hisp. towards the end. Ed.
of 1509, fol. 91, b.

X Logic, p. 100. In the Summa Logices attributed to Aquinas, we read:
" Omnis forma sub se habens multa, idest quod universaliter sumitur, habet quan-
dam latitudinein ; nam inveniturin pluribus, et dicitur de pluribus." (Tr. 1, c. .3.)

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 13, 1867. 421

§ 3. Of the Different Senses in which the Terms Extension and Com-
'prehensioyi have been accepted.

The terms extension and comprehension, and their synonymes, are
taken in different senses by different writers. This is partly owing to
the fact that while most writers speak only of the extension and com-
prehension of concepts, others apply these terms equally to concepts
and judgments (Rosling), others to any mental representation (Uber-
weg and many French writers), others to cognition generally (Baura-
garten), others to "terms" (Fowler, Spalding), others to names
(Shedden), others to words (McGregor), others to "meanings" (Jev-
ons), while one writer speaks only of the extension of classes and the
comprehension o^ attributes (De Morgan in his Syllabus).

Comprehension is defined by the Port Royalists as " those attributes
which an idea involves in itself, and which cannot be taken away from
it without destroying it."

It will be remembered that the marks of a term are divided by logi-
cians first into the necessary and the accidental, and that then the
necessary marks are subdivided into such as are strictly essential, that is,
contained in the definition, and such as are called proper. Thus it is an
essential mark of a triangle to have three sides ; it is a proper mark to
have its three angles equal to two right angles ; and it is an accidental
mark to be treated of by Euclid.

The definition of the Port Royalists, therefore, makes comprehen-
sion include all necessary marks, whether essential or proper.

The Port Royalists attribute comprehension immediately to any
ideas. Very many logicians attribute it immediately only to concepts.
Now a concept, as defined by them, is strictly only the essence of an
idea ; they ought therefore to include in the comprehension only the
essential marks of a term. These logicians, however, abstract so
entirely from the real world, that it is difficult to see why these essential
marks are not at the same time all the marks of the object as they sup-
pose it.

There can, I think, be no doubt that such writers as Gerlach and
Sigwart make comprehension include all marks, necessary or accidental,
which are universally predicable of the object of the concept.

Again, most German writers regai'd the comprehension as a sum
either of concepts (Drobiseh, Bachmann, etc.) or of elements of in-
tuition (Trendelenburg). But many English writers regard it as the

422

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

sum of real external attributes (Shedden, Spalding, Devej, De Mor-
gan, Jevons, McGregor, Fowler).

According to most writers, comprehension consists of the (necessary)
attributes thought as common to the objects. Shedden defines it as
consisting of all the attributes common to the things denoted.

Again, most logicians consider as marks only such as are virtually *
predicated ; a few, perhaps, only such as are actually thought, and still
fewer include those which are habitually thought. Here and there is
found an author who makes comprehension include all true attributes,
whether thought or not.

There is also a difference in the mode of reckoning up the marks.
Most writers count all distinguishable marks, while a few consider co-
extensive marks as the same.

In the use of the term " extension " the want of a definite convention is
still more marked. The Port Royalists define it as " those subjects
to which the idea applies." It would appear, therefore, that it might
include mere fictions.

Others limit the term to real species, and at the same time extend it
to single beings. This is the case with Watts, and also with Friedrich
Fischer.

Others are most emphatic in declaring that they mean by it things,
and not species, real or imaginary. This is the case with Bachmann,
Esser, and Schulze.

Others make it include neither concepts nor things, but singular
representations. This is the case with the strict Kantian.

The following table exhibits this diversity : —

Extension embraces

Individual representations

Representations

Real external things and species

Real external individual objects

Things

Species

Objects (representations)

Individuals

Concepts

General terms

Psychical concepts

Variable marks

according to Kant, E. Reinhold, etc.
" " Fries, tJbcrweg, etc.
" " Watts, Shedden, etc.
" " Bachmann, Devey, etc.
" " Schulze, Bowen, etc.
" " Drobisch, De Morgan, etc.
" " Thomson, etc.

" Mahan.
" " Herbart, Vorliinder, etc.

" Spalding.

" Strumpell.

" Ritter.

* I adopt the admirable distinction of Scotus between actual, habitual, and vir-
tual cosnition.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 13, 1867. 423

Again, logicians differ as to whether by extension they mean the
concepts, species, things, or representations to which the term is habit-
ually applied in the judgment, or all to which it is truly applicable.
The latter position is held by Herbart, Kiesewetter, etc. ; the former
by Duncan, Spalding, Vorlander, Uberweg, etc.

Some logicians include only actual things, representations, etc., under
extension (Bachmann, Fries, Herbart) ; others extend it to such as
are merely possible (Essei', Ritter, Gerlach).

Finally, some few logicians speak of the two quantities as numerical,
while most writers regard them as mere aggregates of diverse objects
or marks.

§ 4. Denials of the Inverse Proportionality of the two Quantities, and
Suggestions of a third Quantity.

Until lately the law of the inverse proportionality of extension and
comprehension was universally admitted. It is now questioned on
various grounds.

Drobisch says that the comprehension varies arithmetically, while
the extension varies geometrically. This is true, in one sense.

Lotze, after remarking that the only conception of a universal which
we can have is the power of imagining singulai's under it, urges that
the possibility of determining a concept in a way cori'esponding to each
particular under it is a mark of that concept, and that therefore the
narrower concepts have as many marks as the wider ones. But, I
reply, these marks belong to the concept in its second intention, and are
not common marks of those things to which it applies, and are there-
fore no part of the comprehension. They are, in fact, the very marks
which constitute the extension. No one ever denied that extension is
a mark of a concept ; only it is a certain mark of second intention.

Vorliinder's objection is much more to the purpose. It is that if
from any determinate notion, as that of Napoleon, we abstract all
marks, all determination, what remains is merely the conception some-
thing, which has no more extension than Napoleon. " Something" has
an uncertain sphere, meaning either this thing or that or the other, but
has no general extension, since it means one thing only. Thus, before
a race, we can say that some horse will win, meaning this one, that
one, or that one ; but by some horse we mean but one, and it therefore
has no more extension than would a term definitely indicating which, — •
although this latter would be more determinate, that is, would have

424 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

more comprehension. I am not aware that those who adhere to Kant's
unmodified doctrine have succeeded in answering this objection.

Uberweg has the following remarks.* " To the higher representa-
tion, since conformably to its definition it contains only the common
elements of content of several lower representations, belongs in com-
parison to each of the lower a more limited content, but a wider circuit.
The lower representation, on the contrary, has a richer content but
narrower circuit. Yet by no means by every diminntion or increase
of a given content does the circuit increase or diminish, nor by every
increase or diminution of a given circuit does the content diminish or in-
crease." I am surprised that he does not explain himself further upon
this point, which it is the principal object of this paper to develop.

De Morgan says : t " According to such statements as I have seen,
' man residing in Europe, drawing breath north of the equator, seeing
the sun rise before those in America,' would be a more intensively
quantified notion than ' man residing in Europe ' ; but certainly not
less extensive, for the third and fourth elements of the notion must
belong to those men to whom the first and second belong." Mr. De
Morgan adopts the definitions of extension and comprehension given by
the Port Royalists. According to those definitions, if the third and
fourth elements necessarily belong to the notion to which the first and
second belong, they are parts of the comprehension of that second no-
tion which is composed of the first and second elements, and therefore
the two notions are equal in comprehension ; but if this is not the case,
then the second notion can be predicated of subjects of which the first
cannot, for example, of" man residing in Europe drawing breath south
of the Equator " ; for that there is really no such man will not afllect
the truth of the proposition, and therefore the second notion is more
extensive than the first.

Two logicians, only, as far as I remember. Archbishop Thomson \
and Dr. AV. D. Wilson, § while apparently admitting Kant's law, wish
to establish a third quantity of concepts. Neither gentleman has de-
fined his third quantity, nor has stated what its relations to the other
two are. Thomson calls his Denomination. It seems to be the same
as Extension regarded in a particular way. Dr. Wilson terms his new
quantity Protension ; it has something to do with time, and appears to
be generally independent of the other two. It is plain, indeed, that as

* Logik, 2t« Aufl. § 54. X Laws of Thought, 4th ed., §^ 52, 80.

t Formal Logic, p. 234. His doctrine is ditferent in the Syllabus.
§ Logic, Part I. chap. ii. § 5.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 13, 1867. 425

long as Kant's law holds, and as long as logical quantities can only be
compared as being more or less and not directly measured, and as long
as the different kinds of quantity cannot be compared at all, a third
quantity must be directly proportional to one or other of the known
quantities, and therefore must measure the same thing, or else must be
independent of the other two, and be quite unconnected with them.

§ 4. Three Principal Senses in which Comprehension and Extension

will be taken in this Paper.

I shall adopt Hamilton's terms, breadth and depth, for extension and
comprehension respectively, and shall employ them in different senses,
which I shall distinguish by different adjectives.

By the informed breadth of a term, I shall mean all the real things
of which it is predicable, with logical truth on the whole in a supposed
state of information. By the phrase " on the whole" I mean to indicate
that all the information at hand must be taken into account, and that
those things of which there is not on the whole reason to believe that a
term is truly predicable are not to be reckoned as part of its breadth.
If T be a term which is predicable only of S', S", and S'", then the
S''s, the S"'s, and the S"''s, will constitute the informed breadth of T.
If at the same time, S' and S" are the subjects of which alone another
term T' can be predicated, and if it is not known that all S'" 's are
either S' or S", then T is said to have a greater informed breadth than
T'. If the S'" 's are known not to be all among the S' 's and S" 's, this
excess of breadth may be termed certain, and, if this is not known, it
may be termed doubtful. If there are known to be S'" 's, not known
to be S' 's or S" 's, T is said to have a greater actual breadth than T' ;
but if no S'"'s are known except such are known to be S"s, and S"'s
(though there may be others), T is to have a greater potential breadth
than T'. If T and T' are conceptions in diffei'ent minds, or in different
states of the same mind, and it is known to the mind which conceives
T that every S'" is either S" or S', then T is said to be more exten-
sively distinct than T'.*

By the informed depth of a term, I mean all the real characters (in
contradistinction to mere names) which can be predicated of it t (with

* For the distinction of extensive and comprehensive distinctness, see Scotus, i.
dist. 2.qu.3.

t That is, of whatever things it is applicable to.

VOL. VII. 54

426 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

logical truth, on the whole) in a supposed state of information ; no
character being counted twice over knowingly in the supposed state of
information. The depth, like the breadth, may be certain or doubtful,
actual or potential, and there is a comprehensive distinctness corre-
sponding to extensive distinctness.

The informed breadth atid depth suppose a state of information
which lies somewhere between two imaginary extremes. These are,
first, the state in which no fact would be known, but only the meaning
of terms ; and, second, the state in which the information would amount
to an absolute intuition of all there is, so that the things we should
know would be the very substances themselves, and the qualities we
should know would be the very concrete forms themselves. This sug-
gests two other sorts of breadth and depth corresponding to these two
states of information, and which I shall term respectively the essential
and the substaiitial breadth and depth.

By the essential depth of a term, then, I mean the really conceivable
qualities predicated of it in its definition.

The defined terra will not perhaps be applicable to any real objects
whatever. Let, for example, the definition of the term T be this,

Any T is both P' and P" and P'",

then this sums up its whole meaning; and, as it may not be known
that there is any such thing as P', the meaning of T does not imply
that it exists. On the other hand, we know that neither P', P", nor
P'" is coextensive with the whole sphere of being. For they are de-
terminate qualities, and it is the very meaning of being that it is
indeterminate, that is, is more extensive than any determinate term.
In fact, P', for example, is a real notion which we never could have
except by means of its contrast to something else. Hence we must

know that

Whatever is not-P' is not-T,

Whatever is not-P" is not-T,

and Whatever is not-P"' is not T.

Thus if we define the essential breadth of a term as those real thinars
of which, according to its very meaning, a term is predicable, not-T
has an essential breadth. We may therefore divide all terms into
two classes, the essentially affirmative or positive and the essentially

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 13, 1867. 427

negative ; of which the former have essential depth, but no essential
breadth, and the latter essential breadth, but no essential depth. It
must be noted, however, that this division is not the same as the similar
one which language makes. For example, being, according to this,
is an essentially negative term, inasmuch as it means that which can
be predicated of whatever you please, and so has an essential breadth ;
while nothing is an essentially positive term, inasmuch as it means
that of which you are at liberty to predicate what you please, and
therefore has an essential depth. The essential subjects of being can-
not be enumerated, nor the essential predicates of nothing.

In essential breadth or depth, no two terms can be equal ; for, were
that the case, the two terms would have the same meaning, and there-
fore, for logical purposes, would be the same term. Two terms may
have unknown relations in these quantities, on account of one or other
of them not being distinctly conceived.

Substantial breadth is the aggregate of real substances of which alone
a term is predicable with absolute truth. Substantial depth is the real
concrete form which belongs to everythiilg of which a term is predic-
able with absolute truth.

General terms denote several things. Each of these things has in
itself no qualities, but only a certain conci'ete form which belongs to
itself alone. This was one of the points brought out in the controversy
in reference to the nature of universals.* As Sir WiUiam Hamilton
says, not even the humanity of Leibniz belongs to Newton, but a dif-
ferent humanity. It is only by abstraction, by an oversight, that two
things can be said to have common characters. Hence, a general term
has no substantial depth. On the other hand, particular terms, while
they have substantial depth, inasmuch as each of the things, one or other
of which are predicated of them, has a concrete form, yet have no sub-
stantial breadth, inasmuch as there is no aggregate of things to which
alone they are applicable. In order to place this matter in a clearer
light, I must remark, that I, in common with most logicians, take the
copula in the sense of a sign of atti'ibution, and not, like Hamilton, in
the sense of a sign of equality in extension or comprehension. He ex-
poses the proposition, " man is an animal," thus : —

The extension of man Subject.

equals Copula.

a part or all of the extension of animal .... Predicate.

* See, for example, De Generibus et Speciebus, p. 548.

428 rROCEEDINGS IN THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

And thus he makes the predicate particular. Others interpi'et it
thus : —

Every man Subject.

has all the attributes common to Copula.

every animal Predicate.

It is in this latter sense that the copula is considered in this paper.
Now, a particular is, as has been said, an alternative subject. Thus,
" Some S is M" means, if S', S", and S'" are the singular S's, that "either
S', or else S", or else S'", has all the attributes belonging to M." A
particular terra, then, has a substantial depth, because it may have a
predicate which is absolutely concrete, as in the proposition, " Some
man is Napoleon." But if we put the particular into the predicate we
have such a proposition as this : " M has all the attributes belonging to
S', or else all those belonging to S", or else all those belonging to S'"."
And this can never be true unless M is a single individual. Now a
single individual substance is, I will not say an atom, but the smallest
part of an atom, that is, nothing at all. So that a particular can have
no substantial breadth. Now take the universal term " S." We can say,
" Any S is M," but not if M is a real concrete quality. We cannot
say, for instance, " Any man is Napoleon." On the other hand, we can
say " Any M is S," even if M is a real substance or aggregate of sub-
stances. Hence a universal term has no substantial depth, but has sub-
stantial breadth. We may therefore divide all terms into substantial
universals and substantial particulars.

Two terms may be equal in their substantial breadth and depth, and
differ in their essential breadth and depth. But two terms cannot have
relations of substantial breadth and depth which are unknown in the
state of information supposed, because in that state of information
everything is known.

In informed breadth and depth, two terms may be equal, and may
have unknown relations. Any term, affirmative or negative, universal
or particular, may have informed breadth or depth.

§ 5. The Conceptions of Quality, Relation, and Representation, applied

to this Subject.

In a paper presented to the Academy last May, I endeavored to show

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 13, 1867. 429

that the three conceptions of reference to a ground, reference to a cor-
relate, and references to an interpretant, are those of which logic must
principally make use. I there also introduced the term " symbol," to
include both concept and word. Logic treats of the reference of
symbols in general to their objects. A symbol, in its reference to its
object, has a triple reference : —

1st., Its direct reference to its object, or the real things which it
represents ; *

2d., Its reference to its ground through its object, or the common
characters of those objects ;

3d., Its reference to its interpretant through its object, or all the
facts known about its object.

What are thus referred to, so far as they are known, are : —

1st., The informed breadth of the symbol ;

2d., The informed depth of the symbol ;

3d., The sum of synthetical propositions in which the symbol is
subject or predicate, or the information concerning the symbol.

By breadth and depth, without an adjective, I shall hei'eafter mean
the informed breadth and depth.

It is plain that the breadth and depth of a symbol, so far as they are
not essential, measure the information concerning it, that is, the synthet-
ical propositions of which it is subject or predicate. This follows
dii'ectly from the definitions of breadth, depth, and information. Hence
it follows : —

1st., That, as long as the information remains constant, the greater
the breadth, the less the depth ;

2d., That every increase of information is accompanied by an in-
crease in depth or breadth, independent of the other quantity ;

3d., Tliat, when there is no information, there is either no depth or
no breadth, and conversely.

These are the true and obvious relations of breadth and depth. They
will be naturally suggested if we term the information the area, and
write —

Breadth X Depth =- Area.

If we learn that S is P, then, as a general rule, the depth of S is
increased without any decrease of breadth, and the breadth of P
is increased without any decrease of depth. Either increase may be
certain or doubtful.

430 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

It may be the case that either or both of these increases does not
take place. If P is a negative term, it may have no depth, and there-
fore adds nothing to the depth of S. If S is a particular term, it may
have no breadth, and then adds nothing to the breadth of P. This
latter case often occurs in metaphysics, and, on account of not-P as well
as P being predicated of S, gives rise to an appearance of contradiction
where there really is none ; for, as a contradiction consists in giving to
contradictory terms some breadth in common, it follows that, if the com-
mon subject of which they are predicated has no real breadth, there is
only a verbal, and not a real contradiction. It is not really contradic-
tory, for example, to say that a boundary is both within and without
what it bounds. There is also another important case in which we
may learn that " S is P," without thereby adding to the depth of S or
the breadth of P. This is when, in the very same act by which we
learn that S is P, we also learn that P was covertly contained in the
previous depth of S, and that consequently S was a part of the previous
breadth of P. In this case, P gains in extensive distinctness and S in
comprehensive distinctness.

We are now in condition to examine Vorliinder's objection to the
inverse proportionality of extension and comprehension. He requires
us to think away from an object all its qualities, but not, of course, by
thinking it to be without those qualities, that is, by denying those
qualities of it in thought. How then ? Only by supposing ourselves
to be ignorant whether it has qualities or not, that is, by diminishing
the supposed information ; in which case, as we have seen, the depth
can be diminished without increasing the breadth. In the same man-
ner we can suppose ourselves to be ignorant whether any American
but one exists, and so diminish the breadth without increasing the
depth.

It is only by confusing a movement which is accompanied with a
change of information with one which is not so, that people can con-
found generalization, induction, and abstraction. Generalization is an
increase of breadth and a decrease of depth, without change of infor-
mation. Induction is a certain increase of breadth without a chansce
of depth, by an increase of believed information. Abstraction is a
decrease of depth without any change of breadth, by a decrease of con-
ceived information. Specification is commonly used (I should say
unfortunately) for an increase of depth without any change of breadth,
by an increase of asserted information. Supposition is used for the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : NOVEMBER 13, 1867. 431

same process when there is only a conceived increase of information.
Determination^ for any increase of depth. Restriction, for any decrease
of breadth ; but more particularly without change of depth, by a sup-
posed decrease of information. Descent, for a decrease of breadth and
increase of depth, without change of information.

■> Let us next consider the effect of the different kinds of reason-
ing upon the breadth, depth, and area of the two terms of the con-
clusion.

In the case of deductive reasoning it would be easy to show, were it
necessary, that there is only an increase of the extensive distinctness
of the major, and of the comprehensive distinctness of the minor, with-
out any change in information. Of course, when the conclusion is
negative or particular, even this may not be effected.

Induction requires more attention. Let us take the following ex-
ample : —

S', S", S'", and S'^ have been taken at random from among the M's ;
S' S", S'", and S'^ are P :
.'. any M is P.

We have here, usually, an increase of information. M receives an
increase of depth, P of breadth. There is, however, a difference be-
tween these two increases. A new predicate is actually added to M ;
one which may, it is true, have been covertly predicated of it before,
but which is now actually brought to light. On the other hand, P is
not yet found to apply to anything but S', S", S'", and S'^, but only to
apply to whatever else may hereafter be found to be contained under
M. The induction itself does not make known any such thing. Now
take the following example of hypothesis : —
M is, for instance, P', P", V">, and P'^ ;
S is P', P", P'", and P'^ :
.-. S is all that M is.

Here again there is an increase of information, if we suppose the
premises to represent the state of information before the inferences.
S receives an addition to its depth ; but only a potential one, since there
is nothing to show that the M's have any common characters besides
P', P", P"', and P'^. M, on the other hand, receives an actual in-
crease of breadth in S, although, perhaps, only a doubtful one. There
is, therefore, this important difference between induction and hypothe-
sis, that the former potentially increases the breadthof one term, and
actually increases the depth of another, while the latter potentially in-

232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

creases the depth of one term, and actually increases the breadth of
another.

Let us now consider reasoning from definition to definitum, and also
the argument from enumeration. A defining proposition has a mean-
ing. It is not, therefore, a merely identical proposition, but there is a
difference between the definition and the definitum. According to the
received doctrine, this difference consists wholly in the fact that the
definition is distinct, while the definitum is confused. But I think that
there is another difference. The definitum implies the character of
being designated by a word, while the definition, previously to the
formation of the word, does not. Thus, the definitum exceeds the de-
finition in depth, although only verbally. In the same way, any un-
analyzed notion carries with it a feeling, — a constitutional word, —
which its analysis does not. If this be so, the definition is the predicate
and the definitum the subject, of the defining proposition, and this last
cannot be simply converted. In fact, the defining proposition affirms
that whatever a certain name is applied to is supposed to have such and
such characters ; but it does not strictly follow from this, that whatever
has such and such characters is actually called by that name, although
it certainly might be so called. Hence, in reasoning from definition to
definitum, there is a verbal increase of depth, and an actual increase of
extensive distinctness (which is analogous to breadth). The increase
of depth being merely verbal, there is no possibility of error in this
procedure. Nevertheless, it seems to me pi'oper, rather to consider
this argument as a special modification of hypothesis than as a de-
duction, such as is reasoning from definitum to definition. A similar
line of thought would show that, in the argument from enumeration,
there is a verbal increase of breadth, and an actual increase of depth,
or rather of comprehensive distinctness, and that therefore it is proper
to consider this (as most logicians have done) as a kind of infallible in-
duction. These species of hypothesis and induction are, in fact, merely
hypotheses and inductions from the essential parts to the essential
whole ; this sort of reasoning from parts to whole being demonstrative.
On the other hand, reasoning from the substantial parts to the substan-
tial whole is not even a probable argument. No ultimate part of
matter fills space, but it does not follow that no matter fills space.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 14, 1868. 433

Five hundred and elghty-eiglitli Meeting.

December 10, 1867. — Adjourned Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary read letters relative to ex-
changes ; also a letter from Professor C. H. F. Peters, in ac-
knowledgment of his election as an Associate Fellow of the
Academy ; and a letter from Henry S. Maine, in acknowledg-
ment of his election as a Foreign Honorary Member.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Professor Bopp, of the Foreign Honorary
Members.

On the motion of Dr. E. H. Clark, a committee was ap-
pointed to urge upon Congress the adoption of the decimal
systems of weights and measures. Dr. E. H. Clark, Professor
F. H. Storer, and Professor Horsford were appointed on this
committee.

Professor F. H. Storer, the Librarian, moved that a com-
mittee be appointed to consider and report upon the meaning of
the statutes which relate to the powers and duties of the Libra-
rian and the Library Committee. In accordance with tils
motion the following committee was appointed : Professor
Rogers, Mr. J. I. Bowditch, and Mr. 0. Pickering.

Mr. Roland G. Hazard, of Peace Dale, Rhode Island, was
elected an Associate Fellow in Class HI., Section 1.

Five hundred and eigUty-ninth Meeting.

January 14, 1868. — Monthly Meeting.

The Corresponding Secretary in the chair.

The Corresponding Secretary announced the recent decease
of Mr. Charles C. Jewett, of the Resident Fellows; of Rev.
Chester Dewey, of Rochester, N. Y., of the Associate Fellows ;
and of M. Rayer, of^aris, of the Foreign Honorary Members.

Dr. C. T. Jackson exhibited to the Academy a series of
lead-encased block-tin tubes or pipes for the conduction of

VOL. VII. 55

434 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

T^ater, manufactured by the Boston Lead Company, Shaw and
Willard's patent.

" The first lot was made by placing two semicylinders of pure block-
tin around a hollow core, or mandril, through which a current of cold
water could be made to run, so as to keep the tin as cool as possible.
The semicylinders of tin were also chilled in snow or pounded ice.
When placed around the core, and held closely together by tongs,
melted lead, at as low a temperature as it could be cast, was poured
around the tin, and allowed to cool, the compound cylinder being eight
inches long and six inches in diameter. Then, by means of a power-
ful hydraulic press, giving a pressure of 3,150 pounds per square inch,
or between four and five hundred tons upon the ram or piston, the
cylinder of lead and tin was forced out below, a mandril, or former,
keeping the inner portion of the tube open and of a uniform size.
When the thick cylinder was nearly driven out of its mould, the press
was stopped, and a new casting was made upon the remaining metal ;
so that continuous and perfectly united tubes of any desired length
were formed, and were wound up on a reel in a room below. By this
method, it was thought, a pipe lined witli pure block-tin surrounded by
the more flexible lead could be produced ; but it has been found tliat
pijj^s made in this way charged the water which stood in them over-
night with lead.

" Dr. Jackson was therefore called upon to make a series of analyses
of the linings of many of these tubes, and discovered that the lining
was composed of 22 per cent of lead and 88 per cent of tin, or an
alloy. He was then invited to witness the operation of making the
pipes, when every endeavor to prevent the penetration of the molten
lead into the substance of the tin proved that it was impossible, so
long as the molten lead was cast around the tin, — for the lead requires
a temperature of 612° for its fusion, and tin only 442° ; while the
great mass of hot lead rendered the tin almost a paste, into which the
lead readily penetrated. There being 170° difference between the
melting-points of the two metals, it was suggested that, if the lead was
cast first around an iron core, and, when cold enough, on withdrawing
the core and casting in the tin, the difficulty might be remedied. This,
the foreman of the works said, could be easily effected, and it was soon
after done with entire success ; for chemical analysis showed the tin
lining of such pipes to be absolutely pure tin. By this improved pro-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : JANUARY 29, 1868. 435

cess all the pipes now made at the Boston lead-works, and also at the
New York works, are raanufactui-ed ; and the public may rely on their
producing a faultless water-pipe.

"It is also found that, by this improvement, the pipes can be made
more rapidly than heretofore, and that a plug or compound cylinder
for drawing may be cast thirteen inches long, which is a great advan-
tage.

" A series of experiments were made to ascertain the action of dis-
tilled water and of Boston well-water on lead pipes, and on those
made as first described, in which the tin had become alloyed with 22
per cent of lead ; and it was found that a lead pipe in 24 hours
yielded to distilled water 4-80 grs. of oxide of lead per gallon, and
that a pipe lined with tin alloyed with 22 per cent of lead yielded to
a gallon of the water 2-24 grs. of oxide of lead, while the pipe lined
with pure tin yielded nothing to the water. When Boston well-water,
containing 2G grs. of various saline matters per gallon, was substituted
for distilled water, lead pipe, in 24 hours, yielded to it 2 grains of oxide
of lead, and the pipe lined with tin alloyed with 22 per cent of lead
yielded 1-865 grs. of lead to the water, the sulphates in the well-water
protecting the lead to a considerable extent. The well-water of Wal-
tham, which was very much less saline than Boston well-water, dis-
solved 0*8 gr. of oxide of lead from a pipe made of the tin alloyed
with lead ; this impregnation having taken place in a single night, or
about 12 hours.

" It would seem from these researches, that the lead-encased tin pipe,
as originally manufactured, is better than lead pipe, but is still objec-
tionable as a water conduit, and much more so for more powerful
solvents for lead, such as soda-water and beer ; while the pipe, as now
made, is as unobjectionable as pui'e block-tin pipe, and is actually
cheaper than lead when purchased by the linear foot."

Five hundred and nlnetietli Illeeting'.

January 29, 1868. — Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

Professor August De La Rive was elected a Foreign Honor-
ary Member in Class I. Section 3, in place of the late Michael
Faraday.

436 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Professor M. E. Chevreul was also elected a Foreign Honor-
ary Member in Class I. Section 3.

Five Iiunclrcd and ninety-first Meeting.

February 11, 1868. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The following paper was presented and read by the
author : —

A Conjectural Solution of the Origin of the Classificatory
Spstem of Relationship.

By Lewis H. Morgan,

Of Rochester, New York.

About twenty years ago I found among tlie Iroquois Indians of
New York a system of relationship, for the designation and classifica-
tion of kindred, both unique and extraordinary in its character, and
wholly unlike any with which we are familiar. At the time I sup-
posed it was a scheme devised by themselves, and confined to this
particular stock of the American aborigines. Afterwards, in 1857, I
had occasion to re-examine the subject, when the idea of its possible
prevalence among other Indian nations suggested itself, together w^ith
its uses, in that event, for ethnological purposes. In the following
summer I obtained the system of the Ojibwa Indians, of Lake Supe-
rior ; and, although prepared in some measure for the result, it was
with some degree of surprise that I found among them the same elab-
orate and complicated system which then existed among the Iroquois.
Every term of relationship was radically different from the correspond-
ing terra in the Iroquois ; but the classification of kindred was the same.
It was manifest that the two systems were identical in their radical
characteristics. It seemed probable, also, that both were derived from
a common source, since it was not supposable that two peoples, although
speaking dialects of stock-languages, as widely separated as the Al-
gonkin and Iroquois, could simultaneously have invented the same
system, or derived it by bon-owing one from the other.

From this fact of identity, several inferences at once presented

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: FEBRUARY 11, 1866. 437

themselves. Its prevalence among these stocks rendered probable
its prevalence among the remaining stocks of the American abori-
gines. If then it should, upon investigation, be found to be universal
among them, it would follow that the system was coeval, in point of
time, with the commencement of their spread upon the American con-
tinent ; and also, as a system transmitted with the blood, it might
contain the necessary evidence to establish their unity of origin. And,
in the next place, if the Indian family came in fact from Asia, that
they must have brought the system with them from that continent, and
have left it behind them among the people from whom they separated ;
and, further than this, that its pei'petuation upon this continent would
render probable its like perpetuation upon the Asiatic, where it might
still be found ; and, finally, that it might possibly furnish some evi-
dence upon the question of the Asiatic origin of the Indian family.

Having found, before the close of 1859, that the system prevailed
in the five principal Indian stock-languages east of the Rocky Moun-
tains, as well as in several of the dialects of each, its universal spread
through the Indian family had become extremely probable ; and hav-
ing also discovered traces of it both in the Sandwich Islands and in
South-India, it seemed advisable to prosecute the investigation upon
a more extended scale, and to attempt to reach, as far as possible, all
the families of mankind. This would require an extensive foreign
correspondence, which a private individual could not hope to maintain
successfully. I then applied to the Secretaries of the several Ameri-
can Boards of Foreign Missions for the co-operation of their respective
missionaries in foreign fields, which was cordially promised, and the
promise amply redeemed. I also applied to Professor Joseph Henry,
Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, for the use of the name of
that institution to insure attention to the circular and schedule by
means of which the system of relationship of the different nations was
to be obtained. Professor Henry not only complied with this request,
but also, at my suggestion, procured a circular to be issued by the
Secretary of State of the United States to the diplomatic and consular
representatives of the government in foreign countries, commending
the investigation to their attention. From this time onward, the foreign
correspondence, except with the missionaries, was conducted through
the Smithsonian Institution and the Department of State.

In verification of the results it will be sufficient to state, that, by
personal explorations, continued through several years, in the Lake

438 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Superior region, in the Hudson's Bay Territory, and in the territories
between the Missouri River and the Rocky Mountains, and by cor-
respondence with government officials and private individuals in other
parts of North America, I have been able to bring together the sys-
tem of relationship of upwards of seventy Indian nations, speaking
as many independent dialects. Beside these, and by means of the
foreign correspondence referred to, the system of the principal nations
of Europe and Asia, of a portion of those of Africa, of Central and
South America, and of the Islands of the Pacific, have also been ob-
tained. The tabulated schedules, now in course of publication by the
Smithsonian Institution, will cover four hundred and fifty pages of the
Smithsonian Contributions, and represent four fifths and upwards,
numerically, of the entire human family. These strictly personal
statements would be inappropriate in this connection, except as they
become necessary to show that the solution about to be presented rests
upon a wide basis of ascertained facts.

I propose to present, in a brief form, 1st. The system of relation-
ship of the Ai-yan Family: using the Roman form as typical. 2d.
That of the Malayan Family : using the Hawaiian form as typical.
3d. That of the Ganowanian* Family: using the Seneca-Iroquois as
typical. These are preliminary to the principal object, which is:
4th. To submit a conjectural solution of the origin of the classificatory
system of relationship.

It may be premised that all of the systems of consanguinity and
affinity, thus far ascertained, resolve themselves into two radically
distinct forms, of which one will be called the descriptive, and the
other the classificatory.

In the first, consanguinei are, in the main, described by a combina-
tion of the primary terms of relationship. There is a small amount
of classification, by means of special or secondary terms introduced
by civilians and scholars to relieve the burdensomeness of the system ;
but the great body of relatives, both by blood and marriage, are de-
scribed. This is the system of the Aryan, Semitic, and Uralian fami-
lies. In its origin, as the parent of the present form, it was purely
descriptive, as is still exemplified by the Erse and Scandinavian,
and by the condition of the Sanskritic, when this language ceased to
be spoken. This system follows the streams of the blood, and is in

* Ga-no-wa'-ni-an : name proposed for the American Indian family. From
Gii'-no, an anew, and VVtia'-no, a bow ; the family of tiie Bow and ArroAv.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 439

accordance with the nature of descents. It is, therefore, a natural
system, for the reason that the relationships recognized are those which
actually exist. But it assumes as its fundamental basis the antecedent
existence of marriage between single pairs. Before this system could
come into existence, mankind must have,raised themselves to this state
of marriage ; after which this form of marriage, and not nature, teaclies
the descriptive system of relationship. It is important that this dis-
tinction should be noted.

In the second form, consanguine! are never described by a combina-
tion of the primary terms ; but they are classified into categories, and
the same term of relationship is applied, without distinction, to each
of the members of the same categoiy. This is the system of the
Malayan, Ganowanian, and Turanian families. It suggests the proba-
bility that there might have been a state of society in the primitive
ages in which marriage between single pairs was unknown, in which
the family, in its modern sense, was unknown ; but in which a sys-
tem of relationship might have originated in compound marriages in
a communal family, and thus be in strict accordance with the nature
of descents, and, therefore a natural system because it recognized the
relationships actually existing. This suggestion should also be noted.

1. System of Relationship of the Aryan Family.

A knowledge of the descriptive system became important for two
principal reasons. First, it was necessary to find the limits of its
spread to circumscribe the classificatory form : and, secondly, it was
necessary to find the basis upon which it rested, to reach the instru-
mentalities by means of which the classificatory system, if it ever pre-
vailed among the remote ancestors of the Aryan family, might possibly
have been overthrown, and the descriptive substituted in its place.

As none of the characteristics of the former system are involved
in the solution of the oi'igin of the latter, it will be sufficient for ray
present purpose to present the substance of the Aryan form without
comment. The Roman, as found in the Pandects* and Institutes of
Justinian,t will be used as the typical system. Its completeness and
perfection is due to the Roman civilians, and arose from a necessity for
a code of descents, defining the relations of consanguinei to each other,
to regulate the transmission of property by inheritance.

* Pand. Lib. XXXVIII. Tit. X. " De gradibus et adfinibus et nominibus
eoriim."

X Just. Inst. Lib. III. Tit. VI. " Dc gradibns Cognationiim."

440

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Table of Roman System of Consanguinity.
(Lineal Line.)

Great-grandfather's great-grandfiither,

Tritavus.

" " grandfather,

Atavns.

" " father.

Abavus.

" grandfather,

Proavus.

" grandmother,

Proavia.

Grandfather,

Avus.

Grandmother,

Avia.

Father,

Pater.

ISlotlier,

Mater.

Son,

Filius.

Daughter,

Filia.

Grandson,

Nepos.

Granddaughter,

Neptis.

Great-grandson,

Pronepos.

" granddaughter,

Proneptis.

" grandson's son,

Abncpos.

" " daughter,

Abneptis.

" " grandson.

Atnepos.

" " granddaughter,

Atneptis.

" " great-grandson,

Trinepos.

" , " " granddaughter,

Trineptis.

(First Collateral Line.

Male.)

Brother,

Frater.

Brother's son.

Fratris filius.

" daughter,

" filia.

" grandson.

" nepos.

" granddaughter,

" neptis.

" great-grandson.

" pronepos.

" " granddaughter,

" pronei)tis.

* * *

# * *

(First Collateral Line.

Female. )

Sister,

Soror.

Sister's son.

Sororis filius.

'•' daughter,

filia.

" grandson.

" nepos.

" granddaughter,

" neptis.

" great-grandson,

" pronepos.

" " granddaughter,

" proneptis.

# * *

* * *

(Second Collateral Line. Father's Side.)

MALE BRANCH.

Father's brother,

Patruus.

" brother's son.

Patrui filius, b. frater patruclis,

" " daughter,

\ " filia, b. soror patruelis.

" " grandson.

" nepos.

" " granddaughter,

" neptis.

" " great-grandson.

" pronepos.

" " " granddaughter,

" proneptis.

* * *

* * *

FSMALE BBAKCB.

Father's sister.

Amita.

" sister's son.

Amitffi, filius b. amitinus.

" " daughter,

" filia, b. amitina.

" " grandson,

" ne])os.

" " granddaughter,

" neptis.

" " great-grandson,

" pronepos.

" " " granddaughter.

" proneptis.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: FEBRUARY 11, 1868.

441

{Second Collateral Line. Mother's Side.)

MALE BRANCH.

Mother's brother,

" brother's son,

daughter.

Mother's sister,

" sister's son,

" " daughter,

grandson,
granddaughter,
great-grandson,
" granddaugliter,

*

FEMALE BRANCH.

grandson,
granddaughter,
great-grandson,
" granddaughter,

Avunculus.

Avunculi filius, b. consobrinus.

" tili;i, b. consobrina.

" nepos.

" neptis.

" pronepos.

" proneptis.

* * *

Matertera.

Materteroe filius, b. consobi-inus.

" filia, b. consobrina.

" nepos.

" neptis.

" pronepos.

" proneptis.

* * ♦

( Third Collateral Line. Father's Side. )

MALE AND FKMALE BRANCH.

Father

's

father's

brother,

Patruus magnus.

K

11

brother's son,

Patrui

magni Hiius.

it

ti

tt

daughter.

tt

" filia.

t<
tt

tt
tt

grandson,
granddaughter.

tt
ti

" nepos.
" neptis.

it
tt

(C
(t

it
tt

great-grandson,
" granddaughter.

(t
It

" pronepos.
" proneptis.

*

*

*

*

* #

<<

tt

sister.

Aniita

magna.

tc

ti

sister'

s son.

Amitce

magnaj filius.

it

tt

tt

daughter.

it

" filia.

ti
it

ti

tt

tt
tt

grandson,
granddaughter.

ti.
it

" nepos.
" neptis.

It

tt

tt

tt

tt

great-grandson,
" granddaughter,

it

it

" pronepos,
" proneptis.

*

*

#

*

* *

( Third Collateral Line. Mother's Side. )

MALE AND FEMALE BRANCH.

Mother's mother's brother,

" " brother's son.

Avunculus magnus.
Avunculi magni filius.

-

it
tt
ti
tt
tt

daughter,
grandson,
granddaughter,
gi'eat-grandson,
" gr'ddaughter.

ti ((

a it
«< «
it it
tt It

filia.

nepos,

neptis.

pronepos.

proneptis.

*

*

*

* *

*

sister,

sister's

son,
daughter.

]\Iatertcra magna.
Materterie magnse filius.
filia.

it
ti

grandson,
granddaughter.

ti it

a it

nepos.
neptis.

it
it

great-grandson,
" granddaughter.

if it
tt tt

pronepos.
proneptis

*

*

*

* #

*

VOL.

VII.

56

442

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

{Fourth Collateral Line. Father's Side.)

MALE AND FEMALE BRANCH.

Father's father's father's brother,

" " " brother's son,

grandson,
" g't-grandson,

sister,

sister's son,
" grandson,
" great-grandson,

Patruus major,
Patriii majoris filius.
" " nepos.

" " pronepos.

* * ♦

Amita major.
AmitiE majoris filius.
" " nepos.

" " pronepos.

* # *

(Fourth Collateral Line. Mother's Side.)

MALE AND FEMALE BRANCH.

Mother's mother's mother's brother,

brother's son,

«

«

it

" grandson,

«

It

tt

" g't-g'dson,

*

*

#

((

«

tl

sister.

«

<(

It

sister's son.

<(

((

it

" grandson.

«

It

it

" g't-gr'dson.

Avunculus major.
Avunculi majoris filius.
" " nepos.

" " pronepos.

* * *

Matertera major.
Materterffi majoris filius.
nepos.

pronepos.

»

a
tt

Father's father's father's father's brother,

bro's son,

{Fifth Collateral Line. Father's Side.)

MALE AND FEMALE BRANCH.

Patruus maximus.
Patrui niaximi filius.
grandson, " " nepos

g't-g'dson,

sister,

sister's son,
" g'dson,
" g't-g'dson.

" " pronepos.

* * *

Amita maxima.
Amitai maximie filius.

" " nepos.

'•■ " pronepos.

« « *

Mother's mother's mr's m'r's brother,

" bro's son,

{Fifth Collateral Line. Mothei-'s Side.)

MALE AND FEMALE BRANCH.

Avunculus maximus.
Avunculi maximi filius.
grandson, " " nepos.

<(

(<

<(

tt

" g t-grandson, " " pronepos.

*

#

*

* # *

It

It

It

It

sister, Matertera maxima.

tl

II

ti

It

sister's son, Materterse maxima; filius.

((

ti

tt

tt

" grandson, " " nepos.

*

It

It

*

It

" g't-g'dson, " " pronepos,
{Mamage Relations.)

Husband,

Vir. b. maritus.

Husband's

i father,

Socer.

tt

mother,

Socrus.

11

grandfa

!ther.

Socer magnus.

tl

grandmother.

Socrus magna.

Wife,

Uxor. b. marita.

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES: FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 443

Wife's father, Soccr.

" mother, Socru's.

" prundfather, Socer magnus.

" grandmother, Socrus magna.

Step-fatlier, Vitricus.

^^ mother, Noverca.

SO") Privignus,

" daughter, Privigna.

Sonin-law, Gener.

Daughter-in-law, Nurus.

Brother-in-law (husband's brother), Levir.

" " (sister's husband), Maritus sororis.

" " (wife's brother), Uxoris frater.

Sister-in-law (wife's sister), Uxoris soror.

" " (husband's sister), Gloss.

" " (brother's wife), Fratria.

Relatives by father's side, Agnati.

" " mother's side, Cognati.

" " marriage, Affines.

Each collateral line, when fully extended, reaches to " trinepos," who
is the sixth descendant in each line. If desirable to trace the line be-
yond him, he is made a new starting-point in the description, namely,
'-'■fratris trinepotis Jilms" and on to ^\fratris trinepotis trinepos," who
is the twelfth descendant of my brother. In like manner, in the as-
cending series, " tritavus " becomes a new starting-point, which gives
first " tritavi pater" the father of tritavus, and on to tritavi tritavus,
wlio is the twelfth ancestor of Ego. This exhausts the capacity of the
nomenclature of this admirable system.

It will be observed that consanguinei are bound together in virtue
of their descent, through married pairs, from common ancestors ; that
they are divided into a lineal and several collateral lines ; and that the
collateral are perpetually divergent from the lineal. The relationship
of each person to the central Ego is accurately defined, and preserved
distinct by means of a descriptive phrase. With the exception of the
primary terms of relationship, which are those for father and mother,
son and daughter, brother and sister, grandparent and grandchild, and
husband and wife ; and with the further exception of the terms for
uncle and aunt which are found in the Sanskritic, Hellenic, Romaic,
Germanic, and Slavonic stock-languages ; and also with the exception of
nepos and its cognates, which has an eccentric use, — the remainder of the
system describes persons, leaving the relationship to implication. As
before stated, the system, in its immediate origin, was purely descriptive.
The Erse and Gaelic, which have no terms for uncle, aunt, nephew,
niece, or cousin, is more strictly than the Roman the typical system
of the Aryan family. This system will be dismissed without further

444 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

explanation, as the table will sufficiently illustrate the fundamental
differences between this form and the class iticatory which is next to
be presented.

II. System of Relationship of the Malayan Family.

The Malayan is nearer the primitive system of relationship of the
human family than any other hitherto discovered. This is a necessary
inference from the fact that it is simpler, and therefore older, than the
Ganowanian and Turanian systems, which prevail among the great
body of the American Indian and Asiatic nations. It is also evident
that, the Malayan could not have been derived from either of the other
forms, whilst both the Ganowanian and Turanian might have been,
and presumptively were, engrafted upon an original form agreeing in
all essential respects with the Malayan. It is a classiticatory system
as welt as the most simple and elementary form of that system. The
only relationships recognized are the primary. All consanguinei, near
and remote, are classified under these relationships. Each term is in
common gender ; sex being indicated by adding the words Kd'-na for
male, and Wd-hee'-na for female. A full knowledge of the system may
be obtained by passing through the several lines, and observing the
relationship of each person to the central Ego.

In the lineal line we have Kii-pu-na, grandparent, Ma-ku-a, parent,
Kai'-kee, child, and J/u-pu-?ia, grandchild. The relationship of brother
and sister is conceived in the twofold form of elder and younger; and
there are double terms for each relationship, one of which is used by
the males and the other by the females, as follows : —

Elder brother, male speaking, Kai-ku-d-a'-na. Female speaking, Kai-M-na'-ne.
Younger " " " Kai-ka-i'-na. " " Kai-ku-na'-ne.

Elder sister, " " Kai-kti-na-he'-ne. " " Kai-ku-d-d'-na.

Younger sister, " " Kai-ku-iva-he!-ne. " " Kai-ka-i'-na.

For husband and wife the terms are respectively, Kd'-na, and Wd-hee'-na.

In the first collateral line, my brother's son and daughter are my
son and daughter, each of them calling me father ; and their children
are my grandchildren, each of them calling me grandfather. My sis-
ter's children are also my sons and daughtei's, and their children are
my grandchildren. The same is equally true whether I am a male or
a female.

In the second collateral line, my father's brother is my father ; his
son and daughter are my brother and sister, elder or younger, and I

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES: FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 445

apply to them the same terms I do to my own brothers and sisters ;
the chiklren of this collateral brother and sister are my sons and
daughters ; and the children of the latter are my grandchildren.
Each of the persons named applies to me the proper correlative.

My father's sister, in like manner, is my mother ; her children are
my brothers and sisters, elder or younger ; the childi'en of these col-
lateral brothers and sisters are my sons and daughters ; and the chil-
dren of the latter are my grandchildren.

■ My mother's brother is my father ; and his children and descendants
follow in the same relationships as in the previous cases. In like man-
ner my mother's sister is ray mother ; and her children and descendants
follow in the same relationships.

The third collateral line repeats the classification in the second. My
grandfather's brother is my grandparent ; his son is my father ; the
son of the latter is my brother, elder or younger ; and the son and
grandson of this collateral brother are my child and grandchild.
My grandfather's sister and her descendants, and my grandmother's
brother and sister and their descendants, follow in the same relation-
ships as before. As far outward as consanguinei can be traced, the
classification is the same. It will be seen more fully by consulting
the following table.

446

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

w

m

'4-d

'-/J

{J

fc

crt

a

a

Y,

-a

a

a

cS

II

f

;-i

II

■<

bf)

);3

>-.

>i

^

_2 "^ _a3 15 _a3 "c« ^3

•fS •c.a'a'DCii'-' n

»-*• ji • f-^ ^^* :; ci ^ IT

a|i3 a?§ § ° '^

eu

I__l rg .......... . .

a c2

CZ2 c ••

;^ S

o ° . <« .

I— ( e6 eS cS ^1

H_r." • • • • • ' c& * ,v»i"^ •

^ S . . . .-. .TC=*^-^^^ 5

■<, .-3 • • •.' TCQJ'Scu 5 ' ' '^

5 M o; "o; - 1 -V T -^ T -cj

^ O S C « g g -cs :? J 3 -Z ^g C3 ^«^ :cs

W « ^ ,i - :: ^ c. :: ^ :: :: ^ .; ^ :. c: - - ^ c: ^ ^ :: ^ =: :: :: :: c:

H ^ ,-- "^

CO <=> .- .

CO

a

g

CO >••• ■.••••

<3 c«

> c ,

!> •- &,

^ ■-«; ^ ^ ^ ^

>« §-•'"'■*

' U • 'S • ' ' • • • ' ' u ^

S M f-i • *^ 'o • • • • • • •*Jijjo

£c^^, S a- ^.» 53-53 S S3 |/Db053 -s

°^ ^ :: ^ :: ^ ^ =

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : FEBRUARY 11, 1868.

447

03

a>

4>

<u

0)

<o

tl

a> c«

OI

c3

OI c3

<!)

CS

OI cfl

n)

c3

a>

to
bC

5 '« £

ce

fern

-law
e.

"s a

ff!

a ^

13 a

rr^

a

13

a

a-^

a

a^

a

^

oS

a

i"

ale.
r-in
mal

ild,

03.515

"5 i a

&

3

Qj .a "tS
13 i a

^

2

6

-law.
femal

^'.2

t^

as^-T-S-

. s^^

1

. a^^

riS

CJ J

.. s

1 o

73 3 rr c ctf

2 bCi^"

•T fl

'a bills

7S

2"

C ^3

•T a

O ^

^i .22 -

pfi S3 ^ 5 ^^

'?^i5 S

o

t<

^ «i ^

n

fH

,sa

o^

^ cc

o -a u K bO

« '^ o

£

bc

« 'C o

at

be

o

M O

S bo

.>%- ^ - -

9 c I ' Co

^ • ? gjgs • ? §lg^ • .? gjsl • .? %

r -2 -2 • :'^ :oS V -i ^ • S • :^ -g :=3 -g g . 2 . :o3 -j^ ; ' :cj 53 . « . -oS

a -C ra :cs :g )c3 :c3 :g ts :o3 :g es cs -cs :g ts

^oj :c5 7 -^ >cs P )oj 9 -irf >5S ? )ci 9 -^ )es ^ )oJ a C ^ ,ei P ,53 a

^4< )i cs "^ - q;.' '2^ ^ q;.' oj - ' 'B ^ ^ ^ a;.' « - ' '5 ^ ?< a> - ' aj . ' >S

^S-S-^g-ygg- - ^^°^§g- - --^§-^2?-- - A^ i-^ ^^

iii'J.i-i° v'a.'ao ~_.T"i° O.'ajCo

'S ':=3 ■•fi ':<^ >3 'rt >a 2 ■:S )?3 'S ipi 2 "ei )^ '5 )a g 2 'iS )S "iS )S 2

u s- • 2

.2'*^t«'0» •'S'^a"- 'ri.-tiiajrs, •«]•

-"■' - w SMjcc • S -S^2 03 -'"^S^aa ."^cuSS

■:2i u^s^ a ^ '^ cs '^ '^r.'^ ^ -^ b t-. ^ B ^^ '^ ^-1=-^^

i-lSggiiSgg^ a.f.fi.^'^i g §11 £ S 2 £ ^ '"^'^ ^

gS,S°°'^'§tJji^'=* aa25'«««S3 Mtc'O'obCbfibc btv^

bob-'" gg^-daj^^,";: ."S

^53 « 03 I'S::^^::

o S :: fe . .a ^

rCl '33 ^-s D

^ -"" •*

03 a S -

bc ts o

O c6 e6

448

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

QJ

'c3

-

a

q3 "cc

6

,2

It?

r2

a

s

S

s

03

a5 "rt

aj

q3

0)

^

rt «

a3

're a

s

a
c2

03

^ 03

ce 2

;;

cS

-.

a

:;

cr:

^

i. 0) CO

a;

nS

'^

"cS

^

T oi cs

1)

S .^

S

^

a

fi

•s-^ a

rt

£

s

.Hi3 a

cS

-

-

-

-t-T

a

^1

o

=2

53 2^

d

^

-

-

03

03

-a

o

03

ther-

d, m

fe

a

t- -

"*

■^

■*

"*

■*

"

••

o

-Ui

o — ^

S4

V.

«

^

o

o .-:= -

^

cS

^

^ -a "*

b

CO

>~

C/J

Ph

^

is

CQ

-J= «

M

p.^

is'

CO

^

,

,.

^ J

.,

^

^

^

,,

^

,,

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

^

.,

^

f=<

>-.

a

I

zc«-e3' • • • • M . • ' -cSeS

" ? •= '""> ? ^ „

5, ;ci ^^ :rt c 03 - g 2-5 ^^ - - ?^ =§ 03 :c3 >?3 :ci :c3 _a -^ . ~M . * S 5

o )S ^'

J 2 -i s ^ s 2 s " :: :: > > .jl .'- -i .i r- .--. S -A-- > .i .i. .i .i- .'-i

« 3 -2 - - -.3 :rt -.5 :rt :rt :rt :cS -.Ti 3 -g ;:i :2 -.^ ::i - :c3 ce

"a a ^^&,i4^-«^^^a B M ^ jn j^ J4 ^ .ii

03

13

• 3 ■ --a

fe o § " '^^ -3 fe oJ O CS

!^ || • • • • 1^ -^ • •-§ •:s^:§

1

«a3- . ._-^h:fea3i=!io3 S£S . -, ^t" fcr.M

t^Si, -^ 03 ^ ^^^S^^S. X"^^ j2-"-c|fe

g_S O303.'n-C,Ct-^'O303 m

S — ,C;H!^*e-tJ03O3r;r3 ^^ __ ;,-.

2 a -'" '^ ►'»

t O b. 03 "tw

o;l>2-,a3-.--i-i^-.^:;:;--.---->.-.-.-----'v-~'-.

O _, -»^ O -M

<» TO (t; c rt

Q

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 449

.rS.^d ^iJ<B 6 6

^JS^^ "S 6 cS 6 te -^ cS'rtgj'S

"•S «S-~Saa3C" a a.Sc^GcsS-'^ Stffi

raS S^-g-oiaj^S a «*3<v,a>:s22 a S-

(B

^3

• ■

•

/—\

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

■

■

■

'

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

r.

c8

'

•

•

■

*

■

1

•

•

•

•

•

•

a

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

4d

•

•

•

•

•

-

•

•

•

•

•

* eS

a

a

'■.5

•

d

a

c3

'•r^
^

•

•

• cj

•

C3

•

-hee'na

kii-na

wa-hee'

a

J4

"a;
2
:rt

a

/ \

d

a

•

hee'-na
-ka

a

1

a

a

1

03
1

r]

a

-is!

a;

<B
-a

k'a'-na .
wii-hee

c3

1

na (o.)
iee'-na

ce

c3

a
1

OS

^<B

-a

. a
a -c

,a j3

3i

a

1

r

-na .
-hee'-na

:^ tS

:cs

£S

:rt

■.a

■rr

;cj

cS

:«

v' ce i

-Y

•■-!

:<:«

r', -k

;rt

:rf :rf

^ a
)a

^
4

a

a «
^ ¥

-id

^M

fcs

a
1-^

"(B

CD

&:

a>

)3

)5S

s 6

"

^

>a

1

1

0)

)a o
t 1

o

'

^

v»

O

-^

f'

-

-

)a.

,i4

a

a^

■:rt '-.B 'S

o

S

a

jS -g '-.B '-.B ':5

O

a

a

)a

)rj " --

^

:;

s

:;

;;

^ ^

:;

-i

:J

s

;j

^

::

:i

c:

s ^ ::

;J

^

^

V* ^

^ ::

-

V.

s> '^

M

•
• •

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

.

•

•

•

.

•

•

•

•

•

,

•

•

S-i

u • • ■ • ' • 3 •

S ;S bc •

.,S. ... to . iL,.f-aE

fcc tc c a . . -S fH c = S S g g ^ i^ i -i« S -3 St bij -a

-S^-^brbD -^ :gST3-SS^^^ „ -» SCO! acrt^aS

^ rS 3 . m 'f r m a ^ t^ • -ii ^^ '- e 3 V, c« cs cu :: O =2

i^ S g 2 :: . ^ -11 g ^ J biD li fee » -bii-br/^ fc^ -Jl "g

^ tJj tx.bc „ -j,,-5j ^ fc' -^ c a = 3 a - a I - - - J .

0)

:: s .».2 g g g -a

o o o

OJ

cS

^ a a

VOL. VII. 57

450

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

o re

^ _r i- j::

a>

,

&: •

&

a ^

O)

<D CS

«

1*

:S ^

r*

^

<a

rt a

(K ce

c«

^ ce

^

c

S

a^

er.

d, mal
fern
band.

r

c

3 i

n>

r5 '

1'*

1^-^

<1)

h3

n'l

OJ

-S OJ

4-J

"^ -«

r^

^

ho

-M

O

-.J ._ - j^

' ' ^

O t3

1 ^

^

.2 -=3

'm

^
^

'm « -a

p:

^

S.S

p

1j

ro "re
S S

s s

o o

a
o

'S
S =*

S =

en wi

!= 3

ci 0)

S ■£
•^ o

^

B3

a
'S

Oh

S
o

CJ

a>
ci

.1-1

v^ vb . ' vb -b

<^ ■ n3 * ' * c3 ■ c8

-^ -M

.±a

% -^ .

c*

^

<

rt

C

^^^

/— «v

ifl

<

^oe d ce

•

?

"o

d

,«5xSk!

C

•

cS tp

f-

^ ' -a '

03
1

CJ

:«

. ' c3 ^T j3

G :rt

-' G

C ~aj 5 «

l—jH

•r^

•r-s

J3

« G <U C

rJ-;

I

a; 1

5
en
!5
O

li-a-ii'-
u-ii-he
u-ii-ii-i
u-ii-he

?

^ t

Id

u-ii-he
i1-ii-ti'-
u-a-he
ee-kii-

>'

^.3

H

•r^ J:^^ ^

ty^

.-14

^

-^

-^■^■^■^

_M

,1

■k

m

'.Tt, ■— > --^ 'ct

rt

a

•(~i

:ii -.zi :ci :3

r3

a

-« JaS^^

^

r^

-i=! ^ ^ ^

G

^

^

~. ^ ^ -

^,

^ ^

*>»

M

c3

a

I

o

G

c6 c^ c3 •

-' :^ G .' G ' r

G .

O a O 3; O

G ^

' 1 I I .i. I .J.

•'tS iS '^ g :c: :" :ci

s y =^ a

C>i

Pi

<^

• *^ •

tH C S >-
. « O rt

«= i a;
CO bo"

(-1

a>

G
vj ^

C G

b(j Sd
I

fcX)

c
_ o ,

CO

,

O

b

o

rO

tn

b

(1.

a)

o

■«-»
^

o

^

0)"

a.

-J=

u

^

>-.

^

a>

o rt
en TZ

"p

(.1

^ c

:£ =«

G f-

to

G

i M

O)

-a
o

a

bo

•<s>

&5

■

•

•

•

;5

*

1

•

•

•

• §^ •

•

§

•

"

"

•

=3 /-N

*

•

g-

^

r-^

•

.

-

^ G

•

.

1,

^ ■

■) •

,

•

a -^ 'J^ .

•

.."tS

^ ^ ^

'•- T

•

•

•

o

• '

"3 «a

,

•

.

rc ^ t. J

^— s ^

OJ

O -fc,

en a; -*.^

!- a)

■

,

,

. m 3 *e O

S- (W

^

r^S ra

•

•
•

•

•

•

•

sband
ter's h
fe's sis
fe's bi

K , — .

and's
s brot

•

u

.

•

;2'^:

g

~*

a*

i ,G ^

^ &

o

g

re & &:

• S "J A

re i

^^.^S.^

T3

c

o

g

.S

t«

ce

m

G

^

■yi: tn

J

^

bC'x: "5 - -

a> :i

v^

4

^ '>«

c/:

^

^

f*

G o o

-iS -

■^

**

** "

rS

•^J

^

"

g

re p: j-

'cQ

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 451

It will be observed that the several collateral lines are merged
in the lineal line, by means of vvhicli the posterity of my brothers and
sisters, and of my collateral relatives, become my posterity. This is a
fundamental charactei-istic of the classificatory system. In tl>e Hawaiian
no blood relatives, however remote in degree, can fall without the
relationship of grandparent, grandchild, brother, or sister. The sys-
tem, nevertheless, is clearly defined, and is founded upon a knowledge
of the degrees of relationship, numerically, by means of which the
classification is perfected. Wlien the Ganowanian and Turanian forms
are compared with the Hawaiian, and the principles of each are under-
stood, it will be seen that poverty of language has nothing whatever to
do with the latter system. The relationships which seem to be unreal
and arbitrary may be found, in the sequel, to be those actually existing
when the system was formed.

In the Hawaiian there are five grades of relatives, as follows : My-
self, my brothers and sisters, and my first, second, third, and more
i-eniote cousins, are the first grade. These are my brothers and sisters
without distinction. My father and mother and their brothers and sis-
ters, together with their several cousins, as before, are the second grade.
These, without distinction, are my parents. My grandfather and his
brothers and sisters, and iny grandmother and her brothers and sisters,
on the father's side and on the mother's side, together with their sev-
eral cousins, as before, are the third grade. These are my grand-
parents. Below me, my sons and daughters and their several cousins
are the fourth grade. These are ray children. My grandsons and
granddaughters, and their several cousins, are the fifth grade. These
are my grandchildren.* The Hawaiian system now realizes the nine
grades of relations of the Chinese (conceiving them reduced to five)
more perfectly than the Chinese itself does at the present time. An
ancient Chinese author remarks as follows : —

" All men born into the world have nine ranks of relatives. My
own generation is one grade ; my father's is one; my grandfather's is
one ; that of my grandfather's father is one ; and that of my grand-
father's grandfather is one ; thus above me are four grades. My son's
generation is one grade ; my grandson's is one ; that of lay grandson's
son is one ; and that of my grandson's grandson is one ; thus below me
are tour grades of relations : including myself in the estimate, there are
in all nine grades. These are brethren ; and although each grade be-

* All the individuals of the same grade are brothers and sisters to each other.

452 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

longs to a (lifFerent house, or family, yet they are all my relatives, and
these are called the nine grades of relations." A strong presumption
arises from a comparison of the Hawaiian and Chinese systems, that the
latter, in its original form, was identical, in all essential respects, with
the former.

It remains to notice a remarkable custom of the Hawaiians, which
had not entirely disappeared at the epoch of the establishment of the
American missions. This custom was mentioned by Judge Lorin An-
drews in explanation of a 2:>articular Hawaiian relationship in the fol-
lowing language : " The relationship of " Pinalaa " is rather am-
phibious. It arose from the fact that two or more brothers, with their
wives, and two or more sisters, with their husbands, were inclined to
possess each other in common. But the modern use of the w'ord is
that of dear friend, or intimate companion." This custom has an inti-
mate connection with the solution about to be presented.

III.. System of Relationsldp of the Ganowanian Family.

The American Indians, when related, address each other by the
term of relationship, and never by the personal name. As a custom it
is substantially universal. If nc relationship exists, the form of ad-
dress is " my friend," This custom of saluting by kin has tended to
impart as well as preserve a knowledge of the system, and to render
it perfectly familiar to all. They recognize all the relationships known
to the Aryan system, besides several which the latter does not discrim-
inate. The system, as presented in the Table below, with some modi-
fications in the different stock-languages, is now in practical daily use
throughout the Ganowanian family.

In addition to a remarkably opulent nomenclature of relationships,
some of these languages have a double set of terms for particular rela-
tionships, one of which is used by the males, and the other by the
females. It will also be found, in very many cases, that the relation-
ship of the same person to myself, a male, is different when I am
a female. Notwithstanding the great diversities created by the system,
it is logical and self-sustained throughout. .

To develop its prominent characteristics it will be necessary to pass
through the several lines, as in the former case.

The relationships of grandfather and grandmother, and of grandson
and granddaughter, are the most remote which are recognized either
in the ascending or descending series. Ancestors and descendants

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 463

above and below them ftill into the same categories respectively. In
the collateral lines persons of common descent cannot fall without
the relationship of brother or cousin. The relationship of brother and
sister is conceived in the twofold form of elder and younger, and not
in the concrete ; and there are special terms for each.

First Collateral Line.

"With myself a male, my brother's son and daughter are my son and
daughter, each of them calling me father. This is the first indicative
feature of the system. My brother's grandchildren are my grand-
children, each of them calling me grandfather.

On the other hand, my sister's son and daughter are my nephew and
niece, each of them calling me uncle. (Second indicative feature.)
My sister's grandchildren are my grandchildren, each of them calling
me grandfather.

With myself a female, the first relationships are reversed ; my broth-
er's son and daughter are my nephew and niece, each of them calling
me aunt; whilst my sister's son and daughter are equally my son and
daughter, each of them calling me mother. The children of these
nephews and nieces, sons and daughters, are, without distinction, my
grandchildren, each of them calling me grandmother. In each of the
cases above named, as well as in those hereafter stated, the primary
terms are used in their primary sense, e. g. I call my brother's son my
son, when I speak to him, the same as though he were my own son.

Second Collateral Line.

My father's brother is my father, and calls me his son. (Third in-
dicative feature.) His son and daughter are my bi'other and sister,
elder or younger according to our respective ages. (Fourth indicative
feature.) With myself a male, the children of this collateral brother
are my sons and daughters, each of them calling me father ; whilst the
children of this collateral sister are ray nephews and nieces, each of
them calling me uncle. The children of each are my grandchildren,
each of them calling me grandfather. On the contrary, with myself a
female, the children of this collateral brother are my nephews and
nieces, each of them calling me aunt ; whilst the children of this col-
lateral sister are my sons and daughters, each of them calling me
mother. Their children in like manner are my grandchildren, each of
them calling me grandmother.

454 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

My father's sister is my aunt. (Fifth indicative feature.) Her
son and daughter are my cousin.s, each of them calhng me cousin.
With myself a male, the children of this male cousin are my sons and
daughters, whilst the children of my female cousins are my nephews
and nieces. On the contrary, with myself a female, the children of my
male cousins are my nephews and nieces, whilst the children of my
female cousins are ray sons and daughters. The children of each of
the latter are my grandchildren.

My mother's brother is my uncle. (Sixth indicative feature.) His
son and daughter are my cousins, and their descendants follow in the
same relationships respectively as in the last case.

My mother's sister is my mother. (Seventh indicative feature.)
Her son and daughter are my brother and sister, elder or younger.
(Eighth indicative feature.) The children and descendants of this col-
lateral brother follow in the same relationships respectively as the
descendants of my father's brother first above given.

Third Collateral Line.

This line is a counterpart in all respects of the first and second, with
some additional relationships. My grandfather's brother is my grand-
father. (Ninth indicative feature.) His son is my father ; the son
and daughter of this father are my brother and sister, elder or younger ;
the children of this collateral brother, myself a male, are my sons and
daughters ; of this collateral sister are my nephews and nieces, and
their children are my grandchildren. With myself a female the same
changes must be made as in the former cases.

My grandfather's sister is my grandmother; her daughter is my
aunt; the children of this aunt are ni}'- cousins ; and the children and
descendants of the latter follow in the same relationships as before.

My grandmother's brother is my grandfather ; his son is my uncle ;
the children of this uncle are my cousins ; and the children and
descendants of these cousins follow in the same relationships as before.

In like manner my grandmother's sister is my grandmother ; her
daughter is my mother ; the children of this mother are my brothers
and sisters, elder or younger ; and the children and descendants of this
collateral brother and sister follow in the same relationships as in
previous cases.

The fourth and fifth collateral lines are counterparts of the first
three, as will be found by consulting the subjoined Table.

I

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES : FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 455

In each of the foregoing the collateral lines are finally brought into
and merged in the lineal line, which is a fundamental characteristic of
the system. Tiiis also gives the tenth indicative feature. Certain
relationships are here called " indicative," because they determine
those which precede and follow them ; and because they embrace so
much which is radical and fundamental, that, when they are found
present in different systems of relationship, the identity of these sys-
tems may be considered established.

The Seneca-Ii'oquois system of consanguinity and affinity, as given in
the Table, now prevails, with modifications, in upwards of seventy
Indian nations. Its radical characteristics are found in their several
systems with such striking exactness as apparently to leave no doubt
that it was derived into each stock-language with the blood from a
common original source.

Another fact, not less significant, remains to be mentioned, namely,
that the system of relationship of the people of South-India speaking
the Dravidian language, and numbering upwards of twenty-eight mil-
lions, is identical, with the exception of two or three unimportant
particulars, with the Seneca-Iroquois. The same system, greatly mod-
ified by Sanskritic influence, also pi'evails among the people of Noi-th-
India speaking the Gaura language, and numbering upwards of one
hundred millions ; and also, with further modifications, among the
Chinese and Japanese.

For the purpose of comparison, and also for reference to the Asiatic
form in the solution of the origin of the classificatory system, the Sen-
eca-Iroqouis and the Tamil systems are placed side by side in the
following Table.

456

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

c
0
'■3
_d
'fi

a
2

a

a

p.

to

a
<z

%
1

My 3d grandfather
. " " grandmother

" 2d grandfather
. " " grandmother

" grandfather

" grandmother

" father

" mother

" son

" daughter

" grandson

" granddaughter

" 2d grandson

" " granddaughter

" 3d grandson

" ' granddaughter

" elder brother

" " sister

" younger brother

" " sister

" brothers {Sanskrit)

" sisters "

" son

" dau'ter-in-law & niece

" daughter

•' son-in-law & nephew

" grandson

" granddaughter

" 2d grandson

« " granddaughter

" nephew

" daughter

" niece

" son

" grandson

" granddaughter

I' 2d grandson

" " granddaughter

" nephew

if .
1 §.

; ■!•

3 s-, a
a-^ o-s a- a --e

22 3 3 '1 • -a i 1^. Ill
a a p. P.-P. P.S -^ a s p,'p..s a ^ •§ ^ J 'S >g

' o-k ' ' ' a-s .
•- -a • '£-a ^ • II a

ai.i,.:i a:a;„.:i 1

■rt )= :s )= a s -3 ,3 ,« ,3 ,rt a s .3 )3

-rt « ■•« :g ,^i; a- :« >« !« >« <5 <S g ' >§

3 a a a p. P..J5 a a a a p- P..- a

a-Iroquois Indians
the Druvidian La

a
.2

a
t

E-i

My grandfather
" grandmother
" graiidfatlier
" grandmother
" grandfather
" grandmother
" father
" mother
" son

" daughter
" grandson
" granddaughter
" grandson
" granddaughter
" grandson
" granddaughter
" elder brother
" " sister
" younger brother
" " sister
" brothers
" sisters

" son .

" daughter-in-law

" daughter

" son-in-law

" grandson

» granddaughter

'' graudso'n

" granddaughter

" nephew

" daughter-in-law

" niece

" son-in-law

" grandson

" granddaughter

" grandson

" granddaughter

" nephew

2

of the Senec
il Dialect of

0

P. 3

■3 a"

•m 2

%^

S '^
^ a

a
. . . 'a

a

Oo2o2'b:;2°'5=3*rt=*=3tScj:^io3H=!

ja 0 si 0 si oja asiie.siii.siitsiiisi ceja-a-a

ha-ah'-wuk .

ka'-s.ih' .

ka-ah-wuk .

oc-na'-hosc

ha-y-A'-da

ka-yU'-da .

ha-yU'-da

ka-y'i'-da .

ha-yii'-wan-da

ka'-sa

ka-ya'-wan-da

oc-na'-hosc

ha-yU'-da

ka-yil'-da .

ha-yll'-da

ka-y'.i'-da

ha-soh'-neh .

tfl

00

a
0

"S
8

g -

m of Rel
speaking

1'
•1

1

1 My great-grandfather's father .

2 " " " mother

3 ■' great-grandfather

4 " " grandmother

5 " grandfather ....

6 " grandmother ....

7 " father. ....

8 " mother .....

9 " son

10 " daughter .....

11 " grandson ....

12 " granddaughter ....

13 " great-grandson . . . .

14 '• great-granddaughter

15 " great-grandson's son

Ifi " " " daughter

17 " elder brother . . . .

18 " " sister ....

19 " younger brother . . . .

20 " » sister ....

21 " brothers ....

22 " sisters .....

Syste
India

- - - - - §

1

iJomparative Table of the
South-

23 " brother's son {m
2-t " " son's wife '

25 " " daughter '

26 " " daughter's husband '

27 " " grandson

28 " " granddaughter '

29 " " great-grandson '

30 " " " granddaughter '

31 " sister's son '
33 " " son's wife

33 " " daughter '

34 " " daughter's husband '

35 " " grandson '

36 " " granddaughter '

37 " " great-grandson '

38 " " " granddaughter '

39 " brother's son {fen

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES, FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 457

iJcJi

5 'H

S.^.i^-? ^'u . ^

■3 ^ f " :S ,fe :S ,S ,S ^ .j; ;^ S 1 3 ,5 1 ,§ |^-| 1 g^s ^

I • £ I I -11 -J, -SI • • • ■ ^ . . . I .

■V-fe bC M.-v-fe SB bo. S55j3S'Sa- • • • blfc. ^ .Q.

I a^Si^:§ SSi^?^§- a-°a-v-^to| Is -I • S^S ^Sda-faas ^

gojaescjcSosasaasscesS a? -S =^'S-S5oaP-9SS'aSgc3cia— aa-^aaooS'

rt--ot-tjt-i.oSt30t-t-ft.ta -Siio.£3ot-o^=3.ii2o-ai5t.t.cSoo.2oot-o2

■3 a ct bcajMboto'c-c! tc bohcM scS to u ?-, »j aj >-.^ MaTjaaaa-TStticcjocooKocxisa

I

■tl! 1 . . . ^ ^ . . . -3 . .

SAl^o ■"•"" a J^x3j=:.aaj=!a.i.^ uo-S-ga-S-g^-d

■» 9 -S o "rt »5 rf ?* ^^ •? S ^ '* ■"* ^■^ '^'= ^^'a 9 ^ '?r i* m ■& t^ ioS^-g^^i!:;!:^ --'"■-'"- - '^ -
— cc J? '/; a !fi >-■ T"- >" :« J-' ci a >-• >> >-> >-• 7 a 'T" ';'• M.5i ™ -^^ c; « s ^ >i cj >. k

I (:eo3c3^e3=<3c3c3ric36cdc3c3d"in: t!:-tf"(?3j3-a'c3c3cdc5drtdc3cSc3drtX30'i:'3jij'i3Jc-;<75rf

a

tuo . bjD tu) bjt)

eS-::-:--- e- ei e-

isv

-a-:

^

«

■*

^

^

-

^

■rt

a

'"^ '^' s; («e^C'wc3'*^tt 'u'S <ae !ii5i

J; = s-

-a Si;

a

<v

.. - • — . - » - !j t-*-^ "S- „ g" s

--"--•---- .s^ fees t, d s'ag d

S ^ ■ »- I" » — "^.?' M- .? ad" *i

"■- "Si 3 a ^'i^odSsgaSaa 3 £i\§ .yto^ ^.?

aSSSiS-^SS^SS^fcc-dja >-g ^,„

in Oo?3e:t-t-^-^^ tcoQ

5, - - - , -S, -- ^- - , I |_ ^

^ -S tS2 <2

>*^

^.^-^-^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^.^^^^^-^^^^-. ,.*--.----. ^

VOL.- VII. 58

458

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

s

3

o

S"

c»

.5^

S;«a

OJ o fe

S fc c .2

c-c S.-V ^

ho V

^2 g.22

rg

o :3

J I 1 II ^'llls^li III

..C3 . -^ «- tecs'" ::T'-""r fci i-cSSm

., .a Sj3,-a-5a, a mH eg j3 Sj3 ,asa) t.-^ii.'^ hc-r S ja S .c ^ 2 Is

s SSSw • ^« "§

i . . • . v-s,=- ^ .S-° ■ . • . § ^

)rt xa _ n 5 C 2 C-iB irt i« !rt -3 s o.,S '5 .Q J3 2 :cs )« -rt jrt P.

aa a a a a S.c,a a a as a a ia s a a s a a a^io.'S5s4 a «s aaaaaaaa a s-UaS

"fc-

'OPPitP'dMltaBPBOoaiOU^xP'apPtf. P-aMboP a)»^ot,ai ^.O oiP'CPpMP'dbEbD SCtS

^...... ............ ........ ...................

• ,g 4 • • =? • ■ ■ 4 ■§ ■ • •<?•■• a ^

-■ 2a-' -'-.-'-' -' o T t- £ f g "- -' SI-' jp- -i- -' ' -' j:3 o ^7 ,^- - J2 ■ i • - - -' -' .• o-3

^ O rti! JS :ci .a r-J :< P )tf -re Jrt ai ■« :rt -rt -P C x: o ■* -^ i=* -P "^ :"i » P £. M R Si. &'* -P O a c ■« -P >n! a :« :iJ "' "3

Gakciiicik&oJ:j:J:J:J:J:^. akciaiakciTisio oTt'n s:s:':3 a k it si k ^ a i ci a s ola

«

^-^^^'-^/-N. *^^^^^ ^"^^^ C^^^ O'^

MUM- • ii-H isis!.s!,s-.- ^i-|l ^s^^isS* •

^ 'I • • I . a I p^' -J 1^ --a-

g § rag -^ -a. - i •S'3 5 I g::^ g-s fl

g-S gg„, ^jpja.;/. toss-- a ^SSS^'§:5 ""^fcSS

„o gJ-'^J. -ggigi ii -a & ■ Sa ag=p^i-3 Ss^^

a^s e^.?! jsSS'ciTSS "O ^£.a

co la ^ 'm OQ ^

'<c m rJ3 *"

M "i. 'fci . ^

1^ ^ C^ t-i

3 a ""■''''' a ""■'■' $"

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES, FEBRUARY 11, 1868.

459

a

EH

a

o-'S g o- g^

J3 « ^^ U) S 60 S --U ^1 SSmO S

-fl S bc-a t- o 8d « bc^ u u .'n 5ic H oj 1, ca

■g-" ^ angW'S. Kd35 f. e 3 S "IS ■" «-os:g£^„ a|

gS -S SfS HO a5 Si -g „ g^l a a-SS. ^ g ^^a a a5 S 5-i „ S a^a Q & a J ^ a So
|§gg-i.2ggg°2 £-g.23S2gSg^ &gS = gggo|gg-g.a3gg^g|glS^

>,^ - - ^ - .. ---»-»»--».-„.,„-„, .„^^„. -„-----------

a " "

66

• • • • •t>^>-i" • • • • • • • • • • • • _^ • •

Xtf bJD bJ) OQ -^ r/ 'O

J .1.3. 1^^°:3 S . ^ .?ai I . ^1 Is- '-ia ■'^

is^sl-l fl--;^esl|l|l2 a-3|l'ill-s|« «r-|'5i|-,S'i,g|s fl-sll s.^ dl

5; a rt -ce .rf >t< '^ ,s 3 >> a a :« -a ;cs :cs ,g ,55 ,i; -jj ?« ■« s« m >« !* ,5^ ,i', ^ >, a c ,01 ;« its ai j- i- = -s j^ ks t; s

g-.g s a a s aa H.5 s s a a a a 'S.'S.'d. a a a a a a a 'S-'S. 'S.^ s s a a a a 'S.<s.l ais a ».§

a-.^-..--...-^-------j-.-;--------^--.--.-----.-------~.-

— o

■3 a

V

■a J-
of

7 bo

sig

a. a
ai3

S 1-

ago

s-§ g

GJ Cd S rt

.=! t- t- ^

a he M M

a a £

a D 3

3 O O
si :j V

J3

?-a

S =p a a a —
a eg n ^

a a

" -a -,
•9 ^'' g a
a 0.3 5 cs

fcc^a
a 3 S

02 'i a

■3 -3 T3

. tB sj t^

-a Ti a J3

sgsii

• ..J

a o

o a

■ ' ^M*'^Cy''"TO^*^*^^ ^^ ^ ^4/ ^'W ^^ i*^ ^1 '""^ ^ - " ^K UJ ' — ^u ^w ^U W"^ . -^ ^ uu KW

a.S-gsa!-t.aooo«'=s-'^s2'-''a2oa;o--'3t<f^SSrfoS!2
aSa'3tal)bl)t(JSoOwa'CaichI)6ljBa)>>aiBBt3hDBIltJ3 bC^S S bo bo

.axj

• a o) -3 o)
i "ii ii -Z, is

" ra m c^ X
s IS oj d

.a .11: .1:: .t<

jdxJ

Cl

0)

0^

C

3

Bi!

rt

s

•^^

UJ

:7i

:ci a

-a

-a

0)

J3

.1>

~C1)

t

r:ti

•rf.

0

ci

'rt

-ri :>ri

j3kS^

>i>.

tC iiD to :f> :?

?%qj

j= -g -2 •" -s ^ -a

id rf O) r» I

a c8 c3

IS
T3

03
•3

a J^

K< 3

a-a

:Ji 3

cS S"
J3 .i!

. J3 J3 j3
) cS cS c3

c3 cS

,' .,' o o fr- t- -rH - ja - ~ J^ J3 ^ — J ^' -' .
:rJ rrS f B Kfi «S .a o J= O ■■■* •■'< o 0) (C S,)CS .a kS .d i
>i >^~ • bo bo c« or. cS w >i >^ to S^'T* 7" >> ci »mS

j;^j3ja cs cs.aja.M.M;3ji o a a a, Asm ^.

to a>

-' O O —
J ::tf op "2 r2

I « o J-*
J S3 O O :rt
3^ ja J3X1

ja ^ o

o3 «s "b
AA o

S

•I
-^^ ^

ij " s c^ A
"S S "^ bll

bo

a

Oi

A

•a

u u
bfiso

)- 9

as ^

bjo

A
bO-
3 -

• c«

•a

e -

i^

S « S . S

0.-^0 bO

a 3

0)

BC-
3'

cS

6 sS

•a -a
a B

^

.S

■s

<o

c

■iJ

c

5

^

<s.

t.

^

'^

^

a

^

A
bC

QQ

3

I I

■^a a
vJo ^

•a -3
a a

03 c3
^ i- U
- bo bO

faj^ e

S^.

a .«.

O i o -

.a

bO^

. 3 .

c3

o i

"bi bo:; -

bO .33

Sri
•a -a

- a> - - - - -
"A - -

bo
J,

2^

bO

■ « M

2-a
* bo;
• •a a

t-'i,'3
o « - -

S .S

a
9 -

a>

3

-a

bo

3
cS

•a

•^^
A
bo

3 2

tJD

■^l a

0 m

Sa^

5 a-
= g- 3

■ad

cs _

g- _

bo gi

A^

a>

A~

.=3

^ ^ A^ ■-

- » 3 c ;

a

j3;

J3- ^ :i

OiC'^c<icoTt<iooi-ooo50'-^;-iM^irt-.ot^coo:oi--oieoTj<iot5t~-coq;o-jHMjj;ot--c»m

I-^I-4r^rHl-^rHI-^I— (r-ffHrHrHrHrHT-HrHrHi— (iHrHi-(r^rHrHrHrHr-tr-ir-(r-(r-(rHrHrHr-lr-4i-lrHT-1I-(T-HrHrHl-(

460

PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

s:j a

i^

::5 *j

tH

o '-'

fe?n°

'■^K

i_

«

r-^

Nl

2

11^

-2

^

to

2--!

O"

1 §'^

.5

«

o

ir 5 3

X

g gs.

_aj

e„:3 h.

o

u

s

^ g ^

2

rS

^ 2

03 is 5 .S

a. 2 c-t^fc: S=o o

" a<2 Sacs .5^5 JS.

J-TdS

*> a

ca,^=iiJ"Tt,.-sa-SoS •- S

=^ d 1* o a -- •.'T I w

3 ■« 3 -^ -r ^ rr. 3i ^

a

- «

a

•^ ^ Mia a v^>,g 1^-a'a^

CO

s^^ ■ •.-- • -siri -1 • • ?!>• 1 • i >i'4 -i

— ?^ .Sr •--7 3 •= 2 a .:« cW

=*1^g .'Ea- a:a .'2-°'2 . .^^'^-a .^'« ^. ooaaSa.^^ ^^-^^ -2

^ 2 -2 f. T-i= >3 --la >:i s c a £,2--^ — a '^

.>3'S aaa,2a 2:^ .__ ,§•? a-= a d'a

;§,i>^'g<3 ?i,c-J-2'a<3 =sS,^3>|<S,§'|'2-2'5'2-3 S ,S '5 5 S.-IS -S 'g :^ '5 "^ ^ S « 5:a

,p.^S a a.a P.a a a p-.a »■■« cs a a^ aaaaaaa waactdaacsaSo'. .isacioi _

rt a S a

a5sgaaa-r»^aaB5So3-5^,i,jTS^:S'S?o.c.=.a, «-S- Ssss .g

c«o-^fflrtc=«i33recec3o-3BcS3-S^O*2o33^g- — ^ O -u 5gm

fccaa)ab£bDfcfi3«xbcbcbx}aaja tt-a pv.e'*-3x'^MxxM .q S '^'^.2

"^ J3X1 .
... • • ci oj

S il i -' o S o S -' J « ® _ja -i -J, .S ii -' s ^1 ^' J ^ o J o o -'=?-'-? J =S J =?.'=? rt « -T -T £

X ?.-=i X >)-^ -^ ^ to d ^ X <f >-.v •p>.sp>.^^aBaJ'i3VT — !f> tc>.tO!;fc;>->to>)tcegaa="

""ooSdc30ooj3dc«'b'boia"s3d3e:|<auio"ceO(i"d"o3 tsiicijaooajjdjaooooS

oa1e.aj^j3J3cej=jaooad-!<:^-a-ajaoooo.aj3oj34« jao3jatsaa.Mo3.i«aBfl tea S

. ^ . . .^^ ■ • Cto

• |^s=- -^^ • • =&-a

crs ^ ^~ e <u 3

^ti]x ^Sg )..5^

53 "t. ~^§ .S'.S.?... . ...

* C-§ -S ■ C C> w S ^- '-' — -> ■ '^

S « M ■ § § • ^ -^ S S .s" . • • "^.s* •

fe.^Si aSS g^.-^gi ■^^ ^ -S-S

^lil-^- -S-S -Ssgi S' -f- ■|S^ • •

.a|£| •"gr=- '^^^^. .se -^-S -S^-s^ •

m-Stj ga, .2 .§2 3 -a • • • • ■ • •■S^ '-^^^ •• -■S ^

""^ s p 2 If ^ . . •J' J s -5 ;; .5 ^ « =, c °

•i. •• ■* 0 -^ ^ "= ^ ' 2 '' -^ .? I -^ § ^ ^ S .?=

S ^ a- - - - - a- ^ - - - 1^- 5i--j^-?-j:-«?~-g.^ • •

■<g i - 3 - 00 ai h S."? ' 'S' S' s '-■ ~ '-^ >- ~'S

-U 5-„...^5 5o t..d. .fc, fe:_

i

^ ^ •'"■ 5€rs25 ■S5S.2 -?■

s " aa-^S-ri^soiig^S .2 ,«

'" ® S S§.xajd<5a§'3.c-sg ^ feS^

^i:j-i^.:-j3::::^:: = ::::^ »<2" ig:: agg-. .^ o •2jss.:^.'2.-2|

s - ^ -.--.---

..i* iC '-O I^ OC O^ O ^H (M CO -.^ lO '^ I - CC 05 O r-< ri CO -t^ '(^ «0 r^ CC 05 <^ ^^ ?1 CC .Tt^ »0 ^-£^ i^ OC 05 O' r-< M CO -^ >C O l^ 00 Ci

i--i~i~i-i-t~a:'aoa:cccccccccocc(Xoa53235Cnoiffi:^oio>coQOOOOooo-:l— <i-^i-H'-H--^r^

r^rt!Hr.1rtr-<r-lrtr-<rtr-lrtrti-Hi-^rtrHr-,r.(rtrtrHi--li-Hrti--INCTe5C^(rilNNC'1ININCae-1C-1C-lC^C'lC-lC-lC<IC<J

OP ARTS AND SCIENCES, FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 461

The identity of the Seneca-Iroquois and the Tamil is demonstrated
by a bare inspection. It is no part of my present purpose to attempt to
show how this identity can be explained ; but it may be premised that
there are but four hypotheses conceivable for its explanation, which
are the following : — 1. By borrowing one from the other. 2. By acci-
dental invention by diiferent peoples in disconnected areas ; treating
the system as arbitrary and artificial. 3. By spontaneous growth or
development in similar conditions of society and in disconnected areas ;
treating the system as natural. 4. By inheritance, with the blood,
from a common original source.

The first assumes territorial connection, and the consequent Asiatic
origin of the Ganowanian family : and it may therefore be dismissed.
Tiie second is an impossible hypothesis. As the system embodies
upwards of twenty independent particulars, the improbability of their
accidental concurrence in the Seneca-Iroquois and the Tamil increases
with the addition of each particular from the first to the last; becoming,
finally, an impossibility. The third hypothesis is substantial. It as-
sumes that the system is natural in its origin, and in accordance with
the nature of descents ; consequently, it must further assume that the
ancestors of the Seneca-Iroquois and of the Tamilian people of India,
if created in separate and independent zoological provinces, must not
only have passed through the same experiences, but also have devel-
oped, through great reformatory movements, precisely the same
sequence of customs and institutions, to have wrought out by natural
development or organic growth the Ganowanian system in America
and the Turanian system in Asia; the two remaining identical after
having been transmitted with the blood through centuries of time.
It will be found, in the sequel, and after the most critical examination,
that the fourth hypothesis, that of its transmission with the. blood
from common ancestors, will prove the most satisfactory.

I am aware that the foregoing presentation of the Aryan, Malayan,
Ganowanian, and Turanian systems of relationship is far too brief and
incomplete to i-ender entirely satisfactory the following solution of the
origin of the classificatory system. But it will serve to indicate some
of the conclusions to which the facts appear to tend.

The origin of the classificatory system, in view of its character and
spread among the families of mankind, becomes a matter of deep im-
portance. It is to be presumed that the recognized relationships were
those which actually existed at the time the system was formed. If

462 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

this be true, then the system embodies a record of primitive customs
and institutions of great significance. We have seen that the system
of the Aryan family is a natural system, following the streams of the
blood ; but that it was founded upon marriage between single pairs.
Wherefore it rests exclusively upon this form of marriage, and not
upon natural suggestion. It is, at least, supposable that a state of
society might have existed in the primitive ages in which marriage
between single pairs, as well as the family in its modern sense, was
entirely unknown. Whilst mankind were in this state, a system of
consanguinity might have arisen entirely different from the Aryan
form, and yet follow the streams of the blood, and be in strict accord-
ance with the nature of descents. For example, it might rest, as be-
fore intimated, upon compound marriages in a communal family. In
some such state of society as this the classificatory system must have
originated.

I propose to take up the Malayan , system of i-elationship as the
earliest stage of the classificatory, and to submit a conjectural solution
of its origin upon the assumed concurrent existence of "certain customs
and institutions. It will rest for the most part upon the assumed in-
termarriage or cohabitation of brothers and sisters in a communal
family. After this I shall present a further conjectural solution of
the origin of the remainder, or Turanian portion of the system, upon
the basis of the Tribal Organization. These are the essential condi-
tions ; but they draw to themselves other customs and institutions of
hardly secondary importance.

These solutions will enable us to construct upon them, as founda-
tions, a great series of customs and institutions, in the order of their
development, by means of which the human family raised itself through
a long, and savage experience from a state of promiscuous intercourse
to a knowledge of the family in its modern sense.

Mankind, if one in origin, must have become subdivided at a very
early period into independent nations, followed by the rapid formation
of dialects and stock-languages, the latter repeated over and over again
to the present time. Unequal progress has been .made by these sev-
eral stocks. Some of them still remain in a condition not far removed
from the primitive ; others are found in all the intermediate stages of
progress on to complete civilization. It is not improbable that all the
customs and institutions of mankind which have arisen at different
epochs are still existing in some portions of the human family. Those

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 468

which have been most effective for man's advancement must have been
of slow growth, and of still slower diffusion among the nations. They
are to be regarded as the great remaining landmarks of man's progress,
whilst the mass of minor influences which contributed to their adoption
have fallen out of knowledge.

The customs and institutions relating to the family state, and in the
probable order of their orgination, may be stated as the following : —

I. Promiscuous Intercourse.

II. Intermarriage, or Cohabitation, of Brothers and Sisters. Giving

III. The Communal Family. (First Stage of the Family.)

IV. The Hawaiian Custom. Giving, with II.,

V. The Malayan Form of the Classificatory System of Relation-
ship.
VI. The Tribal Organization. Giving

VII. The Turanian and Ganowanian Systems of Relationship.
VIII. Marriage between Single Pairs. Giving
IX. The Barbarian Family. (Second Stage of the Family.)
X. Polygamy. Giving

XI. The Patriarchal Family. (Third Stage of the Family.)
XII. Polyandria.
XIII. The Rise of Property, with the Settlement of Lineal Succession

to Estates. Giving
XIV. The Civilized Family. (Present Stage of the Family.)
Causing
XV. The Overthrow of the Classificatory System of Relationship,
and the Substitution of the Descriptive.

Given, the second and fourth customs, the origin of the Malayan
system can be demonstrated from the nature of descents, and the re-
lationships shown to be those actually existing. In like manner, the
second, fifth, and sixth of these customs and institutions being given,
the origin of the Turanian and Ganowanian systems can be explained
in the same manner, and to the same effect. Whether, given the Tu-
ranian system of relationship, the antecedent existence of these cus-
toms and institutions can be legitimately inferred, will depend upon the
probability of their prevalence from the nature of human society, and
from what is known of its previous conditions. It may be confidently
affirmed that this great sequence of customs and institutions, although
in part hypothetical, will organize and explain the body of ascertained

464 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

facts, with respect to the primitive condition of mankind, in a manner
so singularly and surprisingly adequate as to invest it with a strong
probability of truth.

All of these, except the first three, have existed within the histori-
cal period, and still prevail in large portions of the human family.
The assumption, as to them, is limited to their mutual relations as
members of a series.

With respect to the first three, namely, Promiscuous Intercourse,
the Intermarriage of Brothers and Sisters, and the Communal Family,
their prevalence will be assumed ; although there is strong evidence
tending to render probable the first two, and decisive evidence of the
existence of communal families in the barbarous nations of the present
time.

The Hawaiian custom, which has been explained, is the fourth in
the series. It is a compound form of polygynia and polyandria, since,
under one of its branches, the several brothers live in polygynia, and
their wives in polyandria ; and, under the other, the several sisters live
in polyandria, and their husbands in polygynia. In other words, it is
promiscuous intercourse within prescribed limits. Its existence, as a
custom, seems to iniidy antecedent unregulated promiscuous inter-
course, involving the cohabitation of brothers and sisters as its most
common form ; thus finding mankind in a state akin to that of the
inferior animals. It seems pr(^bable that the Hawaiian custom still
embodies the evidence of an organic movement of society to extricate
itself from a worse condition than the one it produced. In effect, it
was a compact between several brothers to defend their common
wives, and a like compact between the husbands of several sisters to
defend their common wives, against the violence of society; thus im-
plying the existence of a perpetual struggle amongst the males for the
possession of the females.

And this brings us to an important general proposition, namely, tluit
the principal customs and institutions of mankind have originated in,
and can only be explained as, great reformatory movements of society.
If this sufficiently explains the origin of the Hawaiian custom, it must
be regarded as one of a series of similar movements, by means of which
mankind emerged from a state of promiscuous intercourse, and through
a long and painful experience attained to marriage between single
pairs, and finally to the family as it now exists.

I propose now to submit a conjectural solution of the origin of the

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 465

Malayan system upon the basis of the assumed intermarriage of
brothers and sisters, and upon the Hawaiian custom.

It will be remembered that under this sj'stem the primary relation-
ships only are recognized and named. These terms are applied to
consanguinei in a definite manner, by means of which they are reduced
to as many great classes as there are primary relationships. No dis-
tinction is made between lineal and collateral consanguinei, except that
they are distributed into classes. In a word, all consanguinei are either
fathers or motliers to each other, or brothers or sisters, sons or daugh-
ters, grandparents or grandchildren. It follows that a knowledge of
the degrees, numerically, forms an integral part of the system, with
certainty of parentage within prescribed limits.

I. All the children of ray several brothers, myself a male, are my
sons and daughters. Reason : I cohabit with all my brothers' wives,
who are my own wives as well (using the terms husband and wife in
the sense of the custom). As it would be impossible for me to distin-
guish my own children from those of my brothers, if I call any one
my child, I must call them all my children. One is as likely to be
mine as another.

II. All the grandchildren of my several brothers are my grand-
children. Reason: They are the children of my sons and daughters.

III. With myself a female, the fofegoing i-elationships are the same.
The reason must be sought in the analogies of the system. As my
several brothers are my husbands, their children by other wives would
be my step-children, which relationship being unrecognized they natu-
rally fall into the category of my sons and daughters. These must be
the relationships, or none.

IV. All the children of my several sisters, myself a male, are my
sons and daughters. Reason : I cohabit with all my sisters, who are
my wives.

V. All the grandchildren of my several sisters are my grandchil-
dren. Reason : They are the children of my sons and daughters.

VI. All the children of my several sisters, myself a female, are my
sons and daughters. Reason : I cohabit with all the husbands of my
sisters, who are my husbands as well. This difference, however, exists.
I can distinguish my own children from those of my sisters, to the lat-
ter of whom I am a step-mother. But since this relationship is not
discriminated they fall into the category of sons and daughters,

VOL. vir. 59

466 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

VII. All the children of several own brothers are brothers and sis-
ters to each other. Reason : These brothers cohabit with all the
mothers of these children. Among their reputed fathers none of these
children can distinguish their own father; but among the wives of these
several brothers, they can distinguish their own mother : whence, as
to the former, they are brothers and sisters to each other, but as to the
latter, whilst the children of a common mother are brothers and sisters
to each other, these are step-brothers and step-sisters to the children
of their mother's sisters. They thus, for reasons stated in similar
cases, fall into the relationships of brother and sister.

VIII. The children of these collateral brothers and sisters are also
brothers and sisters to each other ; the children of the latter are
brothers and sisters again ; and these relationships continue down-
ward amongst their descendants indefinitely, at equal removes from
the common ancestor. An infinite series is thus created, which be-
comes a fundamental part of the system. It is not easily ex-
plained. The Hawaiian custom, as stated, is limited to several
own brothers and their wives, and to several own sisters and their
husbands. To account for this infinite series, it must be further as-
sumed that this privilege of barbarism extended wherever the relation-
ship of brother and sister was recognized to exist ; each brother having
as many wives as he had sisters, and each sister having as many hus-
bands as she had brothers, whether own or collateral.

IX. All the children of several own sisters are brothers and sisters
to each other ; all their children are brothers and sisters again ; and
so downward indefinitely. Reasons as in VII. and VIII.

X. All the children of several own brothers on the one hand, and
of their several own sisters on the other, are brothers and sisters to
each other ; the children of the latter are brothers and sisters again ;
and so downward indefinitely. Reasons as in VII. and VIII.

XI. All the brothers of my father are my fathers ; and all the
sisters of my mother are my mothers. Reasons as in I., III., and VI.

XII. All the sisters of my father are my mothers ; and all the
brothers of ray mother are my fathers. Reasons : . My father cohabits
with all his sisters, and my mother cohabits with all her brothers.

XIII. All the children of my collateral brothers and sisters are,
without distinction, my sons and daughters. Reasons as in I., III.,
IV., and VI.

XIV. All the children of the latter are my grandchildren. Rea-
ons as in II.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 467

XV. All the brothers and sisters of my grandfather, and all the
brothers and sisters of my grandmother, are my grandparents. Rea-
son : They are the fathei's and mothers of my father and mother.

Every blood-relationship recognized under the Malayan system is
thus explained from the nature of descents, and is seen to be the one
actually existing, as near as the parentage of the individual could be
known, with the exception of a limited number, which seem to have
originated in the analogies of the system. The system, therefore,
follows the streams of the blood, instead of thwarting or diverting its
currents. It appears to have originated in the intermarriage or cohab-
itation of brothers and sistei's in a communal family, the assumption of
which, as a custom, is necessary to explain its origin from the nature
of descents. When the Hawaiian custom, which finds its type in the
intermarriage of brothers and sisters, intervened, it brought into the
communal family other males and females ; but it must have left the
previous usage unaffected, otherwise several of the Malayan relation-
ships would have become untrue to the nature of descents, and
changed, as we shall hereafter see, in the case of the Turanian and
Ganowanian systems.

The origin of the several marriage relationships may be explained,
with more or less of certainty, upon the same principles.

This solution of the origin of the Malayan system, although it rests,
aside from the Hawaiian custom, upon the assumed intermarriage of
brothers and sisters, is sufficiently probable in itself to deserve serious
attention. It reveals a state of society in the primitive ages, not con-
fined to the islands of the Pacific, with the evidence of its actual
existence still preserved in this system of relationship, which we shall
be reluctant to recognize as real, and yet toward which evidence from
other and independent sources has long been pointing. It finds man-
kind, during the period anterior to the Hawaiian custom, in a bar-
barism so profound that its lowest depths can scarcely be imagined. It
is partially shadowed forth by the fact, that neither the propensity to
pair, now so powerfully developed, nor marriage in its proper sense,
nor the family, except the communal, were known ; and, above all, that
the sacredness of the tie which binds brother and sister together, and
raises them above the temptations of animal passion, had not then
dawned upon the barbarian mind.

In the next place we are to submit a conjectural solution of the

468 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY*

origin of the remainder, or Tui-anian portion of the system upon the
basis of the tribal organization.

No evidence has been presented of the prevalence of the Hawaiian
custom in Asia or America, or of the intermarriage of brothers and
sisters as a general custom. Neither is it necessary for the purpose in
hand that ^uch evidence should exist. This solution is founded upon
the assumed existence of the Malayan system in Asia anterior to the
epoch of the tribal organization ; and if these together are sufficient to
explain the origin of the Turanian system, this system then becomes to
some extent evidence of the existence of both customs, as well as of
the Malayan system in Asia.

The Turanian system was undoubtedly engi-afted upon an original
form agreeing in all essential respects with the Malayan. About half
of the Malayan relationships must be changed, leaving the other half
as they are, to produce the Turanian system. It is clear that the
Malayan could not be derived from the Turanian, since the former is
the simpler, and therefore the older form ; neither could the Turanian
be developed out of the Malayan, since it contains additional and dis-
tinctive elements. But a great change of social condition might have
occurred which would supply the new element; and such, in all prob-
ability, was the history of the transition from the one into the other.
How this change was eifected is the question. It will be seen, at
a glance, that it was only necessary to bi'eak up the intermarriage
of brothers and sisters, to change the Malayan into the Turanian form,
provided the changes in parentage, thus produced, were followed to
their logical resuks.

Following, step by step, the supposed sequence of customs and insti-
tutions which developed the classificatory system of relationship by
organic growth, it will next be assumed that the Malayan form, as its
first stage, prevailed upon the continent of Asia, among the ancestors
of the present Turanian family, at the epoch of the Malayan migration
to the islands of the Pacific. In other words, it may be conjectured that
the Malayan family took with them from Asia the form which then
prevailed, and preserved it to the present time, whilst they left the
same form behind them in the stock from which they separated. With
the Malayan system thus prevalent in Asia, it may be sup])osed that
another great organic movement of society occurred, which resulted, in
the course of time, in the establishment of the tribal organization.
This institution is so ancient and so wide-spread that its origin must

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : FEBRUARY H, 1868. 469

ascend far back toward the primitive ages of mankind. It still pre-
vails, or has prevailed, among the principal Asiatic and American
Indian nations, and also among the ancestors of several of the present
Aryan nations. It is explainable, in its origin, and only explainable,
as a reformatory movement to break up the intermarriage of blood
relations, and particularly of brothers and sisters, by compelling thera
to marry out of the tribe. With the prohibition of intermarriage in
the tribe, the cohabitation of brothers and sisters was permanently abol-
ished, since they were necessarily of the same tribe. It would neither
overthrow the Hawaiian custom, allhough it abridged its range, nor
the communal family, which harmonized with tribal life ; but it struck
at the roots of promiscuous intercourse by abolishing its worst features,
and thus became a powerful movement toward the ultimate realization
of marriage between single pairs and the true family state.

A tribe is a group of consanguinei, with descent limited either to the
male or to the female line. Where descent is limited to the male line,
the tribe would consist .of a supposed male ancestor and his children,
t02;ether with the descendants of his sons in the male line forever. It
would include this ancestor and his children, the children of his sons,
and all the children of his lineal male descendants, whilst the children
of tlie daughters of this ancestor, and all the children of his female
descendants, would be transferred to the ti'ibes of their respective
fathers. Where descent is limited to the female line, the tribe would
consist of a supposed female ancestor and her children, together with
the descendants of her daughters in the female line forever. It would
include the children of this ancestor, the children of her daughters, and
all the children of her lineal female descendants, whilst the children of
the sons of this ancestor, and all the children of her male descendants,
would be transferred to the tribes of their respective mothers. Modi-
fications of this form of the tribe may have existed, but this is the sub-
stance of the institution. No man can marry a woman of his own
tribe, whether descent is in the male or female line. All of its mem-
bers are consanguineal. This prohibition is a fundamental characteris-
tic of the tribal organization. The knowledge of a common tribal
descent is preserved by a tribal name, such as wolf, bear, or horse.

If the principles resulting from the tribal organization, so far as they
relate to parentage, are now applied to that part of the Turanian
system, which is distinctively Turanian, the relationships will be found
to be those actually existing, and to be in accordance with the nature

470 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

of descents. It will also interpret the manner in which the Turanian
element became incorporated in the system.

I. All the children of my several sisters, myself a male, are my
nephews and nieces. Reason : Since under the tribal organization
my sisters ceased to be my wives, their children can no longer be my
children, as in the Malayan, but must stand to me in a different
and more remote relationship. Whence the origin of the relationships
of nephew and niece.

II. All the children of these nephews and nieces are my grand-
children. This can only be explained from the analogy of the system.
No relationships outside of nephew, cousin, and grandson, are recog-
nized ; that of grandchild, being the one recognized under the previous
system, would be apt to remain until a new relationship was created.

III. All the children of my sevei'al brothers are still my sons and
daughters. Reason : The tribal organization does not prevent my
brother's wives from being my wives as well. The changes in the
system are confined exclusively to those which. depended upon the in-
termarria2;e of brothers and sisters.

IV. All the children of my several brothers, myself a female, are
my nephews and nieces ; and all their children are my grandchildren.
Reasons as in I. and II.

V. All the children of my several sisters, myself a female, are still
my sons and daughters ; and their children are my grandchildren.
Reason : I cohabit with all the husbands of my several sisters, who
are my own husbands as well.

VI. All the sisters of ray fathers are my aunts. Reasons : Since,
under the tribal organization, my father does not cohabit with his sis-
ters, they can no longer stand to me in the relation of mothers, but
must be placed in one more remote. Whence the relationship of aunt.

VII. All the brothers of my mother are my uncles. Reason as in
VI. Whence the relationship of uncle.

VIII. All the children of my several uncles and aunts are my cousins.
Reasons as in VI. Since they cannot be my brothers and sisters, for the
reasons named, they niust stand to me in a more remote relationship.

IX. All the children of my father's brothers are my brothei's and
sisters, and so are all the children of my mother's sisters, as in the
Malayan, and for the reasons there given.

X. All the children of my male cousins, myself a male, are my
nephews and nieces, and all the children of my female cousins are my

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES; FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 471

sons and daughters. Such is the classification in the nations of South-
India. Unless I cohabit with all my female cousins, and am excluded
from cohabitation with the wives of my male cousins, these relation-
ships cannot be explained from the nature of descents. In the Ameri-
can Indian family this classification is reversed ; the children of my
male cousins, myself a male, are my sons and daughters, and of my fe-
male cousins are my nephews and nieces. The latter are explainable
from the analogy of the system. It is a singular fact that the deviation
upon these relationships is the only one of any importance between the
Tamil and the Seneca-Iroquois. It has undoubtedly a logical expla-
nation of some kind. If it is attributable to the slight variation upon
this privilege of barbarism above indicated, a singular solution of the
difference in the two systems is thereby afforded,

XI. All the brothers of my grandfather and of my grandmother are,
without distinction, my grandfathers and gi'andmothers. Reasons as
to former same as in the Malayan ; as to the latter, the analogy of the
system.

The same course of explanation can be applied to the more remote
collateral lines, and to several of the marriage relationships, with sub-
stantially the same results ; but the solution has been carried far
enough for my present purpose. All of the indicative relationships of
the classificatory system have now been explained, and are seen to be
the relationships which existed in the communal family, as constituted
first under the Malayan system, and ultimately under the Turanian.
If the progressive conditions of society in the ages of barbarism, from
which this solution is drawn, are in part hypothetical, the system itself,
as thus explained, is found to be of organic growth, as well as simple
and natural. In any other view it must be regarded as an artificial
and arbitrary creation of human intelligence. The probable existence
of this series of customs and institutions, so far as their existence is
assumed, is greatly strengthened by the simplicity of the solution
which they affoi-d of the origin of the classificatory system in two great
stages of development.

An exposition of the entire series of customs and institutions named
together with a discussion of the historical evidence relating to each of
them, are necessary to a full appreciation of the probable correctness
of this solution. But they cover too wide a field, and embrace too
many considerations, to be treated at the present time. I have pre-
sented the naked outline, and what seemed to be the controlling propo-
sitions. This discussion, at most, is but the introduction of the subject.

472 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

The present existence of the classificatory system, with the interna
evidence of its transition from the Malayan to the Turanian form is in
itself a powerful argument in favor of the existence of the customs
and institutions previously assumed ; and also in favor of the origina-
tion of the i-emainder of the series in the order stated. All except the
first and second, and perhaps the fourth, still prevail in portions of the
human family, and are knowni to have existed as far back in the past
as the oldest historical records ascend, with abundant evidence of the
previous existence of some of them from time immemorial.

It yet remains to present a few facts with reference to .the order of
their origination as a great progressive series founded upon the growth
of man's experience, and also with reference to their reformatory
character. The establishment of this series, as a means for recovering
th(i thread of man's history through the primitive ages, is the principal
result of this solution of the origin of the classificatory system.

For the purpose of presenting a few. of these facts, it will be neces-
sary to recapitulate the series.

1. Promiscuous Intercourse. — This expresses the lowest conceiv-
able stage of barbarism in which mankind could be found. In this
condition man could scarcely be distinguished from the mutes, except
in the potential capacity of his endowments. Ignoi-ant of marriage in
its proper sense, of the family except the communal, and with the
propensity to pair still undeveloped, he was not only a barbarian, but a
savage, with a feeble intellect and a still feebler moral sense. His
only hope of elevation rested in the fierceness of his passions, and in the
improvable character of his nascent mental and moral powers. The
lessening volume of the skull and its low animal characteristics, as we
recede in the direction of the primitive man, deliver a decisive testimony
concerning his immense inferiority to his civilized descendants. The
implements of stone and flint found over the greater part of the earth
attest the rudeness of his condition when he subsisted chiefly upon
fi.-h ; leaving it doubtful whether, to become a fisherman, he had not
raised himself from a still more humble condition. That the ances-
tois of the present civilized nations were, in the primitive ages, savages
of this description, is not improbable ; neither is it a violent supposition
tliat they, as well as the ancestors of the present barbarous nations,
once lived in a state of promiscuous intercourse, of which., as to the
latter, their systems of consanguinity and affinity still embody the evi-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 473

dence. To raise mankind out of this condition could only be ac-
complished by a series of reformatory movements, resulting in the
development of a series of customs and institutions for the government
of their social life. The anchorage secured by each of these customs
and institutions tended to hold society in its advanced position, and to
prevent a relapse.

2. Intermarriage, or Cohabitation, of Brothers and Sisters, — This
practice, which the previous conditioft necessarily involved, would tend
to regulate, as well as to check, the gregarious principle. It* would
probably be the normal condition of society under this principle ; and,
when once established, would be apt to perpetuate itself through in-
definite, or, at least, immensely long, periods of time. It gives the
starting-point and the foundation of the Malayan system of relation-
ship, which, in turn, is the basis of the Turanian and Ganowanian.
Without this custom it is impossible to explain the origin of the system
from the nature of descents. There is, therefore, a necessity for the
prevalence of this custom amongst the remote ancestors of all the
nations which now possess the classificatory system, if the system itself
is to be regarded as having a natural origin.

4. The Hawaiian Custom. — The existence of this custom is not
necessary to an explanation of the origin of the Malayan system. All
it contains bearing upon this question is found in the intermarriage of
brothei's and sisters, where the brothers live in polygynia and the
sisters in polyandria ; but it holds a material position in the series, for
the reason that it was an existing and still prevalent custom in the
Sandwich Islands at the epoch of their discovery. It finds its type-
in the previous custom, out of which it naturally arose. So far as it
brought unrelated persons into the household, it was a positive advance
upon the previous condition, tending to check promiscuous intercourse,
and to relieve society from the evils of continuous intermarriage among
blood relatives. It also tended to develop still further the idea of the
communal family, and to move society in the direction of marriage be-
tween single pairs. Its reformatory character is implied from the fact,
that it imposed upon the several brothers, who shared their wives in
common, the joint obligation of their defence against the violence of
society, the necessity for which would naturally exist in such a state of
society as this custom presupposes.

5. The Communal Family. — Such a family resulted necessarily
from the intermarriage of brothers and sisters. The union of effort

VOL. VII. 60

474 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

to procure subsistence for the common household led to communism in
livino'. This probable organization of society in the primitive ages,
and which continued long after the intermarriage of brothers and sis-
ters was abolished, has not been sufficiently estimated in its relation to
the early condition of mankind. Without being able to affirm the fact,
there are'strong grounds for supposing that most barbarous nations at
the present time, although marriage between single pairs exists, are
now organized more or less into such families, and practise com-
munism as far as the same can be carried out in practical life. The
American aborigines have lived, and still live, to a greater or less
extent, in communal families, consisting of related persons, and prac-
tise communism within the household. This feature of their ancient
mode of life can still be definitely and widely traced amongst them.
It also entered into and determined the character of their architecture, —
as witness the long bark house of the Iroquois, designed to accommo-
date twenty families of related persons ; the polygonal dirt lodge of the
Minnitarees and Mandans, designed for several families ; the long houses
of the Columbia River Indians, each large enough to accommodate sev-
eral hundred persons ; and, finally, the massive communal edifices of the
Village Indians of New Mexico, Mexico, and Yucatan, some of them
large enough for fifty or a hundred families, and giving rise to fables
of palaces, which, without much doubt, were communal houses filled
with Indians living in communism. In the communal family, as first
described, is to be recognized the family in its first stage.

6. The Malayan System of Relationship. — This holds the rank of
a domestic institution, and takes its place in the series as the basis of
the Turanian system.

7. The Tribal Organization. — That this institution was designed to
work out a reformation with respect to the intermarriage of brothers
and sisters may be fairly inferred from the conspicuous manner in
which it accomplishes this result. The state of society revealed by
the Malayan system demonstrates its necessity. The origin of this
most ancient and remarkable organization seems from the stand-point
of this discussion to find a full and satisfactory explanation. It is
not supposable that it came into existence all at once, as a complete
institution ; but rather that it was of organic growth, and required
centuries upon centuries for its pei'manent establishment, and still
other centuries for its spread amongst existing nations. It was proba-
bly the greatest of all the institutions of mankind in the primitive

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 475

ages in its influence upon human progress, as well as the most widely
distributed in the human family. This gave, also, the Turanian sys-
tem of relationship.

8. Marriage between Single Pairs. — Instances of marriage between
single pairs may have, and probably did, occur in all periods, of man's
history ; but they must have been exceptional, from the necessity of
the case, in the primitive ages. After the tribal organization came
into existence, and the cohabitation of brothers and sisters was broken
up, as well as all intermarriage in the tribe, there must have been a
very great curtailment of the license of barbarism. Women for wives
became objects of negotiation out of the tribe, of barter, and of cap-
ture by force. The prevalence of these practices throughout Asia and
America is well established. Wives thus gained by personal effort,
and by purchase, would not be readily shared with others. In its gen-
eral tendency it would lead to individual contracts to procure a single
wife for a single husband, and thus tend directly to inaugurate mar-
riage between single paii-s. The immense influence of the tribal or-
ganization upon human progress toward the true family state cannot
be overestimated.

9. The Barbarian Family. — In the early ages this stage of the
family could scarcely be distinguished from the communal.

10. Polygamy. — In its relation to pre-existing customs and insti-
tutions polygamy is essentially modern. It presupposes a very great
advance of society from its primitive condition, with settled govern-
ments, with stability of such kinds of property as existed, and with
enlargement of the amount, as well as permanence, of subsistence. It
seems to spring out of antecedent customs, akin to the Hawaiian, by
natural suggestion. If this be so, then polygamy must be regarded as
having been a reformatory institution. Considered from this stand-
point, instead of a retrograde movement, it was a powerft^ advance in
the direction of the true family.

11. The Patriarchal Family. — Polygamy resulted in the establish-
ment of the patriarchal family, or the family in its third stage. A
family with a single male head was an immense advance upon the
communal. It necessitated, to some extent, a privileged class in society,
before one person would be able to support several sets of children by
several different mothers. Polygamy in its higher forms belongs to
the dawning ages of civilization.

12. Polyandria. — This custom requires no further notice.

476 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AjfERICAN ACADEMY

13. Property. Considered as an Institution. — It is impossible to
overestimate the influence of property upon the civilization of man-
kind. It was the germ, and is still the evidence, of his progress from
barbarism. The master passion of the civilized mind is for its acqui-
sition and enjoyment. Governments, institutions, and laws, all resolve
themselves into so many agencies designed for the creation and pro-
tection of property. But, above all, the desire of parents to transmit
it to their children was the great turning-point between barbarism and
civilization. When this desire, which arose with the development of
property, was consummated by the introduction of lineal succession
to estates, it revolutionized all the social ideas of barbarous society.
Marriage between single pairs became the first condition to certainty
of parentage ; and thus, in course of time, became the rule, rather than
the exception ; the interests of property required individual ownership
to stimulate personal exertion ; and the protection of the state became
necessary to render it stable. With the rise of property, considered
as an institution, with the settlement of its rights, and, above all, with
the established certainty of its transmission to lineal descendants, came
the first possibility among mankind of the true family in its modern
acceptation. All previous family states were but a feeble approxima-
tion.

14. The Family. — As now constituted, the family is founded upon
marriage between one man and one woman. A certain parentage was
substituted for a doubtful one ; and the family became organized and
individualized by property rights and privileges. The establishment
of lineal succession to property as an incident of descent overthrew,
among civilized nations, every vestige of pre-existing customs and in-
stitutions inconsistent with this form of marriage. The persistency
with which the classificatory system has followed down the families of
mankind to the dawn of civilization furnishes evidence conclusive that
property alone was capable of furnishing an adequate motive for the
overthrow of this system and the substitution of the descriptive.
There are strong reasons for believing that the remote ancestors of
the Aryan, Semitic, and Uralian families possessed the classificatory
system, and broke it up when they reached the family state in its
present sense.

Upon this family, as now constituted, modern civilized society is
organized and reposes. The whole previous expei'ience and progress
of mankind culminated and crystallized in this one great institution.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : FEBRUARY 11, 1868. 477

It was of slow growth, planting its roots far back in the ages of bar-
barism, — a final result, to whicli the experience of the ages had
steadily tended. The family, which in this view of the case is essen-
tially modern, is the offspring of this vast and varied experience of
the ages of barbarism.

Since the family was reached, it has also had its stages of progress,
and a number of them. The rise of family names, as distinguished
from the single personal name common in barbarous nations, is com-
paratively modern in the Aryan family. Th'e Roman Gens is one of
tlie earliest illustrations. This people produced the triple formula to
indicate the name of the individual, of the Gens or great family, and
of the particidar family within the Gens. Out of this arose, in due
time, the doctrine of agnation, to distinguish the relationship of the
males, who bore the family name, from that of the females of the same
family. Agnatic relationship was made superior to cognatic, since the
females were transferred, by marriage, to the families of their hus-
bands. This overthrew the last vestige of tribalism, and gave to the
family its complete individuality.

15. The Overthrow of the Classificatory System of Relationship
and the Substitution of ,the Descriptive. — Without attempting to dis-
cuss the fragments of evidence tending to show that the Aryan, Semitic,
and Uralian families once possessed the classificatory system, it will be
sufficient to remark, that, if such were the fact, the rights of property
and the succession to estates would have insured its overthrow. These
ai"e the only conceivable agencies sufficiently potent to accomplish so
gi'eat a change. Without such a change the family, as now constituted,
Avould have remained impossible.

In conclusion I may remark, that the probable truth of this solution
cannot be fully appreciated from the limited presentation of the facts
contained in this article. At most it will but serve to invite^ attention
to the great sequence of customs and institutions which seem to mark
the successive stages of man's progress through the periods of barbar-
ism, and to indicate the intimate relations which this remarkable sys-
tem of consanguinity appears to sustain to the condition, experience,
and advancement of mankind during the primitive ages. The manu-
script containing the body of the evidence is now in course of publica-
tion by the Smithsonian Institution.

478 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Five liundred and ninety-second Meeting^.

March 10, 1868. — Adjourned Statute Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Sir David Brewster of the Foreign Honorary
Members, and of Hon. Daniel Lord, of New York, of the As-
sociate Fellows.

Five liundred and ninety-third Meeting.

April 14, 1868. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The President called the attention of the Academy to the
recent decease of Dr. Samuel L. Dana, of the Resident Fel-
lows, and of Professor William Smyth, of the Associate Fel-
lows.

The following paper was presented : —

Dispersion of a Ray of Lig-ht refracted at any number of
Plane Surfaces* By Edward C. Pickering.

Let «! a^ cfa, &c., be the angles included between the surfaces, n^ n^ n^
their indices of refraction, i^ i.2 4 the angles of incidence, r^ r^ r^ the
angle of refraction ; sin i^ = % sin r-^ and in general

sin V = ''m sin v (1)

also «m = «m - 1 + *'m - 1 (2)

As the dispersion of any portion of the spectrum is always propor-
tional to the angular divergence of two rays of nearly equal refran-
gibility, if we vary n^ n^, &c., dr^^ will measure the dispersion. DiflFer-
entiating (1)

cos V c?*m = ^ra COS T^ dr^ -f siu r„ dn^

* Since presenting this communication to the Academy, I have learned that a
portion of this subject was studied by Sir David Brewster in 1812. I have, there-
fore, modified my paper, omitting what was not new, except when necessary to
preserve the context.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 14, 1868. 479

if Wx ^2 Wg are all functions of H, making the latter the independent
variable and dividing by dJV^, we have

<^?',n COS l,„ difn Siu ?',„ </«,„

dN nni COS Jm dN n^ cos r^ rfiV (3)

But differentiating (2)

dim = dr,a _ 1

and calling

o

COS ija sin ?•„, rf??m 7

rija COS T-m rijn COS 1-^. dN

also the dispersion of a ray after passing m surfaces, or

drm ,

dN "'

and (3) becomes

^m = «ra ^ra - 1 — *m (4)

This formula by successive substitutions may be applied to any case.
For a single surface

m = 1, 4 := 0,
and hence

A = a, 0 — ^1 = tang r,

which equals unity when tang r^ = n^ or at the angle of total polariza-
tion. That is, the unit of dispersion is that produced by a single sur-
face when the ray is in the position of total polarization. For two
surfaces (4) becomes

Z2 = 0!2 ^1 h = («2 ^1 + ^2) ;

in a prism n.2 = - making suitable substitutions, and reducing we ob-
tain

sin a

h =

cos rj cos r2

a being the angle of the prism. For minimum deviation

a .2

Ti =: - ?'2 = «i and 4 = - tang i ;

480 PROCEEDINGS OP THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

this does not, however, give the minimum of dispersion for which the
condition (found by differentiating) is

- n"^ sin (a -\- r{) cos {a -\- 2 r,) -}- sin i\ = 0 (5)

an equation which has, I believe, never been solved. When a is very
small

sin (a -|- ^'i) = « "1- ''u cos (a -\- 2 r-^) = I sin 7\ = j-j
since r^ is small also, and (5) becomes

n' (a + r,) -{- r, = 0 ; r, = a ^-^^^pT'.

I find that this equation gives very nearly the true value of r^, even
when a is large, thus for n :=: 1.5, a = 15°, 30°, 45°, and 60° it gives
ri = 10° 23', 20° 46', 31° 9', and 41° 32', while the true values ob-
tained by trial in (5) were 10° 23', 20° 45', 31° 6' and 41° 29'.

To show the comparative deviation and dispersion, while a prism is
rotated, I have calculated the following table for prisms whose index
of refraction is 1.5, and their angle 15°, 30°, 45°, and 60° ; r2 is the
angle at which the light leaves the prism, and i^ that at which it enters.
The columns headed " Reduced Deviation " are calculated by the con-
dition that for small angles at which the dispersion and deviation are
proportional their units shall be the same.

From this table it follows that if we turn the prism of a spectroscope
20° from minimum deviation, the dispersion will be nearly doubled,
thus doubling the power of the instrument. In projecting the spec-
trum on the screen, this device is often useful ; I have thus, by a single
60° prism, projected a spectrum of such a ^\ze that the two parts of the
D line were about a millimeti'e and a half apart, each having a thick-
ness of only about half a millimetre.

Since the dispersion does not depend strictly upon the deviation, and
we may have two prisms producing the same dispersion but unequal
deviations, we can evidently make one achromatize the other, even if
tliey are mrfde of the same kind of glass, and have the same angle.
Thus if two 15° prisms be so placed that r2 shall be 50° for one, and
37° 21' for the other, the dispersions of each will be .418, while the de-
viation will be 11° 7' for one, and 17° 53' for the other, as may be seen
froiu the table. Again, if the ray of light passes through first one and

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : APRIL 14, 1868.

481

15° P

risms.

»'2

I

1

Devia-
tion.

Reduced
devia-
tion.

Disper-
sion.

1

^.2

H

Devia-
tion.

Keduoed
devia-
tion.

Disper-
sion.

o /

o

)

o

/

o /

O (

o

<

—42 35

90

0

32

25

1.131

.472

22 51

0 0

7

51

.272

.281

—40 0

76

18

21

18

.743

.443

30 0

6 42

8

18

.289

.300

—30 0

58

6

13,

6

.457

.362

40 0

15 28

. 9

32

.332

.344

—20 0

45

6

10

6

.352

.312

50 0

23 53

11

7

.388

.418

— 10 0

33

38

8

38

.302

.283

60 0

31 18

13

42

.478

.5.52

0 0

22

51

7

51

.274

.268

70 0

37 13

17

47

.616

.827

6 56u

15

41

7

37

.265

.265

80 0

41 11

23

49

.831

1.658

10 0

12

35

7

35

.264

.265

85 0

42 13

27

47

.970

3.354

11 \7[i

11

17

7

34

.264

.266

90 0

42 35

32

35

1.131

00

20 0

2

44

7

44

.270

.276

30° P

risms.

— 17 53

90

0

42

7

1.470

.705

40 0

6 57

16

57

.592

.655

—10 0

63

34

23

34

.822

.633

48 35

0 0

18

35

.648

.756

0 0

48

35

18

35

.648

.577

50 0

1 3

18

57

.655

.778

10 0

36

30

16

30

.576

.559

60 0

7 55

22

5

.761

1.000

13 56«

32

8

16

4

.561

.551

70 0

13 15

26

45

.934

1.480

20 0

25

43

15

43

549

■■.556

80 0

16 42

34

18

1.197

2.934

22 51/?

22

51

15

42

.548

.562

85 0

17 35

37

25

1.306

5.857

30 0

15

55

15

55

.556

.587

90 0

17 .53

42

7

1.470

00

45° P

•isms.

0 0

iinac.

1.000

40 0

30 16

25

16

.882

.980

4 47

90

0

49

47

1.738

.952

50 0

21 45

26

45

.934

1.135

10 0

68

33

33

33

1.171

.919

60 0

14 40

29

40

1.036

1 .435

20 0

52

16

27

16

. .952

.885

70 0

9 20

34

20

1.198

2.080

21 7«

50

47

26

54

.938

.885

80 0

5 57

40

57

1.429

4.080

30 0

40

17

25

17

.882

.905

85 0

5 5

45

5

1.571

8.127

35 2j«

35

2

25

4

.875

.934 1

90 0

4 47

49

47

1.738

00

60° P

risms.

27 55

90

0

57

55

2.022

1.315

50 0

47 14

37

14

1.300

1.545

28 27u

83

35

52

2

1.816

1.315

60 0

38 52

38

52

1 356

1.907

30 0

77

7

47

7

1.645

1.317

70 0

32 53

42

53

1.496

2.716

40 0

58

29

38

29

1.3'f3

1.374

80 0

29 12

49

12

1.717

5.273

48 35/*

48

35

37

10

1.297

1.511

90 0

27 55

57

55

2.022

00

a Minimum of Dispersion.

(S Minimum of Deviation.

then the other, the second will neutralize the dispersion of the first,
while there will remain 17° 53' — 11° 7' = 6° 46' deviation. It was
by this arrangement of prisms that Brewster obtained achromatism with
one kind of glass.

Perhaps the most important application of these principles is to pho-
tographing the spectrum. Photographs taken by the common methods
are greatly distorted, particularly in the more refrangible end. They

VOL. VII. 61

482 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

can only be used by identifying the more prominent lines, with those
wiiose wave-length is known, and interpolating the remainder approx-
imately. If, as is often the case, these standard lines cannot be recog-
nized, the photograph becomes useless. To sliow the amount of dis-
tortion, suppose a spectrum to contain three similar double lines A, B,
and C, whose indices of refraction are 1.5, 1.6, and 1.7, and that we
use a 60° prism, the line B being in the position of minimum deviation.
The deviations of the three lines will then be 48° 34', 53° 8', and 58°
11', and their dispersion 1.528, 1.667, 1.878 ; that is, A and G will be
at distances of 4° 34' and 5° 3' from B instead of equidistant, and the
interval between the components of each line will be as 1.528 : 1.667 :
1.878 ; the distortion in this case amounting to about 20 per cent.

If now the portion of the screen which receives the line C be
brought nearer the prism, the parts of this line will appi'oach one an-
other, and since their distance apart is proportional to their distance
from the prism, the three lines will appear alike, if the screen is so in-
clined that the points where they are projected are at distances,

111
as

1.528 1.667 1.878
or as .654 : .600 : .532.

A simple calculation shows that the screen must be slightly curved to
fulfil this condition, but if plane, the distortion will be only about one
and a half, instead of twenty per cent, the angle of inclination with the
ray B being about 37°. If an achromatic lens was used for the pro-
jection, all parts of the spectrum would not be in focus, but with a
single lens the focal distance of the violet is always less than that of
the red rays. If then we use such a lens, inclining the screen at the
same time corrects the distortion, and brings all parts into focus at
once. By placing the prism at a suitable distance from the lens, both
sources of error may be almost entirely eliminated. The oblique inci-
dence of the light on the sensitive surface would be an objection to this
method, but would be partly counterbalanced by the fact that the
length of the spectrum would be thereby increased more than one half.
Or, if preferred, the prism may be turned, so that, applying the cor-
rection for distortion as above, the screen shall be more nearly perpen-
dicular to the light.

In conclusion, this spectrum would possess the following advantages

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 12, 1868. 483

over the distorted forms now in use. Horizontal distances being pro-
portional to the change in the index of refraction, the latter could be
determined at once for any line, by a scale of equal parts. Its extent
would be much greater than that of the visible spectrum, and we could
determine the index of refraction of rays of too short wave-length to be
measured readily by the common methods. It would be a normal
spectrum for any given material, being independent of the form and
position of the prism. And (especially if the interference bands were
produced in it) it would afford, from its extent, great advantages for the
study of the laws of the dispersion of light by different substances.

Five hundred and ninety-fourth. Meeting.

May 12, 1868. — Monthly Meeting.

The President in the chair.

The CoiTespoiiding Secretary read letters relative to ex-
changes ; also a letter from Professor De La Rive in acknowl-
edgment of his election into the Academy as a Foreign Hon-
orary Member.

Mr. C. M. Warren presented by title a memoir on " Vola-
tile Hydrocarbons in Pennsylvania Petroleum."

DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY,

FROM JUNE 2, 1865, TO JUNE 30, 1866.

State of Massachtisetts.

Report to His Excellency the Governor and the Honorable Coun-
cil, of the Commissioners appointed under the Resolve of May 3,
1865, " concerning the Obstructions to the Passage of Fish in the
Connecticut and Merrimack Rivers." 8vo pamph. Boston. 1866.
Massachusetts Historical Society.

Proceedings. 1864-1865. 8vo. Boston. 1866.
Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

First Annual Catalogue of the Officers and Students,' and the Pro-
gramme of the Course of Instruction, of the School of the Massachu-
setts Institute of Technology. 1865-66. 8vo pamph. Boston.
1865.

484 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Boston Society of Natural History.

Proceedings. Vol. IX., X. 8vo. Boston. 1865 - 66.

Condition and Doings of the Boston Society of Natural History,
as exhibited by the Annual Reports of the Custodian, Treasurer,
Librarian, and Curators. May, 1865. 8vo pamph. Boston,
1865.
Trustees of the Public Library of the City of Boston.

Thirteenth Annual Report of the Trustees, 1865. 8vo pamph.
Boston. 1865.
Boston Athenceum.

List of Books added to the Library of the Boston Athenasum,
from December 1, 1864, to December 1, 1865. 8vo pamph. Bos-
ton. 1865.
Observatory of Harvard College.

Report of the Committee of the Overseers of Harvard College,
appointed to visit the Observatory, in the Year 1864. Together
with the Report of the Director. Submitted Mai-ch 8, 1865. 8vo
pamph. Boston. 1865.
Director of the Museum of Comparative Zoology.

Illustrated Catalogue of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at
Harvard College. Published by Order of the Legislature of Massa-
chusetts. No. I. Ophiuridae and Astrophytidte. By Theodore
Lyman. No. II. North American Acalephoe. By Alexander
Agassiz. 2 vols. 4to. Cambridore. 1865.

Annual Report of the Trustees of the Museum of Comparative
Zoology. Together with the Report of the Director, 1865. 8vo
pamph. Boston. 1865.
Essex Institute.

Proceedings. Vol. IV. 8vo. Salem. 1866.

An Historical Notice of the Essex Institute ; with the Act of In-
corpoi'ation, Constitution and By-Laws, and Lists of the Officers
and Members. 8vo pamph. Salem. 1865.

Naturalists' Directory. Part I. North America and the West
Indies. 8vo pamph. Salem. 1865.
American Antiquarian Society.

Proceedings of the American Antiquarian Society at a Special
Meeting, January 17, 1865, in reference to the death of their former
President, Hon. Edward Everett. 8vo pamph. Boston. 1865.

Proceedings at the Semiannual Meeting held in Boston, April
26, 1865. 8vo. Boston. 1865.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 12, 1867. 485

Proceedings at the Annual Meeting held in Worcester, October
21, 18G5. 8vo. Cambridge. 1865.

Proceedings at a Special Meeting, March 16, 1866, and at the
Semiannual Meeting at the Hall of the American Academy in
Boston, April 25, 1866. 8vo. Cambridge. 1866.
American Oriental Society.

Journal. Vol.- VIII. No. 2. 8vo. New Haven. 1866.
Editors of the American Journal of Science atid Arts.

Journal. N. S. Vol. XL., XLI. 8vo. New Haven. 1865-
66.
Lyceum of Natural History of New York.

Annals. Vol. VIII. Nos. 2-7. 8vo. New York. 1864-66.
Mercantile Library Association of the City of New York.

Forty-Fourth Annual Report of the Board of Directors, May,
1864- April, 1865. 8vo pamph. New York. 1865.

Catalogue of Books in the Mercantile Library of the City of New
York. 8vo vol. New York.
llercantile Library Association of the City of Brooklyn.

Seventh Annual Report of the Board of Directors, March 30,
1865. 8vo pamph. Brooklyn, N. Y. 1865.
The Trustees.

Forty-First Annual Register of the Rensselaer Polytechnic Insti-
tute, Troy, N. Y., for the Academical Year 1864- 65. 8vo. Troy,
N. Y. 1865.
American Philosophical Society.

Transactions. N. S. Vol. XIIL Pt. I., IL 4to. Philadel-
phia. 1865.

Proceedings. Vol. X. No. 73, 74, 75. 8vo. Philadelphia.
1865-66.
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.

Proceedings. 1865. No. 2, 3, 4, 5. 1866. No. 1. 8vo.
Philadelphia.
Philadelphia College of Pharmacy.

American Journal of Pharmacy. 3d Ser. Vol. XIIL, XIV.
8vo. Philadelphia. 1865-66.
Mercantile Library Company of Philadelphia.

Forty-Third Annual Report. January, 1866. 8vo. Philadelphia.
Smithsonian Institution.

Annual Report of the Board of Regents, showing the Operations,

486 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY.

Expenditures, and Condition of the Institution for the Years 1863 -
64. 2 vols. 8vo. Washington. 1864-65.
Library of Congress.

Catalogue of Additions made to the Library, from December 1,
1864, to December 1, 1865. 8vo. Washington. 1865.
Patent Office, Washington.

Report of the Commissioner of Patents for the Year 1861. Vol.
I., II. 1862. Vol. I., II. 1863. Vol. I., II. 8vo. Washington.
1863-66.
Bureau of Navigation.

American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac for the Year 1867.
8vo. Washington. 1865.
United States Naval Observatory.

Astronomical and Meteorological Observations made at the Unit-
ed States Naval Observatory, during the Year 1863. 4to vol.
Washington. 1865.
Department of State.

French Univei'sal Exposition for 1867 Official Correspond-
ence on the Subject. Published by the Department of State, for
the Information of Citizens of the United States, containing Regu-
lations, Classification of Articles, &c. 4to paraph. Washington.
1865.
Joseph K. Barnes, Surgeon- General U. S. A.

Annual Report of the Surgeon-General. 1865. 8vo pamph.
Washington. 1865.

(United States) Circular No. '6. War Department. Surgeon-
General's Office. Reports on the Extent and Nature of the Mate-
rials Available for the Preparation of a Medical and Surgical His-
tory of the Rebellion. 4to pamph. Philadelphia. 1865.
Young Men's Library Association of Cincinnati.

Thirtieth and Thirty-First Annual Report of the Board of Direc-
tors for the Years 1864-65. 8vo paraph. Cincinnati. 1865-
66.
Cliicago Acadeiny of Sciences.

Proceedings. Vol.1. P. 1-48. 8vo. Chicago. 1866.
Act of Incorporation, Constitution, By-Laws, and List of Officers
and Members of the Chicago Academy of Sciences ; with a Histor-
ical Sketch of the Association ; and Reports on the Museum and
Library'. 8vo pamph. Cliicago. 1865.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 12, 1867, 487

Chicago Historical Society.

Seventh Annual Statement of tlie Trade and Commerce of Chi-
cago, for the Year ending March 31, 1865. 8vo pamph. Chicago.
1865.

Fourth Annual Report of the Board of Public Works to the Com-
mon Council of the City of Chicago. For the Municipal Fiscal
Year ending March 31, 1865. 8vo. Chicago. 1865.

Sixth and Seventh Annual Report of the Chicago Charitable Eye
and Ear Ipfirmary, jDresented by the Board of Surgeons for the
Year ending May 1, 1864, and May 1, 1865. 8vo pamph. Chi-
cago. 1865.
Academy of Science of St. Louis.

Transactions. Vol. II. No. 2. 8vo. St. Louis. 1866.
California Academy of Natural Sciences.

Proceedings. Vol. III. pp. 97 - 208. 8vo. San Francisco.
1864-65.
Mercantile Library Association of the City and County of San Fran-
cisco.

Thirteenth Annual Report of the President, Treasurer, and Li-
brarian of the Mercantile Library Association. 8vo pamph. San
Francisco. 1866.
Bureau de la Recherche Geologiqu.e de la Suede.

Carte Geologique de la Suede. Bladet 1-18: Livraisons ac-
compagnies 1 - 18. 8vo. Stockholm. 1862 - 65.
Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps Akademien.

Ofversigt af Kongl. Vetenskaps Akademiens Forhandlingar. Arg.
XXL 8vo. Stockholm. 1865.

Meteorologiska lakttagelser i Sverige utgifna af Kongl. Svenska,
Vetenskaps-Akademien . . . . af Er. Edlund. Band V. (1863).
Long 4to. Stockholm. 1865.

Om Osterjohn af S. Loven 8vo pamph, Stockholm,

1864.
Regia Societas Scientiarum, Upsaliensis.

Nova Acta. Ser, 3, Vol. V, Fasc. 2. 4to. Upsal. 1864.
Upsala Universitets Arsskrift (1864). 8vo. Upsal, 1865.
Kongel. Norske Frederiks Universitet, Christiania.

Aarsberetning for 1863. 16mo pamph. Christiania, 1864.

Index Scholarum. 1865. 4to. Christiania.

Norges Ferskvandskrebsdyr. Iste Afsnit med 4 Planchner, af

488 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Georg Ossian Sars. Prisbebonnet Afhandling. 4to paraph. Cliris-
tiaiiia. 1865.

Ora de i Norge forekoinmende fossile Dyrelevuinger fra Quarter-
perisden, et Bidrag til vor Faunas Historie af Dr. phil et. med.
Michael Sars, Prof, 4to pamph. Christiaiiia. 1865.

Veiviser ved geologiske Excursiones i Christiana Omegn med et
farvetrykt Kart og flerc Trajsnit af Lektor Theodor Kjerulf. 4to
pamph. Christiania. 1865.

Gaver til Universitets Bibliothek i 3die og 4de. Quartal. 1862.
i 4de Quartal. 18G3. 2 pamph. 16mo. Christiania. 1863-64.
Physiographiske Forening i Christiania.

Nyt Magaain for Naturvidenskaberne. Bind.- XIII. Heft 4.
XIV. H. 1. 8vo. Christiania. 1864-65.
Academie Imperiale des Sciences de St. Petershourg.

Memoires, VII'"^ Scrie. Tome V. No. 1 : VII., VIII. 4to. St.
Petersburg. 1864-65.

Bulletin. Tome VII., VIII. 4to. St. Petersburg. 1864-65.
Administration of Mines of Russia.

Annales de I'Observatoire Physique Central de Russia. Annee.
1862. No. 1, 2. 4to. St. Petersburg. 1865.
Kaiserliche Nicolai Haupsternwarte Pulkova.

Pulkowaer Beobachtungen des Hellen Cometen von 1862, nebst
einigen Bemerkungen von Dr. A. Winnecke. 4to pamph. St.
Petersburg. 1864.

Jahresbericht am 17 Mai 1864 dem Coraite der Nicolai Haupt-
sternwarte abgestaltet vom Director der Sternwarte (aus dem Rus-
sischen Ubersetzt). 8vo pamph. St. Petersburg. 1864.
Societe Imperiale des Naturalistes de Moscow.

Bulletin. Annee 1864, No. 2-4. 1865, No. 1, 2. 8vo. Mos-
cow. 1864-65.
Academie Royale des Sciences a Amsterdam.

Verhandelingen, Afdeeling Letterkunde. Deel III. 4to. Am-
sterdam. 1864-65.

Verslagen en Mededeelingen, Afd. Letterkunde. Deel VIII.
Afd. Natuurkunde. Deel XVII. 8vo. Amsterdam. 1865.

Jaarbock voor 1863 en 1864. 8vo. Amsterdam. 1865.

Senis Vota pro Patria, — Carmen Elegiacum Johannis van
Lceuwen Hollandi cui certaminis Poetici Praemium e Legato
Jacobi Henx'ici Iloeufft adjudicatum est. 8vo vol. Amstelodami.
1864.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 12, 1867. 489

Hollandsche Maatschappij der Wetenschappen te Haarlem.

Natuurkundige Verhandelingen. Ser. 2. Deel XXI. Pt. 2.
XXII. Pt. 1, 2. XXIII. 4to. Haarlem. 1864-65.
Koninhlijk Nederlandsch Meteor ologisch Instituut.

Meteorologische Waarnemingen in Nederland en zijne Bezittin-
gen. Long 4to vol. Utrecht, 1865.
Netherlands Government.

Flora Batava, Afl. 179. 4to. Amsterdam.
Carte Geologique des Pays Bas. 3 chts. Haarlem.
Societe des Arts et des Sciences, Batavia.

Verhandelingen van het Bataviaasch Genootschap van Kunsten
en Wetenschappen. Deel XXIX. 4to. Batavia. 1862.

Tijdschrift yoor Indische Taal-Land-en Volkenkunde. Deel XI.
en XII. 8vo. Batavia. 1862.
Natuurkundige Verceniging in Nederlansck Indie.

Natuurkundig Tijdschrift. Deel XXVI. 6" Ser. Deel II. 8vo.
Batavia. 1864.
Konigl. Preussische Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin.

Abhandlungen aus dem Jahre 1864. 4to. Berlin. 1865.
Monatsberichte aus dem Jahre 1864. 8vo. Berlin. 1865.
Naturhistorischer Verein der Preuss. Rheinlande und Westphalens.

Verhandlungen. Vol.' XXI. 8vo. Bonn. 1864.
Universitas Frid. Guil. Rhenana, Bounce.

Academical Dissertations, Indexes, etc. 46 pamph. 4to and 8vo.
Bonn.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Dantzig.

Schriften, N. F. Band I. Heft 2. 4to. Dantzig. 1865.
Verein fiir Erdkimde und Verwandte Wissenschaften zu Darmstadt.
Notizblatt. III. Forge. Heft III. 8vo. Darmstadt. 1864.
Kaiserl. Leopoldinisch - CaroUnisch Deutsche Akademie der Natur-

forscher.
(Academia Ccesarea Leopoldino - Carolina Germanica Natures Curio-
sorum.)
Nova Acta. Tome XXXII. Pars 1. 4to. Dresden. 1865.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Emden.

Funfzigster Jahresbericht. 8vo. Emden. 1865.
Zoclogische Gesellschaft, Frankfurt a. M.

Der Zoologische Garten. Jahrg. VI. 8vo. Frankfort-on-the-
Main. 1865.
VOL. VII. 62

190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Verein fur Geographie und Statistik in Frankfurt a. M.

Jahresbericht iiber das Medicinalwesens, die Krankenanstalten,
und die offentlichen Gesundheitsverhaltnisse der Freien Stadt Frank-
furt. Herausgegeben unter Mitwirkung des Physikats von dem
Aerztlichen Verein. VI. Jahrgang. 1862. 8vo. Frankfort-on-
the-Main. 1865.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft zu Freiburg, J. Br.

Berichte iiber die Verhandlungen. Band III. Heft 3, 4. 8vo.
Freiburg i. Br. 1865.
Oherlausitzische Gesellschaft zu Gorlitz.

Neues Lausitzisches Magazin. Band XLII. ; Heft 1,2. 8vo.
Gbrhtz. 1865.

Dern Herrn Karl Wilhelm Dornick, wohlverdienten Pfarrer der
Evangelischen Gemeinde Haynewalde, ihrem hochverehrten Ehren-
mitgliede am Tage seiner Fiinfzigjalirigen Amts-Jubelfeier, den
2 April, 1865, die Oberlausitzische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften.
Inhalt : Metrische Uebersetzung eines Psalmen. 4to pamph. Gor-
litz. 1865.
Konigl. GeseUschaft der Wissenschaften zu Gottingen.

Nachrichten von der Georg-Augusts-Universitat und der Konigl.
Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften aus dem Jahre 1865. 1 vol.
16mo. Gottingen. 1865.
Medicinish-Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft zu Jena.

Jenaische Zeitschrift fur Medicin und Naturwissenschaft. Band
n. ; Heft 1, 2 : 11. H. 2, 3, 4. 8vo. Leipzig. 1865 - 67.
Konigl. Physikalisch- Okonomische Gesellschaft zu Konigsherg.

Schriften. Jahrg. V. ; Abth. 1, 2. 4to. Konigsberg. 1864.
Konigl. Sdchsische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften, Leipzig.
Abhandlungen, Math.-Phys. Classe.
VIII. ; No. 1. Philol.-Histor. Classe.
No. 1. 8vo. Leipzig. 1864-66.

Berichte iiber die Verhandlungen.
XVI. Philol.-Histor. Classe. Band
Leipzig. 1864-65.

Relationen einestheils zwischen Summen und Differenzen, und
Anderntheils zwischen Integralen und Differentialen. Von P. A.
Hansen. 8vo pamph. Leipzig. 1865.
Konigl. Bayerische Akademie der Wissenschaften, Munchen.

Abhandlungen, Philos.-Philol. Classe. Band II. Abth. II. : IX.

Band

VIL

; No.

. 2,

3, 4:

Band

IV.;

No.

5,

6: V.

Math.-

Phys.

Classe.

Band

XVL

Heft 2,

3.

8vo.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 12, 1867. 491

V

Abth. III. Histor. Classe. Band VII. Abth. III. : IX. II. : X. I
4to. Miinchen. 1851-65.

Sitzungsberichte, 1864. Band II. Heft 3, 4. 1865. Band I.
Heft 1 - 4 : II. Heft 1, 2. 8vo. Munchen. 1864 - 65.

Annalen der Konigl. Sternwarte. Band XIV. 8vo. Munchen.
1865.

OfFentliclie Sitzung der Gesammt-Akademie zur Feier des 106
Stiftungstages am 28 Marz, 1865. 4to pamph. Miinchen.

Induction und Deduction, von Justus von Liebig. 8vo pamph
Munchen. 1865.

Entstehung und Begriff der Naturhistorischen Art, von Dr. Carl
Nageli. Zvveite Auflage. 8vo pamph. Munchen. 1865.

Die Verhandlungen der Protestantischen Fiirsten in den Jahren
1590 und 1591 zu Griindung einer Union- Vortrag, gehalten von
Karl August MufFat. 4to pamph. Munchen. 1865.
Konigl. Bohmische Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften in Prag.

Sitzungsberichte, Jahrg. 1863. Band I., II. 8vo. Prag. 1863-64
K. K. Sternwarte zu Prag.

Magnetische und Meteorologische Beobachtungen. Vol. XXV
4to. Prag. 1865.
Zoologisch-mineralogiscJier Verein, Regenshurg.

Correspondenz-Blatt. 18 Jahrgang. 16mo. Regensburg. 1864
Entomologischer Verein zu Stettin.

Entomologische Zeitung. 26 Jahrgang. 8vo. Stettin. 1865.

Linnea Entomologica. Band XVI. 8vo. Leipzig. 1865.
Kaiserliche Akadetnie der Wissenschaften, Wien.

Denkschriften. Math.-Naturw. Classe. Band II., Lief. 3 ; III.,
Lief. 1-3; IV., Lief. 1, 2; VI., VII., XXIV. Philos.-Histor.
Classe. Band II., Abth. 1, 2 ; III., IV., V., VII., XIIL 4to.
Vienna. 1853 - 65.

Sitzungsberichte. Math.-Naturw. Classe. Band I., II., III.,
XXXI., XLII ; 1st Abth., Heft 1, 2 ; 2d Abth. Heft 1, 2 : XLVIIL,
2d Abth., Heft 5:.XLIX., 1st Abth., Heft 2-5: L., 1st Abth.,
Heft 2-5: LL, 1st Abth., Heft 1-3; 2d Abth., Heft 1-3.
Philos.-Histor. Classe. Band L : XVIIL, Heft 1, 2 : XIX., Heft 1 :
XX., Heft 2, 3 : XXL, Heft 1,2: XXV., Heft 5 : XXX VL, Heft
1, 2 : XLV., Heft 2, 3 : XLVL, Heft 1 -3 : XL VII., Heft 2, 3 :
XLVIIL, Heft 1, 2: XLIX., Heft 1-3: L., Heft 1, 2. 8vo.
Vienna. 1863 - ^b.

492 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Reo'ister zu den Banden 43 bis 50 der Sitzungsberichte Math.-
Naturw. Classe. V. 8vo. Vienna. 1865. «

Almanach. 14 Jahrg. 1864. 15. 1865. 16rao. Vienna.
1864-65. "

Anzeiger. Jahrg. 11. 1865 : III. No. 13. 1866. 8vo.
Vienna. 1865 - 66.

Tafeln zur Abhandlungen : Beitrage zur Naturgeschichte von
Chile, von Friherrn v. Bibra. Beilage zu den Denkschriften der
Kais. Akad. der Wissenschaften. Math. - Naturw. Classe. Band
V. Seite 73. Atlas long 4to. Vienna. 1853.
H. K. Geographisclie Gesellschaft, Wien.

Mittheilungen. Jahrgang VII. Vienna. 1863.
K. K. Geologische Reichsanstalt, Wien.

Jarbuch, Band XV. 8vo. Wien. 1865.
K. K. Zoologish-Botanische Gesellschaft, Wien.

Verhandlungen. Band XIV. 8vo. Vienna. 1864.
Verein fiir Natarhmde in Herzogthum Nassau.

,Jahrbucher. Heft 16, 17. 8vo. Wiesbaden. 1862-63.
Augemeine Schweirische Gesellschaft fiir die gesammten Naturwissen-
schaften. {Societe Helvetique des Sciences Haturelles.)

Materiaux pour la Carte Geologique de la Suisse Publiees par les
Commission Geologique de la Societe Helvetique des Sciences Na-
turelles. 1st Livraison. 4to. Neuchatel. 1863. Atlas renfermant
la carte coloriee en 4 feuilles.
Naturforschende Gesellschaft in Bern.

Mittheilungen aus dem Jahre, 1864. 8vo. Bern. 1864.
Naturforschender Verein in Brumi.

Verhandlungen. Band II. 1863. 8vo. Brunn. 1864.
Societe de Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle de Geneve.

Memoires, Tome XVII. Ft. 2 : XVIII. Ft. 1. 4to. Geneva.
1864-65.
St. Gallische Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft.

Bericht iiber die Thatigkeit wahrend des Vereinsjahres. 1863 - 64.
8vo vol. Saint Gall. 1864.
Sweizerische Naturforschende Gesellschaft.

Verhandlungen, 48 Versammlung Jahresbericht. 1864. 8vo.
Zurich. 1864.
Academie Royale des Sciences, S^c, de Belgique, de Bruxelle.

Memoires Couronn^s et Memoires des Savants Etrangers. Tome
XXXn. (1864-65.) 4to. Brussels. 1865.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: MAY 12, 1867. 493

M^moires Couronnes. Coll. in 8vo. Tome XVII. Brussels.
1865.

Bulletin, Ser. 2. Tome XVIII., XIX. Bvo. Brussels. 1864-65.
Annuaire. Tome XXXI. 18mo. Brussels. 1865.
Academie Imperiale des Sciences, S)-c., de Caen.

Memoires (1865). 8vo. Caen. 1865.
Societe Linneene de Normandie.

Vol. IX. Annee 1863-64. 8vo. Caen. 1865.
Acadernie Imperiale des Sciences, Arts et Belles-Lettres de Dijon.

Memoires, 2nie Serie. Tome XI. Annee 1863. 8vo. Dijon.
1864.
Academie Imperiale des Sciences, Belles-Lettres, et Arts de Lyon.
, Memoires, Classe des Sciences. Tome XIII. Classe des Lettres,
N. S. Tome II. 8vo. Lyons. 1863.

Bulletin des Seances. 8vo. Lyons. 1865.
Societe Imperiale d' Agriculture, etc., de Lyon.

Annales des Sciences Physiques et Naturelles d' Agriculture et
d'lndustrie. 3« Serie. Tome VIL 8vo. Lyons. 1863.
Institut Imperiale de France, Academie des Sciences.

Comptes Rendus. Tome 60, 61, 62. No. 1-23. 4lo. Paris.
1865-66.
Societe de Geographic.

Bulletin. Ser. 5. Tome VIII., IX., X., XL Nos. 1-^. 8vo.
Paris. 1864-55.
Societe Imperiale Zoologique d' AccUmatation.

Bulletin. Tome IL, III., No. 1 - 4. 8vo. Paris. 1765-66.
Accademia delle Scienze delV Istituto di Bologna.

Meraorie. Ser. 2. Tome III. ; IV. Fasc. 1. 4to. Bologna.
1863-65.

Rendiconto delle Sessioni dell' Accademia .... Anno Academic©,
1863-64. 8vo. Bologna. 1864.

Indici Generali della Collezione publicata dall' Accademia ....
col. Titolo di Memorie in Dodici Tomi dal 1850 al 1861. 4to
pamph. Bologna. 1864.
Istituto Tecnico di Palermo.

Giornale di Scienze NaturalL ed Economiche Publicato per cura
del Consiglio di Pei-fezionamento anness al R. Istituto Tecnico di
Palermo. Vol. L Fasc. I. II. 4to. Palermo. 1865.

494 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Real Academia de Ciencias Exactas, etc., Madrid.

Memorias. Torao VI. 2* Ser. Ciencias Fisicas. Tomo II.
Pt. 1, 2. 4to. Madrid. 1864-65.

Ee>umen de las Actas de la Academia .... 1862-63. 8vo.
Madrid. 1864.

Libros del Saber de Astronomia. Tomo III. Folio. Madrid.
1864.
Observatorio de Marina de San Fernando, Cktdiz.

Alraanaque Nautico para el ano 1867. Calculado de orden de
S. M. en el Observatorio de Marina de la Cindad de S. Fernando.
Svo. Cadiz. 1865.
Academia Real das Sciencias de Lishoa.

Historia e Memoria, Classe de Sciencias, Moraes, Politicas e,
Bellas-Lettras, N. S. Tomo III. Parte II. : Classe de Sciencias
Mathematicas, Physicas e Naturaes, N. S. Tomo III. Parte II.
4to. Lisbon. 1865.

Collec^ao das Medalhes e Condecora^oes Portuguezas e das
Etrangeiras com rela^ao a Portugal pertencente ao Tom III. Part
II. das Mem. da Acad. Real das Sc. de Lisboa. 4to vol. Lisbon.
1865.
British Association for the Advancement of Science.

Report of the Thirty-Fourth Meeting, held at Bath in September,
1864^ 8vo vol. London. 1865.
Royal Geological Society of Ireland.

Journal. Vol.1. Pt. I. 1864-65. 1st Session. Svo. Lon-
don and Dublin. 1865.
Royal Irish Academy.

Transactions. Vol. XXIV. Antiquities, Parts III., IV. Sci-
ence, Parts IV., VI. Polite Litei'ature, Part II. 4to. Dublin.
1864.

Proceedings. Vol. VII., VIIL, IX. Pt. 1. 8vo. Dublin.
1861 - 65.

Observations on the Functions of the Liver. By Robert Mc-
Donnell, M.D., M. R. I, A., etc. 2 pamph. 8vo. Dublin. 1865.
Provost and Sr. Felloios of Trinity College, Dublin.

Observations made at the Magnetical and Meteorological Obser-
vatory at Trinity College, Dublin; under the Direction of the Rev.
Humphrey Lloyd, D. D., D. C. L., etc. Vol. I. 1840 - 43. 4to.
Dublin and London. 1865.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES: MAY 12, 1868. . 495

Dublin Quarterly Journal of Science.

Vol. v., VI. No. 21, 22. 8vo. London and Edinburgh. 1865-66.
Royal Society of Edinburgh .

Transactions. Vol. XXIV. Parts for the Session, 1864-65.
4to. Edinburgh.

Proceedings. Vol. V. Session 1864 - 65. 8vo. Edinburgh.
Royal Observatory, Greenwich.

Astronomical Observations made at the Royal Observatory at
Greenwich, from the year 1765 to the year 1774. By the Rev.
Nevil Maskelyne, B. D., Astronomer Royal, etc. Vol. I. Folio.
London. 1776.

Results in Right Ascension of the Observations of Stars made
and reduced by Dr. Maskelyne from 1765 to 1772 ; 1779 to 1785 ;

1796 to 1801 ; 1803 to 1807 together with some results for

the declination of Stars. Arranged by the Rev. Robert Main, M.A.,
.... [Greenwich Observations, 1851. Appendix II.] 4to pamph.
London.

Bessell's Refraction Tables, modified and expanded. [Forming the
Appendix to the Greenwich Observations, 1853.] 4to pamph.
London. 1855.

Description of the Reflex Zenith Tube of the Royal Observatory,
Greenwich. By G. B. Airy. [Forming Appendix I. to the vol-
ume of Greenwich Observations for the year 1854.] 4to pamph.
London. 1856.

Catalogue of 1576 Stars, formed from the Observations made
during six years from 1848 to 1853 at the Royal Observatory,
Greenwich, and reduced to the Epoch 1850. [Forming Appen-
dix II. to the volume of Greenwich Observations for the year
1854.] 4to pamph. London. 1856.

Description of the Galvanic Chronographic Ajjparatus of the
Royal Observatory, Greenwich. [Forming the Appendix to the
Greenwich Observations, 1856.] 4to pamph. London. 1857.

Determination of the Longitude of Valentia in Ireland, by trans-
mission of Chronometers. [Forming the Appendix to the Green-
wich Astronomical Observations, 1845.] By G. B. Airy, Esq.,
Astronomer Royal. 4to vol. London.

Determination of the Longitude of Valencia in Ireland, by Gal-
vanic signals, in the Summer of 1862. [Appendix III. to the
Greenwich Astronomical Observations, 1862.] 4to pamph. Lon-
don.

496 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Plan of the Buildings and Grounds of the Royal Observatory,
Greenwich, with Explanation and History. [Extr. from the Intro-
duction to the Greenwich Observations, 1845. j 4to pamph. Lon-
don. 1847.

Plan of the Buildings and Grounds of the Royal Observatory,
Greenwich, 1863, August; with Explanation and History. [Ap-
pendix II. to the Greenwich Asti'onomical Observations, 1862.]
4to pamph. London. 1863.

Catalogue of Stars taken from Mr. Flamsteed's Observations con-
tained in the Second Volume of the Historia Coelestis, and not in-
serted in the British Catalogue. With an Index Collection of

Errata, by Carolina Herschel, with Introduction and Explanatory
Remarks, by William Herschel, LL. D., F.R.S. Folio vol. Lon-
don. 1798.

Catalogue of 7385 Stars, chiefly in the Southern Hemisphere,
prepared from Observations made in the Years 1822, 1823, 1824,
1825, 1826, at the Observatory at Paramatta, New South Wales.
, • . . The computations made and the catalogue constructed by Mr.
William Richardson, of the Royal Observatory, Greenwich. 4to
vol. London. 1835.

Seven-Year Catalogue of 2022 Stars, deduced from Observations,
extending from 1854 to 1860, at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich,
and reduced to the Epoch 1860. [Forming Appendix I. to the
Vol. of Greenwich Observations for the year 1862.] 4to pamph.
London.

Reports of the Astronomer Royal (G. B. Airy) to the Board of
Visitors for the years 1836 to 1852, 1855 to 1859, 1861 to 1863.
25 pamph. 4to. London.

Rates of Chronometers on trial for Purchase by the Board of
Admiralty, at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, 1840 to 1865.
4to. London.
Literary and Philosophical Society of Liverpool.

Proceedings. Session 1863-64. No. 18. 8vo. London and
Liverpool. 1864.
Chemical Society of London.

Journal, Ser. 2. Vol. III. 8vo. London. 1865.
Geological Society of London.

Quarterly Journal. Vol. XXL, XXII. Part 1. 8vo. London.
1865-66.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 12, 1868. 497

List of the Society, December 31, 1865, 8vo. London.
Linnean Society of London.

Transactions. Vol. XXIV. Part IIL 4to. London. 1864-
65.

Journal. Botany. Vol. VIII., IX. No. 33, 34. Zoology. Vol.
VIIL No. 30. 8vo. London. 1864-65.

List of the Linnean Society, 1864. 8vo. London.
Royal Astronomical Society.

Memoirs. Vol. XXXIII. 4to Volume for Session 1863-64.
London. 1865.
Royal Horticidiural Society.

Proceedings. Vol. IV., No. 10. V., No. 3-8. N. S. Vol. L,
No. 1-3. 8vo. London. 1865-66.
Index to Vol. IV. 1865.

Journal. N. S. Vol. I. Part I., II. 8vo. London. 1866.
Royal Society of London.

Philosophical Transactions for the Year 1864. Vol. 154. For
the Year 1865. Vol. 155, Part L 4to. London. 1865.

Proceedings. Vol. XIII., XIV. No. 71-77. 8vo. London.
1864-65.

Astronomical and Magnetical and Meteorological Observations
made at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, in the Year 1863 ; un-
der the direction of George Biddell Airy, Esq., M. A., Astronomer
Royal. 4to vol. London. 1865.
Society of Arts, 3fanufactures, and Commerce.

Journal of the Society of Arts and of the Institutions in Union.
Vol. XIII. 8vo. London. 1865.
Statistical Society of London.

Journal. Vol. XXVIIL, Part L, II., III. ; XXIX., Part L 8vo.
London. 1865.
Zoological Society of London.

Transactions. Vol. V. Part IV. 4to. London. 1864.
Proceedings. 1864. Part L, IL, III. 8vo. London. 1864.
Abbot (^Henry Z., Colonel First Connecticut Artillery, and Brev. Briga-
dier-General of Volunteers).

Report of the Movements and Operations of the First Connecti-
cut Heavy Artillery, for the year ending March 1, 1865, as given
in the Annual Report of the Adjutant- General of Connecticut.
April 1, 1865. Svo pamph. Plartfoi'd. 1865.

VOL. VII. 63

498 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Agassiz (^Alexander).

Seaside Studies in Natural History. By Elizabeth C. Agassiz
and Alexander Agassiz. Marine Animals of Massachusetts Bay.
Radiates. 8vo vol. Boston. 1865.
Airy {George Biddell, Esq., Astronomer Royal).

Essay on the Invasion of Britain by Julius Caesar. The Invasion
of Britain by Plautius, and by Claudius CjBsar ; The Early Military
Policy of the Romans in Bi'itain ; The Battle of Hastings. With
Correspondence. Collected and Printed for Private Distribution.
4to paraph. London. I860.
Atkinson ( W. P.).

Classical and Scientific Studies, and the Great Schools of Eng-
land : A Lecture read before the Society of Arts of the Massachu-
setts Institute of Technology. April 6, 1865. With Additions and
an Appendix. 12mo vol. Cambridge. 1865.
The Authors.

Researches on Solar Physics. By Warren De la Rue, Esq., Ph. D.,
etc. ; Balfour Stewart, Esq., M. A., etc. ; and Benjamin Loewy, Esq.
First Series. On the Nature of Sun-spots, ito pamph. Lon-
don. 1865.
Barrande (Joachim).

r f

Defense des Colonies, III. Etude G^nerale sur nos Etages G- H.
Avec Application Speciale aux Environs de Hlubocep, pres Prague,
8vo pamph. Prague et Paris. 1865.
Bigeloiv [E. B.). .

Address before the National Association of Wool Manufacturers
at the First Annual Meeting in Philadelphia, September 6, 1865.
By John L. Hayes, Secretary. 8vo pamph. Boston. 1865.

Report of the Proceedings of the Convention of Delegates from
the National Association of Wool Manufacturers, and from the sev-
eral Organizations of the Wool-Growers of the United States, at
Syracuse, New York, December 13, 1865. Svo pamph. Boston.
1866.

Joint Report of the Executive Committee of the National Asso-
ciation of Wool Manufacturers, and of the Executive Committee of
the National Wool-Growers' Association, addressed to the United
States Revenue Commission, February 9, 1866. Svo pamph. Bos-
ton. 1866.

Statement of the Executive Committee of the National Associa-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 12, 1868. 499

tion of Wool Manufacturers, relative to proposed duties on "Wool
and Woollens, addressed to the United States Revenue Commission,
April, 1866. 8vo pamph. Washington. 1866.
Brown {Hon. William If.).

An Historical Sketch of the early Movement in Illinois for the
legalization of Slavery, read at the Annual Meeting of the Chicago
Historical vSociety, December 5, 1864. 8vo pamph. Chicago. 1865.
Buchenau {Dr. Franz).

Morphologische Bemerkungen iiber Lobelia Dortraanna L. 8vo.
pamph. Bremen.
Chasles {Professor 31.).

Traite des Sections Coniques faisant suite au Traite de Georae-
trie Superieure. Premiere Partie. 8vo pamph. Paris. 1865.

Cours de Geometric Superieure. 4to pamph. Paris.

Resume d'une Theorie des Coniques Spheriques Homofocales
et des Surfaces du Second Ordre Homofocales. 4to pamph. Pai'is.
1860.

Proprietes relatives au Deplacement fini quelconque, dans I'es-
pace, d'une figure de forme invariable. 4to pamph. Paris. 1860 -
61.

Sur les six Droites qui peuvent Stre les directions de six Forces
en Equilibre. 4to pamph. Paris. 1861.

Sur la Surface, et sur la Conrbe h. double Courbure, Lieux des
Sommets des Cones du Second Ordre qui divisent harmoniquement
Six ou Sept Segments rectilignes pris sur autant de Droites dans
I'Espace. 4to pamph. Paris. 1861.

Description des Courbes a double Courbure de tons les Ordres sur
les Surfaces reglees du troisieme et du quatrieme Ordre. 4to
pamph. Paris. 1861.

Theorie Analytique des Courbes a double Courbure de tons les
Ordres tracees sur I'Hyperboloide a une Nappe. 4to pamph. Paris.
1861.

Proprietes des Courbes a double Courbure du quatrieme Ordre
provenant de I'lntersection de deux Surfaces du Second Ordre. 4to
pamph. Paris. 1862.

Proprietes des Surfaces devellopables circonscrites k deux Sur-
faces du Second Ordre. 4to pamph. Paris. 1862.

Sur la Decouverte de la Variation Lunaire (Astronomic An-»
cienne). 4to pamph. Paris. 1862.

500 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Letti'e h M. L.. Am. S^dillot, sur la Question de la Variation Lu-
naire decouverte par About- Wefa. 4to pamph. Paris.

Descrijjtion par Points, d'une Maniere Uniforme, des deux Courbes
a double Coirrbure du quatrieme Ordre, de la Courbe a Nceud, et de
la Courbe du troisieme Ordre. 4to pamph. Paris. 1861.

Remarque Historique k I'Occasion de I'Ouvrage de M. Poncelet,
intitule : Applications d' Analyse et de Geometrie, etc. 4to pamph.
Paris. 1862.

Sur I'Ouvrage presente a 1' Academic des Sciences d'un Volume
qui forme la premiere Partie d'un Trait^ des Sections Coniques.
4to pamph. Paris. 1865.

Histoire des Matheraatiques chez les Arabes. 4to pamph. Paris.
1865.

Systemes de Coniques qui satisfont a sept Conditions dans I'Espace.
4to pamph. Paris. 1865.
Cooke (Prof. Josiah P.).

■ On the Heat of Friction. [From Proc. Am. Acad, of Arts &, Sc.
Vol. VI. April, 1865.] 8vo pamph. Cambridge.

On the Projection, of the Spectra of the Metals. [From the Am.
Jour, of Sc. & Arts. Vol. XL. Sept. 1865.] 8vo pamph. New-
Haven.

On the Construction of a Spectroscope with a Number of Prisms,
by which the Angle of Minimum Deviation for any Ray may be ac-
curately measured, and its Position in the Solar Spectrum deter-
mined. [From the Am. Jour, of Sc. & Arts. Vol. XL. Nov. 1865.]
8vo pamph. New Haven.
DoJlen {W.).

Die Zeitbestimmung vermittelst des Tragbaren Durchgangsinstru-
ments im Verticale des Polarsterns. 4to pamph. St. Petersburg.
1863.
The Editors.

The Reader : A Review of Literature, Science, and Art. Vol.
V.-Vn. No. 180. 8vo. London. 1865-66.
Elliott {E. B.).

Report of the United States Revenue Commission. 8vo pamph.
Washington. 1866.
Esthlandische Ritterschafl.

Nachrichten liber Leben und Schriften des Herrn Geheirarathes
Dr. Karl Ernst v. Baer, mitgetheilt von Ihm Selbst. 4to vol. St.
Petersburg. 1865.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 12, 1868. 501

Famille de Vrolih.

Musee Vrolik. Catalogue de la Collection d'Anatomie Humaine,
comparee et Pathologique de MM. Ger et W. Vi'olik .... par J.
L. Dusseau .... 8vo vol. Amsterdam. 1865.
Francis {James B., Civil Engineer).

On the Strength of Cast-Iron Pillars, with Tables for the Use of
Engineers, Architects, and Builders. [Extr. from the Proc. of the
Am. Acad, of Arts & Sciences.] Bvo. New York & London. 1865.
Fraimfeld ( George Ritter von) .

Das Vorkommen des Parasitismus im Thier- und Pflanzen-Reiche.

8vo pamph. Vienna. 1864.

Goidd {B. A.).

U. S. Sanitary Commission. Statistical Bureau. Ages of U. S.
Volunteer Soldiery. 8vo pamph. New York. 1866.
Hager {Albert D.).

Report of the Geology of Vermont: Descriptive, Theoretical,
Economical, and Scenographical. By Edward Hitchcock, LL. D. ;
Edward Hitchcock, Jr., M. D. ; Albert D. Hager, A. M. ; Charles H.
Hitchcock, A. M. In 2 vols. Published under Authority of the
State Legislature, by Albert D. Hager, Proctorsville, Vt. 4to.
Claremont, N. H. 1861.
Haldeman {S. S.).

Tours of a Chess Knight. 16mo vol. Philadelphia. 1864.
Dudley Observatory.

Description of an Automatic Registering and Printing Barometer.
By G. W. Hough, A. M., Dir. of the Dudley Observatory. 8vo
pamph. Albany. 1865.
Jervis { W. P., F. G. S.)

The Mineral Resources of Central Italy ; including a Description
of the Mines and Mai'ble Quarries. [International Exhibition,
1862.] 8vo pamph. London. 1862.

Dublin International Exhibition, 1865. Kingdom of Italy. Of-
ficial Catalogue, Illustrated, and Engravings. Published by Order

of the Royal Italian Commission 2d ed. 8vo vol. Turin.

1865.
Lapham {J. A., LL. D.).

Map of Wisconsin, with Lines showing the Remarkable Effect of
Lake Michigan in elevating the Mean Temperature of January, and
depressing that of July. Milwaukie. 1865.

502 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

Lea {Isaac, LL. D.).

On Leaia Leidyi = Cypricardia Leidyi. Descriptions of Fourteen
New Species of Melanidte, etc. [Extr. from Proc. of Acad, of Nat.
Sc, Philadelphia.] 8vo. Philadelphia. 1866.
Leidy {Joseph, M. D., Prof., etc.).

Cretaceous Reptiles of the United States. [From the Smithsonian
Contributions to Knowledge. Vol. XIV. 1865.] 4to. Philadel-
phia. 1865.
Lesquereux {Leo).

On the Origin and Formation of Prairies. [From Am. Jour, of
Sc. & Arts. 2d Ser. Vol. XXXIX. No. 117.] 8vo. New
-. Haven. 1865.
Loring {Hon. Charles G.).

The Civil War in America : An Address read at the last Meet-
ing of the Manchester Union and Emancipation Society. By Gold-
win Smith. 8vo pamph. London. 1866.
McChesney {J. H., A. M.). '

Plates illustrating in Part the New Species of Fossils from the
Palaeozoic Rocks of the Western States. (Chicago Academy of
Sciences.) Chicago.
Mackall {Louis, M. D.).

An Essay on the Life in Nature. 8vo pamph. Washington. 1855.
An Essay on the Law of Muscular Action. 2d edition, corrected
and enlarged. 8vo pamph. Washington. 1865.

Extract from an Unpublished Essay on Physical Force. Bvo
pamph. Washington. 1865.
Marcou {Jules).

Une Reconnaissance Geologique au Nebraska. [Extr. du Bull,
de, la Soc. Geo!, de France. 2* Ser. Tome XXI. pp. 132.] 8vo.
Paris. 1864.

Notice sur les Gisements des Lentilles Trilobitiferes Taconiques

de la Pointe-Levis, au Canada. Extr. du Bull Tome XXI.

pp. 236. 8vo. Paris. 1864.
Martins {Dr. C. F. Ph. von).

Vortriige iiber die Florenreiche oder Imperia Florae. Separat-
druck aus den Jahresberichten der Bayer. Gartenbau-Gesellschaft
zu Muiichen. 16mo pamph. Munich. 1865.
Mayer {Alfred M.).

Essay on the Velocity of Light. By M. Delaunay of the Institute

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 12, 1868. 503

of France. Translated for the Smithsonian Institution, by Alfred

M. Maj^er, Prof, of Physics 8v o paraph. Washington.

Morgan ( H^nry J.).

The Place British Americans have won in History. A Lecture
delivered at Aylmerj L. C, on Thursday evening, February 22,
1866. 16mo pamph. Ottawa. 1866.
Mueller {Ferdinand, Ph. D., M. D., F. R. S., etc.).

The Vegetation of the Chatham Islands, sketched by Ferdinand
Mueller. 8vo pamph. Melbourne. 1864.

Analytical Drawings of Australian Mosses. Edited by Ferdi-
nand Mueller. I. Fascicle. 8vo pamph. Melbourne. 1864.
Newcomh {Simon, Prof. Math. U. S. N.).

An Investigation of the Orbit of Neptune, with General Tables of
its Motion. [From Smithson. Contrib. to Knowl. 199.] 4to pamph.
Washington, 1866.
Pimentel {Don Francisco).

Memoria sobre las Causas que ban Orighiado la Situacion Actual
de la Raza Indigena de Mexico y Medios de Remediarla. 8vo vol.
Mexico. 1864.

Cuadro Descriptivo y Comparative de las Linguas Indigenas de
Mexico. 2 vols. 8vo. Mexico. 1862-65.

Dictaraen de la Comision nombrada por la Sociedad Mexicana de
Geografia y Estadistica para examinar la Obra intitulada Cuadro
Descriptivo y Comparativo de las Linguas Indigenas de Mexico.
8vo pamph. Mexico. 1863.
Quetelet {Ad.).

Observations des Phenomenes Periodiques des Plantes et des
Animaux pendant les Annees 1861 et 1862. [Extr. du Tome
XXXV. des Mem. Acad. Roy. de Belgique.] 4to pamph. Brussels.

Histoire des Sciences Mathematiques et Physiques chez les Bei-
ges. 8vo vol. Brussels. 1864.

Annuaire de I'Observatoire Royal de Bruxelles. 1865. 32® An-
nee. 18mo vol. Brussels. 1864.

Paroles prononc^es lors des Funerailles de M. Jean Kicky. 8vo
pamph. Brussels. 1864.

Sur les Epoques comparees de la Feuillaisson et de la Coloraison,
etc. 8vo paraph. Brussels. 1864.
Quetelet {Ad.) et Heuschling {Xav.).

Statistique Internationale (Population) publi^e avec la Collabora-

504 PROCEEDIISrGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

tion des Statisticiens Officiels des differents Etats de I'Europe et des
Etats-Unis d'Amerique. Par Ad. Quetelet, President, et Xav,
Heuschling, Secretaire de la Commission Central de Statistique. 4to
vol. Brussels. 1865.
Radcliffe Trustees.

Astronomical and Meteorological Observations made at the Rad-
cliffe Observatory, Oxford, in the Year 1862. Under the Superin-
tendence of the Rev. Robert Main, M. A., Radcliffe Observer. Vol.
XXII. 8vo. Oxford. 1865.
Rice {Hon. Alexander H.).

Message of the President of the United States and accompanying
. Documents to the Two Houses of Congress, at the Commencement
of the Second Session of the 38th Congress. Part I. 4to vol.
Washington. 1864.

Papers relating to Foreign Affairs, accompanying the Annual
Message of the President to the 2d Session 38th Congress. Part
II. 4to vol. Washington. 1865.

Agriculture of the United States in 1860 ; Compiled from the
Original Returns of the Eighth Census, under the Direction of the
Secretary of the Interior. By Joseph C. G. Kennedy, Superin-
tendent of Census. 4to vol. Washington. 1864.
Richthofen {Ferdinand Baron, Dr. Phil.).

The Comstock Lode : Its Character, and the probable Mode of its
Continuance in Depth. Svo pamph. San Francisco. 1866.
Ryan {Matthew).

The Celebrated Theory of Parallels. Demonstration of the Cele-
brated Theorem, Euclid 1, Axiom 12. With Appfendix containing
the Philosophy of the Demonstration, together with the Partial
Refutation of Sir William Hamilton's Philosophy of the Uncon-
ditioned or Infinite. 8vo pamph. Washington. 1866.
Sheppard {John H., A. 31.).

Reminiscences of the Vaughan Family, and more particularly of
Benjamin Vaughan, LL. D. Read before the New England Hist.-
Geneal. Soc, Aug. 2, 1865. Svo pamph. Boston. 1865.
Spofford {A. R.).

Alphabetical Catalogue of the Library of Congress. Authors.
4to vol. Washington. 1864.
Storer {Horatio Rohinson, M.D., etc.).

Successful Removal of the Uterus and both Ovaries by Abdomi-

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 12, 1868. 505

nal Section : The Tumor, Fibro-Cystic, weighing thirty-seven
pounds. (Reprinted from the Am. Jour, of the Med. So. for Jan.
18G6. 8vo pamph. Boston. 1866.
Strachey (Col. Richard., R. E.).

Palaeontology of Niti in the Northern Himalaya ; being Descrip-
tions and Figures of the Palteozoic and Secondary Fossils

Descriptions by J. W. Salter, F. G. S., A. L. S. ; and H. F. Bland-
ford, A. R. S. M., F. G. S. 8vo vol. Calcutta. 1865.
Sumner {Hon. Charles).

Speech on the Bill to maintain the Freedom of the Inhabitants in
the States declared in Insurrection and Rebellion by the Proclama-
tion of the President of July 1, 1862. 8vo pamph. Washington.
1865.

The Equal Rights of All : The great Guarantee and present Ne-
cessity, for the Sake of Security, and to maintain a Republican Gov-
ernment. Speech of Hon. Charles Sumner .... in the U. S. Sen-
ate, Feb. 6 and 7. 1866. 8vo pamph. Washington.

A Republican Form of Government : Our first Duty and the es-
sential Condition of Peace. Bills and Resolutions by Hon. Charles
Sumner of Massachusetts, in the Senate of the United States, at the
opening of Congress, Dec. 4, 1865. 8vo pamph. Washington,
1865.

No Compromise of Human Rights. No Admission in the Consti-
tution of Inequality of Rights or Disfranchisement on Account of
Color. Speech of Hon. Charles Sumner, on the proposed Amend-
ment of the Constitution, fixing the Basis of Repi'esentation. Deliv-
ered in the Senate of the United States, March 7, 1866. 8vo pamph.
Washington. 1866.

Report of the Commissioner of Agriculture (Isaac Newton) for
the Years 1863, 1864. 2 vols. 8vo. Washington. 1863-65.

Letter of the Commissioner of Agriculture (Isaac Newton), trans-
mitting the Report of the Commission appointed under an Act of
Congress . ..." for Investigations to test the Practicability of culti-
vating and preparing Flax or Hemp as a Substitute for Cotton. 8vo
pamph. Washington. 1865.

Report of the Commissioner of Patents (D. P. Holloway) for the
Year 1862, — Arts and Manufactures. 2 vols. 8vo. Washington.
1864-65.

Report of the Joint Committee of the Senate and House of Repre-
VOL. VII. 64

506 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY

sentatives, directed to inquire into the Origin of the Fire by which
the Smithsonian Institution Buildings, and the Valuable Deposits
therein, were, on Tuesday, the 24th of January, in Whole or in Part,
destroyed. Svo pamph. Washington. 1865.
Trembley {J. B., 31. D.).

Annual Meteorological Synopsis for the Year 1865. Observa-
tions taken Three Times per Day, by J. B. Trembley, M. D., in the
City of Toledo, Ohio. 12mo pamph. Toledo.
Tuckerman {Prof. Edward, M. A.).

Lichens of California, Oregon, and the Rocky Mountains, so far
as yet known. With an Appendix. 8vo pamph. Amherst, Mass.
1866.
Vuse {George L., Civ. Eng.).

Orographic Geology ; or, The Origin and Structure of Mountains.
A Review. 8vo vol. Boston. 1866.

Geologie der Schweiz. Von B. Studer, Ph. D., Prof Geoh u. Min.
in Bern. 2 vols. Svo. Bern & Zurich. 1851-53.
Warren {J. 3Iason, M. D.).

Fissure of the Soft and Hard Palate. By J. Mason Warren.
M. D. [Extr. from Trans, of the Am. Med. Assoc] 12mo pamph.
Philadelphia. 1865.

Annales d'Hygiene et de M^decine Legale. Par M.M. Adelon,
Andral, Barruel, D'Arcet, Devergie, etc. 16 vols. 8vo. Paris.
1829-36.

Cours d'Histoire Moderne. (Par M. Guizot, Prof d'Hist. a la
Faculty des Lettres de Paris.)' Histoire de la Civilization en
France depuis la Chute de I'Empix'e Romain jusqu'en 1789. 4 vols.
8vo. Paris. 1829-30.

Cours d'Histoire Moderne .... Histoire Generale de la Civili-
zation en Europe. Svo vol. Paris. 1828.

Conseils de Morale ou Essais sur I'Homme (Par M"" Guizot.)

2 vols. 8vo. Paris. 1828.

Lettres de Famille sur I'Education. (Par M"* Guizot.) 2* ed.
2 vols. 8vo. Paris. 1828.

Congres de V^rone. Guerre d'Espagne. N^gociations : Colo-
nies Espagnoles. (Par M. De Chateaubriand.) 2 vols. 8vo.
Paris. 1838.

Nouvelles Considerations sur les Rapports du Physique et du
Moral de I'Homme. Ouvrage Posthume de M. Maine De Biran.
Public par BI. Cousin. 8vo vol. Paris. 1834.

OF ARTS AND SCIENCES : MAY 12, 1868. 507

Cours de Philosophie. Par M. V. Cousin Histoire de la

Philosophie du Dix-Huitieme Siecle. Tome II. 8vo. Paris.
1829.

De rirritation et de la Folie. Ouvrage dans lequel les Rapports
du Physique et du Moral sont etablis sur les Bases de la Medecine

Physiologique. Par F. J. V. Broussais 2* ed. 2 vols. Svo.

Paris. 1839.

Lettres sur I'Histoire de France pour servir Introduction k I'Etude

de cette Histoire. Par Augustin Thierry 5" ed. 8vo vol.

Paris. 1836.

Melanges Philosophiques. Par Theodore Jouffroy, Membre de
ITnstitut., etc. 8vo vol. Paris. 1833.

Biographie des Hommes Remarquables, du Departement de Seine-
et-Oise depuis le Commencement de la Monarchic jusqu'a ce Jour.
Par MM. E. et H. Daniel, de Vei'sailles. Svo vol. Versailles et
Paris. 1832.

Geologic appliquee aux Arts et k 1' Agriculture, comprenant I'Eu-

serable des Revolutions du Globe Par MM. C. Dorbigny et

A. Gente. Svo vol. Paris.

Annuaire de Chimie ; comprenant les Applications de cette Science
a la Medecine et a la Pharmacie ou Repertoire des Decouvertes et
des Nouveaux Travaux en Chimie faits dans les diverses Parties de
I'Europe. Par E. Millon et J. Reiset, avec la Collaboration de J.
M. Nickles. 1849. Svo vol. Paris. 1849.
Weitenweher (^Dr. W. i?.).

Vortrag des Geschaftsleiters in der General- Versammlung der
Gesellschaft des Museums des Konigreiches Bohmen am 22 Mai,
1864. Svo pamph. Prague. 1864.

Neuere Forschungen des Dr. Carl Schimper in Schwetzingen-
Besprochen in der Sitzung des Vereines "Lotos" in Prag am 6
November, 1863. Von Freihern von Leonhardi. Svo pamph.
Prague. 1863.

Die Pharmacognostiche Sammlung des Apothekers Josef Dittrich

in Prag, Nr. 219 -III. Ausgestelt zur Feier der dritten General

Versammlung des Allgemeinen Oesterrischen Apotheker- Vereines

am 1 und 2 September, 1863, in Prag. Svo pampli. Prague. 1863.

WetheriJl ( Charles M., Ph. Z>., M. D.)

A Brief Sketch of the Modern Theory of Chemical Types. Svo
pamph.

508 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN ACADEMY.

Experiments with the Ammonium Amalgam. [From the Am.
Jour, of Sc. & Arts. Vol. XL. Sept. 1865.] 8vo pamph. New
Haven.

On the Crystallization of Sulphur, and upon the Reaction be-
tween Sulphid of Hydrogen, Ammonia, and Alcohol. [From Am.
Jour, of Sc. & Arts. Vol. XL. Nov. 1865.] 8vo pamph. New
Haven.

On the Crystalline Nature of Glass. [From the Am. Jour, of
Sc. & Arts. Vol. XLL Jan. 1866.] 8vo pamph. New Haven.
Wilder (Burt G., S. B., Late Surg, of both Mass. Vols.)

On the Nephila Pluimipes, or Silk Spider. [From Proc. of Am.
Acad, of Arts & Sciences, Vol. VIL Nov. 1865.] 8vo pamph.

On Morphology and Teleology, especially in the Limbs of Mam-
malia. [From Mem. read before the Boston Soc. of Nat. Hist.
Vol. I. No. 1.] 4to pamph. Cambridge. 1865.
Williams (Henry W., 31. D., etc.).

Recent Advances in Ophthalmic Science. The Boylston Prize
Essay for 1865. 12mo vol. Boston. 1866.
Wilson (Hon. Henry).

Official Army Register for 1865. 8vo pamph. "Washington.
1866.

Message of the President of the United States, and Accompany-
ing Documents, to the Two Houses of Congress, at the Commence-
ment of the 2d Session of the 38th Congress, Parts 1, 2, 3, 4. 4
vols. 8vo. Washington. 1864-65.

Message .... to the Two Houses of Congress .... 1st Session
of the 39th Congress, with the Reports of the Heads of Depart-
ments, and Selections from Accompanying Documents. 8vo vol.
Washington. 1866.

Report of the Secretary of the Treasury (S. P. Chase) on the
State of the Finances for the Year ending June 30, 1863. 8vo vol.
Washington. 1863.
Winhler {T. C).

Mus^e Teyler. Catalogue Systematique de la Collection Paleon-
tologie Deuxieme et Troisieme Livraisons. 2 pamph. 8vo. Har-
lem. 1864-65.

INDEX TO VOL. VII.

A.

Abutilon incanum, 157.

Menziesii, 157.
Acacia Farnesiana, 165.

Koa, 165.
Acaena exigua, 165.
Acanthospermum Brasilium, 173<
Achyrantlies bidentata, 200.
mutica, 200.
splendens, 200.
Achyronychia Cooperi, 331.
Acolium Hawaiense, 232.
Javanicutn, 233.
protrudens, 232.
Acrostichum conforrae, 220.
gorgoneum, 220.
micradenium, 220.
reticulatum, 220.
squamosum, 220.
Actinella Cooperi, 359.
Adenostemma viscosum, 172.
Adiantum Capillus- Veneris, 213.
Aerva sericea, 200.
Agassiz, Prof. L., Communica-
tion from, 236.
Ageratum conyzoides, 172.
Aleurites Moluccana, 203.
Allium occidentals, 390.
Allotropa virgata, 368.
Aloe yuccfefolia, 390.
Alphitonia excelsa, 161.
Alsinidendron trinerve, 156.
Alyxia olivrefbrmis, 197.
Ancistrocarphus filagineus, 356.
Angelica Breweri, 348.

lineariloba, 347.
Annual Variations in Daily Mean

Level of the Ocean, 31.
Anoectochilus Jaubertii, 206.

Anoectochilus Sandwicensis, 206.
Antidesma platyphyllum, 202.
Antirrhinum Bolanderi, 375.

Breweri, 374.

confertiflorum, 372.

Cooperi, 376.

cornutum, 373.

Coulterianum, 374.

cyathiferum, 372.

filipes, 376.

glandulosum, 373.

junceum, 377.

leptaleum, 373.

maurandioides, 376.

Nuttallianum, 374.

ovaliflorum, 375.

speciosum, 376.

strictunx, 375.

vagans, 375.

Virga, 373.
Apium Popei, 343.
Aplopappus acaulis, 353.

apargioides, 354.

Bloomeri, 354.

paniculatus, 354.

AVhitneyi, 353.
Aqueous Lines of Solar Spectrum,

57.
Aquilegia Californica, 328.
Arctostaphylos bicolor, 366.

nummularia, 366.
Arguments, Natural Classification

of, 261.
Argyroxiphium macrocephalum,
175.
Sandwicense, 175.
Arnica paiviflora, 363.
Artemisia Parryi, 361.
Arthonia astroidea, 232.

caribgea, 232.

510

INDEX.

Arthonia cinnabarina, 232.

interducta, 232.

platygraphidea, 232.
Artocarpus incisa, 201.
Aspidium aeuleatum, 216.

carytoideum, 216.

cicutarium, 216.

cyatheoides, 217.

Filix-mas, 217.

glabrum, 217.

globuliferum, 217.

Haleakalense, 216.

Hiidsonianum, 217.

latifrons, 217.

patens, 217.

rubiginosum, 217.

squamigerum, 217.

unitdm, 217.
Asplenium acuminatum, 216.

Adiantum-nigrura, 216.

arborescens, 216.

caudatum, 215.

contiguum, 215.

deparioides, 216.

dissectum, 216.

enatum, 214.

erectum, 215.

falcatura, 215.

fragile, 215.

furcatura, 215.

gemraiferum, 214.

horridum, 215.

Kaulfussii, 214.

lucidum, 214.

Macrasi, 216.

monanthemum, 215.

multisectum, 216.

Nidus, 214.

nitidura, 215.

obtusatum, 214.

polypodioides, 216.

Porietianum, 216.

resectum, 215.
Sandwichianum, 216.

spathulinum, 215.
strictum, 216.
Tricbonianes, 215.
Astelia Menziesiana, 207.

veratroides, 207.
Aster Andersonii, 352.

Aster Chilensis, 352.

divaricatus, 173.

tortifolius, 353.
Astragalus Arthu-Schottii, 337.

Arizonicus, 398.

Bolanderi, 337.

Hornii, 398.

malacup, 336.

Pairaeri, 398.
Audibertia capitata, 387.

B.

Bache, Alexander Dallas,

Obituary Notice of, 312.
Bfeomyces fungoides, 229.
Bal>amorhiza Bolanderi, 356.
Basella rubra, 199.
Batatas acetosa3folia, 195.

edulis, 195.

pentapbyHa, 195.
Batis maritima, 199.
Baumea Meyenii, 209.
Beck, Charles, Obituary Notice

of, 107.
Bee, Notes on Cells of, 68.
Biatora aurigera, 229.

cyrtelloides, 229.

rubella, 229.

triseptata, 229.
Bidens chrysantbemoides, 174.

Hawaienses, 174.

pilosa, 174.

Sandwicensis, 174.
BiGELOW, Dr. -J., Communication

from, 237.
Bobea brevipes, 170.

elatior, 170.
Bcehmeria stipularis, 201.
Bcerhaavia diffusa, 198.
Bolandra Californica, 341.
Bonamia Menziesii, 196.
Boole's Calculus of Logic, 250.
Botbriospermum tenellum, 195.
Botrycbium subbifoliatum, 221.
Brickellia incana, 350.
Brigbamia insignis, 185.
Brodiiiia coccinea, 389.
Brousonettia papyrifera, 201.

INDEX.

511

Broussaisia arguta, 1 65.
Bryant, Dr. Hknry, Obituary

Notice of, 304.
Bryanthus Aleuticus, 368.

Breweri, 367.

empetriformis, 367.

glanduliflorus, 368.

intermedius, 367.

taxifolius, 368.
Buellia atroalba, 229.

parasema, 229.
Burriellia lanosa, 357.

maritima, 358.
Byronia Sandwicensis, 161.

c.

Cacalia Nardosmia, 361.
Caisalpinia Bonduc, 164.

Kavaiensis, 164.
Cajanus Indicus, 164.
Calais Bolanderi, 365.

glauca, 364.
Calicium tuba^forme, 233.
California, New Plants of, 327.
Calopliyllum inophyllum, 156.
Calycadenia mollis, 360.
Campanula linnffiifolia, 366.

prenanthoides, 366.
Canavalia galatea, 164.
Canna Inclica, 206.
Cannon, Comparative Sti'ength of,

412.
Canthium lucidum, 169.
Cardamine hirsuta, 149.
Cardiospermum Halicacabum,162.
Carex athrostachya, 393.

bifida, 394.

Bolanderi, 393.

cinnamomea, 396.

Commersoniana, 210.

festiva, 211.

glaucodea, 395.

gynodynama, 394.

luzulina, 395.

Meyenii, 211.

nuptialis, 211.

Prescottiana, 211.

Sartwelliana, 396.

senta, 394.

Carex silicea, 393.
straminea, 393.
Wahuensis, 211.
Whitneyi, 394.
Carum Gairdneri, 344.

Kellogii, 344.
Cassia Covesii, 399.

Gaudichaudii, 165.
Cassytba filiformis, 199.
Centaurea Melitensis, 176.
Charpentiera ovata, 200.
Chenopodium album, 199.
ambrosioides, 199.
murale, 199.
Sandwicheum, 199.
Child, Prof. F. J., Communica-
tion from, 57.
Chiodecton perplexum, 231.
Cibotium Cbamissoi, 212.
glaucum, 211.
Menziesii, 212.
Cicuta Californica, 344.
Cladium leptostachyum, 209.
Cladonia angustata, 229.
fimbriata, 228.
furcata, 228.
gracilis, 228.
macilenta, 229.
muscigena, 229.
pyxidata, 228.
rangiferina, 228.
squamosa, 228.
Claoxylon Sandwicensis, 203.
Clark, Alvan, Communication

from, 247.
Classical and Utilitarian Studies,

237.
Cleome Sandwicensis, 149.

Sandwichiana, 149.
Cleomella obtusifolia, 329. .
Clermontia grandiflora, 184.

parviflora, 185.
Cocculus Ferrandianus, 149.
Cocos nucifera, 204.
CoUinsia corymbosa, 378.
solitaria, 378.
Torreyi, 378.
Colocasia antiquorum, 205.
Colubrina Asiatica, 161.
oppositifolia, 161.

512

INDEX.

Commelyna Cayennensis, 206.
Conjectural Solution of Classifi-

catory System of Relation-
ship, 436.
Connarus Kavaiensis, 162.
Conyza Coulteri, 355.
Cooke, Prof. J, P., Communi-
cations from, 57, 132.
Coprosma ernodeoides, 169.

foliosa, 169.

longifolia, 169.

Menziesii, 169.

pubens, 169.

rhynchocarpa, 169.
Cordia subcordata, 194.
Cordylantlius canescens, 383.

capitatus, 382.

filifolius, 382.

laxiflorus, 383.

maritimus, 383.

mollis, 384.

pilosus, 382.

tenuis, 383.

Wrightii, 382.
Cordyline terminalis, 207.
Coreopsis cosmoides, 173.

Macraji, 173.

macrocarpa, 173.

Maviensis, 173.

Menziesii, 173.

micrantha, 174.
Coreothrogyne spathulata, 351.
Cousin, Victor, Obituary Notice

of, 319.
Crotalaria Assaraica, 163.

longirostrata, 163.

sericea, 1 63.
Cucurbita maxima, 166.
Cuphea Balsamona, 166.
Cuscuta Sandwichiana, 196.
Cyanea aspera, 183.

arboreseens, 183.

citruUifolia, 184.

Grimesiana, 183.

leptostegia, 184.

lobata, 183.

superba, 184.

tritomantha, 184.
Cyathodes imbiieata, 188.

Tameiameiai, 188.

Cyperus auriciilatus, 208.

brunneus, 208.

cjespitosus, 208.

caricifolius, 208.

Hawaiensis, 208.

Kunthianus, 208.

mucronatus, 208.

multiceps, 208.

paniculatus, 208.

pennatus, 208.

phleoides, 208.

polystachyus, 208.

Prescottianus, 208.

strigosus, 208.

trachysanthos, 208.

viscosus, 208.
Cypripedium Californicum, 389.
Cyrtandra cordifolia, 189.

Garnottiana, 190.

grandiflora, 189.

laxiflora, 190.

Lessoniana, 190.

Macrtei, 191.

Menziesii, 191.

cenobarba, 189.

paludosa, 190.

Pickeriiigii, 189.

platyphylla, 189.

triflora, 189.
Cystopteris Douglasii, 213.

D.

Dalea divaricata, 335.

Parryi, 397.
Daucus pusillus, 168.
Delissea acuminata, 179.

ambigua, 182.

angustifolia, 179.

arborea, 180.

asplenifolia, 182»

calycina, 181.

clermontioides, 178.

coriacea, 178.

fissa, 182.

hirtella, 179.

Mannii, 182.

mollis, 179.

obtusa, 179.

INDEX.

613

Delissea pilosa, 182.

pinnatifida, 181.

piimatiloba, 178.

platjphylla, 180.

racemosa, 181.

rhytido-perma, 180.

subcordata, 180.

undulata, 180.
Deparia prolifera, 212.
Desmodium Sandvvicense, 163.

triflorum, 163.
Deweya arguta, 342.

Hartwegi, 342.

Kellogii, 343.
Dianella odorata, 207.
Dioclea violacea, 164.
Dioscorea pentaphylla, 206.
Dirina repanda, 226.
Dispersion of Ray of Light re-
fracted at any Number of
Plane Surfaces, 478.
Dodongea eriocarpa, 162.

viscosa, 162.
Dolichos Lablab, 164.
Doodia Kunthiana, 214.
Douglasia montana, 371.
Draba Douglasii, 328.
Dracfena aurea, 207.
Draperia systyla, 401.
Dro^era longifolia, 165.
Dubautia laxa, 175.

paleata, 175.

plantaginea, 175.
DuPERRY, Louis Isidore, Obit-
uary Notice of, 131.
Dynamometer, 65.

E.

Eclipta Alba, 173.
Ela^ocarpus bilidus, 158.
Elections of Officers, 12, 31, 133,

325.
Eleocharis Bolanderi, 392.
obtusa, 209.
palustris, 209.
Eliot, Prof. C. W., Communica-
tion from, 65.
Encke, John Francis, Obituary
Notice of, 123.
VOL. VII. 65

Erigeron Canadense, 173.

supplex, 353.
Erioderma nnguigerura, 225.
Eriogonum spergulinum, 389.
Erythra^a sabfeoides, 196.
Eiythrina monosperma, 163.
Eugenia Malaccensis, 166.

Sandwicensis, 166.
Eunanus bicolor, 381.

Coulteri, 381.
Euphorbia clusitefolia, 201.

cordata, 202.

Helisdopia, 202.

Hool^eri, 202.

multiformis, 202.

pilulifera, 202.

Remyi, 201.
Eurya Sandwicensis, 156.
Euxohis lineatus, 200.
Exocarpus Gaudichaudii, 198.

F.

Fellows, Associate, elected, 43,
84, 131, 237, 325, 416,
433.

Fellows, Foreign Hon. elected, 43,
84, 134, 237, 325, 435,
436.

Fellows, Resident, elected, 43, 84,
134,236,243,325,416.

Ferrel, William, Communica-
tions from, 2, 31.

Ferula Californica, 348.
dissecta, 348.
multifida, 348.

Fimbristylis cymosa, 209.
umbellato-capitata, 209.

FiTZPATRiCK, Rt. Rev. John
Bernard, Obituary Notice
of, 116.

Fleurya interrupta, 200.

Focal Properties of Quadrics,
39.

Formulae of interpolation, 2.

Fragaria Chilensis, 165.

Franseria eriocentra, 355.
tenuifolia, 173.

Freycinetia arborea, 204.

514

INDEX.

G.

Gabnia Beecheyi, 210.

Gaudichaiulii, 209.

globosa, 210.
Galium acutissimum, 350.

Bolanderi, 350.

pubens, 350.
Gardenia Brijihamii, 171.

Remyi, 171.
Garrya buxifolia, 349.

Fremontii, 349.
Gastonia Oahuensis, 169.
Gayopbtura strictum, 340.
Geranium arboi'eum, 158.

cuneatum, 158.

muhiflorum, 158.

ovatifolium, 158.
Gleicbenia dicbotoraa, 211.

emarginata, 211.
• glabra, 211.

glauca, 211.

Owbybeusis, 211.
Glypbis Achariana, 231.

heteroclita, 231.
Gnaphalium luteo-albura, 176.
Gossypium drynarioides, 157.

religiosum, 157.

tomentosura, 156.
Gouania orbicularis, 162.

vitifolia, 162.
Gould, Dr. Augustus A., Obit-
uary Notice of, 300.
Gouldia Sandwicensis, 171.
Graham, Col. James D., Obitu-
ary Notice of, 122.
Grapbis dendritica, 230.

discurrens, 230.

elegans, 230.

frumentaria, 231.

fulgurata, 230.

grammitis, 231.

oscitans, 231.

patellula, 230.

radiata, 231.

rigida, 230.

scripta, 230,

tumulata, 231.
Gray, Prof. Asa, Communica-
tions from, 12, 327.

Guazuma toraentosa, 157.
Guettardella Sandwicensis, 170.
Gunnera petaloidea, 165.
Gyalecta lutea, 227.
Gymnogramme Javanica, 220.

H.

Habenaria Thurberi, 389.
Hall, Jonathan Patten, Obit-
uary Notice of, 118.
Hamilton, Sir William Row-
an, Obituary Notice of,
125.
Hawaiian Plants, 143.
Hayward, J AMES, Obituary No-

- tice of, 298.
Hedera Gaudichaudii, 168.

platyphylla, 168.
Helenium Bolanderi, 358.
Heliothropium anomalum, 195.

Curassavicum, 195.
Helmia bulbifera, 206.
Hemicarjiha occidentalis, 391.
Henry, Prof., Communication

from, 235.
Heptapleurum dipyrenum, 168.

Kavaiense, 168.
Herpestis Monniera, 191.
Hesperocallis uudulata, 391.
Hesperomannia arborescens, 176.
Heterotbecium Domingense, 229.

leucoxanthura, 229.

Taitense, 229.
Hibiscus, Arnottianus, 157.

Brackenridgei, 157.

tiliaceus, 157.

Youngianus, 157.
Hieracium Bolanderi, 365.
Hillebi'andia Sandwicensis, 167.
Hill, G. W., Communications

from, 238i 242.
Holopeira concbophylla, 235.
Hooker, William Jackson,

Obituary Notice of, 128.
Horkelia Bolanderi, 338.
HoRSFORD, Prof. E. N., 235.
Hulsea brevifolia, 359.

heterochroma, 359.

INDEX.

515

Hunt, T. S., Communication from,

238.
Hydroctyle interrupta, 167.
Hydrocarbon-Naptha, 1.
Hymenophyllum lanceolatum, 220.

obtusum, 220.

recurvum, 220.

Indigofera Anil, 163.
Ipomaja Bona-nox, 195.

Forsteri, 195.

insularis, 195.

palmata, 195.

Pes-capra3, 195.

Turpethum, 195.
Isodendrion laurifolium, 150.

longifolium, 150.

pyrifolium, 150.
Ivesia santolinoides, 339.

tridentata, 338.

unguiculata, 339.

Jackson, Dr. C. T., Communi-
cation from, 434.

Jacquemontia Sandvvicensis, 196.

Jenks, Rev. Williabi, Obituary
Notice of, 305.

Joinvillea aseendens, 208.

Jussia^a villosa, 166.

K.

Kadua acuminata, 172.
centranthoides, 172.
Cookiana, 172.
cordata, 173.
elatior, 172.
glaucifolia, 172.
glomerata, 172.
grandis, 172.
laxiflora, 171.
Menziesiana, 172.
parvula, 172.

Kadua petiolata, 172.
Kneeland, Dr., Communication

from, 237.
KyUingia monocephala, 209.

Labordea fagrseoidea, 196.

hirtella, 196.

membranacea, 197.

pallida, 196.

tinifolia, 197.
Lagenaria vulgaris, 166.
Lagenophora Maviensis, 172.
Language of Gower's Confessio

Amantis, 57.
Lathyrus sulphureus, 399.

Torreyi, 337.
Layia chrysantliemoides, 360.

pentachgeta, 360.
Lecanactis premnea, 229.
Lecanora glaucoma, 226.

granifera, 226.

pallescens, 226.

punicea, 226.

subfusca, 226.
Lecidea trachonoides, 229.
Lepidium dictyotum, 329.

Owahiense, 149.

serra, 149.
Leptogium chloromelum, 234.

phyllocarpum, 234.

saturninum, 234. .

tremelloides, 234.
Leptosyne maritima, 358.

Newberryi, 358.
Lepturus Bolanderi, 401.
Lessingia leptoclada, 351.

microcephala, 351.

tenuis, 351.
Letters received, 57, 83, 97, 98,

101, 102, 235, 237, 238, 242,

243, 412, 433, 483.
Leucothoe Davisiae, 400.
Lewisia brachycalyx, 400.
Library Committee, 324.
Library, Donations to, from

Abbot, Henry L., 497.

Academic des Sciences de

516

INDEX.

Library, Donations to, from

rinstitut Imperiale de
France, 18, 493.

Academy, Royal Charles Leo-
pold Dutch, 19, 489.

Academy, Royal Irish, 17.

Agassiz, Alexander, 26, 498.

Airy, George B., 498.

Albany Institute, 14.

American Antiquarian Soci-
ety, 14, 484.

American Journal of Science
and Arts, 14, 484.

American Oriental Society,
485.

American Philosophical Soci-
ety, 15, 484.

Amsterdam, Royal Academy
of Sciences of, 21, 488.

Atkinson, W. P., 498.

Authors, 498.

Barnes, Joseph K., 486.

Barrande, Joachim, 498.

Batavia, Natuurkundige Ver-
ceniging in Nederlansch In-
die, 489.

Batavia Society of Arts and
Sciences, 489.

Beaumont, Elie de, 29.

Berlin, Royal Prussian Acad-
emy of Sciences of, 19,
489.

Berne, Natural History Soci-
ety, 18, 492.

Bigelow, E. B., 498.

Bologna, Academy of Sci-
ences of Institute of, 24,
483.

Bond, Prof. Geo. P., 24.

Bonn, University of, 19, 489.

Boston Athenteum, 14, 484.

Boston Public Library, 484.

Boston Society of Natural
History, 484.

Britisli Association for Ad-
vancement of Science, 16,
494.

Brooklyn Mercantile Library
Association, 485.

Brown, W. H., 497.

Library, Donations to, from

Briinn, Natural History So-
ciety, 19, 492.

Brussels, Royal Academy of
Sciences of, 21, 492.

Brussels, Royal Observatory,
21.

Bryant, Henry, 25.

Buchenan, Dr. Fi'antz, 499,

Bureau of Navigation, 486.

Bureau de la Reserche Geo-
logique de la Tuede, 487.

Cadiz, Observatory at, 24,
494.

Caen, Imperial Academy of
Sciences of, 18, 493.
' California Academy of Nat-
ural Sciences, 487.

Cambridge, Observatory at,
14, 484.

Capellini, Prof. Giovanni, 31.

Chasles, Prof 'M., 499.

Cherbourg Imperial Society
of Natural Sciences, 19.

Chicago Academy of Scien-
ces, 486.

Chicago Historical Society,
487.

Christiana Physiographiske
Foreningi, 488.

Christiana Royal University,
22,487.

Cincinnati Young Men's Li-
brary Association, 486.

Columbia College, 15.

Cooke, Prof. J. P., 500.

Copenhagen Royal Danish
Academy, 22.

Copenhagen Royal Society of
Northern Antiquaries, 22.

Dantzig Natural Histoiy So-
ciety, 489.

Darmstadt Society of Geology
and Applied Sciences, 489.

Dartmouth College, 14.

Dattini Giambattista, 31.

Department of State, 15, 486.

Dollen, W., 500.

Dresden Natural History So-
ciety, 19.

INDEX.

517

Library, Donations to," from

Dublin, Provost of Trinity
College, 494."

Dublin Quarterly Journal of
Science, 495.

Dublin, Royal Society of, 17.

Dudley Observatory, 501.

Edinburgh, Royal Society of,
17, 495.

Editors, 500.

Elliot, E. B., 27, 500.

Emden, Natural History So-
ciety of, 19, 489.

Essex Institute, 14, 484.

Esthlandische Ritterschaft,
500.

Familie de Vrolik,501.

Francis, J. B., 501.

Frankfort, Geological and
Statistical Society, 490.

Frankfort, Zoological Society,
19, 489.

Fraunfeld, George Ritter
Von, 30, 501.

Freiburg Natural Histoi-y
Societv, 19, 490.

Fries, Elias, 29.

Geneva, Society of Physics
and Natural History, 18,
492.

Gorlitz Upper Hessian So-
ciety, 19, 490.

Gottingen Royal Society of
Sciences, 19, 490.

Gould, B. A., 501.

Graham, J. D., 25.

Great Britain, Royal Institu-
tion of, 16.

Greenwich Royal Observa-
tory, 495.

Haarlem Dutch Society of
Sciences, 22, 489.

Hager, Albert D., 501.

Haldeman, Prof. J. J., 28.

Haldeman, S. S., 501.

Halle Natural History So-
ciety, 19.

Haskins, George F., 27.

Haughton, Samuel, 28.

Herschel, Sir J. W. F., 28.

Library, Donations to, from

Hock, M., and A. C. Oude-
raan, 30.

Hunt, T. Sterry, 28.

India, Government of, 18.

Jena Society of Medicine and
Natural Sciences, 490.

Jervis, W. P., 501.

Kneeland, Samuel, 25.

Konigsberg Royal Physical
and Economical Society,
19, 490.

Kupffer, A. T., 30.

Laphan, J. A., 501.

Lea, Isaac, 502.

Leidy, Piof. J., 502.

Leipsic Royal Society of Sci-
ences, 19, 490.

Lesquereux, Leo, 502.

Library of Congress, 486.

Liliarzik, Dr. F. P., 30.

Lisbon Royal Academy of
Sciences, 494. •

Liverpool Literary and Phil-
osophical Society, 496.

Logan, Sir W. E., 28.

London Chemical Society,
17, 496.

Lotidon Geological Society,

16, 496.

London Linnean Society, 16,

497.
London Royal Society, 1 6,497.
London Statistical Society,

497.
London Geological Society,

17, 497.

Loring, Hon. Charles G., 502.
Lyons, Imperial Academy of

Sciences, 493.
Lyons, Imperial Society of

Agriculture, 493.
McChesney, J. H., 502.
Mackall, Louis, 502.
Madrid, Royal Academy of

Sciences, 23, 494.
Maine et Ivoire, Academic

Society, 18.
Malmgren, Anders Johan,

29.

518

INDEX.

Library, Donations to, from

Mannheiga Natural History
Society. 20.

Marcou, Jules, 502.

Martins, Dr. C. F., 502.

Massachusetts Historical So-
ciety, 14, 483.

Massachusetts Institute of
Technology, 483.

Massachusetts, State of, 13,
483.

Mayer, Alfred M., 502.

Morgan, Henry J., 503.

Moscow Imperial Society of
Naturalists, 22, 488.

Mueller, Ferdinand, 503.

MuUer, Ferdinand, 30.

Munich Royal Academy, 20,
490.

Museum Comparative Zool-
ogy, 14, 484.

Mussey, Reuben D., 24.

Nassau Society Natural His-
tory, 492.

Naples Royal Society, 24.

Naval Department, 15.

Netherlands, Government of,
21, 489.

Netherlands, Royal Metero-
logical Society, 22, 489.

Neuchatel Society of Natural
Sciences, 18.

Newcomb, Prof. S., 503.

New York Lyceum of Natu-
ral History, 14, 484.

New York Mercantile Li-
brary Association, 485.

New York, Society Promotion
of Useful Arts, in State
of, 14.

Normandy Linnean Society,
18,493.

Niinberg Natural History So-
ciety, 20.

Oft'enbacli Natural History
Society, 20.

Palermo Institute of Tech-
nology, 493.

Paris Geographical Society,
18, 493.

Library, Donations to, from

Philadelphia Academy of Nat-
ural Sciences, 15, 484.

Philadelphia College of Phar-
macy, 15, 484.

Philadelphia Mercantile Li-
brary Society, 485.

Pimental, Don Francisco, 503.

Portland Natural History
Society, 14.

Prague Royal Observatory,
20, 491.

Prague Royal Bohemian So-
ciety of Sciences, 491.

Pulkowa, Observatory at,
488.

Putnam, F. W., and A. S.
Packard. 27. •

Quetelet, Ad., 29, 503.

Quetelet, Ern, 29.

RadclifFe Trustees, 504.

Ramsay, Prof. A. C, 28.

Rand, Geo. C, and A. Avery,
27.

Reader, Editors of, 29.

Regel, Dr. E., 29.

Regensburg Zoological and
Mineralogical Society, 20,
491.

Rensellaer Polytechnic Insti-
tute, of Troy, N. Y., 485.

Rhees, Wra. J., 27.

Rhineland and Westphalia
(Prussian), Natural His-
tory Society of, 19, 489.

Rice, Hon. Alex. H., 27, 504.

Richthofen, Dr. Ferdinand B.,
504.

Riga, Natural History Socie-
ty of, 22.

Royal Geological Society of
Ireland, 494.

Royal Irish Academy, 494.

Russiai Adminstration of,
Mines, 22, 488.

Ryan, Matthew, 504.

St. Gall Society Physical
Sciences, 18, 492.

St. Louis Academy of Sci-
ences, 487.

INDEX.

519

Library, Donations to, from

St. Petersburg Imperial Acad-
emy of Sciences, 22, 488.

San Francisco Mercantile Li-
brary Association, 15, 487.

Saussure, H. De, 30. *

Shedd, J. H., and Wm. Ed-
son, 28.

Sheppard, John H., 504.

Shiirtleff, Nat. B., 24.

Sicily Royal Institute for
Advancement Agriculture,
Arts, and Manufactures, 24.

Smithsonian Institution, 15,
485.

Smith, Admiral W. H., and
Dr. Lee, 28.

Society of Arts, Manufac-
tures, and Commerce, 17,
497.

Society, Royal Astronomical,
16, 497.

Society, Royal Horticultural,
16, 497.

SpofFord, A. R., 25, 504.

Steenstrup, Japetus Sm., 29.

Stettin, Entomological Socie-
ty, 20,491.

Stockholm, Royal Swedish
Academy of Sciences, 23,
487.

Storer, H. R., 504.

Strachey, ■ Colonel Richard,
505.

Sullivant, Wm. S., 26.

Sumner, Hon. Charles, 26, 505.

Swiss Natural History Socie-
ty, 18, 492.

Thurston, Geo. H., 28.

Toronto Magnetic Observa-
tory, 15.

Trembley, J. B., 506.

Tuckerman, Prof. E., 506.

United States Naval Observa-
tory, 486.

Upsal Royal Society of
Science, 23, 487.

Utrecht, Observatory of, 22.

Vienna Royal Academy of
Sciences, 20, 491.

Library, Donations to, from

Vienna Royal Geographical

Society, 21, 492.
Vienna Royal Zoological and

Botanic Society, 21, 492.
Vose, George L., 506.
Warren, J. Mason, 24, 506.
Washington, Patent Office at,

486.
Weitenweber, Di-. W. R.,

507.
Wetherill, Charles M., 507.
Whitney, J. D., 25.
Wilder, Burt G., 508.
Williams, Henry W., 508.
Wilson, Hon. Henry, 508.
Winkler, T. C, 508.
Winlock, Prof. J., 26.
Ligusticum apiifolium, 347.
montanum, 347.
scopulorum, 347.
Linear Algebra, 237.
Lind^oea erecta, 214.
falcata, 214.
pumila, 214.
LiNLET, John, Obituary Notice of,

129.
Linosyris Bolanderi, 354.
Linum digynum, 334.
micranthum, 333.
spergulinum, 333.
Liparis Hawaiensis, 207.
Lipochajta australis, 174.
calycosa, 174.
heterophylla, 174.
integrifblia, 174.
lavarum, 174.
micrantha, 174.
Remyi, 175.
subcordata, 174.
succulenta, 174.
tenuifblia, 174.
Livermore, George, Obituary No-
tice of. 111.
Lobelia Gaudichaudii, 187.
macrostachys, 186.
neriifolia, 187.
Logical Comprehension and Ex-
tension, 416.
Logic of Mathematics, 402.

520

INDEX.

Lonicera Breweri, 349.
LovEKiNG, Prof., Communica-
tions from, 102, 132, 135,
236, 321, 413.
Lubbock, Sir John W., Obituary

Notice of, 124.
Lunar Theory, 238.
Lupin us Breweri, 334.

Danaus, 335.

Lyalli, 334.
Luzula campestris, 208.
Lycium Andersonii, 388.

Cooperi, 318.

Sandwicense, 191.
Lycopodium cernuum, 222.

erubescens, 222.

fastigiatum, 222.

Haleakala?, 222.

nutans, 221.

pachystachyon, 221.

Phlegmaria, 221.

polytrichoides, 221.

varium, 221.

venustulum, 222,

volubile, 222.
Lysimachia Hillebrandi, 188.

lineariloba, 188.
Lythrum maritimum, 166.

M.

Maba Hillebrandii, 188.

Sandwicensis, 188.
Madaria elegans, 361.
Malvastrum rotundiflorura, 333.

tricuspidatum, 157.
Manihot utilissima, 203.
Mann, Horace, Communication

from, 143.
Marsilea villoma, 222.
Marrattia alata, 221.
Maurandia Barclayana, 377.

erubescens, 377.

scandens, 377.

semperflorens, 377.

Wislizeni, 377.
Melicope barbigera, 159.

cinerea, 159.

elliptica, 159.

Melicope spathulata, 159.
Menodora spinescens, 388.
Metrosideros macropus, 166.

polymorpha, 166.

rugosa, 166.
Microlepia hirta, 212.

Mannii, 212.

polypodioides, 212.

tenuifolia, 212.
Mimulus Bolanderi, 381.

inconspicuus, 380.

montioides, 380.
Mineralogy, Object and Method

of, 238.
Mohavea viscida, 378.
Monardella Breweri, 386.

leucocephala, 385.
Monolepis spathulata, 389.
Moon's Motion, Inequalities in,

242.
Morgan, Lewis H., Communica-
tion from, 436.
Morinda citrifolia, 170.
Morus pendulina, 201,
Mucuna gigantea, 1 64.

urens, 194.
MussEY, Dr. Reuben Durrand,

Obituary Notice of, 299.
Myoporum Sandwicense, 194.
Myrrhis Bolanderi. 346.

occidentalis, 346.
Myrsine Gaudichaudii, 188.

Lessertiana, 168.

Sandwicensis, 188.

N.

Najas major, 205.
Nama Sandwicensis, 195.
Naptha from Rangoon Petroleum,

1.
Narthecium ossifragrum, 391.
Nascent State, 238.
Nephila Plumipes, 52.
Nephroica Ferrandiana, 234.

ovalifolia, 234.
Nephrolepis exaltata, 217.
Nephroma Ifevigatum, 225.

tomentosum, 225.

INDEX.

521

Neraudia melastomwfolia, 201.

sericea, 201.
Nertera depressa, 169.
Normandina Jungermanna3, 233.
Nothocestrum breviflorura, 191.

latifoliura, 191.

longifolium, 191.

subcordatum, 191.
NynipluBa tuberosa, 12.

O.

Ochrosia Sandwicensis, 197.
Odontoloma Macra3na, 212.
CEnothera Whitneyi, 340, 400.
Olea Sandwicensis, 197.
Oliver, J. E., Communication

from, 39.
Opegrapba atra, 230.

lentiginosa, 230.

subcentrifuga, 229.
Ophioglossum concinnum, 221.

ellipticum, 221.

pendulum, 221.
Optical Method of Studying Sound,

413.
Oreobolus furcatus, 210.
Oreodaphne, 199.
Oreosciadium acaule, 343.
Organic Elementary Analysis for
Substances containing Chlo-
rine, 84'.
Orthocarpus pallescens, 384.
Osteomeles anthyllidifoHa, 165.
Oxalis corniculata, 158.

Martiana, 158.

P.

Paederia foetida, 169.
Pandanus verus, 204.
Pannaria lurida, 225.

molybdeea, 225.

nigrocincta, 226.

pannosa, 225.

rubiginosa, 226.
Papaya vulgaris, 167.
Parmelia caperata, 224.

cervicornis, 224.
VOL. VII. 66

Parmelia conspersa, 224.
laevigata, 224.
perforata, 224.
perlata, 224.
pertusa, 224.
tiliacea, 224.
Paryella filifolia, 397.
Pedieularis attollens, 384.

semibarbata, 385.
Peirce, Prof., Communication

from, 237.
Peirce, C. S., Communications

from, 250, 261, 402, 416.
Pelea anisata, 159.
auriculjefolia, 158.
clusiififolia, 158.
Kavaiensis, 158.
oblongifolia, 159.
rotundifolia, 159.
Sandwicensis, 159.
sapotajfolia, 158.
volcanica, 159.
Pellsea ternifolia, 213.
Peltigera polydactyla, 225.

rufescens, 225.
Pentstemon Bridgesii, 379.

Palmeri, 379.
Peperomia Gaudichaudii, 203.
hypoleuca, 204.
insularum, 204.
latifolia, 204.
leptostachya, 204.
Macrfeana, 204.
membranacea, 203.
pachyphylla, 204.
pallida, 203.
reflexa, 204.
Sandwicensis, 204.
Perrottetia Sandwicensis, 161.
Pertusaria leioplaca, 227.
velata, 227.
Wulfenii, 227.
Petalostemon filiosus, 336.
Peucedanum Euryptei'a, 348.
Phacelia hydi-ophylloides, 400.
Phalacroseris Bolanderi, 364.
Phaseolus semierectus, 164.

Truxillensis, 164.
Phegopteris crinalis, 218.
Honolulensis, 218.

522

INDEX.

Phegopteris Keraudreniana, 218.

microdendron, 218.

procera, 218.

Sandwicensis, 218.

unidentata, 218.
Phelipa3a erianthera, 372.

pinetorum, 371.

tuberosa, 371.
Phyllanthus Niuri, 203.

Sandwicensis, 203.
Phyllostegia brevidens, 192.

clavata, 192.

floribunda, 193.

glabra, 192.

grandiflora, 192.

haplostachya, 192.

hirsuta, 192.

parviflora, 192.

racemosa, 192.

stachyoides, 192.

truncata, 192.

vestita, 192.
Physalis Peruviana, 191.
Physcia picta, 224.

speciosa, 224.

stellaris, 224.
Phytolacca Bogotensis, 198.
Pickering, Edward C, Com-
munication from, 478.
Pilea peploides, 201.
Pirapinella apiodora, 345.
Piper methysticura, 203.
Pipturus albidus, 201.
Pisonia excelsa, 198.

grandis, 197.
Pittosporum acuminatum, 152.

caulitlorum, 151.

confertiflorum, 150.

glabrum, 151.

spathulatum, 151.

terminalioides, 151.
Placodium albidellum, 226.

aurantiacum, 226.

Brebissonii, 226.

cinnabarium, 226.

spadiceum, 226.
Plantago hirtella, 371.

major, 189.

pachyphylla, 189.

princeps, 188.

Platydesma campanulata, 160.
Plectranthus parviflorus, 192.
Pleuriscopora fimbriolata, 369.
Plumbago Zeylanica, 189.
Podosciadium Bolanderi, 346.

Californicum, 346.
Pogogyne serpylloides, 386.
Polygonum glabrum, 198.
Polypodium abietinum, 219.

Adenophorus, 218.

atropunctatum, 219.

Hooked, 218.

hymenophylloides, 219.

pellucidum, 219.

pseudo-grammitis, 218.

sarmentosum, 218.

serrulatum, 218.

Spectrum, 219.

subpinnatifidum, 218.

tamariscinum, 219.

tripinnatifidum, 219.
Portulaca sclerocarpa, 156.

villosa, 156.
Potamogeton fluitans, 205.

Gaudichaudii, 205.

pauciflorus, 206.
Potentilla depauperafa, 399.
Poterium- officinale, 340.
Potter, Rt. Rev. Alonzo,

Obituary Notice of, 120.
Primula suffrutescens, 371.
Pritchardia Gaudichaudii, 204.

Martii, 204.
Priva aspera, 194.
Prunus Andersonii, 337.
Psathyrotes annua, 363.
Psidium Guajava, 166.
Psilotum complanatum, 221.

triquetrum, 221.
Psychotria grandiflora, 170.

hexandra, 170.
Pteris aquilina, 213.

cretica, 213.

decipiens, 213.

decora, 213.

excelsa, 213.

irregularis, 213.
Ptilotus Sandwicensis, 200.
Pyrenula astroideum, 234.

Cinchonae, 233.

INDEX.

623

Pyrenula diluta, 234.

leucostoma, 234.

marginata, 234.

nitida, 234.

planiuscula, 233.

planorbis, 234,
Pjxine cocoes, 224.

R.

Raillardia arborea, 176.

ciliolata, 175.

Hillebrandi, 175.

latifolia, 175.

laxiflora, 175.

linearis, 176.

Menziesii, 176.

montana, 176.

platyphylla, 176.

scabra, 175.

struthioloides, 176.
Ramalina calicaris, 223.

lasvigata, 223.

Manni, 223.
Ranunculus alismagfolius, 327.

Andersonii, 327.

Hawaiensis, 149.

hystriculus, 328.

Maviensis, 149.
Rauwolfia Sandwicensis, 197.
Reports of Council, 103, 298.
Report of Treasurer, 324.
Reynoldsia Sandwicensis, 169.
Rhus semialatum, 162.
Rhyncospora lavarum, 209.

thyrsoidea, 209.
Richardsonia scabra, 169.
Ricinus communis, 203.
Riddellia Cooperi, 358.
Right Ascensions observed at Har-
vard College Observatory,
1862-1865,37.
Rigiopappus leptocladus, 357.
Rinodina mamillana, 226.

sophodes, 226.
Rollandia crispa, 177.

Humboldtiana, 177.

lanceolata, 177.
Rubus Hawaiensis, 165.

Rubus Macrgei, 165.
Rumex giganteus, 198.

longitblius, 198.
Rumford Committee Reports, 84,

135, 243, 324, 327.
Rumford Medal Presentations, 44,

244.
Ruppia maritima, 205.

S.

Sadleria cyatheoides, 213.

pallida, 213.

squarrosa, 213.
Safford, T. H., Communication

from, 37.
Sanicula Sandwicensis, 168.
Santalum Freycinetianum, 198.

pyrularium, 198.
Sapota Sandwicensis, 188.
Scsevola Chamissoniana, 187.

coriacea, 187.

Gaudichaudii, 187.

glabra, 187.

mollis, 187.

sericea, 187.
Schiedea amplexicaulis, 153.

diffusa, 153.

globosa, 154.

Hookeri, 154.

ligustrina, 154.

Menziesii, 154.

Nuttallii, 153.

Remyi, 154.

spergulina, 154.

stellarioides, 153.

viscosa, 155.
Schizaea australis, 221.
Scirpus carinatus, 392.

criniger, 392.

maritimus, 209.

pygmseus, 392.

riparius, 209.
Scleria testacea, 210.
Scoparia dulcis, 191.
Scutellaria Bolanderi, 387.
Sedum obtusatum, 342.
Selaginella arbuscula, 222.

deflexa, 222.

524

INDEX.

Selaginella Menziesii, 222.

Springii, 222.
Senebiera didjma, 149.
Senecio Bolancleri. 362.

ClarkiaiiDS, 362.

Mendocinensis, 362

Sandwicensis, 176.
Sesbania grandiflora, 163.

tomentosa, 163.
Sicjos cucumerinus, 166.

macrophyllus, 166.

microcarpus, 1 67.

pachycarpus, 166.
Sida fallax, 157.

Meyeniana, 157.

Sertura, 157.

rhombifolia, 157.
Sidalcea malachroides, 332.

vitifolia, 332.
Silene Bolanderi, 330.

incompta, 330.

lanceolata, 152.

strutliioloides, 152.
Siphula Pickeringii, 223.
Sisyrinchium acre, 206.
Smilax anceps, 206.

Sandwicensis, 206.
Solanum aculeatissimum, 191.

incompletura, 191.

oleraceum, 191.

Nelsoni, 191.

puberulum, 191.

Sandwicense, 191.
Sonchus asper, 176.
Sophora chrysophylla, 164.
Sparks, Jared, Obituai-y Notice

of, 103.
Sphacele hastata, 192.
vStachys albens, 387.
Stachytarpha dichotoma, 194.
Stenogyne angustifolia, 193.

calaminthoides, 193.

cordata, 193.

crenata, 194.

diffusa, 194.

macrantha, 193.

microphylla, 194.

parviflora, 193.

purpurea, 193.

rotundifolia, 193.

Stenogyne rugosa, 193.

scrophularioides, 193.

sessilis, 193.
Stereocaulon mixtura, 228.

pilophoroides, 228.

ramulosum, 228.
Sticta Ambavillaria, 225.

argyracea, 225.

aurata, 225.

crenulata, 225.

crocata, 225.

mix, 225.

Mougeotiana, 225.

orygmtea, 225.

quercizans, 225.
Storer, F. H., Communication

from, 1.
Sti'aussia Hawaiensis, 170.

Kaduana, 170.

Mariniana, 170.
Strongylodon lucidum, 163.
SwETT, Colonel Samuel, Obit-
uary Notice of, 308.

Tacca pinnatifida, 205.
Talinum pygmjeum, 332.
Tephrosia piscatoria, 163.
Tetraplasandra Hawaiensis, 169.
Tlieloschistes chrysophthalmus,

224.
Thelotrema Auberianum, 228.

Bahianum, 228.

calvescens, 227.

cavatum, 227.

lepadodes, 228.

leucomelanum, 228.

piluliferum, 227.

terebratum, 227.
Tonella collinsioides, 378.
Touchardia latifblia, 206.
Ti'adescantia floribunda, 206.
Tread well, Daniel, Communi-
cations from, 135, 412.
Tribulus cistoides, 158.
TricLomanes Draytonianum, 220.

meifolium, 220.

parvulum, 220.

INDEX.

625

Trichomanes radicans, 220.
Trichostema laxum, 387.
Trifolium barbigerum, 335.

Bolanderi, 335.
Trypethelium pallescens, 233.

U.

Umbilicaria vellea, 224.
Unciiiia Lindleyana, 211.
Urceolaria actinostoma, 227.

cinei'0-ca3sia, 227.
Urera glabra, 200.

Sandwicensis, 200.
Urtica Sandwicensis, 200.
Usneu barbata, 223.

V.

Vaccinium penduliflorum, 187.

reticulatum, 187.
Vapor Densities, Improved Ap-
pai-atus for Determination
of, 99.
Veratrum fimbriatum, 391.
Verbena Bonariensis, 194.
Vicentia angustifolia, 209.
Vicia Menziesii, 163.
Vigna lutea, 164.

Oahuensis, 164.

Sandwicensis, 164.
Vinca rosea, 197.
Viola Chamissoniana, 150.

Kaviensis, 150,

Maviensis, 150.
Viscum moniliforme, 169.
Vitex trifolia, 194.
Vittadinia arenaria, 173.

Chamissonis, 173.

consanguinea, 173.

conyzoides, 173.

humilis, 173.

Remyi, 173.

Vittadinia tenerrima, 173.
Vittaria rigida, 220.

W.

Waltheria Americina, 157.

pyrolfefolia, 157.
Warren, C. M., Communications

from, 1, 84, 99, 483.
Washburn, Prof. Emory, Com-
munication from, 97.
Wayland, Francis, Obituary

Notice of, 118.
Whewell, Rev. William, Obit-
uary Notice of, 126.
Wickstroemia buxifolia, 199.
elongata, 199.
foetida, 199.
phillyreajfolia, 199.
Sandwicensis, 199.
IJva-ursi, 199.
Wilder, Burt G., Communica-
tion from, 52.
Wilkesia gymnoxiphium, 175.
Worcester, Joseph Emerson,

Obituary Notice of, 112.
Wyethia ovata, 357.
Wyman, Prof. J., Communication
from, 68.

X.

Xylosma Hawaiense, 150.

Y.

Youngia Japonica, 176.

Zanthoxylum dipetalum, 160.

Kaviense, 160.

Maviense, 160.
Zingiber Zerumbet, 206.

Camliridge : Printed by Welch, Bigelow, and Company.

">. ty /

MBL/WHOI LIBRARY

UH 1A7P b